Workshop_Manual Workshop Manual

User Manual: Workshop_Manual

Open the PDF directly: View PDF .
Page Count: 1187

Download
Open PDF In Browser	View PDF

Mazda6
Workshop
Manual
FOREWORD
This manual contains on-vehicle service
and diagnosis for the Mazda6.
For proper repair and maintenance,
a thorough familiarization with this manual
is important, and it should always be kept
in a handy place for quick and easy
reference.
All the contents of this manual, including
drawings and specifications, are the latest
available at the time of printing.
As modifications affecting repair or
maintenance occur, relevant information
supplementary to this volume will be made
available at Mazda dealers. This manual
should be kept up-to-date.
Mazda Motor Corporation reserves
the right to alter the specifications and
contents of this manual without obligation
or advance notice.
All rights reserved. No part of this book
may be reproduced or used in any form or
by any means, electronic or
mechanicalincluding photocopying and
recording and the use of any kind of
information storage and retrieval
systemwithout permission in writing.
Mazda Motor Corporation
HIROSHIMA, JAPAN
APPLICATION:
This manual is applicable to vehicles
beginning with the Vehicle Identification
Numbers (VIN), and related materials shown
on the following page.

CONTENTS
Title

Section

General Information

Engine

Lubrication System

Cooling System

Fuel and Emission Control Systems

Engine Electrical System

Clutch

Manual Transaxle

Automatic Transaxle

Front and Rear Axles

Steering System

Braking System

Suspension

Body

Body Electrical System

Heater and Air Conditioner Systems

Technical Data

Special Tools

VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBERS (VIN)
U.K. specs.
JMZ GG12820#
JMZ GG14320#
JMZ GG14820#
JMZ GG12F20#
JMZ GG12F50#
JMZ GG14F20#
JMZ GG14F50#

100001
100001
100001
100001
100001
100001
100001

European (L.H.D.) specs.
JMZ GG1232✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG1282✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG1432✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG1482✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG12F2✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG12F5✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG14F2✻
✻# 100001
JMZ GG14F5✻
✻# 100001
GCC specs.
JM7 GG32F✻✻
✻✻#
✻✻
JM7 GG34F✻✻
✻✻#
✻✻
JM7 GG42F✻✻
✻✻#
✻✻
JM7 GG44F✻✻
✻✻#
✻✻

100001
100001
100001
100001

RELATED MATERIALS
Mazda6 Training Manual
(European (L.H.D.), GCC Specs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Engine Workshop Manual L8, LF, L3 . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Manual Transaxle Workshop Manual
G35MR . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transaxle Workshop Manual
FN4AEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Automatic Transaxle Workshop Manual
Supplement FN4AEL . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mazda6 Wiring Diagram
(European (L.H.D.), GCC specs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mazda6 Wirinig Diagram
(U.K. specs.) . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . . .
Mazda6 Bodyshop Manual
(European (L.H.D. U.K.), GCC specs.) . . . . . . . . . . . .
* : Indicates the printing location
E: Europe
0: Japan

33591*02C
17311*02C
17321*02C
16231098E
17461*02C
55391*02C
55401*02C
33601*02C

WARNING

Servicing a vehicle can be dangerous. If you have not received
service-related training, the risks of injury, property damage, and
failure of servicing increase. The recommended servicing procedures
for the vehicle in this workshop manual were developed with
Mazda-trained technicians in mind. This manual may be useful to
non-Mazda trained technicians, but a technician with our
service-related training and experience will be at less risk when
performing service operations. However, all users of this manual are
expected to at least know general safety procedures.
This manual contains "Warnings" and "Cautions" applicable to risks
not normally encountered in a general technician's experience.
They should be followed to reduce the risk of injury and the risk that
improper service or repair may damage the vehicle or render it unsafe.
It is also important to understand that the "Warnings" and "Cautions"
are not exhaustive. It is impossible to warn of all the hazardous
consequences that might result from failure to follow the procedures.
The procedures recommended and described in this manual are
effective methods of performing service and repair. Some require tools
specifically designed for a specific purpose. Persons using procedures
and tools which are not recommended by Mazda Motor Corporation
must satisfy themselves thoroughly that neither personal safety nor
safety of the vehicle will be jeopardized.
The contents of this manual, including drawings and specifications, are
the latest available at the time of printing, and Mazda Motor Corporation
reserves the right to change the vehicle designs and alter the contents
of this manual without notice and without incurring obligation.
Parts should be replaced with genuine Mazda replacement parts or
with parts which match the quality of genuine Mazda replacement
parts. Persons using replacement parts of lesser quality than that of
genuine Mazda replacement parts must satisfy themselves thoroughly
that neither personal safety nor safety of the vehicle will be
jeopardized.
Mazda Motor Corporation is not responsible for any problems which
may arise from the use of this manual. The cause of such problems
includes but is not limited to insufficient service-related training, use of
improper tools, use of replacement parts of lesser quality than that of
genuine Mazda replacement parts, or not being aware of any revision
of this manual.

GENERAL INFORMATION

G
I

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL ..............................GI-2
RANGE OF TOPICS ...........................................GI-2
SERVICE PROCEDURE ....................................GI-2
SYMBOLS...........................................................GI-4
ADVISORY MESSAGES ....................................GI-4
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE ................GI-5
UNITS ..................................................................GI-11
UNITS ...............................................................GI-11
FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES .......................GI-12
PROTECTION OF VEHICLE ............................GI-12
PREPARATION OF TOOLS AND
MEASURING EQUIPMENT...........................GI-12
SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS .............................GI-12
OIL LEAKAGE INSPECTION ...........................GI-12
DISCONNECTION OF THE NEGATIVE
BATTERY CABLE..........................................GI-13
REMOVAL OF PARTS .....................................GI-13
DISASSEMBLY.................................................GI-13
INSPECTION DURING REMOVAL,
DISASSEMBLY..............................................GI-14
ARRANGEMENT OF PARTS ...........................GI-14
CLEANING OF PARTS.....................................GI-14
REASSEMBLY..................................................GI-14
ADJUSTMENT..................................................GI-15
RUBBER PARTS AND TUBING .......................GI-15
HOSE CLAMPS ................................................GI-16
TORQUE FORMULAS......................................GI-16
VISE..................................................................GI-16
DYNAMOMETER..............................................GI-17
SST ...................................................................GI-17

INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM ............... GI-17
INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM ............. GI-17
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM...................................... GI-18
ELECTRICAL PARTS ...................................... GI-18
CONNECTORS................................................ GI-18
ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING
TOOLS .......................................................... GI-22
PRECAUTIONS BEFORE WELDING.............. GI-23
JACKING POSITIONS ,VEHICLE LIFT
(2 SUPPORTS),SAFETY STANDS
(RIGID RACK) POSITIONS ................................ GI-24
JACKING POSITIONS, VEHICLE LIFT
(2 SUPPORTS) AND SAFETY STAND
(RIGID RACK) POSITIONS .......................... GI-24
TOWING ............................................................. GI-26
TOWING .......................................................... GI-26
TOWING HOOKS ............................................ GI-26
IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATIONS ........ GI-28
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION
NUMBER(VIN) .............................................. GI-28
ENGINE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER ............. GI-28
NEW STANDARDS ............................................ GI-29
NEW STANDARDS.......................................... GI-29
ABBREVIATIONS .............................................. GI-31
ABBREVIATIONS ............................................ GI-31
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION........................... GI-32
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION........................ GI-32
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE .......................... GI-33
SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE ........... GI-33

GI1

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
RANGE OF TOPICS

A6E201000001W01

• This manual contains procedures for performing all required service operations. The procedures are divided
into the following five basic operations:
Removal/Installation
Disassembly/Assembly
Replacement
Inspection
Adjustment
• Simple operations which can be performed easily just by looking at the vehicle (i.e., removal/installation of
parts, jacking, vehicle lifting, cleaning of parts and visual inspection) have been omitted.

End Of Sie

SERVICE PROCEDURE

A6E201000001W02

Inspection, adjustment
• Inspection and adjustment procedures are divided into steps. Important points regarding the location and
contents of the procedures are explained in detail and shown in the illustrations.

XME2010001

GI2

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Repair procedure
1. Most repair operations begin with an overview illustration. It identifies the components, shows how the parts fit
together and describes visual part inspection. However, only removal/installation procedures that need to be
performed methodically have written instructions.
2. Expendable parts, tightening torques and symbols for oil, grease, and sealant are shown in the overview
illustration. In addition, symbols indicating parts requiring the use of special service tools or equivalent are also
shown.
3. Procedure steps are numbered and the part that is the main point of that procedure is shown in the illustration
with the corresponding number. Occasionally, there are important points or additional information concerning a
procedure. Refer to this information when servicing the related part.

XME2010010

End Of Sie

GI3

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
SYMBOLS

A6E201000001W03

• There are eight symbols indicating oil, grease, fluids, sealant, and SST or equivalent use. These symbols show
application points or use of these materials during service.
Symbol

Meaning

Kind

Apply oil

New appropriate
engine oil or gear
oil

Apply brake fluid

New appropriate
brake fluid

Apply automatic
transaxle/
transmission fluid

New appropriate
automatic
transaxle/
transmission fluid

Apply grease

Appropriate
grease

Apply sealant

Appropriate
sealant

Apply petroleum
jelly

Appropriate
petroleum jelly

Replace part

O-ring, gasket,
etc.

Use SST or
equivalent

Appropriate tools

End Of Sie

ADVISORY MESSAGES

A6E201000001W04

• You'll find several Warnings, Cautions, Notes, Specifications and Upper and Lower Limits in this manual.
Warning
• A Warning indicates a situation in which serious injury or death could result if the warning is ignored.
Caution
• A Caution indicates a situation in which damage to the vehicle or parts could result if the caution is ignored.
Note
• A Note provides added information that will help you to complete a particular procedure.
Specification
• The values indicate the allowable range when performing inspections or adjustments.
Upper and lower limits
• The values indicate the upper and lower limits that must not be exceeded when performing inspections or
adjustments.

End Of Sie

GI4

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
TROUBLESHOOTING PROCEDURE
Basic flow of troubleshooting

A6E201000001W05

XME2010002

DTC troubleshooting flow (on-board diagnostic)
• Diagnostic trouble codes (DTCs) are important hints for repairing malfunctions that are difficult to simulate.
Perform the specific DTC diagnostic inspection to quickly and accurately diagnose the malfunction.
• The on-board diagnostic function is used during inspection. When a DTC is shown specifying the cause of a
malfunction, continue the diagnostic inspection according to the items indicated by the on-board diagnostic
function.
Diagnostic index
• The diagnostic index lists the symptoms of specific malfunctions. Select the symptoms related or most closely
relating to the malfunction.
Quick diagnosis chart (If mentioned)
• The quick diagnosis chart lists diagnosis and inspection procedures to be performed specifically relating to the
cause of the malfunction.
Symptom troubleshooting
• Symptom troubleshooting quickly determines the location of the malfunction according to symptom type.

GI5

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Procedures for Use
Using the basic inspection (section K)
• Perform the basic inspection procedure before symptom troubleshooting.
• Perform each step in the order shown.
• The reference column lists the location of the detailed procedure for each basic inspection.
• Although inspections and adjustments are performed according to the reference column procedures, if the
cause of the malfunction is discovered during basic inspection, continue the procedures as indicated in the
remarks column.

XME2010003

GI6

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Using the DTC troubleshooting flow
• DTC troubleshooting flow shows diagnostic procedures, inspection methods, and proper action to take for each
DTC.

XME2010004

GI7

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Using the diagnosis index
• The symptoms of the malfunctions are listed in the diagnostic index for symptom troubleshooting.
• The exact malfunction symptoms can be selected by following the index.

XME2010006

GI8

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Using the quick diagnosis chart
• The chart lists the relation between the symptom and the cause of the malfunction.
• The chart is effective in quickly narrowing down the relation between symptom and cause of the malfunction. It
also specifies the area of the common cause when multiple malfunction symptoms occur.
• The appropriate diagnostic inspection relating to malfunction cause as specified by the symptoms can be
selected by looking down the diagnostic inspection column of the chart.

XME2010011

GI9

HOW TO USE THIS MANUAL
Using the symptom troubleshooting
• Symptom troubleshooting shows diagnostic procedures, inspection methods, and proper action to take for
each trouble symptom.

XME2010007

End Of Sie

GI10

UNITS

UNITS
GI

UNITS
Electrical current
Electric power
Electric resistance
Electric voltage
Length
Negative pressure

Positive pressure

Torque

Volume

Weight

A6E201200002W01

A (ampere)
W (watt)
Ω (ohm)
V (volt)
mm (millimeter)
in (inch)
kPa (kilo pascal)
mmHg (millimeters of mercury)
inHg (inches of mercury)
kPa (kilo pascal)
kgf/cm2 (kilogram force per square
centimeter)
psi (pounds per square inch)
N·m (Newton meter)
kgf·m (kilogram force meter)
kgf·cm (kilogram force centimeter)
ft·lbf (foot pound force)
in·lbf (inch pound force)
L (liter)
US qt (U.S. quart)
Imp qt (Imperial quart)
ml (milliliter)
cc (cubic centimeter)
cu in (cubic inch)
fl oz (fluid ounce)
g (gram)
oz (ounce)

Conversion to SI Units (Système International d'Unités)
• All numerical values in this manual are based on SI units. Numbers shown in conventional units are converted
from these values.
Rounding Off
• Converted values are rounded off to the same number of places as the SI unit value. For example, if the SI unit
value is 17.2 and the value after conversion is 37.84, the converted value will be rounded off to 37.8.
Upper and Lower Limits
• When the data indicates upper and lower limits, the converted values are rounded down if the SI unit value is
an upper limit and rounded up if the SI unit value is a lower limit. Therefore, converted values for the same SI
unit value may differ after conversion. For example, consider 2.7 kgf/cm2 in the following specifications:
210260 kPa {2.12.7 kgf/cm2, 3038 psi}
270310 kPa {2.73.2 kgf/cm2, 3945 psi}
• The actual converted values for 2.7 kgf/cm2 are 264 kPa and 38.4 psi. In the first specification, 2.7 is used as
an upper limit, so the converted values are rounded down to 260 and 38. In the second specification, 2.7 is
used as a lower limit, so the converted values are rounded up to 270 and 39.

End Of Sie

GI11

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES
PROTECTION OF VEHICLE
• Always be sure to cover fenders, seats and floor
areas before starting work.

End Of Sie

PREPARATION OF TOOLS AND MEASURING EQUIPMENT
• Be sure that all necessary tools and measuring
equipment are available before starting any work.

A6E201400004W01

X3U000WAG

A6E201400004W02

X3U000WAH

End Of Sie

SPECIAL SERVICE TOOLS
• Use special service tools or equivalent when they
are required.

A6E201400004W03

X3U000WAJ

End Of Sie

OIL LEAKAGE INSPECTION
• Use either of the following procedures to identify the type of oil that is leaking:

A6E201400004W04

Using UV Light (Black Light)
1. Remove on the engine or transaxle.
Note
• Referring to the fluorescent dye instruction manual, mix the specified amount of dye into the engine oil or
ATF (or transaxle oil).
2. Pour the fluorescent dye into the engine oil or ATF (or transaxle oil).
3. Allow the engine to run for 30 minutes.
4. Inspect for dye leakage by irradiating with UV light (black light), and identify the type of oil that is leaking.

GI12

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES
5. If no dye leakage is found, allow the engine to run for another 30 minutes or drive the vehicle then reinspect.
6. Find where the oil is leaking from, then make necessary repairs.
Note
• To determine whether it is necessary to replace the oil after adding the fluorescent dye, refer to the
fluorescent dye instruction manual.
Not Using UV Light (Black Light)
1. Gather some of the leaking oil using an absorbent white tissue.
2. Take samples of engine oil and ATF (or transaxle oil), both from the dipstick, and place them next to the leaked
oil already gathered on the tissue.
3. Compare the appearance and smell, and identify
the type of oil that is leaking.
4. Remove any oil on the engine or transaxle/
transmission.
5. Allow the engine to run for 30 minutes.
6. Check the area where the oil is leaking, then
make necessary repairs.

XME2014003

End Of Sie

DISCONNECTION OF THE NEGATIVE BATTERY CABLE

A6E201400004W05

• Before beginning any work, turn the ignition switch to LOCK position, then disconnect the negative battery
cable and wait for more than 1 minute to allow the backup power supply of the SAS unit to deplete its stored
power. Disconnecting the battery cable will delete the memories of the clock, audio, and DTCs, etc. Therefore,
it is necessary to verify those memories before disconnecting the cable.
• If the battery had been disconnected during vehicle maintenance or for other reasons, the window will not fully
close automatically.Carry out the power window main switch initial setting. (See S23 INITIAL SETTING.)

End Of Sie

REMOVAL OF PARTS
• While correcting a problem, also try to determine
its cause. Begin work only after first learning
which parts and subassemblies must be removed
and disassembled for replacement or repair. After
removing the part, plug all holes and ports to
prevent foreign material from entering.

A6E201400004W06

X3U000WAK

End Of Sie

DISASSEMBLY
• If the disassembly procedure is complex,
requiring many parts to be disassembled, all parts
should be marked in a place that will not affect
their performance or external appearance and
identified so that reassembly can be performed
easily and efficiently.

A6E201400004W07

X3U000WAL

End Of Sie

GI13

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES
INSPECTION DURING REMOVAL, DISASSEMBLY
• When removed, each part should be carefully
inspected for malfunction, deformation, damage,
and other problems.

A6E201400004W08

X3U000WAM

End Of Sie

ARRANGEMENT OF PARTS
• All disassembled parts should be carefully
arranged for reassembly.
• Be sure to separate or otherwise identify the parts
to be replaced from those that will be reused.

A6E201400004W09

X3U000WAN

End Of Sie

CLEANING OF PARTS
• All parts to be reused should be carefully and
thoroughly cleaned in the appropriate method.

A6E201400004W10

Warning
• Using compressed air can cause dirt and
other particles to fly out causing injury to
the eyes. Wear protective eye wear
whenever using compressed air.

WGIWXX0030J

End Of Sie

REASSEMBLY
• Standard values, such as torques and certain
adjustments, must be strictly observed in the
reassembly of all parts.

A6E201400004W11

WGIWXX0031J

GI14

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES
• If removed, these parts should be replaced with new ones:
Oil seals
Gaskets
O-rings
Lockwashers
Cotter pins
Nylon nuts
• Depending on location:
Sealant and gaskets, or both, should be applied to specified locations. When sealant is applied, parts
should be installed before sealant hardens to prevent leakage.
Oil should be applied to the moving components of parts.
Specified oil or grease should be applied at the prescribed locations (such as oil seals) before reassembly.

WGIWXX0032J

End Of Sie

ADJUSTMENT
• Use suitable gauges and/or testers when making
adjustments.

A6E201400004W12

X3U000WAS

End Of Sie

RUBBER PARTS AND TUBING
• Prevent gasoline or oil from getting on rubber
parts or tubing.

A6E201400004W13

WGIWXX0034E

End Of Sie

GI15

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES
HOSE CLAMPS
• When reinstalling, position the hose clamp in the
original location on the hose and squeeze the
clamp lightly with large pliers to ensure a good fit.

A6E201400004W14

WGIWXX0035J

End Of Sie

TORQUE FORMULAS
• When using a torque wrench-SST or equivalent
combination, the written torque must be
recalculated due to the extra length that the SST
or equivalent adds to the torque wrench.
Recalculate the torque using the following
formulas. Choose the formula that applies to you.
Torque Unit
N·m
kgf·m
kgf·cm
ft·lbf
in·lbf

Formula
N·m × [L/(L+A)]
kgf·m × [L/(L+A)]
kgf·cm × [L/(L+A)]
ft·lbf × [L/(L+A)]
in·lbf × [L/(L+A)]

A6E201400004W19

WGIWXX0036E

A : The length of the SST past the torque wrench drive
L : The length of the torque wrench

End Of Sie
VISE

• When using a vise, put protective plates in the jaws of the vise to prevent damage to parts.

A6E201400004W16

X3U000WAW

End Of Sie

GI16

FUNDAMENTAL PROCEDURES, INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM
DYNAMOMETER

A6E201400004W17

• When inspecting and servicing the power train on the dynamometer or speed meter tester, pay attention to the
following:
Place a fan, preferably a vehicle-speed proportional type, in front of the vehicle.
Make sure the vehicle is in a facility with an exhaust gas ventilation system.
Since the rear bumper might deform from the heat, cool the rear with a fan. (Surface of the bumper must be
below 70 degrees.)
Keep the area around the vehicle uncluttered so that heat does not build up.
Watch the water temperature gauge and dont overheat the engine.
Avoid added load to the engine and maintain normal driving conditions as much as possible.

Note
• When only the front wheels are being rotated on the dynamometer, the ABS warning light could illuminate.
If the ABS warning light illuminates, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position, then turn it back to the
ON position, run the vehicle at 10km/h and check that the ABS warning light goes off. (In this case, a DTC
will be stored in the memory. To delete this data from the memory, follow the procedure for deleting DTCs
(ABS) from memory.) (See P6 PRECAUTION (BRAKES) ) to turn off the warning light.)

End Of Sie
SST

A6E201400004W18

• Some Ford SST or equivalent are used as SSTs necessary for engine repair. Note that these SSTs are
marked with Ford SST numbers.
• Note that a Ford SST number is written together with a corresponding Mazda SST number as shown below.
Example (section ST)

XME2014002

Example (except section ST)End Of Sie

XME2014001

INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM
INSTALLATION OF RADIO SYSTEM

A6E201600005W01

If a radio system is installed improperly or if a high-powered type is used, the CIS and other systems may be
affected. When the vehicle is to be equipped with a radio, observe the following precautions:
• Install the antenna at the farthest point from control modules.
• Install the antenna feeder as far as possible from the control module harnesses.
• Ensure that the antenna and feeder are properly adjusted.
• Do not install a high-powered radio system.

End Of Sie

GI17

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
ELECTRICAL PARTS
Battery cable
• Before disconnecting connectors or removing
electrical parts, disconnect the negative battery
cable.

A6E201700006W01

WGIWXX0007E

Wiring Harness
• To remove the wiring harness from the clip in the
engine room, pry up the hook of the clip using a
flathead screwdriver.

X3U000WBU

End Of Sie

CONNECTORS
Data link connector
• Insert the probe into the terminal when
connecting a jumper wire to the data link
connector.

A6E201700006W02

Caution
• Inserting a jumper wire probe into the
data link connector terminal may damage
the terminal.

X3U000WAY

Disconnecting connectors
• When disconnecting connector, grasp the
connectors, not the wires.

WGIWXX0041E

GI18

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
• Connectors can be disconnected by pressing or
pulling the lock lever as shown.

WGIWXX0042E

Locking connector
• When locking connectors, listen for a click
indicating they are securely locked.

X3U000WB1

Inspection
• When a tester is used to inspect for continuity or
measuring voltage, insert the tester probe from
the wiring harness side.

X3U000WB2

• Inspect the terminals of waterproof connectors
from the connector side since they cannot be
accessed from the wiring harness side.
Caution
• To prevent damage to the terminal, wrap
a thin wire around the tester probe before
inserting into terminal.

WGIWXX0045E

GI19

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Terminals
Inspection
• Pull lightly on individual wires to verify that they
are secured in the terminal.

X3U000WB4

Replacement
• Use the appropriate tools to remove a terminal as
shown. When installing a terminal, be sure to
insert it until it locks securely.
• Insert a thin piece of metal from the terminal side
of the connector and with the terminal locking tab
pressed down, pull the terminal out from the
connector.

X3U000WB5

Sensors, Switches, and Relays
• Handle sensors, switches, and relays carefully.
Do not drop them or strike them against other
objects.

X3U000WB6

Wiring Harness
Wiring color codes
• Two-color wires are indicated by a two-color code symbol.
• The first letter indicates the base color of the wire and the second the color of the stripe.
CODE
B
BR
G
GY
L
LB
LG

GI20

COLOR
Black
Brown
Green
Gray
Blue
Light Blue
Light Green

CODE
O
P
R
V
W
Y

COLOR
Orange
Pink
Red
Violet
White
Yellow

X3U000WB7

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Fuse
Replacement
• When replacing a fuse, be sure to replace it with
one of the same capacity. If a fuse fails again, the
circuit probably has a short and the wiring should
be inspected.
• Be sure the negative battery terminal is
disconnected before replacing a main fuse.

YMU000WA1

• When replacing a pullout fuse, use the fuse
puller.

YMU000WAK

Direction of View for Connector
Part-side connector
Direction of view is from the terminal side.
* : Part names are shown only when there are
multiple connector drawings.

WGIWXX0100E

GI21

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Vehicle-harness-side connector
Direction of view is from the harness side.
* : Part names are shown only when there are
multiple connector drawings.

WGIWXX0101E

Other
Because vehicle-harness-side connectors, such as
the DLC 2, have to be viewed from the terminal side,
the direction of view is from the terminal side.

WGIWXX0102E

End Of Sie

ELECTRICAL TROUBLESHOOTING TOOLS
Jumper wire
• A jumper wire is used to create a temporary
circuit. Connect the jumper wire between the
terminals of a circuit to bypass a switch.

A6E201700006W03

Caution
• Do not connect a jumper wire from the
power source line to a body ground. This
may cause burning or other damage to
wiring harnesses or electronic
components.
X3U000WBB

GI22

ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Voltmeter
• The DC voltmeter is used to measure circuit
voltage. A voltmeter with a range of 15 V or more
is used by connecting the positive (+) probe (red
lead wire) to the point where voltage will be
measured and the negative (-) probe (black lead
wire) to a body ground.

X3U000WBC

Ohmmeter
• The ohmmeter is used to measure the resistance
between two points in a circuit and to inspect for
continuity and short circuits.
Caution
• Do not connect the ohmmeter to any
circuit where voltage is applied. This will
damage the ohmmeter.

YMU000WAL

End Of Sie

PRECAUTIONS BEFORE WELDING

A6E201700006W04

Vehicles have various electrical parts. To protect the parts from excessive current generated when welding, be
sure to perform the following procedure.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the battery cables.

WGIWXX0007E

3. Securely connect the welding machine to the
ground near the welding area.
4. Cover the peripheral parts of the welding area to
protect them from weld spatter.

WGIWXX0008E

End Of Sie

GI23

JACKING POSITIONS, VEHICLE LIFT (2 SUPPORTS),
SAFETY STANDS (RIGID RACK) POSITIONS

JACKING POSITIONS ,VEHICLE LIFT (2 SUPPORTS),
SAFETY STANDS (RIGID RACK) POSITIONS
JACKING POSITIONS, VEHICLE LIFT (2 SUPPORTS) AND SAFETY STAND (RIGID RACK) POSITIONS
Jacking Positions

A6E202200019W01

Warning
• Improperly jacking a vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the jack and cause serious
injury. Use only the correct front and rear jacking points and block the wheels.
• Use safety stands to support the vehicle after it has been lifted.
Front
• At the jacking plate of the engine support member.
Rear
• At the center of torsion beam axle.
Vehicle Lift Positions
Front and rear
Warning
• Unstably lifting a vehicle is dangerous. The vehicle can slip off the lift and cause serious injury
and/or vehicle damage. Make sure that the vehicle is on the lift horizontally by adjusting the height
of support at the end of the arm of the lift.
Safety Stand Positions
Front
• Both sides of the vehicle, on side sills.
Rear
• Both sides of the vehicle, on side sills.

GI24

JACKING POSITIONS ,VEHICLE LIFT (2 SUPPORTS), SAFETY STANDS (RIGID
Jacking positions, vehicle lift (2 supports) and safety stand (rigid rack) positions view

A6E2021W001

End Of Sie

GI25

TOWING

TOWING
TOWING

A6E202400009W01

• Proper lifting and towing are necessary to prevent damage to the vehicle. Government and local laws must be
followed.
• A towed vehicle should have its front wheels off the ground. If excessive damage or other conditions prevent
this, use wheel dollies.
• When towing with the rear wheels on the ground, release the parking brake.
Caution
• Do not tow the vehicle backward with
driving wheels on the ground. This may
cause internal damage to the transaxle.

YMU000WA3

Caution
• Do not tow with sling-type equipment.
This could damage your vehicle. Use
wheel-lift or flatbed equipment.

YMU000WA4

Caution
• Do not use the hook loops under the
front and rear for towing. They are
designed ONLY for tying down the
vehicle when it is being transported.
Using them for towing will damage the
bumper.

YMU000WA5

End Of Sie

TOWING HOOKS

A6E202400009W02

Caution
• The towing hooks should be used only in an emergency (to get the vehicle out of a ditch or a snow
bank, for example).
• When using the towing hooks, always pull the cable or chain in a straight direction with respect to
the hook. Apply no sideways force.

GI26

TOWING
FRONT
1. Remove the towing eyelet and the lug wrench from the trunk.
2. Wrap a screwdriver or similar tool with a soft cloth to prevent damage to the painted bumper and open the cap
located on the front bumper, below the left headlight.
Caution
• The cap cannot be completely removed.
Do not use excessive force as it may
damage the cap or scratch the painted
bumper surface.

3. Securely install the towing eyelet using the lug
wrench.
4. Hook the towing rope to the towing eyelet.

A6E2024W004

Caution
• If the towing eyelet is not securely
tightened, it may loosen or disengage
from the bumper when towing the
vehicle. Make sure that the towing eyelet
is securely tightened to the bumper.

A6E2024W002

A6E2024W003

REAR

End Of Sie

A6E2024W001

GI27

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATIONS

IDENTIFICATION NUMBER LOCATIONS
VEHICLE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER(VIN)

A6E202600010W01

A6E2026W004

End Of Sie

ENGINE IDENTIFICATION NUMBER

A6E202600010W02

A6E2026W001

End Of Sie

GI28

NEW STANDARDS

NEW STANDARDS
GI

NEW STANDARDS

A6E202800020W01

• Following is a comparison of the previous standard and the new standard.
New Standard
Abbreviation
AP
ACL
A/C
BARO
B+

CMP sensor
CAC
CLS
CTP
CPP
CIS
CS sensor
CKP sensor
DLC
DTM
DTC
DI
DLI
EI
ECT
EM

EVAP
EGR
FC
FF
4GR

FSO
solenoid
GEN
GND
HO2S
IAC

IAT
KS
MIL
MAP
MAF sensor
MFL
OBD
OL

Name
Accelerator Pedal
Air Cleaner
Air Conditioning
Barometric Pressure
Battery Positive Voltage
Brake Switch
Calibration Resistor
Camshaft Position Sensor
Charge Air Cooler
Closed Loop System
Closed Throttle Position
Clutch Pedal Position
Continuous Fuel Injection System
Control Sleeve Sensor
Crankshaft Position Sensor
Data Link Connector
Diagnostic Test Mode
Diagnostic Trouble Code(s)
Distributor Ignition
Distributorless Ignition
Electronic Ignition
Engine Coolant Temperature
Engine Modification
Engine Speed Input Signal
Evaporative Emission
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Fan Control
Flexible Fuel
Fourth Gear
Fuel Pump Relay

Previous Standard
Abbreviation

CSP sensor

Name
Accelerator Pedal
Air Cleaner
Air Conditioning
Atmospheric Pressure
Battery Voltage
Stoplight Switch
Corrected Resistance
Crank Angle Sensor
Intercooler
Feedback System
Fully Closed
Idle Switch
Clutch Position
Control Sleeve Position Sensor
Crank Angle Sensor 2
Diagnosis Connector
Test Mode
Service Code(s)
Spark Ignition
Direct Ignition
Electronic Spark Ignition
Water Thermo
Engine Modification
Engine RPM Signal
Evaporative Emission
Exhaust Gas Recirculation
Fan Control
Flexible Fuel
Overdrive
Circuit Opening Relay

Remark

Fuel Shut Off Solenoid

FCV

Fuel Cut Valve

Generator
Ground
Heated Oxygen Sensor
Idle Air control
IDM Relay
Incorrect Gear Ratio
Injection Pump
Input/Turbine Speed Sensor
Intake Air Temperature
Knock Sensor
Malfunction Indicator Lamp
Manifold Absolute Pressure
Mass Air Flow Sensor
Multiport Fuel Injection
On-Board Diagnostic
Open Loop

FIP

Alternator
Ground/Earth
Oxygen Sensor
Idle Speed Control
Spill Valve Relay

With heater

Fuel Injection Pump
Pulse Generator
Intake Air Thermo
Knock Sensor
Malfunction Indicator Light
Intake Air Pressure
Airflow Sensor
Multiport Fuel Injection
Diagnosis/SelfDiagnosis
Open Loop

#6
#6

GI29

NEW STANDARDS
New Standard
Abbreviation

OC
O2S
PNP

PSP
PCM

PAIR

AIR
SAPV
SFI

Name
Output Speed Sensor
Oxidation Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensor
Park/Neutral Position
PCM Control Relay
Power Steering Pressure
Powertrain Control Module
Pressure Control Solenoid

Name
Vehicle Speed Sensor 1
Catalytic Converter
Oxygen Sensor
Park/Neutral Range
Main Relay
Power Steering Pressure
Engine Control Unit
Line Pressure Solenoid Valve

Pulsed Secondary Air Injection

Secondary Air Injection System

Pump Speed Sensor

NE Sensor

Secondary Air Injection

Secondary Air Injection System

Secondary Air Pulse Valve
Sequential Multipoint Fuel Injection

Shift Solenoid A

Shift Solenoid B

3GR
TWC
TB
TP sensor
TCV
TCC

Previous Standard
Abbreviation

ECU

Shift Solenoid C
Third Gear
Three Way Catalytic Converter
Throttle Body
Throttle Position Sensor
Timer Control Valve
Torque Converter Clutch
Transmission (Transaxle) Control
TCM
Module
Transmission (Transaxle) Fluid

Temperature Sensor
TR
Transmission (Transaxle) Range
TC
Turbocharger
VSS
Vehicle Speed Sensor
VR
Voltage Regulator
VAF sensor Volume Air Flow Sensor
Warm Up Three Way Catalytic
WUTWC
Converter
WOT
Wide Open Throttle

TCV

Reed Valve
Sequential Fuel Injection
12 Shift Solenoid Valve
Shift A Solenoid Valve
23 Shift Solenoid Valve
Shift B Solenoid Valve
34 Shift Solenoid Valve
3rd Gear
Catalytic Converter
Throttle Body
Throttle Sensor
Timing Control Valve
Lockup Position

ECAT Control Unit

ATF Thermosensor

Inhibitor Position
Turbocharger
Vehicle Speed Sensor
IC Regulator
Air flow Sensor

Catalytic Converter

Fully Open

Remark

#6
#4
Pulsed
injection
#6
Injection
with air
pump

#1 : Diagnostic trouble codes depend on the diagnostic test mode
#2 : Controlled by the PCM
#3 : In some models, there is a fuel pump relay that controls pump speed. That relay is now called the fuel pump
relay (speed).
#4 : Device that controls engine and powertrain
#5 : Directly connected to exhaust manifold
#6 : Part name of diesel engine

End Of Sie

GI30

ABBREVIATIONS

ABBREVIATIONS
GI

ABBREVIATIONS
A/C
ABS
ACC
ALR
ATF
ATX
CAN
CM
DIS
DSC
ELR
ESA
EX
GPS
HI
IAC
IG
IN
INT
KOEO
KOER
LCD
LED
LF
LH
L.H.D.
LO
LR
M
MAX
MTX

Air conditioner
Antilock brake system
Accessories
Automatic locking retractor
Automatic transaxle fluid
Automatic transaxle
Controller area network
Control module
Drive information system
Dynamic stability control
Emergency locking retractor
Electronic spark advance
Exhaust
Global positioning system
High
Idle air control
Ignition
Intake
Intermittent
Key on engine off
Key off engine running
Liquid crystal display
Light emitting diode
Left front
Left hand
Left hand drive
Low
Left rear
Motor
Maximum
Manual transaxle

A6E203000011W01

O/D
OCV
OFF
ON
P/S
P/W CM
PATS
PCV
PID
REC
RF
RH
R.H.D.
RR
SAS
SST
SW
TDC
TFT
TNS
TP
TR
TWC
VAD
VIS
VTCS
VVT
WDS
4SD
5HB

Overdrive
Oil control valve
Switch off
Switch on
Power steering
Power window control module
Passive anti-theft system
Positive crankcase ventilation
Parameter identification
Recirculate
Right front
Right hand
Right hand drive
Right rear
Sophisticated air bag sensor
Special service tool
Switch
Top dead center
Transaxle fluid temperature
Tail number side lights
Throttle position
Transaxle range
Three way catalytic converter
Variable air duct
Variable intake-air system
Variable tumble control system
Variable valve timing
Worldwide diagnostic system
4 door sedan
5 door hatchback

End Of Sie

GI31

PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION

PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION
PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION

A6E203200012W01

PRE-DELIVERY INSPECTION TABLE
EXTERIOR
• INSPECT and ADJUST, if necessary, the
following items to specification:
❏Glass, exterior bright metal and paint for damage
❏All weatherstrips for damage or detachment
❏Door operation and alignment including side door
and back door
❏Wheel lug nuts
❏Tire pressures
❏Headlight aiming
❏Headlight cleaner and fluid level (if equipped)
❏Operation of bonnet release and lock
❏Operation of liftgate and fuel lid opener
• INSTALL the following parts:
❏Flap (front and rear)
❏Wheel caps or rings (if equipped)

UNDER BONNETENGINE OFF
• INSPECT and ADJUST, if necessary, the
following items to specification:
❏Fuel, engine coolant, and hydraulic lines, fittings,
connections, and components for leaks
❏Accelerator cable and linkage for free movement
❏Tension of drive belts
❏Tightness of water hose clamps
❏Tightness of battery terminals, electrolyte level and
specific gravity
❏Radiator coolant level and specific gravity
❏Engine oil level
❏Oil level in steering gearbox
❏Windshield washer tank fluid level
❏Brake master cylinder fluid level
❏Clutch master cylinder fluid level (MTX only)
❏Power steering fluid level
❏Manual transaxle oil level (MTX only)
CLEAN the spark plugs
INTERIOR
• INSTALL the following parts:
❏Fuse for accessories
• CHECK the operations of the following items:
❏All lights including warning, and indicator lights
❏Cigarette lighter and clock
❏Ignition switch and steering lock
❏Transaxle range switch (ATX only)
❏Warning buzzers
❏Seat belts warning system
❏Ignition key reminder alarm
❏Seat controls (sliding and reclining) and headrests

GI32

❏Seat belt warning system
❏Door locks, including childproof door locks
❏Power door lock
❏Power windows (if equipped)
❏Horn, wipers, and washers
❏Wiper blades performance
Clean the wiper blades and windshield, if necessary
❏Antenna
• CHECK the following items:
❏Presence of spare fuse
❏Upholstery and interior finish
• CHECK and ADJUST, if necessary, the following
items:
❏Operation and fit of windows
❏Parking brake
❏Pedal height and free play of brake pedal
UNDER BONNETENGINE RUNNING AT
OPERATING TEMPERATURE
• CHECK the following items:
❏Operation of idle-up system for electrical load, air
conditioner
❏Idle speed
❏Automatic transaxle fluid level (ATX only)
❏Initial ignition timing
❏Operation of throttle position sensor
❏Operation of EGR valve
ON HOIST
• CHECK the following items:
❏Underside fuel, coolant and hydraulic lines, fittings,
connections, and components for leaks
❏Tires for cuts or bruises
❏Steering linkage, suspension, exhaust system, and
all underside hardware for looseness or damage
ROAD TEST
• CHECK the following items:
❏Brake operation
❏Clutch operation
❏Steering control
❏Operation of meters and gauges, squeaks, rattles,
and abnormal noises
❏Engine general performance
❏Emergency locking retractors
AFTER ROAD TEST
• REMOVE the seat and floor mat protective covers
CHECK for the necessary owner information
materials, tools, and spare tire in vehicle

End Of Sie

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
GI

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE TABLE

A6E203400013W01

For Europe (L.H.D. U.K.)
Chart symbols:
I : Inspect and repair, clean, adjust, or replace if necessary. (Oil-permeated air cleaner elements cannot be
cleaned using the air-blow method.)
R : Replace
T : Tighten
L : Lubricate
Remarks:

• To ensure efficient operation of the engine and all systems related to emission control, the ignition and fuel systems must
be serviced regularly. It is strongly recommended that all servicing related to these systems be done by an authorized
Mazda Dealer.
• After the described period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals.
• Refer below for a description of items marked* in the maintenance chart.
*1: Also inspect and adjust the power steering and air conditioner drive belts, if installed.
*2: If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the engine oil and oil filter every 10,000 km
(6,250 miles) or shorter.
a. Driving in dusty conditions.
b. Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
c. Driving for long period in cold temperatures or driving regularly at short distance only.
*3: If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, clean and if necessary, replace the air cleaner element more
often than the recommended intervals.
*4: If the brakes are used extensively (for example, continuous hard driving or mountain driving) or if the vehicle is
operated in extremely humid climates, change the brake fluid annually.

Maintenance Item

Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles), whichever comes first)
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
×1000 km
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
×1000 miles
12.5
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
87.5 100 112.5

ENGINE
Drive belts
Engine oil
Oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system (including coolant level adjustment)

*1
*2
*2

R
R

I
R
R

R
R

I
R
R

R
R

I
R
R

R
R

I
I
I
I
Replace at first 4 years or 100,000 km (62,500 miles);
after that, every 2 years

Engine coolant
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner element
Fuel lines & hoses
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
E.G.R. system
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery electrolyte level & specific gravity
CHASSIS & BODY
Brake lines, hoses & connections
Brake fluid
Parking brake
Power brake unit & hoses
Disc brakes
Power steering fluid, lines, hoses, and connections
Steering operation & linkages
Manual transaxle oil

R
R

R
I

Replace every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)
I

I
R
I
I
I
I
I

*4
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I

I
I

R
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
I
I

GI33

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles), whichever comes first)
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96
108
Maintenance Item
×1000 km
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
160
180
× 1000 miles
12.5
25
37.5
50
62.5
75
87.5 100 112.5
Automatic transaxle/transmission fluid level
I
I
I
Front & rear suspension & ball joints
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
bolts & nuts on seats
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system heat shields
I
I
I
I
Cabin air filter (if installed) (aldehyde filter)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
Cabin air filter (if installed)(pollen filter)
R
R
R
R
Body condition
Inspect annually
(for rust, corrosion & perforation)

For Israel
Chart symbols:
I : Inspect and clean, repair, adjust, or replace if necessary. (Oil-permeated air cleaner elements cannot be
cleaned using the air-blow method.)
R : Replace
L : Lubricate
C : Clean
Remarks:
• To ensure efficient operation of the engine and all systems related to emission control, the ignition and fuel systems must
be serviced regularly. It is strongly recommended that all servicing related to these systems be done by an authorized
Mazda Dealer.
• After the described period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals.
• Refer below for a description of items marked* in the maintenance chart.
*1: Also inspect and adjust the power steering and air conditioner drive belts, if installed.
*2: If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the engine oil and oil filter every 10,000 km
(6,000 miles) or shorter.
a. Driving in dusty conditions.
b. Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
c. Driving for long period in cold temperatures or driving regularly at short distance only.
*3: If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, inspect and if necessary, clean or replace the air cleaner
element more often than the recommended intervals.
*4: This is a full function check of electrical systems such as lights, wiper and washer systems (including wiper blades),
and power windows.
*5: If the brakes are used extensively (for example, continuous hard driving or mountain driving) or if the vehicle is
operated in extremely humid climates, change the brake fluid annually.

Maintenance Item

Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles), whichever comes first)
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144
×1000 km
15
30
45
60
75
90 105 120 135 150 165 180
×1000 miles
9
18
27
36
45
54
63
72
81
90
99
108

ENGINE
Drive belts
Engine oil
Oil filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
(Including coolant level adjustment)

*1
*2
*2

I
R
R

GI34

I
R
R

I
R
R
I

Replace at first 4 years or 90,000 km;
after that, every 2 years

Engine coolant
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner element
Fuel filter
Fuel lines & hoses
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs

I
R
R

C
I

R
I

C
R

C
I

Replace every 90,000 km (54,000 miles)

C
R
I

R
I

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles), whichever comes first)
Months
12
24
36
48
60
72
84
96 108 120 132 144
Maintenance Item
×1000 km
15
30
45
60
75
90 105 120 135 150 165 180
×1000 miles
9
18
27
36
45
54
63
72
81
90
99
108
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Evaporative system
I
I
I
E.G.R. system (if installed)
I
I
I
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery electrolyte level & specific gravity
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
All electrical system
*4
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
CHASSIS & BODY
Brake & clutch pedals
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake lines, hoses & connections
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Brake fluid
*5
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
I
R
Parking brake
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power brake unit & hoses
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Disc brakes
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
Power steering fluid, lines, hoses, and
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
I
connections
Steering operation & linkages
I
I
I
I
I
I
Manual transaxle oil
R
R
Automatic transaxle/transmission fluid level
I
I
I
I
I
I
Front & rear suspension & ball joints
I
I
I
I
I
Driveshaft dust boots
I
I
I
I
I
Exhaust system & heat shields
I
I
I
I
I
I
Bolts & nuts on seats
I
I
I
I
I
I
Body condition (for rust, corrosion & perforation)
Inspect annually
Cabin air filter (if installed)
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R
R

For GCC
Chart symbols:
I : Inspect and repair, clean, adjust, or replace if necessary. (Oil-permeated air cleaner elements cannot be
cleaned using the air-blow method.)
R : Replace
T : Tighten
C : Clean
Remarks:
• To ensure efficient operation of the engine and all systems related to emission control, the ignition and fuel systems must
be serviced regularly. It is strongly recommended that all servicing related to these systems be done by an authorized
Mazda Dealer.
• After the described period, continue to follow the described maintenance at the recommended intervals.
• Refer below for a description of items marked* in the maintenance chart.
*1: Also inspect and adjust the power steering and air conditioner drive belts, if installed.
*2: If the vehicle is operated under any of the following conditions, change the engine oil and oil filter more often than
recommended intervals.
a. Driving in dusty conditions.
b. Extended periods of idling or low speed operation.
c. Driving for long period in cold temperatures or driving regularly at short distance only.
*3: If the vehicle is operated in very dusty or sandy areas, inspect and if necessary, clean or replace the air cleaner
element more often than the recommended intervals.
*4: This is a full function check of electrical systems such as lights, wiper and washer systems (including wiper blades),
and power windows.
*5: If the brakes are used extensively (for example, continuous hard driving or mountain driving) or if the vehicle is
operated in extremely humid climates, change the brake fluid annually.

GI35

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE

Maintenance Item

Maintenance Interval (Number of months or km (miles), whichever comes first)
Months
6 12 18 24 30 36 42 48 54 60 66 72 78 84 90 96
×1000 km
10 20 30 40 50 60 70 80 90 100 110 120 130 140 150 160
× 1000 miles 6.25 12.5 18.75 25 31.25 37.5 43.75 50 56.25 62.5 68.75 75 81.25 87.5 93.75 100

ENGINE
Drive belts
*1
Engine oil
*2
Oil filter
*2
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
Engine coolant
FUEL SYSTEM
Air cleaner element
*3
Fuel filter
Fuel lines & hoses
IGNITION SYSTEM
Spark plugs
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM
Evaporative system (if intalled)
E.G.R. system (if installed)
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery electrolyte level & specific
gravity
All electrical system
*4
CHASSIS & BODY
Brake & clutch pedal
Brake lines, hoses & connections
Brake fluid
*5
Parking brake
Power brake unit & hoses
Disc brakes
Power steering fluid, lines, hoses and
connections
Steering operation & linkages
Manual transaxle oil
Automatic transmission / transaxle fluid
level
Automatic transmission / transaxle fluid
Front & rear suspension & ball joints
Driveshaft dust boots
Bolts & nuts on chassis & body
Exhaust system heat shields
Cabin air filter (if installed)
Body condition
(for rust, corrosion & perforation)

GI36

I
R
R

C
R
I

I
R
R

I
I
Replace every 2 years
C
R
I

C
I

I
R
R

R
R
I

C
I

C
R
I

Replace every 100,000 km (62,500 miles)

I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I

I
I
R
I
I
I

I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I

I
I
R
I
I
I

I
I

I
I
T
I
R

I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I

I
R

I
I
R
I
I
I

I
I

I
I
I
I
I
I

I
I
R
I
I
I

I
I

Inspect annually

I
I

R
I
I
T
I
R

T
R

I
I
T
I
R

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Scheduled Maintenance Service (Specific Work Required)
For Europe (L.H.D. U.K.)
Maintenance Item
ENGINE
Engine valve clearance
Drive belts
Engine timing belt
Engine oil
Oil filter
Oil by-pass filter
COOLING SYSTEM
Cooling system
(including coolant level adjustment)
Engine coolant
FUEL SYSTEM
Idle speed
Idle mixture
(for CIS & carburetor leaded fuel)
Choke system (for carburetor)
Air cleaner element
Fuel filter
Fuel lines & hoses
IGNITION SYSTEM (FOR GASOLINE)
Initial ignition timing

Specific Work Required

Measure clearance.
Inspect for wear, cracks and fraying, and check tension.
Replace drive belt.
Replace engine timing belt.
Replace engine oil and inspect for leakage.
Replace oil filter and inspect for leakage.
Replace oil by-pass filter and inspect for leakage.
Check coolant level and quality, and inspect for leakage.
Replace coolant.
Check engine idle rpm.
Check the CO and HC concentrations (see W/M).
Check system operation.
Inspect for dirt, oil and damage.
Clean air cleaner element (by blowing air).
Replace air cleaner element.
Replace fuel filter.
Inspect for cracks, leakage and loose connection.

Check initial ignition timing.
Inspect for wear, damage, carbon, high-tension lead condition and measure
Spark plugs
plug gap.
Replace spark plugs.
EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEM (FOR GASOLINE)
Check system operation (see W/M), vapor lines, vacuum fitting hoses and
Evaporative system
connection.
Check the diaphragm and system operation, vacuum fitting hoses and
Throttle positioner system
connection.
Dash pot (for carburetor)
Check system operation.
E.G.R. system
Check system operation (see W/M), vacuum fitting hoses and connection.
ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
Battery electrolyte level & specific gravity
Check level and specific gravity.
Check the battery for corroded or loose connections and cracks in the case
Battery condition
(for maintenance free type).
Check function of lighting system, windshield wiper (including wiper blade
All electrical system
condition) and washer and power windows.
Headlight alignment
Check headlight alignment
CHASSIS & BODY
Brake & clutch pedals
Check pedal height and free play.
Check fluid level and inspect for leakage.
Brake fluid
Replace brake fluid.
Clutch fluid
Check fluid level and inspect for leakage.
Inspect for cracks, damage, chafing, corrosion, scars, swelling and fluid
Brake lines, hoses & connections
leakage.
Parking brake
Check lever stroke.
Check vacuum lines, connections and check valve for improper attachment,
Power brake unit & hoses
air tightness, cracks chafing and deterioration.
Test for judder and noise. Inspect caliper for correct operation and fluid
Disc brakes
leakage, brake pads for wear. Check disc plate condition and thickness.
Test for judder and noise. Inspect brake drum for wear and scratches; brake
Drum brakes
lining for wear, peeling and cracks; and wheel cylinder for fluid leakage.
Manual steering gear oil
Check gear oil level.
Power steering fluid, lines, hoses & connections Check fluid level and condition. Inspect for loose connection, routing,
damage, and leaks.

GI37

SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
Maintenance Item
Steering operation & linkages
Power steering fluid & lines
Power steering fluid
Power steering system & hoses
Steering & front suspension

Steering operation & gear housing
Steering linkages tie rod ends & arms
Front & rear suspension ball joints
Manual transmission/transaxle oil
Automatic transaxle oil level
Automatic transmission/transaxle fluid level
Automatic transmission/transaxle fluid
Front & rear differential oil
Rear differential oil
Transfer oil
Upper arm shafts (for B-Series)
Front & rear wheel bearing grease
Propeller shaft joints (with grease nipple)
Driveshaft dust boots
Wheel nuts
Bolts & nuts on chassis & body
Bolts & nuts on seats
Body condition
(for rust, corrosion & perforation)
Exhaust system heat shields
Tires
(including spare tire)
(with inflation pressure adjustment)
Hinges & catches
Seat belts
Rear suspension uni-ball & sliding rubber
bushing (for RX-7)
Underside of vehicle
Road test
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEM
Refrigerant amount
Compressor operation
Cabin air filter

End Of Sie

GI38

Specific Work Required
Check steering wheel free play, hard steering, and operation noise. Check
linkages, boots and ball joints condtion. Check grease or gear oil.
Check fluid level and lines for improper attachment, leakage, cracks,
damage, loose connections, chafing and deterioration.
Check fluid level.
Check lines for improper attachment, leakage, cracks, damage, loose
connections, chafing and deterioration.
Check free play of steering system, inspect shock absorbers for correct
damping force, oil leakage, damage and looseness, and inspect coil
springs, arms, links and stabilizer for damage and looseness.
Check that the steering wheel has the specified play. Be sure to check for
changes, such as excessive play, hard steering or strange noises.
Check gear housing and boots for looseness, damage and grease/gear oil
leakage.
Check ball joint, dust cover and other components for looseness, wear,
damage and grease leakage.
Inspect for grease leakage, cracks, damage and looseness.
Check oil level and inspect for leakage.
Replace manual transmission/transaxle oil.
Check oil level.
Check fluid level.
Replace automatic transmission/transaxle fluid.
Check oil level and inspect for leakage.
Replace front & rear differential oil.
Check oil level and inspect for leakage.
Replace rear differential oil.
Check oil level and inspect for leakage.
Replace transfer oil.
Lubricate the upper arm shafts for looseness or damage.
Remove wheel bearing and replace the grease.
Lubricate propeller shaft joints.
Inspect for grease leakage, cracks, damage and looseness.
Tighten wheel nuts.
Tighten bolts and nuts fastening suspension components, members and
seat frames.
Move the seat back and forth and side to side to check for squeeking or
rattling. If there is any squeeking or rattling, retorque bolts and nuts
fastening seat frames.
Inspect body surface for paint damage, rust, corrosion and perforation.
Inspect for damage, corrosion, looseness of connections and gas leakage.
Check air pressure and inspect tires for tread wear, damage and cracks;
and wheels for damage and corrosion.
Lubricate hinges and catches of doors, trunk lid and hood.
Inspect seat belt webbing for scratches, tears and wear, and check anchor
bolt tightness.
Inspect for cracks, damage and looseness.
Inspect underside of vehicle (floor pans, frames, fuel lines, around exhaust
system, etc.) for damage and corrosion.
Check brake operation/clutch operation/steering control/operation of meters
and gauges/squeaks, rattles or unusual noises/engine general
performance/emergency locking retractors.
Check refrigerant amount.
Check compressor operation, and inspect for noise, oil leakage, cracks and
refrigerant leakage.
Replace cabin air filter.

ENGINE

B
LOCATION INDEX .................................................B-2
MECHANICAL LOCATION INDEX ...................... B-2
DRIVE BELT........................................................... B-3
DRIVE BELT INSPECTION ................................. B-3
DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT ............................ B-3
DRIVE BELT AUTO TENSIONER
INSPECTION .......................................................B-4
VALVE CLEARANCE............................................. B-4
VALVE CLEARANCE INSPECTION.................... B-4
VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT .................B-5
COMPRESSION PRESSURE ................................ B-9
COMPRESSION INSPECTION ........................... B-9
TIMING CHAIN ..................................................... B-10
TIMING CHAIN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..... B-10
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET................................. B-18
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET REPLACEMENT .. B-18
FRONT OIL SEAL ................................................ B-21
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT.................. B-21
REAR OIL SEAL .................................................. B-25
REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT .................... B-25
ENGINE ................................................................ B-26
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................ B-26
ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY............... B-31
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ................................. B-32
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR
INSPECTION .................................................. B-32
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ B-32
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) ............................. B-33
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ B-33
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION .... B-33

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
MECHANICAL LOCATION INDEX

A6E220001002W01

A6E2200W300
.

2
3

4
5

Drive belt
(See B3 DRIVE BELT INSPECTION)
(See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT)
(See B4 DRIVE BELT AUTO TENSIONER
INSPECTION)
Tappet
(See B4 VALVE CLEARANCE INSPECTION)
Engine
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION)
(See B26 ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See B31 ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
Timing Chain
(See B10 TIMING CHAIN REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Cylinder head gasket
(See B18 CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
REPLACEMENT)

6
7
8

Front oil seal
(See B21 FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT)
Rear oil seal
(See B25 REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT)
Oil control valve (OCV) (L3)
(See B33 OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See B33 OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
INSPECTION)
Variable valve timing actuator (L3)
(See B32 VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See B32 VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
Plug hole plate
(See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

DRIVE BELT
End Of Sie

DRIVE BELT
DRIVE BELT INSPECTION

A6E221015800W01

Note
• Front and water pump drive belt deflection/tension inspection is not necessary because of the use of the
front drive belt auto tensioner.
Front Drive Belt
1. Verify that the drive belt auto tensioner indicator
mark does not exceeds the limit.
• If it exceeds the limit, replace the drive belt.
(SeeB3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)

AME2210W001

End Of Sie

DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the splash shield (RH).
2. Turn the center of the tensioner pulley clockwise
to release tension to the drive belt.
3. Remove the drive belt.
4. Reinstall the drive belt or install a new drive belt.
5. Verify that the drive belt auto tensioner indicator
mark does not exceeds the limit. (See B3 DRIVE
BELT INSPECTION.)
• If it exceeds the limit, replace the drive belt.
6. Install the splash shield (RH).

A6E221015800W03

AME2210W002

End Of Sie

DRIVE BELT, VALVE CLEARANCE
DRIVE BELT AUTO TENSIONER INSPECTION
1. Remove the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
2. Verify that the drive belt auto tensioner moves
smoothly in the operational direction.
• Replace the drive belt auto tensioner if
necessary.
3. Turn the drive belt auto tensioner pulley by hand
and verify that it rotates smoothly.
• Replace the drive belt auto tensioner if
necessary.
4. Install the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT
REPLACEMENT.)

A6E221015980W01

AME2210W003

End Of Sie

VALVE CLEARANCE
VALVE CLEARANCE INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the tire (RH).
Remove the splash shield (RH).
Remove the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the high-tension lead.
Remove the oil control valve (OCV) connector.
Remove the ventilation hose.
Remove the cylinder head cover.
Verify that the engine is in cold condition.
Measure the valve clearance.
(1) Turn the crankshaft clockwise so that the No.1 piston is at TDC of the compression stroke.
(2) Measure the valve clearance at A in the
figure.
• If the valve clearance exceeds the space
the tappet. (See B5 VALVE
CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E221212111W01

Note
• Make sure to note the measured values for
choosing the suitable replacement tappets.
Standard [Engine cold]
IN: 0.220.28 mm {0.00870.0110 in}
(0.25±
±0.03 mm {0.0098±
±0.0011 in})
EX: 0.270.33 mm {0.01060.0130 in}
(0.30±
±0.03 mm {0.0118±
±0.0011 in})

AME2212W001

(3) Turn the crankshaft 360°° clockwise so that the No.4 piston is at TDC of the compression stroke.
(4) Measure the valve clearance at B in the figure.
• If the valve clearance exceeds the standard, replace the tappet. (See B5 VALVE CLEARANCE
ADJUSTMENT.)
Note
• Make sure to note the measured values for choosing the suitable replacement tappets.
Standard [Engine cold]
IN: 0.220.28 mm {0.00870.0110 in} (0.25±
±0.03 mm {0.0098±
±0.0011 in})
EX: 0.270.33 mm {0.01060.0130 in} (0.30±
±0.03 mm {0.0118±
±0.0011 in})
11.
12.
13.
14.
15.

Install the cylinder head cover. (See B17 Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note.)
Install the ventilation hose.
Install the oil control valve connector.
Install the high-tension lead. (See G11 HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Install the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

VALVE CLEARANCE
16. Install the splash shield (RH).
17. Install the tire (RH).

End Of Sie

VALVE CLEARANCE ADJUSTMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

A6E221212111W02

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the tire (RH).
Remove the splash shield (RH).
Remove the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the high-tension lead.
Remove the oil control valve (OCV) connector.
Remove the ventilation hose.
Remove the cylinder head cover.
Remove the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the joint shaft from the front drive shaft (RH). (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the engine front cover lower blind plug.

AME2212W002

12. Remove the engine front cover upper blind plug.
13. Remove the cylinder block lower blind plug.

AME2212W003

14. Install the SST as shown.
15. Turn the crankshaft clockwise the crankshaft is in
the No.1 cylinder TDC position.

AME2212W004

VALVE CLEARANCE
16. Loosen the timing chain.
(1) Using a suitable screwdriver or equivalent
tool, unlock the chain tensioner ratchet.
(2) Turn the exhaust camshaft clockwise using a
suitable wrench on the cast hexagon and
loosen the timing chain.
(3) Placing the suitable bolt (M6 X 1.0 length
25mm35mm {0.99in1.37in}) at the
engine front cover upper blind plug, secure
the chain guide at the position where the
tension is released.

AME2212W005

17. Hold the exhaust camshaft using a suitable
wrench on the cast hexagon as shown.

AME2212W006

18. Remove the exhaust camshaft sprocket.

AME2212W007

19. Loosen the camshaft cap bolts in several passes
in the order shown.
Note
• The cylinder head and the camshaft caps
are numbered to make sure they are
reassembled in their original position. When
removed, keep the caps with the cylinder
head they were removed from. Do not mix
the caps.
20. Remove the camshaft.
21. Remove the tappet.
22. Select proper adjustment shim.

AME2212W008

VALVE CLEARANCE
New adjustment shim
= Removed shim thickness + Measured valve clearance - Standard valve clearance (IN: 0.25 mm
{0.0098 in}, EX: 0.30 mm {0.0118 in})
Standard [Engine cold]
IN: 0.220.28 mm {0.00870.0110 in} (0.25±
±0.03 mm {0.0098±
±0.0011 in})
EX: 0.270.33 mm {0.01060.0130 in} (0.30±
±0.03 mm {0.0118±
±0.0011 in})

23. Install the camshaft with No.1 cylinder aligned with the TDC position.
24. Tighten the camshaft cap bolt using the following
two steps.
(1) Tighten to 5.09.0 N·m {51.091.7 kgf·cm,
44.379.5 in·lbf}.
(2) Tighten to 14.017.0 N·m {1.51.7 kgf·m,
10.412.5 ft·lbf}.

AME2212W009

25. Install the exhaust camshaft sprocket.
Note
• Do not tighten the bolt for the camshaft
sprocket during this step. First confirm the
valve timing, then tighten the bolt.
26. Install the SST to the camshaft as shown.

AME2212W007

European countries

Except European countries
27. Remove the M6 x 1.0 bolt (length 25mm
35mm {0.99in1.37in}) from the engine front
cover to apply tension to the timing chain.
28. Turn the crankshaft clockwise the crankshaft is in
the No.1 cylinder TDC position.

AME2212W010

AME2212W011

VALVE CLEARANCE
29. Hold the exhaust camshaft using a suitable
wrench on the cast hexagon as shown.
30. Tighten the exhaust camshaft sprocket lock bolt.
Tightening torque:
6975 N·m {7.107.6 kgf·m, 50.955.3 ft·lbf}
31. Remove the SST from the camshaft.
32. Remove the SST from the block lower blind plug.
33. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise two turns until
the TDC position.
• If not aligned, loosen the crankshaft pulley
lock bolt and repeat from Step 14.
34. Apply silicone sealant to the engine front cover
upper blind plug.
35. Install the engine front cover upper blind plug.

AME2212W006

Tightening torque:
10 N·m {1.0 kgf·m, 7.4 ft·lbf}

36. Install the cylinder block lower blind plug.

AME2212W003

Tightening torque:
1822 N·m {1.92.2 kgf·m, 13.316.2 ft·lbf}

AME2212W012

37. Install the new engine front cover lower blind
plug.
Tightening torque:
12 N·m {1.2 kgf·m, 8.9 ft·lbf}
38. Connect the front drive shaft (RH) and the joint
shaft. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
39. Install the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT
REPLACEMENT.)
40. Install the cylinder head cover. (See B17
Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note.)
41. Install the ventilation hose.
42. Install the oil control valve (OCV) connector.
43. Install the high-tension lead. (See G11 HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
44. Install the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
45. Install the splash shield (RH).
46. Install the tire (RH).
End Of Sie

AME2212W002

COMPRESSION PRESSURE

COMPRESSION PRESSURE
COMPRESSION INSPECTION

A6E221402000W01

Warning
• Hot engines and oil can cause severe burns. Be careful not to burn yourself during removal/
installation of each component.
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
• Recharge it if necessary. (See G4 BATTERY INSPECTION.)
2. Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature.
3. Stop the engine and allow it to cool off for about 10 min.
4. Perform Fuel Line Safety Procedures. Leave the fuel pump relay removed. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR
PROCEDURE.)
Warning
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep
sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line
Safety Procedure. (See F17 Fuel Line Safety Procedure.)
5. Remove the ignition coil connector.
6. Remove the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK
PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Connect a compression gauge into the spark plug
hole.
8. Fully depress the accelerator pedal and crank the
engine.
9. Note the maximum gauge reading.
10. Inspect each cylinder as above.
• If the measured value is less than the limited
value, or there is a cylinder whose
compression value varies from that of other
cylinders by 196.1 kPa {1.999 kgf/cm2, 28.44
psi} or more, add a small amount of engine oil
through the spark plug hole. Then measure
the compression pressure and perform the
respective operations for the following cases.
If the compression increases, the piston,
AME2214W001
the piston rings, or cylinder wall may be
worn and overhaul is required.
If the compression stays low, a valve may be stuck or improperly seated and overhaul is required.
If the compression in adjacent cylinders stays low, the cylinder head gasket may be damaged or the
cylinder head distorted and overhaul is required.
Compression
kPa {kgf/cm2, psi} [rpm]
Item
Standard
Minimum
Maximum difference
between cylinders

Engine type
L8
1,750 {17.845, 253.816} [300]
1,225 {12.492, 177.64} [300]
196.1 {1.999, 28.44}

kPa {kgf/cm2, psi} [rpm]
Item
Standard
Minimum
Maximum difference
between cylinders

Engine type
LF
1,720 {17.5391, 249.465} [300]
1,204 {12.277, 174.58} [300]
196.1 {1.999, 28.44}

COMPRESSION PRESSURE, TIMING CHAIN
kPa {kgf/cm2, psi} [rpm]
Item
Standard
Minimum
Maximum difference
between cylinders

11.
12.
13.
14.

Engine type
L3
1,430 {14.5819, 207.404} [290]
1,000 {10.197, 145.00} [290]
196.1 {1.999, 28.44}

Disconnect the compression gauge.
Install the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connect the ignition coil connector.
Install the fuel pump relay. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

End Of Sie

TIMING CHAIN
TIMING CHAIN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E221512201W01

Warning
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep
sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injures or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line
Safety Procedure. (See F17 Fuel Line Safety Procedure.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.

13.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the tire (RH).
Remove the under cover.
Loosen the water pump pulley bolt and removal the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the CKP sensor. (See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Drain the engine oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the P/S oil pump with the oil hose still connected and position the P/S oil pump so that it is out of the
way. (See N22 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front drive shaft (RH) from the joint shaft. (See M12 JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Start the engine and:
• Inspect for the engine oil, engine coolant, transaxle oil and fuel leakage.
• Verify the ignition timing, idle speed and idle mixture. (See F8 IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION.) (SeeF
9 IDLE MIXTURE INSPECTION.)
Perform a road test.

B10

TIMING CHAIN

AME2215W001

1
2

3
4
5
6

Cylinder head cover
(See B17 Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note)
Crankshaft pulley lock bolt
(See B12 Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Removal
Note)
(See B16 Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Installation
Note)
Crankshaft pulley
Water pump pulley
Drive belt idler pulley
No.3 engine mount rubber and No.3 engine joint
bracket
(See B12 No.3 Engine Mount Rubber and No.3
Engine Joint Bracket Removal Note)
(See B16 No.3 Engine Mount Rubber and No.3
Engine Joint Bracket Installation Note)
Engine front cover
(See B14 Engine Front Cover Installation Note)

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Front oil seal
(See B13 Engine Front Cover Removal Note)
(See B15 Front Oil Seal Installation Note)
Chain tensioner
(See B12 Chain Tensioner Removal Note)
Tensioner arm
Chain guide
Timing chain
(See B14 Timing Chain Installation Note)
Seal
Oil pump chain tensioner
Oil pump chain guide
Oil pump sprocket
(See B13 Oil Pump Sprocket Removal Note)
(See B13 Oil Pump Sprocket Installation Note)
Oil pump chain
Camshaft sprocket

B11

TIMING CHAIN
Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Removal Note
1. Remove the cylinder block lower blind plug.
2. Install the SST.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise the crankshaft is in
the No.1 cylinder TDC position.

AME2212W004

4. Hold the crankshaft pully by using the SSTs.

AME2215W002

Chain Tensioner Removal Note
1. Using a thin screwdriver, hold the chain tensioner ratchet lock mechanism away from the ratchet stem.
2. Slowly compress the tensioner piston.
3. Hold the tensioner piston using a 1.5 mm {0.059
in} wire or paper clip.

AME2215W003

No.3 Engine Mount Rubber and No.3 Engine Joint Bracket Removal Note
1. Suspend the engine using the SSTs.

AME2215W004

B12

TIMING CHAIN
Oil Pump Sprocket Removal Note
1. Hold the oil pump sprocket by using the SST.

AME2215W005

Engine Front Cover Removal Note
1. Remove the oil seal using a screwdriver as
shown.

AME2215W006

Oil Pump Sprocket Installation Note
1. Hold the oil pump sprocket by using the SST.

AME2215W005

B13

TIMING CHAIN
Timing Chain Installation Note
1. Install the SST to the camshaft as shown.
European countries

Except European countries
2. Install the timing chain.
3. Remove the retaining wire or paper clip from the
auto tensioner to apply tension to the timing
chain.

AME2212W010

AME2212W011

Engine Front Cover Installation Note
1. Apply silicone sealant to the engine front cover as
shown.
Caution
• Install the cylinder head cover within 10
minutes of applying the silicone sealant.
• Silicone sealant is not need in area C as
indicated below due to an existing. (L3)
Thickness
A: 2.03.0 mm {0.0790.118 in}
B: 1.52.5 mm {0.0590.098 in}

AME2215W007

B14

TIMING CHAIN
2. Install the cylinder head cover bolts in the order
as shown.
Bolt No.
Tightening torque
118
8.011.5 N·m {81.6117.2 kgf·cm,
70.9101.7 in·lbf}
1922
4055 N·m {4.15.6 kgf·m, 29.740.5 ft·lbf}

AME2215W008

Front Oil Seal Installation Note
1. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal.
2. Push the oil seal slightly in by hand.
3. Compress the oil seal using the SST and a
hammer.

AME2215W009

AME2215W010

B15

TIMING CHAIN
No.3 Engine Mount Rubber and No.3 Engine Joint Bracket Installation Note
1. Tighten the stud bolt of the No.3 engine mount
bracket.
Tightening torque:
7.013 N·m {71.4132.5 kgf·cm, 62.0115.0
in·lbf}
2. Install the No.3 engine mount rubber handtighten.

AME2215W011

3. Tighten the No.3 engine joint bracket is attached
and bolts, nuts in the order shown.

AME2215W012

Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Installation Note
1. Install the SST to the camshaft as shown.
European countries

Except European countries

AME2212W010

AME2212W011

B16

TIMING CHAIN
2. Install the M6 x 1.0 bolt in by hand.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise the crankshaft is in
the No.1 cylinder TDC position.

AME2215W013

4. Hold the crankshaft pully by using the SST.
5. Tighten the crankshaft pulley lock bolt using the
following two steps.
(1) Tighten to 96104 N·m {9.810.6 kgf·m,
70.976.7 ft·lbf}
(2) Tighten 87°° 93°°
6. Remove the M6 x 1.0 bolt.
7. Remove the SST from the camshaft.
8. Remove the SST from the cylinder block lower
blind plug.
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise two turns until
the TDC position.
• If not aligned, loosen the crankshaft pulley
lock bolt and repeat from Step 1.
10. Install the cylinder block lower blind plug.

AME2215W002

Tightening torque:
1822 N·m {1.92.2 kgf·m, 13.316.2 ft·lbf}

AME2212W012

Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note
1. Apply silicone sealant to the mating faces as
shown.
Caution
• Install the cylinder head cover within 10
minutes of applying the silicone sealant.
Dot diameter:
4.06.0 mm {0.160.23 in}
2. Install the cylinder head cover with a new gasket.
AME2215W014

B17

TIMING CHAIN, CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
3. Tighten the bolts in the order shown.
Tightening torque:
8.011.5 N·m {81.6122.3 kgf·cm, 70.9
106.2 in·lbf}

AME2215W015

End Of Sie

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
CYLINDER HEAD GASKET REPLACEMENT

A6E221810271W01

Warning
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can very easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep
sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line
Safety Procedure. (See F17 Fuel Line Safety Procedure.)
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Remove the timing chain. (See B10 TIMING CHAIN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the ignition coil. (See G8 IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the high-tension lead. (See G11 HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the generator, but do not remove it from the vehicle. After disconnection, fix the generator using a
rope to prevent it from falling. (See G6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front pipe. (See F35 EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the intake manifold. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the heater hose, bypass hose, radiator hose.
To firmly support the engine, first set the engine
jack and attachment to the oil pan.
Note
• A: MA-1
• B: M18MA

9. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
10. Install in the reverse order of removal.
11. Inspect the compression. (See B9
COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
AME2218W001

B18

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET

AME2218W002
.

1
2

Camshaft
(See B19 Camshaft Removal Note)
(See B21 Camshaft Installation Note)
Oil control valve (OCV) (L3)

3
4

Cylinder head
(See B20 Cylinder Head Removal Note)
(See B20 Cylinder Head Installation Note)
Cylinder head gasket

Camshaft Removal Note
Note
• The cylinder head and the camshaft caps are numbered to make sure they are reassembled in their
original position. When removed, keep the caps with the cylinder head they were removed from. Do not
mix the caps.

B19

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET
1. Loosen the camshaft cap bolts in several passes
in the order shown.

AME2212W008

Cylinder Head Removal Note
1. Loosen the cylinder head bolts in several passes
in the order shown.

AME2218W003

Cylinder Head Installation Note
1. Measure the length of each cylinder head bolt.
• Replace any that exceed maximum length.
Length L:
149.0150.0 mm {5.8675.905 in}
Maximum:
150.5 mm {5.965 in}

AME2218W004

2. Tighten the cylinder head bolts in the order shown
using the following 5 steps.
(1) Tighten to 5.0 N·m {51.0 kgf·cm, 44.2 in·lbf}
(2) Tighten 1317 N·m {1.41.7 kgf·m, 10.0
12.5 ft·lbf}
(3) Tighten 4446 N·m {4.54.6 kgf·m, 32.5
33.9 ft·lbf}
(4) Tighten 88°° 92°°
(5) Tighten 88°° 92°°

AME2218W005

B20

CYLINDER HEAD GASKET, FRONT OIL SEAL
Camshaft Installation Note
1. Set the cam position of the No.1 cylinder at the
top dead center (TDC) and install the camshaft.
2. Temporarily tighten the camshaft bearing caps in
two or three even movements.
3. Tighten the camshaft cap bolts in the order shown
using the following two steps.
(1) Tighten to 5.09.0 N·m {51.091.7 kgf·cm,
44.679.5 in·lbf}
(2) Tighten to 14.017.0 N·m {1.51.7 kgf·m,
10.412.5 ft·lbf}

AME2212W009

End Of Sie

FRONT OIL SEAL
FRONT OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

A6E222010602W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the Cylinder head cover. (See B17 Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note.)
Remove the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the front drive shaft (RH) from the joint shaft. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the CKPsensor.(See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

AME2220W001
.

Crankshaft pulley lock bolt
(See B22 Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Removal
Note)
(See B23 Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Installation
Note)

2
3

Crankshaft pulley
Front oil seal
(See B22 Front Oil Seal Removal Note)
(See B23 Front Oil Seal Installation Note)

B21

FRONT OIL SEAL
Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Removal Note
1. Remove the cylinder block lower blind plug.
2. Install the SST.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise the crankshaft is in
the No.1 cylinder TDC position.

AME2212W004

4. Hold the crankshaft pulley by using the SSTs.

AME2215W002

Front Oil Seal Removal Note
1. Cut the oil seal lip using a razor knife.
2. Remove the oil seal using a screwdriver protected
with a rag.

AME2220W002

B22

FRONT OIL SEAL
Front Oil Seal Installation Note
1. Apply clean engine oil to the oil seal lip.
2. Push the oil seal slightly in by hand.
3. Tap the oil seal in evenly using the SST and a
hammer.

AME2215W009

AME2215W010

Crankshaft Pulley Lock Bolt Installation Note
1. Install the SST to the camshaft as shown.
European countries

Except European countries

AME2212W010

AME2212W011

B23

FRONT OIL SEAL
2. Install the M6 x 1.0 bolt in by hand.
3. Turn the crankshaft clockwise the crankshaft is in
the No.1 cylinder TDC position.

AME2215W013

4. Hold the crankshaft pulley by using the SSTs.
5. Tighten the crankshaft pulley lock bolt in the order
shown using the following two steps.
(1) Tighten to 96104 N·m {9.810.6 kgf·m,
70.976.7 ft·lbf}
(2) Tighten 87°° 93°°
6. Remove the M6 x 1.0 bolt.
7. Remove the SST from the camshaft.
8. Remove the SST from the cylinder block lower
blind plug.
9. Rotate the crankshaft clockwise two turns until
the TDC position.
• If not aligned, loosen the crankshaft pulley
lock bolt and repeat from Step 1.
10. Install the cylinder block lower blind plug.

AME2215W002

Tightening torque:
1822 N·m {1.92.2 kgf·m, 13.316.2 ft·lbf}

AME2212W012

End Of Sie

B24

REAR OIL SEAL

REAR OIL SEAL
REAR OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the flywheel. (MTX) (See H11 CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Remove the drive plate. (ATX) (See K43 DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E222211399W01

1
2

Bolt
Rear oil seal
(See B25 Rear Oil Seal Installation Note)

AME2222W001

Rear Oil Seal Installation Note
1. Apply silicone sealant to the mating faces as
shown.
Dot diameter:
4.06.0 mm {0.160.23 in}
2. Apply clean engine oil to the new oil seal lip.

AME2222W002

3. Install the rear oil seal using the installer as
shown.

AME2224E326

4. Tighten the rear oil seal bolts in the order as
shown.
Tightening torque:
8.011.5 N·m {81.6117.2 kgf·m, 70.9
101.7 in·lbf}

AME2222W004

End Of Sie

B25

ENGINE

ENGINE
ENGINE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E222401001W01

18.

Remove the battery. (See G3 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the battery tray. (See G3 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the radiator. (See E6 RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Drain the missions oil.
Remove the P/S oil pump with the oil hose still connected and position the P/S oil pump so that it is out of the
way. (SeeN22 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Remove the A/C compressor with the pipes still connected. Position the A/C compressor so that it is out of the
way. Use wire or rope to secure.
Remove the joint shaft from the front drive shaft. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the air cleaner, intake air duct, accelerator cable and bracket, and vacuum hose. (See F10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the ATF filter and selector cable. (ATX) (See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Remove the vacuum hose and heater hose.
Remove the release cylinder and control cable. (MTX) (See J5 MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Remove the plastic fuel hose. (See F23 Plastic Fuel Hose Removal Note.) (See F24 Plastic Fuel Hose
Installation Note.)
Disconnect the wiring harness from the engine side.
Remove the front pipe. (See F35 EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Start the engine and:
• Inspect for the engine oil, engine coolant, transaxle oil and fuel leakage.
• Verify the ignition timing, idle speed and idle mixture. (See F8 IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION.) (SeeF
9 IDLE MIXTURE INSPECTION.)
Perform a road test.

B26

ENGINE

AME2213W001
.

No.1 Engine mount rubber
(See B28 No.1 Engine Mount Rubber Removal
Note)
(See B31 No.1 Engine Mount Rubber Installation
Note)
No.1 Engine mount bracket
(See B31 No.1 Engine Mount Bracket Installation
Note)

4
5
6

No.4 Engine mount bracket and No.4 Engine mount
rubber
(See B28 No.4 Engine Mount Bracket and No.4
Engine Mount Rubber Removal Note)
(See B30 No.4 Engine Mount Bracket and No.4
Engine Mount Rubber Installation Note)
Engine ground
No.3 Engine joint bracket (See B29 No.3 Engine
Joint Bracket Installation Note)
Engine, transaxle

B27

ENGINE
No.1 Engine Mount Rubber Removal Note
1. Suspend the engine using the SSTs.
2. Remove the through bolt A on the No.1 engine
mount bracket side.

AME2215W004

3. Loosen the through bolt B on the chassis side
until approximately three pitches are showing.
Note
• Do not remove the No.1 engine mount
rubber from the vehicle.

AME2213W002

AME2213W003

No.4 Engine Mount Bracket and No.4 Engine Mount Rubber Removal Note
1. Secure the engine and the transaxle using an
engine jack and attachment as shown.

AME2218W001

B28

ENGINE
2. Remove the SST.

AME2215W004

3. Secure the engine and the transaxle using a
hoist.

AME2213W004

4. No.4 engine mount bracket and engine mount
rubber together in one piece.

AME2213W005

No.3 Engine Joint Bracket Installation Note
1. Tighten the No.3 engine mount bracket stud bolt.
Tightening torque:
7.013 N·m {71.4132.5 kgf·cm, 62.0115.0
in·lbf}

AME2215W011

B29

ENGINE
2. Tighten the No.3 engine joint bracket bolt and nut
in the order shown.

AME2213W010

No.4 Engine Mount Bracket and No.4 Engine Mount Rubber Installation Note
1. Tighten the No.4 engine mount bracket and No.4
engine mount rubber bolt and nut in the order as
shown.

AME2213W011

2. Secure the engine and the transaxle using an
engine jack and attachment as shown.

AME2218W001

3. Remove the hoist and secure the engine and
transaxle using SST.

AME2215W004

B30

ENGINE
No.1 Engine Mount Bracket Installation Note
1. Tighten No.1 engine mount bracket bolt A.
Tightening torque:
93.1116.6 N·m {9.5011.88 kgf·m, 68.72
85.92 ft·lbf}

2. Tighten No.1 engine mount bracket bolt B.
Tightening torque:
93.1116.6 N·m {9.5011.88 kgf·m, 68.72
85.92 ft·lbf}
AME2213W008

No.1 Engine Mount Rubber Installation Note
1. Tighten through bolt A on No.1 engine mount
bracket.
Tightening torque:
85.3116.6 N·m {8.711.88 kgf·m, 62.93
85.92 ft·lbf}
2. Tighten through bolt B on chassis side.
Tightening torque:
93.1116.6 N·m {9.5011.88 kgf·m, 68.72
85.92 ft·lbf}

AME2213W009

End Of Sie

ENGINE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E222401001W02

1. Disconnect the engine and automatic transaxle. (ATX) (See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the engine and manual transaxle. (MTX) (See J5 MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the intake-air system. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the exhaust system. (See F35 EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the generator.
6. Remove the ignition coils. (See G8 IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Remove the CKP sensor. (See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie

B31

VARIABLE VALVE TIMING

VARIABLE VALVE TIMING
VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR INSPECTION
L3

A6E222500142W01

Caution
• Variable valve timing actuator can not be disassembled it is a precision unit.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the plug hole plate.
Remove the high-tension lead.
Remove the oil control valve connector.
Remove the ventilation hose.
Remove the cylinder head cover.
Confirm that notch of the rotor and bump of the
cover at the variable valve timing actuator are
aligned and fitted.
• If the notch and the bump are not aligned,
turn the crankshaft clockwise two rotations.
Verify that the bump and the notch are
aligned.
• If the bump and notch are still not aligned,
replace the variable valve timing actuator.
• If, when turning the crankshaft, there is a
hitting noise from the variable valve timing
actuator each time the cam passes the fully
lifted position, it means that the actuator is not
secured. Replace the actuator.
Install the cylinder head cover. (See B17 Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note.)
Install the ventilation hose.
Install the oil control valve connector.
Install the high-tension lead. (See G11 HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Install the spark plugs. (See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Installs plug hole plate.

AME2225W002

End Of Sie

VARIABLE VALVE TIMING ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
L3

A6E222500142W02

Caution
• Variable valve timing actuator can not be disassembled because it is a precision unit.
Note
• Variable valve timing actuator camshaft sprocket is integrated with the variable valve timing actuator and
cannot be disassembled.
1. Follow the timing chain removal/installation procedure from 1 to 13 and remove the timing chain. (See B10
TIMING CHAIN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
.

Variable valve timing actuator
(See B33 Variable Valve Timing Actuator Removal
Note)
(See B33 Variable Valve Timing Actuator
Installation Note)

AME2225W001

B32

VARIABLE VALVE TIMING, OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Removal Note
1. Set a wrench or equivalent tool at the hexagonal part of the camshaft to prevent rotation.
2. Loosen the variable valve timing actuator tightening bolts.
Variable Valve Timing Actuator Installation Note
1. Set a wrench or equivalent tool at the hexagonal part of the camshaft to prevent rotation.
2. Tighten variable valve timing actuator tightening bolts.

Tightening torque
6975N·m {7.107.6 kgf·m, 50.955.3 ft·lbf}

End Of Sie

OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
L3
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

A6E222614420W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the plug hole plate.
Remove the high-tension lead. (See G11 HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the oil control valve (OCV) connector.
Remove the ventilation hose.
Remove the cylinder head cover. (See B17 Cylinder Head Cover Installation Note.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Oil control valve (OCV)

AME2226W001

End Of Sie

OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV) INSPECTION
L3

A6E222614420W02

Coil Resistance Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the oil control valve connector.
3. Measure the resistance between terminals A and
B using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the oil control
valve.
Specification
6.97.9 ohms
4. Connect the oil control valve connector.

AME2226W002

B33

OIL CONTROL VALVE (OCV)
Spool Valve Operation Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the oil control valve.
3. Verify that the spool valve in the oil control valve
is in the maximum valve timing retard position as
indicated in the figure.
• If not as specified, replace the oil control
valve.
4. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
• If not as specified, recharge the battery.
5. Apply battery positive voltage between the oil
control valve terminals and verify that the spool
valve operates and moves to the maximum valve
timing advance position.
• If not as specified, replace the oil control
valve.

AME2226W003

Note
• When applying battery positive voltage between the oil control valve terminals, the connection can be
either of the following:
Positive battery cable to terminal A, negative battery cable to terminal B
Positive battery cable to terminal B, negative battery cable to terminal A
6. Stop applying battery positive voltage and verify
that the spool valve returns to the maximum valve
timing retard position.
• If not as specified, replace the oil control
valve.

AME2226W004

End Of Sie

B34

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

LOCATION INDEX .................................................D-2
LOCATION INDEX...............................................D-2
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION ..............................D-3
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION............................D-3
ENGINE OIL ...........................................................D-4
ENGINE OIL INSPECTION..................................D-4
ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT.............................D-4
OIL FILTER.............................................................D-6
OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT ..............................D-6
OIL COOLER..........................................................D-7
OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........D-7
OIL PAN..................................................................D-8
OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..................D-8
OIL PUMP .............................................................D-10
OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............D-10

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
LOCATION INDEX

A6E330001002W01

AME3300W001
.

Oil filter
(See D6 OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT)

Oil cooler (LF and L3 engine models)
(See D7 OIL COOLER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

Oil pan
(See D8 OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Oil pump
(See D10 OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION

OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION
OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION

A6E331001003W01

Warning
• Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your
skin by washing with soap and water immediately after working with engine oil.
• Hot engines and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it and the
engine oil have cooled.
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Remove the oil pressure switch.
3. Screw the SST into the oil pressure switch
installation hole.
4. Warm up the engine to normal operating
temperature.
5. Run the engine at the specified speed, and note
the gauge readings.
• If the pressure is not as specified, inspect for
the cause and repair or replace as necessary.
Note
• The oil pressure can vary with oil viscosity
and temperature.
Oil pressure [Oil temperature: 100 ° C{212°° F}]:
L8, LF :
234521 kPa {2.395.31 kgf/cm2,33.9
75.5 psi} min. [ 3,000rpm]
L3 :
395649 kPa {4.036.61 kgf/cm2, 57.3
94.1 psi} min. [ 3,000rpm]

AME3310W001

6. Stop the engine and wait until it is cool.
7. Remove the SST.
Caution
• Any sealant stuck at the end of the oil pressure switch can cause operation malfunction of the oil
pressure switch.
Be sure there is no sealant at the end of the oil pressure switch.
8. Apply silicone sealant to the oil pressure switch
threads as shown.
9. Install the oil pressure switch.
Tightening torque:
1218 N·m {1.21.8 kgf·m, 913 ft·lbf}
10. Install the under cover.
11. Start the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
• If the oil leaks, specify the faulty part and
repair or replace it.
AME3310W002

End Of Sie

ENGINE OIL

ENGINE OIL
ENGINE OIL INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A6E331214001W01

Position the vehicle on level ground.
Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
Stop the engine and wait for 5 min.
Remove the dipstick.
Verify that the oil level is between the F and L marks on the dipstick and check the engine oil condition.
• If the oil level is below the L mark, add the oil.

End Of Sie

ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT

A6E331214001W02

Warning
• Hot engines and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it and the
engine oil has cooled.
• A vehicle that is lifted but not securely supported on safety stands is dangerous. It can slip or fall,
causing death or serious injury. Never work around or under a lifted vehicle if it is not securely
supported on safety stands.
• Continuous exposure to USED engine oil has caused skin cancer in laboratory mice. Protect your
skin by washing with soap and water immediately after working with engine oil.
Caution
• In case you spill engine oil on the front pipe, wipe it off completely. If you fail to wipe the spilled
oil, it will produce a white smoke because of the heat.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Position the vehicle on level ground.
Remove the oil filler cap and the oil pan drain plug and oil filter drain.
Drain the engine oil into a container.
Install the oil filter drain plug with the new O-ring.
Tightening torque (oil filter drain plug):
910 N·m {91.8101.9 kgf·cm, 79.788.4 in·lbf}

5. Clean the flange surface (seal rubber) of the oil pan drain plug, then install the oil pan drain plug.
Tightening torque (oil pan drain plug):
2530 N·m {2.63.0 kgf·m, 18.821.6 ft·lbf}
Note
• The amount of residual oil in the engine can vary according to the replacement method, oil temperature,
etc. Verify the oil level after engine oil replacement.
6. Refill the engine with the specified type and amount of engine oil.
Oil capacity (Approximate quantity)
L {US qt, Imp qt}
Item
Total
(dry engine)
Oil replacement
Oil and oil filter
replacement

L8
4.6
{4.8, 4.0}
3.9
{4.0, 3.4}
4.3
{4.5, 3.8}

Engine
LF
4.6
{4.8, 4.0}
3.9
{4.0, 3.0}
4.3
{4.5, 3.8}

L3
4.2
{4.4, 3.6}
3.1
{3.3, 2.7}
3.5
{3.7, 3.1}

Note
• The maintenance intervals on scheduled maintenance table (See GI33 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
TABLE) can only be supported by the use of following oils.

ENGINE OIL
Recommended engine oil
Market

Item
Grade

Viscosity (SAE)

Remarks

Europe
API SJ
ACEA A1 or A3

API SL
ILSAC GF-3

5W-30

5W-20

Mazda genuine
DEXELIA oil

Except Europe
API SG, SH, SJ, SL
ILSAC GF-2, GF-3
40, 30, 20,
20W-20, 10W-30,
10W-40, 10W-50,
20W-40, 15W-40,
20W-50, 15W-50,
5W-20, 5W-30

7. Refit the oil filler cap.
8. Run the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
9. Inspect the oil level.
• If necessary, add oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL INSPECTION.)
10. Start the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
• If the oil leaks, specify the faulty part and repair or replace it.

End Of Sie

OIL FILTER

OIL FILTER
OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT
For Europe (LF and L3 engine models)

A6E331414300W01

Caution
• To avoid damage to the oil filter, use only specified oil filter.
1. Remove the oil filter drain plug.
2. Untighten the oil filter cover for 2 turns and drain
the engine oil.
Note
• Oil could be easily drained when the air is in
the filter.

AME3314W001

3. Remove the oil filter.
4. Use a clean rag to wipe off the mounting surface on
the oil filter adapter and the oil filter cover.
5. Apply clean oil to new O-ring of a new oil filter and a
new oil filter drain plug.
6. Install the oil filter, oil filter drain plug, and oil filter
cover.
7. Tighten the oil filter cover and oil filter drain plug.
Tightening torque:
Oil filter cover: 3035 N·m {30.53.56 kgf·cm,
22.225.8 in·lbf}
Oil filter drain plug: 9.011 N·m {91.8112.1
kgf·cm, 79.697.3 in·lbf}
8. Start the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
9. Inspect the oil level.
• If necessary, add oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL
INSPECTION.)

AME3314W002

End Of Sie

OIL COOLER

OIL COOLER
OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E331819900W01

LF, L3
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
3. Remove the oil filter cover, and drain the engine oil into a container. (See D6 OIL FILTER REPLACEMENT.)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
5. Use a clean rag to wipe off the mounting surface
on the oil cooler.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Inspect the oil level.
• If necessary, add oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL
INSPECTION.)
8. Start the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
• If the oil leaks, specify the faulty part and
repair or replace it.
1
2

Water hose
Oil cooler

AME3318W002

End Of Sie

OIL PAN

OIL PAN
OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E332010040W01

Warning
• Hot engine and engine oil can cause severe burns. Turn off the engine and wait until it and the
engine oil have cooled.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the under cover.
Drain the engine oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the engine front cover. (See B10 TIMING CHAIN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspect the oil level. (See D4 ENGINE OIL INSPECTION.)
Start the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
• If the oil leaks, specify the faulty part and repair or replace it.

Oil level gauge pipe

AME3320W001

Oil pan (See D9 Oil Pan Installation Note)

OIL PAN
Oil Pan Installation Note
1. Use a square ruler to unite the oil pan and the
cylinder block junction side on the engine front
cover side.

AME3320W002

2. Apply silicone sealant to the oil pressure switch
threads as shown.

AME3320W003

3. Tighten the bolts in the order shown.

AME3320W004

End Of Sie

OIL PUMP

OIL PUMP
OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Drain the engine oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the oil pan. (See D8 OIL PAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Inspect the engine oil level. (See D4 ENGINE OIL INSPECTION.)
Start the engine and inspect for oil leakage.
• If the oil leaks, specify the faulty part and repair or replace it.
8. Inspect the oil pressure. (See D3 OIL PRESSURE INSPECTION.)

A6E332214100W01

AME3322W001
.

1
2
3
4

Oil strainer
Oil pump chain guide
Oil pump chain tensioner
Oil pump chain tensioner spring

D10

5
6
7

Oil pump chain
Oil pump sprocket
(See D11 Oil Pump Sprocket Removal /
Installation Note)
Oil pump

OIL PUMP
Oil Pump Sprocket Removal / Installation Note
1. Install the SST to the oil pump sprocket to stop
the oil pump from turn in.

AME3322W002

End Of Sie

D11

COOLING SYSTEM

LOCATION INDEX .................................................E-2
LOCATION INDEX.............................................. E-2
COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS ..........E-3
COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS ....... E-3
ENGINE COOLANT................................................ E-3
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION..........E-3
ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT .................E-3
ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION ....E-4
RADIATOR CAP..................................................... E-5
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION ........................... E-5
RADIATOR ............................................................. E-6
RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............. E-6
THERMOSTAT .......................................................E-7
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... E-7
THERMOSTAT INSPECTION .............................E-8
WATER PUMP........................................................E-8
WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........ E-8
FAN MOTOR .......................................................... E-9
COOLING FAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... E-9
COOLING FAN MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION............................................... E-10
COOLING FAN MOTOR INSPECTION ............. E-11

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
LOCATION INDEX

A6E360001002W01

AME3602N001
.

1
2
3

Radiator
(See E6 RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Radiator cap
(See E5 RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION)
Thermostat
(See E7 THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See E8 THERMOSTAT INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

4
5
6

Water pump
(See E8 WATER PUMP REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Cooling fan
(See E9 COOLING FAN REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Cooling fan motor
(See E10 COOLING FAN MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See E11 COOLING FAN MOTOR INSPECTION)

COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS , ENGINE COOLANT

COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS

A6E361001004W01

Warning
• Never remove the radiator cap or loosen the radiator drain plug while the engine is running, or
when the engine and radiator are hot. Scalding coolant and steam may shoot out and cause
serious injury. It may also damage the engine and cooling system.
• Turn off the engine and wait until it is cool. Even then, be very careful when removing the cap.
Wrap a thick cloth around it and slowly turn it counterclockwise to the first stop. Step back while
the pressure escapes.
• When you are sure all the pressure is gone, press down on the cap using the cloth, turn it, and
remove it.

End Of Sie

ENGINE COOLANT
ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION

A6E361215001W01

1. Verify that the coolant level in the coolant reservoir is between the F and L marks.
• If the engine coolant level is below L, remove the radiator cap and add coolant. (See E3 COOLING
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)

End Of Sie

ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT

A6E361215001W03

Warning
• Drain the engine coolant while the engine is cold, otherwise it may burn you and cause serious
injury.
1. Remove the radiator cap.

AME3612W001

2. Remove the radiator drain plug.
3. Drain the coolant into a container.
4. Flush the cooling system with water until all
traces of color are gone.
5. Let the system drain completely.
6. Tighten the radiator drain plug.
7. Fill the coolant into the reservoir up to the FULL
mark on the coolant reservoir.
8. Fully install the radiator cap.
Caution
• If the coolant temperature becomes too
high, stop the engine to prevent it from
overheating.

AME3612W002

ENGINE COOLANT
9. Start the engine and let it idle until the cooling fan operates.
10. After engine warms up, perform the following steps.
(1) Run the engine at 2,500 rpm for 5 min.
(2) Run the engine at 3,000 rpm for 5 s, then return to idling.
(3) Repeat Step (2) several times.
(4) Run the engine at idle for 1 min.
11. Stop the engine and wait until it is cool.
12. Remove the radiator cap.
13. Check the coolant level.
• If It is low, repeat Steps 69.
14. Install the radiator cap.
15. Inspect for coolant leakage.
• If not as specified, repair or replace the radiator cap.

End Of Sie

ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION

A6E361215001W04

Inspect the coolant level.
Remove the radiator cap.
Clean the mounting surface of the rediator cap and the upper radiator hose.
Connect a radiator cap tester and the radiator cap tester to the reservoir filler port.
Apply specified pressure to the radiator.
Pressure
127 kPa { 1.3 kgf/cm2, 18 psi}

6. Verify that the pressure is held.
• If not, inspect the system for coolant leakage.
If the coolant leaks from the upper hose
attachment part, replace the upper hose
and the clamp.
If the coolant leaks from the main body of
the radiator (caulking part), replace the
radiator.
AME3612W003

End Of Sie

RADIATOR CAP

RADIATOR CAP
RADIATOR CAP INSPECTION

A6E361415201W01

Warning
• Never remove the radiator cap while the engine is running, or when the engine and radiator are
hot. Scalding coolant and steam may shoot out and cause serious injury. It may also damage the
engine and cooling system.
• Turn off the engine and wait until it is cool. Even then, be very careful when removing the cap.
Wrap a thick cloth around it and slowly turn it counterclockwise to the first stop. Step back while
the pressure escapes.
• When you are sure all the pressure is gone, press down on the cap using the cloth, turn it, and
remove it.
1. Clean the radiator cap negative pressure valve and tha sealed part.
2. Inspect the crack or turn over on sealed of the radiator cap.
• If not as specified, repace the radiator cap.
3. Fill the radiator cap test adopter with the water or the engine coolant to the full level and attach the radiator cap
to the adapter.
4. Hold the radiator cap downward and apply pressure gradually. Verify that the pressure become held for 10 s
within the specification.
• If the pressure will not stable within the specification, replace the radiator cap.
Pressure
113142 kPa
{ 1.11.4 kgf/cm2, 1520 psi}

AME3614W001

End Of Sie

RADIATOR

RADIATOR
RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the cooling fan. (See E9 COOLING FAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the oil hose. (ATX)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Refill the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
Inspect the engine coolant leakage. (See E4 ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION.)

A6E361615200W01

AME3616W001

Water hose

End Of Sie

Radiator

THERMOSTAT

THERMOSTAT
THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the plug hole plate.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Remove the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the washer tank.
Remove the P/S oil pump.

A6E361815171W01

Note
• Remove the P/S oil pump with hoses and pipe still connected.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Refill the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
Inspect the engine coolant leakage. (See E4 ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION.)

11.

AME3618W001

1
2

Bypass hose
Lower hose

Thermostat assembly

End Of Sie

THERMOSTAT, WATER PUMP
THERMOSTAT INSPECTION

A6E361815171W02

1. Inspect the thermostat for the following.
• Closed valve in room temperature
• Opening temperature and lift of the valve
If not as specified, replace the thermostat.
Initial-opening temperature
(°C {°F})
Full-open temperature
(°C {°F})
Full-open lift
(mm {in})

80.084.0 {176183.2}
97 {206.6}
More than 8.0 {0.31}

End Of Sie

WATER PUMP
WATER PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E362015010W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.) (See E3 ENGINE
COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
3. Loosen the water pump pulley bolt to remove the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Refill the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
7. Inspect the engine coolant leakage. (See E4 ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION.)

AME3620W001

Water pump pulley

Water pump

FAN MOTOR
End Of Sie

FAN MOTOR
COOLING FAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the shroud panel. (See S119 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the A/C pipe stay.
Remove the ATX pipe stay (ATX).
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E362215025W01

AME3621W001

1
2

Cooling fan harness, connector
Coolant reservoir hose

Cooling fan assembly

End Of Sie

FAN MOTOR
COOLING FAN MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the cooling fan. (See E9 COOLING FAN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E362215025W02

AME3621W002

1
2

Cooling fan No.2
Cooling fan No.1

End Of Sie

E10

3
4

Cooling fan motor No.2
Cooling fan motor No.1

FAN MOTOR
COOLING FAN MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
2. Connect battery positive voltage and an ammeter to the fan motor connector.
3. Verify that the fan motor operates smoothly at the standard current draw.
• If not as spcifid, replace the fan motor.

A6E362215025W03

AME3621W003

Part name

Cooling fan motor No.1

6.6

Cooling fan motor No.2

6.6

Current (A)
LF
6.6 (Except Israel)
10 (For Israel)
6.6(Except Israel)
10 (For Israel)

L3
5.9 (Except Israel)
10 (For Israel)
10

End Of Sie

E11

FUEL AND EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS

LOCATION INDEX ................................................. F-3
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM ......................................... F-3
FUEL SYSTEM .................................................... F-4
EMISSION SYSTEM............................................ F-6
CONTROL SYSTEM............................................ F-7
ENGINE TUNE-UP ................................................. F-8
IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION ........................ F-8
IDLE SPEED INSPECTION................................. F-8
IDLE MIXTURE INSPECTION............................. F-9
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM.......................................... F-10
VACUUM HOSE ROUTING DIAGRAM ............. F-10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ F-10
VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD)
SHUTTER VALVE INSPECTION (L3) ............ F-12
VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (L3) .......... F-13
VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CHECK VALVE
(ONE-WAY) INSPECTION (L3) ...................... F-13
IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
INSPECTION .................................................. F-13
VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS)
SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION (L3)........................................... F-14
VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS)
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION (L3)........................................... F-14
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL SYSTEM (VTCS)
SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION .................................................. F-15
VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION.................. F-15
ACCELERATOR PEDAL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ F-16
ACCELERATOR CABLE
INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT......................... F-16
FUEL SYSTEM ..................................................... F-17
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE ...................... F-17
AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE ......................... F-17
FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......... F-18
FUEL TANK INSPECTION ................................ F-19
NONRETURN VALVE INSPECTION ................ F-20
FUEL LINE PRESSURE INSPECTION ............. F-20
FUEL PUMP UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ F-22
FUEL PUMP UNIT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... F-24
FUEL PUMP UNIT INSPECTION ...................... F-25
FUEL INJECTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ F-28
FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION ........................ F-31
PRESSURE REGULATOR INSPECTION ......... F-34
PULSATION DAMPER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ F-34
PULSATION DAMPER INSPECTION ............... F-34
EXHAUST SYSTEM ............................................. F-35
EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION ................... F-35
EXHAUST SYSTEM

REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ F-35
EMISSION SYSTEM ............................................. F-38
CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION ............. F-38
EVAPORATIVE GAS CHECK VALVE
(ONE-WAY) INSPECTION (L.H.D.) ................ F-38
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ F-38
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION ....... F-39
EGR VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......... F-39
EGR VALVE INSPECTION................................ F-40
PCV VALVE INSPECTION ................................ F-41
THREE-WAY CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC)
INSPECTION .................................................. F-41
CONTROL SYSTEM............................................. F-43
PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...................... F-43
PCM INSPECTION ............................................ F-45
PCM CONFIGURATION .................................... F-50
INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................. F-50
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................. F-51
THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................. F-51
MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP)
SENSOR INSPECTION .................................. F-52
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............ F-53
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT)
SENSOR INSPECTION .................................. F-53
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR INSPECTION .................................. F-54
CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............ F-54
CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR INSPECTION .................................. F-55
KNOCK SENSOR INSPECTION ....................... F-56
KNOCK SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ F-56
HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
INSPECTION .................................................. F-56
POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP)
SWITCHINSPECTION .................................... F-58
CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION ...................... F-59
NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION .................... F-59
BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (BARO)
SENSOR INSPECTION .................................. F-60
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC ................................... F-61
FOREWORD...................................................... F-61
OBD PENDING TROUBLE CODES .................. F-62
OBD FREEZE FRAME DATA ............................ F-62
OBD ON-BOARD SYSTEM READINESS TESTF-62
OBD DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST
RESULTS........................................................ F-62
OBD READ/CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC TEST
RESULTS........................................................ F-62
OBD PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION (PID)
ACCESS ......................................................... F-62
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST ...................... F-62

OBD DRIVE MODE............................................ F-64
DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS. F-65
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE ............... F-66
KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST ................................. F-66
AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE ......................... F-66
DTC TABLE ....................................................... F-67
DTC P0010 ........................................................ F-70
DTC P0011 ........................................................ F-72
DTC P0012 ........................................................ F-73
DTC P0031 ........................................................ F-74
DTC P0032 ........................................................ F-76
DTC P0037 ........................................................ F-78
DTC P0038 ........................................................ F-80
DTC P0101 ........................................................ F-81
DTC P0102 ........................................................ F-83
DTC P0103 ........................................................ F-85
DTC P0107 ........................................................ F-86
DTC P0108 ........................................................ F-88
DTC P0111 ........................................................ F-90
DTC P0112 ........................................................ F-91
DTC P0113 ........................................................ F-92
DTC P0117 ........................................................ F-94
DTC P0118 ........................................................ F-96
DTC P0121 ........................................................ F-98
DTC P0122 ...................................................... F-100
DTC P0123 ...................................................... F-102
DTC P0125 ...................................................... F-104
DTC P0131, P0132 .......................................... F-105
DTC P0133 ...................................................... F-108
DTC P0134 ...................................................... F-110
DTC P0138 ...................................................... F-112
DTC P0140 ...................................................... F-114
DTC P0171 ...................................................... F-116
DTC P0172 ...................................................... F-119
DTC P0300 ...................................................... F-121
DTC P0301, P0302, P0303, P0304 ................. F-124
DTC P0327 ...................................................... F-126
DTC P0328 ...................................................... F-128
DTC P0335 ...................................................... F-130
DTC P0340 ...................................................... F-132
DTC P0403 ...................................................... F-134
DTC P0420 ...................................................... F-137
DTC P0443 ...................................................... F-138
DTC P0480 ...................................................... F-140
DTC P0500 ...................................................... F-142
DTC P0505 ...................................................... F-144
DTC P0506 ...................................................... F-145
DTC P0507 ...................................................... F-147
DTC P0511 ...................................................... F-148
DTC P0550 ...................................................... F-150
DTC P0602 ...................................................... F-152
DTC P0610 ...................................................... F-152
DTC P0661 ...................................................... F-153
DTC P0662 ...................................................... F-154
DTC P0703 ...................................................... F-156
DTC P0704 ...................................................... F-158
DTC P0850 ...................................................... F-160
DTC P1410 ...................................................... F-162
DTC P1562 ...................................................... F-164
DTC P2006 ...................................................... F-166
DTC P2009 ...................................................... F-168
DTC P2010 ...................................................... F-170
DTC P2228 ...................................................... F-172
DTC P2229 ...................................................... F-174
DTC P2502 ...................................................... F-176

DTC P2503....................................................... F-177
DTC P2504....................................................... F-178
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ F-181
ENGINE SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ... F-181
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART ......................... F-182
NO.1 MELTING OF MAIN OR OTHER
FUSES .......................................................... F-186
NO.2 MIL ILLUMINATES ................................. F-186
NO.3 WILL NOT CRANK ................................. F-187
NO.4 HARD TO START/LONG CRANK/
ERRATIC START/ERRATIC CRANK ........... F-189
NO.5 ENGINE STALLS-AFTER
START/AT IDLE ............................................ F-191
NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL
NOT START.................................................. F-195
NO.7 SLOW RETURN TO IDLE ...................... F-198
NO.8 ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING
IDLE .............................................................. F-199
NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON ............................ F-201
NO.10 LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING
DECELERATION .......................................... F-202
NO.11 ENGINE STALLS/QUITS, ENGINE
RUNS ROUGH, MISSES, BUCK/JERK,
HESITATION/STUMBLE, SURGES ............. F-204
NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF POWERACCELERATION/CRUISE............................ F-207
NO.13 KNOCKING/PINGINGACCELERATION/CRUISE............................ F-210
NO.14 POOR FUEL ECONOMY...................... F-211
NO.15 EMISSION COMPLIANCE.................... F-213
NO.16 HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION/
LEAKAGE ..................................................... F-214
NO.17 COOLING SYSTEM
CONCERNS-OVERHEATING ...................... F-215
NO.18 COOLING SYSTEM
CONCERNS-RUNS COLD ........................... F-216
NO.19 EXHAUST SMOKE ............................... F-217
NO.20 FUEL ODOR
(IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT) .................... F-218
NO.21 ENGINE NOISE .................................... F-219
NO.22 VIBRATION CONCERNS (ENGINE).... F-220
NO.23 A/C DOES NOT WORK
SUFFICIENTLY............................................. F-220
NO.24 A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C
COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY ... F-221
NO.25 A/C IS NOT CUT OFF UNDER
WIDE OPEN THROTTLE CONDITIONS ...... F-221
NO.26 EXHAUST SULPHUR SMELL .............. F-222
NO.27 CONSTANT VOLTAGE ........................ F-223
NO.28 SPARK PLUG CONDITION.................. F-225
INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING .................................. F-227
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM
OPERATION INSPECTION .......................... F-229

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM

A6E390013000W01

A6E3910W018
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Air cleaner
(See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
IAC valve
(See F13 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
INSPECTION)
VIS control solenoid valve (L3)
(See F14 VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS)
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (L3))
Variable tumble control solenoid valve
(See F15 VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION)
VAD shutter valve (L3)
(See F12 VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) SHUTTER
VALVE INSPECTION (L3))
VAD control solenoid valve (L3)
(See F13 VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (L3))
VIS shutter valve actuator (L3)
(See F14 VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS)
SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR INSPECTION (L3))

9
10
11
12
13

VTCS shutter valve actuator
(See F15 VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SYSTEM (VTCS) SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
VAD Check valve (one-way) (L3)
(See F13 VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CHECK
VALVE (ONE-WAY) INSPECTION (l3))
Accelerator pedal (R.H.D.)
(See F16 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Accelerator cable (R.H.D.)
(See F16 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Accelerator pedal (L.H.D.)
(See F16 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Accelerator cable (L.H.D.)
(See F16 ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
End
Sie
FUELOf
SYSTEM
Engine Room Side

A6E390001006W01

A6E3912W015

LOCATION INDEX
Fuel tank side

A6E3912W045
.

2
3

Fuel tank
(See F18 FUEL TANK REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See F19 FUEL TANK INSPECTION)
Nonreturn valve
(See F20 NONRETURN VALVE INSPECTION)
Fuel pump unit
(See F22 FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See F24 FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
(See F25 FUEL PUMP UNIT INSPECTION)

6
7

Fuel injector
(See F28 FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See F31 FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION)
Pulsation damper
(See F34 PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See F34 PULSATION DAMPER INSPECTION)
Fuel pump relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Check connector

End Of Sie

LOCATION INDEX
EMISSION SYSTEM

A6E390001074W01

Engine room side

A6E3916W017
.

EGR valve
(See F39 EGR VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See F40 EGR VALVE INSPECTION)
Purge solenoid valve
(See F38 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See F39 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION)
Evaporative gas check valve (one-way) (L.H.D.)
(See F38 EVAPORATIVE GAS CHECK VALVE
(ONE-WAY) INSPECTION (L.H.D.))

End Of Sie

4
5
6
7

PCV valve
(See F41 PCV VALVE INSPECTION)
TWC
(See F41 THREE-WAY CATALYTIC
CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION)
Charcoal canister (L.H.D.)
(See F38 CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION)
Charcoal canister (R.H.D.)
(See F38 CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM

A6E390001074W02

A6E3940W500
.

2
3
4

MAF/IAT sensor
(See F50 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR INSPECTION)
(See F51 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
INSPECTION)
TP sensor
(See F51 THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR
INSPECTION)
MAP sensor
(See F52 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE
(MAP) SENSOR INSPECTION)
ECT sensor
(See F53 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See F53 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE
(ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION
CKP sensor
(See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR INSPECTION)
(See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
CMP sensor
(See F55 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR INSPECTION)

8
9
10
11
12
13

Knock sensor
(See F56 KNOCK SENSOR INSPECTION)
(See F56 KNOCK SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Heated oxygen sensor
(See F56 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S)
INSPECTION)
PSP switch
(See F58 POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP)
SWITCH INSPECTION)
Clutch switch
(See F59 CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION)
Neutral switch
(See F59 NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION)
BARO sensor
(See F60 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (BARO)
SENSOR INSPECTION)
PCM (U.K. specs.)
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION)
(See F50 PCM CONFIGURATION)
PCM (L.H.D.)
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION)
(See F50 PCM CONFIGURATION)

ENGINE TUNE-UP
End Of Sie

ENGINE TUNE-UP

IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION

A6E390802000W01

Note
• Ignition timing is not adjustable.
• Ignition timing verification requires WDS or equivalent.
1. Turn off the electrical loads.
2. Warm up the engine as follows.
(1) Start the engine.
(2) Maintain the engine speed at approx. 3,000 rpm until the cooling fans start to operate.
(3) Release the accelerator pedal.
(4) Wait until the cooling fans stop.
3. Verify that the ignition timing (WDS: SPARKADV PID) is within the specification using WDS or equivalent.
Ignition timing
Approx. BTDC 10 degree
4. Verify that ingestion timing advances when the engine speed increases gradually.

End Of Sie

IDLE SPEED INSPECTION

A6E390802000W02

Note
• Ignition timing is not adjustable.
• Ignition timing verification requires WDS or equivalent.
1. Turn off the electrical loads.
2. Warm up the engine as follows.
(1) Start the engine.
(2) Maintain the engine speed at approx. 3,000 rpm until the cooling fans start to operate.
(3) Release the accelerator pedal.
(4) Wait until the cooling fans stop.
3. Verify that the idle speed (WDS: RPM PID) is within the specification using WDS or equivalent.
Idle speed (L8 engine model)
Condition

Engine speed (rpm)*1
650750

Electrical loads*2 ON
P/S ON
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) OFF
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) ON

650750

No load

700800
700800
700800

Idle speed (LF engine MTX model)
Condition

Engine speed (rpm)*1
600700

Electrical loads*2 ON
P/S ON
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) OFF
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) ON

650750

No load

650750
700800
700800

ENGINE TUNE-UP
Idle speed (LF engine ATX model)
Condition

Engine speed (rpm)*1
650750

Electrical loads*2 ON
P/S ON
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) OFF
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) ON

650750

No load

Idle speed (L3 engine model)

650750
650750
700800

Condition

Engine speed (rpm)*1
600700

Electrical loads*2 ON
P/S ON
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) OFF
A/C ON and refrigerant
pressure switch (middle) ON

650750

No load

650750
700800
700800

*1 : Excludes temporary idle speed drop just after the electrical loads are turned on.
*2 : Blower motor is operating at high speed. Headlight switch is turned on. Rear window defroster switch is turned
on. Cooling fans are operating.

End Of
Sie
IDLE
MIXTURE
INSPECTION

A6E390802000W03

1. Turn off the electrical loads.
2. Warm up the engine as follows.
(1) Start the engine.
(2) Maintain the engine speed at approx. 3,000 rpm until the cooling fans start to operate.
(3) Release the accelerator pedal.
(4) Wait until the cooling fans stop.
3. Verify that the idle speed and ignition timing are within the specification. (See F8 IDLE SPEED INSPECTION.)
(See F8 IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION.)
4. Insert an exhaust gas analyzer to the tailpipe.
5. Verify that the CO and HC concentrations are within the regulation.

End Of Sie

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
VACUUM HOSE ROUTING DIAGRAM

A6E391020030W01

A6E3910W034

End Of Sie SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
INTAKE-AIR

A6E391013000W01

Warning
• When the engine and intake-air system are hot, they can badly burn. Turn off the engine and wait
until they are cool before removing the intake-air system.
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep
sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the Fuel Line
Safety Procedure. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

F10

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
4. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

A6E3910W019

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Air cleaner cover
Air cleaner element
Air cleaner case
Resonance chamber
(See F12 Resonance Chamber Removal Note)
VAD control solenoid valve (L3)
VAD shutter valve (L3)
Mass air flow sensor
Vacuum hose (purge solenoid valve)
(See F12 Vacuum Hose (Purge Solenoid Valve)
Installation Note)
Purge solenoid valve

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Air hose
Throttle body
Variable tumble control solenoid valve
VIS control solenoid valve (L3)
Fuel injector connector
Plastic fuel hose
(See F28 Plastic Fuel Hose Removal Note)
(See F30 Plastic Fuel Hose Installation Note)
Fuel distributor
Intake manifold
IAC valve
VAD check valve (L3)

F11

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
Resonance Chamber Removal Note
1. Remove the front mudguard (LH) before removing the resonance chamber.
Vacuum Hose (Purge Solenoid Valve) Installation Note
1. Fit the vacuum hose (purge solenoid valve) onto
the respective fittings, and install clamps as
shown.

A6E3910W021

End Of Sie AIR DUCT (VAD) SHUTTER VALVE INSPECTION (L3)
VARIABLE
1. Remove the air cleaner case. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VAD shutter valve actuator.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the VAD shutter
valve actuator.
4. Apply vacuum and verify that the rod moves.
• If the rod dose not move, replace the air
cleaner.

A6E391013000W02

A6E3910W031

Vacuum
kPa {mmHg, inHg}
Below 10 {75, 3.0}
Above 35 {263, 10.4}

Rod movement
Starts to move
Fully pulled

A6E3910W032

End Of Sie

F12

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (L3)

A6E391013000W03

1. Remove the VAD control solenoid valve. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect airflow between the ports under the
following conditions.
• If not as specified, replace the VAD control
solenoid valve.
• If as specified, carry out the Circuit Open/
Short Inspection.

F
A6E3910W036
A6E3910W037
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harness for open or
short (continuity check).
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
VAD control solenoid valve terminal B
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 4C
VAD control solenoid valve terminal A
(harness-side) and main relay terminal C
(harness-side)

Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
VAD control solenoid valve terminal B
(harness-side) and body GND
VAD control solenoid valve terminal A (harness-side) and power supply

A6E3910W038

End Of Sie

VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CHECK VALVE (ONE-WAY) INSPECTION (L3)

A6E391013000W04

1. Remove the VAD check valve (one-way). (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
2. Blow through A and verify that air flows from B.
3. Blow through B and verify that air does not flow from A.
• If not as specified, replace the VAD check valve (one-way).

A6E3910W039

End
Sie
IDLEOf
AIR
CONTROL (IAC) VALVE INSPECTION

A6E391020661W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Operation Test
1. Carry out the Idle Air Control Inspection. (See F229 Idle Air Control System Inspection.)
• If not as specified, perform the further inspection for the IAC valve.
Resistance Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.

F13

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
2. Disconnect the IAC valve connector.
3. Measure the resistance between the IAC valve terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the IAC valve. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
• If as specified but the Operation Test is failed, carry out the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Specification
Ambient temperature (°°C {°°F})
23 {73}

Resistance (ohms)
8.810.6

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short (continuity check).
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
IAC valve terminal A (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 4G
IAC valve terminal B (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 4J

A6E3910W003

Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
IAC valve terminal A (harness-side) and power supply
IAC valve terminal A (harness-side) and GND
IAC valve terminal B (harness-side) and power supply
IAC valve terminal B (harness-side) and GND

End Of Sie

VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS) SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR INSPECTION (L3)
1. Remove the air hose. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VIS shutter
valve actuator.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the VIS shutter valve
actuator.
4. Apply vacuum and verify that the rod moves.
• If the rod dose not move, replace the intake
manifold.
Vacuum
kPa {mmHg, inHg}
Below 2.7 {20, 0.7 }
Above 34.7 {260, 10.2 }

A6E391013000W05

Rod movement
Starts to move
Fully pulled
A6E3910W008

End
Of Sie INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (L3)
VARIABLE

A6E391013000W06

1. Remove the VIS control solenoid valve. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect airflow between the ports under the
following conditions.
• If not as specified, replace the VIS control
solenoid valve.
• If as specified, carry out the Circuit Open/
Short Inspection.

A6E3910W010
A6E3910W009

F14

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harness for open or
short (continuity check).
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
VIS control solenoid valve terminal A
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 4R
VIS control solenoid valve terminal B
(harness-side) and main relay terminal C
(harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
VIS control solenoid valve terminal A (harness-side) and body GND
VIS control solenoid valve terminal B (harness-side) and power supply

F
A6E3910W011

End Of Sie

VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL SYSTEM (VTCS) SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR INSPECTION
1. Remove the air hose. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose from the VTCS
shutter valve actuator.
3. Connect a vacuum pump to the VTCS shutter
valve actuator.
4. Apply vacuum and verify that the rod moves.
• If the rod dose not move, replace the intake
manifold.
Vacuum
kPa {mmHg, inHg}
Below 2.7 {20, 0.7 }
Above 34.7 {260, 10.2 }

A6E391013000W07

Rod movement
Starts to move
Fully pulled

A6E3910W015

End Of Sie

VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION
1. Remove the variable tumble control solenoid valve. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect airflow between the ports under the following conditions.
• If not as specified, replace the variable tumble control solenoid valve.
• If as specified, carry out the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.

A6E391013000W08

A6E3910W009

A6E3910W016

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

F15

INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
2. Inspect the following wiring harness for open or
short (continuity check).
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
Variable tumble control solenoid valve
terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal
4T
Variable tumble control solenoid valve
terminal A (harness-side) and main relay
terminal C (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
Variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal B (harness-side) and body GND
Variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal A (harness-side) and power supply

A6E3910W017

End Of Sie

ACCELERATOR PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E391041600W01

1
2

Accelerator cable
F16 Accelerator Cable Installation Note)
Accelerator pedal

Accelerator Cable Installation Note
1. Carry out the ACCELERATOR CABLE
INSTALLATION/ADJUSTMENT procedure after
installing the accelerator cable. (See F16
ACCELERATOR CABLE INSPECTION/
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E3910W033

End Of Sie

ACCELERATOR CABLE INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT
1. Verify that the throttle valve is closed.
2. Pull the accelerator cable in the directions of A
and B, and measure the free play.
• If not as specified, adjust by turning locknut C.

A6E391041660W01

Free play
1.03.0 mm {0.040.11 in}
Tightening torpue
9.814.7 N·m {100150 kgf·cm, 87130
in·lbf}
A6E3910W030

End Of Sie

F16

FUEL SYSTEM

FUEL SYSTEM
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE

A6E391201006W01

Warning
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always keep
sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the following Fuel
Line Safety Procedure.
Fuel Line Safety Procedure
Note
• Fuel in the fuel system is under high pressure also when the engine is not running.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the fuel-filler cap and release the pressure in the fuel tank.
Remove the fuel pump relay.
Start the engine.
After the engine stalls, crank the engine several
times.
5. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
6. Install the fuel pump relay.

A6E3912W014

End
Of REPAIR
Sie
AFTER
PROCEDURE

A6E391201006W02

Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. When installing the fuel hose, observe Fuel Leakage Inspection described below.
Fuel Leakage Inspection
Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Always carry out the following procedure with the engine stopped.
Caution
• Connecting the wrong check connector terminal may possibly cause malfunction. Carefully
connect the specified terminal only.
1. Short the check connector terminal F/P to body
GND using a jumper wire.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON position to operate
the fuel pump.
3. Pressurize the system in this way for at least 5
minutes to be sure of no leakage.
• If there is fuel leakage, inspect the fuel hoses,
hose clamps, and fuel pipe sealing surface,
and replace as necessary.
4. After repair, assemble the system and repeat
Steps 1 to 3.
A6E3912W037

End Of Sie

F17

FUEL SYSTEM
FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E391242110W01

Warning
• Repairing a fuel tank that has not been properly steam cleaned can be dangerous. Explosion or
fire may cause death or serious injury. Always properly steam clean a fuel tank before repairing it.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, do not damage the sealing surface of
the fuel pump unit when removing or installing.
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting using a cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is
free of foreign material.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Level the vehicle.
Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the fuel pump unit. (See F22 FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Siphon the fuel from the fuel tank.
Remove the middle pipe. (See F35 EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

A6E3912W013

1
2
3

Joint hose
(See F19 Joint Hose Installation Note)
Breather hose
(See F19 Breather Hose Installation Note)
Evaporative hose

F18

4
5
6
7

Fuel tank
Fuel-filler pipe
C-ring
Filler cap

FUEL SYSTEM
Breather Hose Installation Note
1. Fit the breather hose onto the respective fittings,
and install clamps as shown.

F
A6E3912W038

Joint Hose Installation Note
1. Fit the joint hose onto the respective fittings, and
install clamps as shown.

A6E3912W034

End
Sie INSPECTION
FUELOf
TANK

A6E391242110W02

Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting using a cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is
free of foreign material.
Note
• This inspection is for two rollover valves integrated in the fuel tank.
1. Disconnect the plastic fuel hose and the fuel pump unit connector. (See F22 FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the fuel tank with the fuel pump unit. (See F18 FUEL TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Plug the fuel pipe of the fuel pump unit.
4. Connect the pump to port A.
5. Level the fuel tank.
6. Apply pressure of 2.0 kpa {34 mmHg, 1.3
inHg} to port A.
(1) Plug port C and verify there is vacuum from
port B.
• If there is no vacuum, replace the fuel
tank.
7. Apply pressure of +5.9 kPa {+44 mmHg, +1.7
inHg} to port A.
• If there is no airflow, replace the fuel tank.
• If there is airflow, turn the fuel tank
A6E3912W047
upside-down and proceed to next step.

F19

FUEL SYSTEM
8. Turn the fuel tank upside-down and apply
pressure of 2.0 kPa {15 mmHg, 0.6 inHg} to
port A.
(1) Plug port C and verify there is no vacuum
from port B.
• If there is vacuum, replace the fuel tank.

A6E3912W046

End Of Sie VALVE INSPECTION
NONRETURN
1. Remove the fuel pump unit. (See F22 FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Siphon the fuel from the fuel tank.

A6E391242270W01

Note
• Nonreturn valve is integrated in the fuel tank.
• The nonreturn valve is normally closed by the spring force.
3. Verify that the nonreturn valve is closed.
• If the nonreturn valve is stuck open and dose not open even when pulled up by a finger, replace the fuel
tank.
End
Sie PRESSURE INSPECTION
FUELOf
LINE

A6E391201006W03

Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death.
Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete the BEFORE REPAIR
PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting using cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is free
of foreign material.
1. Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Caution
• The quick release connector may be damaged if the tab is turned too far. Do not turn the tab over
the stopper.
3. Disconnect the quick release connector from the fuel tank as follows:
(1) Push the tab on the locking coupler 90 degrees until it stops.
(2) Pull the fuel hose straight back.

F20

FUEL SYSTEM
Note
• The stopper may be removed from the quick
connector. Take care not to loose it.
Reinstall it to the quick release connector
before reconnecting the fuel line.

F
A6E3912W001

• The locking coupler has two internal locking
tabs which retain the pulsation damper pipe.
Be sure that the tab on the locking coupler is
rotated until it stops to release two internal
locking tabs.
4. Push the SST quick release connector into the
fuel pipe and plastic fuel hose into the SST until a
click is heard.

A6E3912W002

5. Turn the lever parallel to the hose of the SST as
shown.
6. Connect the negative battery cable.
7. Verify that the vehicles for AT is at N range and
MT is at neutral position.
8. Start the engine and let it idle. Measure the fuel
line pressure.
• If not as specified, inspect the following:
Zero or low
FP circuit
FP
Fuel line (clogged)
Fuel leakage inside pressure regulator
High
Pressure regulator for high pressure cause

A6E3912W003

Fuel line pressure
375450 kPa {3.94.5 kgf/cm2, 5565 psi}
9. Observe the fuel pressure gauge indicator during heavy acceleration.
10. Verify that the fuel pressure fluctuation is within the specification during the test.
• If not as specified, inspect the following:
PCM
FP
Pulsation damper
Fuel line for improper routing, kinks or leakage
Fuel pressure fluctuation
365450 kPa {3.84.5 kgf/cm2, 5365 psi}
11. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
12. Measure the fuel hold pressure after 5 min.
• If not as specified, inspect the following:
FP hold pressure
Fuel injector for leakage
Fuel line for improper routing, kinks or leakage
Fuel hold pressure
More than 200 kPa {2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi}

F21

FUEL SYSTEM
13. Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE)
14. Disconnect the SST.
Note
• A checker tab is integrated with quick release connector for new plastic fuel hoses. The checker tab will
be released from the quick release connector after it is completely engaged with the fuel pipe.
15. Inspect the plastic fuel hose and fuel pipe sealing
surface for damage and deformation, and replace
as necessary.
• If the quick release connector O-ring is
damaged or has slipped, replace the plastic
fuel hose.
16. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the
sealing surface of the fuel pipe.
17. Reconnect the fuel main hose to the fuel
distributor until a click is heard.
18. Lightly pull and push the quick release connector
a few times by hand and verify that it can move
A6E3912W004
2.03.0 mm {0.080.11 in} and it is connected
securely.
• If quick release connector does not move at all, verify that O-ring is not damaged and slipped, and
reconnect the quick release connector.
19. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

End Of Sie

FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E391213350W01

Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, do not damage the sealing surface of
the fuel pump unit when removing or installing.
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting using a cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is
free of foreign material.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the rear seat cushion.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
.

Service hole cover
Connector
Plastic fuel hose
(See F23 Plastic Fuel Hose Removal Note)
(See F24 Plastic Fuel Hose Installation Note)
Fuel pump cap
(See F23 Fuel Pump Cap Removal Note)
Packing
Fuel pump unit
(See F24 Fuel Pump Unit Installation Note)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

F22

A6E3912W030

FUEL SYSTEM
Plastic Fuel Hose Removal Note
Caution
• The quick release connector may be damaged if the tab is bent excessively. Do not expand the tab
over the stopper.
1. Disconnect the quick release connector.
(1) Push the tab on the locking coupler 90 degrees until it stops.
(2) Pull the fuel hose straight back.
Note
• The stopper may be removed from the quick connector. Take care not to lose it.
Reinstall it to the quick release connector
before reconnecting the fuel line.

A6E3912W001

• The locking coupler has two internal locking
tabs which retain the fuel pipe. Be sure that
the tab on the locking coupler is rotated until
it stops to release two internal locking tabs.

A6E3912W002

2. Cover the disconnected quick release connector
and fuel pipe with vinyl sheets or the like to
prevent them from being scratched or
contaminated with foreign material.

A6E3912W039

Fuel Pump Cap Removal Note
1. Using the SST, remove the fuel pump unit.

A6E3912W036

F23

FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump Unit Installation Note
1. Verify that the fuel tank mark is aligened with the
fuel pump mark as shown.

A6E3912W026

Plastic Fuel Hose Installation Note
Note
• A checker tab is integrated with quick release connector for new plastic fuel hoses. The checker tab will
be released from the quick release connector after it is completely engaged with the fuel pipe.
1. When the retainer is not removed, perform the
following procedure.
(1) Inspect the fuel pump unit sealing surface for
damage and deformation, and replace as
necessary.
• If the quick release connector O-ring is
damaged, replace the plastic fuel hose.

A6E3912W004

(2) Slightly apply clean engine oil to the sealing
surface of the fuel pump unit.
(3) Align the fuel pipe on the fuel pump unit and
quick release connector so that the tabs of the
retainer are correctly fitted into the quick
release connector. Push the quick release
connector straight into the retainer until a click
is heard.
(4) Lightly pull and push the quick release
connector a few times by hand and verify that
it can move 2.03.0 mm {0.080.11 in} and
it is connected securely.
• If quick release connector does not move
at all, verify that O-ring is not damaged
and slipped, and reconnect the quick release connector.
2. When the retainer is removed, perform the following procedure.

A6E3912W006

End Of Sie

FUEL PUMP UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E391213350W02

F24

FUEL SYSTEM
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

1
2
3

Packing
Fuel pump unit
Fuel gauge sender unit

A6E3912W025

End
Sie UNIT INSPECTION
FUELOf
PUMP

A6E391213350W03

Caution
• It is normal to hear the fuel pump operating when the ignition switch is turned to the ON position.
Note
• To improve startability, the fuel pump control operates the fuel pump unit when the ignition switch is
turned to the ON position. Due to this, fuel pressure is rapidly increased and fuel control is stabilized.
Continuity Inspection
Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the service hole cover. (See F22 FUEL PUMP UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the fuel pump unit connector.
Inspect for continuity between fuel pump unit
connector terminals B and D.
• If there is no continuity, replace the fuel pump
body.
• If as specified carry out the Circuit Open/
Short Inspection.

A6E3912W018

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short circuit (continuity check).
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
Fuel pump unit terminal D (harness-side) and
body GND.
Fuel pump relay terminal D (harness-side)
and fuel pump unit terminal B (harness-side).
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is short. Repair or
replace the harness.
Fuel pump unit terminal D (harness-side) and
power supply.
Fuel pump unit terminal B (harness-side) and body GND.

A6E3912W019

F25

FUEL SYSTEM
Fuel Pump Hold Pressure Inspection
Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Always carry out the following procedure with the engine stopped.
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting the quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to the fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean the quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting using a cloth or soft brush, and make sure that it is
free of foreign material.
Note
• Perform the following test only when directed.
1. Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the air cleaner.
Caution
• The quick release connector may be damaged if the tab is turned too far. Do not turn the tab over
the stopper.
4. Disconnect the quick release connector from the fuel tank as follows:
(1) Push the tab on the locking coupler 90°° until it stops.
(2) Pull the fuel hose straight back.
Note
• The stopper may be removed from the quick connector. Take care not to loose it.
Reinstall it to the quick release connector
before reconnecting the fuel line.

A6E3912W020

A6E3912W002

F26

FUEL SYSTEM
5. Cover the disconnected quick release connector
with vinyl sheet or the like to prevent it from being
scratched or contaminated with foreign material.

A6E3912W021

6. Turn the lever 90 degrees against the hose of the
SST to plug the SST outlet.
7. Push the SST quick release connector into the
fuel pipe until a click is heard.
8. Set the fuel hose into a container to avoid fuel
spills.
9. Connect the negative battery cable.
Caution
• Connecting to the wrong check
connector terminal may possibly cause
malfunction. Carefully connect to the
specified terminal only.

A6E3912W022

10. Short the check connector terminal F/P to body
GND using a jumper wire.
11. Turn the ignition switch to ON to operate the fuel
pump.
12. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
13. Measure the fuel pump hold pressure after 5
minutes.
• If not as specified, replace the fuel pump after
inspecting the following:
Fuel line for clogging or leakage
Fuel pump hold pressure
More than 200 kPa {2.0 kgf/cm2, 29 psi}

A6E3912W037

14. Disconnect the jumper wire.
15. Disconnect the SST.
Note
• A checker tab is integrated with the quick release connector for new plastic fuel hoses. The checker tab
will be released from the quick release connector after it is completely engaged with the fuel pipe.
16. Inspect the plastic fuel hose and fuel pipe sealing
surface for damage and deformation, and replace
as necessary.
• If the quick release connector O-ring is
damaged or has slipped, replace the plastic
fuel hose.
17. Apply a small amount of clean engine oil to the
sealing surface of the fuel pipe.
18. Reconnect the plastic fuel hose straight to the fuel
pipe until a click is heard.
19. Lightly pull and push the quick release connector
A6E3912W004
a few times by hand and verify that it can move
2.03.0 mm {0.080.11 in} and it is connected
securely.
• If quick release connector does not move at all, verify that O-ring is not damaged and slipped, and
reconnect the quick release connector.
20. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

F27

FUEL SYSTEM
End
Sie
FUELOf
INJECTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E391213250W01

1
2
2
4
5
6
7

Fuel injector connectors
Plastic fuel hose
(See F28 Plastic Fuel Hose Removal Note)
(See F30 Plastic Fuel Hose Installation Note)
Hose
Fuel distributor
Fuel injector
(See F29 Fuel Injector Removal Note)
(See F30 Fuel Injector Installation Note)
Snap ring
Pulsation damper

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

A6E3912W005

Plastic Fuel Hose Removal Note
Caution
• The quick release connector may be damaged if the tab is bent excessively. Do not expand the tab
over the stopper.
1. Disconnect the quick release connector.
(1) Push the tab on the locking coupler 90 degrees until it stops.
(2) Pull the fuel hose straight back.
Note
• The stopper may be removed from the quick connector. Take care not to lose it.
Reinstall it to the quick release connector
before reconnecting the fuel line.

A6E3912W001

F28

FUEL SYSTEM
• The locking coupler has two internal locking
tabs which retain the fuel pipe. Be sure that
the tab on the locking coupler is rotated until
it stops to release two internal locking tabs.

A6E3912W002

2. Cover the disconnected quick release connector
and fuel pipe with vinyl sheets or the like to
prevent them from being scratched or
contaminated with foreign material.

A6E3912W039

Fuel Injector Removal Note
Caution
• Use of a deformed injector retaining clip will cause the injector to not engage correctly. Always
use a new clip when reattaching the injector, otherwise it may cause the injector to rotate.
1. Insert a screwdriver between the injector cup and
the clip fingers.

Note
• When rotating the screwdriver to spread the
clip fingers, deform them sufficiently to make
sure they release from the notched edge of
the injector cup.

A6E3912W040

2. Rotate the screwdriver to spread the clip fingers
and remove them from the injector cup.
3. Pull the injector and clip out of the rail.
4. Remove the clip from the injector according to the
following:
(1) Grasp the clip with a pair of pliers.
A6E3912W041

F29

FUEL SYSTEM
(2) Pull the clip parallel to the injector groove, and
remove it from the injector.
(3) Discard the clip.

A6E3912W042

Fuel Injector Installation Note
1. Lightly lubricate the injector groove and O-ring.
2. Pre-attach a new clip in the injector groove.
Note
• When the clip is attached correctly, the central area of the injector and the clip finger positions are aligned.
3. Hold the injector firmly, push the clip into the
injector until the clip stops sliding.
4. Verify that the injector connector position is
correct, and press the injector and clip into the
injector cup. Continue pressing until the clip
contacts the lower surface of the injector cup.
5. Verify that the injector and clip are correctly
attached with the clip locked onto the injector cup
notch.

A6E3912W043

A6E3912W004

A6E3912W006

F30

FUEL SYSTEM
(4) Lightly pull and push the quick release connector a few times by hand and verify that it can move 2.03.0
mm {0.080.11 in} and it is connected securely.
• If quick release connector does not move at all, verify that O-ring is not damaged and slipped, and
reconnect the quick release connector.
2. When the retainer is removed, perform the following procedure.

End Of Sie

FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION

A6E391213250W02

Operation Test
1. Carry out the Fuel Injector Operation Inspection. (See F231 Fuel Injector Operation Inspection.)
• If not as specified, perform the further inspection for the fuel injectors.

Resistance Inspection
Note
• Perform the following test only when directed.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Disconnect the fuel injector connectors.
Measure the resistance of the fuel injector using
an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the fuel injector.
(See F28 FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
• If as specified but Operation Test is failed,
carry out the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Inspect for open or short circuit.
Resistance
11.412.6 ohms [20 ° C {68 ° F}]
A6E3912W007

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harness for open or
short (continuity check).
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
No.1 cylinder fuel injector terminal B
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 4Z.
No.2 cylinder fuel injector terminal B
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 4W.
A6E3912W008
No.3 cylinder fuel injector terminal B
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 4AD.
No.4 cylinder fuel injector terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4AA.
No.1 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and main relay (harness-side) terminal C through
common connector.
No.2 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and main relay (harness-side) terminal C through
common connector.
No.3 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and main relay (harness-side) terminal C through
common connector.
No.4 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and main relay (harness-side) terminal C through
common connector.
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is short. Repair or replace the harness.
No.1 cylinder fuel injector terminal B (harness-side) and body GND.
No.2 cylinder fuel injector terminal B (harness-side) and body GND.
No.3 cylinder fuel injector terminal B (harness-side) and body GND.
No.4 cylinder fuel injector terminal B (harness-side) and body GND.
No.1 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and power supply.

F31

FUEL SYSTEM
No.2 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and power supply.
No.3 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and power supply.
No.4 cylinder fuel injector terminal A (harness-side) and power supply.
Fuel Leakage Inspection
Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Always carry out the following procedure with the engine stopped.
Note
• Perform the following test only when directed.
1. Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the fuel injectors together with the fuel distributor with the fuel hose connected. (See F28 FUEL
INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Fasten the fuel injectors firmly to the fuel
distributor with wire.
5. Connect the negative battery cable.
Caution
• Connecting the wrong check connector
terminal may possibly cause
malfunction. Carefully connect the
specified terminal only.

A6E3912W009

6. Short the check connector terminal F/P to body
GND using a jumper wire.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON position to operate
the fuel pump.

A6E3912W037

8. Tilt the fuel injectors approx. 60 degrees.
9. Verify that fuel leakage from the fuel injector
nozzles is within the specification.
• If not as specified, replace the fuel injector.
Fuel leakage
Less than 1 drop/2 minutes
10. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position and
remove the jumper wire.
11. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

F32

A6E3912W010

FUEL SYSTEM
Volume Inspection
Warning
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or death and
damage. Always carry out the following procedure with the engine stopped.
Note
• If there is an after market fuel injector tester, perform the following test.
• If there is no an after market fuel injector tester, perform Operation Test, Resistance Inspection, and
Fuel Leakage Test to verify the fuel injector is okay or not.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the fuel injectors. (See F28 FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connect the fuel injector to the fuel injector tester.
Measure the injection volume of each fuel injector using a graduated container.
• If not as specified, replace the fuel injector.
Injection volume
L3: 6171 ml {6179 cc, 2.22.7 fl oz}/15 sec.
LF: 5369 ml {5369 cc, 1.92.4 fl oz}/15 sec.
L8: 4863 ml {4863 cc, 1.72.2 fl oz}/15 sec.

6. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position and disconnect the jumper wire.
7. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Atomization
1. Inspect atomization pattern.
• If the atomization is faulty, replace the fuel injector.

A6E3912W011

End Of Sie

F33

FUEL SYSTEM
PRESSURE REGULATOR INSPECTION

A6E391213280W01

Note
• Due to the adoption of the mechanical returnless fuel system, the pressure regulator cannot be inspected
separately.
1. Perform FUEL LINE PRESSURE INSPECTION. (See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE INSPECTION.)

End Of Sie

PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E391220180W01

1. Remove and install the pressure regulator.(See F28 FUEL INJECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

PULSATION DAMPER INSPECTION

A6E391220180W02

1. Complete the BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
2. Remove the pulsation damper. (See F34 PULSATION DAMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Visually inspect the pulsation damper for damage and cracks. Also verify that there is no extreme rust which
will cause fuel leakage.
• If either is observed, replace the pulsation damper.
4. Complete the AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE. (See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

End Of Sie

F34

EXHAUST SYSTEM

EXHAUST SYSTEM
EXHAUST SYSTEM INSPECTION
1. Start the engine and inspect each exhaust system component for exhaust gas leakage.
• If leakage is found, repair or replace as necessary.

A6E391440000W01

End Of Sie

EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E391440000W02

Warning
• When the engine and exhaust system are hot, they can badly burn. Turn off the engine and wait
until they are cool before removing the exhaust system.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

F35

EXHAUST SYSTEM

A6E3914W002
.

F36

EXHAUST SYSTEM
1
2
3
4
5
6

Main silencer
Middle pipe
TWC
Exhaust manifold insulator (upper)
Bracket
Exhaust manifold
(See F37 Exhaust Manifold Installation Note)

7
8
9
10

Exhaust manifold gasket
Exhaust manifold insulator (lower)
HO2S (front)
(See F37 HO2S Removal Note)
HO2S (rear)
(See F37 HO2S Removal Note)

HO2S Removal Note
1. Remove the HO2S using the SST before
removing the exhaust manifold.

A6J3914W004

Exhaust Manifold Installation Note
1. Tighten the exhaust manifold installation nuts in
the order shown.

A6E3914W003

End Of Sie

F37

EMISSION SYSTEM

EMISSION SYSTEM
CHARCOAL CANISTER INSPECTION

A6E391613970W01

1. Remove the charcoal canister.
2. Plug the atmosphere side port and purge solenoid valve side port of the charcoal canister.
3. Blow air into the charcoal canister from the fuel tank side port and verify that there is no air leakage.
• If there is air leakage, replace the charcoal canister.

A6E3916W002

End Of Sie
EVAPORATIVE
GAS CHECK VALVE (ONE-WAY) INSPECTION (L.H.D.)
1. Remove the evaporative gas check valve (one-way).
2. Apply pressure to port A, and verify that there is no airflow.
• If there is airflow, replace the evaporative gas check valve (one-way).
3. Apply negative pressure to port A, and verify that there is air flow.
• If there is no airflow, replace the evaporative gas check valve (one-way).

A6E391613988W01

A6E3916W001

End Of Sie
PURGE
SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E391618740W01

Evaporative hose (to charcoal canister)
(See F38 Evaporative Hose Installation Note)
Vacuum hose (to intake manifold)
(See F38 Vacuum Hose Installation Note)
Purge solenoid valve

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E3916W024

Vacuum Hose Installation Note
1. Attach the vacuum hose onto the purge solenoid valve until it contacts the stopper.
Evaporative Hose Installation Note
1. Attach the evaporative hose onto the purge solenoid valve until it contacts the stopper.

End Of Sie

F38

EMISSION SYSTEM
PURGE SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION

A6E391618740W02

Airflow Inspection
Note
• Perform the following test only when directed.

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the purge solenoid valve. (See F38 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Inspect airflow between the ports under the following conditions.
• If not as specified, replace the purge solenoid valve.
• If as specified, carry out the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.

A6E3916W004

A6E3916W005

A6E3916W006

End Of Sie

EGR VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the EGR valve connector.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E391620300W01

Water hose
(See F39 Water Hose Removal Note)
EGR valve
(See F39 EGR Valve Removal Note)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Water Hose Removal Note
• Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE
COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
EGR Valve Removal Note
1. Remove the air hose. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR
SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Remove the upper radiator hose. (See E6 RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E3916W008

End Of Sie

F39

EMISSION SYSTEM
EGR VALVE INSPECTION
Operation Test
1. Carry out the EGR Control Inspection. (See F233 EGR Control System Inspection.
• If not as specified, perform the further inspection for the EGR valve.

A6E391620300W02

Resistance Inspection
Note
• Perform the following test only when directed.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Inspect resistance of the EGR valve coils.
• If not as specified, replace the EGR valve.
• If as specified, carry out the Circuit Open/
Short Inspection.
Terminals
CE
CA
DB
DF

Resistance (ohms)
1216

A6E3916W009

A6E3916W011

End Of Sie

F40

A6E3916W010

EMISSION SYSTEM
PCV VALVE INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the intake maniforld.(see F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the PCV valve.
Blow through the valve and verify that air flows as
specified.
• If not as specified, replace the PCV valve.
Specification
Condition
Air applied from port A to B
Air applied from port B to A

A6E391613890W01

Airflow
Yes
No

A6E3916W007

End Of Sie CATALYTIC CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION
THREE-WAY

A6E391620500W01

Note
• Make sure that no HO2S DTCs have been detected. If detected, this inspection is not applicable for TWC
inspection.
1. Connect the WDS or equivalent and monitor PIDs as following.
• Monitor the right TWC using O2S11 PID for upstream HO2S and O2S12 PID for downstream HO2S.
2. Begin to monitor the appropriate PIDs.
3. Drive the vehicle for 10 min at 6596 km/h {4060 mph} to allow the front catalytic converter to reach
operating temperature.
4. Stop the vehicle and leave it in a safe place.
5. Let the engine idle.
6. Record PIDs for 1 min.
7. Select the appropriate PIDs and read the graph.
8. Count the number of times (inversions) that the
upstream HO2S graph line actually crosses the
0.5 V line.
9. Count the number of times (inversions) that the
downstream HO2S graph line actually crosses
the 0.5 V line.
Note
• Do not count the number of peaks. Refer to
the graph.

A6E3916W013

10. Using the following equation, calculate the value
of ratio.
Equation
RATIO = Upstream HO2S inversion ÷ downstream HO2S inversion
• If the ratio is 5.5 or more or there is no downstream HO2S inversion, the TWC is functioning properly.
• If the ratio is less than 1.125, the TWC is not functioning properly. Replace the TWC.

F41

EMISSION SYSTEM
Upstream HO2S graph line example

A6E3916W021

Downstream HO2S graph line example 1
Equation
RATIO = 30 inversions (upstream HO2S
inversions) ÷ 5 inversions (downstream
HO2S inversions) = 6.0 (good WU-TWC)

A6E3916W012

Downstream HO2S graph line example 2

A6E3916W014

Downstream HO2S graph line example 3
Equation
RATIO = 30 inversions (upstream HO2S
inversions) ÷ 27 inversions (downstream
HO2S inversions) = 1.1 (bad converter)

A6E3916W015

End Of Sie

F42

CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL SYSTEM
PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E394018880W01

Note
• For replace the PCM, Setup the WDS and perform the PCM configuration. (See F50 PCM
CONFIGURATION.)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. For R.H.D, perform the following procedures.
(1) Remove the front side trim (left-side).
(2) Partially peel back the flower covering.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
U.K. specs.

A6E3940W002
.

PCM cover No. 1
(See F44 Set Nut/bolt Removal Note)
(See F44 Set Nut/bolt Installation Note)

2
3
4

PCM cover No. 2
PCM connector
PCM

F43

CONTROL SYSTEM
European (L.H.D.) specs.

A6E3940W001
.

1
2

PCM cover
PCM connector

PCM

Set Nut/bolt Removal Note
1. Using a chisel and a hammer, cut a groove on the head of the set nut/bolt so that a screwdriver can be
inserted.
2. Loose the set nut/bolt using an impact
screwdriver or pliers.

A6E3940W003

Set Nut/bolt Installation Note
1. Install a new set nut/bolt and tighten it until the
neck of the nut/bolt is cut.

A6E3940W004

End Of Sie

F44

CONTROL SYSTEM
PCM INSPECTION

A6E394018880W02

Note
• PIDs for the following parts are not available on this model. Go to the appropriate part inspection page.
CMP sensor (See F55 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR INSPECTION.)
Main relay (See T24 RELAY INSPECTION.)
1. Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent) to the
DLC-2.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
3. Measure the PID value.
• If PID value is not within the specification,
follow the instructions in Action column.

Note
• The PID/DATA MONITOR function monitors
the calculated value of the input/output
signals in the PCM. Therefore, an output
device malfunction is not directly indicated
A6E3970W002
as a malfunction of the monitored value for
the output device. If a monitored value of an
output device is out of specification, inspect the monitored value of the input device related to the output
control.
• For input/output signals except those of the monitoring items, use a voltmeter to measure the PCM
terminal voltage.
• The simulation items that are used in the ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION are
as follows.
ACCS
ALTF
EVAPCP
FAN1
FAN2
FAN3
FP
HTR11
HTR12
IAC
IASV
IMRC
IMTV
VT DUTY1
PID/DATA monitor table (reference)
Monitor item
(Definition)

Unit/
Condition

ACCS (A/C relay)

ON/OFF

ACSW (A/C switch)

ON/OFF

ALTF (Generator field
coil control duty value)

ALTT V (Generator
output voltage)

Condition/Specification
(Reference)

Action

Inspect following PIDs: RPM, TP,
Ignition switch ON: OFF
ECT, ACSW, TR.
A/C switch ON and fan switch ON at Inspect A/C relay.
idle: ON
(See U47 CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT INSPECTION)
A/C switch and fan switch ON at
Inspect A/C switch.
ignition switch ON: OFF
(See U47 CLIMATE CONTROL
A/C switch OFF at ignition switch
UNIT INSPECTION)
ON: OFF
Inspect following PIDs: IAT, ECT,
Ignition switch ON: 0%
RPM, VPWR, ALTT V.
Idle: 0100%
Inspect generator.
Just after A/C switch ON and fan
(See G7 GENERATOR
switch ON at idle: Duty value rises
INSPECTION)
Ignition switch ON: 0 V
Inspect generator.
(See G7 GENERATOR
Idle: Approx. 14.9 V*1 (E/L not
INSPECTION)
operating)

PCM
terminal
4O

1AC

1AD

1AA

F45

CONTROL SYSTEM
Monitor item
(Definition)

Unit/
Condition

Condition/Specification
(Reference)

Action

PCM
terminal

Inspect following PIDs: IAT, RPM,
MAP, ECT, MAF, TP, INGEAR,
ACSW, TR, PSP, ALTT V.
Inspect IAC valve.
(See F13 IDLE AIR CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE INSPECTION)
Inspect CKP sensor.
(See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR INSPECTION)

No load: 700 rpm
E/L operating: 700 rpm
P/S operating: 750 rpm
A/C ON: 750 rpm

LF MTX and L3 MTX
ARPMDES
(Target engine speed)

RPM

No load: 650 rpm
E/L operating: 700 rpm
P/S operating: 700 rpm
A/C ON: 750 rpm

LF ATX

AST (After start timer)
BARO
(Barometric pressure)

Time
Pressure
V

No load: 700 rpm
E/L operating: 700 rpm
P/S operating: 700 rpm
A/C ON: 700 rpm*2, 750 rpm*3

Ignition switch ON (at sea level):
approx 101 kPa
Ignition switch ON (at sea level):
approx 4.1 V

BOO
(Brake switch)

ON/OFF

Brake pedal depressed: ON
Brake pedal released: OFF

CHRGLMP (Generator
warning light)

ON/OFF

Ignition switch ON: ON
Idle: OFF

COLP (Refrigerant
pressure switch
(middle))*4

ON/OFF

CPP
(Clutch pedal position)

ON/OFF

CPP/PNP (Shift lever
position)

ON/OFF

DTCCNT (Number of
DTC detected)

ECT (Engine coolant
temperature)

°C

°F
V

EVAPCP (Purge
solenoid valve duty
value)

FAN1
(Cooling fan control)

ON/OFF

FAN2
(Cooling fan control)

FAN3
(Cooling fan control)

F46

ON/OFF

Inspect BARO sensor.
(See F60 BAROMETRIC
PRESSURE (BARO) SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Inspect brake switch.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

Refrigerant pressure switch (middle)
Inspect refrigerant pressure switch.
ON *2 at idle: ON
(See U43 REFRIGERANT
Refrigerant pressure switch (middle)
PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION)
*3
OFF at idle: OFF
Inspect clutch switch.
Clutch pedal depressed: ON
(See F59 CLUTCH SWITCH
Clutch pedal released: OFF
INSPECTION)
Inspect neutral switch.
Neutral position: ON
(See F59 NEUTRAL SWITCH
Others: OFF
INSPECTION)
Perform applicable DTC

troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
ECT 20 °C {68 °F}: 20 °C {68 °F}
Inspect ECT sensor.
ECT 60 °C {140 °F}: 60 °C {140 °F} (See F53 ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
ECT 20 °C {68 °F}: 3.043.14 V
INSPECTION)
ECT 60 °C {140 °F}: 1.291.39 V
Ignition switch ON: 0%
Idle: 0%

ECT below 100 °C {212 °F}: OFF
Others: ON
ECT below 108 °C {226 °F}: OFF
A/C operating, refrigerant pressure
switch (middle) is OFF, and ECT
below 108 °C {226 °F}: OFF
Others: ON
ECT below 100 °C {212 °F}: OFF
A/C operating, refrigerant pressure
switch (middle) is ON, and ECT
below 108 °C {226 °F}: OFF
Other: ON

Inspect following PIDs: IAT, RPM,
ECT, MAF, O2S11,BARO, INGEAR,
TR, VPWR.
(See F39 PURGE SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: RPM, TP,
ECT, ACSW, COLP, TEST.
Inspect cooling fan relay.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)

1R
1W

Inspect following PIDs: RPM, TP,
ECT, ACSW, COLP, TEST.
Inspect cooling fan relay.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)

CONTROL SYSTEM
Monitor item
(Definition)
FDPDTC
(Pending code caused
FFD storage)

Unit/
Condition

Condition/Specification
(Reference)

Action

Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
Ignition switch ON: OFF
Inspect following PIDs: RPM.
FP (Fuel pump relay)
ON/OFF
Idle: ON
Inspect fuel pump relay.
Cranking: ON
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: IAT, MAF, TP,
MAP, ECT, RPM, O2S11, O2S12,
FUELPW (Fuel injector
Ignition switch ON: 0 ms
INGEAR, TR, PSP, ACSW, VPWR,
TIME
duration)
Idle (after warm up): approx. 2.5 ms ALTT V.
Inspect fuel injector.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: IAT, MAF, TP,
MAP, ECT, RPM, O2S11, O2S12,
FUELSYS
Open loop/ Ignition switch ON: Open loop
INGEAR, TR, PSP, ACSW, VPWR,
(Fuel system status)
Closed loop Idle (after warm up): Closed loop
ALTT V.
Inspect fuel injector.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Ignition switch ON: 0 V
Perform applicable DTC
GENVDSD
troubleshooting.
(Generator voltage
V
Idle: Approx. 14.9 V*1 (E/L not
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
desired)
operating)
Inspect following PIDs: IAT, MAF, TP,
HTR11
ECT, RPM, ACSW.
ON/OFF
Idle (after warm up): ON⇔OFF
(HO2S heater (front))
(See F56 HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: IAT, MAF,
Ignition switch ON: OFF (HO2S
HTR12
ECT, RPM, ACSW.
ON/OFF
heater not operating)
(HO2S heater (rear))
(See F56 HEATED OXYGEN
Idle: ON (HO2S heater operating)
SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: IAT, RPM,
MAP, ECT, MAF, TP, INGEAR, TR,
Ignition switch ON: 0%
PSP, ACSW.
IAC (IAC valve)
%
Idle: Approx. 60% (ECT 90°C {194
Inspect IAC valve.
°F} and E/L not operating)
(See F13 IDLE AIR CONTROL
(IAC) VALVE INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: ECT, RPM,
ECT is above 70 °C {158 °F}, engine TP.
IASV (Variable air duct
speed is above 5,800 rpm, and TP Inspect VAD control solenoid valve.
ON/OFF
control solenoid valve)
opening angle is above 50%: ON
(See F13 VARIABLE AIR DUCT
Others: OFF
(VAD) CONTROL SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION (L3)
IAT 20 °C {68 °F}: 20 °C {68 °F}
Inspect
IAT sensor.
°C
°F
IAT 30 °C {86 °F}: 30 °C {86 °F}
IAT
(See F50 INTAKE AIR
(Intake air temperature)
TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR
IAT 20 °C {68 °F}: 2.42.6 V
V
INSPECTION)
IAT 30 °C {86 °F}: 1.71.9 V

IMRC (Variable tumble
control solenoid valve)

ON/OFF

Engine speed is below approx.
3,750 rpm: ON
Others: OFF

IMTV (Variable Intakeair control solenoid
valve)

ON/OFF

Engine speed is below approx.
4,500 rpm: ON
Others: OFF

INGEAR (Load/no load
condition)

ON/OFF

CPP or CPP/PNP is ON: OFF
Others: ON

IVS (CTP condition)

ON/OFF

CTP: ON
Others: OFF

Inspect following PIDs: TP, ECT,
RPM.
Inspect VTCS solenoid valve.
(See F15 VARIABLE TUMBLE
CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION)
Inspect following PIDs: RPM.
Inspect VIS control solenoid valve.
(See F14 VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR
SYSTEM (VIS) CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION
(L3))
Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

PCM
terminal

4P*5
4Q*6
4W, 4Z,
4AA,
4AD

4G
4J

1R, 1W
2A

F47

CONTROL SYSTEM
Monitor item
(Definition)

Unit/
Condition

Condition/Specification
(Reference)

KNOCKR (Knocking
retard)

ANGLE

LOAD (Engine load)

Ignition switch ON: 0%
Idle (after warm up): approx.19%

LONGFT1 (long term
fuel trim)

Idle (after warm up): approx.14
14%

MAF (Mass airflow)

MAP (Manifold
absolute pressure)

g/s
V
Pressure
V

Ignition switch ON: 0 DEG
Idle: 0 DEG

Ignition switch ON: approx. 0 g/s
Idle (after warm up): 1.5 g/s
Ignition switch ON: approx. 0.7 V
Idle (after warm up): 1.3 V
Ignition switch ON (at sea level):
approx 101 kPa
Ignition switch ON (at sea level):
approx 4.1 V

MIL (Malfunction
indicator lamp)

ON/OFF

Ignition switch ON: ON
Idle: OFF

MIL_DIS (Trabelled
distance since the MIL
illuminated)

Distance

No DTC: 0 km {0 mph}
DTC detected: Not 0 km {0 mph}

O2S11 (Front oxygen
sensor)

Ignition switch ON: 01.0 V
Idle (After warm up): 01.0 V
Acceleration (After warm up):
0.51.0 V
Deceleration (After warm up):
00.5 V

O2S12 (Rear oxygen
sensor)

Idle (After warm up): approx 0.6 V

PSP (Power steering
pressure switch)

ON/OFF

RFCFLAG (Readness
function code)

ON/OFF

RO2FT1 (Rear oxygen
sensor fuel trim)

Steering wheel in straight ahead
position: OFF
Others: ON

Action
Inspect knock sensor.
(See F56 KNOCK SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Inspect MAF sensor.
(See F51 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)
SENSOR INSPECTION)
Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

PCM
terminal
2P, 2S

Inspect MAF sensor.
(See F51 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF)
SENSOR INSPECTION

Inspect MAP sensor.
(See F52 MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE
PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR
INSPECTION)

Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
Inspect HO2S (front).
(See F56 HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION)
Inspect HO2S (rear).
(See F56 HEATED OXYGEN
SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION)
Inspect PSP switch.
(See F58 POWER STEERING
PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH
INSPECTION)

Before running PCM adaptive
Run PCM adaptive memory
memory procedure drive mode: ON
procedure drive mode.
After running PCM adaptive memory
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
procedure drive mode: OFF
Perform applicable DTC
Idle (after warm up): approx.14
troubleshooting.
14%
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

1AB

No load: 650750 rpm
E/L operating: 650750 rpm
P/S operating: 700800 rpm
A/C ON: 700800 rpm

LF MTX and L3 MTX
RPM (Engine speed)

rpm

No load: 600700 rpm
E/L operating: 650750 rpm
P/S operating: 650750 rpm
A/C ON: 700800 rpm

LF ATX

No load: 650750 rpm
E/L operating: 650750 rpm
P/S operating: 650750 rpm
A/C ON: 650750 rpm*2, 700
800 rpm*3

F48

Inspect CKP sensor.
(See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION
(CKP) SENSOR INSPECTION)

2D, 2G

CONTROL SYSTEM
Monitor item
(Definition)
SEGRP (EGR valve
(stepping motor)
position)

Unit/
Condition
STP

SHRTFT1 (Short term
fuel trim)

SPARKADV (Ignition
timing)

BTC

TEST (Test mode)
TP (TP)

Condition/Specification
(Reference)
Ignition switch ON: 0 step
Idle: 0 step
Cranking: 060 steps
Idle (after warm up): approx.30
25%

Ignition switch ON: BTDC 0°
Idle: BTDC approx. 10°

ON/OFF
%
V

CTP: 1323%
WOT: 8696%
CTP: 0.651.15 V
WOT: 4.34.8 V

TPCT
(TP sensor voltage at
CTP )

0.651.15 V

VPWR (Battery positive
voltage)

Ignition switch ON: B+

VSS (Vehicle speed)

VT DUTY1

Vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph}:
20 km/h {12 mph}
km/h MPH
Vehicle speed 40 km/h {25 mph}:
20 km/h {12 mph}
ANGLE
Idle: 0°
%

Idle: 0%

Action

PCM
terminal

Inspect following PIDs: MAF, TP,
ECT, RPM, VSS.
Inspect EGR valve.
(See F40 EGR VALVE
INSPECTION)
Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
Inspect following PIDs: MAF, TP,
ECT, RPM, INGEAR, TR, PSP,
ACSW, VPWR.
Inspect ignition timing.
(See F8 IGNITION TIMING
INSPECTION)

4E
4H
4K
4N

2J
2M

Inspect TP sensor.
(See F51 THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR INSPECTION)
Inspect TP sensor.
(See F51 THROTTLE POSITION
(TP) SENSOR INSPECTION)
Inspect main relay.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Inspect battery.
(See G4 BATTERY INSPECTION)

2Y, 2Z

Perform applicable DTC
troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
Inspect following PIDs: TP, ECT,
RPM.
Inspect OCV.
(See B33 OIL CONTROL VALVE
(OCV) INSPECTION)

2I, 2L

*1 : Calculated value; differs from terminal voltage
*2 : Refrigerant pressure switch (middle) turns on when the refrigerant pressure is 1.691.84 MPa {17.318.7
kgf/cm2, 247265 psi}
*3 : Refrigerant pressure switch (middle) turns off when the refrigerant pressure is 1.261.49 MPa {12.915.1
kgf/cm2, 184214 psi}
*4 : L3 and L8, LF (Intensely hot area) models
*5 : Immobilizer system equipped
*6 : Immobilizer system not equipped
• Following PIDs are for the ATX models. If inspects for following PIDs, see K110 PID/DATA MONITOR
INSPECTION.
PIDs for the ATX models
GEAR
LINEDES
LPS
OP_SW_B
SSA/SS1
SSB/SS2
SSC/SS3
TCS
TFT
TFTV
THOP
TR
TR_SENS
TSS

End Of Sie

F49

CONTROL SYSTEM
PCM CONFIGURATION
1. Connect the WDS to DLC-2.
2. Set up the WDS (including the vehicle
recognition.)
3. Select Module programming.
4. Select Programmable module installation.
5. Select PCM and perform procedures according
to directions on the WDS screen.
Note
• If PCM CONFIGURATION is successful,
the PCM stores the DTC P0602 and
illuminates the MIL. (System is normal.)
Clear the DTC P0602 using WDS or
equivalent after PCM CONFIGURATION.

A6E394018880W03

A6E3970W002

Note
• MIL goes off after three drive cycles with no failure. (DTCs remain in PCM.)
6. Retrieve DTCs by the WDS or equivalent, then verify that there in no DTC present.
• If DTC is present, perform applicable DTC inspection.

End Of Sie

INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT) SENSOR INSPECTION
Resistance Inspection

A6E394018845W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
1. Disconnect MAF/IAT sensor.
2. Measure the resistance between the MAF/IAT
sensor terminals D and E using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the MAF/IAT
sensor.
• If the MAF/IAT sensor is okay, but the IAT
PID are out of specification, perform the
Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Specification
Ambient temperature (°°C {°°F})
20 {4}
20 {68}
60 {140}

Resistance (kilohm)
13.618.4
2.212.69
0.4930.667

A6E3940W005

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D (harness-side)
and PCM terminal 2E (harness-side)
MAF/IAT sensor terminal E (harness-side)
and PCM terminal 2H (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
MAF/IAT sensor terminal E (harness-side) and power supply
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D (harness-side) and power supply
MAF/IAT sensor terminal D (harness-side) and body GND

End Of Sie

F50

A6E3940W006

CONTROL SYSTEM
MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR INSPECTION
Voltage Inspection

A6E394013210W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
1. Visually inspect for the following on the MAF sensor.
• Damage
• Cracks
• Terminal bends
• Terminal rust
If any of the above are found, replace the MAF sensor.
If the MAF PID value is out of specification, carry out the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Disconnect the MAF sensor connector.
3. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
MAF sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
main relay terminal C (harness-side)
MAF sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2AC (harness-side)
MAF sensor terminal C (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 1P (harness-side)

A6E3940W006

Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
MAF sensor terminal A (harness-side) and body GND
MAF sensor terminal C (harness-side) and power supply
MAF sensor terminal C (harness-side) and body GND
MAF sensor terminal B (harness-side) and power supply

End Of Sie

THROTTLE POSITION (TP) SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018910W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Resistance Inspection
1. Perform the following test only when directed.
• If as specified but TP PID value is out of specification, inspect resistance of TP sensor.
• If not as specified, inspect the following:
Accelerator cable free play (See F16 ACCELERATOR CABLE INSPECTION/ADJUSTMENT.)
2. Disconnect the TP sensor connector.
3. Verify that the resistance between TP sensor
terminals A and B changes smoothly while
opened and closed the throttle valve slowly.
• If not verified, replace TP sensor.
4. Measure the resistance between TP sensor
terminals A and C using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the TP sensor.
• If as specified, but TP PID value is out of
specification, perform the Circuit Open/Short
Inspection.
Specification
3.24.8 kilohms

A6E3940W007

F51

CONTROL SYSTEM
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
TP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2H (harness-side)
TP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2A (harness-side)
TP sensor terminal C (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2K (harness-side)

A6E3940W008

Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
TP sensor terminal C (harness-side) and power supply
TP sensor terminal C (harness-side) and body GND
TP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and power supply
TP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and body GND
TP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and power supply

End Of Sie

MANIFOLD ABSOLUTE PRESSURE (MAP) SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018211W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
• The following vacuum values are indicated by relative pressure from the MAP sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect the SSTs (WDS or equivalent) to the DLC-2.
Turn the ignition switch to ON (Engine OFF).
Select MAP PID on the SSTs (WDS or equivalent).
Verify that the MAP PID (pressure) and barometric pressure are practically equal.
• If not as verified, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
If there is no open or short circuit, replace the MAP sensor.
• If as verified, go to next step.
5. Apply vacuum of 25.0 kPa {187 mmHg, 7.38 inHg} to the MAP sensor, and verify that the MAP variation
from that of Step 4 is approx. 25.0 kPa {187 mmHg, 7.38 inHg}.
• If not as verified, perform the Circuit Open/Short inspection.
If there is no open or short circuit, replace the barometric pressure sensor.
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harness for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
MAP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2H
MAP sensor terminal D (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 1J
MAP sensor terminal C (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2K
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
MAP sensor terminal C (harness-side) and power supply.
MAP sensor terminal C (harness-side) and body GND.
MAP sensor terminal D (harness-side) and power supply.
MAP sensor terminal D (harness-side) and body GND

End Of Sie

F52

A6E3940W009

CONTROL SYSTEM
ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E394018840W01

Warning
• When the engine is hot, it can badly burn. Turn off the engine and wait until it is cool before
removing the ECT sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Disconnect the ECT sensor connector.
Remove the ECT sensor.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

Tightening torque
1014 N·m
{1.021.42 kgf·m, 7.3810.32 ft·lbf}
5. Refill the engine coolant. (See E3 COOLING
SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)

A6E3940W010

End
Of Sie
ENGINE
COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018840W02

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
ECT Sensor Resistance Inspection
1. Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 COOLING SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS.)
2. Remove the ECT sensor (located above the starter).
3. Place the ECT sensor in water with a thermometer, and heat the water gradually.
4. Measure the resistance between the ECT sensor terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the ECT sensor.
• If the ECT sensor is okay, but ECT PID value is out of specification, perform the Circuit Open/Short
Inspection.
Specification
Water temperature (°°C {°°F})
20 {68}
70 {158}
80 {176}

Resistance (kilohms)
35.4839.20
5.075.60
3.654.02

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
ECT sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 1M (harness-side)
ECT sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2H (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
ECT sensor terminal A (harness-side) and power supply
ECT sensor terminal A (harness-side) and body GND

A6E3940W011

F53

CONTROL SYSTEM
ECT sensor terminal B (harness-side) and power supply

End Of Sie

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018230W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Resistance Inspection
1. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector.
2. Measure the resistance between CKP sensor terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the CKP sensor.
• If CKP sensor resistance is okay, but RPM PID value is out of specification, perform the Circuit Open/Short
Inspection.
Specification
400550 ohms
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
CKP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2D (harness-side)
CKP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2G (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
CKP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and power supply
CKP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and body GND
CKP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and power supply
CKP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and body GND

A6E3940W012

End Of Sie

CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Removal
1. Perform the following procedure to making the working space.
(1) Remove the Front wheel (RH).
(2) Remove the splash shield.
2. Disconnect the CKP sensor connector.
3. Remove the installation bolts to remove the CKP sensor.

A6E394018230W02

Installation
Caution
• When foreign material such as an iron chip is on the CKP sensor, it can cause abnormal output
from the sensor because of flux turbulence and adversely affect the engine control. Be sure there
is no foreign material on the CKP sensor when replacing.
1. Perform the following procedure so that piston No.1 is at the top dead center.
(1) Remove the front driveshaft (RH). (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

F54

CONTROL SYSTEM
(2) Remove the cylinder block lower blind plug
and install the SST.
(3) Turn the crankshaft pulley to the clockwise
until it stops.
2. Install the CKP sensor to the CKP sensor
installer.
3. Fit the forked part of the CKP sensor installer with
the ninth tooth (counting counterclockwise from
the empty space) of the pulse wheel.
4. Install the CKP sensor fitting bolts.
Tightening torque
5.57.5 N·m {5676 kgf·cm, 4.15.5 ft·lbf}

A6E3940W013

5. Remove the CKP sensor installer
6. Remove the SST then install the cylinder block lower blind plug.
Tightening torque
20 N·m {2.0 kgf·m, 15 ft·lbf}
7. Install the front driveshaft (RH). (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP) SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018200W01

Caution
• When foreign material such as an iron chip is on the CMP sensor, it can cause abnormal output
from the sensor because of flux turbulence and adversely affect the engine control. Be sure there
is no foreign material on the CMP sensor when replacing.
Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Resistance Inspection
1. Disconnect the CMP sensor connector.
2. Measure the resistance between CMP sensor terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the CMP sensor.
• If CMP sensor resistance is okay, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Specification
400550 ohms
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
CMP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2M (harness-side)
CMP sensor terminal B (harness-siede) and
PCM terminal 2J (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
CMP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and power supply
CMP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and body GND
CMP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and power supply
CMP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and body GND

A6E3940W014

End Of Sie

F55

CONTROL SYSTEM
KNOCK SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018921W01

Note
• Perform the following test only when directed.
Resistance Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK.
2. Disconnect the knock sensor connector.
3. Measure the resistance between the knock sensor terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the knock sensor.
• If the knock sensor is okay, but PID value is out of specification, perform the Circuit Open/Short
Inspection.
Specification
Approx. 4.87 megohms
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
Knock sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2S (harness-side)
Knock sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2P (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair
or replace the harness.
Knock sensor terminal A (harness-side) and power supply
Knock sensor terminal A (harness-side) and body GND
Knock sensor terminal B (harness-side) and power supply
Knock sensor terminal B (harness-side) and body GND

A6E3940W015

End Of Sie

KNOCK SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the intake manifold. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the knock sensor attachment bolt to
remove the knock sensor.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E394018921W02

Tightening torque
16.223.8 N·m
{1.662.42 kgf·m, 12.017.5 ft·lbf}

A6E3940W016

End Of Sie
HEATED
OXYGEN SENSOR (HO2S) INSPECTION
HO2S Voltage Inspection
Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
1. Warm up the engine and run it at idle.
2. Disconnect the HO2S connector.

F56

A6E394018861W01

CONTROL SYSTEM
3. Connect the voltmeter test leads to the following
HO2S terminals:
• HO2S (front and rear)
(+) leadterminal A
() leadterminal B
4. With the vehicle stopped, run the engine at 3,000
rpm until the voltmeter moves between 0.5 and
0.7 V.
5. Verify that the measurement voltage changes
when the engine speed increases and decreases
suddenly several times.
• If not as specified, replace the HO2S.
• If the HO2S is okay, but O2S11 or O2S12 PID
value is out of specification, perform the
Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
Specification
Engine speed
Acceleration
Deceleration

A6E3940W017

Voltage (V)
0.51.0
00.5

Circuit Open/Short Inspection (Sensor)
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
Front
HO2S terminal A (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1AB (harness-side)
HO2S terminal B (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 2H (harness-side)
Rear
HO2S terminal A (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1Y (harness-side)
HO2S terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal 2H (harness-side)

A6E3940W018

Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
Front and Rear
HO2S terminal A (harness-side) and body GND
HO2S terminal A (harness-side) and power supply
HO2S terminal B (harness-side) and power supply
HO2S Heater Resistance Inspection
1. Disconnect the HO2S connector.
2. Measure the resistance between the HO2S
terminals C and D.
• If not as specified, replace the HO2S.
• If the HO2S heater is okay, but PID value is
out of specification, perform the Circuit Open/
Short Inspection.
Specification
Front : 3.03.6 ohms
Rear : 57 ohms
A6E3940W017

F57

CONTROL SYSTEM
Circuit Open/Short Inspection (Heater)
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harnesses for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
Front
HO2S terminal C (harness-side) and ignition
switch
HO2S terminal D (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 4A (harness-side)
Rear
HO2S terminal C (harness-side) and ignition
switch
HO2S terminal D (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4D (harness-side)

A6E3940W018

Short circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
Front and rear
HO2S terminal C (harness-side) and body GND
HO2S terminal D (harness-side) and power supply
HO2S terminal D (harness-side) and body GND

End Of Sie

POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E394032230W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Continuity Inspection
1. Inspect the following if the power steering is inoperative (See N4 POWER STEERING FLUID INSPECTION.):
• Power steering fluid level
• Power steering fluid leakage
• Power steering fluid pressure
2. Disconnect the PSP switch connector.
3. Start the engine.
4. Inspect for continuity between the PSP switch terminal and GND using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the PSP switch.
• If the PSP switch is okay, but PSP PID value is out of specification, perform the Circuit Open Inspection.
Specification

A6E3940W019

Circuit Open Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following harness for open or short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair or replace the harness.
PSP switch terminal (harness-side) and PCM terminal 1Z (harness-side)
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
PSP switch terminal (harness-side) and body GND

End Of Sie

F58

CONTROL SYSTEM
CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E394018660W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Continuity Inspection
1. Verify that the clutch switch is installed properly.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the clutch switch.
4. Inspect for continuity between the clutch switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If the clutch switch is okay, but CPP PID value
is out of specification, carry out of the Clutch
Switch Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
• If not as specified, replace the clutch switch.
Specification

A6E3940W020

A6E3940W022

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following harness for open or short.
(Continuity check)
Open circuit
• Clutch switch terminal B (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 1R
• Clutch switch terminal D and body GND
Short circuit
• Clutch switch terminal B (harness-side) and
power supply
• Clutch switch terminal B (harness-side) and body
GND

A6E3940W021

End Of Sie

NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E394017640W01

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
Continuity Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the neutral switch.J5 MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Inspect for continuity between the neutral switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If the neutral switch is okay, but CPP/PNP
PID value is out of specification, carry out of
the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
• If not as specified, replace the neutral switch.
Specification

A6E3940W023

A6E3940W025

F59

CONTROL SYSTEM
Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following harness for open or short.
(Continuity check)
Open circuit
• Neutral switch terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 1W (harness-side)
• Neutral switch terminal A (harness-side) and
body GND
Short circuit
• Neutral switch terminal B (harness-side) and
body GND

A6E3940W024

End Of Sie

BAROMETRIC PRESSURE (BARO) SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E394018211W02

Note
• Perform the following inspection only when directed.
• The following vacuum values are indicated by relative pressure from the barometric pressure sensor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect the SSTs (WDS or equivalent) to the DLC-2.
Turn the ignition switch to ON.
Select BARO on the SSTs (WDS or equivalent).
Verify that the BARO PID (pressure) and barometric pressure are practically equal.
• If not as verified, perform the Circuit Open/Short Inspection.
If there is no open or short circuit, replace the barometric pressure sensor.
• If as verified, go to next step.
5. Apply vacuum of 25.0 kPa {187 mmHg, 7.38 inHg} to the barometric pressure sensor, and verify that the
BARO variation from that of Step 4 is approx. 25.0 kPa {187 mmHg, 7.38 inHg}.
• If not as verified, perform the Circuit Open/Short inspection.
If there is no open or short circuit, replace the barometric pressure sensor.

Circuit Open/Short Inspection
1. Disconnect the PCM connector. (See F43 PCM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect the following wiring harness for open or
short. (Continuity check)
Open circuit
• If there is no continuity, the circuit is open. Repair
or replace the harness.
Barometric pressure sensor terminal A
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 1G
Barometric pressure sensor terminal B
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 2H
Barometric pressure sensor terminal C
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 2K
Short circuit
• If there is continuity, the circuit is shorted. Repair or replace the harness.
Barometric pressure sensor terminal C (harness-side) and power supply.
Barometric pressure sensor terminal C (harness-side) and body GND.
Barometric pressure sensor terminal A (harness-side) and power supply.
Barometric pressure sensor terminal A (harness-side) and body GND

End Of Sie

F60

A6E3940W026

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FOREWORD

A6E397018881W01

• When the customer reports a vehicle malfunction, check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL) indication and
diagnostic trouble code (DTC), then diagnose the malfunction according to following flowchart.
If a DTC exists, diagnose the applicable DTC inspection. (See F67 DTC TABLE.)
If no DTC exists and the MIL does not illuminate or flash, diagnose the applicable symptom
troubleshooting. (See F181 ENGINE SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING.)

A6E3970W001

: Malfunction Indicator lamp (MIL), Generator Warning Light, Security Light

End Of Sie

F61

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
OBD PENDING TROUBLE CODES

A6E397018881W02

• These appear when a problem is detected in a monitored system.
2 Drive Cycle Type
• The code for a failed system is stored in the PCM memory in the first drive cycle. If the problem is not found in
the second drive cycle, the PCM judges that the system returned to normal or the problem was mistakenly
detected, and deletes the pending code. If the problem is found in the second drive cycle too, the PCM judges
that the system has failed, and stores the pending codes, and the DTCs.
• After pending codes are stored, if the PCM judges that the system is normal in any future drive cycle, the PCM
deletes the pending codes.
1 Drive Cycle Type
• If any problems are detected in the first drive cycle, pending codes will be stored in the PCM memory, as well
as DTCs.
• After pending codes are stored, if the PCM judges that the system is normal in any future drive cycle, the PCM
deletes the pending codes.

End Of Sie

OBD FREEZE FRAME DATA

A6E397018881W03

• This is the technical data which indicates the engine condition at the time of the first malfunction. This data will
remain in the memory even if another emission-related DTC is stored, with the exception of the Misfire or Fuel
System DTCs. Once freeze frame data for the Misfire or Fuel System DTC is stored, it will overwrite any
previous data and the freeze frame will not be overwritten again.

End Of Sie

OBD ON-BOARD SYSTEM READINESS TEST

A6E397018881W04

• This shows OBD system operating status. If any monitor function is incomplete, WDS or equivalent will identify
which monitor function has not been completed. Misfires, Fuel System and Comprehensive Components
(CCM) are continuous monitoring-type functions. The catalyst, EGR system and oxygen sensor will be
monitored under drive cycles. The OBD diagnostic system is initialized by performing the DTC cancellation
procedure or disconnecting the negative battery cable.

End Of Sie

OBD DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS

A6E397018881W05

• These results from the intermittent monitor systems technical data, which are used to determine whether the
system is normal or not. They also display the system thresholds and diagnostic results. The intermittent
monitor system monitors the oxygen sensorand the catalyst.

End Of Sie

OBD READ/CLEAR DIAGNOSTIC TEST RESULTS

A6E397018881W06

• This retrieves all stored DTCs in the PCM and clears the DTCs, Freeze Frame Data, On-Board Readiness Test
Results, Diagnostic Monitoring Test Results and Pending Trouble Codes.

End Of Sie

OBD PARAMETER IDENTIFICATION (PID) ACCESS

A6E397018881W07

• The PID mode allows access to certain data values, analog and digital inputs and outputs, calculated values
and system status information. Since PID values for output devices are PCM internal data values, inspect each
device to identify which output devices are malfunctioning.

End Of Sie

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST
DTCs Reading Procedure
1. Perform the necessary vehicle preparation and visual inspection.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
3. Retrieve DTCs by WDS or equivalent.

A6E397018881W08

A6E3970W002

F62

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Pending Trouble Code Access Procedure
1. Perform the necessary vehicle preparation and visual inspection.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
3. Retrieve PENDING TROUBLE CODES by WDS
or equivalent.

F
A6E3970W002

Freeze Frame PID Data Access Procedure
1. Perform the necessary vehicle preparation and visual inspection.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
3. Record the FREEZE FRAME DATA by WDS or
equivalent.

A6E3970W002

On-Board System Readiness Tests Access Procedure
1. Perform the necessary vehicle preparation and visual inspection.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
3. Monitor the OBD systems operating status by
WDS or equivalent.

A6E3970W002

Diagnostic Monitoring Test Results Access Procedure
1. Perform the necessary vehicle preparation and visual inspection.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
3. Access to the DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING
TEST RESULTS and read the test results by
WDS or equivalent.

A6E3970W002

End Of Sie

F63

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
OBD DRIVE MODE

A6E397018881W09

• Performing the Drive Mode inspects the OBD system for proper operation. The Drive Mode must be performed
to ensure that no additional DTCs are present.
• During Drive Mode, the following systems are inspected:
Oxygen sensor (HO2S)
Oxygen sensor heater
Catalytic converter (TWC)

Caution
• While performing the Drive Mode, always operate the vehicle in a safe and lawful manner.
• When the WDS or equivalent is used to observe monitor system condition while driving, be sure to
have another technician with you, or record the data in the WDS or equivalent using the PID/DATA
MONITOR AND RECORD function and inspect later.
Note
• Vehicle speed and engine speed detected by the PCM may differ from that indicated by the speedometer
and tachometer. Use the WDS or equivalent to monitor vehicle speed.
• If the OBD system inspection is not completed during the Drive Mode, the following causes are
considered:
1. The OBD system detects the malfunction.
2. The Drive Mode procedure is not completed correctly.
• Disconnecting the battery will reset the memory. Do not disconnect the battery during and after Drive
Mode.
• The WDS or equivalent can be used at anytime through the course of Drive Mode to monitor the
completion condition. Monitoring can be done by viewing the ON-BOARD SYSTEM READINESS menu.
PCM Adaptive Memory Procedure Drive Mode
Note
• The PCM adaptive memory condition can be confirmed with RFCFLAG PID.
• If RFCFLAG PID is ON, PCM Adaptive Memory Procedure Drive Mode is not necessary, because PCM
already has adaptive memory.
• If RFCFLAG PID is OFF, PCM Adaptive Memory Procedure Drive should be performed before HO2S
Heater, HO2S, and TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode.
1. Start the engine and warm it up completely.
2. Verify all accessory loads (A/C, headlights, blower fan, rear window defroster) are off.
3. Perform no load racing at the engine speed
shown in the graph, then idle the engine for more
than 30 s after the cooling fan is stopped. If
possible, monitor RPM PID for engine speed and
FAN1 PID for cooling fan condition during this
procedure.
4. Turn ignition key off then on again.
5. Access to RFC FLAG PID to confirm PCM
adaptive memory condition. If RFCFLAG PID is
ON, PCM Adaptive Memory Procedure Drive is
completed.
6. If RFCFLAGPID is still OFF, go back to Step 1.

A6E3970W003

HO2S Heater, HO2S, and TWC Repair Verification Drive Mode
1. Access to RFCFLAG PID to confirm PCM adaptive memory condition. If RFCFLAG PID is OFF, perform PCM
Adaptive Memory Procedure Drive first.
2. If RFCFLAG PID is ON, start the engine and warm it up completely.
3. Verify all accessory loads (A/C, headlights, blower fan, rear window defroster) are off.
4. Drive the vehicle as shown in the graph; first drive in zone O, then A or B, followed by C or D, finally E or F.
Driving condition before the constant speed driving is not specified.

F64

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
For MTX
Zone
O
A
B
C
D
E
F

Shift
Position
Neutral
2nd
3rd
2nd
3rd
4th
5th

Vehicle Speed
Time
km/h {mph}
Sec.
0 {0}
T1: Above 455
4050 {2532}
T2: Above 30
6575 {4147}
6075 {3846}
T3: Above 20
75100 {4762}
5075 {3146}
T4: Above 120
75100 {4762}

A6E3970W004

For ATX
Zone

Range

Vehicle Speed
km/h {mph}

P or N

0 {0}

A
B
C
D
E
F

S (HOLD)
D (HOLD)
S (HOLD)
D (HOLD)
D (HOLD)
D

4065 {2541}
65100 {4062}
6075 {3846}
85100 {5262}
5075 {3147}
75100 {4662}

Time
Sec.
T1: Above
455
T2: Above 30
T3: Above 20
T4: Above
120

5. Stop vehicle and access to ON BOARD SYSTEM
READINESS menu of GENERIC OBD
FUNCTION to inspect the Drive Mode completion
condition. If completed, RFC changes from NO to
YES.
A6E3970W005
6. If not completed, turn the ignition key to OFF,
then go back to Step 4.
7. Access DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS menu of GENERIC OBD FUNCTIONS to inspect the
monitor results. If MEAS are not within the specification, repair has not completed.
8. Verify no DTC is available.

End Of Sie

DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS

A6E397018881W10

• The purpose of this test mode is to confirm the result of OBD monitor diagnostic test results. The result values
stored when particular monitor is completed are displayed. If the monitor is not completed, initial value is
displayed.
TEST ID
10:01:0A
10:02:0A
10:03:0A
10:04:0A
10:05:10
10:06:10
10:0A:10
10:80:20

Description
Rich to lean sensor threshold voltage
Lean to rich sensor threshold voltage
Low sensor voltage for switching time calculation
High sensor voltage for switching time calculation
Rich to lean sensor switching time
Lean to rich sensor switching time
Sensor period
Front and rear HO2S switching time ratio

Related system

HO2S

TWC

End Of Sie

F65

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE
STEP
INSPECTION
1
RECORD CONTINUOUS MEMORY DTC AND
FREEZE FRAME DATA
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC.
• Retrieve all stored DTCs.
• Are there any DTCs present?
2
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
• Check for related Service information
availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
3

PERFORM KEY ON ENGINE OFF (KOEO)
SELF-TEST
• Start engine.
• Warm up engine completely.
• Turn off all electrical loads.
• Perform KOEO SELF-TEST PROCEDURE.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST)
• Are there any KOEO DTCs present?
PERFORM KEY ON ENGINE RUNNING (KOER)
SELF-TEST
• Start engine.
• Perform KOER SELF-TEST PROCEDURE.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST)
• Are there any KOER DTCs present?

End Of Sie SELF-TEST
KOEO/KOER
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
2. Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.

A6E397018881W11

ACTION
Yes Record all stored DTCs (Continuous Memory DTC) and
Freeze Frame Data on repair order, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair KOEO DTC.
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair KOER DTC.
(See F67 DTC TABLE
No • If Continuous Memory DTC is present at Step 1, return
to applicable DTC troubleshooting procedure step.
• If Continuous Memory DTC is not present at Step 1, go
to symptom troubleshooting.
A6E397018881W12

A6E3970W002

End Of REPAIR
Sie
AFTER
PROCEDURE
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector located as shown in the figure.
2. Turn the ignition key from OFF to ON.
3. Record DTC if retrieved.
4. Erase all diagnostic data by WDS or equivalent.

A6E397018881W13

A6E3970W002

End Of Sie

F66

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC TABLE

A6E397018881W14

DTC table

DTC No.
P0010
P0011
P0012
P0031
P0032
P0037
P0038
P0101
P0102
P0103
P0107
P0108
P0111
P0112
P0113
P0117
P0118
P0121
P0122
P0123
P0125
P0131
P0132
P0133
P0134
P0138
P0140
P0171
P0172
P0300
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0327
P0328
P0335
P0340
P0403
P0420

×: Applicable
: Not applicable
Condition
CMP actuator circuit
malfunction
CMP timing over-advanced
CMP timing over-retarded
Front HO2S heater circuit low
input
Front HO2S heater circuit high
input
Rear HO2S heater circuit low
input
Rear HO2S heater circuit high
input
MAF sensor inconsistent with
TP sensor
MAF circuit low input
MAF circuit high input
MAP sensor circuit low input
MAP sensor circuit high input
IAT circuit performance problem
IAT circuit low input
IAT circuit high input
ECT circuit low input
ECT circuit high input
TP stuck closed
TP circuit low input
TP circuit high input
Excessive time to enter closed
loop fuel control
Front HO2S no inversion (stuck
low)
Front HO2S no inversion (stuck
high)
Front HO2S circuit malfunction
Front HO2S circuit no activity
detected
Rear HO2S circuit high input
Rear HO2S circuit no activity
detected
Fuel trim system too lean
Fuel trim system too rich
Random misfire detected
Cylinder No.1 misfire detected
Cylinder No.2 misfire detected
Cylinder No.3 misfire detected
Cylinder No.4 misfire detected
Knock sensor circuit low input
Knock sensor circuit high input
CKP sensor circuit malfunction
CMP sensor circuit malfunction
EGR valve motor coils open or
short
Catalyst system efficiency
below threshold

MIL

Monitor item

Memory
function

CCM

(See F70 DTC P0010)

ON
ON

1
1

CCM
CCM

×
×

(See F72 DTC P0011)
(See F73 DTC P0012)

O2 sensor heater

(See F74 DTC P0031)

O2 sensor heater

(See F76 DTC P0032)

O2 sensor heater

(See F78 DTC P0037)

O2 sensor heater

(See F80 DTC P0038)

CCM

(See F81 DTC P0101)

ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

1
1
1
1
2
1
1
1
1
2
1
1

CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM

×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

(See F83 DTC P0102)
(See F85 DTC P0103)
(See F86 DTC P0107)
(See F88 DTC P0108)
(See F90 DTC P0111)
(See F91 DTC P0112)
(See F92 DTC P0113)
(See F94 DTC P0117)
(See F96 DTC P0118)
(See F98 DTC P0121)
(See F100 DTC P0122)
(See F102 DTC P0123)

CCM

(See F104 DTC P0125)

CCM

O2 sensor

(See F108 DTC P0133)

CCM

(See F110 DTC P0134)

CCM

(See F112 DTC P0138)

CCM

(See F114 DTC P0140)

ON
ON
Flash / ON
Flash / ON
Flash / ON
Flash / ON
Flash / ON
ON
ON
ON
ON

2
2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1 or 2
1
1
1
1

Fuel
Fuel
Misfire
Misfire
Misfire
Misfire
Misfire
CCM
CCM
CCM
CCM

×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×
×

(See F116 DTC P0171)
(See F119 DTC P0172)
(See F121 DTC P0300)

(See F126 DTC P0327)
(See F128 DTC P0328)
(See F130 DTC P0335)
(See F132 DTC P0340)

CCM

(See F134 DTC P0403)

Catalyst

(See F137 DTC P0420)

Page

(See F105 DTC P0131,
P0132)
(See F105 DTC P0131,
P0132)

(See F124 DTC P0301,
P0302, P0303, P0304)

F67

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC No.
P0443
P0480

P0500
P0505
P0506
P0507
P0511
P0550
P0602
P0610
P0661
P0662
P0703
P0704
P0706
P0707
P0708
P0711
P0712
P0713
P0715
P0731
P0732
P0733
P0734
P0741
P0742
P0745
P0751
P0752
P0753
P0756

F68

Condition
Evaporative emission control
system purge control valve
circuit malfunction
Fan relay control circuit
malfunction
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
circuit malfunction (MTX)
Vehicle speed sensor (VSS)
circuit malfunction (ATX)
Idle control system malfunction
Idle control system RPM lower
than expected
Idle control system RPM higher
than expected
Idle control system circuit
malfunction
PSP switch circuit malfunction
PCM programming error
Control module vehicle options
error
VIS control circuit low input
VIS control circuit high input
Brake switch input malfunction
Clutch switch input malfunction
Transaxle range (TR) switch
circuit range/performance
Transaxle range (TR) switch
circuit low input
Transaxle range (TR) switch
circuit high input
Transaxle fluid temperature
(TFT) sensor circuit range/
performance (Stuck)
Transaxle fluid temperature
(TFT) sensor circuit malfunction
(short to ground)
Transaxle fluid temperature
(TFT) sensor circuit malfunction
(open circuit)
Input/turbine speed sensor
circuit malfunction
Gear 1 incorrect (Incorrect Gear
Ratio Detected)
Gear 2 incorrect (Incorrect Gear
Ratio Detected)
Gear 3 incorrect (Incorrect Gear
Ratio Detected)
Gear 4 incorrect (Incorrect Gear
Ratio Detected)
Torque converter clutch (TCC)
(stuck OFF)
Torque converter clutch (TCC)
(stuck ON)
Pressure control solenoid
malfunction
Shift solenoid A stuck OFF
Shift solenoid A stuck ON
Shift solenoid A malfunction
(electrical)
Shift solenoid B stuck OFF

MIL

Monitor item

Memory
function

CCM

(See F138 DTC P0443)

OFF

Other

(See F140 DTC P0480)

CCM

(See F142 DTC P0500)

Page

(See K53 DTC TABLE)
OFF

Other

(See F144 DTC P0505)

CCM

(See F145 DTC P0506)

CCM

(See F147 DTC P0507)

CCM

(See F148 DTC P0511)

ON
ON

2
1

CCM
CCM

×
×

(See F150 DTC P0550)
(See F152 DTC P0602)

CCM

(See F152 DTC P0610)

OFF
OFF
ON
ON

2
2
2
2

Other
Other
CCM
CCM

×
×
×
×

(See F153 DTC P0661)
(See F154 DTC P0662)
(See F156 DTC P0703)
(See F158 DTC P0704)

(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC No.

Condition

P0757

Shift solenoid B stuck ON
Shift solenoid B malfunction
(electrical)
Shift solenoid C stuck OFF
Shift solenoid C stuck ON
Shift solenoid C malfunction
(electrical)
Shift solenoid D stuck OFF
Shift solenoid D stuck ON
Shift solenoid D malfunction
(electrical)
Shift solenoid E stuck OFF
Shift solenoid E stuck ON
Shift solenoid E malfunction
(electrical)
Oil pressure switch circuit
malfunction
Neutral switch input malfunction
Variable air duct valve circuit
malfunction
PCM +BB voltage low
Variable tumble control system
shutter valve stuck closed
Variable tumble control solenoid
valve circuit low input
Variable tumble control solenoid
valve circuit high input
BARO sensor circuit low input
BARO sensor circuit high input
Generator output voltage signal
no electricity
Battery overcharge
Generator terminal B circuit
open

P0758
P0761
P0762
P0763
P0766
P0767
P0768
P0771
P0772
P0773
P0841
P0850
P1410
P1562
P2006
P2009
P2010
P2228
P2229
P2502
P2503
P2504

MIL

Monitor item

Memory
function

Page

(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)

(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
(See K53 DTC TABLE)
ON

CCM

(See F160 DTC P0850)

OFF

Other

(See F162 DTC P1410)

CCM

(See F164 DTC P1562)

CCM

(See F166 DTC P2006)

CCM

(See F168 DTC P2009)

CCM

(See F170 DTC P2010)

ON
ON

1
1

CCM
CCM

×
×

(See F172 DTC P2228)
(See F174 DTC P2229)

OFF

Other

(See F176 DTC P2502)

OFF

Other

(See F177 DTC P2503)

OFF

Other

(See F178 DTC P2504)

U0073

CAN bus off

OFF

Other

U0121

PCM cannot receive any
signals from ABS, ABS/TCS or
DSC HU/CM

Other

U0155

PCM cannot receive any
signals from combination meter

Other

(See T141 MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM)
(See T141 MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM)
(See T141 MULTIPLEX
COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM)

End Of Sie

F69

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0010
DTC P0010

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W01

CMP actuator circuit
• PCM monitors OCV voltage. If PCM detects OCV control voltage (calculated from OCV) is above or below
the threshold voltage (calculated from battery positive voltage), PCM determines that OCV circuit has
malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

F70

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
CLASSIFY MALFUNCTION AT POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT OR CONTROL CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between OCV terminal B
(harness-side) and body GND.
• Is voltage B+?
5
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between OCV terminal A
(harness-side) and body GND.
• Is voltage B+?
6
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between OCV terminal A
(harness-side) and body GND.
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at terminal 4M
(damaged, pulled-out terminals, corrosion,
etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
8
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between OCV (oil control
valve) terminal A (harness-side) and PCM
terminal 4M (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0010
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
10
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Malfunction at control circuit.
Go to next step.
No Malfunction at power supply circuit.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit, then go to Step
9.
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.

F
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to GND, then go to Step
9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F71

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0011
DTC P0011

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W02

CMP - Timing over-advanced
• Actual valve timing is over-advanced by 30 deg. from target valve timing when the OCV is controlled in the
maximum valve timing retard condition.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycles.
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
DTC is stored in PCM memory.
OCV malfunction
Spool valve in OCV is stuck in advance position.
Variable valve timing actuator is stuck in advance position.
Loose timing belt or improper valve timing due to timing belt slippage
PCM malfunction

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0011
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F72

Go to next step.
No Replace variable valve timing actuator, go to next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0012
DTC P0012

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W03

CMP - Timing over-retarded
• Actual valve timing is over-retarded by 5 deg. from target valve timing for 5 s when the OCV system control
is within feed-back range.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycles.
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
DTC is stored in PCM memory.
OCV (oil control valve) malfunction
Low engine oil pressure
Spool valve in OCV (oil control valve) is stuck in retard position.
Vriable valve timing actuator is stuck in retard position.
Following oil runners are clogged or have leakage.

Oil runners

• Between oil pressure switch and OCV (oil control valve)
• Between OCV (oil control valve) and variable valve timing actuator
• In variable valve timing actuator
• Loose timing belt or improper valve timing due to timing belt slippage
• PCM malfunction

INSPECT ENGINE OIL RUNNER
• Inspect following engine oil runners for
clogging or leakage.
Beetween oil pressure switch and OCV
Between OCV and variable valve timing
actuator
In variable valve timing actuator
• Is there any clogging or leakage?

Go to next step.
No Replace OCV, then go to Step 7.
Yes Repair or replace suspected runner, then go to next step.
No VARIABLE VALVE TIMING MECHANISM IS NORMAL
Note
• This DTC is detected by intermittent concern.
• Intermittent concern might be removed by cleaning
mode of variable valve timing control function.
Go to next step.

F73

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0012
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0031
DTC P0031

A6E397001084W04

Front HO2S heater circuit low input
• PCM monitors front HO2S heater control signal at PCM terminal 4A. If PCM turns front HO2S heater off but
front HO2S heater circuit has low voltage, PCM determines that front HO2S heater circuit has malfunction.
Note
• Front HO2S heater is controlled by duty signal.

DETECTION Diagnostic support note
CONDITION
• This is a continuous monitor (O2 sensor heater).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one drive
cycle while DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Front HO2S malfunction
• Open circuit between ignition switch and front HO2S terminal C
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit between front HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 4A
CAUSE
• Short to ground circuit between front HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 4A
• Poor connection at front HO2S or PCM connector
• PCM malfunction

F74

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0031

Front HO2S heater circuit low input

F75

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT OF FRONT HO2S
HEATER FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between front HO2S terminal
D (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT OF FRONT HO2S
HEATER FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Remove PCM with PCM connector connected.
• Inspect continuity between front HO2S terminal
D (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4A.
• Is there continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0031
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 8.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open circuit, then go to Step
8.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0032
DTC P0032

A6E397001084W05

Front HO2S heater circuit high input
• PCM monitors front HO2S heater control signal at PCM terminal 4A. If PCM turns front HO2S heater on but
front HO2S heater circuit has high voltage, PCM determines that front HO2S heater circuit has malfunction.
Note
• Front HO2S heater is controlled by a duty signal.

DETECTION Diagnostic support note
CONDITION
• This is a continuous monitor (O2 sensor heater).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Short to power circuit between front HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 4A
POSSIBLE
• Front HO2S or PCM terminal is shorted
CAUSE
• Front HO2S heater malfunction
• PCM malfunction

F76

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0032

Front HO2S heater circuit high input

F77

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0032
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0037
DTC P0037

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F78

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001084W06

Rear HO2S heater circuit low input
• PCM monitors rear HO2S heater control signal at PCM terminal 4D. If PCM turns rear HO2S heater off but
rear HO2S heater circuit has low voltage, PCM determines that rear HO2S heater circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

• This is a continuous monitor (O2 sensor heater).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Rear HO2S malfunction
• Open circuit between the ignition switch and rear HO2S terminal C
• Open circuit between the rear HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 4D
• Short to ground circuit between rear HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 4D
• Poor connection at rear HO2S or PCM connector
• PCM malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF REAR HO2S Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 8.
CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect rear HO2S connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
3
INSPECT REAR HO2S HEATER
Yes Go to next step.
• Inspect rear HO2S heater.
No Replace rear HO2S, then go to Step 8.
(See F56 HEATED OXYGEN SENSOR
(HO2S) INSPECTION.)
• Is rear HO2S heater okay?
4
INSPECT REAR HO2S HEATER POWER
Yes Go to next step.
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
No Repair or replace harness for open circuit, then go to Step
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
8.
• Measure voltage between rear HO2S terminal
C (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there voltage B+?
5
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
6
INSPECT REAR HO2S HEATER CONTROL
Step 8.
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between rear HO2S terminal No Go to next step.
D (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there any continuity?
7
INSPECT HREAR HO2S HEATER CONTROL
Yes Go to next step.
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
No Repair or replace harness for open circuit, then go to Step
• Remove PCM with PCM connector connected.
8.
• Inspect continuity between rear HO2S terminal
D (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4D.
• Is there any continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0037
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F79

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0038
DTC P0038

A6E397001084W07

Rear HO2S heater circuit high input
• PCM monitors rear HO2S heater control signal at PCM terminal 4D. If PCM turns rear HO2S heater on but
rear HO2S heater circuit has high voltage, PCM determines that rear HO2S heater circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• This is a continuous monitor (O2 sensor heater).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Short to power circuit between rear HO2S terminal D and PCM terminal 4D
• Rear HO2S or PCM terminal is shorted
• Rear HO2S heater malfunction
• PCM malfunction

F80

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT PCM TERMINAL
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for bent terminals.
• Is there any malfunctions?
5
INSPECT REAR HO2S HEATER CONTROL
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between rear HO2S terminal
D (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there voltage B+?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0038
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS
or equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0101

ACTION
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 6.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair or replace harness for shot to power circuit, then go
to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001084W08

MAF sensor inconsistent with TP sensor (lower than expected) or engine speed (greater than
DTC P0101
expected)
• The PCM compares actual input signal from MAF sensor with expected input signal from MAF sensor
(calculated by input voltage from throttle position sensor or engine speed).
If mass intake air flow amount is below 5.0 g/sec. {0.66 lb/min.} for 5 s and throttle opening angle is
above 50% with engine running, the PCM determines that detected mass intake air flow amount is too
low.
If mass intake air flow amount is above 96.0 g/sec. {12.7 lb/min.} for 5 s and engine speed is below
2,000 rpm with engine running, the PCM determines that detected mass intake air flow amount is too
DETECTION
high.
CONDITION

Diagnostic support note

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• MAF sensor malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction
• Electrical corrosion in MAF signal circuit
• Electrical corrosion in MAF RETURN circuit
• Voltage drops in MAF signal circuit
• Voltage drops in ground circuit

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?

F81

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS-IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Start the engine.
• Access ECT, TP and MAF PIDs.
• Warm up the engine until ECT PID is above 80
°C {176 °F}.
• Drive the vehicle.
• Read MAF PID while TP PID is above 50%.
• Is MAF PID reading below 4.8 g/s {0.63 lb/
min.}?
4
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS-IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Start the engine.
• Access ECT, MAF and RPM PIDs.
• Warm up engine until ECT PID is above 80°°C
{176 °F}.
• Read MAF PID while RPM PID is below 1,000
rpm.
• Is MAF PID reading above 66.5 g/s {8.8 lb/
min.}?
5
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF MAF
SENSOR CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect MAF/IAT sensor connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
6
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0101
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start the engine.
• Access ECT, TP and RPM PIDs.
• Warm up the engine until ECT PID is reading
above 80°°C {176°°F}.
• Drive the vehicle while TP PID above 50% for
50 s.
• Is same DTC present?
8
INSPECT MAF SENSOR TERMINALS FOR
ELECTRICAL CORROSION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect MAF/IAT sensor connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is any problem corrosion found?
9
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?

F82

ACTION
Yes Make sure that throttle position sensor resistance changes
smoothly while gradually opening throttle valve.
• If not, replace throttle position sensor and go to Step 7.
• For others, go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to Step 8.
No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
CONCERNS TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)

Yes Repair or replace suspected terminal or MAF/IAT sensor,
then go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to next step.
No Replace MAF/IAT sensor, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to Step 11.
No Go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace suspected terminal or MAF/IAT sensor,
then go to Step 10.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
10
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0101
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start the engine.
• Warm up engine until ECT PID is above 80 °C
{176 °F}.
• Drive the vehicle while RPM PID 2,000 rpm for
50 s.
• Is pending code the same as DTC present?
11
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

F
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0102
DTC P0102

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W09

MAF circuit low input
• PCM monitors input voltage from MAF sensor when engine running. If input voltage at PCM terminal 1P is
below 0.21 V, PCM determines that MAF circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

F83

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF MAF
Yes Repair or replace terminals, then go to Step 7.
SENSOR CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect the MAF/IAT sensor connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
3
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN Yes Go to next step.
CIRCUIT
No Inspect for open circuit in wiring harness between MAF/IAT
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
sensor terminal B (harness-side) and main relay.
• Inspect voltage at MAF/IAT sensor terminal B
Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 7.
(harness-side).
• Is there voltage B+?
4
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 7.
CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
5
INSPECT MAF SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to next step.
OPEN CIRCUIT
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 7.
• Remove PCM with PCM connector connected.
• Inspect for continuity between MAF/IAT sensor
terminal C (harness-side) and PCM terminal
1P (harness-side).
• Is there any continuity?
6
INSPECT MAF SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to next step.
SHORTS
No Replace MAF/IAT sensor, then go to next step.
• Inspect continuity between following circuits:
MAF/IAT sensor terminal C (harness-side)
and body ground
MAF/IAT sensor connector terminal C
(harness-side) and B (harness-side)
• Are there any continuity?
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0102
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F84

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0103
DTC P0103

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W10

MAF circuit high input
• PCM monitors input voltage from MAF sensor when engine running. If input voltage at PCM terminal 1P is
above 4.9 V, PCM determines that MAF circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

F85

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT MAF SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
TO POWER CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between MAF/IAT sensor
terminal C (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there voltage 0 V?
4
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
5
INSPECT MAF SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Remove PCM with PCM connector connected.
• Inspect for continuity between MAF/IAT sensor
terminal B (harness-side) and GND.
• Is there any continuity?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0103
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 6.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 6.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace MAF/IAT sensor, then go to next step.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0107
DTC P0107

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F86

A6E397001084W11

MAP sensor circuit low input
• PCM monitors input voltage from MAP sensor when intake air temperature is above 10 °C {50 °F}. If input
voltage at PCM terminal 1J is below 0.1V, PCM determines that MAP sensor circuit has a malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0107

MAP sensor circuit low input

F87

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT MAP SENSOR SIGNAL AND
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR SHORT EACH OTHER
• Check continuity between MAP sensor
terminals D and A (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0107
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0108
DTC P0108

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F88

A6E397001084W12

MAP sensor circuit high input
• PCM monitors input voltage from MAP sensor when intake air temperature is above 10 °C {50 °F}. If input
voltage at PCM terminal 1J is above 4.9V, PCM determines that MAP sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0108

MAP sensor circuit high input

F89

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
VERIFY MAP SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO CONSTANT VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
• Inspect for continuity between MAP sensor
terminal D and C (harness-side).
• Is there any continuity?
7
VERIFY MAP SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between MAP sensor
terminal D (harness-side) and PCM terminal 1J
(harness-side).
• Is there any continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0108
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0111
DTC P0111

A6E397001084W13

IAT circuit performance problem
• If intake air temperature is higher than engine coolant temperature by 40 °C {104 °F} with ignition key on,
the PCM determines that there is a IAT sensor performance problem.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF MAF/IAT
SENSOR CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect MAF/IAT sensor connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
INSPECT IAT SENSOR
• Inspect IAT sensor.
(See F50 INTAKE AIR TEMPERATURE (IAT)
SENSOR INSPECTION)
• Is IAT sensor okay?

F90

Yes Replace MAF/IAT sensor, then go to Step 6.
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunction?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0111
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine and run engine under FREEZE
FRAME DATA condition.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 6.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0112
DTC P0112

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W14

IAT circuit low input
• PCM monitors IAT sensor signal at PCM terminal 2E. If PCM detects IAT sensor voltage below 0.15 V,
PCM determines that IAT sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

F91

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0113
DTC P0113

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F92

A6E397001084W15

IAT circuit high input
• PCM monitors input voltage from IAT sensor If input voltage at PCM terminal 2E is above 4.9 V, PCM
determines that IAT sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0113

IAT circuit high input

F93

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect PCM terminals 2E and 2H (harnessside) for tightness using feeler tool.
• Are there any malfunction?
6
INSPECT IAT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between MAF/IAT sensor
terminal D (harness-side) and PCM terminal
2E.
• Is there any continuity?
7
INSPECT IAT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between MAF/IAT sensor
terminal E (harness-side) and PCM terminal
2H.
• Is there continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0113
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0117
DTC P0117

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F94

A6E397001084W16

ECT circuit low input
• PCM monitors ECT sensor signal at PCM terminal 1M. If PCM detects ECT sensor voltage below 0.2 V,
PCM determines that the ECT sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0117

ECT circuit low input

F95

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0117
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0118
DTC P0118

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F96

A6E397001084W17

ECT circuit high input
• PCM monitors ECT sensor signal at PCM terminal 1M. If PCM detects ECT sensor voltage above 4.6 V,
PCM determines that ECT sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF ECT
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 8.
SENSOR CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ECT sensor connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
3
CLASSIFY ECT SENSOR MALFUNCTION OR
Yes Replace ECT sensor, then go to Step 8.
HARNESS MALFUNCTION
No Go to next step.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access ECT PID.
• Connect a jumper wire between ECT sensor
terminals A and B.
• Verify ECT value
• Is voltage below 4.5 V?
4
INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
Step 8.
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
No Go to next step.
• Measure voltage between ECT sensor terminal
A (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there voltage B+?
5
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 8.
CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunction?
6
INSPECT ECT SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR Yes Go to next step.
OPEN CIRCUIT
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 8.
• Inspect continuity between ECT sensor
terminal A (harness-side) and PCM terminal
1M.
• Is there any continuity?
7
INSPECT ECT SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
Yes Go to next step.
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.
• Inspect continuity between ECT sensor
terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal
2H.
• Is there any continuity?
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0118
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F97

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0121
DTC P0121

A6E397001084W18

Throttle position stuck close (lower than expected)/open (higher than expected)
• If PCM detects that throttle valve opening angle is below 12.5% for 5 s after following conditions are met,
PCM determines that TP is stuck closed:

MONITORING CONDITION

Engine coolant temperature above 80 °C {176 °F}
MAF sensor signal above 32.0 g/s {4.2 lb/minutes}
• If PCM detects that throttle valve opening angle is above 50% for 5 seconds after following conditions are
met, the PCM determines that TP is stuck open:
DETECTION
CONDITION

MONITORING CONDITION

Engine speed above 500 rpm
MAF sensor signal 5 g/s {0.7 lb/min.}

Diagnostic support note

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR
STORED DTC
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Retrieve pending or stored DTC using WDS or
equivalent.
• Is DTC P0101 also retrieved?
VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS - IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Start the engine.
• Access ECT, TP and MAF PIDs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Warm up the engine until ECT PID is above 80
°C {176 °F}
• Drive the vehicle.
• Read TP PID while MAF PID is above 32.0 g/s
{4.2 lb/min.}.
• Is TP PID reading above 12.5%?
VERIFY TP PID
• Start engine.
• Access TP, MAF and RPM PIDs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Read TP PID while MAF PID is below 4.8 g/s
{0.6 lb/min.} and RPM PID is above 500 rpm.
• Is TP PID reading above 50%?

F98

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME DATA on repair order, then go to
next step.
Yes Go to DTC P0101 troubleshooting procedure.
No Go to next step.

Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to Step 12.
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS - IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Drive the vehicle and read MAF PID.
• Does MAF PID change in compliance with
driving condition?
7

8
9

INSPECT TP SENSOR TERMINALS FOR
ELECTRICAL CORROSION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect TP sensor connector
• Inspect for electrical corrosion on male and
female TP sensor terminals.
• Is any electrical corrosion found?
VERIFY TP SENSOR
• Does TP sensor resistance smoothly change
while gradually opening throttle valve?
INSPECT PCM TERMINALS FOR ELECTRICAL
CORROSION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for electrical corrosion on PCM male
and female terminals.
• Is any electrical corrosion found?
INSPECT CONSTANT VOLTAGE SUPPLY AND
TP SIGNAL CIRCUITS FOR VOLTAGE DROP
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Inspect voltage between following terminals:
TP sensor connector terminal C (harnessside) and PCM terminal 2K
TP sensor connector terminal B (harnessside) and PCM terminal 2A
• Is voltage approx. 0 V?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0121
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start the engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Access ECT, TP and MAF PIDs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Warm up the engine until ECT PID is reading
above 80 °C {176°°F}.
• Drive the vehicle and read TP and MAF PIDs.
• Verify PIDs reading are within specifications
MAF PID: above 32.0 g/s {4.2 lb/min.}
TP PID: above 12.5% above 5 s
• Is PENDING CODE of same DTC present?
INSPECT TP SENSOR TERMINALS FOR
ELECTRICAL CORROSION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect TP sensor connector.
• Inspect for electrical corrosion on male and
female TP sensor terminals.
• Is any electrical corrosion found?
INSPECT GROUND CIRCUIT FOR VOLTAGE
DROP
• Inspect resistance between TP sensor terminal
A (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is resistance approx. 0 ohm?
VERIFY TP SENSOR
• Does resistance smoothly change while
gradually opening throttle valve?

ACTION
Yes Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
CONCERNS troubleshooting procedure.
No Inspect Mass airflow sensor and related circuits and
terminals.
(See F51 MASS AIR FLOW (MAF) SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
Repair or replace as necessary, then go to Step 16.
Yes Repair or replace suspected terminal or TP sensor, then go
to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace TP sensor, then go to Step 11.
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect for rust or corrosion on PCM terminals 2A and 2K
(harness-side).
• Repair or replace suspected terminal then go to next
step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to Step 17.
No Go to Step 17.

Yes Repair or replace suspected terminal or TP sensor, then go
to Step 16.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace for rust or corrosion on PCM terminal 2H
(harness-side).
• Repair or replace suspected terminal.
Go to Step 16.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace TP sensor, then go to Step 16.

F99

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
15 INSPECT PCM TERMINALS FOR ELECTRICAL
CORROSION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for electrical corrosion on PCM and
PCM connector male and female terminals.
• Is any electrical corrosion found?
16 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0121
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Access RPM, TP and MAF PIDs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Verify TP PID is reading below 50% while MAF
PID is below 4.8 g/s {0.6 lb/min.} and RPM
PID is above 500 rpm.
• Is pending code the same as DTC present?
17 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair terminal, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0122
DTC P0122

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F100

A6E397001084W19

TP circuit low input
• If PCM detects TP sensor voltage at PCM terminal 2A is below 0.1 V while engine running, PCM
determines that TP circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in first drive cycles.
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
TP sensor malfunction
Connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit between TP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2A
Short to ground circuit between TP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2A
Open circuit between TP sensor terminal C and PCM terminal 2K

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0122

TP circuit low input

F101

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
VERIFY TP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between TP sensor terminal
B (harness-side) and PCM terminal 2A.
• Is there continuity?
6
VERIFY TP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Inspect continuity between TP sensor terminal
B (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0122
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 7.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0123
DTC P0123

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F102

A6E397001084W20

TP circuit high input
• If PCM detects TP sensor voltage at PCM terminal 2A is above 4.9 V after ignition key to on, the PCM
determines that TP circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in first drive cycles.
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
TP sensor malfunction
Connector or terminal malfunction
Open circuit between TP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2H
Short to constant voltage supply circuit between TP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2A

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0123

TP circuit high input

F103

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
8
VERIFY TP SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
CONSTANT VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between TP sensor
connector terminals B and C.
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0123
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
10 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 9.
No Go to Step 9.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0125
DTC P0125

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001084W21

Excessive time to enter closed loop fuel control
• PCM monitors ECT sensor signal at PCM terminal 1M after engine is started while engine is cold. If engine
coolant temperature does not reach the expected temperature for specified period, PCM determines that it
has taken an excessive amount of time for the engine coolant temperature to reach the temperature
necessary to start closed-loop fuel control.

Diagnostic support note

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS-IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Start engine.
• Warm up engine completely.
• Access ECT PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Is ECT PID above 60 °C {140 °F}?
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF ECT
SENSOR CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ECT sensor connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?

F104

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME DATA on repair order, then go to
next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
CONCERNS TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT ECT SENSOR
• Inspect ECT sensor.
(See F53 ENGINE COOLANT
TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?
6
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0125
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Access ECT PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Wait until ECT PID below 20 °C {68 °F}.
• Start engine and warm it up completely.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC stored?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace ECT sensor, then go to Step 7.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

F
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie P0132
DTC
P0131,
DTC P0131
DTC P0132

A6E397001084W22

Front HO2S stuck low
Front HO2S stuck high
• PCM monitors input voltage from front HO2S when the following monitoring conditions are met. If input
voltage from sensor remains below or above 0.45 V for 41.2 s, PCM determines that there is no front
HO2S inversion.

MONITORING CONDITIONS

Engine speed is above 1,500 rpm.
Engine coolant temperature is above 80 °C {176°°F}.

DETECTION
CONDITION Diagnostic support note
• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Front HO2S malfunction
• Front HO2S heater malfunction
• Fuel injector malfunction
• Pressure regulator malfunction
• Fuel pump malfunction
• Fuel delivery hose clogging or leakage
• Fuel filter clogging
POSSIBLE
• Fuel return hose clogging or leakage
CAUSE
• Air suction or leakage
• PCV valve malfunction
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Purge solenoid hoses are hooked up incorrectly.
• Ignition coil malfunction
• Insufficient compression
• Engine malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME DATA on repair order, then go to
next step.

F105

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
3
VERIFY RELATED PENDING AND STORED
DTCs
• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify pending and stored DTCs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Is other DTC present?
4
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME
DATA
• Is DTC P0131 and P0132 on FREEZE FRAME
DATA?
5
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS - IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Warm-up engine.
• Access O2S11 for P0131 and P0132 PID using
WDS or equivalent.
• Verify PID while racing engine (in PARK (ATX)
or NEUTRAL (MTX)).
• Is PID reading okay?
More than 0.45 V when suddenly depress
accelerator pedal (rich condition)
Less than 0.45 V just after release of
accelerator pedal (lean condition)
6
INSPECT LONG TERM FUEL TRIM
• Access LONGFT1 for P0131 and P0132 PID
using WDS or equivalent.
• Compare it with FREEZE FRAME DATA
recorded at Step1.
• Was it decreased?
7
INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE (EXCESSIVE
FUEL LINE PRESSURE)
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect fuel line pressure.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?
8
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE FOR
STUCK OPEN
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect both hoses from purge solenoid
valve.
• Blow air through purge solenoid valve.
• Does air blow through?
9
INSPECT PCV VALVE OPERATION
• Inspect PCV valve operation.
(See F41 PCV VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Is PCV valve okay?
10 INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE (LOW FUEL
LINE PRESSURE)
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect fuel line pressure.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?
11 INSPECT FUEL PUMP MAXIMUM PRESSURE
• Stop engine.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Perform fuel pump maximum pressure test.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel pump maximum pressure okay?

F106

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to appropriate DTC troubleshooting procedures.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace front HO2S, then go to Step 19.

Yes Engine is driven under rich condition. Go to next step.
No Engine is driven under lean condition. Go to step 9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect following parts and repair or replace if necessary:
• Fuel pump maximum pressure
• Fuel return pipe for clogged
If all items above are okay, replace pressure
regulator. Then, go to Step 19.
Yes Replace purge solenoid valve.
No Go to Step 13.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace PCV, then go to Step 19.
Yes Go to step 13.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect fuel pump circuit for open or poor connection.
• Repair or replace suspected circuit.
• If circuit is okay, replace fuel pump.
Then go to Step 19.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
12
INSPECT FUEL LINE FROM FUEL PUMP TO
FUEL DELIVERY PUMP
• Visually inspect fuel line for any leakage.
• Is any fuel leakage found?

CHECK IGNITION COIL OPERATION
• Perform spark test.
(See F232 Spark Test)
• Do all cylinders show blinking condition?
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL AT
IGNITION COIL CONNECTOR
• Disconnect ignition coil connector.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between ignition coil
connector terminal D (harness-side) and body
ground.
• Is the voltage reading B+?
INSPECT IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE
• Check ignition coil resistance.
(See G9 IGNITION COIL INSPECTION.)
• Is coil resistance okay?
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect injector.
(See F31 FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION.)
• Is injector okay?
INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
PASSAGE
Warning
• Removing radiator cap when radiator is
hot is dangerous. Scalding coolant and
steam may shoot out and cause serious
injury.
• When removing radiator cap, wrap a
thick cloth around and turn it slowly.

ACTION
Yes Replace suspected fuel line, then go to Step 19.
No Inspect fuel filters for following:
• Restriction or clogging at fuel filter (high-pressure side).
• Foreign materials or stain inside fuel filter (low-pressure
side)
If restriction or clogging is found at fuel filter (highpressure side), replace fuel filter.
If foreign materials or stain is found inside fuel filter
(low-pressure side), clean of fuel tank and filter.
If all items above are okay, replace pressure
regulator. Then, go to Step 19.
Yes Go to step 16.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Check for open circuit between ignition coil connector and
ignition switch.
Repair or replace wiring harness, then go to Step 19.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace ignition coil, then go to Step 19.
Yes Go to next step.
No Implement engine overhaul for repairs, then go to next
step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace injector, then go to Step 19.

Yes Air gets in from poor sealing to head gasket or other areas
between combustion chamber and engine coolant
passage.
Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

• Remove radiator cap.
• Implement procedure to bleed air from engine
coolant, then run engine at idle.
• Is there any small bubble, which makes engine
coolant white at filling opening?
Note
• Large bubbles are normal since they are
remaining air coming out from engine
coolant passage.

F107

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
19 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0131 or
P0132 COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Access ECT and RPM PIDs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Make sure that ECT PID is above 80 °C {176
°F}.
• Increase and keep engine speed above 1,500
rpm for at least 1 min.
• Is pending code the same as DTC present?
20 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0133
DTC P0133

A6E397001084W23

Front HO2S circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors inversion cycle period, lean-to-rich response time and rich-to-lean response time of the
sensor. PCM calculates the average of the inversion cycle period-specified inversion cycles, average
response time from lean-to-rich, and from rich-to-lean when following conditions are met. If any exceeds
threshold, PCM determines that circuit has malfunction.

MONITORING CONDITIONS

DETECTION
CONDITION

Drive mode 3
Following conditions are met:
• Calculation load 14.859.4 % (at 2,000 rpm).
• Engine speed 1,4104,000 rpm (MTX)
• Engine speed 1,1904,000 rpm (ATX)
• Vehicle speed is above 3.76 km/h
• Engine coolant temperature is above -10 °C {14 °F}
• Front HO2S signal inversion cycle is above 10 cycles

Diagnostic support note

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• This is an intermittent monitor. (OXYGEN SENSOR)
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS is available.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Front HO2S deterioration
• Front HO2S heater malfunction
• Pressure regulator malfunction
• Fuel pump malfunction
• Fuel filter clogged or restricted
• Fuel leakage on fuel line from fuel distribution pipe and fuel pump
• Leakage exhaust system
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Purge solenoid hoses improper connection
• Insufficient compression
• Engine malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?

F108

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY RELATED PENDING AND STORED
DTCS
• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify pending and /or stored DTCs using WDS
or equivalent.
• Is DTC P0443 also present?
4
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME
DATA
• Is DTC P0133 on FREEZE FRAME DATA?
5

6
7

VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
• Warm up engine.
• Access O2S11 PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Inspect PID under following accelerator pedal
conditions (in PARK (ATX) or NEUTRAL
(MTX)).
• Is PID reading okay?
More than 0.55 V when suddenly depress
accelerator pedal (rich condition).
Less than 0.55 V just after release of
accelerator pedal (lean condition).
INSPECT INSTALLATION OF FRONT HO2S
• Inspect if front HO2S is loosely installed.
• Is sensor installed securely?
INSPECT GAS LEAKAGE FROM EXHAUST
SYSTEM
• Visually check if any gas leakage is found
between exhaust manifold and front HO2S.
• Is there any gas leakage?
INSPECT LONG TERM FUEL TRIM
• Access LONGFT1 PIDs
• Compare it with FREEZE FRAME DATA
recorded at Step 1.
• Is it below FFD value?
INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE (Excessive
fuel line pressure)
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect fuel line pressure while engine running.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?

ACTION
Yes Go to DTC P0443 troubleshooting procedures, then go to
Step 13.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
Yes Go to step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Retighten sensor, then go to Step 13.
Yes Repair or replace any faulty exhaust parts, then go to Step
13.
No Replace sensor, then go to Step 13.
Yes Engine is driven under rich condition. Go to next step.
No Engine is driven under lean condition. Go to step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect fuel pump maximum pressure and fuel return pipe
for clogging.
(See F25 FUEL PUMP UNIT INSPECTION.)
• If any problem is found, repair or replace suspected
parts.
• If all items above are okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Then go to Step 13.
Yes Go to step 13.
No Go to next step.

INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE (Low fuel line
pressure)
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect fuel line pressure while engine running.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?
Yes Replace suspected fuel line, then go to Step 13.
INSPECT FUEL LINE FROM FUEL PUMP TO
FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
No Inspect fuel filters for following:
• Visually inspect fuel line for any leakage.
• Restriction or clogging at fuel filter (high-pressure side)
• Is any fuel leakage found?
• Foreign materials or stain inside fuel filter (low-pressure
side)
Perform following actions according to result.
• If restriction or clogging is found at fuel filter (highpressure side), replace fuel filter.
• If foreign material or stain is found inside fuel filter (lowpressure side), clean of fuel tank and filter.
• If all items above are okay, replace pressure regulator.
Then go to Step 13.

F109

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
12 INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
PASSAGE
Warning
• Removing radiator cap when radiator is
hot is dangerous. Scalding coolant and
steam may shoot out and cause serious
injury.
• When removing radiator cap, wrap a
thick cloth around and turn it slowly.

ACTION
Yes Air gets in from poor sealing on head gasket or other areas
between combustion chamber and engine coolant
passage.
Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

• Remove radiator cap.
• Implement procedure to bleed air from engine
coolant, then run engine at idle.
• Is there any small bubble, which makes engine
coolant white at filling opening?

Note
• Large bubbles are normal since they are
remaining air coming out from engine
coolant passage.
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0133
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition switch to ON (Engine OFF)
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent generic OBD function.
• Run OBD drive mode.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?.
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0134
DTC P0134

A6E397001084W24

Front HO2S circuit no activity detected
• PCM monitors input voltage from front HO2S when the following conditions are met. If input voltage from
sensor never exceed 0.55 V for 83.2 s, PCM determines that sensor circuit is not activated.

MONITORING CONDITIONS

HO2S, HO2S heater and TWC repair verification drive mode
Following conditions are met
• Engine speed is above 1,500 rpm.
• Engine coolant temperature is above 80 °C {176 °F}.

DETECTION
CONDITION Diagnostic support note
• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Front HO2S deterioration
• Front HO2S heater malfunction
POSSIBLE
• Leakage exhaust system
CAUSE
• Open or short to ground circuit between front HO2S terminal A and PCM terminal 1AB
• Insufficient compression
• Engine malfunction

F110

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0134

Front HO2S circuit no activity detected

• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify pending and stored DTCs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Is other DTC present?
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME
DATA
• Is DTC P0134 on FREEZE FRAME DATA?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
• Warm up engine.
• Access O2S11 PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Verify PID while racing engine (in NEUTRAL
(MTX) or PARK (ATX)).
• Is PID reading okay?
More than 0.55 V when suddenly depress
accelerator pedal (rich condition).
Less than 0.55 V just after release of
accelerator pedal (lean condition)
INSPECT INSTALLATION OF FRONT HO2S
• Check if front HO2S is loosely installed.
• Is sensor installed securely?

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
Yes Go to step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Install sensor securely, then go to Step 9.

F111

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT GAS LEAKAGE FROM EXHAUST
SYSTEM
• Visually check if any gas leakage is found
between exhaust manifold and front HO2S.
• Is there any gas leakage?

INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
PASSAGE
Warning
• Removing radiator cap when radiator is
hot is dangerous. Scalding coolant and
steam may shoot out and cause serious
injury.
• When removing radiator cap, wrap a
thick cloth around and turn it slowly.

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace any faulty exhaust parts, then go to Step
9.
No • Inspect the following harnesses for open or short to
ground circuit, repair or replace harness if necessary
Front HO2S terminal A (harness-side) to PCM
terminal 1AB (harness-side)
• Repair or replace harness if necessary.
• If all items above are okay, replace faulty sensor.
Then go to Step 9.
Yes Air gets in from poor sealing on head gasket or other areas
between combustion chamber and engine coolant
passage.
Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

• Remove radiator cap.
• Implement procedure to bleed air from engine
coolant, then run engine at idle.
• Is there any small bubble, which makes engine
coolant white at filling opening?

Note
• Large bubbles are normal since they are
remaining air coming out from engine
coolant passage.
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0134
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0138
DTC P0138

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F112

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001084W25

Rear HO2S circuit high input
• PCM monitors input voltage from rear HO2S. If input voltage from rear HO2S sensor is above 0.45 V for 7
s during deceleration fuel cut, PCM determines that circuit input is high.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

Yes Go to next step.
No Implement engine overhaul for repairs, then go to next
step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0138

Rear HO2S circuit high input

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME DATA on repair order, then go to
next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to appropriate DTC troubleshooting procedures.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
Yes Replace short to power supply circuit, then go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace sensor, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

F113

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0138
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Run PCM adaptive memory procedure drive
mode and HO2S heater, HO2S, and TWC
repair verification drive mode.
(See F64 OBD DRIVE MODE.)
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0140
DTC P0140

A6E397001084W26

Rear HO2S circuit no activity detected
• PCM monitors input voltage from rear HO2S when the following conditions are met. If input voltage from
sensor never exceed 0.55 V for 30.4 s, PCM determines that sensor circuit is not activated.

MONITORING CONDITIONS

HO2S, HO2S heater and TWC repair verification drive mode
Following conditions are met:
• Engine speed is above 1,500 rpm.
• Engine coolant temperature is above 80 °C {158 °F}.

DETECTION
CONDITION Diagnostic support note
• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Rear HO2S deterioration
• Rear HO2S heater malfunction
POSSIBLE
• Leakage exhaust system
CAUSE
• Open or short to ground circuit between rear HO2S terminal A and PCM terminal 1Y
• Insufficient compression
• Engine malfunction

F114

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0140

Rear HO2S circuit no activity detected

• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify pending and stored DTCs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Is other DTC present?
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME
DATA
• Is DTC P0140 on FREEZE FRAME DATA?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
• Warm up engine.
• Access O2S12 for P0140 or O2S22 for P0160
PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Verify PID while racing engine at least 10
times (in NEUTRAL (MTX) or PARK (ATX)).
• Is PID reading okay?
More than 0.55 V at least once during
engine racing.
INSPECT INSTALLATION OF REAR HO2S
• Check if rear HO2S is loosely installed.
• Is sensor installed securely?

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
Yes Go to step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Install sensor securely, then go to Step 9.

F115

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT GAS LEAKAGE FROM EXHAUST
SYSTEM
• Visually check if any gas leakage is found
between exhaust pipe and rear HO2S.
• Is there any gas leakage?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace any faulty exhaust parts, then go to Step
9.
No • Inspect the following harnesses for open or short to
ground circuit, repair or replace harness if necessary.
Rear HO2S terminal A (harness-side) to PCM
terminal 1Y (harness-side)
• Repair or replace harness if necessary.
• If all items above are okay, replace faulty sensor.
Then go to Step 9.
Yes Air gets in from poor sealing on head gasket or other areas
between combustion chamber and engine coolant
passage.
Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

• Remove radiator cap.
• Implement procedure to bleed air from engine
coolant, then run engine at idle.
• Is there any small bubble, which makes engine
coolant white at filling opening?

Note
• Large bubbles are normal since they are
remaining air coming out from engine
coolant passage.
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0140
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0171
DTC P0171

F116

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001084W27

Fuel trim system too lean
• PCM monitors short term fuel trim (SHRTFT) and long term fuel trim (LONGFT) values during closed loop
fuel control. If fuel trim exceeds preprogrammed criteria, PCM determines that fuel system is too lean.

Diagnostic support note

DETECTION
CONDITION

Yes Go to next step.
No Implement engine overhaul for repairs, then go to next
step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0171

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Fuel trim system too lean
• Misfire
• Front HO2S deterioration
• Front HO2S heater malfunction
• Pressure regulator malfunction
• Fuel pump malfunction
• Fuel filter clogged or restricted
• Fuel leakage on fuel line from fuel delivery pipe and fuel pump
• Fuel return hose clogged
• Leakage exhaust system
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Purge solenoid hoses improper connection
• Insufficient compression
• Variable valve timing control system improper operation (L3-VE)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR
Yes If misfire DTC is present, go to step 7.
If other DTC is present, go to appropriate DTC
STORED DTCS
troubleshooting procedures.
• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
OFF).
• Verify related PENDING CODE or stored
No If drive ability concern is present, go to Step 7.
DTCs.
If not, go to next step.
• Is other DTCs present?
3
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME Yes Go to next step.
DATA
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
• Is DTC P0171 on FREEZE FRAME DATA?
FRAME DATA.
4
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
Yes Inspect suspected sensor and excessive resistance in
related wiring harnesses. Repair or replace if necessary.
(IGNITION KEY TO ON/IDLE)
Then go to Step 18.
• Access ECT, MAF, TP and VSS PIDs using
WDS or equivalent.
No Go to next step.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• Is there any signal that is far out of
specification when ignition key is ON and
engine runs?
5
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
Yes Inspect suspected sensor and related wiring harnesses,
and repair or replace it. Then go to Step 18.
UNDER TROUBLE CONDITION
• Inspect same PIDs as Step 4 while simulating
No Go to next step.
FREEZE FRAME DATA condition.
• Is there any input signal which causes drastic
changes?
6
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS OF Yes Inspect for air suction at followings due to cracks, damages
and loosening parts:
FRONT HO2S
• From air cleaner to throttle body
• Access O2S11 for P0171 PID using WDS or
• From throttle body to dynamic chamber
equivalent.
• From dynamic chamber to intake manifold
• Check PID under following accelerator pedal
• Vacuum hoses
condition (in PARK (ATX) or NEUTRAL
(MTX)).
Note
• Is PID reading okay?
• Engine speed may change when rust penetrating
Above 0.55 V when accelerator pedal is
agent is sprayed on the air suction area.
suddenly depressed (rich condition).
Below 0.55 V just after release of
Repair or replace any faulty part, then go to Step 18.
accelerator pedal (lean condition)
No Visually inspect for any gas leakage between exhaust
manifold and front HO2S.
• If there is no leakage, replace FRONT HO2S.
Then go to Step 18.

F117

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
INSPECT MAF PID
• Start engine.
• Access MAF PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Verify that MAF PID changes quickly according
to race engine RPM.
• Is MAF PID response okay?
8
INSPECT FOR EXCESSIVE AIR SUCTION OF
INTAKE AIR SYSTEM
• Visually inspect for loosen, cracks or damages
hoses on intake air system.
• Is there any malfunction?
9
INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
Note
• If engine wont start, inspect fuel line
pressure with ignition key ON.

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace Mass air flow sensor, then go to Step 18.

Yes Repair or replace source of air suction, then go to Step 18.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to step 11.
No • If fuel line pressure is too high: Replace fuel pump unit,
then go to Step 18.
• If fuel line pressure is too low: Go to next step.

• Inspect fuel line pressure while engine running.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?
INSPECT FUEL LINE FROM FUEL PUMP TO
Yes Replace suspected fuel line, then go to Step 18.
FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
No Inspect fuel filters for follows:
• Visually inspect fuel line for any leakage.
• Restriction or clogging at fuel filter (high-pressure side).
• Is any fuel leakage found?
• Foreign materials or stain inside fuel filter (low-pressure
side)
Perform following actions as result.
• If restriction or clogging is found at fuel filter (highpressure side), replace fuel pump unit.
• If foreign materials or stain is found inside fuel filter
(low-pressure side), clean of fuel tank and filter.
• If all items above are okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Then go to Step 18.
Yes Go to Step 15.
CHECK IGNITION COIL OPERATION AND
HIGH-TENSION LEAD WITH TIMING LIGHT
No Go to next step.
• Verify blinking condition on each cylinders
using timing light at idle.
• Do all cylinders show blinking condition?
Yes Go to next step.
CHECK HIGH-TENSION LEADS OF NO
BLINKING CYLINDER
No Replace faulty high-tension lead, then go to Step 18.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect high-tension leads for installation
condition, corrosion on terminal, open lead and
damaged cover.
• Is condition of high-tension lead okay?
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL AT
Yes Go to next step.
IGNITION COIL CONNECTOR
No Check for open circuit between ignition coil connector and
• Disconnect ignition coil connector.
ignition switch. Repair or replace wiring harness, then go to
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
Step 18.
• Check voltage at ignition coil connector
terminal B (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
INSPECT IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE
Yes Go to next step.
• Check ignition coil resistance.
No Replace ignition coil, then go to Step 18.
(See G9 IGNITION COIL INSPECTION.)
• Is coil resistance okay?
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
Yes Go to next step.
• Inspect engine compression.
No Implement engine overhaul for repairs, then go to Step 18.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?

F118

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
16
INSPECT VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION
Note
• The following test should be performed for
variable valve timing control system. Go to
next step for vehicles without variable valve
timing control system.

• Inspect variable valve timing control system
operation.
(See F239 Variable Valve Timing Control
System Operation Inspection.)
• Does variable valve timing control system work
properly?
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION
• Remove fuel injector.
• Inspect injector operation.
• Is fuel injector okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0171
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0172
DTC P0172

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part according to variable
valve timing control system inspection results, then go to
Step 18.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace injector, then go to next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001084W28

Fuel trim system too rich
• PCM monitors short fuel trim (SHRTFT) and long fuel trim (LONGFT) values during closed loop fuel
control. If fuel trim exceeds preprogrammed criteria, PCM determines that fuel system is too rich.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• This is a continuous monitor. (FUEL SYSTEM)
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Misfire
• Front HO2S deterioration
• Front HO2S heater malfunction
• Pressure regulator malfunction
• Fuel pump malfunction
• Fuel return hose clogged
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Purge solenoid hoses improper connection
• PCV valve malfunction

F119

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR
STORED DTCS
• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify related pending code or stored DTCs.
• Is other DTCs present?
3
IDENTIFY TRIGGER DTC FOR FREEZE FRAME
DATA
• Is DTC P0172 on FREEZE FRAME DATA?
4

VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
(IGNITION KEY TO ON/IDLE)
• Access ECT, MAF, TP and VSS PIDs using
WDS or equivalent.
• Is there any signal that is far out of
specification when ignition key is ON and
engine runs?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
UNDER TROUBLE CONDITION
• Inspect PID data while simulating FREEZE
FRAME DATA condition.
• Is there any input signal which causes drastic
changes?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS OF
FRONT HO2S
• Access O2S11 PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Verify PID while racing engine (in PARK (ATX)
or NEUTRAL (MTX)).
• Is PID reading okay?
Above 0.55 V when accelerator pedal is
suddenly depress (rich condition).
Below 0.55 V just after release of
accelerator pedal (lean condition)
INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect fuel line pressure while engine running.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE FOR
STUCK OPEN
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect both hoses from purge solenoid
valve.
• Blow air through purge solenoid valve.
• Does air blow through?
INSPECT PCV VALVE OPERATION
• Inspect PCV valve operation.
(See F41 PCV VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Is PCV valve okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0172
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F120

ACTION
Yes Go to appropriate DTC troubleshooting procedures.
No If drive ability concern is present, go to Step 8.
If not, go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to troubleshooting procedures for DTC on FREEZE
FRAME DATA.
Yes Inspect suspected sensor and excessive resistance in
related wiring harnesses. Repair or replace if necessary.
Then go to Step 10.
No Go to next step.

Yes Inspect suspected sensor and related wiring harnesses,
and repair or replace it. Then go to Step 10.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace suspected front HO2S.
Then go to Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace fuel pump unit, then go to Step 10.

Yes Replace purge solenoid valve.
Then go to Step 10.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace PCV valve, then go to next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0300
DTC P0300

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001085W01

Random misfire detection
• PCM monitors CKP sensor input signal interval time. PCM calculates change of interval time for each
cylinder. If change of interval time exceeds preprogrammed criteria, PCM detects misfire in the
corresponding cylinder. While the engine is running, the PCM counts number of misfires that occurred at
200 crankshaft revolutions and 1,000 crankshaft revolutions and calculates misfire ratio for each
crankshaft revolution. If the ratio exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, PCM determines that a misfire,
which can damage catalytic converter or affect emission performance, has occurred.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (MISFIRE).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the misfire which affects emission performance in two consecutive drive
cycles or in one drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• MIL flashes if PCM detects the misfire which can damage the catalytic converter during first drive cycle.
Therefore, PENDING CODE is not available while MIL flashes.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the misfire which affects emission performance during first
drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• CKP sensor malfunction
• CMP sensor malfunction
• Ignition coil malfunction
• High-tension lead malfunction
• MAF sensor contamination
• Excess air suction in intake air system (between MAF sensor and intake manifold)
• Fuel pump malfunction
• Fuel pressure regulator malfunction
• Fuel line clogged
• Fuel filter clogged
• Fuel leakage in fuel line
• Fuel runout
• Poor quality fuel
• Purge control solenoid valve malfunction
• PCV valve malfunction
• EGR valve malfunction
• Vacuum hoses damages or improper connection
• Related connector and terminal malfunction
• Related wiring harness malfunction
• Insufficient compression
• Variable valve timing control system improper (L3-VE)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

Yes Inspect suspected circuit and/or part according to
inspection results.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Then go to Step 22.
No Go to next step.

F121

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
UNDER TROUBLE CONDITION
• Inspect same PIDs as in Step 4 while
simulating FREEZE FRAME DATA condition.
• Is there any signal which causes drastic
changes?
6
INSPECT CMP SENSOR
• Inspect CMP sensor.
(See F55 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR INSPECTION.)
• Is CMP sensor okay?
7

VERIFY CKP SENSOR INSTALLATION
CONDITION
• Inspect for CKP sensor looseness.
• Is CKP sensor loosen?
INSPECT IGNITION COIL OPERATION AND
HIGH-TENSION LEAD WITH TIMING LIGHT
• Verify blinking condition on each cylinders
using timing light at idle.
• Do all cylinders show blinking condition?
INSPECT HIGH-TENSION LEADS OF NO
BLINKING CYLINDER
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect high-tension leads for improper
installation, corrosion on terminal, open lead
and damaged cover.
• Is condition of high-tension lead okay?
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY TERMINAL AT
IGNITION COIL CONNECTOR
• Disconnect ignition coil connector.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between ignition coil terminal
B (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there voltage reading B+?
INSPECT IGNITION COIL RESISTANCE
• Inspect ignition coil resistance.
(See G9 IGNITION COIL INSPECTION.)
• Is coil resistance okay?
INSPECT MAF PID
• Start engine.
• Access MAF PID using WDS or equivalent.
• Verify that MAF PID changes quickly according
to race engine RPM.
• Is MAF PID response okay?
INSPECT EXCESSIVE AIR SUCTION IN INTAKE
AIR SYSTEM
• Inspect for air leakage at following:
Between MAF sensor and throttle body
Between throttle body and intake manifold
• Is there any malfunction?
INSPECT FUEL LINE PRESSURE
• Inspect fuel line pressure.
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• Is fuel line pressure okay?

F122

ACTION
Yes Inspect suspected circuit and/or part according to
inspection results.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Then go to Step 22.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect installation condition and damages on timing belt
and gears, repair faulty parts.
• If it is okay, replace CMP sensor.
Then go to Step 22.
Yes Retighten CKP sensor, then go to Step 22.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to Step 12.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace faulty high-tension lead, then go to Step 22.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect for open circuit between ignition coil connector and
ignition switch. Repair or replace wiring harness, then go to
Step 22.

Yes Go to step 22.
No Replace ignition coil, then go to Step 22.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace MAF sensor, then go to Step 22.

Yes Repair or replace suspected part, then go to Step 22.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to step 16.
No If fuel line pressure is too low, go to next step.
If fuel line pressure is excess high, replace fuel pump unit,
then go to Step 22.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
15
INSPECT FUEL LINE FROM FUEL PUMP TO
FUEL DELIVERY PIPE
• Visually inspect for fuel leakage in fuel line for
any leakage.
• Is any fuel leakage found?

INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?
INSPECT VARIABLE VALVE TIMING CONTROL
SYSTEM OPERATION
Note
• The following test should be performed for
variable valve timing control system. Go to
next step for vehicles without variable valve
timing control system.

ACTION
Yes Replace suspected fuel line, then go to Step 22.
No Inspect fuel filters for following:
• Restriction or clogging at fuel filter (high-pressure side).
• Foreign materials or stain inside fuel filter (low-pressure
side)
Perform following actions depend on the result above.
• If restriction or clogging is found at fuel filter (highpressure side), replace fuel pump unit.
• If foreign materials or stain is found inside fuel filter
(low-pressure side), clean of fuel tank and filter (lowpressure side).
• If all items above are okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Then, go to Step 22.
Yes Go to next step.
No Implement engine overhaul for repairs, then go to Step 22.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace malfunctioning part according to variable
valve timing control system inspection results, then go to
Step 22.

• Inspect variable valve timing control system
operation.
• Does variable valve timing control system?
INSPECT OPERATION OF PURGE CONTROL
Yes Go to next step.
SOLENOID VALVE
No Replace purge control solenoid valve, then go to Step 22.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect vacuum pump to purge control
solenoid valve and apply vacuum to solenoid.
• Verify that solenoid holds vacuum.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Access EVAPCP PID in SIMULATION TEST
using WDS or equivalent.
• Set duty value to 100% for EVAPCP PID.
• Apply vacuum while turning solenoid from OFF
to ON and simulating EVAPCP PID with 100%
duty value.
• Verify that solenoid releases vacuum while
solenoid is turned ON.
• Is purge control solenoid valve operation okay?
INSPECT PCV VALVE OPERATION
Yes Replace PCV valve, then go to Step 22.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
No Go to next step.
• Remove PCV valve and inspect valve
operation.
(See F41 PCV VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Is PCV valve operation okay?
INSPECT OPERATION OF EGR VALVE
Yes Repair or replace EGR valve, then go to Step 22.
• Remove EGR valve.
No Go to next step.
• Visually inspect for stuck to open.
• Does EGR valve stuck to open?

F123

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
21 INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
PASSAGE
Warning
• Removing radiator cap when radiator is
hot is dangerous. Scalding coolant and
steam may shoot out and cause serious
injury.
• When removing radiator cap, wrap thick
cloth around and turn it slowly.

ACTION
Yes Air gets in from poor sealing on head gasket or other areas
between combustion chamber and engine coolant
passage. Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to next
step.
No Go to next step.

• Remove radiator cap.
• Implement procedure to bleed air from engine
coolant, then run engine at idle.
• Is there any small bubble which makes engine
coolant white at filling opening?

Note
• Large bubbles are normal since they are
remaining air coming out from engine
coolant passage.
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF MISFIRE DTC
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Run PCM adaptive memory procedure drive
mode.
(See F64 OBD DRIVE MODE.)
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie P0302, P0303, P0304
DTC
P0301,
DTC P0301
DTC P0302
DTC P0303
DTC P0304

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F124

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001085W02

Cylinder No.1 misfire detection
Cylinder No.2 misfire detection
Cylinder No.3 misfire detection
Cylinder No.4 misfire detection
• PCM monitors CKP sensor input signal interval time. PCM calculates the change of interval time for each
cylinder. If the change of interval time exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, PCM detects a misfire in the
corresponding cylinder. While the engine is running, PCM counts number of misfires that occurred at 200
crankshaft revolutions and 1,000 crankshaft revolutions and calculates misfire ratio for each
crankshaft revolution. If the ratio exceeds the preprogrammed criteria, PCM determines that a misfire,
which can damage catalytic converter or affect emission performance, has occurred.

Diagnostic support note

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
VERIFY RELATED PENDING CODE OR
STORED DTCS
• Turn ignition key to OFF then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify related pending code or stored DTCs.
• Is other DTCs present?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
(IGNITION KEY TO ON /IDLE)
• Access BOO, ECT, IAT, MAF, RPM, TP and
VSS PIDs using WDS or equivalent.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• Is there any signal that is far out of
specification when ignition switch is ON and
engine runs at idle?
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
UNDER TROUBLE CONDITION
• Inspect same PIDs as in Step 4 while
simulating FREEZE FRAME DATA condition.
• Is there any signal which causes drastic
changes?
INSPECT SPARK PLUG CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove spark plug from suspected cylinder.
• Inspect spark plug condition:
Cracks
Excess wear
Gap
Wet
• Is any problem found on spark plug?
VERIFY HIGH-TENSION LEAD CONDITION
• Remove high-tension lead.
• Inspect high-tension lead condition and
resistance.
Cracks
Spark shorts to cylinder head through hightension lead insulator
• Is high-tension lead okay?
INSPECT FOR AIR SUCTION AT INTAKE-AIR
SYSTEM
• Inspect for air leakage at following:
Around connection of dynamic chamber and
intake manifold
Around connection of intake manifold and
cylinder head
• Is air leakage found?
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR HARNESS
• Remove intake air system parts.
• Disconnect fuel injector connector on
suspected cylinder.
• Connect NOID LIGHT to fuel injector connector
terminals.
• Inspect dim of light during cranking.
• Does noid light illuminate?

Yes Inspect suspected circuit and/or part according to
inspection results. Then go to Step 12.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Inspect suspected circuit and/or part according to
inspection results. Then go to Step 12.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
No Go to next step.
Yes

• If spark plug is wet, fuel flooding is suspected. Go to
step 12.
• If spark plug has a cracks, excessive wear or improper
gap, replace faulty spark plug. Then go to Step 12.
Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace high-tension lead, then go to Step 12.

Yes Repair or replace suspected part, then go to Step 12.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect for fuel injector harnesses.
Repair or replace it if necessary, then go to Step 12.

F125

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
10 INSPECT SEALING OF ENGINE COOLANT
PASSAGE
Warning
• Removing radiator cap when radiator is
hot is dangerous, Scalding coolant and
steam may shoot out and cause serious
injury.
• When removing radiator cap, wrap thick
cloth around and turn it slowly.

ACTION
Yes Air gets in from poor sealing on head gasket or other areas
between combustion chamber and engine coolant
passage. Repair or replace faulty parts, then go to Step 12.
No Go to next step.

• Remove radiator cap.
• Implement procedure to bleed air from engine
coolant, then run engine at idle.
• Is there any small bubble which makes engine
coolant white at filling opening?

Note
• Large bubbles are normal since they are
remaining air coming out from engine
coolant passage.
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is engine compression okay?
INSPECT FUEL INJECTOR OPERATION
• Remove fuel injector from suspected cylinder.
• Swap injector with injector on other cylinder.
• Start engine and run it at idle.
• Is misfire DTC for cylinder which has a
suspected fuel injector?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF MISFIRE DTC
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Run PCM adaptive memory procedure drive
mode.
(See F64 OBD DRIVE MODE.)
• Is same PENDING CODE or stored code the
same as DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0327
DTC P0327

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F126

Yes Go to next step.
No Overhaul the engine, then go to next step.
Yes Replace injector, then go to step 13.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001085W03

Knock sensor circuit low input
• PCM monitors input signal from knock sensor when engine is running. If input voltage at PCM terminals
between 2P and 2S is below 0.9 V, PCM determines that knock sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0327

Knock sensor circuit low input

F127

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT FOR SHORT CIRCUITS
• Inspect continuity between knock sensor
female terminals A and B (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR TERMINAL
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at terminals 2P and
2S (damaged, pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0327
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0328
DTC P0328

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F128

A6E397001085W04

Knock sensor circuit high input
• PCM monitors input signal from knock sensor when engine is running. If input voltage at PCM terminals
between 2P and 2S is above 4.9 V, PCM determines that knock sensor circuit has a malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0328

Knock sensor circuit high input

F129

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0328
COMPLETED
• Make sure to connect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0335
DTC P0335

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F130

A6E397001085W05

CKP sensor circuit malfunction
• If PCM does not receive input voltage from CKP sensor for 4.2 s while MAF is 2.0 g/s {0.26 lb/min.} or
above, PCM determines that CKP sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
CKP sensor malfunction
Connector or terminal malfunction
CKP sensor is dirty.
Short to power between CKP sensor terminal A to PCM terminal 2D
Short to power between CKP sensor terminal B to PCM terminal 2G
Short to ground between CKP sensor terminal A to PCM terminal 2D
Short to ground between CKP sensor terminal B to PCM terminal 2G
Open circuit between CKP sensor terminal A to PCM terminal 2D
Open circuit between CKP sensor terminal B to PCM terminal 2G
CKP sensor pulse wheel malfunction
Both CKP sensor wires are shorted each other

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
VERIFY CKP SENSOR VOLTAGE
• Disconnect CKP sensor connector.
• Connect voltmeter between CKP sensor
connector terminals A and B (sensor-side).
• Inspect the voltage in AC range while cranking
the engine.
• Is any voltage reading?
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF CKP
SENSOR CONNECTOR
• Verify that the CKP sensor connector is
connected securely.
• Is connector okay?
INSPECT CKP CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
POWER
• Turn ignition key OFF
• Disconnect CKP sensor connector.
• Turn ignition key ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between following terminals
CKP sensor terminal A
CKP sensor terminal B
• Is any voltage reading?
INSPECT CKP CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Inspect continuity between following terminal
and body ground:
CKP sensor connector terminal A (harnessside)
CKP sensor connector terminal B (harnessside)
• Is there any continuity?
INSPECT CKP CIRCUITS FOR SHORTS
• Inspect continuity between CKP sensor
connector terminals A and B (harness-side).
• Is there any continuity?
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
INSPECT CKP CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
• Inspect continuity between following circuits:
CKP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2D (harness-side)
CKP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2G (harness-side)
• Is there continuity?
INSPECT CKP SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Perform CKP sensor inspection.
(See F54 CRANKSHAFT POSITION (CKP)
SENSOR INSPECTION)
• Is CKP sensor okay?

Yes Go to next step.
No Reconnect the connector, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to Step 11.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect CKP sensor pulse wheel for damage. Replace CKP
sensor pulse wheel and go to next step.

F131

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
11 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0335
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Access MAF PID using WDS or equivalent.

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Note
• MAF PID should indicate 2.0 g/s {0.26
lb/min.} or above during this test
12

• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0340
DTC P0340

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F132

A6E397001085W06

Camshaft position (CMP) sensor circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors input voltage from CMP sensor when engine is running. If PCM does not receive input
voltage from CMP sensor while PCM receives input signal from CKP sensor, PCM determines that CMP
circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
CMP sensor malfunction
Connector or terminal malfunction
CMP sensor is dirty
Short to power circuit between CMP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2M
Short to power circuit between CMP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2J
Short to ground circuit between CMP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2M
Short to ground circuit between CMP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2J
Open circuit between CMP sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 2M
Open circuit between CMP sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 2J
CKP sensor pulse wheel malfunction
Both CMP sensor wires are shorted each other

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0340

Camshaft position (CMP) sensor circuit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
VERIFY CMP SENSOR VOLTAGE
• Disconnect CMP sensor connector.
• Connect voltmeter between CMP sensor
connector terminals A and B (sensor-side).
• Inspect the voltage in AC range while cranking
the engine.
• Is any voltage reading?
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF CMP
SENSOR CONNECTOR
• Verify that the CMP sensor connector is
connected securely.
• Is connector okay?
INSPECT CMP CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
POWER
• Turn ignition key OFF.
• Disconnect CMP sensor connector.
• Turn ignition key ON (Engine OFF)
• Measure voltage at CMP sensor terminals A
and B.
• Is any voltage reading?

Yes Go to next step.
No Reconnect the connector, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

F133

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT CMP CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Inspect continuity between following terminal
and body ground:
CMP sensor connector terminal A (harnessside)
CMP sensor connector terminal B (harnessside)
• Is there any continuity?
7
INSPECT CMP CIRCUITS FOR SHORTS
• Inspect continuity between CMP sensor
connector terminals A and B (harness-side).
• Is there any continuity?
8
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
9
INSPECT CMP CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between following circuits:
CMP sensor terminal A (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2M (harness-side)
CMP sensor terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 2J (harness-side)
• Is there continuity?
10 INSPECT CMP SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Perform CMP sensor inspection.
(See F55 CAMSHAFT POSITION (CMP)
SENSOR INSPECTION.)
• Is CMP sensor okay?
11 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0335
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Access MAF PID using WDS or equivalent.

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to Step 11.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect CMP sensor pulse wheel for damage. Replace
CMP sensor pulse wheel and go to step 10.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Note
• MAF PID should indicate 1.95 g/s {0.25
lb/min.} or above during this test
12

• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0403
DTC P0403

A6E397001086W01

EGR valve (stepper motor) circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors input voltage from EGR valve. If voltage at PCM terminals 4E, 4H, 4K and/or 4N remain low
or high, PCM determines that EGR valve circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

F134

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0403

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

EGR valve (stepper motor) circuit malfunction
• EGR valve malfunction
• Connector or terminal malfunction
• Short to power circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal E and PCM terminal 4E
• Short to power circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4H
• Short to power circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4K
• Short to power circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal F and PCM terminal 4N
• Short to ground circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal E and PCM terminal 4E
• Short to ground circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4H
• Short to ground circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4K
• Short to ground circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal F and PCM terminal 4N
• Open circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal E and PCM terminal 4E
• Open circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4H
• Open circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4K
• Open circuit in wiring between EGR valve terminal F and PCM terminal 4N
• Open circuit in wiring between main relay terminal D and EGR valve terminal C
• Open circuit in wiring between main relay terminal D and EGR valve terminal D
• PCM malfunction

F135

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage following terminal and body
ground.
EGR valve terminal C
EGR valve terminal D
• Is voltage B+?
4
INSPECT EGR VALVE
• Perform EGR valve inspection.
(See F40 EGR VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Is EGR valve okay?
5
INSPECT FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity following terminal and body
ground:
EGR valve terminal E
EGR valve terminal A
EGR valve terminal B
EGR valve terminal F
• is there continuity?
6
INSPECT FOR CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
TO POWER
• Turn ignition switch key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage following terminal and body
ground:
EGR valve terminal E
EGR valve terminal A
EGR valve terminal B
EGR valve terminal F
• Is voltage B+?
7
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunctions?
8
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Remove PCM with PCM connector connected.
• Inspect continuity following terminals:
Between EGR valve terminal E and PCM
terminal 4E
Between EGR valve terminal A and PCM
terminal 4H
BetweenEGR valve terminal B and PCM
terminal 4K
Between EGR valve terminal F and PCM
terminal 4N
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0403
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
10 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F136

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open circuit then go to Step
9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace EGR valve, then go to Step 9.
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace terminals and/or connector, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open circuit then go to next
step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0420
DTC P0420

A6E397001086W02

Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
• PCM compares number of front HO2S and rear HO2S inversions for a predetermined time. PCM monitors
number of inversions rear side performs while front side inverts for a specified number of times when the
following monitoring conditions are met. PCM detects inversion ratio. If inversion ratio is below threshold,
PCM determins that catalyst system has deteriorated.

MONITORING CONDITION

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Engine speed 1,4103,000 rpm (MTX)
Engine speed 1,2813,000 rpm (ATX)
Calculated load 1550%(*1)
*1: Maximum calculated load value varies depending on engine speed.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a intermittent monitor. (CATALYST)
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• DIAGNOSTIC MONITORING TEST RESULTS and PENDING CODE are stored if PCM detects the above
malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• TWC deterioration or malfunction
• Exhaust gas leakage
• Looseness of front HO2S
• Looseness of rear HO2S
• Front HO2S malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

Yes Repair or replace faulty exhaust parts, then go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Retighten sensor, then go to Step 7.

Yes Replace suspected oxygen sensor, then go to next step.
No Replace TWC, then go to next step.

F137

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0420
OR P0431 COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Run PCM adaptive memory procedure drive
mode and HO2S heater, HO2S, and EGR
system repair verification drive mode.
(See F64 OBD DRIVE MODE.)
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0443
DTC P0443

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F138

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001086W03

Evaporative emission control system purge control valve circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors input voltages from purge solenoid valve. If voltage at PCM terminal 4U remains low or high,
PCM determines that purge solenoid valve circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
DETECTION
CONDITION

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Connector or terminal malfunction
• Short to ground in wiring between purge solenoid valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4U
• Open circuit in wiring between main relay and purge solenoid valve terminal B
• Open circuit in wiring between purge solenoid valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4U
• Short to power circuit between purge solenoid valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4U
• PCM malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
CLASSIFY OPEN CIRCUIT OR SHORT TO
Yes Go to Step 4.
GROUND MALFUNCTION
No Go to next step.
• Disconnect purge solenoid valve tube that is
connected to intake manifold.
• Connect vacuum pump to purge solenoid
valve.
• Pump vacuum pump several times and stop.
• Wait a few seconds.
• Is vacuum maintained?
3
INSPECT PASSAGE CONTROL OF PURGE
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 9.
SOLENOID VALVE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
No Replace purge solenoid valve, then go to Step 9.
• Disconnect purge solenoid valve connector.
• Pump vacuum pump several times and wait a
few seconds.
• Is vacuum maintained?
4
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 9.
CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
5
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
Yes Go to next step.
• Perform purge solenoid valve inspection.
No Replace purge solenoid valve, then go to Step 9.
(See F39 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION)
• Is purge solenoid valve okay?
Yes Go to next step.
6
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 9.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between purge solenoid valve
connector terminal B and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
7
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 9.
CONNECTION
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
8
INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
next step.
CONTROL CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
No Inspect for continuity between purge solenoid valve
• Measure voltage between purge solenoid valve
terminal A (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4U (harnessterminal A (harness-side) and body ground.
side).
• Is voltage B+?
• If there is continuity, go to next step.
• If there is no continuity, repair or replace harness for
open, then go to next step.
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0443
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
10
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

F139

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
End
Sie
DTC Of
P0480

A6E397001086W04

DTC P0480

Fan relay control circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors cooling fan relay No.2 control signal at PCM terminal 4L. if PCM detects cooling fan relay
DETECTION
No.2 control signal does not change coolant temperature above 100 °C {212 °F}, PCM determines that
CONDITION
cooling fan relay No.2 control has malfunction.
• cooling fan relay No.2 malfunction
• Connector or terminal malfunction
• Open circuit in wiring between METER fuse and cooling fan relay No.2 terminal E
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit in wiring between cooling fan relay No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal 4L
CAUSE
• Short to ground in wiring between cooling fan relay No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal 4L
• Short to power circuit between cooling fan relay No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal 4L
• PCM malfunction

F140

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2 POWER
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
• Turn ignition switch to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between cooling fan relay
No.2 terminal E (harness side) and body
ground.
• Is voltage B+?
4
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2
• Inspect cooling fan relay No.2.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
• Is cooling fan relay No.2 okay?
5
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
• Measure voltage between cooling fan relay
No.2 terminal A (harness side) and body
ground.
• Is voltage B+?
6
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between cooling fan relay
No.2 terminal A (harness side) and body
ground.
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
8
INSPECT COOLING FAN RELAY NO.2
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between cooling fan relay
No.2 terminal A and PCM terminal 4L.
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0480
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
10
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace or replace harness for open, then go to Step 9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace cooling fan relay No.2, then go to Step 9.
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace terminal and/or connector, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F141

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0500
DTC P0500

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001087W01

Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) circuit malfunction (MTX vehicles without ABS)
• Vehicle speed signal does not input after following conditions are met:
Gear is in other than neutral position
Load is above 40%
Engine speed is 2,000 rpm or above

Diagnostic support note:

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• VSS malfunction
• ABS/TCS/DCS malfunction
• Connector or terminal malfunction
• Open circuit between PCM terminal 2I and VSS terminal A
• Open circuit between PCM terminal 2L and VSS terminal B
• Short to ground between PCM terminal 2I and VSS terminal A
• Short to ground between PCM terminal 2L and VSS terminal B
• Short to power between PCM terminal 2I and VSS terminal A
• Short to power between PCM terminal 2L and VSS terminal B
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME PID DATA been
recorded?
2
VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?

F142

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS-IS
CONCERN INTERMITTENT OR CONSTANT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Start engine.
• Access VSS PID using WDS or equivalent.
Vehicle speed 20 km/h {12.4 mph}: 20km/
h {12.4 mph}
Vehicle speed 40 km/h {24.8 mph}: 40km/
h {24.8 mph}
• Are PID readings within specification?
4
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF VSS
CONNECTOR
• Verify that the VSS connector is connected
securely.
• Is connector okay?
5
INSPECT VSS
• Perform VSS inspection.
(See J5 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER
SENSOR INSPECTION)
• Is VSS okay?
6
INSPECT VSS CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
POWER
• Turn ignition key OFF
• Disconnect VSS connector.
• Turn ignition key ON (Engine OFF)
• Measure voltage following terminals:
VSS terminal A
VSS terminal B
• Is any voltage reading?
7
INSPECT VSS CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Inspect continuity between following terminal
and body ground:
VSS terminal A
VSS terminal B
• Is there any continuity?
8
INSPECT VSS CIRCUITS FOR SHORTS
• Inspect continuity between VSS connector
terminals A and B.
• Is there any continuity?
9
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there any malfunction?
10
INSPECT VSS CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between following circuits:
VSS terminal A and PCM terminal 2I
VSS terminal B and PCM terminal 2L
• Is there continuity?

ACTION
Yes Go to intermittent concern troubleshooting procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Reconnect the connector, then go to Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace VSS, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Inspect VSS pulse wheel for damage. Replace VSS pulse
wheel and go to next step.
No Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to next step.

F143

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
11 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0500
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Warm up engine.
• Access RPM and LOAD PID using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle under following conditions for
18s.
Engine speed: 2,000 rpm or above
Gear: Gear is in other than NEUTRAL
Load: 40% or above
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
12 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0505

A6E397001087W02

DTC P0505 IAC valve circuit malfunction
DETECTION
• PCM cannot control idle speed toward target idle speed while KOER self test.
CONDITION
• IAC valve circuit malfunction
• Air cleaner element clogged
• Air intake passage clogged
POSSIBLE
• A/C relay control circuit malfunction
CAUSE
• Generator control circuit malfunction
• Low engine compression (Over capacity of blow-by gas)
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
2
VERIFY RELATED PENDING OR STORED
DTCS
• Turn ignition switch to OFF, then ON. (Engine
OFF)
• verify pending code or stored DTCs using
WDS or equivalent.
• Does DTC P0511,P2502, P2503 or P2504
present?
3
INSPECT IAC VALVE MALFUNCTION
• Start engine.
• Disconnect IAC valve connector.
• Is engine speed decreased?.
4
INSPECT A/C MAGNETIC CLUTCH
OPERATION
Note
• The following test should be performed for
A/C.go to next step for vehicles without A/C
• Turn blower motor switch to off.
• Is magnetic clutch still on?

F144

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Perform applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair IAC valve, then go to Step 9.
Yes Go to A/C ALWAYS ON / A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS
CONTINUOUSLY. of ENGINE SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING then go to step 9.
(See F181 ENGINE SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
MALFUNCTION
• Apply electrical load.
• Is engine speed increased?
6
INSPECT AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
• remove air cleaner element with engine
running.
• Is engine speed increased?
7
INSPECT THROTTLE BODY PASSAGE
• Is throttle body clogged?
8

INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is engine compression okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0505
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC using WDS or equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0506
DTC P0506

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair short to power circuit in generator control circuit,
then go to Step 9.
Yes Clean or replace air cleaner element, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.
Yes
No
Yes
No

Clean or replace throttle body passage, then go to Step 9.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Overhaul engine, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001087W03

Idle control system RPM lower than expected
• Actual idle speed is lower than expected by 100 rpm for 14 s, when brake pedal is depressed (brake
switch is on) and steering wheel is held straight ahead (power steering pressure switch is off).
Note
• If atmospheric pressure is less than 72.3 kPa {542 mmHg, 21.3 inHg} or intake air temperature is
below -10 °C {14 °F}, PCM cancels diagnosis of P0506.

DETECTION
CONDITION Diagnostic support note
• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• IAC valve malfunction
• Air cleaner element clogged
• Air intake passage clogged
POSSIBLE
• A/C relay control circuit malfunction
CAUSE
• Generator malfunction
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Low engine compression (Over capacity of blow-by gas)
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?

F145

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY RELATED PENDING OR STORED
DTCS
• Turn ignition key to OFF, then ON (Engine
OFF).
• Verify pending code or stored DTCs using
WDS or equivalent.
• Is other DTC present?
4
INSPECT IAC VALVE MALFUNCTION
• Perform IAC valve inspection.
(See F13 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
INSPECTION.)
• Is IAC valve okay?
5
INSPECT A/C MAGNET CLUTCH OPERATION
• Turn blower motor switch off.
• Is magnet clutch still on?

8
9

INSPECT PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
MALFUNCTION
• Perform purge solenoid valve inspection.
(See F39 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION.)
• Is purge solenoid valve okay?
INSPECT AIR CLEANER ELEMENT
• Remove air cleaner element with engine
running.
• Is engine speed increased?
INSPECT THROTTLE BODY PASSAGE
• Is throttle body clogged?
INSPECT ENGINE COMPRESSION
• Inspect engine compression.
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
• Is engine compression okay?
INSPECT GENERATOR
• Perform generator inspection.
(See G7 GENERATOR INSPECTION.)
• Is generator okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0506
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Depress brake pedal for 14 s or more.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F146

ACTION
Yes Repair applicable DTCs.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace IAC valve, then go to Step 11.

Yes Refer to A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs
continuously. of ENGINE SYMPTOM
TROUBLESHOOTING, then go to Step 11.
(See F181 ENGINE SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace purge solenoid valve, then go to Step 11.

Yes Replace air cleaner element, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.
Yes
No
Yes
No

Clean or replace throttle body passage, then go to Step 11.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Overhaul engine, then go to Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace related part, then go to next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0507
DTC P0507

A6E397001087W04

Idle control system RPM higher than expected
• Actual idle speed is higher than expected by 200 rpm for 14 s, when brake pedal is depressed (brake
switch is on) and steering wheel is held straight ahead (power steering pressure switch is off).
Note
• If atmospheric pressure is less than 72.3 kPa {542 mmHg, 21.3 inHg} or intake air temperature is
below -10 °C {14 °F}, PCM cancels diagnosis of P0507.

DETECTION
CONDITION Diagnostic support note
• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• IAC valve malfunction
• Accelerator cable misadjusting
POSSIBLE
• Actuator cable misadjusting
CAUSE
• Throttle valve malfunction
• Vacuum hose misconnection
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

6
7

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace IAC valve, then go to Step 9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust accelerator cable free play, then go to Step 9.
(See F16 ACCELERATOR CABLE INSPECTION/
ADJUSTMENT.)
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust actuator cable free play, then go to Step 9.
Go to next step.
Reconnect vacuum hose accurately, then go to step 9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Clean or replace throttle body, then go to next step.

F147

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0507
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Depress brake pedal for 14 s or more.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
10 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0511
DTC P0511

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001087W05

IAC valve circuit malfunction
• If PCM detects that PCM terminal 4G voltage is above or below threshold* when IAC control duty target is
within 1670%, PCM determines that IAC valve circuit has malfunction.
*: Detected threshold value depends on battery voltage and IAC control signal duty value.

DETECTION Diagnostic support note
CONDITION • This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in first consecutive drive cycles.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• IAC valve circuit malfunction
• Short to ground between IAC valve terminal A (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4G (harness-side)
• Short to ground between IAC valve terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4J (harness-side)
• Open circuit between IAC valve terminal A (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4G (harness-side)
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit between IAC valve terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4J (harness-side)
CAUSE
• Short to power between IAC valve terminal A (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4G (harness-side)
• Short to power between IAC valve terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal 4J (harness-side)
• Poor connection of IAC valve connector or PCM connector
• PCM malfunction

F148

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF IAC VALVE Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 8.
CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect IAC valve connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
3
INSPECT IAC VALVE ELECTRICAL
Yes Go to next step.
MALFUNCTION
No Replace IAC valve, then go to Step 8.
• Inspect IAC valve.
(See F13 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE
INSPECTION.)
• Is IAC valve okay?
4
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 8.
POWER
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between following terminal
and body ground:
IAC valve terminal A
IAC valve terminal B
• Is there voltage B+?
Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 8.
5
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between following terminals
and body ground:
IAC valve terminal A
IAC valve terminal B
• Is there any continuity?
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
6
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
7
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
No Go to next step.
• Inspect continuity following terminals:
Between IAC valve terminal A and PCM
terminal 4G
Between IAC valve terminal B and PCM
terminal 4J
• Is there any continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0511
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Clear DTC using WDS or equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F149

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0550
DTC P0550

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001087W06

PSP switch circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors PSP switch signal at PCM terminal 1Z. If input voltage is low (switch stays on) for 1 minute
when VSS is above 60 km/h {37.3 mph} and ECT is above 60 °C {140 °F}, PCM determines that PSP
switch circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• PSP switch malfunction
• Connector or terminal malfunction
• Short to ground in wiring between PSP switch terminal and PCM terminal 1Z
• Open circuit in wiring between PSP switch terminal and PCM terminal 1Z
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PSP
CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PSP connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?

F150

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT PSP SWITCH
• Perform PSP switch inspection.
(See F58 POWER STEERING PRESSURE
(PSP) SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is PSP switch okay?
5
INSPECT PSP SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect continuity between PSP switch
terminal (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there any continuity?
6
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
7
INSPECT SIGNAL CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between PSP terminal A
(harness-side) and PCM terminal 1Z.
• Is there any continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0550
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle above 60 km/h {37.3 mph} for 1
min.
• Verify that ECT PID above 60 °C {140 °F}
using WDS or equivalent.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace PSP switch, then go to Step 8.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F151

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0602
DTC P0602
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001088W01

PCM programming error
• No configuration data in PCM
Note
• If PCM CONFIGURATION is successful, the PCM stored DTC P0602 and illuminates the MIL
(System i s normal) Clear the DTC P0602 using WDS or equivalent after PCM CONFIGURATION.
• MIL goes off after three drive cycles with no failure (DTCs remain in PCM).
• Complete configuration has not been completed.
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure

STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Perform PCM configuration procedure, then go to next
step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
(See F50 PCM CONFIGURATION.)
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE.)
No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
• Is same DTC present?
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0602
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
3
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0610

A6E397001088W02

DTC P0610 Control module vehicle options error
DETECTION
• PCM data configuration error
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
• Configuration procedure has not been completed
CAUSE
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Perform PCM configuration procedure, then go to next
step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE.
(See F50 PCM CONFIGURATION.)
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
PROCEDURE.)
No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
• Is same DTC present?
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0610
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
3
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

F152

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
End Of
Sie
DTC
P0661

A6E397001088W03

DTC P0661

Variable intake-air system (VIS) contol solenoid valve circuit low input
• PCM monitors VIS control solenoid valve control signal at PCM terminal 4R. If PCM turns VIS control
DETECTION
solenoid valve off but voltage at PCM terminal 4R still remains low, PCM determines that VIS control
CONDITION
solenoid valve circuit has malfunction.
• VIS control solenoid valve malfunction
• Open circuit in wiring between main relay and VIS control solenoid valve terminal B
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit in wiring between VIS control solenoid valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4R
CAUSE
• Short to ground in wiring between VIS control solenoid valve terminal A and PCM terminal 4R
• Connector or terminal malfunction
• PCM malfunction

F153

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT VIS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between VIS control
solenoid valve terminal A (harness-side) and
body ground.
• Is there continuity?
6
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at terminal 4R.
(damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
7
INSPECT VIS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between VIS control
solenoid valve terminal B (harness-side) and
PCM terminal 4R (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0661
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0662
DTC P0662

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001088W04

Variable intake-air system (VIS) control solenoid valve circuit high input
• PCM monitors VIS control solenoid valve control signal at PCM terminal 4R. If PCM turns VIS control
DETECTION
solenoid valve on but voltage at PCM terminal 4R still remains high, PCM determines that VIS control
CONDITION
solenoid valve circuit has malfunction.
• VIS control solenoid valve malfunction
POSSIBLE
• Short to power circuit between VIS control solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4R
CAUSE
• Shorted VIS control solenoid valve or PCM connector
• PCM malfunction

F154

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
2
INSPECT VIS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 6.
CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect VIS control solenoid valve
connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
3
INSPECT VIS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Yes Go to next step.
MALFUNCTION
No Replace VIS control solenoid valve, then go to Step 6.
• Perform VIS control solenoid valve inspection.
(See F14 VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
(VIS) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION (L3))
• Is VIS solenoid valve okay?
4
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 6.
CONNECTION
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at terminal 4R.
(damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
5
INSPECT VIS CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE
Yes Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.
CONTROL CIRCUIT SHORT TO POWER
No Go to next step.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between VIS control solenoid
valve terminal B (harness-side) and body
ground.
• Is voltage B+?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0662
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
No Go to next step.
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F155

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0703
DTC P0703

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001089W01

Brake switch input malfunction
• PCM monitors changes in input voltage from brake switch. If PCM does not detect PCM terminal 1K
voltage changes while alternately accelerating and decelerating 8 times, PCM determines that neutral
switch circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Brake switch malfunction
• Poor connection of brake switch connector or PCM connector.
• Short to power between brake switch terminal D and PCM connector terminal 1K.
• Open harness between brake switch terminal D and PCM connector terminal 1K.
• Open harness between battery positive terminal and brake switch terminal B.
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

F156

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR
POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect brake switch connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
5
CLASSIFY BRAKE SWITCH OR CIRCUIT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access BOO PID.
• Connect a jumper wire between brake switch
terminal A and B.
• Is BOO PID on?
6
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH
• Perform brake switch inspection.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is brake switch okay?
7
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH POWER CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Measure voltage between brake switch
connector terminal B and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
8
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
9
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between brake switch
terminal D and PCM terminal 1K.
• Is there any continuity?
10
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR
POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect brake switch connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
11
CLASSIFY BRAKE SWITCH OR CIRCUIT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access BOO PID.
• Verify that BOO PID changes from ON to OFF
when brake switch connector disconnected.
• Does BOO PID change from ON to OFF?
12
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH
• Perform brake switch inspection.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is brake switch okay?
13
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO POWER
• Measure voltage between brake switch
connector terminal D and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 7.

F
Yes Go to Step 14.
No Replace brake switch, then go to Step 14.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace brake switch power circuit for open, then
Go to Step 14.
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 14.
No Go to Step 14.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 13.

Yes Go to Step 14.
No Replace brake switch, then go to Step 14.
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
Step 14.
No Go to next step.

F157

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
14 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0703
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle 30 km/h {18.6 mph} or more.
• Depress and release brake pedal more than 8
times while driving vehicle.
• Is PENDING CODE the same as DTC
present?
15 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0704
DTC P0704

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F158

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001089W02

Clutch switch circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors changes in input voltage from clutch switch. If PCM does not detect PCM terminal 1R
voltage changes while running vehicle with vehicle speed below 30 km/h {19mph} 8 times alternately,
PCM determines that clutch switch circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Clutch switch malfunction
• Poor connection of clutch switch connector or PCM connector.
• Short to ground between clutch switch terminal B and PCM connector terminal 1R.
• Open harness between clutch switch terminal B and PCM connector terminal 1R.
• Open harness between ground and clutch switch terminal D.
• PCM malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service information
availability.
• Is any related Service information available?
CLASSIFY HIGH INPUT OR LOW INPUT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access CPP PID.
• Verify CPP PID during clutch pedal operation.
• Is CPP PID always OFF?.
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR
POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect clutch switch connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
CLASSIFY CLUTCH SWITCH OR CIRCUIT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access CPP PID.
• Connect a jumper wire between clutch switch
terminal B and D.
• Is CPP PID on?
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH
• Perform clutch switch inspection.
(See F59 CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is clutch switch okay?
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between clutch switch
terminal D and ground.
• Is there any continuity?
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between clutch switch
terminal B and PCM terminal 1R.
• Is there any continuity?
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR
POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect clutch switch connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
CLASSIFY CLUTCH SWITCH OR CIRCUIT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access CPP PID.
• Verify that CPP PID changes from ON to OFF
when clutch switch connector disconnected.
• Does CPP PID change from ON to OFF?
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH
• Perform clutch switch inspection.
(See F59 CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is clutch switch okay?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME DATA on repair order, then go to
next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available Service
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to Next step.
No Go to Step 10.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 7.

Yes Go to Step 14.
No Replace clutch switch, then go to Step 14.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace clutch switch power circuit for open, then
Go to Step 14.
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 14.
No Go to Step 14.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 13.

Yes Go to Step 14.
No Replace clutch switch, then go to Step 14.

F159

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
13 INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between clutch switch
terminal B and ground.
• Is there any continuity?
14 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0704
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Operate clurch pedal during drive vehicle
below 30 km/h {19 mph} 8 times altemetely.
• Is same DTC present?
15 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0850
DTC P0850

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F160

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 14.
No Go to Next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001089W03

Neutral switch circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors changes in input voltage from neutral switch. If PCM does not detect PCM terminal 1W
voltage changes while running vehicle with vehicle speed above 30 km/h {19 mph} and clutch pedal turns
press and depress 10 times repeatedly, PCM determines that neutral switch circuit has malfunction

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Neutral switch malfunction
• Poor connection of neutral switch connector or PCM connector.
• Short to ground between neutral switch terminal B and PCM connector terminal 1W.
• Open harness between neutral switch terminal B and PCM connector terminal 1W.
• Open harness between ground and brake switch terminal A.
• PCM malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0850

Neutral switch circuit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?
CLASSIFY HIGH INPUT OR LOW INPUT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access CPP/PNP PID.
• Verify CPP/PNP PID when gear is neutral
position.
• Is CPP/PNP PID always OFF?.
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect neutral switch connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
CLASSIFY NEUTRAL SWITCH OR CIRCUIT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access CPP/PNP PID.
• Connect a jumper wire between neutral switch
terminal A and B.
• Is CPP/PNP PID on?
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH
• Perform neutral switch inspection.
(See F59 NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is neutral switch okay?

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 7.

Yes Go to Step 14.
No Replace neutral switch, then go to Step 14.

F161

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH GROUND
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between neutral switch
terminal A and ground.
• Is there any continuity?
8
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
9
INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between neutral switch
terminal B and PCM terminal 1W.
• Is there any continuity?
10 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition switch to OFF.
• Disconnect neutral switch connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
11 CLASSIFY NEUTRAL SWITCH OR CIRCUIT
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Access CPP/PNP PID.
• Verify that CPP/PNP PID changes from ON to
OFF when neutral switch connector
disconnected.
• Does CPP/PNP PID change from ON to OFF?
12 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH
• Perform neutral switch inspection.
(See F59 NEUTRAL SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is neutral switch okay?
13 INSPECT NEUTRAL SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between neutral switch
terminal B and ground.
• Is there any continuity?
14 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0850
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle above 30 km/h {19 mph} and
stop vehicle.
• Depress and release clutch pedal more than
10 times during drive cycle.
• Is same DTC present?
15 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P1410
DTC P1410

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace neutral switch power circuit for open, then
Go to Step 14.
Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 14.
No Go to Step 14.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then go to Step 14.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 13.

Yes Go to Step 14.
No Replace neutral switch, then go to Step 14.
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 14.
No Go to Next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001083W01

Variable air duct (VAD) control system circuit malfunction
• PCM monitors VAD solenoid control signal at PCM terminal 4C. If PCM detects VAD solenoid control
DETECTION
signal does not change when VAD solenoid valve is switched to ON or OFF, PCM determines that VAD
CONDITION
solenoid control circuit has malfunction.

F162

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P1410

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Variable air duct (VAD) control system circuit malfunction
• VAD solenoid valve malfunction.
• Connector or terminal malfunction.
• Short to ground in wiring between VAD solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4C
• Open circuit in wiring between main relay and VAD solenoid valve terminal A
• Open circuit in wiring between VAD solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4C
• Short to power in wiring between VAD solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4C
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
ACTION
1
PERFORM DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE Yes Go to next step.
• Perform DTC CONFIRMATION PROCEDURE. No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
(See F66 DTC CONFIRMATION
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
PROCEDURE.)
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
• Is same DTC present?
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
Yes Malfunction at power circuit, then go to next step
2
CLASSIFY POWER CIRCUIT OR CONTROL
CIRCUIT MALFUNCTION
No Malfunction at VAD solenoid valve or control circuit, then go
• Is the same DTC and P0102, P0103, P0403,
to Step 5
P0661, P0662, P2009 or P2010 present?
Yes Repair terminals, then go to Step 11.
3
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF VAD
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Disconnect VAD solenoid valve connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
4
INSPECT VAD SOLENOID VALVE POWER
Yes Inspect VAD solenoid valve.
• If there is a malfunction, replace VAD solenoid valve,
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
then go to Step 11
• Turn ignition switch to ON (Engine OFF).
• If there is no malfunction, go to Step 12
• Measure voltage between VAD solenoid valve
connector terminal A and body ground.
No Repair or replace VAD solenoid valve power circuit for
• Is voltage B+?
open, then Go to Step 11.
5
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF VAD
Yes Repair or replace terminals, then go to Step 11.
SOLENOID VALVE CONNECTOR
No Go to next step.
• Disconnect connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
6
INSPECT VAD SOLENOID VALVE
Yes Go to Step 11.
• Perform VAD solenoid valve inspection.
No Replace VAD solenoid valve, then go to Step 11.
(See F12 VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD)
SHUTTER VALVE INSPECTION (L3).)
• Is clutch switch okay?

F163

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Are there any malfunctions?
8
INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Disconnect battery cables.
• Inspect continuity between VAD solenoid valve
terminal B and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
9
INSPECT VAD SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
• Measure voltage between brake switch
connector terminal B and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
10 INSPECT CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between VAD solenoid valve
terminal B and PCM terminal 4C.
• Is there any continuity?
11 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P1410
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
12 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair terminals, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 11.
No Go to next Step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
Step 11.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P1562
DTC P1562

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

F164

A6E397001083W02

PCM +BB (back-up battery) voltage low
• PCM monitors voltage of back-up battery positive at PCM terminal 2Z. If PCM detects battery positive
terminal voltage below 2.5V for 2 s, PCM determines that backup voltage circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P1562

PCM +BB (back-up battery) voltage low

F165

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P2006
DTC P2006

A6E397001083W03

Variable tumble control system (VTCS) shutter valve stuck closed
• PCM monitors mass air amount. If actual air flow amount is below estimated air flow amount when the
following monitoring conditions are met. PCM determines that VTCS shutter valve has been stuck closed.

MONITORING CONDITIONS

Engine coolant temperature is above 63 °C {145 °F}.
Engine speed is below 3,750 rpm.
Throttle valve opening angle is above threshold*.
*: Maximum calculated load valve varies depending on engine speed.

DETECTION
CONDITION Diagnostic support note
• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• ECT sensor malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction
• CKP sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
• Variable tumble control solenoid valve malfunction
CAUSE
• VTCS shutter valve malfunction (stuck closed)
• VTCS shutter valve actuator malfunction (stuck closed).
• Short to ground circuit between variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4T
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME DATA been recorded?
2

VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Information
availability.
• Is any related Service Information available?

F166

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
CLASSIFY INTERMITTENT CONCERN OR
CONTINUOUS CONCERN
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equipment.
• Drive vehicle under following conditions:
Engine coolant temperature is above 63 °C
{145 °F}.
Engine speed: below 3,750 rpm
Throttle opening angle is below as
followings
• Engine speed below 1,500 rpm: above
35 %
• Engine speed between 1,5002,500
rpm: between 2535%
• Engine speed above 2,500: below 25 %
• Is pending code the same as DTC present?
4
VERIFY STORED OTHER DTCS
• Verify stored DTCs using WDS or equipment.
• Is other DTC present except P0117, P0118,
P0121, P0122, P0123 and/or P0335?
5
INSPECT VTCS SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
• Carry out VTCS operation inspection.
(See F231 Variable Tumble Control System
(VTCS) Operation Inspection.)
• Is VTCS shutter valve actuator okay?
6
INSPECT VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE
• Carry out Variable tumble control solenoid
valve airflow inspection.
(See F15 VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Is variable tumble control solenoid valve okay?
7
INSPECT PCM FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Inspect for poor connection at PCM terminal 4T
(damaged/pulled-out terminals, corrosion,
etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2006
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Start engine.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equipment.
• Start engine.
• Drive vehicle under following conditions:
Engine coolant temperature is above 63 °C
{145 °F}.
Engine speed: below 3,750 rpm
Throttle opening angle is below as
followings
• Engine speed below 1,500 rpm: above
35 %
• Engine speed between 1,5002,500
rpm: between 2535%
• Engine speed above 2,500: below 25 %
• Is pending code the same as DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Intermittent concern exists. Go to INTERMITTENT
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)

Yes Go to appropriate DTC troubleshooting procedures.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace VTCS shutter valve actuator, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace variable tumble control solenoid valve, then go to
Step 8.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F167

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P2009
DTC P2009

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001083W04

Variable tumble control solenoid valve circuit low input
• PCM monitors variable tumble control solenoid valve control signal at PCM terminal 4T. If PCM turns
variable tumble control solenoid valve off but voltage at PCM terminal 4T still remains low, PCM
determines that VTCS solenoid valve circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Poor connection of connectors at PCM and/or variable tumble control solenoid valve
• Short to ground in wiring between variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4T
• Open circuit in wiring between main relay and variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal A
• Open circuit in wiring between variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal 4T
• Variable tumble control solenoid valve malfunction
• PCM malfunction

F168

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Disconnect variable tumble control solenoid
valve connector.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between variable tumble
control solenoid valve terminal A (harnessside) and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
5
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at PCM terminal
4T. (damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
6
INSPECT VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect continuity between variable tumble
control solenoid valve terminal B (harnessside) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Connect variable tumble control solenoid valve
connector.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between PCM terminal 4T
(harness side) and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2009
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equipment.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to Step 8.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open or short to ground
circuit, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F169

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P2010
DTC P2010

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001083W05

Variable tumble control solenoid valve circuit high input
• PCM monitors variable tumble control solenoid valve control signal at PCM terminal 4T. If PCM turns
variable tumble control solenoid valve on but voltage at PCM terminal 4T still remains high, PCM
determines that variable tumble control solenoid valve circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• DTC is stored in PCM memory.
• Poor connection of connectors at PCM and/or variable tumble control solenoid valve
• Short to power circuit in wiring between variable tumble control solenoid valve terminal B and PCM terminal
4T
• Variable tumble control solenoid valve malfunction
• PCM malfunction

F170

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at PCM terminal
4T. (damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
5
INSPECT VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL
SOLENOID VALVE CONTROL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Remove variable tumble control solenoid
valve.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between PCM terminal 4T
and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2010
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equipment.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 6.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power circuit, then go
to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F171

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P2228
DTC P2228

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001083W06

BARO sensor circuit low input
• PCM monitors input voltage from BARO sensor. If input voltage at PCM terminal 1G is below 0.35 V, PCM
determines that BARO sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

F172

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT BARO SENSOR MALFUNCTiON
• Perform BARO sensor inspection.
(See F60 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
(BARO) SENSOR INSPECTION.)
• Is BARO sensor okay?
5
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT VOLTAGE
AT BARO SENSOR CONNECTOR
Note
• If DTCs P0107 and P0122 are also retrieved
with P2228, go to REFERENCE VOLTAGE
troubleshooting procedure.

• Measure voltage between BARO sensor
terminal C (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is voltage within 4.55.5 V?
INSPECT BARO SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for continuity between BARO sensor
terminal B (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at terminal 2H
(damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2228
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace BARO sensor, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Inspect for open circuit between PCM terminal 2K
(harness-side) and BARO sensor terminal C (harnessside).
Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 8.

Yes Repair or replace suspected harness, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F173

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P2229
DTC P2229

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E397001083W07

BARO sensor circuit high input
• PCM monitors input voltage from BARO sensor. If input voltage at PCM terminal 1G is above 4.92 V, PCM
determines that BARO sensor circuit has malfunction.

Diagnostic support note
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

F174

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT BARO SENSOR MALFUNCTiON
• Perform BARO sensor inspection.
(See F60 BAROMETRIC PRESSURE
(BARO) SENSOR INSPECTION.)
• Is BARO sensor okay?
5
VERIFY BARO SENSOR SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO REFERENCE VOLTAGE CIRCUIT
• Measure voltage between BARO sensor
terminal A and body ground.
• Is voltage above 4.92 V?
6
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection at terminal 2H
(damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
7
VERIFY BARO SENSOR GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect for continuity following terminals:
Between BARO sensor terminal A and PCM
terminal 1G
Between BARO sensor terminal B and PCM
terminal 2H
• Is there continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2229
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace BARO sensor, then go to Step 8.

Yes Repair or replace short to power harness, then go to Step
8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair terminal, then go to Step 8.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace open harness, then go to Step 8.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

F175

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P2502

A6E397001083W08

DTC P2502 Generator terminal B circuit open
DETECTION • PCM judges generator output voltage is above 17 V or battery voltage is below 11 V during engine
CONDITION
running.
• Open circuit between generator terminal B and battery positive terminal
• Battery malfunction
POSSIBLE
• Generator malfunction
CAUSE
• PCM is poorly connected.
• PCM, generator and/or battery are poorly connected.

F176

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2502
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P2503

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001083W09

DTC P2503 Generator output voltage signal no electricity
DETECTION • PCM needs more than 20 A from generator, and judges generator output voltage to be below 8.5 V during
CONDITION
engine running.
• Generator malfunction
• PCM and/or generator are poorly connected.
POSSIBLE
• Open and/or short to GND in wiring from between generator terminal P and PCM terminal 1AA
CAUSE
• Open and/or short to GND in wiring from between generator terminal D and PCM terminal 1AD
• Drive belt misadjustment

F177

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF PCM
CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there a malfunction?
4
INSPECT POOR CONNECTION OF
GENERATOR CONNECTOR
• Disconnect generator connector.
• Inspect for poor connection (damaged, pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there a malfunction?
5
INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect for continuity between generator
terminal D (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
6
INSPECT GENERATOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect for continuity between generator
terminal P (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN
• Measure resistance between generator
terminal D (harness-side) and PCM terminal
1AD (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
8
INSPECT GENERATOR OUTPUT VOLTAGE
MONITOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Measure resistance between generator
terminal P (harness-side) and PCM terminal
1AA (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2503
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is the same DTC present?
10 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P2504

ACTION
Yes Repair terminals, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace terminals, then go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then go to
Step 9.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open circuit, then go to Step
9.

Yes Repair or replace generator, then go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E397001083W10

DTC P2504 Battery overcharge
DETECTION • PCM judges generator output voltage is above 18.5 V or battery voltage is above 16.0 V during engine
CONDITION
running.
• Short to power circuit between generator connector terminal D and PCM connector terminal 1AD
POSSIBLE
• Generator malfunction
CAUSE
• PCM and/or generator are poorly connected.

F178

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P2504

Battery overcharge

F179

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT GENERATOR CONTROL TERMINAL
FOR SHORT TO POWER
• Measure resistance between generator
terminal D (part-side) and body ground.
• Is voltage B+?
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P2504
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all connectors.
• Clear DTC from PCM memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Perform KOER self-test.
(See F66 KOEO/KOER SELF-TEST.)
• Is same DTC present?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See F66 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Is there any DTC present?

End Of Sie

F180

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace generator, then go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC troubleshooting.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
No Troubleshooting completed.

TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E398018881W01

• Confirm trouble symptom using the following diagnostic index, then go to appropriate troubleshooting chart.
Diagnostic Index
No.
1
2
3

5
6
7

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
Melting of main or other fuses
MIL illuminates
Will not crank
Hard to start/long crank/erratic start/erratic
crank
Engine stalls.
After start/at idle
Cranks normally but will not start
Slow return to idle

Engine runs rough/rolling idle

Fast idle/runs on

Low idle/stalls during deceleration

Engine stalls/quits.

Acceleration/cruise

Engine runs rough.
Misses

Hesitation/stumble
Surges

Acceleration/cruise
Acceleration/cruise
Acceleration/cruise/
deceleration
Acceleration
Acceleration/cruise

Lack/loss of power

Acceleration/cruise

Knocking/pinging

Acceleration/cruise

14
15
16

19
20
21
22

Poor fuel economy
Emission compliance
High oil consumption/leakage
Cooling system
Overheating
concerns
Cooling system
Runs cold
concerns
Exhaust smoke
Fuel odor (in engine compartment)
Engine noise
Vibration concerns (engine)

A/C does not work sufficiently.

Buck/jerk

17
18

24
25
26
27
28
29

A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs
continuously.
A/C is not cut off under WOT conditions.
Exhaust sulphur smell
Constant voltage
Spark plug condition
Upshift/downshift/
ATX concerns
engagement

DESCRIPTION

MIL is illuminated incorrectly.
Starter does not work.
Starter cranks engine at normal speed but engine requires excessive
cranking time before starting.
Engine stops unexpectedly at idle and/or after start.
Starter cranks engine at normal speed but engine will not run.
Engine takes more time than normal to return to idle speed.
Engine speed fluctuates between specified idle speed and lower
speed and engine shakes excessively.
Engine speed continues at fast idle after warm-up.
Engine runs after ignition switch is turned to off.
Engine stops unexpectedly at beginning of deceleration or recovery
from deceleration.
Engine stops unexpectedly at beginning of acceleration or during
acceleration.
Engine stops unexpectedly while cruising.
Engine speed fluctuates during acceleration or cruising.
Engine misses during acceleration or cruising.
Vehicle bucks/jerks during acceleration, cruising, or deceleration.
Momentary pause at beginning of acceleration or during acceleration
Momentary minor irregularity in engine output
Performance is poor under load.
(e.g., power down when climbing hills)
Sound is produced when air/fuel mixture is ignited by something other
than spark plug. (e.g., hot spot in combustion chamber)
Fuel economy is unsatisfactory.
Fails emissions test.
Oil consumption is excessive.
Engine runs at higher than normal temperature/overheats.
Engine does not reach normal operating temperature.
Blue, black, or white smoke from exhaust system
Gasoline fuel smell or visible leakage
Engine noise from under hood
Vibration from under hood or driveline
A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not engage when A/C is turned
on.
A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not disengage.
A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not disengage under WOT.
Rotten egg smell (sulphur) from exhaust
Incorrect constant voltage
Incorrect spark plug condition
ATX concerns not related to engine performance

End Of Sie

F181

TROUBLESHOOTING
QUICK DIAGNOSTIC CHART

A6E398018881W02

A6E3980W001

F182

TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E3980W002

F183

TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E3980W003

F184

TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E3980W004

End Of Sie

F185

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.1 MELTING OF MAIN OR OTHER FUSES

A6E398018881W03

1
MELTING OF MAIN OR OTHER FUSES
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
Inspect condition of fuse.

Damaged fuse
MAIN
ENG +B
IG KEY1

•
•
•
•
•

IG KEY2
AD FAN

•
•

FAN

•

ENGINE IG

•

METER IG

•
•
•

ENG BAR

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ENG BAR2
INJ

•
•

FUEL PUMP

Related wiring harness
IG KEY2 fuse
AD FAN fuse
FAN fuse
PCM
Ignition switch
ENGINE IG fuse
METER IG fuse
Ignition switch
Cooling fan relay
Cooling fan motor
Cooling fan relay (L8-DE, LF-DE (except G.C.C. specs.)
Cooling fan motor
Main relay
PCM
Ignition coil
Condenser
Cooling fan relay
PCM
VSS (ATX)
OCV
VIS solenoid valve
VAD control solenoid valve
Purge solenoid valve
EGR valve
MAF/IAT sensor
Heated oxygen sensor heater
PCM
Fuel pump relay
PCM
Fuel injector
Fuel pump relay
Fuel pump

End Of
Sie
NO.2
MIL
ILLUMINATES
2
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE

F186

MIL ILLUMITATES
MIL is illuminated incorrectly.
• PCM illuminates for emission-related concern (DTC is stored in PCM)
• Instrument cluster malfunction
Note
• If MIL blinks at steady rate, misfire condition could possibly exist.

A6E398018881W04

TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any DTC.
Are there DTC displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
• Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
• Inspect instrument cluster operation.
See Section T.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of
SieNOT CRANK
NO.3
WILL

A6E398018881W05

3
DESCRIPTION

WILL NOT CRANK
Starter does not work.
• Open starter circuit between ignition switch and starter
• TR switch malfunction (ATX)
• TR switch misadjustment (ATX)
• Low or dead battery.
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Charging system malfunction.
• Starter interlock switch malfunction (MTX with starter interlock system).
• Starter malfunction
• Seized/hydrolocked engine, flywheel or drive plate
• Immobilizer system (PATS) and/or circuit malfunction (if equipped).

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Note
• The following test should be perform for
vehicles with immobilizer system. Go to
Step 10 for vehicles without immobilizer
system.

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Do following conditions appear?
• Engine is not completely started.
• DTC B1681 is displayed.
Is coil connector securely connected to coil?

Does security light illuminate?

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2 and
retrieve DTC.

DTC

5
6
7

B1213, B1342, B1600, B1601, B1602, B1681,
B2103, B2431
Is there continuity between PCM GND terminals
4X, 2AB, 2AC and GND?
Measure voltage between PCM GND terminals
4X, 2AB, 2AC and coil terminal C.
Is the voltage below 1.0?
Turn ignition switch ON position.
Access VPWR PID.
Is VPWR PID okay?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Both conditions appear:
Go to Step 4.
No
Either or other condition appears:
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Connect coil connector securely.
Return to Step 1.
Go to next step.
Inspect instrument cluster and wiring harness.
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.

Yes

Inspect for following:
• Open or short circuit between coil terminal A and
PCM terminal 2Q.
• Open or short circuit between coil terminal B and
PCM terminal 2T.
Repair or replace wiring harness between coil
connector terminal D and fuse panel.

Specification
8

Battery voltage
Disconnect coil connector.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is there battery voltage at coil connector terminal
D (harness-side)?

F187

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
9
Is there continuity between PCM terminal 4I and
Yes
Go to next step.
starter relay with clutch pedal depressed (MTX
No
Repair replace wiring harness.
with starter interlock system), P or N position
(ATX)?
10
Inspect following:
Yes
Go to next step.
• Battery connection
No
Service as necessary.
• Battery condition
Repeat Step 10.
• Transaxle is in Park or Neutral. (ATX)
• Clutch is fully depressed. (MTX with starter
interlock system)
• Fuses
Are all items okay?
11
Is clicking sound heard from starter when
Yes
Go to next step.
ignition switch is turned to START?
No
Go to Step 13.
12
Inspect starting system.
Yes
Inspect for seized/hydrolocked engine, flywheel or
(See G13 STARTER INSPECTION.)
drive plate.
Is starting system okay?
(See H15 FLYWHEEL INSPECTION.)
No
Repair or replace components as required.
13
Do any other electrical accessories work?
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Inspect charging system.
(See G4 BATTERY INSPECTION.)
(See G7 GENERATOR INSPECTION.)
14
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• Following test should be performed on
No
Inspect adjustment of TR switch.
ATX only. For MTX, go to next step.
If TR switch is adjusted properly, inspect for open
circuit between TR switch and PCM terminal 1W or
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
starter.
Access TR PID.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is TR PID indicated P/N when selecting P or N
position?
15
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Retrieve any continuous memory DTCs.
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Communication error message is displayed:
Are there any continuous memory DTCs
Inspect for following:
displayed?
• Open circuit between main relay and PCM terminal
2Y or 4V
• Open circuit between main relay terminal E and
PCM terminal 2X
• Main relay is stuck open.
• Open or poor GND circuit (PCM terminal 4X, 2AB
or 2AC)
• Poor connection of vehicle body GND
No
No DTC is displayed:
Inspect following:
• START circuit in ignition switch
• Open circuit between ignition switch and starter
• Starter interlock switch (MTX with stater interlock
system)
16
Retrieve any KOEO DTCs.
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Are there DTCs displayed during KOEO
inspection?
No
No DTC is displayed:
Inspect following:
• START circuit in ignition switch
• Open circuit between ignition switch and starter
• Starter interlock switch (MTX with stater interlock
system)
17
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F188

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.4 HARD TO START/LONG CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC CRANK

A6E398018881W06

HARD TO START/LONG CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC CRANK
• Starter cranks engine at normal speed but engine requires excessive cranking time before starting.
DESCRIPTION
• Battery is in normal condition.
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Vacuum leakage
• Poor fuel quality
• Starting system malfunction
• Spark plug malfunction
• Air leakage from intake-air system
• Erratic signal from CKP sensor
• Erratic signal from CMP sensor
• Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control
• Air cleaner restriction
• IAC valve malfunction
• PCV valve malfunction
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• MAF sensor contamination
• Restriction in exhaust system
• EGR valve malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Pressure regulator malfunction
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains the fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
"BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE" and "AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE" described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Inspect for following:
• Vacuum leakage
• Proper fuel quality (e.g. proper octane,
contamination, winter/summer blend)
• Loose bands on intake-air system
• Cracks on intake-air system parts
• Air cleaner restriction
Are all items okay?
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any KOEO and KOER DTC.
Is any KOEO or KOER DTC displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

Yes
No

Is engine overheating?

Yes

Inspect for cracks on high-tension leads.
Are there any cracks on high-tension leads?

Inspect spark plug conditions.
Is spark plug wet, covered with carbon or
grayish white?

No
Yes
No
Yes

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to symptom troubleshooting No.17 Cooling system
concerns Overheating.
Go to next step.
Repair suspected high-tension leads.
Go to next step.
Spark plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Inspect for fuel leakage from fuel injector.
Spark plug is grayish white:
Inspect for clogged fuel injector.
Install spark plugs on original cylinders.
Go to next step.

F189

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
6
Visually inspect CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Are CKP sensor and teeth of crankshaft pulley
okay?
7
Measure gap between CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Specification
0.51.9 mm {0.0200.75 in}
Is gap within specification?
8
Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?
9

Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Connect a jumper wire between F/P terminal at
DLC-2 in engine compartment and GND.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is fuel line pressure correct with ignition switch
ON?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Is fuel line pressure held after ignition switch is
turned off?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Disconnect a vacuum hose from purge solenoid
valve and plug opening end of vacuum hose.
Attempt to start engine.
Is starting condition improved?
Inspect MAF sensor for contamination.
Is there any contamination?

Is there restriction in exhaust system?

Inspect engine condition while tapping EGR
valve housing. Does engine condition improve?

Inspect starting system.
(See G13 STARTER INSPECTION.)
Is starting system normal?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Replace malfunctioning parts.
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust CKP sensor.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace PCV valve.
Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect fuel injector.
If fuel injector is okay, replace fuel pump unit.

Yes
No

Inspect if purge solenoid valve sticks open.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes

Replace MAF sensor.
Go to next step.
Inspect exhaust system.
Go to next step.
Replace EGR valve.
Go to next step.
Inspect for loose connectors or poor terminal contact. If
okay, remove EGR valve and visually inspect for
mechanically stuck EGR valve.
Repair or replace components as required.

No
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F190

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.5 ENGINE STALLS-AFTER START/AT IDLE

A6E398018881W07

5
DESCRIPTION

ENGINE STALLSAFTER START/AT IDLE
• Engine stops unexpectedly.
• A/C system operation is improper
• Air leakage from intake-air system parts
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Improper operation of IAC valve
• EGR valve malfunction
• No signal from CKP sensor due to sensor, related wire or wrong installation
• Vacuum leakage
• Engine overheating
• Low engine compression
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Poor fuel quality
• PCV valve malfunction
• Air cleaner restriction
• Restriction in exhaust system
• Electrical connector disconnection
• Open or short circuit in fuel pump body and related harness
• No battery power supply to PCM or poor GND
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• Fuel pump body mechanical malfunction
• Fuel leakage from fuel injector
• Fuel injector clogging
• Ignition coil malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control
• Improper valve timing
• Improper operation variable valve timing control system (L3-VE)
• Immobilizer system (PATS) and/or circuit malfunction (if equipped)
• Pressure regulator malfunction

Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains the fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Both conditions appear:
Note
Go to Step 3.
• The following test should be performed for
vehicles with immobilizer system. Go to
No
Either or other condition appears:
Step 10 for vehicles without immobilizer
Go to next step.
system.
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Do following conditions appear?
• Engine is not completely started.
• DTC B1681 is displayed.
Does engine stall after approx. 2 seconds since
engine is started?
Is coil connector securely connected to coil?

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Immobilizer systemis okay.
Go to Step 10.
Go to next step.
Connect coil connector securely.
Return to Step 2.

F191

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
4
Does security light illuminate?
5

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2 and
retrieve DTC.
Are any of following DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Inspect instrument cluster and wiring harness.
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Go to next step.

DTC
6
7
8

B1213, B1342, B1600, B1602, B1681, B2103,
B2431
Is there continuity between PCM GND terminals
4X, 2AB, 2AC and GND?
Measure voltage between PCM GND terminals
4X, 2AB, 2AC and coil terminal C.
Is voltage below 1.0 V?
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Access VPWR PID.
Is VPWR PID okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.

Yes

Inspection for following:
• Open or short circuit between coil terminal A and
PCM terminal 2Q.
• Open or short circuit between coil terminal B and
PCM terminal 2T.
Repair or replace wiring harness between coil
connector terminal D and fuse panel.
Go to next step.
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 10.

VPWR PID
9

Battery voltage
Disconnect coil connector.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is there battery voltage at coil connector terminal
D?

No
10

Verify following:
• Vacuum connection
• Air cleaner element
• No air leakage from intake-air system
• No restriction of intake-air system
• Proper sealing of intake manifold and
components attached to intake manifold:
EGR valve, IAC valve
• Ignition wiring
• Fuel quality: proper octane, contamination,
winter/summer blend
• Electrical connections
• Smooth operation of throttle valve
Are all items okay?
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Disconnect TP sensor connector.
Measure voltage at TP sensor connector VREF
terminal with ignition switch ON.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to troubleshooting "No.27 Constant voltage".

Yes

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Communication error message is displayed:
Inspect for following:
• Open circuit between main relay and PCM terminal
2Y or 4V
• Open main relay GND circuit
• Main relay is stuck open.
• Open or poor GND circuit (PCM terminal 4X, 2AB
or 2AC)
• Poor connection of vehicle body GND
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Inspect IAC valve and wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Voltage
12

4.55.5 V
Is voltage okay?
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
If engine stalls, retrieve continuous memory and
KOEO DTCs.
Are there any DTC displayed?

No
13

Attempt to start engine at part throttle.
Does engine run smoothly at part throttle?

F192

Yes
No

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
14
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access RPM PID.
Is RPM PID indicating engine speed during
engine cranking?

Visually inspect CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Are CKP sensor and teeth of crankshaft pulley
okay?
Measure gap between CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.

Specification
17
18

0.51.9 mm {0.0200.075 in}
Is gap within specification?
Inspect for cracks on high-tension leads.
Are there any cracks on high-tension leads?
Is strong blue spark visible at each disconnected
high-tension lead while cranking engine?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Inspect for following:.
• Open or short circuit in CKP sensor
• Open or short circuit between CKP sensor and
PCM terminal 2C or 2D
• Open or short circuit in CKP sensor harnesses
If CKP sensor and harness are okay, go to next step.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Replace malfunctioning parts.
Go to next step.
Adjust CKP sensor.

Yes
No
Yes

Repair suspected high-tension leads.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
If symptom occurs with A/C on, go to Step 24.
Inspect for following:
• Open or short circuit in ignition coil
• Open circuit in high-tension leads
• Open circuit between ignition coil connector GND
terminal and body GND
• Open circuit between ignition switch and ignition
coil
• Open circuit between ignition coil and PCM
terminal 1A or 1B
Spark plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Inspect for fuel leakage from injector.
Spark plug is grayish white:
Inspect for clogged fuel injector.
Install spark plugs on original cylinders.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Replace PCV valve.
Inspect exhaust system.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

Inspect spark plug condition.
Is spark plug wet, covered with carbon or
grayish white?

Yes

No
20

Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

Inspect for restriction in the exhaust system.
Is there any restriction?

Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Connect jumper wire between F/P terminal at
DLC-2 in engine compartment and GND.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is fuel line pressure correct with ignition switch
ON?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Visually inspect for fuel leakage at fuel injector
O-ring and fuel line. Service as necessary.
Is fuel line pressure held after ignition switch is
turned off?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect fuel injector.
If fuel injector is okay, replace fuel pump unit.

F193

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
24

26
27
28

29
30

INSPECTION
Note
• Following test is for stall concerns with A/
C on. If other symptoms exist, go to next
step.
Connect pressure gauges to A/C low and high
pressure side lines.
Turn A/C on and measure low side and high side
pressures.
Are pressures within specifications?
(See U12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK.)
Disconnect vacuum hose between purge
solenoid valve and intake manifold from purge
solenoid side.
Plug opening end of vacuum hose.
Start engine.
Is engine stall now eliminated?
Is air leakage felt or heard at intake-air system
components while racing engine to higher
speed?
Inspect engine condition while tapping EGR
valve housing.
Does engine condition improve?
Note
• The following test should be performed for
vehicles with variable valve timing control
system. Go to next step for vehicles
without variable valve timing control
system.
Inspect variable valve timing control system
operation.
(See F239 Variable Valve Timing Control
System Operation Inspection.)
Does variable valve timing control work
properly?
Is engine compression correct?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
If A/C is always on, go to symptom troubleshooting
"No.24 A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs
continuously".
For other symptoms, inspect following:
• Refrigerant charging amount
• Condenser fan operation

Yes
No

Inspect if purge solenoid valve sticks open.
Inspect evaporative emission control system.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair or replace.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace EGR valve.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Inspect valve timing.
Inspect for cause.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F194

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START

A6E398018881W08

CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START
• Starter cranks engine at normal speed but engine will not run.
• Refer to symptom troubleshooting "No.5 Engine stalls" if this symptom appears after engine stall.
DESCRIPTION
• Fuel is in tank.
• Battery is in normal condition.
• No battery power supply to PCM
• Air leakage from intake-air system
• Open PCM GND or vehicle body GND
• Improper operation of IAC valve
• EGR valve malfunction
• No signal from CKP sensor due to sensor, related wire or incorrect installation
• No signal from CMP sensor due to sensor, related wire or incorrect installation
• Low engine compression
• Engine overheating
• Vacuum leakage
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control
• Poor fuel quality
• PCV valve malfunction
• Air cleaner restriction
• Restriction in exhaust system
• Disconnected electrical connector
• Open or short circuit in fuel pump body and related harness
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• Fuel pump mechanical malfunction
• Fuel leakage from injector
• Fuel injector is clogged.
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Spark plug malfunction
• Ignition coil malfunction
• Improper variable valve timing control system operation (L3)
• Improper valve timing
• Immobilizer system (PATS) and/or circuit malfunction (if equipped)
• Pressure regulator malfunction
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains the fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
"BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE" and "AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE" described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Note
• Following test should be performed for
vehicles with immobilizer system. Go to
Step 10 for vehicles without immobilizer
system.
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Do any of following conditions appear?
• Engine is not completely started.
• DTC B1681 is displayed.
Does engine stall after approx. 2 seconds since
engine is started?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Both conditions appear:
Go to Step 3.
No
Either or other condition appears:
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Immobilizer system is okay.
Go to Step 10.

F195

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
3
Is coil connector securely connected to coil?

Does security light illuminate?

Connect WDS equivalent to DLC-2 and retrieve
DTC.
Are any of following DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Connect coil connector securely.
Return to Step 2.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Inspect instrument cluster and wiring harness.
Yes
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
Go to next step.

DTC

6
7
8

B1213, B1342, B1600, B1601, B1602, B1681,
B2103, B2431
Is there continuity between PCM GND terminals
4X, 2AB, 2AC and GND?
Measure voltage between PCM GND terminals
4X, 2AB, 2AC and coil terminal C.
Is voltage below 1.0 V?
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Access VPWR PID.
Is VPWR PID okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness.

Yes

Inspect for following:
• Open or short circuit between coil terminal A and
PCM terminal 2Q
• Open or short circuit between coil terminal B and
PCM terminal 2T
Repair or replace wiring harness between coil
connector terminal D and fuse panel.
Go to next step.
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 10.

VPWR PID
9

Battery voltage
Disconnect coil connector.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is there battery voltage at coil connector terminal
D?

No
10

Verify following:
• Vacuum connection
• External fuel shut off or accessory (kill
switch, alarm etc.)
• Fuel quality: proper octane, contamination,
winter/summer blend
• No air leakage from intake-air system
• Proper sealing of intake manifold and
components attached to intake manifold:
EGR valve, IAC valve
• Ignition wiring
• Electrical connections
• Fuses
• Smooth operation of throttle valve
Are all items okay?
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory and KOEO
DTC.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

Yes
No

Yes

Yes
No

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Communication error message is displayed:
Inspect for following:
• Open circuit between main relay and PCM terminal
2Y or 4V
• Open main relay GND circuit
• Main relay is stuck open.
• Open or poor GND circuit (PCM terminal 4X, 2AB,
or 2AC)
• Poor connection of vehicle body GND
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Go to troubleshooting "No.27 Constant voltage".

Yes
No

Go to Step 29.
Go to next step.

No
12

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Disconnect TP sensor connector.
Measure voltage at TP sensor connector VREF
terminal with ignition switch to ON position.

Voltage
13

4.55.5 V
Is voltage okay?
Does engine start with throttle closed?

F196

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
14
Will engine start and run smoothly at part
throttle?
15

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access RPM PID.
Is RPM PID indicating engine speed when
cranking engine?

Visually inspect CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Are CKP sensor and teeth of crankshaft pulley
okay?
Measure gap between CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.

Specification
18

0.51.9 mm {0.0200.075 in}
Is gap within specification?
Inspect for cranks on high-tension leads.
Is there any crank on high-tension leads?

Is strong blue spark visible at each disconnected
high-tension lead while cranking engine?

Inspect spark plug conditions.
Is spark plug wet, covered with carbon or
grayish white?

RESULTS
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

ACTION
Inspect IAC valve and wiring harness.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect for following:
• Open or short circuit in CKP sensor
• Open or short circuit between CKP sensor and
PCM terminal 1A or 1B
• Open or short circuit in CKP sensor harnesses
If CKP sensor and harness are okay, go to next step.
Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust CKP sensor.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Repair suspected high-tension leads.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect for following:
• Open or short circuit in ignition coil
• Open circuit in high-tension leads
• Open circuit between ignition coil connector GND
terminal and GND
• Open circuit between ignition switch and ignition
coil
• Open circuit between ignition coil and PCM
terminal 1A or 1B
Spark plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Inspect for fuel leakage from injector.
Spark plug is grayish white:
Inspect for clogged fuel injector.
Install spark plugs on original cylinders.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Replace PCV valve.
Inspect exhaust system.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

Yes

No
21

Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

Inspect for restriction in exhaust system.

Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Connect a jumper wire between F/P terminal at
DLC-2 in engine compartment and GND.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is fuel line pressure correct when ignition switch
is turned on/off five times?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Visually inspect for fuel leakage at fuel injector
O-ring and fuel line.
Service as necessary.
Is fuel line pressure held after ignition switch is
turned off?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Disconnect vacuum hose between purge
solenoid valve and intake manifold from purge
solenoid valve side.
Plug opening end of vacuum hose.
Attempt to start engine.
Is starting condition improved?

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect fuel injector.
If fuel injector is okay, replace fuel pump unit.

Yes

Inspect if purge solenoid valve sticks open
mechanically.
Inspect evaporative emission control system.
Go to next step.

F197

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
26
Is air leakage felt or heard at intake-air system
Yes
Repair or replace.
components while racing engine to higher
No
Go to next step.
speed?
27
Inspect engine condition while tapping EGR
Yes
Replace EGR valve.
valve housing.
No
Go to next step.
Is engine condition improved?
28
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• The following test should be performed for
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
vehicles with variable valve timing control
system. Go to next step for vehicles
without variable valve timing control
system.

29
30

Inspect variable valve timing control system
operation.
(See F239 Variable Valve Timing Control
System Operation Inspection.)
Does variable valve timing control work
properly?
Is engine compression correct?

Yes
No

Inspect valve timing.
Inspect for causes.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of
Sie RETURN TO IDLE
NO.7
SLOW

A6E398018881W09

7
DESCRIPTION

SLOW RETURN TO IDLE
Engine takes more time than normal to return to idle speed.
• ECT sensor malfunction
• Thermostat is stuck open.
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Throttle body malfunction
• Air leakage from intake-air system

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Yes
ECT and thermostat are okay.
Go to next step.
No
Access ECT PID on WDS or equivalent.
Inspect for both ECT PID and temperature gauge on
instrument cluster readings.
If temperature gauge on instrument cluster indicates
normal range but ECT PID is not same as temperature
gauge reading, inspect ECT sensor.
If temperature gauge on instrument cluster indicates
cold range but ECT PID is normal, inspect temperature
gauge and heat gauge unit.
Yes
Inspect for air leakage from intake-air system
components while racing engine to higher speed.
No
Clean or replace throttle body.

Remove thermostat and inspect operation.
(See E7 THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See E8 THERMOSTAT INSPECTION.)
Is thermostat okay?

Is throttle body free of contaminations?

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F198

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.8 ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE

A6E398018881W10

ENGINE RUNS ROUGH/ROLLING IDLE
• Engine speed fluctuates between specified idle speed and lower speed and engine shakes
DESCRIPTION
excessively.
• Idle speed is too slow and engine shakes excessively.
• Air leakage from intake-air system parts
• A/C system operation is improper
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Spark plug malfunction
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• IAC valve improper operation
• EGR valve malfunction
• Erratic or no signal from CMP sensor
• Low engine compression
• Improper valve timing
• Improper variable valve timing control system operation (L3-VE)
• Erratic signal from CKP sensor
• Poor fuel quality
• PCV valve malfunction
• Air cleaner restriction
• Restriction in exhaust system
• Disconnected electrical connectors
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• Fuel pump body mechanical malfunction
• Improper load signal input
• Fuel line restriction or clogging
• Improper fuel injection control operation
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Fuel leakage from fuel injector
• Fuel injector clogging
• Engine overheating
• Vacuum leakage
• Pressure regurator malfunction
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Verify following:
• External fuel shut off or accessory (kill
switch, alarm etc.)
• Fuel quality (e.g. proper octane,
contamination, winter/summer blend)
• No air leakage from intake-air system
• Proper sealing of intake manifold and
components attached to intake manifold:
EGR valve, IAC valve
• Ignition wiring
• Electrical connections
• Fuses
• Smooth operation of throttle valve
Are all items okay?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

F199

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Is engine overheating?
Yes
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.17 Cooling system
concerns - Overheating".
No
Go to next step.
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• Following test is for engine running rough
No
If A/C is always on, go to symptom troubleshooting
idle with A/C on concerns. If other
"No.24 A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs
symptoms exist, go to next step.
continuously".
For other symptoms, inspect following:
Connect pressure gauge to A/C low and high
• Refrigerant charging amount
pressure side lines.
• Condenser fan operation
Start engine and run it at idle.
Turn A/C switch on.
Measure low side and high side pressures.
Are pressures within specifications?
(See U12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK.)
Note
Yes
Inspect power steering pressure switch operation and
wiring harness between P/S pressure switch connector
• Following test is for engine running rough
and PCM connector terminal 1Z.
with P/S on. If other symptoms exist, go to
next step.
No
Go to next step.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Access PSP PID.
Inspect if PSP PID is on while turning steering
wheel right to left.
Is PSP PID okay?
Visually inspect CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Are CKP sensor and teeth of crankshaft pulley
okay?
Measure gap between CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.

Specification
8
9

0.51.5 mm {0.0200.075 in}
Is gap within specification?
Inspect for cracks on high-tension leads.
Are there any cracks on high-tension leads?
Inspect spark plug condition.
Is spark plug wet, covered with carbon or
grayish white?

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust CKP sensor.

Yes
No
Yes

Repair suspected high-tension leads.
Go to next step.
Spark plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Inspect for fuel leakage from injector.
Spark plug is grayish white:
Inspect for clogged fuel injector.
Install spark plugs on original cylinders.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect IAC valve and wiring harness.

No
10
11

Start engine and disconnect IAC valve
connector.
Does rpm drop or engine stall?
Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Measure fuel line pressure at idle.
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Visually inspect for fuel leakage at fuel injector,
O-ring, and fuel line.
Service as necessary.
Does fuel line pressure hold after ignition switch
is turned off?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)

F200

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect fuel injector.
If fuel injector is okay, replace fuel pump unit.

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
13
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Yes
Go to next step.
Start the engine and run it at idle.
No
Inspect and repair or replace faulty HO2S, harness,
Access O2S11 PID.
connector or terminal, then go to next step.
Is O2S11 PID okay?
• More than 0.45 V when accelerator pedal is
suddenly depressed: rich condition
• Less than 0.45 V during fuel cut: lean
condition
14
Disconnect vacuum hose between purge
Yes
Inspect if purge solenoid valve sticks open
solenoid valve and intake manifold from purge
mechanically.
solenoid valve side.
Inspect EVAP control system.
Plug opening end of vacuum hose. Start engine.
No
Go to next step.
Does engine condition improve?
15
Remove and shake PCV valve.
Yes
Go to next step.
Does PCV valve rattle?
No
Replace PCV valve.
16
Inspect for restriction in exhaust system.
Yes
Inspect exhaust system.
Is there any restriction?
No
Go to next step.
17
Visually inspect CMP sensor and teeth of
Yes
Go to next step.
camshaft.
No
Replace malfunctioning parts.
Are CMP sensor and teeth of camshaft okay?
18
Inspect engine condition while tapping EGR
Yes
Replace EGR valve.
valve housing.
No
Go to next step.
Does engine condition improve?
19
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• The following test should be performed for
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
vehicles with variable valve timing control
system. Go to next step for vehicles witout
variable valve timing control system.

20
21

Inspect variable valve timing control system
operation.
(See F239 Variable Valve Timing Control
System Operation Inspection.)
Does variable valve timing control system work
properly?
Is engine compression correct?

Yes
No

Inspect valve timing.
Inspect for causes.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of
Sie IDLE/RUNS ON
NO.9
FAST

A6E398018881W11

FAST IDLE/RUNS ON
• Engine speed continues at fast idle after warm-up.
DESCRIPTION
• Engine runs after ignition switch is turned off.
• ECT sensor malfunction
• Air leakage from intake-air system
• Throttle body malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Accelerator cable free play misadjustment
• Cruise control cable misadjustment
• Improper load signal input

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
1
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Yes
Go to next step.
Access ECT PID.
No
ECT PID is higher than 112°°C {234°°F}:
Start and warm up engine to normal operating
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.17 Cooling system
temperature.
concerns - Overheating".
Is ECT PID reading between 82112°°C {180
ECT PID is less than 82°°C {180°°F}:
234°°F}?
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.18 Cooling system
concerns - Runs cold".

F201

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Yes
Go to next step.
Access ACSW, COLP, CPP, CPP/PNP, TR and
No
ACSW PID: Inspect A/C switch, refrigerant pressure
PSP PIDs.
switch and fan switch.
Monitor each PID.
COLP PID: Inspect refrigerant pressure switch (middle
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
pressure).
Are PIDs okay?
CPP PID: Inspect clutch switch (MTX).
CPP/PNP PID: Inspect neutral switch (MTX)
TR PID: TR switch (ATX).
PSP PID: Inspect P/S pressure switch.
Is there air leakage felt or heard at intake-air
Yes
Repair or replace parts if necessary.
system components while racing engine to
No
Verify accelerator cable free play.
higher speed?
(See F16 ACCELERATOR CABLE INSPECTION/
ADJUSTMENT.)
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End OfLOW
Sie IDLE/STALLS DURING DECELERATION
NO.10

A6E398018881W12

10
DESCRIPTION

LOW IDLE/STALLS DURING DECELERATION
• Engine stops unexpectedly at beginning of deceleration or recovery from deceleration.
• Vacuum leakage
• IAC valve malfunction
• Air leakage from intake-air system
• Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control
• Evaporative emission control system malfunction
• TP sensor misadjustment
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• TP sensor or related circuit malfunction
• MAF sensor or related circuit malfunction
• Brake switch or related circuit malfunction
• Neutral/clutch switch or related circuit malfunction (MTX)
• TR switch or related circuit malfunction (ATX)
• Improper A/C magnetic clutch operation

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Does engine idle rough?

Turn off A/C switch and fan switch.
Does A/C magnetic clutch engauge?

Verify following:
• Proper routing and no damage of vacuum
lines
• IAC valve is connected properly.
• No air leakage from intake-air system
Are all items okay?
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

Does idle speed drop or stall when
disconnecting IAC valve?

F202

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.8 Engine runs
rough/rolling idle".
No
Go to next step.
Yes
Go to symptom troubleshooting No.24 A/C is always
on or A/C compressor runs continuously.
No
Go to next step.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 3.

Yes
No
Yes
No

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect following:
• Circuit from IAC valve to PCM connector terminal
4G or 4J for open and short
• IAC valve for sticking
If okay, go to next step.

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
6
Disconnect vacuum hose between purge
solenoid valve and intake manifold from purge
solenoid valve side.
Plug opening end of vacuum hose.
Drive vehicle.
Does engine condition improve?
7
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access TP, MAF, VSS, BOO, CPP, CPP/PNP
and TR PIDs.
Monitor each PID while driving vehicle.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Are PIDs okay?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect evaporative emission control system.
No
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Intermittent concern exists.
(See INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
TP PID: Inspect TP sensor.
MAF PID: Inspect MAF sensor.
VSS PID: Inspect VSS.
BOO PID: Inspect brake switch.
CPP PID: Inspect clutch switch (MTX).
CPP/PNP PID: Inspect neutral switch (MTX).
TR PID: Inspect TR switch (ATX) switch.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F203

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.11 ENGINE STALLS/QUITS, ENGINE RUNS ROUGH, MISSES, BUCK/JERK, HESITATION/STUMBLE,
SURGES

A6E398018881W13

ENGINE STALLS/QUITS ACCELERATION/CRUISE
ENGINE RUNS ROUGH ACCELERATION/CRUISE
MISSES ACCELERATION/CRUISE
11
BUCK/JERK ACCELERATION/CRUISE/DECELERATION
HESITATION/STUMBLE ACCELERATION
SURGES ACCELERATION/CRUISE
• Engine stops unexpectedly at beginning of acceleration or during acceleration.
• Engine stops unexpectedly while cruising.
• Engine speed fluctuates during acceleration or cruising.
DESCRIPTION
• Engine misses during acceleration or cruising.
• Vehicle bucks/jerks during acceleration, cruising, or deceleration.
• Momentary pause at beginning of acceleration or during acceleration
• Momentary minor irregularity in engine output
• A/C system operation is improper.
• Erratic signal or no signal from CMP sensor
• Air leakage from intake-air system parts
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• IAC valve improper operation
• EGR valve malfunction
• Erratic signal from CKP sensor
• Low engine compression
• Vacuum leakage
• Poor fuel quality
• Main relay intermittent malfunction
• Throttle body malfunction
• Engine overheating
• Spark plug malfunction
• Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control operation
• Improper VTCS operation
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Air cleaner restriction
• PCV valve malfunction
• Improper valve timing due to jumping out timing belt
• Restriction in exhaust system
• Intermittent open or short in fuel body pump circuit
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• Fuel pump mechanical malfunction
• Fuel leakage from fuel injector
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Fuel injector clogging
• Fuel line restriction or clogging
• Pressure regulator malfunction
• TP sensor misadjustment
• Intermittent open or short of MAF sensor, TP sensor and VSS
• ATX malfunction (ATX)
• Clutch slippage (MTX)
• Improper VTCS operation
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains the fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
"BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE" and "AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE" described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

F204

TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Verify for following:
• Vacuum connection
• Air cleaner element
• No air leakage from intake-air system
• No restriction of intake-air system
• Proper sealing of intake manifold and
components attached to intake manifold:
such as EGR valve, IAC valve
• Ignition wiring
• Fuel quality (e.g. proper octane,
contamination, winter/summer blend)
• Electrical connections
• Smooth operation of throttle valve
Are all items okay?
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
If stall, condition exists retrieve continuous
memory and KOEO DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3
Is engine overheating?

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access RPM, VPWR, MAF, TP and VSS PIDs.
Drive vehicle with monitoring PIDs.
Are PIDs within specifications?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Visually inspect CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Are CKP sensor and teeth of crankshaft pulley
okay?
Measure gap between CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.

Specification
7

0.51.9 mm {0.0200.075 in}
Is gap within specification?
Inspect spark plug conditions.
Is spark plug wet, covered with carbon or
grayish white?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

Yes
No

Yes

Yes
No

Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.17 Cooling system
concerns - Overheating".
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
RPM PID:
Inspect CKP sensor and related harness for such as
vibration, intermittent open/short circuit.
VPWR PID:
Inspect for open circuit intermittently.
MAF PID:
Inspect for open circuit of MAF sensor and related wire
harness intermittently.
TP PID:
Inspect if output signal from TP sensor changes
smoothly.
VSS PID:
Inspect for open circuit of VSS and related wire
harness intermittently.
Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust CKP sensor.

Yes

Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Inspect exhaust system.
Go to next step.

No
Yes
No

No
8

Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

Verify that throttle lever is resting on throttle
valve stop screw and/or throttle valve orifice
plug.
Is lever in correct position?
Inspect for restriction in the exhaust system.
Is there any restriction?

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.

F205

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
11
Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
Yes
Go to next step.
and fuel distributor.
No
Zero or low:
Connect jumper wire between F/P terminal at
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
DLC-2 in engine compartment and GND.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
High:
Is fuel line pressure correct with ignition switch
Replace fuel pump unit.
to ON position?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
12
Visually inspect for fuel leakage at fuel injector
Yes
Go to next step.
O-ring and fuel line.
No
Inspect fuel injector.
Service as necessary.
If fuel injector is okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Is fuel line pressure held after ignition switch is
turned off?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
13
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• Following test is for engine stalling with A/
No
If A/C is always on, go to symptom troubleshooting
C on. If other symptom exists, go to next
"No.24 A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs
step.
continuously".
For other symptoms, inspect following:
Connect a pressure gauge to A/C low and high
• Refrigerant charging amount
pressure side lines.
• Condenser fan operation
Turn A/C on and measure low side and high side
pressure.
Are pressure within specifications?
(See U12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK.)
14
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• The following test should be performed for
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
symptom with cruise control ON. If other
symptoms exist, go to next step.

18
19

Inspect cruise control system.
Is cruise control system okay?
Disconnect vacuum hose between purge
solenoid valve and intake manifold from purge
solenoid valve side.
Plug opening end of vacuum hose.
Drive vehicle.
Does engine condition improve?
Visually inspect CMP sensor and projections of
camshaft pulley.
Are CMP sensor and projections of camshaft
pulley okay?
Inspect VTCS operation.
(See F231 Variable Tumble Control System
(VTCS) Operation Inspection.)
Is VTCS okay?
Inspect EGR system.
(See F233 EGR Control System Inspection.)
Is EGR system okay?
Is engine compression correct?

Yes

Go to next step.
Inspect if purge solenoid valve sticks open
mechanically.
Inspect evaporative emission control system.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes

Inspect following:
• Valve timing
• Internal transaxle part (ATX)
• Clutch (MTX)
Inspect for cause.

No
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F206

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF POWER-ACCELERATION/CRUISE

A6E398018881W14

12
DESCRIPTION

LACK/LOSS OF POWER ACCELERATION/CRUISE
Performance is poor under load (e.g., power down when climbing hills).
• Improper A/C system operation
• Erratic signal or no signal from CMP sensor
• Air leakage from intake-air system parts
• Improper VIS operation (if equipped)
• Improper VTCS operation
• Purge control solenoid malfunction
• EGR valve malfunction
• Brake dragging
• Erratic signal from CKP sensor
• Low engine compression
• Vacuum leakage
• Poor fuel quality
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Engine overheating
• Throttle body malfunction
• Spark plug malfunction
• Air cleaner restriction
• PCV valve malfunction
• Improper valve timing due to jumping out of timing belt
• Improper variable valve timing control operation (if equipped)
• Restriction in exhaust system
• Intermittent open or short in fuel pump related circuit
• Inadequate fuel pressure
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Fuel pump mechanical malfunction
• Fuel line restriction or clogging
• Fuel leakage from fuel injector
• Fuel injector clogging
• Intermittent open or short of MAF sensor, TP sensor and VSS
• ATX malfunction (ATX)
• Clutch slippage (MTX)

Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains the fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
"BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE" and "AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE" described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Verify following:
• Vacuum connection
• Air cleaner element
• No air leakage from intake-air system
• No restriction of intake-air system
• Proper sealing of intake manifold and
components attached to intake manifold;
such as EGR valve, IAC valve
• Fuel quality (e.g. proper octane,
contamination, winter/summer blend)
Are all items okay?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

F207

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
If engine stall condition exists, retrieve
continuous memory and KOEO DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3
Is engine overheating?

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access RPM, MAF, TP and VSS PIDs.
Drive vehicle while monitoring PIDs.
Are PIDs within specifications?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Visually inspect CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.
Are CKP sensor and teeth of crankshaft pulley
okay?
Measure gap between CKP sensor and teeth of
crankshaft pulley.

Specification
7

0.51.9 mm {0.0200.075 in}
Is gap within specification?
Inspect spark plug condition.
Is spark plug wet, covered with carbon or
grayish white?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Yes

Yes
No

Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.17 Cooling system
concerns - Overheating".
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
RPM PID:
Inspect CKP sensor and related wiring harness for
vibration and/or intermittent open/short circuit.
MAF PID:
Inspect for intermittent open circuit of MAF sensor and
related wiring harness.
TP PID:
Inspect if TP sensor output increases smoothly.
VSS PID:
Inspect for intermittent open circuit of VSS and related
wiring harness.
Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust CKP sensor.

Yes

Spark plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Inspect for fuel leakage from fuel injector.
Spark plug is grayish white:
Inspect for clogged fuel injector.
Install spark plugs on original cylinders.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Replace PCV valve.
Inspect exhaust system.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

No
Yes
No

No
8

Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

Inspect for restriction in exhaust system.
Is there any restriction?

Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Connect jumper wire between F/P terminal at
DLC-2 in engine compartment and GND.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Is fuel line pressure correct with ignition switch
to ON position?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Inspect VTCS operation.
(See F231 Variable Tumble Control System
(VTCS) Operation Inspection.)
Does VTCS work properly?
Note
• The following test should be performed for
vehicles with VIS. Go to next step for
vehicles without VIS.

Inspect VIS operation.
(See F230 VIS Operation Inspection.)
Does VIS work properly?

F208

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
13

17
18

INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• Following test is for engine stalling with A/
No
If A/C is always on, go to symptom troubleshooting
C on concern. If other symptoms exist, go
"No.24 A/C is always on or A/C compressor runs
to next step.
continuously".
For other symptoms, inspect following:
Connect pressure gauge to A/C low and high
• Refrigerant charging amount
side pressure lines.
• Condenser fan operation
Turn A/C on and measure low side and high side
pressures.
Are pressures within specifications?
(See U12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE
CHECK.)
Inspect for A/C cut-off operation.
Yes
Go to next step.
(See F234 A/C Cut-off Control System
No
Inspect A/C cut-off system components.
Inspection.)
Does A/C cut-off work properly?
Disconnect vacuum hose between purge
Yes
Inspect if purge solenoid valve is sticks open
solenoid valve and intake manifold from purge
mechanically.
solenoid valve side.
Inspect evaporative emission control system.
Plug opening end of vacuum hose.
No
Go to next step.
Drive vehicle.
Does engine condition improve?
Visually inspect CMP sensor and projections of
Yes
Go to next step.
camshaft pulley.
No
Replace malfunctioning parts.
Are CMP sensor and projections of camshaft
pulley okay?
Inspect EGR system.
Yes
Go to next step.
(See F233 EGR Control System Inspection.)
No
Replace malfunctioning parts.
Is EGR system okay?
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• The following test should be performed for
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
vehicles with variable valve timing control
system. Go to next step for vehicles
without variable valve timing control
system.
Inspect variable valve timing control system
operation.
(See F239 Variable Valve Timing Control
System Operation Inspection.)
Does variable valve timing control system work
properly?
Is engine compression correct?

Yes

Inspect following:
• Valve timing
• Internal transaxle components (ATX)
• Clutch (MTX)
• Brake system for dragging
Inspect for cause.

No
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F209

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.13 KNOCKING/PINGING-ACCELERATION/CRUISE
13
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

A6E398018881W15

KNOCKING/PINGING - ACCELERATION/CRUISE
Sound is produced when air/fuel mixture is ignited by something other than spark plug (e.g., hot spot in
combustion chamber).
• Engine overheating due to cooling system malfunction
• ECT sensor malfunction
• IAT sensor malfunction
• MAF sensor malfunction
• Knock sensor malfunction
• Erratic signal from CMP sensor
• Inadequate engine compression
• Inadequate fuel pressure
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains the fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read the following warnings before performing the fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
"BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE" and "AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE" described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access ECT PID.
Verify ECT PID is less than 116°°C {241°°F}
during driving.
Is ECT PID less than specification?
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access IAT, MAF and SPARKADV PIDs.
Monitor each PID.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Are PIDs okay?
3

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Inspect cooling system for cause of overheating.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
IAT PID: Inspect IAT sensor
MAF PID: Inspect MAF sensor
SPARKADV PID: Inspect CMP sensor and knock
sensor.
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect for cause.
Inspect ignition timing.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

Yes

Is engine compression correct?

Yes
No
Yes
No

Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Measure fuel line pressure at idle.
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F210

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.14 POOR FUEL ECONOMY

A6E398018881W16

14
DESCRIPTION

POOR FUEL ECONOMY
Fuel economy is unsatisfactory.
• Contaminated air cleaner element
• VIS malfunction (if equipped)
• Engine cooling system malfunction
• Improper ATF level (ATX)
• Weak spark
• Poor fuel quality
• Erratic or no signal from CMP sensor
• Clutch slippage (MTX)
• VTCS malfunction
• Improper variable valve timing control system operation (if equipped)
• Improper coolant level
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• Spark plug malfunction
• PCV valve malfunction
• Brake dragging
• Improper valve timing due to jumping out of timing belt
• Contaminated MAF sensor
• Improper engine compression
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Exhaust system clogging

Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read following warnings before performing fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE" and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Inspect for following:
• Air cleaner element for contamination
• ATF level
• Fuel quality
• Coolant level
• Brake dragging
• Clutch slippage
Are all items okay?
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3

Access ECT PID.
Drive vehicle while monitoring PID.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Is PID within specification?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

Yes
No
Yes
No

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect for coolant leakage, cooling fan and condenser
fan operations or thermostat operation.

F211

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
4
Is strong blue spark visible at each disconnected
Yes
Inspect for following:
high-tension lead while cranking engine?
• Spark plugs malfunction
• CMP sensor is improperly installed.
• Trigger wheel damage on camshaft
• Open or short circuit on CMP sensor
• Open or short circuit between CMP sensor and
PCM terminal 2J or 2M
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
If okay, go to next step.
No
Inspect following:
• High-tension leads
• Ignition coil and connector
5
Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
Yes
Go to next step.
and fuel distributor.
No
Zero or low:
Start engine and run it at idle.
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
Measure fuel line pressure at idle.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
High:
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
Replace fuel pump unit.
INSPECTION)
6
Inspect for VTCS operation.
Yes
Go to next step.
(See F231 Variable Tumble Control System
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
(VTCS) Operation Inspection.)
Does VTCS work properly?
7
Note
Yes
Go to next step.
• The following test should be performed for
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
vehicles with variable valve timing control
system. Go to next step for vehicles
without variable valve timing control
system.

Inspect for variable valve timing control system
operation.
(See F239 Variable Valve Timing Control
System Operation Inspection.)
Does variable valve timing control system work
properly?
Note
• The following test should be performed for
vehicles with VIS. Go to next step for
vehicles without VIS.
Inspect for VIS operation.
(See F230 VIS Operation Inspection.)
Does VIS work properly?
Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace PCV valve.
Inspect exhaust system.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect for cause.
Replace MAF sensor.
Go to next step.
Inspect valve timing.
Inspect for cause.

Inspect for restriction in the exhaust system.
Is there any restriction?

Inspect for contaminated MAF sensor.
Is there any contamination?

Inspect MAF sensor for contamination.
Is there any contamination?

Is engine compression correct?

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F212

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.15 EMISSION COMPLIANCE

A6E398018881W17

15
DESCRIPTION

EMISSION COMPLIANCE
Fails emissions test.
• Vacuum lines leakage or blockage
• Cooling system malfunction
• Spark plug malfunction
• Leakage from intake manifold
• Erratic or no signal from CMP sensor
• Inadequate fuel pressure
• PCV valve malfunction or incorrect valve installation
• EGR valve malfunction
• Exhaust system clogging
• Fuel tank ventilation system malfunction
• Charcoal canister damage
• Air cleaner element clogging or restriction
• Throttle body malfunction
• Spark leakage from high-tension leads
• Improper air/fuel mixture ratio control operation
• Catalyst converter malfunction
• Engine internal parts malfunction
• Excessive carbon is built up in combustion chamber
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Improper engine compression
• Improper valve timing

Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read following warnings before performing fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Inspect for following:
• Vacuum lines for leakage or blockage
• Electrical connections
• Proper maintenance schedule followed
• Intake-air system and air cleaner element
concerns: obstructions, leakage or dirtiness
Are all items okay?
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3

Is any other drivability concern present?

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access ECT PID.
Warm up engine and run it at idle.
Verify ECT PID is correct.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Is ECT PID correct?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to appropriate symptom troubleshooting.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect for coolant leakage, cooling fan and condenser
fan operation or thermostat operation.

F213

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
5
Is strong blue spark visible at each disconnected
Yes
Inspect for following:
high-tension lead while cranking engine?
• Spark plugs malfunction
• Improperly installed CMP sensor
• Damage of trigger wheel on camshaft
• Open or short circuit on CMP sensor
• Open or short circuit between CMP sensor and
PCM terminal 2J or 2M
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
If okay, go to next step.
No
Inspect following:
• High-tension leads
• Ignition coil and connector
6
Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
Yes
Go to next step.
and fuel distributor.
No
Zero or low:
Start engine and run it at idle.
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
Measure fuel line pressure at idle.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
High:
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
Replace fuel pump unit.
INSPECTION)
7
Remove and shake PCV valve.
Yes
Go to next step.
Does PCV valve rattle?
No
Replace PCV valve.
8
Inspect for fuel saturation inside charcoal
Yes
Replace charcoal canister.
canister.
No
Inspect fuel tank vent system.
Is excess amount of liquid fuel present in
Then, go to next step.
canister?
9
Is there restriction in exhaust system?
Yes
Inspect exhaust system.
No
Inspect EGR system.
(See F233 EGR Control System Inspection.)
10
Inspect threeway catalytic converter.
Yes
Inspect EGR system.
(See F41 THREE-WAY CATALYTIC
(See F233 EGR Control System Inspection.)
CONVERTER (TWC) INSPECTION.)
No
Replace threeway catalytic converter.
Is threeway catalytic converter okay?
11
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End OfHIGH
Sie OIL CONSUMPTION/LEAKAGE
NO.16

A6E398018881W18

16
DESCRIPTION

HIGH OIL CONSUMPTION/LEAKAGE
Oil consumption is excessive.
• PCV valve malfunction
• Improper dipstick
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Improper engine oil viscosity
• Engine internal parts malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Replace PCV valve.
Yes
Inspect internal engine parts such as valves, valve
guides, valve stem seals, cylinder head drain passage,
and piston rings.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 2.

Inspect for following:
• External leakage
• Proper dipstick
• Proper engine oil viscosity
Are all items okay?

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F214

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.17 COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS-OVERHEATING

A6E398018881W19

17
DESCRIPTION

COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS -OVERHEATING
Engine runs at higher than normal temperature/overheats.
• Improper coolant level
• Blown fuses
• Coolant leakage
• Excessive A/C system pressure
• A/C system operation is improper
• Improper water/anti-freeze mixture
• Fans reverse rotation
• Poor radiator condition
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Thermostat malfunction
• Radiator hoses damage
• Condenser fan is inoperative.
• Improper or damaged radiator cap
• Cooling fan is inoperative.
• Coolant overflow system malfunction
• Improper tension of drive belt
• Drive belt damage

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Inspect following:
• Engine coolant level
• Coolant leakage
• Water and anti-freeze mixture
• Radiator condition
• Collapsed or restricted radiator hoses
• Radiator pressure cap
• Overflow system
• Fan rotational direction
• Fuses
Are all items okay?
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 1.

Start engine and run it at idle speed.
Turn A/C switch on.
Does A/C compressor engage?

Yes
No

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access ACSW PID.
Start engine and run it at idle speed.
Turn A/C switch on.
Does ACSW PID read ON?

Yes
No

Inspect cooling fan control system operation.
(See F234 Cooling Fan Control System
Inspection.)
Does cooling fan control system work properly?
Is drive belt okay?

Yes
No

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to Step 5.
Inspect for following and repair or replace as
necessary:
• Refrigerant charging amount
• Open circuit between A/C relay and PCM terminal
4O
• Seized A/C magnetic clutch
• A/C magnetic clutch malfunction
If all items are okay, go to next step.
Go to next step.
Inspect following:
• Refrigerant pressure switch operation
• A/C switch is stuck open.
• Open or short circuit between refrigerant pressure
switch and PCM terminal 1AC
• Open circuit of blower motor fan switch and resistor
(if blower motor does not operate)
• Evaporator temperature sensor and A/C amplifier
Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace drive belt.
Inspect and service heater for leakage.
Go to next step.
Replace malfunctioning part.
Go to next step.

6
7

Is there any leakage around heater unit in
passenger compartment?

Is there any leakage at coolant hoses and/or
radiator?

Yes
No

F215

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
9
Cool down the engine.
Remove thermostat and inspect operation.
(See E7 THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See E8 THERMOSTAT INSPECTION.)
Is thermostat okay?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Engine coolant temperature and thermostat are okay,
inspect engine block for leakage or blockage.
No
Access ECT PID.
Inspect for both ECT PID and temperature gauge
readings.
If temperature gauge on instrument cluster indicates
normal range but ECT PID is not same as temperature
gauge reading, inspect ECT sensor.
If temperature gauge on instrument cluster indicates
overheating but ECT PID is normal, inspect
temperature gauge and heat gauge unit.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End
OfCOOLING
Sie
NO.18
SYSTEM CONCERNS-RUNS COLD

A6E398018881W20

18
DESCRIPTION

COOLING SYSTEM CONCERNS -RUNS COLD
Engine takes excessive period for reaching normal operating temperature.
• Thermostat malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Condenser fan system malfunction
• Cooling fan system malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Is customer complaint "Lack of passenger
compartment heat" only?
2

Does engine speed continue at fast idle?

Remove thermostat and inspect operation.
(See E7 THERMOSTAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See E8 THERMOSTAT INSPECTION.)
Is thermostat okay?
Inspect cooling fan control system operation.
(See F234 Cooling Fan Control System
Inspection.)
Does cooling fan control system work properly?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect A/C and heater system.
No
Go to next step.
Yes
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.9 Fast idle/runs
on".
No
Go to next step.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Replace thermostat.

Yes

No
5

Access ECT PID.
Inspect for both ECT PID and temperature gauge on
instrment cluster readings.
If temperature gauge on instrument cluster indicates
normal range but ECT PID is not same as temperature
gauge reading, inspect ECT sensor.
If temperature gauge on instrument cluster indicates
cold range but ECT PID is normal, inspect temperature
gauge and heat gauge unit.
Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F216

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.19 EXHAUST SMOKE
19
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

A6E398018881W21

EXHAUST SMOKE
Blue, black, or white smoke from exhaust system
Blue smoke (Burning oil):
• PCV valve malfunction
• Engine internal oil leakage
White smoke (Water in combustion):
• Cooling system malfunction (coolant loss)
• Engine internal coolant leakage
Black smoke (Rich fuel mixture):
• Air cleaner restriction
• Intake-air system is collapsed or restricted.
• Fuel return line is restricted.
• Excessive fuel pressure
• Improper engine compression
• Injector fuel leakage
• Ignition system malfunction

Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read following warnings before performing fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
What color is smoke coming from exhaust
system?

Remove and shake PCV valve.
Does PCV valve rattle?

Does cooling system hold pressure?

Inspect for following:
• Air cleaner restriction
• Collapsed or restricted intake-air system
• Restricted fuel return line
Are all items okay?
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Blue
Burning oil is indicated.
Go to next step.
White
Water in combustion is indicated.
Go to Step 3.
Black
Rich fuel mixture is indicated.
Go to Step 4.
Yes
Inspect for following:
• Damaged valve guide, stems or valve seals
• Blocked oil drain passage in cylinder head
• Piston ring is not seated, seized or worn.
• Damaged cylinder bore
If other drivability symptoms are present, return to
diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
No
Replace PCV valve.
Yes
Inspect for following:
• Cylinder head gasket leakage
• Intake manifold gasket leakage
• Cracked or porous engine block
If other drivability symptoms are present, return to
diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
No
Inspect for cause.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 4.
Yes
No

DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.

F217

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
6
Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
Yes
Go to next step.
and fuel distributor.
No
Zero or low:
Start engine and run it at idle.
• Inspect for clogged fuel line.
Measure fuel line pressure at idle.
• If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
High:
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
• Replace fuel pump unit.
INSPECTION)
7
Is strong blue spark visible at each disconnected
Yes
Inspect spark plugs and CMP sensor.
high-tension lead while cranking engine?
No
Inspect following:
• High-tension leads
• Ignition coil and connector
8
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End OfFUEL
Sie ODOR (IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT)
NO.20
20
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

A6E398018881W22

FUEL ODOR (IN ENGINE COMPARTMENT)
Gasoline fuel smell or visible leakage
• Excessive fuel pressure
• Purge solenoid valve malfunction
• Fuel tank vent system blockage
• Charcoal canister malfunction
• Fuel leakage from fuel system
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read following warnings before performing fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
1
Visually inspect for fuel leakage at fuel injector
Yes
Go to next step.
O-ring and fuel line.
No
Replace fuel pump unit.
Service as necessary.
Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Measure fuel line pressure at idle.
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)
2
Inspect for blockage/restriction or open between
Yes
Replace vacuum hose.
engine vacuum port and charcoal canister.
No
Go to next step.
Inspect for blockage in fuel tank vent system.
Is fault indicated?
3
Inspect purge solenoid valve.
Yes
Go to next step.
(See F39 PURGE SOLENOID VALVE
No
Replace purge solenoid valve.
INSPECTION.)
Is solenoid operating properly?

F218

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
4
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Inspect charcoal canister for fuel saturation.
If excess amount of liquid fuel is present, replace
charcoal canister.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End OfENGINE
Sie
NO.21
NOISE

A6E398018881W23

21
DESCRIPTION

ENGINE NOISE
Engine noise from under hood
Squeal, click or chirp noise:
• Improper engine oil level
• Improper drive belt tension
Rattle sound noise:
• Loose parts
Hiss sound noise:
• Vacuum leakage
• Loose spark plug
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Air leakage from intake-air system
• Improper variable air duct (VAD) control system operation
Rumble or grind noise:
• Improper drive belt tension
Rap or roar sound noise:
• Exhaust system looseness
Other noise:
• Camshaft friction gear noise or MLA noise
• Timing chain noise

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Is squeal, click or chirp sound present?
2

Is rumble or grind sound present?

Is rattle sound present?

Is hiss sound present?

Is rap or roar sound present?

Is knock sound present?

RESULTS
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes

No
Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Inspect engine oil level or drive belts.
Go to next step.
Inspect drive belts.
Go to next step.
Inspect location of rattle for loose parts.
Go to next step.
Inspect for following:
• Vacuum leakage
• Spark plug looseness
• Intake-air system leakage
• Variable air duct (VAD) control system operation
(See F238 Variable Air Duct (VAD) Control System
Operation Inspection (L3 Engine Models).)
Go to next step.
Inspect exhaust system for loose parts.
Go to next step.
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.11 Knocking/
pinging".
If noise comes from engine internal, inspect for friction
gear, timing chain or MLA noise.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F219

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.22 VIBRATION CONCERNS (ENGINE)

A6E398018881W24

22
DESCRIPTION

VIBRATION CONCERNS (ENGINE)
• Vibration from under hood or driveline
• Loose attaching bolts or worn parts
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Components malfunction such as worn parts

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
1
Inspect following components for loose attaching
Yes
Inspect following systems:
bolts or worn parts:
• Wheels
• Cooling fan
• ATX
• Condenser fan
• Driveline
• Drive belt and pulleys
• Suspension
• Engine mounts
No
Readjust or retighten engine mount installation
All items okay?
position.
Service if necessary for other parts.
2
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End
OfA/C
SieDOES NOT WORK SUFFICIENTLY
NO.23

A6E398018881W25

23
DESCRIPTION

A/C DOES NOT WORK SUFFICIENTLY.
A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not engage when A/C switch is turned on.
• Improper refrigerant charging amount
• Open A/C magnetic clutch
• Open circuit between A/C relay and A/C magnetic clutch
• Poor GND of A/C magnetic clutch
POSSIBLE CAUSE
• Refrigerant pressure switch is stuck open.
• A/C relay is stuck open.
• Seized A/C compressor
• Open circuit between A/C switch and PCM through both refrigerant pressure switch and A/C amplifier

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
2

Disconnect A/C compressor connector.
Start engine and turn A/C switch on.
Is there correct voltage at terminal of A/C
compressor magnetic clutch connector?

Specification
3

More than 10.5 V
Disconnect refrigerant pressure switch
connector.
Connect jumper wire between terminals of A/C
high pressure switch connector.
Connect jumper wires between terminals of
refrigerant pressure switch connector.
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access ACSW PID.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Turn A/C switch on and set blower fan at any
speed.
Does ACSW PID read ON?
Remove jumper wire from switch connector.
Reconnect connector to refrigerant pressure
switch.
Start engine and turn A/C switch on.
Does fan operate?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Yes
Inspect for GND condition of magnetic clutch on A/C
compressor.
If GND condition is okay, inspect for open circuit
magnetic clutch coil.
No
Go to next step.
Yes
No

Yes
No

Inspect refrigerant pressure switch operation.
If switch is okay, go to next step.
Inspect for following:
• A/C switch is stuck open.
• Open circuit between refrigerant pressure switch
and PCM terminal 1AC
• Open circuit of blower motor fan switch and resistor
(if blower motor does not operate)
• Evaporator temperature sensor and A/C amplifier

Inspect for stuck open A/C relay.
Replace if necessary.
Inspect following and repair or replace as necessary:
• Refrigerant charging amount
• A/C compressor for being seized

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

F220

TROUBLESHOOTING
End OfA/C
SieIS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY
NO.24

A6E398018881W26

24
DESCRIPTION

A/C IS ALWAYS ON OR A/C COMPRESSOR RUNS CONTINUOUSLY.
A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not disengage.
• Stuck engagement A/C compressor magnetic clutch
• A/C relay is stuck closed.
POSSIBLE CAUSE • Short to GND between A/C switch and PCM
• Short to GND circuit between A/C relay and PCM
• A/C relay to magnetic clutch circuit shorted to battery power

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
2

Start engine and run it at idle.
Turn A/C switch on.
Remove A/C relay.
Does A/C magnetic clutch disengage?

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Access ACSW PID.
Start engine and turn A/C switch on.
Read ACSW PID while disconnecting refrigerant
pressure switch connector.

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Yes
Inspect for following:
• A/C relay is stuck closed.
• Short to GND circuit between A/C relay and PCM
terminal 4O.
If both items okay, go to next step.
No
Inspect if circuit between A/C relay and magnetic
clutch shorts to battery power circuit.
If circuit is okay, inspect magnetic clutch stuck
engagement or clearance.
Yes
Inspect for short to GND circuit between refrigerant
pressure switch and PCM terminal 1AC.
No
Go to next step.

Note
• ACSW PID should read OFF when
disconnecting connector. If ACSW PID
reading remains ON, short to GND circuit
may be present.
4

Does ACSW PID reading remain ON?
Reconnect refrigerant pressure switch
connector.
Read ACSW PID while turning off A/C switch.
Note
• ACSW PID should read OFF when turning
A/C switch off. If ACSW PID reading
remains ON, short to GND circuit may be
present.

Yes

Inspect following:
• Short to GND circuit between A/C switch and A/C
amplifier
• Short to GND circuit between A/C amplifier and
refrigerant pressure switch
Inspect for stuck closed A/C switch.

Does ACSW PID reading remain ON?
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End
OfA/C
SieIS NOT CUT OFF UNDER WIDE OPEN THROTTLE CONDITIONS
NO.25

A6E398018881W27

25
DESCRIPTION

A/C IS NOT CUT OFF UNDER WOT CONDITIONS.
A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not disengage under WOT.
• TP sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE CAUSE • TP sensor misadjustment
• Loosely installed TP sensor.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Does A/C compressor disengage when A/C
switch is turned off?

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Go to symptom troubleshooting "No.24 A/C is always
on or A/C compressor runs continuously".

F221

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?
3

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No
No DTC is displayed:
Inspect TP sensor for proper adjustment.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End OfEXHAUST
Sie
NO.26
SULPHUR SMELL
26
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE CAUSE

A6E398018881W28

EXHAUST SULPHUR SMELL
Rotten egg smell (sulphur) from exhaust
• Electrical connectors are disconnected or connected poorly
• Charcoal canister malfunction
• Vacuum lines are disconnected or connected improperly.
• Improper fuel pressure
• Poor fuel quality
Warning
The following troubleshooting flow chart contains fuel system diagnosis and repair
procedures. Read following warnings before performing fuel system services:
• Fuel vapor is hazardous. It can easily ignite, causing serious injury and damage. Always
keep sparks and flames away from fuel.
• Fuel line spills and leakage are dangerous. Fuel can ignite and cause serious injuries or
death and damage. Fuel can also irritate skin and eyes. To prevent this, always complete
BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE and AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE described in this
manual.
(See F17 BEFORE REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
(See F17 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
Caution
• Disconnecting/connecting quick release connector without cleaning it may possibly cause
damage to fuel pipe and quick release connector. Always clean quick release connector
joint area before disconnecting/connecting, and make sure that it is free of foreign material.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Are any driveability or exhaust smoke concerns
present?
2

Inspect following:
• Electrical connections
• Vacuum lines
• Fuel quality
Are all items okay?
Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Retrieve any continuous memory, KOEO and
KOER DTCs.
Are there any DTCs displayed?

RESULTS
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to appropriate flow chart.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Service as necessary.
Repeat Step 2.
DTC is displayed:
Go to appropriate DTC test.
No DTC is displayed:
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.
Replace charcoal canister.
Inspect fuel tank vent system.
If fuel tank vent system is okay, since sulfur content
can vary in different fuels, suggest trying a different
brand.
If fuel tank vent system is not okay, repair or replace
malfunctioning parts.

Install fuel pressure gauge between fuel pipe
and fuel distributor.
Start engine and run it at idle.
Is fuel line pressure correct at idle?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)

Yes
No

Inspect charcoal canister for fuel saturation.
Is excess amount of liquid fuel present in
canister?

Yes
No

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

F222

TROUBLESHOOTING
End OfCONSTANT
Sie
NO.27
VOLTAGE
27
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE CAUSE

A6E398018881W29

CONSTANT VOLTAGE
Incorrect constant voltage
• Constant voltage circuit malfunction
Note
• TP sensor uses constant voltage.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
1
Disconnect TP sensor connector where constant
Yes
Go to Step 13.
voltage circuit inspection failed.
No
Go to next step.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Measure voltage between following TP sensor
connector terminals:
• Constant voltage terminal - GND terminal
Is constant voltage greater than 6.0 V?
2
Is voltage across battery terminals greater than
Yes
Go to next step.
10.5 V?
No
Inspect charging system.
3
Turn ignition switch off.
Yes
Go to next step.
Leave TP sensor connector disconnected.
No
Go to Step 8.
Measure voltage between battery positive
terminal and GND (between PCM and TP
sensor) circuit at appropriate sensor connector.
Is voltage greater than 10.5 V and within 1.0 V
of battery voltage?
4
Note
Yes
Go to Step 7.
• Purpose of this step is to determine if
No
Go to next step.
WDS or equivalent is communicating with
PCM.

Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Attempt to access ECT PID.
Can ECT PID be accessed?
Turn ignition switch off.
Disconnect TP sensor and PCM connectors.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Measure voltage between PCM connector
terminals 2Y and 2AB.
Is voltage greater than 10.5 V?
Leave TP sensor and PCM connectors
disconnected.
Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminals 2Y and 2AB.
Is resistance greater than 10,000 ohms?
Turn ignition switch off.
Leave TP sensor disconnected.
Disconnect PCM connector.
Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminal 2K and constant voltage circuit at
appropriate sensor connector.
Is resistance less than 5.0 ohms?
Note
• Purpose of this step is to determine if
WDS or equivalent is communicating with
PCM.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open circuit between PCM terminal 2Y and
main relay.

Yes

Inspect for constant voltage at suspect sensor
connector again.
Repair constant voltage circuit short to GND.

No
Yes
No

Inspect for constant voltage at suspect sensor
connector again.
Repair open constant voltage circuit.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 11.

Reconnect TP sensor connector.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
Attempt to access ECT PID.
Can ECT PID be accessed?

F223

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
9
Are DTCs present for two or more sensors
Yes
Go to next step.
connected to PCM terminal 2H?
No
Repair open GND circuit to sensor where constant
Sensor connected to PCM terminal 2H:
voltage circuit inspection failed.
• IAT sensor (P0112, P0113)
• FHO2S (P0131, P0132)
• RHO2S (P0138)
• Barometric pressure sensor (P2228, P2229)
• Manifold absolute pressure sensor (P0107,
P0108)
• ECT sensor (P0117, P0118)
• TP sensor (P0122, P0123)
• TR switch (P0707, P0708)
• TFT sensor (P0712, P0713)
10
Turn ignition switch off.
Yes
Reconnect sensor connector.
Disconnect WDS or equivalent from DLC-2.
Go to appropriate DTC test.
Disconnect PCM connector.
No
Repair open GND circuit.
Measure resistance between GND circuit at
appropriate sensor connector and PCM
connector terminal 2H.
Is resistance less than 5.0 ohms?
11
Turn ignition switch off.
Yes
Go to next step.
Disconnect PCM connector.
No
Repair open GND circuit.
Measure resistance between battery negative
terminal and PCM terminals 4X, 2AB, and 2AC.
Is each resistance less than 5.0 ohms?
12
Turn ignition switch off.
Yes
GND circuits are okay.
Measure resistance between GND circuit at
Inspect for constant voltage at suspect sensor
following sensor connector and GND:
connector again.
• IAT sensor (integated in MAF sensor)
No
Inspect for open GND circuit.
• FHO2S
• RHO2S
• Barometric pressure sensor
• Manifold absolute pressure sensor
• ECT sensor
• TP sensor
• TR switch
• TFT sensor
13
Turn ignition switch off.
Yes
Inspect for constant voltage at suspect sensor
Disconnect TP sensor and PCM connectors.
connector again.
Turn ignition switch to ON position.
No
Repair constant voltage circuit shorted to power in
Measure voltage between constant voltage
harness.
circuit at TP sensor connector and battery
negative terminal.
Is voltage less than 0.5 V?
14
Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace PCM.

End Of Sie

F224

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.28 SPARK PLUG CONDITION
28
DESCRIPTION

A6E398018881W30

SPARK PLUG CONDITION
Incorrect spark plug condition
Note
• Inspecting spark plugs condition can determine whether problem is related to a specific cylinder
possibly all cylinders.

Wet/carbon stuck on specific plug:
•
•
•
•

SparkWeak, not visible
Air/fuel mixtureExcessive fuel injection volume
CompressionNo compression, low compression
Faulty spark plug

Grayish white with specific plug:

• Air/fuel mixtureInsufficient fuel injection volume
• Faulty spark plug

Wet/carbon is stuck on all plugs:
•
•
•
•

SparkSpark weak
Air/fuel mixtureToo rich
CompressionLow compression
Clogging in intake/exhaust system

POSSIBLE CAUSE Grayish white with all plugs:
• Air/fuel mixtureToo lean

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Remove all spark plugs.
Inspect spark plug condition.
Is spark plug condition okay?

2
3

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Troubleshooting completed.
No
Specific plug is wet or covered with carbon:
Go to next step.
Specific plug looks grayish white:
Go to Step 7.
All plugs are wet or covered with carbon:
Go to Step 9.
All plugs look grayish white:
Go to Step 15.
Yes
Working up and down inspect all areas related to oil.
Is spark plug wet/covered with carbon by engine
oil?
No
Go to next step.
Inspect spark plug for following:
Yes
Go to next step.
• Cracked insulator
No
Replace spark plug.
• Heat range
• Air gap
• Worn electrode
Is spark plug okay?
Inspect compression pressure at suspected
Yes
Go to next step.
faulty cylinder.
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Is compression pressure correct?
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
Install all spark plugs.
Yes
Go to next step.
Carry out spark test at suspected faulty cylinder.
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Is strong blue spark visible?
(Compare with normal cylinder.)

F225

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
6
Carry out fuel line pressure inspection.
Is fuel line pressure correct?

Inspect spark plug for following.
• Heat range
• Air gap
Is spark plug okay?
Remove suspected fuel injector.
Inspect following:
• Resistance
(See F31 FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION.)
• Fuel injection volume
(See F31 FUEL INJECTOR INSPECTION.)
Are all above items okay?
Is air cleaner element free of restrictions?

Carry out spark test.
Is strong blue spark visible at each cylinder?

Carry out fuel line pressure inspection.
Is fuel line pressure correct?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)

Inspect following PIDs.
• ECT
• O2S11 (When engine can be started)
• MAF
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Are PIDs okay?
Carry out purge control inspection.
(When engine can be started)
(See F233 Purge Control System Inspection.)
Is purge control correct?
Carry out compression inspection.
Is compression correct?

14
15

When engine cannot be started, inspect intakeair system for air leakage.
When engine can be started, carry out intake
manifold vacuum inspection.
Is air sucked in from intake-air system?
Carry out fuel line pressure inspection.
Is fuel line pressure correct?
(See F20 FUEL LINE PRESSURE
INSPECTION)

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect fuel injector for following:
• Open or short in injector
• Leakage
• Injection volume
No
Zero or low:
Inspect fuel pump circuit.
Inspect for fuel pump relief valve open.
Inspect for fuel leakage inside pressure regulator.
Inspect for clogged main fuel line.
High:
Inspect pressure regulator for high pressure cause.
Inspect for clogged fuel return line.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Replace spark plug.
Yes

No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace air cleaner element.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Go to next step.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Inspect for clogging in exhaust system.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Repair or replace malfunctioning part.
Go to next step.

Yes

Inspect following PIDs.
• ECT
• O2S11
• MAF
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
Inspect PCM GND condition.
Zero or low:
Inspect for clogged fuel line.
If okay, replace fuel pump unit.
High:
Replace fuel pump unit.

Inspect for open circuit between suspected fuel injector
connector terminal and PCM connector following
terminals:
• For #1 or #4 cylinder: 1A
• For #2 or #3 cylinder: 1B
Replace fuel injector.

Verify test results.
• If okay, return to diagnostic index to service any additional symptoms.
• If malfunction remains, replace or reprogram PCM.

F226

TROUBLESHOOTING
End Of Sie
INTERMITTENT
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E398018881W31

Vibration Method
1. If malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating, perform the
steps below.

Note
• There are several reasons vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical malfunction. Some of the
things to check for are:
Connectors not fully seated.
Wire harnesses not having full play.
Wires laying across brackets or moving parts.
Wires routed too close to hot parts.
• An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose harness can cause wiring to become pinched
between parts.
• The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wire harnesses pass through the fire wall, body
panels, etc. are the major areas to be checked.
Inspection Method for Switch Connectors or Wires
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition key to ON position (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.
4. Turn switch on manually.
5. Shake each connector or wire harness a bit
vertically and horizontally while monitoring the
PID.
• If PID value is unstable, check for poor
connection.

Y3U103WN3

Inspection Method for Sensor Connectors or Wires
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.
4. Shake each connector or wire harness a bit
vertically and horizontally while monitoring the
PID.
• If PID value is unstable, check for poor
connection.

Y3U103WN4

F227

TROUBLESHOOTING
Inspection Method for Sensors
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.
4. Vibrate the sensor slightly with your finger.
• If PID value is unstable or malfunction occurs, check for poor connection and/or poorly mounted sensor.
Inspection Method for Actuators or Relays
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Prepare the Output State Control for actuators or relays that you are inspecting.
4. Vibrate the actuator or relay with your finger for 3 seconds are Output State Control is activated.
• If variable click sound is heard, check for poor connection and/or poorly mounted actuator or relay.
Note
• Vibrating relays too strongly may result in
open relays.

Y3U103WN5

Water Sprinkling Method
Caution
• Indirectly change the temperature and humidity by spraying water onto the front of the radiator.
• If a vehicle is subject to water leakage, the leakage may damage the control module. When testing
a vehicle with a water leakage problem, special caution must be used.
If malfunction occurs only during high humidity or rainy/snowy weather, perform the following steps.
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2 if you are inspecting sensors or switches.
2. Turn ignition switch to ON position (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for sensor or switch if you are inspecting sensors or switches.
4. If you are inspecting the switch, turn it on manually.
5. Spray water onto the vehicle or run it through a
car wash.
• If PID value is unstable or malfunction occurs,
repair or replace part as necessary.

YMU103WC3

End Of Sie

F228

TROUBLESHOOTING
ENGINE CONTROL SYSTEM OPERATION INSPECTION
Main Relay Operation Inspection
1. Verify that the main relay clicks when the ignition switch is turned to ON position and off.
• If there is no operation sound, inspect the following.
Main relay (See T24 RELAY INSPECTION.)
Harness and connector between ignition switch and main relay terminal A.
Harness and connector between PCM terminal 2X and main relay terminal E.

A6E398018881W32

Intake Manifold Vacuum Inspection
1. Verify air intake hoses are installed properly.
2. Start the engine and run it at idle.
3. Disconnect the vacuum hose between the intake manifold and purge solenoid valve from the intake manifold
side.
4. Connect a vacuum gauge to the intake manifold and measure the intake manifold vacuum.
• If not as specified, inspect the following.
Specification
More than 60 kPa {450 mmHg, 18 inHg}
Note
• Air suction can be located by engine speed change when lubricant is sprayed on the area where suction is
occurring.
Air suction at throttle body, intake manifold and PCV valve installation points
Accelerator cable free play
Fuel injector insulator
Engine compression
(See B9 COMPRESSION INSPECTION.)
Idle Air Control System Inspection
Engine coolant temperature compensation inspection
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Select the following PIDs.
• ECT
• IAT
• RPM
3. Verify that the engine is in cold condition, then start the engine.
4. Verify that the engine speed decreases as the engine warms up.
• If the engine speed does not decrease or decreases slowly, inspect the following.
ECT sensor and related harness
(See F53 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION.)
IAC valve and related harness
(See F13 IDLE AIR CONTROL (IAC) VALVE INSPECTION.)
Load compensation inspection
1. Start the engine and run is at idle.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
3. Verify that P0506, P0507 or P0511 not displayed.
• If P0506, P0507 or P0511 shown, carry out DTC inspection.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
4. Change the duty value of the IAC valve to 100% using the IAC PID.
5. Verify that the idle speed increases.
• If the idle speed does not change, inspect the following.
IAC valve air passage
Open or short circuit between IAC valve connector terminals and PCM connector terminals 4G and 4J
6. Select the following PIDs.
• ACSW
• IAC
• PSP
• RPM
Note
• Excludes temporary idle speed drop just after the loads are turned on.

F229

TROUBLESHOOTING
7. Verify that the engine speed is within the specification under each load condition.
• If not as specified specific load condition, inspect the following.
A/C switch and related harness
(See U47 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION.)
Fan switch and related harness
(See U47 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION.)
PSP switch and related harness
(See F58 POWER STEERING PRESSURE (PSP) SWITCH INSPECTION.)
Engine speed

650750
650750
700800

Engine speed (rpm)*1
LF
MTX
ATX
600700
650750
650750
650750
650750
650750

600700
650750
650750

Refrigerant pressure low*3

700800

650750

700800

Refrigerant pressure high*4

700800

Load condition
No load
E/L operating
P/S operating
A/C operating*2
*1
*2
*3
*4

:
:
:
:

Neutral or P position
A/C switch and fan switch are on.
Refrigerant pressure switch (middle pressure) is off.
Refrigerant pressure switch (middle pressure) is on.

VIS Operation Inspection
1. Start the engine.
2. Inspect the rod operation under the following condition.
Rod operation
Engine speed
Shutter valve actuator

•
(1)
(2)
(3)

Approx. 4,400 rpm
Below
Above
Operate
Not operate

If the rod operation is not as specified, inspect as follows.
Stop the engine.
Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
Verify that DTC P0661 or P0662 is not displayed.
• If DTC P0661 or P0662 is shown, carry out DTC inspection.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
(4) Turn ignition switch to ON.
(5) Turn the VIS control solenoid valve from on to off using the IVC PID and verify that operation sound of the
solenoid valve is heard.
• If the operation sound is heard, inspect the following.
Vacuum hose and vacuum chamber for looseness or damage
Shutter valve actuator
(See F14 VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS) SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR INSPECTION
(L3).)
Shutter valve stuck open or close
• If the operation sound is not heard, inspect the following.
VIS control solenoid valve
(See F14 VARIABLE INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM (VIS) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION
(L3).)

F230

TROUBLESHOOTING
Variable Tumble Control System (VTCS) Operation Inspection
1. Connect the WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Access ECT PID.
3. Verify that ECT PID is between 63°°C {145°° F} and 67°°C {152°° F}.
4. Start the engine.
5. Inspect rod operation under the following condition.
Rod operation
Engine speed
Shutter valve actuator

3,750 rpm
Below
Above
Operate
Not operate

• If the rod operation is not specified, inspect as follows.
(1) Verify that DTC No. P2009 or P2010 is not displayed.
• If DTC No. P2009 or P2010 are shown, carry out DTC inspection.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
(2) Turn ignition switch to ON.
(3) Turn the VTCS solenoid valve from on to off using the IMRC PID and verify that operation sound of the
solenoid valve is heard.
• If the operation sound is heard, inspect the following.
Vacuum hose and vacuum chamber for looseness or damage
Shutter valve actuator
(See F15 VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL SYSTEM (VTCS) SHUTTER VALVE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION.)
Shutter valve stuck open or close
• If the operation sound is not heard, inspect the following.
VIS control solenoid valve
(See F15 VARIABLE TUMBLE CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION.)
Fuel Injector Operation Inspection
STEP
INSPECTION
1
While cranking engine, inspect for fuel injector
operation sound at each cylinder using a
soundscope.
Is operation sound heard?
2

Carry out main relay operation inspection.
Is main relay operation normal?

Change fuel injector connector of not operating
fuel injector and operating fuel injector.
Is operation sound heard?
Are wiring harness and connectors of not
operation fuel injector okay? (Open or short)

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Fuel injector operation is okay.
No
All cylinders no heard:
Go to next step.
Some cylinders no heard:
Go to Step 3.
Yes
Inspect following:
• Fuel injector power system related wiring harness
and connectors
• PCM connectors
• Fuel injector GND and related wiring harness and
connectors
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.
Yes
Go to next step.
No
Replace fuel injector.
Yes
No

Inspect PCM terminal voltage of fuel injector signal.
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts.

Fuel Cut Control System Inspection
1. Warm up engine and let it idle.
2. Turn off the electrical loads and A/C switch.
3. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
4. Select RPM and FUELPW1 PIDs.
5. Monitor both PIDs while performing the following steps.
(1) Depress the accelerator pedal and increase the engine speed to 4,000 rpm.
(2) Release the accelerator pedal (brake pedal is not depressed) and verify that the fuel injector duration time
is 0 msec., and 25 msec. when the engine speed drops below 1,200 rpm.
• If not as specified, inspect the following.
ECT sensor and related harness
(See F53 ENGINE COOLANT TEMPERATURE (ECT) SENSOR INSPECTION.)
Neutral/clutch switch and related harness (MTX)
(See F59 CLUTCH SWITCH INSPECTION.)
TR switch and related harness (ATX)
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION.)

F231

TROUBLESHOOTING
Fuel Pump Operation Inspection
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Remove the fuel-filler cap.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
4. Turn the fuel pump relay from off to on using the FP PID and inspect if the operation sound is heard.
• If no operation sounds is heard, proceed to next step.
5. Measure the voltage at harness side fuel pump connector terminal B.
Specification
B+ (Ignition switch is on)
• If the voltage is as specified, inspect the following.
Fuel pump continuity
Fuel pump GND
Wiring harness between fuel pump relay and PCM terminal 4P (without immobilizer system), 4Q (with
immobilizer system)
• If not as specified, inspect the following.
Fuel pump relay (See T24 RELAY INSPECTION.)
Wiring harness and connector (Main relay-fuel pump relay-fuel pump)
Fuel Pump Control System Inspection
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
3. Select FP PID.
4. Turn the fuel pump relay from off to on and inspect if the operation sound of the fuel pump relay is heard.
• If no operation sound is heard, inspect the fuel pump relay.
• If the fuel pump relay is normal, inspect the following.
Wiring harnesses and connectors (Main relay-fuel pump relay-PCM)
Spark Test
1. Remove the fuel pump relay.
2. Verify that each high-tension lead and connector is connected properly.
3. Inspect the ignition system in the following procedure.
Warning
• High voltage in the ignition system can cause strong electrical shock which can result in serious
injury. Avoid direct contact to the vehicle body during the following spark test.
STEP
1

2
3
4

5
6

INSPECTION
RESULTS
ACTION
Note
Yes
Ignition system is okay.
• No.1 and No.4 cylinders and No.2 and
No
Some cylinders do not spark:
No.3 cylinders are ignited simultaneously.
Go to next step.
All cylinders do not spark:
Disconnect high-tension lead from spark plugs.
Go to Step 5.
Remove spark plugs.
Reconnect spark plugs to high-tension lead.
Ground spark plugs to engine.
Is strong blue spark visible at each cylinder while
cranking?
Inspect spark plugs for damage, wear, carbon
Yes
Go to next step.
deposits and proper plug gap.
No
Replace spark plugs, then go to Step 1.
Are spark plugs okay?
Inspect high-tension leads for insulation
Yes
Go to next step.
damage, looseness, shorting or other damage.
No
Replace high-tension leads, then go to Step 1.
Are high-tension leads okay?
Inspect following wiring harnesses for open or
Yes
Inspect and replace ignition coil.
short:
See G9 IGNITION COIL INSPECTION.
• Ignition coil terminal C-PCM terminal 1A
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts, then go to Step
• Ignition coil terminal A-PCM terminal 1B
1.
Are wiring harnesses okay?
Measure voltage at terminal B in ignition coil.
Yes
Go to next step.
Is voltage reading B+?
No
Inspect power supply circuit of ignition coil.
Does PCM connector or ignition coil connector
Yes
Repair or replace connector, then go to Step 1.
have poor connection?
No
Go to next step.

F232

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
7
Are following item okay?
• CKP sensor and crankshaft pulley
• PCM terminal 1A/1B voltage

Specification
Approx. 1.5 V

RESULTS
ACTION
Yes
Inspect for open or short in wiring harness and
connector of CKP sensor.
No
Repair or replace malfunctioning parts, then go to Step
1.

EGR Control System Inspection
1. Verify that EGR valve operation (initial operation) sound is heard when the ignition switch is turned to ON
position.
• If the operation sound is not heard, connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2 and verify that the DTC P0403
is shown. Carry out DTC inspection. (See F67 DTC TABLE.)
2. Start the engine and run it at idle.
3. Increase the step value of EGR valve from 0 to 40 using SEGRP PID.
4. Operate the EGR valve and inspect if the engine speed becomes unstable or the engine stalls.
• If the engine speed will not change, proceed to following.
(1) Stop the engine.
(2) Remove the EGR valve.
(3) Connect the EGR valve connector.
(4) Turn the ignition switch to ON.
(5) Increase the step value of EGR valve from 0 to 40 using SEGRP PID.
(6) Inspect the EGR operation.
• If the EGR valve is operated, clean the EGR valve and reinspect from Step 2.
• If the EGR valve will not operate, replace the EGR valve and reinspect from Step 2.
5. Warm up the engine to normal operating temperature.
6. Select the following PIDs.
• ECT
• RPM
• SEGRP
• TP
• VSS
7. Let the vehicle idle and verify that the SEGRP value is 0.
8. Put the vehicle in drive.
9. Depress the accelerator pedal and verify that the SEGRP value is increased.
• If the SEGRP value will not increase, inspect the VSS, TP and ECT PIDs. (See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
10. Stop the vehicle and verify that the SEGRP value is returned 0.
Purge Control System Inspection
1. Start the engine.
2. Disconnect the vacuum hose between the purge solenoid valve and the charcoal canister.
3. Put a finger to the purge solenoid valve and verify that there is no vacuum applied when the engine is cold.
• If there is a vacuum, inspect the following.
Wiring harness and connectors (Purge solenoid valve-PCM terminal 4U)
Purge solenoid valve
4. Warm up the engine to the normal operating temperature.
5. Stop the engine.
6. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2 and verify that the DTC P0443 is shown. Carry out DTC inspection.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
8. Select ECT PID.
9. Verify that the engine coolant temperature is above 60°°C {140°°F}.
• If WDS or equivalent indicates below 60°° C {140°°F}, carry out the ECT sensor inspection.
10. Select EVAPCP PID.
11. Increase the duty value of the purge solenoid valve to 50% and inspect if the operation sound of the valve is
heard.
• If the operation sound is heard, inspect for the loose or damaged vacuum hose. (Intake manifold-purge
solenoid valve-charcoal canister)
• If the operation sound is not heard, carry out the purge solenoid valve inspection.

F233

TROUBLESHOOTING
A/C Cut-off Control System Inspection
1. Start the engine.
2. Turn the A/C switch and fan switch on.
3. Verify that the A/C compressor magnetic clutch actuates.
• If it does not actuate, go to symptom troubleshooting No.23 A/C does not work sufficiently.
4. Fully open the throttle valve and verify that the A/C compressor magnetic clutch does not actuate for 25
seconds.
• If it actuates, inspect as follows.
(1) Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
(2) Turn the A/C switch off.
(3) Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
(4) Select ACCS PID.
(5) Turn the A/C relay from off to on and inspect if the operation sound of the relay is heard.
• If the operation sound is heard, inspect TP PID.
• If the operation sound is not heard, inspect following.
A/C relay
Open or short to GND circuit in wiring harness and connectors (Ignition switch-A/C relay-PCM
terminal 4O)
A/C related parts
Cooling Fan Control System Inspection
L8, LF (General area) engine model
Cooling fan system operation
Engine condition
ECT below 100°C
{212°F}
ECT above 100°C
{212°F} (until below
97°C {207°F})
ECT above 108°C
{228°F} (until below
105°C {230°F})
A/C and fan switches
are on.
ECT sensor
malfunction

Cooling fan
relay No.1

Cooling fan
relay No.2

OFF

Cooling fan relay No.1
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Verify that ECT PID is below cooling fan operating temperature.
3. Verify that A/C switch and fan switch are off.
4. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
5. Verify that the cooling fan is not operating.
• If the cooling fan No.1 is operating:
(1) Select FAN3 PID.
(2) Send OFF and verify the cooling fan is off.
• If the cooling fan is on, inspect the following.
Cooling fan relay stuck in closed position
Short to GND circuit between cooling fan relay and PCM terminal 4L
Short to power in circuit at cooling fan relay
DTC for ECT sensor (P0117, P0118)
• If the cooling fan is off, inspect the following.
Short to GND circuit between refrigerant pressure switch and PCM terminal 1AC
DTC for ECT sensor (P0117, P0118)
6. Start the engine.
7. Verify that the cooling fan is operating when engine is hot.
• If the cooling fan does not operate, perform the following.
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Select FAN3 PID.
3. Operate cooling fan by sending ON command.

F234

TROUBLESHOOTING
4. Inspect if the operation sound is heard from the cooling fan relay.
• If the operation sound is heard, inspect the wiring harness, connectors and cooling fan motor.
• If the operation sound is not heard, inspect cooling fan relay and open circuit wiring harness and
connectors.
8. Turn the A/C switch and fan switch on.
9. Verify that cooling fan is operating.
• If fan does not operate, inspect A/C system.
Cooling fan relay No.2
1. Verify that A/C switch and fan switch are off.
2. Start the engine and let it idle.
3. Verify that the cooling fan No.2 is not operating.
• If condenser fan is operating, inspect for the following.
Cooling fan relay No.2 is stuck in closed position.
Short to power in circuit between condenser fan relay and condenser fan
Short to GND in circuit between refrigerant pressure switch and PCM terminal 1AC
Short to GND circuit between condenser fan relay and PCM terminal 4B
4. Turn the A/C switch and fan switch on.
5. Verify that the cooling fan No.2 is operating and operation sound of A/C compressor magnetic clutch is heard.
6. Turn the A/C switch and fan switch off.
• If the cooling fan No.2 does not operate but operation sound of A/C compressor magnetic clutch is heard,
inspect for the following.
Open circuit between ignition switch and cooling fan relay No.2
Open circuit between battery and cooling fan relay No.2
Open circuit between cooling fan relay No.2 and PCM terminal 4B
Open circuit between cooling fan relay No.2 and cooling fan motor No.2 or fan motor GND
Cooling fan relay No.2 is stuck open.
Cooling fan motor No.2
• If both cooling fan No.2 and A/C compressor do not operate, inspect the following.
TP PID
A/C system
L3 engine models
Cooling fan system operation (at idle)
Engine condition
Engine coolant temperature below
100°C {212°F}
Engine coolant temperature above
100°C {212°F} (until below 97°C
{208°F})
Engine coolant temperature above
108°C {233°F} (until below 105°C
{208°F})
Refrigerant pressure
switch (middle
A/C and fan pressure) is off.
switches are
Refrigerant pressure
on.
switch (middle
pressure) is on.
ECT sensor malfunction

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Cooling fan
relay No.1

Cooling fan
relay No.2

Cooling fan
relay No.3

Cooling fan
relay No.4

Cooling fan
motor No.1

Cooling fan
motor No.2

OFF

Low speed

High speed

OFF

Low speed

High speed

OFF

High speed

Low speed

High speed

F235

TROUBLESHOOTING

6.
7.

8.
9.

10.
11.

12.

• If the cooling fan is not operating and condenser fan is operating, inspect for following:
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4F and transfer relay
Transfer relay stuck ON position
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4B and cooling fan relay No.3
Condenser fan relay stuck ON
Start the engine.
Verify that the cooling fan and condenser fan are operating low speed when ECT PID is above 100°°C {212°°F}.
• If the cooling fans does not operate, perform the following:
1. Select FAN3 PID.
2. Operate cooling fan relay No.2 by sending ON command.
3. Inspect the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.2.
If the operation sound is heard, inspect wiring harnesses, connectors, transfer relay and cooling
and condenser fan motor.
If the operation sound is not heard, inspect cooling fan relay No.2 and open circuit between PCM
terminal 4L and cooling fan relay No.2 wiring harness and connectors.
• Inspect the cooling fan is operating high speed, inspect the following:
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4F and cooling fan relay No.4/cooling fan relay No.1.
Cooling fan relay stuck closed position
• If the condenser fan is operating high speed, inspect the following:
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4F and cooling fan relay No.4/cooling fan relay No.1
cooling fan relay No.1 stuck ON position
Turn A/C switch and fan switch are on.
Verify that the ACCS PID is ON.
• If the ACCS PID is not ON, inspect for following:
A/C switch
Fan switch
Refrigerant pressure switch
Open circuit PCM 1AC related harnesses and connectors
Access the COLP PID.
Verify that the cooling fan is operating high speed an condenser fan is operating low speed, while the COLP
PID is ON.
• If the cooling fan and condenser fan are operating low speed, perform the following:
1. Select FAN1 PID.
2. Operate cooling fan relay No.4 and transfer relay by sending ON command.
3. Inspect the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.4 and cooling fan relay No.1.
If the operation sound is not heard from cooling fan relay No.4, inspect cooling fan relay No.4 and
open circuit between PCM 4F and cooling fan relay No.4 wiring harnesses and connectors.
If the operation sound is not heard from cooling fan relay No.1, inspect cooling fan relay No.1 and
between PCM terminal 4F and cooling fan relay No.1 wiring harnesses and connector.
If the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.4 and cooling fan relay No.1, inspect
wiring harnesses and connectors.
• If the cooling fan motor No.2 does not operate, perform the following:
Cooling fan motor No.2 and related wiring harnesses and connectors
Verify that the cooling fan motor No.1 is operating low speed and the cooling fan motor No.1 is operating high
speed, while the COLP PID is OFF.
• If the cooling fan motor No.1 and cooling fan motor No.2 are operating low seed, perform the following:
1. Select FAN1 PID.
2. Operate cooling fan relay 3 by sending ON command.
3. Inspect the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.3.
If the operation sound is heard, inspect wiring harnesses and connectors.
If the operation sound is not heard, inspect coooling fan relay No.3 and open circuit wiring
harnesses and connectors between PCM terminal 4B and coooling fan relay No.3.

F236

TROUBLESHOOTING
L8, LF (Intensely hot area) engine models
Cooling fan system operation (at idle)
Engine condition
Engine coolant temperature below
100°C {212°F}
Engine coolant temperature above
100°C {212°F} (until below 97°C
{208°F})
Engine coolant temperature above
108°C {233°F} (until below 105°C
{208°F})
Refrigerant pressure
switch (middle
A/C and fan pressure) is off.
switches are
Refrigerant pressure
on.
switch (middle
pressure) is on.
ECT sensor malfunction

1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

6.
7.

8.
9.

10.
11.

Cooling fan
relay No.2

Cooling fan
relay No.4

Cooling fan
relay No.1

Cooling fan
relay No.3

Cooling fan
motor No.1

Cooling fan
motor No.2

OFF

Low speed

OFF

High speed

OFF

Low speed

OFF

High speed

Low speed

High speed

Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
Verify that ECT PID is below cooling fan operating temperature.
Verify that the A/C switch and fan switch are off.
Start the engine and let it at idle.
Verify that the cooling fans fan are not operating.
• If the cooling fan is operating low speed, inspect for following:
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4L and cooling fan relay No.2
Cooling fan relay No.2 stuck in closed position
• If the cooling fans are operating high speed, inspect for following:
DTC for ECT sensor (P0117, P0118)
• If the cooling fan motor No.1 is not operating and cooling fan motor No.2 is operating, inspect for following:
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4F and cooling fan relay No.1
Cooling fan relay No.1 stuck ON
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4B and cooling fan relay No.3
Cooling fan relay No.3 stuck ON
Start the engine.
Verify that the cooling fans are operating low speed when ECT PID is above 100°° C {212°°F}.
• If the cooling fan motor No.1 does not operate, perform the following:
1. Select FAN3 PID.
2. Operate cooling fan relay No.2 by sending ON command.
3. Inspect the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.2.
If the operation sound is heard, inspect wiring harnesses, connectors and cooling fan motor No.1.
If the operation sound is not heard, inspect cooling fan relay No.2 and open circuit between PCM
terminal 4L and cooling fan relay No.2 wiring harness and connectors.
• Inspect the cooling fan is operating high speed, inspect the following:
Short to GND circuit between PCM terminal 4F and cooling fan relay No.1/cooling fan relay No.4.
Turn A/C switch and fan switch are on.
Verify that the ACCS PID is ON.
• If the ACCS PID is not ON, inspect for following:
A/C switch
Fan switch
Refrigerant pressure switch
Open circuit PCM 1AC related harnesses and connectors
Access the COLP PID.
Verify that the cooling fan motor No.1 is operating high speed and cooling fan motor No.2 is operating low
speed, while the COLP PID is ON.
• If the cooling fan motor No.1 does not operate high speed, perform the following:
1. Select FAN1 PID.
2. Operate cooling fan relay No.1 and cooling fan relay No.4 by sending ON command.

F237

TROUBLESHOOTING
3. Inspect the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.1 and cooling fan relay No.4.
If the operation sound is not heard from cooling fan relay No.4, inspect cooling fan relay No.4 and
open circuit between PCM 4F and cooling fan relay No.4 wiring harnesses and connectors.
If the operation sound is not heard from cooling fan relay No.1, inspect cooling fan relay No.1 and
between PCM terminal 4F and cooling fan relay No.1 wiring harnesses and connector.
If the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.1 and cooling fan relay No.4, inspect
wiring harnesses and connectors.
• If the cooling fan motor No.2 does not operate, perform the following:
Inspect cooling fan motor No.2 and related wiring harnesses and connectors
• If the cooling fan motor No.2 does not operate, perform the following:
1. Select FAN2 PID.
2. Operate cooling fan relay No.3 by sending ON command.
3. Inspect the operation sound is heard from cooling fan relay No.3.
If the operation sound is heard, inspect wiring harnesses and connectors.
If the operation sound is not heard, inspect cooling fan relay No.3 and open circuit wiring harnesses
and connectors between PCM terminal 4B and cooling fan relay No.3.
Variable Air Duct (VAD) Control System Operation Inspection (L3 Engine Models)
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Access ECT, TP and RPM PIDs.
3. Start the engine.
4. Verify ECT PID is 70°°C {158°°F} or over.
5. Inspect shutter valve operation following condition.
VAD shutter valve operation
Engine speed
Shutter valve

5,800 rpm with TP PID 50% or over
Below
Above
Close
Open

• If the shutter valve operation is not specified, inspect as follows.
(1) Verify that DTC P1410 is not displayed.
• If DTC P1410 is shown, carry out DTC inspection.
(See F67 DTC TABLE.)
(2) Turn ignition switch to ON.
(3) Turn the VAD control solenoid valve from on to off using the VAD PID and verify that operation sound of the
solenoid valve is heard.
• If the operation sound is heard, inspect the following.
Vacuum hose looseness or damage
Vacuum chamber crack or damage
Shutter valve actuator.
(See F12 VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) SHUTTER VALVE INSPECTION (L3).)
• Shutter valve stuck open or close
If the operation sound is not heard, inspect following.
VAD control solenoid valve.
(See F13 VARIABLE AIR DUCT (VAD) CONTROL SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION (L3).)

F238

TROUBLESHOOTING
Variable Valve Timing Control System Operation Inspection
When idling cannot be continued
1. Remove the oil control valve (OCV) and verify that the spool valve is at maximum retard position.
2. If the spool valve is stuck in advance direction, replace the oil control valve (OCV).
3. Connect the oil control valve (OCV).
4. Turn the ignition switch on.
5. Verify that the spool valve is at maximum retard position.
6. If the spool valve is stuck in advance direction, inspect for the following.
• Short circuit in harnesses or connectors between the oil control valve (OCV) and the PCM.
7. Inspect the variable valve timing actuator.
When idling can be continued
1. Warn up the engine.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
3. Idle the engine.
4. Select VT DUTY1 PID.
5. Set the oil control valve (OCV) duty valve to 100% and verify that the engine idles roughly or stalls.
• If as specified, inspect the timing belt component (valve timing deviation).
• If not as specified, go to next step.
6. Remove the oil control valve (OCV) and connect the oil control valve (OCV) connector to the oil control valve
(OCV).
7. Turn ignition switch to ON.
8. Select VT DUTY1 PID.
9. Set the oil control valve (OCV) duty value to 100% and verify that the spool valve operates in the advance
direction.
10. If not as specified, inspect the following.
• Oil control valve (OCV) operation.
• Harnesses and connectors between the oil control valve (OCV) and the PCM for open or short.
11. Inspect the following hydraulic passages for clogging and/or leakage.
• Oil pressure switchoil control valve (OCV)
• Oil control valve (OCV)camshaft
• Camshaft internal passage
12. If they are okay, replace the intake camshaft pulley (with a built-in variable valve timing actuator).

End Of Sie

F239

ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

LOCATION INDEX ................................................ G-2
LOCATION INDEX............................................. G-2
CHARGING SYSTEM ............................................ G-3
BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .............. G-3
BATTERY INSPECTION..................................... G-4
BATTERY RECHARGING .................................. G-5
GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........ G-6
GENERATOR INSPECTION .............................. G-7
IGNITION SYSTEM ............................................... G-8
IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...... G-8
IGNITION COIL INSPECTION............................ G-9
SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...... G-10
SPARK PLUG INSPECTION ............................ G-11
HIGH-TENSION LEAD
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........................... G-11
STARTING SYSTEM ........................................... G-12
STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............ G-12
STARTER INSPECTION .................................. G-13

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
LOCATION INDEX

A6E470001002W01

AME4700W001
.

Battery
(See G3 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See G4 BATTERY INSPECTION)
(See G5 BATTERY RECHARGING)
Generator
(See G6 GENERATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See G7 GENERATOR INSPECTION)
Starter
(See G12 STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See G13 STARTER INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

4
5

Ignition coil
(See G9 IGNITION COIL INSPECTION)
Spark plug
(See G10 SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See G11 SPARK PLUG INSPECTION)
High-tension lead
(See G11 HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

CHARGING SYSTEM

CHARGING SYSTEM
BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
1
2
3
4
5

A6E471018520W01

Negative battery cable
Battery cable
Battery clamp
Battery
Battery tray

A6E4710W002

End Of Sie

CHARGING SYSTEM
BATTERY INSPECTION
Battery
1. Inspect the battery in the following procedure.
Step

Inspection

Result
More than
12.4 V
Less than
12.4 V
More than
12.4 V
Less than
12.4 V

Measure open circuit
voltage of battery.

Quick charge for 30 min.
and recheck voltage.

Apply load current (see load
Yes
test chart) to battery using a
battery load tester and
record battery voltage after
No
15 s. Is voltage more than
specification?

A6E471018520W02

Action
Go to
Step 3.
Go to
next step.
Go to
next step.
Replace
battery.
Battery is
okay.
Replace
battery.

Test load chart
Battery
46B24DLS
50D20L
75D26L
80D26L

Load (A)
135
150
195
195

Battery positive voltage with load
Approximate battery
temperature
21 °C {70 °F}
16 °C {61 °F}
10 °C {50 °F}
4 °C {39 °F}
1 °C {30 °F}
7 °C {19 °F}
12 °C {10 °F}
18 °C {0 °F}

Min. voltage (V)
9.6
9.5
9.4
9.3
9.1
8.9
8.7
8.5

Back-up Current
1. Verify that the engine switch is at OFF and that the key has been removed.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Measure the back-up current between the negative battery terminal and the negative battery cable.
• If the current exceeds the maximum, remove the fuses in the main fuse block and the fuse block one by
one while measuring the back-up current.
Inspect and repair harnesses and connectors of the fuse at which the current decreases.
Back-up current
20 mA max.
Caution
• Operating electrical loads while measuring the back-up current can damage the circuit tester.

End Of Sie

CHARGING SYSTEM
BATTERY RECHARGING

A6E471018520W03

Warning
• Keep any flammable away from the battery, otherwise evaporated gas of the battery fluid may
catch fire, and cause serious injury or death.
Caution
• When removing the battery, disconnect the negative battery cable first and install it last to prevent
damage to electrical components or the battery.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Place a battery in a pan of water to prevent it from overheating.
The water level should come up about halfway on the battery.
Remove the battery plugs while charging the battery.
Keep water off the top of the battery.

Caution
• To prevent damage to electrical components or the battery, turn all accessories off and stop the
engine before performing maintenance or recharging the battery.
5. Connect a battery charger to the battery.
6. Adjust the charging current as follows.
Battery type
(5-hour rate)
46B24LS (36)
50D20L (40)
75D26L (52)
80D26L (55)

Slow charge (A)
3.54.5
4.05.0
5.06.0
5.56.5

Quick charge
(A / 30 min.)
25
25
35
35

AME4710W001

End Of Sie

CHARGING SYSTEM
GENERATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E471018300W01

Warning
• When the battery cables are connected, touching the vehicle body with generator terminal B will
generate sparks. This can cause personal injury, fire, and damage to the electrical components.
Always disconnect the battery negative cables before performing the following operation.
Caution
• The generator can be damaged by the heat from the exhaust manifold. Make sure the generator
duct and the generator heat insulator are installed securely.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the under cover.
Remove the drive belt. (See B3 DRIVE BELT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

AME4710W002

1
2
3

Generator duct
B terminal cable
Generator connector

Generator Removal Note
1. Remove the generator from above.

End Of Sie

4
5

Generator heat insulator
Generator
(See G6 Generator Removal Note)

CHARGING SYSTEM
GENERATOR INSPECTION

A6E471018300W02

Generator Warning Light
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
• Charge if necessary.
2. Verify that the drive belt deflection/tension is correct. (See B3 DRIVE BELT INSPECTION.)
• If not as specified, replace the drive belt.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON and verify that the generator warning light illuminates.
• If not as specified, inspect the generator warning light.
4. Verify that the generator warning light turns off after the engine is started.
• If not specifed, inspect if any of the DTCs are displayed: P0112, P0113, P2502, P2503, P2504.

Generator
Voltage
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
2. Verify that the drive belt deflection/tension is correct. (See B3 DRIVE BELT INSPECTION.)
• If not as specified, replace the drive belt.
3. Turn off all electrical loads.
4. Turn the engine switch to start the engine and verify that the generator rotates smoothly without any noise
while the engine is running.
5. Measure the voltage at the terminals shown in the table.
• If not as specified, repair or replace the
generator as necessary.
Standard voltage
B
P

B+
Approx. 1

Idle (V)
[20 °C {68 °F}]
1315
Approx. 38

Approx. 0

Terminal Ignition switch ON (V)

: Turn the following electrical loads on and verify that
the voltage reading increases.
Headlights
Blower motor
Rear window defroster

A6E4710W003

Current
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
• If the battery is not fully charged, charge the battery.
2. Verify that the drive belt deflection/tension is correct. (See B3 DRIVE BELT INSPECTION.)
• If not as specified, replace the drive belt.
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
4. Connect an ammeter, capable of reading 120 A or above, between generator terminal B and the wiring
harness.
5. Connect the negative battery cable.
6. Turn off all electrical loards.
7. Start the engine and increase the engine speed to 2,0002,500 rpm.
8. Turn the following electrical loads on and verify that the current reading increases.
• Headlights
• Blower motor
• Rear window defroster
If generator terminal B current will not increase, repair or replace the generator as necessary.
Note
• Current required for generating power varies with electrical loads applied.

CHARGING SYSTEM , IGNITION SYSTEM
Standard current (Reference)
Measuring conditions
Room temperature: 20 °C {68 ° F}
Voltage: 13.5 V
Engine hot
Engine
speed
(rpm)
1,000
2,000

Terminal B current (A)
L8

0*80
0*90

: Must not be 0 A

End Of Sie

IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E471218110W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the plug hole plate.

A6E4712W012

1
2

Connect
High-tension lead (See G11 HIGH-TENSION
LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )

End Of Sie

Ignition coil

IGNITION SYSTEM
IGNITION COIL INSPECTION
Primary Coil Winding
1. Remove the ignition coil.
2. Measure the resistance between the following lead holes using an ohmmeter.
• A and B, B and C
If not specified, replace the ignition coil.
Specification
0.490.57 ohms [20°°C {68°°F}]

A6E4712W003

Secondary Coil Winding
1. Remove the ignition coil.
• 1 and 4
• 2 and 3
If not specified, replace the ignition coil.
Specification
9.511.1kilohms

A6E4712W001

IGNITION SYSTEM
Insulation Resistance of Case
1. Disconnect the high-tension lead.
2. Disconnect the ignition coil connector.
3. Measure the insulation resistance between the following terminals and ignition coil case using an ohmmeter.
• Terminal B and ignition coil case.
If not specified, replace the ignition coil.
Specification
Above 10 Megohm
4.

A6E4712W002

End Of Sie

SPARK PLUG REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the plug hoie plate.
• Lift off and remove the plug hole plate from
the installation areas (rubber and clips) as
shown in the figure.

3. Disconnect the high-tension lead.
4. Remove the spark plugs using the plug-wrench.
5. Install the spark plugs using a plug-wrench.

A6E471218110W03

A6E4712W201

Tightening torque:
1024 N·m {1.12.4kgf·m, 817ft·lbf}

A6E4712W202

G10

IGNITION SYSTEM
6. Install the plug hole plate.
Caution
• If the plug hole plate interferes with metal
clips and the accelerator cable, the cable
could be damaged, so when installing
follow the procedure below.
(1) To position the plug hole plate, grasp the
rubber 1 and 2, as shown in the figure, with
your hands and press them in.
(2) Route the accelerator cable more towards the
center of the plug hole plate underside to
avoid the rib area as shown in the figure.
(3) Grasp rubber 3 with your hand and press it in.
(4) Grasp clips 4 and 5 with your hands and
press them in.
7. Connect the negative battery cable.

End Of Sie

SPARK PLUG INSPECTION

A6E4712W203

A6E4712W204

A6E471218110W04

Caution
• Do not inspect, adjust, or clean the plug gap with a wire brush. Doing so can damage the platinum
tip.
• When cleaning a spark plug with a plug clear, clean the plug quickly for less than 20 seconds with
air pressure below 58.8 kpa {6.0 kgf/cm, 8.5 psi}. Verify that there is no carbon, sand, etc. in the
spark plug after cleaning.

End Of Sie

HIGH-TENSION LEAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E471218110W05

Caution
• The high-tension leads must be reinstalled to their original position.Incorrect installation can
damage the leads and cause power loss, and negatively affect the electronic components.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the plug hole plate.
Remove the high-tension lead.
Install the high-tension lead.

End Of Sie

G11

STARTING SYSTEM

STARTING SYSTEM
STARTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E471418400W01

Warning
• When the battery cables are connected, touching the vehicle body with starter terminal B will
generate sparks. This can cause personal injury, fire, and damage to the electrical components.
Always disconnect the battery negative cables before performing the following operation.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the under cover.
Remove the air cleaner assembly.(See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the clutch release cylinger.(MTX) (See H9 CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

AME4714W001

1
2

Terminal B wire
Terminal S wire

End Of Sie

G12

Starter

STARTING SYSTEM
STARTER INSPECTION
On-vehicle Inspection
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
2. Crank the engine and verify that the starter rotates smoothly without any noise.
• If not, inspect the following.
Remove the starter and inspect the magnetic switch and the starter.
Inspect the related wiring harness and the ignition switch.

A6E471418400W02

No Load Test
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
2. Connect the starter, battery, voltmeter and
ammeter as shown.
3. Operate the starter and verify that it rotates
smoothly.
4. Measure the voltage and current while the starter
is operating.
• If not as specified, replace the starter.
Specification
Voltage (V)
11

Current (A)
Less than 90

AME4714W002

End Of Sie

G13

CLUTCH

LOCATION INDEX .................................................H-2
CLUTCH LOCATION INDEX ...............................H-2
GENERAL PROCEDURES ....................................H-3
PRECAUTION (CLUTCH)....................................H-3
CLUTCH FLUID ......................................................H-4
CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION ............................H-4
CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT .......................H-4
CLUTCH PEDAL ....................................................H-5
CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT.........................H-5
CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.....H-6
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER ..............................H-7
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.................................................H-7
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY.......................................................H-8
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER ............................H-9
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.................................................H-9
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY.....................................................H-10
CLUTCH UNIT ......................................................H-11
CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ......H-11
CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION........................H-13
CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION ............................H-14
CLUTCH RELEASE COLLAR INSPECTION.....H-14
FLYWHEEL ..........................................................H-15
FLYWHEEL INSPECTION.................................H-15

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
CLUTCH LOCATION INDEX

A6E490001036W01

A6E4900W001
.

Clutch pedal
(See H5 CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT)
(See H6 CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Clutch master cylinder
(See H7 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See H8 CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)

4
5

Clutch release cylinder
(See H9 CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See H10 CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
Clutch unit
(See H11 CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Clutch cover
(See H13 CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX, GENERAL PROCEDURES
6
7
8
9

Clutch disc
(See H14 CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION)
Clutch release collar
(See H14 CLUTCH RELEASE COLLAR
INSPECTION)
Flywheel
(See H15 FLYWHEEL INSPECTION)
Clutch fluid
(See H4 CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION)
(See H4 CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT)

End Of Sie

GENERAL PROCEDURES
PRECAUTION (CLUTCH)
Clutch Pipe Removal/Installation

H
A6E491016003W01

Note
• A common reservoir is used for the clutch and brake system fluid.
1. If clutch pipes have been disconnected any time during the procedure, add clutch fluid (brake fluid), bleed the
air, and inspect for leakage after the procedure has been completed.
2. Remove the clutch pipe using the SST (49 0259 770B). Install the clutch pipe using torque wrench SST
combination. (See GI16 TORQUE FORMULAS.)

End Of Sie

CLUTCH FLUID

CLUTCH FLUID
CLUTCH FLUID INSPECTION

A6E491216010W01

Note
• A common reservoir is used for the clutch and brake system fluid.
• The fluid in the reservoir must be maintained between the MIN/MAX level during replacement.

End Of Sie

CLUTCH FLUID REPLACEMENT

A6E491216010W02

Caution
• Be careful not to spill clutch fluid on a painted surface. If this should happen, wash it off
immediately.
Note
• Do not mix different brands of clutch fluid.
• Do not reuse the clutch fluid that was drained out.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the under cover.
Draw the fluid from the reservoir with a suction pump.
Remove the bleeder cap from the clutch release cylinder and attach a vinyl hose to the bleeder plug.
Place the other end of the vinyl hose into a container.
Slowly pump the clutch pedal several times.
With the clutch pedal depressed, loosen the bleeder screw using the SST to let fluid escape.
Tighten the bleeder screw using the SST to stop
the fluid.
8. Repeat Steps 4 and 5 until only clean fluid is
seen.
9. Tighten the bleeder screw.
Tightening torque
5.98.8 N·m {6090 kgf·cm, 5378 in·lbf}
10. Add fluid to the MAX mark.
11. Install the under cover.
12. Verify the correct clutch operation.

End Of Sie

A6E4912W001

CLUTCH PEDAL

CLUTCH PEDAL
CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT
Clutch Pedal Height
1. Measure the distance from the upper surface of
the pedal pad to the carpet.
• If not as specified, adjust the pedal height by
turning adjustment bolt B and locknut A.

A6E491441030W01

Pedal height(with carpet)
L.H.D.: 210216 mm {8.278.50 in}
R.H.D.: 209215 mm {8.238.46 in}

A6E4914W001

Clutch Pedal Free Play
1. Depress the clutch pedal by hand until clutch
resistance is felt, and measure the pedal free
play.
• If not as specified, adjust the pedal free play
by loosening locknut C and turning push rod
D as necessary.
Pedal free play
1.03.0 mm {0.040.11 in}
Push rod free play at clutch pedal
0.10.5 mm {0.0040.02 in} (Reference
value)

A6E4914W002

Clutch Pedal Disengagement Point
1. Apply the parking brake and fix the front and rear of the wheels with the wheel chocks.
2. Start the engine at idle.
3. Without depressing the clutch pedal, move the
shift lever slowly to the reverse position.
4. Hold the lever when the gear noise is heard.
5. Depress the clutch pedal slowly.

CLUTCH PEDAL
6. Hold the pedal when the gear noise stops (clutch pedal disengagement point).
7. Measure distance A (the distance from the clutch pedal disengagement point to the fully depressed position)
and the pedal stroke.
8. Verify that they are within specification.
• If distance A or the pedal stroke is out of
specification, adjust the pedal height or the
clutch pedal free play to specification.
Clutch pedal disengagement stroke
Minimum: 20 mm {0.79 in} (Reference value)
Pedal stroke
140.0 mm {5.51 in} (Reference value)
A6E4914W003

End Of Sie

CLUTCH PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the battery and battery tray. (European (L.H.D.) and GCC specs.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
After installation, adjust the clutch pedal. (See H5 CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E491441030W02

A6E4914W004

1
2
3
4
5

Nut
Clutch switch connector
Clutch switch
Nut
E-clip

6
7
8
9
10

Pin
Bushing
Nut
Push rod
Clevis

CLUTCH PEDAL, CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
11
12

Pedal pad
Clutch pedal
(See H7 Clutch Pedal Installation Note)

Clutch Pedal Installation Note
1. After installation, adjust the pedal height and free play. (See H5 CLUTCH PEDAL ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the battery and battry tray. (European (L.H.D.), GCC. specs.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Plug the clutch pipe after removing it to avoid leakage.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E491641990W01

A6E4916W001

1
2
3

Clip
Clutch pipe
Nut

4
5

Clutch master cylinder
Gasket

End Of Sie

CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER
CLUTCH MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E491641990W02

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
.

A6E4916W002

1
2
3
4
5

Clip
Hose
Joint
Bushing
Snap ring
(See H8 Snap Ring Disassembly/Assembly Note)

6
7
8
9
10

Piston and secondary cap component
Spacer
Primary cap
Return spring
Clutch master cylinder body

Snap Ring Disassembly/Assembly Note
1. Hold the piston down using a cloth-wrapped pin
punch.
• If disassembling, remove the snap ring; if
assembling, install it.

XME4916W003

End Of Sie

CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER

CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E491841920W01

1. Remove the under cover.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
.

A6E4918W001

1
2

Clutch pipe
Bolt

Clutch release cylinder

End Of Sie

CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER
CLUTCH RELEASE CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E491841920W02

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E4918W002
.

1
2
3
4

Boot
Push rod
Piston and cap
Return spring

End Of Sie

H10

5
6
7

Bleeder cap
Bleeder screw
Release cylinder body

CLUTCH UNIT

CLUTCH UNIT
CLUTCH UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E492016000W01

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order oremoval.

A6E4920W001
.

1
2
3
4
5

Clutch release cylinder
Manual transaxle
(See J5 MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Boot
Clutch release collar
Clutch release fork

6
7
8

Clutch cover
(See H12 Clutch Cover and Disc Removal Note)
(See H13 Clutch Cover Installation Note)
Clutch disc
(See H12 Clutch Cover and Disc Removal Note)
(See H13 Clutch Disc Installation Note)
Flywheel
(See H12 Flywheel Removal Note)
(See H12 Flywheel Installation Note)

H11

CLUTCH UNIT
Clutch Cover and Disc Removal Note
1. Install the SSTs.
2. Loosen each bolt one turn at a time in a
crisscross pattern until spring tension is released.
3. Remove the clutch cover and disc.

A6E4920W002

Flywheel Removal Note
1. Hold the flywheel using the SST.
2. Remove the bolts evenly and gradually in a
crisscross pattern.
3. Remove the flywheel.

A6E4920W003

Flywheel Installation Note
1. Install the flywheel to the crankshaft.
2. When reusing the bolts, clean threads and hole, then apply locking compound to the threads.
Note
• No locking compound is needed when using new bolts.
3. Hand-tighten the flywheel lock bolts.
4. Install the SST to the flywheel.
5. Gradually tighten the flywheel lock bolts in a
crisscross pattern.
Tightning torque
108115 N·m {11.111.7 kgf·m, 79.784.8
ft·lbf}

A6E4920W004

H12

CLUTCH UNIT
Clutch Disc Installation Note
1. Hold the clutch disc position using the SST.

A6E4920W005

Clutch Cover Installation Note
1. Install the SSTs.
2. Tighten the bolts evenly and gradually in a
crisscross pattern.

Tightening torque
18.625.5 N·m {1.92.6 kgf·m, 1419 ft·lbf}

A6E4920W006

End Of Sie

CLUTCH COVER INSPECTION
1. Measure the wear of the diaphragm spring
fingers.
• If not as specified, replace the clutch cover.

A6E492016410W01

Depth
0.6 mm {0.024 in} max.

XME4920W010

2. Measure the flatness of the pressure plate with a
straight edge and a feeler gauge.
• If not as specified, replace the clutch cover.
Maximum clearance
0.5 mm {0.020 in}
3. When checking the diaphragm spring fingers,
mount a dial indicator on the cylinder block.

XME4920W011

H13

CLUTCH UNIT
4. Rotate the flywheel and check for misaligned
diaphragm spring fingers.
• If not as specified, replace the clutch cover.
Misalignment
0.6 mm {0.024 in} max.

XME4920W012

End Of Sie

CLUTCH DISC INSPECTION
1. Using vernier calipers, measure the thickness of
the lining at a rivet head on both sides.
• Replace the clutch disc if its thickness is less
than the minimum.

A6E492016460W01

Thickness
0.3 mm {0.012 in} min.

A6E4920W007

2. Measure the clutch disc runout using a dial
indicator.
• If the runout is excessive, replace the clutch
disc.
Runout
0.7 mm {0.028 in} max.

XME4920W014

End Of Sie

CLUTCH RELEASE COLLAR INSPECTION

A6E492016510W01

Caution
• Cleaning the clutch release collar with cleaning fluids or a steam cleaner can
wash the grease out of the sealed bearing.
1. Turn the collar while applying force in the axial
direction.
• If the collar sticks or has excessive
resistance, replace the clutch release collar.

XME4920W015

End Of Sie

H14

FLYWHEEL

FLYWHEEL
FLYWHEEL INSPECTION
1. Install a dial gauge on the cylinder block.
2. Measure the flywheel runout using a dial
indicator.
• If the runout is excessive, replace the
flywheel.

A6E492211500W01

Runout
0.1 mm {0.004 in} max.

H
XME4922W001

End Of Sie

H15

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

LOCATION INDEX ................................................. J-2
MANUAL TRANSAXLE LOCATION INDEX ........ J-2
MANUAL TRANSAXLE.......................................... J-3
TRANSAXLE OIL INSPECTION .......................... J-3
TRANSAXLE OIL REPLACEMENT ..................... J-3
OIL SEAL (DIFFERENTIAL) REPLACEMENT .... J-4
VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .............................. J-4
VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................... J-5
MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION................................................. J-5
SHIFT MECHANISM............................................... J-9
SHIFT MECHANISM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .............................. J-9

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
MANUAL TRANSAXLE LOCATION INDEX

A6E510001036W01

A6E5100W001
.

1
2

Oil seal (differential)
(See J4 OIL SEAL (DIFFERENTIAL)
REPLACEMENT)
Vehicle speedometer sensor
(See J4 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See J5 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

3
4
5

Manual transaxle
(See J5 MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Shift mechanism
(See J9 SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Transaxle oil
(See J3 TRANSAXLE OIL INSPECTION)
(See J3 TRANSAXLE OIL REPLACEMENT)

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

MANUAL TRANSAXLE
TRANSAXLE OIL INSPECTION
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Remove the oil level plug and washer.
3. Verify that the oil is near the brim of the plug port.
• If the oil level is lower than the low level, add
the specified amount and type of oil through
the oil level plug hole.

A6E511227001W01

Specified oil grade
API Service GL-4 or GL-5
Specified oil viscosity
All-season: SAE 75W-90
Above 10 ° C {50 ° F}: SAE 80W-90
4. Install a new washer and the oil level plug.

J
A6E5112W007

Tightening torque
4058 N·m {4.06.0 kgf·m, 2943 ft·lbf}

End Of Sie

TRANSAXLE OIL REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the drain plug with the washer.
2. Drain the oil into a suitable container.
3. Install a new washer and the drain plug.

A6E511227001W02

Tightening torque
4058 N·m {4.06.0 kgf·m, 2943 ft·lbf}
4. Remove the oil level plug with washer and add
the specified amount and type of oil through the
oil level plug hole until the level reaches the
bottom of the oil level plug hole.
Specified oil viscosity
All-season: SAE 75W-90
Above 10 ° C {50 ° F}: SAE 80W-90
Capacity (approximate quantity)
2.87 L {3.03 US qt, 2.53 lmp qt}
5. Install a new washer and the oil level plug.

A6E5112W008

Tightening torque
4058 N·m {4.06.0 kgf·m, 2943 ft·lbf}

End Of Sie

MANUAL TRANSAXLE
OIL SEAL (DIFFERENTIAL) REPLACEMENT
1.
2.
3.
4.

On level ground, jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands.
Drain the oil from the transaxle.
Remove the front wheels and splash shields.
Separate the drive shaft and joint shaft from the transaxle. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) (See M12 JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the oil seals using a screwdriver.

A6E511219240W01

A6E5112W009

6. Using the SST and a hammer, tap each new oil
seal in evenly until the SST contacts the transaxle
case.
7. Coat the lip of each oil seal with transaxle oil.
8. Insert the drive shaft and joint shaft to the
transaxle. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) (See M12 JOINT SHAFT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Install the wheels and splash shields.
10. Add the specified amount and type of oil. (See J
3 TRANSAXLE OIL REPLACEMENT.)
A6E5112W001

End Of Sie

VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E511217400W01

Without ABS
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the battery and battery tray.
3. Remove the air cleaner compornent. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Disconnect the vehicle speedometer sensor connector.
5. Remove the vehicle speedometer sensor.
6. Apply transmission oil to a new O-ring and install it on a vehicle speedometer sensor.
7. Install the vehicle speedometer sensor.
Tightening torque
7.811.3 N·m
{80115 kgf·cm, 57.683.3 in·lbf}
8.
9.
10.
11.

Connect the vehicle speedometer sensor connector.
Install the air cleaner compornent. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Install the battery and battery tray.
Connect the negative battery cable.

End Of Sie

MANUAL TRANSAXLE
VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR INSPECTION
Without ABS
1. Remove the vehicle speedometer sensor.
2. Measure voltage (AC range) between terminals of
the vehicle speedometer sensor while the gear is
turning.
Meter needle
Moves slightly under
5 V (AC range)
Does not move

A6E511217400W02

Action
Repair wiring harness between
instrument cluster and vehicle
speedometer sensor.
Replace vehicle speedometer
sensor.

3. Install the vehicle speedometer sensor.
W6U515WA4

End Of Sie

MANUAL TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

A6E511201029W01

Remove the battery, battery tray and battery bracket.
Remove the air cleaner compornent. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the wheels, tires and splash shields.
Remove the under cover.
Remove the steering gear and power steering pipe. (See N10 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front auto leveling sensor. (See T32 FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Drain the transaxle oil into a suitable container.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Adjust the headlight zeroset. (See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
Add the specified amount of specified transaxle oil.
Install the air cleaner compornent. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Warm up the engine and transaxle, inspect for oil leakage, and inspect the transaxle operation.

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

A6E5112W012
.

O2 sensor connector

2
3

Back-up light switch connector
Neutral switch connector

Harness bracket
Vehicle speedometer sensor connector
(GCC specs.)

MANUAL TRANSAXLE
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16

Selector cable
Shift cable
Selector cable bracket
Clutch release cylinder
Starter
Endplate cover
Transaxle mounting bolt (upper side)
Tie-rod end ball joint
(See N11 Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note)
Stabilizer control link
Damper fork
Lower arm (front, rear) ball joint
(See R19 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Drive shaft
(See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

19
20
21
22
23
24

Joint shaft
(See M12 JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
No.1 engine mount
(See J7 No.1 Engine Mount Bracket Removal
Note)
(See J8 No.1 Engine Mount and No.4 Engine
Mount Bracket Installation Note)
Crossmember bracket
Crossmember component
(See R23 FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
No.4 engine mount
(See J8 No.1 Engine Mount and No.4 Engine
Mount Bracket Installation Note)
Transaxle mounting bolt (lower side)
Manual transaxle
(See J7 Manual Transaxle Removal Note)
(See J8 Manual Transaxle Installation Note)

No.1 Engine Mount Bracket Removal Note
1. Support the engine using the SST before
removing the No.1 engine mount.
2. Remove the No.1 engine mount.

A6E5614W049

Manual Transaxle Removal Note
1. Loosen the SST (49 E017 5A0)and lean the engine toward the transaxle.
2. Support the transaxle on a jack.
3. Remove the transaxle mounting bolts.
4. Remove the transaxle.

A6E5112W003

MANUAL TRANSAXLE
Manual Transaxle Installation Note
1. Set the transaxle on a jack and lift into place.
2. Install the transaxle mounting bolts.
3. Tighten the SST (49 E017 5A0)so that the engine
is located at the specified position.

A6E5112W004

No.1 Engine Mount and No.4 Engine Mount Bracket Installation Note
1. Verify that the engine mount rubbers are installed as shown.
2. By aligning the holes with the stud bolts, install the No.4 engine mount bracket to the transaxle.
3. By aligning the holes with the stud bolts, install the No.1 engine mount to the transaxle.
4. Align the hole of the No.4 engine mount bracket with the No.4 engine mount rubber on vehicle, and temporarily
tighten the bolt D.
5. Tighten the nut B,C in order of B→C, then bolt A.
6. Tighten the bolt D.
7.

Tightening torque
A, B, C: 66.693.1 N·m {6.89.4 kgf·m, 50
68 ft·lbf}
D: 85.3116.6 N·m {8.711.8 kgf·m, 6385
ft·lbf}

A6E5112W005

8. Tighten the bolt D to the No.1 engine mount.
Tightening torque
E: 85.3116.6 N·m {8.711.8 kgf·m, 6385
ft·lbf}
9. Remove the SST (49 E017 5A0).

A6E5112W006
End Of Sie

SHIFT MECHANISM

SHIFT MECHANISM
SHIFT MECHANISM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E511446010W01

1. Remove the battery, battery tray and battery bracket.
2. Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the dashboard compleat.
(See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the SAS control module.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the climate control unit. (See U44 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL.) (See U45 CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the rear heat duct. (See U23 REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
9. Install the air cleaner component.
10. After installation, verify that the shift lever can be shifted smoothly into each position.

A6E5114W001
.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Shift lever knob
Boot panel
Clip
Clip
Clip
Clip

7
8
9
10
11

Plain Washer
Seal plate
Main shift cable
Main select cable
(See J10 Select Cable Installation Note)
Sift lever assembly

SHIFT MECHANISM
Select Cable Installation Note
1. Remove the center console.
2. Make sure that the shift lever (transaxle side) is in neutral.
3. Unlock the lock pice of the select cable (shift lever
side) in the order shown in the figure.
4. Shift the sift lever to neutral.

A6E5114W002

5. Lock the lock pice of the selector cable (shift
cable side) in the order shown in the figure.
6. Install the center console.
7. Shift the shift lever from neutral to other position,
and make sure that there are no other
components in that area to interfere with the
lever.

A6E5114W003

End Of Sie

J10

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

LOCATION INDEX ................................................. K-4
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
LOCATION INDEX............................................ K-4
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE.................................... K-6
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST ........................... K-6
ROAD TEST ........................................................ K-9
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
INSPECTION .................................................. K-12
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT ............................................. K-13
HOLD SWITCH INSPECTION........................... K-13
HOLD SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-14
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. K-14
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-15
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT................................................ K-18
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR INSPECTION........................ K-19
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-21
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION .......... K-21
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-23
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................. K-23
INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-24
VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
(VSS) INSPECTION ....................................... K-24
VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
(VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ................. K-26
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION..................... K-26
SOLENOID VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-28
PCM INSPECTION ............................................ K-29
PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...................... K-29
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ K-29
OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT ............................... K-33
CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL ............... K-34
CONTROL VALVE BODY
INSTALLATION .............................................. K-35
OIL COOLER FLUSHING .................................. K-36
OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........ K-39
OIL COOLER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ...... K-41
DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...... K-43
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT
MECHANISM ........................................................ K-45
SHIFT-LOCK INSPECTION............................... K-45
KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION ....................... K-45
INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION................... K-45
SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION.................... K-45
SELECTOR CABLE ADJUSTMENT.................. K-46

SELECTOR LEVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ K-46
SELECTOR LEVER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... K-51
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC ................................... K-52
FOREWORD...................................................... K-52
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION .............................. K-52
AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE ......................... K-52
DTC TABLE ....................................................... K-53
DTC P0500 ........................................................ K-55
DTC P0706 ........................................................ K-57
DTC P0707 ........................................................ K-58
DTC P0708 ........................................................ K-60
DTC P0711 ........................................................ K-63
DTC P0712 ........................................................ K-64
DTC P0713 ........................................................ K-65
DTC P0715 ........................................................ K-68
DTC P0731 ........................................................ K-70
DTC P0732 ........................................................ K-71
DTC P0733 ........................................................ K-73
DTC P0734 ........................................................ K-75
DTC P0741 ........................................................ K-77
DTC P0742 ........................................................ K-78
DTC P0745 ........................................................ K-80
DTC P0751 ........................................................ K-82
DTC P0752 ........................................................ K-83
DTC P0753 ........................................................ K-85
DTC P0756 ........................................................ K-87
DTC P0757 ........................................................ K-89
DTC P0758 ........................................................ K-90
DTC P0761 ........................................................ K-93
DTC P0762 ........................................................ K-95
DTC P0763 ........................................................ K-96
DTC P0766 ........................................................ K-99
DTC P0767 ...................................................... K-100
DTC P0768 ...................................................... K-102
DTC P0771 ...................................................... K-104
DTC P0772 ...................................................... K-105
DTC P0773 ...................................................... K-107
DTC P0841 ...................................................... K-109
PID/DATA MONITOR INSPECTION................ K-110
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ K-112
FOREWORD.................................................... K-112
BASIC INSPECTION ....................................... K-112
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
ITEM TABLE ................................................. K-113
QUICK DIAGNOSIS CHART ........................... K-115
NO.1 VEHICLE DOES NOT MOVE IN
D, S, L RANGES, OR IN R POSITION ......... K-117
NO.2 VEHICLE MOVES IN N POSITION ........ K-117
NO.3 VEHICLE MOVES IN P POSITION,
OR PARKING GEAR DOES NOT
DISENGAGE WHEN P IS DISENGAGED .... K-118
NO.4 EXCESSIVE CREEP .............................. K-118
NO.5 NO CREEP AT ALL ................................ K-118
NO.6 LOW MAXIMUM SPEED AND
POOR ACCELERATION............................... K-119

NO.7 NO SHIFTING.........................................K-120
NO.8 DOES NOT SHIFT TO FOURTH
GEAR (4GR) ................................................. K-120
NO.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING.......................... K-122
NO.10 FREQUENT SHIFTING ........................ K-122
NO.11 SHIFT POINT IS HIGH OR LOW .........K-122
NO.12 TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH (TCC) NON-OPERATION ............. K-123
NO.13 NO KICKDOWN.................................... K-123
NO.14 ENGINE FLARES UP OR
SLIPS WHEN UPSHIFTING OR
DOWNSHIFTING ..........................................K-124
NO.15 ENGINE FLARES UP OR
SLIPS WHEN ACCELERATING
VEHICLE.......................................................K-124
NO.16 JUDDER UPON TORQUE
CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
OPERATION ................................................. K-125
NO.17 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK
FROM N TO D OR N TO R
POSITION/RANGE ....................................... K-126
NO.18 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK IS
FELT WHEN UPSHIFTING AND
DOWNSHIFTING ..........................................K-127
NO.19 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK
ON TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH (TCC)............................................. K-127
NO.20 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE
WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN
ALL POSITIONS/RANGES ........................... K-128
NO.21 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE
WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN
D, S, L RANGES, OR IN R POSITION .........K-128
NO.22 NO ENGINE BRAKING IN
HOLD MODE ................................................K-129
NO.23 TRANSAXLE OVERHEATS ................. K-129
NO.24 ENGINE STALLS WHEN
SHIFTED TO D, S, L RANGES,
OR IN R POSITION ...................................... K-130
NO.25 ENGINE STALLS WHEN
DRIVING AT SLOW SPEEDS
OR STOPPING ............................................. K-130
NO.26 STARTER DOES NOT WORK ............. K-130
NO.27 HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN
HOLD SWITCH IS TURNED TO ON ............ K-130
NO.28 HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT
ILLUMINATES WHEN HOLD
SWITCH IS NOT TURNED TO ON.....................K-131

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE LOCATION INDEX

A6E560001074W01

A6E5600W001
.

LOCATION INDEX
1

HOLD switch
(See K13 HOLD SWITCH INSPECTION)
(See K14 HOLD SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Transaxle range (TR) switch
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION)
(See K15 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT)
Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor
(See K19 TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR INSPECTION)
(See K21 TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE
(TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Oil pressure switch
(See K21 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
INSPECTION)
(See K23 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Input/turbine speed sensor
(See K23 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION)
(See K24 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Vehicle speedometer sensor
(See K24 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
(VSS) INSPECTION)
(See K26 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR
(VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Solenoid valve
(See K26 SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION)
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
PCM
(See K29 PCM INSPECTION)
(See K29 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

9
10
11

13
14
15

16
17

18
19

Automatic transaxle
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Oil seal
(See K33 OIL SEAL REPLACEMENT)
Control valve body
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL)
(See K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY
INSTALLATION)
Oil cooler
(See K36 OIL COOLER FLUSHING)
(See K39 OIL COOLER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See K41 OIL COOLER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Drive plate
(See K43 DRIVE PLATE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Interlock cable
(See K45 INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION)
Selector lever
(See K45 SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION)
(See K46 SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See K51 SELECTOR LEVER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Select cable
(See K46 SELECTOR CABLE ADJUSTMENT)
Automatic transaxle fluid (ATF)
(See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
INSPECTION)
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT)
Shift-lock
(See K45 SHIFT-LOCK INSPECTION)
Key interlock
(See K45 KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST

A6E561401030W01

Mechanical System Test Preparation
1. Engage the parking brake and use wheel chocks at the front and rear of the wheels.
2. Inspect the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION.)
3. Inspect the engine oil. (See D4 ENGINE OIL INSPECTION.)
4. Inspect the ATF levels. (See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION.)
5. Inspect the idle speed and ignition timing in P position. (See F8 IDLE SPEED INSPECTION.)(See F8
IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION.)
6. Bring up the engine and transaxle to normal operating temperature.
Line Pressure Test
1. Perform mechanical system test preparation. (See K6 Mechanical System Test Preparation.)

Warning
• Removing the square-head plug when the ATF is hot can be dangerous. Hot ATF can come out of
the opening and badly burn you. Before removing the square-head plug, allow the ATF to cool.
2. Connect the SSTs (49 H019 002 and, 49 0378
400C) to the line pressure inspection port, then
replace the gauge of the SST (49 0378 400C)
with the SST (49 B019 901B).
3. Start the engine, then warm up the automatic
transaxle.
4. Shift the selector lever to D range.
5. Read the line pressure at idle engine speed for
the D range.
6. Read the line pressure at idle engine speed for
the D (HOLD), S, S (HOLD), L, L (HOLD) ranges
and R positions in the same manner as in Steps
4-5.
7. Stop the engine, then replace the SST (49 B019
901B) with the gauge of the SST (49 0378 400C).
8. Start the engine.
9. Firmly depress the brake pedal with the left foot.
10. Shift the selector lever to D range position.

A6E5614W002

Caution
• If the accelerator pedal is pressed for longer than 5 seconds while the brake pedal is pressed, the
transaxle could be damaged. Therefore, perform Steps 11 and 12 within 5 seconds each.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Gradually depress the accelerator pedal with the right foot.
When the engine speed no longer increases, quickly read the line pressure and release the accelerator pedal.
Shift the selector lever to N position and let the engine idle for 1 minute or more to cool the ATF.
Read the line pressure at the engine stall speed for the D, D (HOLD), S, S (HOLD), L, L(HOLD) ranges and R
position in the same manner as in Steps 9-13.
Specified line pressure
Position/Range
D, S, L*
R

idle
Stall
idle
Stall

Line pressure (kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})
LF
330470 {3.44.8, 4868}
1,1601,320 {11.812.5, 168191}
490710 {5.07.2, 71102}
1,6001,820 {16.318.6, 232264}

: Includes each HOLD mode
Warning
• Removing the square-head plug when the ATF is hot can be dangerous. Hot ATF can come out of
the opening and badly burn you. Before removing the square-head plug, allow the ATF to cool.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
15. Remove the SSTs.
16. Install a new square head plug in the inspection port.
Tightening torque
5.09.8 N·m {50100 kgf·cm, 4486 in·lbf}
Evaluation of line pressure test
Line pressure

Low pressure in all ranges

Low pressure in D and S only
Low pressure in L and R only
Low pressure in R only
High pressure in all ranges

Possible cause
Worn oil pump
Oil leaking from oil pump, control valve body, and/or transaxle case
Pressure regulator valve sticking
Pressure control solenoid malfunction
Pressure modulator valve sticking
Solenoid reducing valve sticking
Oil leaking from hydraulic circuit of forward clutch
Oil leaking from hydraulic circuit of low and reverse brake
Oil leaking from hydraulic circuit of reverse clutch
Pressure control solenoid malfunction
Pressure regulator valve sticking
Pressure modulator valve sticking
Pressure reducing valve sticking

Stall Test
1. Perform mechanical system test preparation. (See K6 Mechanical System Test Preparation.)
2. Start the engine.
3. Firmly depress the brake pedal with the left foot.
4. Shift the selector lever to D range.
Caution
• If the accelerator pedal is pressed for longer than 5 seconds while the brake pedal is pressed, the
transaxle could be damaged. Therefore, perform Steps 5 and 6 within 5 seconds of each other.
5. Gently depress the accelerator pedal with the right foot.
6. When the engine speed no longer increases, quickly read the speed and release the accelerator pedal. When
the engine speed no longer increases, quickly read the speed and release the accelerator pedal.
7. Shift the selector lever to N position and let the engine idle for 1 minute or more to cool the ATF.
8. Perform a stall test of D (HOLD), S, S (HOLD), L, L (HOLD) and R range positions in the same manner as in
Steps 37.
9. Turn the ignition switch off.
Engine stall speed

Position/
Range

Engine stall speed (rpm)
LF

D, S, L*
R

2,0002,600

: Includes each HOLD mode

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Evaluation of stall test
Condition

Possible cause
Worm oil pump
Oil leaking from oil pump, control valve, and/
or transaxle case
Insufficient
line pressure Pressure regulator valve sticking
Pressure control solenoid malfunction
Pressure modulator valve sticking
Forward clutch slippage
One-way clutch 1 slippage
One-way clutch 2 slippage
2-4 brake band slippage
Low and reverse brake slippage
Low and reverse brake slippage
Reverse clutch slipping
Perform road test to determine whether problem is low and
reverse brake or reverse clutch
• Engine braking felt in L range: Reverse clutch
• Engine braking not felt in L range: Low and reverse brake
Engine out of tune
One-way clutch slipping within torque converter

In all forward ranges and R
position

In forward ranges
Above specification

In D ranges
In S ranges
In L range and R position

In R position

Below specification

Time Lag Test
1. Perform mechanical system test preparation. (See K6 Mechanical System Test Preparation.)
2. Use a stopwatch to measure the time it takes from shifting until shock is felt when shifting the selector lever
from N position to D range (non-HOLD mode). Take three measurements for each test and take the average
from the results using the following formula.
Formula:
Average time lag = (Time 1 + Time 2 + Time 3) / 3
3. Perform the test for the following shifts in the same manner Step 2.
• N position → D range (HOLD mode)
• N position → R position
Time lag
N position → D range ... 0.40.7 s
N position → R position ... 0.40.7 s
Evaluation of time lag test
Condition
More than specification
N → D shift
Less than specification
More than specification
N → D (HOLD) shift
Less than specification

More than specification
N → R shift
Less than specification

End Of Sie

Possible Cause
Insufficient line pressure
Forward clutch slipping
Oil leaking from forward clutch fluid circuit
Shift solenoid A not operating properly
Forward accumulator not operating properly
Shift solenoid A not operating properly
Excessive line pressure
Insufficient line pressure
Forward clutch slipping
Shift solenoid A not operating properly
Forward accumulator not operating properly
Shift solenoid A not operating properly
Excessive line pressure
Insufficient line pressure
Low and reverse brake slipping
Reverse clutch slipping
Shift solenoid B not operating properly
Servo apply accumulator not operating properly
Shift solenoid B not operating properly
Excessive line pressure

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
ROAD TEST

A6E561401030W02

Warning
• When performing a road test, be aware of other vehicles, people, impediments, etc. to avoid an
accident.
Note
• When the legal speed limit must be exceeded, use a chassis dynamomenter instead of performing a road
test.
Road Test Preparation
1. Inspect the engine coolant levels. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT LEVEL INSPECTION.)
2. Inspect the engine oil levels. (See D4 ENGINE OIL INSPECTION.)
3. Inspect the ATF levels. (See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION.)
4. Inspect the idle speed and ignition timing in P position. (See F8 IDLE SPEED INSPECTION.)(See F8
IGNITION TIMING INSPECTION.)
5. Bring up the engine and transaxle to normal operating temperature.
Shift Diagram
D range (normal mode)

A6E5614W001

D Range Test
1. Perform road test preparation. (See K9 Road Test Preparation.)
2. Shift the selector lever to D range.
3. Accelerate the vehicle with half and WOT, then verify that 1→2, 2→3, and 3→4 upshifts can be obtained. The
shift points must be as shown in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
4. Drive the vehicle in 4GR, 3GR, and 2GR and verify that kickdown occurs for 4→3, 3→2, 2→1 downshifts, and
that the shift points are as shown in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX.(See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
5. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt in 2GR, 3GR, and 4GR.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
6. Drive the vehicle and verify that TCC operation is obtained. The operation points must be as shown in the table
below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
7. Select HOLD mode.

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
8. Accelerate the vehicle at half throttle and WOT, and verify that 4→3, 3→2, and 2→3 shift can be obtained. The
shift points must be as shown in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
9. Drive the vehicle in 4GR, 3GR, 2GR and verify that kickdown does not occur.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
10. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt in 2GR, 3GR, and 4GR.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
Shift point table
Range/Mode

Throttle condition

WOT

NORMAL

Half throttle

CTP

Kickdown (WOT)
D
WOT

Half throttle
POWER
CTP

Kickdown (WOT)

HOLD

ALL round

Vehicle speed
(km/h {mph})

Turbine speed
(rpm)

D1→D2

5056 {3134}

5,4506,050

D2→D3

96104 {6064}

5,5505,950

Shift

D3→D4

145155 {9096}

5,6005,950

TCC ON(D4)

152162 {95100}

4,2504,500

D1→D2

2836 {1822}

3,0003,900

D2→D3

5268 {3342}

2,9503,950

D3→D4

108136 {6784}

4,1505,200

TCC ON(D4)

95129 {5979}

2,6503,600

D4→D3

2430 {1518}

700800

D3→D1

814 {58}

350500

D4→D3

136146 {8590}

3,8004,050

D3→D2

8593 {5357}

3,3003,550

D2→D1

3945 {2527}

2,2502,550

D1→D2

5056 {3134}

5,4506,050

D2→D3

96104 {6064}

5,5505,950

D3→D4

145155 {9096}

5,6005,950

D1→D2

3544 {2227}

3,8004,750

D2→D3

7392 {4657}

4,2005,200

D3→D4

111139 {6986}

4,2505,350

D4→D3

3238 {2023}

9001,050
350500

D3→D1

814 {58}

D4→D3

136146 {8590}

3,8004,050

D3→D2

8593{5357}

3,3003,550

D2→D1

3945 {2527}

2,2502,550

D2→D3

1525 {1015}

9001,400

D4→D3

145151 {9093}

4,0504,200

D3→D2

713 {58}

300450

S Range Test
1. Perform road test preparation. (See K9 Road Test Preparation.)
2. Shift the selector lever to S range.
3. Accelerate the vehicle at half throttle and WOT, then verify that 1→2 and 2→3 upshifts can be obtained. The
shift points must be as shown in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
4. Drive the vehicle in 2GR, 3GR, 4GR and verify that kickdown occurs for 4→3, 3→2, 2→1 downshift, and that
the shift point is as shown in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
5. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt in 2GR, 3GR and 4GR.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
6. Select HOLD mode.

K10

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
7. Accelerate the vehicle in 2GR at half throttle and WOT, and verify that 2GR is held.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
8. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
Shift point table
Range/
Mode

Throttle condition
WOT
Half throttle

NORMAL
CTP

Kickdown (WOT)
HOLD

ALL round

Shift

Vehicle speed
(km/h {mph})

Turbine speed
(rpm)

S1→S2

5056 {3134}

5,4506,050

S2→S3

96104 {6064}

5,5505,950

S1→S2

3544 {2227}

3,8004,750

S2→S3

7392 {4657}

4,2005,250

S4→S3

145151 {9093}

4,0504,200

S3→S1

814 {58}

350500

S3→S2

8593 {5357}

3,3003,550

S2→S1

3945 {2527}

2,2502,550

S4→S3

145151 {9093}

4,0504,200

S3→S2

95101 {5962}

3,6503,850

L Range Test
1. Perform road test preparation. (See K9 Road Test Preparation.)
2. Shift the selector lever to L range.
3. Accelerate the vehicle at half throttle and WOT, then verify that 1→2 upshift. The shift points must be as shown
in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX.(See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
4. Drive the vehicle in 2GR and verify that kickdown occurs for 2→1 downshift, and that the shift point is as shown
in the table below.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
5. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt in 1GR,2GR, 3GR and 4GR.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
6. Select HOLD mode.
7. Accelerate the vehicle in 1GR at half throttle and WOT, and verify that 1GR is held.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
8. Decelerate the vehicle and verify that engine braking effect is felt.
• If not as specified, inspect the PCM and ATX. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
TABLE.)
Shift point table
Range/Mode

NORMAL

Throttle condition

Shift

Vehicle speed
(km/h {mph})

Turbine speed
(rpm)

WOT

L1→L2

5056 {3134}

5,4506,050

Half throttle

L1→L2

3544 {2227}

3,8004,750

L4→L3

145151 {9093}

4,0504,200

CTP

L3→L2

95101 {5962}

3,6503,850

L2→L1

814 {58}

500800

Kickdown (WOT)

L4→L3

143153 {8994}

4,0004,250

L4→L3

145151 {9093}

4,0504,200

L3→L2

95101 {5962}

3,6503,850

L2→L1

3945 {2527}

2,2502,500

HOLD

ALL round

K11

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
P Position Test
1. Shift into P position on a gentle slope. Release the brake and verify that the vehicle does not roll.

End Of Sie

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Condition Inspection
1. One way of determining whether the transaxle should be disassembled is by noting:
• If the ATF is muddy or varnished.
• If the ATF smells strange or unusual.
ATF Condition
Condition
Clear red
Light red: pink

Reddish
brown

Normal
Contaminated
with water

Has burnt smell and metal Deteriorated
specks are found
ATF

Has no burnt smell

Normal

A6E561401030W03

Possible cause

• Broken oil cooler inside of radiator
• Poor filler tube installation:
Problem could be occurring to parts inside the transaxle by
water contamination. It is necessary to overhaul transaxle and
detect defected parts. If necessary, exchange transaxle.
Defect powertrain components inside of transaxle: Specks
cause wide range of problems by plugging up in oil pipe, control
valve body and oil cooler in radiator.
• When large amount of metal specks are found, overhaul
transaxle and detect defected parts. If necessary, exchange
transaxle.
• Implement flushing operation as there is a possibility to have
specks plugging up oil pipe and/or oil cooler inside of
radiator.
• Discoloration by oxidation

Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level Inspection
Caution
• The ATF amount varies according to ATF's temperature. Therefore, when checking the ATF level
or replacing the ATF, use a thermometer to measure the temperature then adjust the ATF amount
to the specified level according to the specified temperature.
1. Park the vehicle on level ground.
2. Apply the parking brake and position wheel chocks securely to prevent the vehicle from rolling.
3. Adjust the length or thermistor probe to measure
the same depth as the depth gauge and hold the
probe with a paper holder. Insert into the filler
tube and measure the temperature.
• If necessary, inspect the ATF before warming
up the engine. In this case, use the cool
range.1525 ° C {5977 ° F}
4. Warm up the engine until the ATF reaches 60
70 °C {140158 ° F}.
5. Shift the selector lever and pause momentarily in
each range (DL) while depressing the brake
pedal.
6. Shift the selector lever to P position.
7. Verify that the ATF level is in the HOT range (65
°C{149 °F}) while the engine is idling.
• If necessary, add ATF to the specification.

A6E5614W003

ATF type
ATF M-V

A6E5614W004

End Of Sie

K12

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT

A6E561401030W04

Warning
• When the transaxle and ATF are hot, they can badly burn you. Turn off the engine and wait until
they are cool before changing the ATF.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the oil dipstick.
Remove the oil drain plug and washer.
Drain the ATF into a container.
Install a new washer and the drain plug.
Tightening torque
3041 N·m {3.04.2 kgf·m, 2230 ft·lbf}

5. Add the specified ATF until ATF level reaches
lower notch of dipstick type of ATF through the oil
filler tube.
ATF type
ATF M-V

A6E5614W005

6. Ensure that the ATF level is in the HOT range (65 °C{149 °F}).
• Add ATF to the specified level as necessary.

End Of Sie

HOLD SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E561446030W01

Operating Inspection
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF).
2. Verify that the HOLD indicator light is not illuminated. Depress the HOLD switch and verify that the HOLD
indicator light illuminates.
• If not as specified, inspect the terminal voltage of the HOLD switch.
Voltage Inspection
1. Remove the console.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF).
3. Measure the voltage at the HOLD switch
connector.
• If not as specified, inspect for continuity at the
HOLD switch.
HOLD switch
position
Normal
Depressed

Connector terminal
C
D
B+
0
0
0

A6E5614W006

K13

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Continuity Inspection of
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the console.
3. Disconnect the HOLD switch connector.
4. Inspect continuity at the HOLD switch.
• If the switch is okay, inspect the wiring
harness. (HOLD switchPCM, HOLD
switchBody ground)
• If not as specified, replace the HOLD switch.
(See K14 HOLD SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
5. Connect the HOLD switch connector.
6. Install the console.
7. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E5614W007

End OfSWITCH
Sie
HOLD
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E561446030W02

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the console.
3. Disconnect the connector and remove the HOLD switch terminals. (See K51 SELECTOR LEVER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
4. Remove the selector lever knob component.
5. Remove the HOLD switch.
6. Install the HOLD switch to selector lever knob component.
7. Install selector lever knob component.
Tightening torque
15.6822.54 N·m {1.5992.298 kgf·m, 1216 ft·lbf}
8. Install the HOLD switch terminals and connect the connector.
9. Install the console.
10. Connect the negative battery cable.

End Of Sie

TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E561419440W01

Operating Inspection
1. Verify that the starter operates only when the ignition switch is at the START position with the selector lever in
P or N position.
• If not as specified, adjust the TR switch.
2. Verify that the back-up lights illuminate when shifted to R position with the ignition switch at the ON position.
• If not as specified, adjust the TR switch.
Continuity Inspection
Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion. Be
sure not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

K14

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
3. Disconnect the TR switch connector.

A6E5614W008

4. Inspect for continuity at the TR switch.
• If not as specified, adjust the TR switch and
go to Step 4.
5. Reinspect for continuity at TR switch.
• If not as specified, replace the TR switch.
(See K15 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR)
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Connect the TR switch connector.
7. Install the air cleaner component. (See F10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
8. Connect the negative battery cable.

End Of Sie RANGE (TR) SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TRANSAXLE

A6E5614W010

A6E561419440W02

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion. Be
sure not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.
3. Disconnect the TR switch connector.
4. Remove the clip and disconnect the selector
cable.
Caution
• Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the
manual shaft lever when removing the
manual shaft nut, or the transaxle may be
damaged.

A6E5614W011

5. Set the adjustable wrench as shown to hold the
manual shaft lever.
6. Remove the manual shaft nut and washer.

A6E5614W100

K15

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
7. Remove the manual shaft lever.
8. Remove the TR switch.

A6E5614W012

9. Rotate the manual shaft to the converter housing
side fully, then return 2 notches to set the N
position.

A6E5614W013

10. Turn the protrusion at resistance between the
terminals B and C become 750 ohms.

A6E5614W014

A6E5614W010

11. Install the TR switch while aligning the protrusion
and groove as shown.
12. Hand-tighten the TR switch mounting bolts.

A6E5614W016

K16

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
13. Inspect the resistance between the terminals B
and C.
• If not as specified, readjust the TR switch.
(See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR)
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT.)
Resistance
750 ohms
14. Tighten the TR switch mounting bolts.
Tightening torque
811 N·m {82112 kgf·cm, 7197 in·lbf}

A6E5614W010

Caution
• Do not use an impact wrench. Hold the manual shaft lever when removing the manual shaft nut, or
the transaxle may be damaged.
15. Install the manual shaft lever and the washer.

A6E5614W012

16. Set the adjustable wrench as shown to hold the
manual shaft lever, and tighten the manual shaft
nut.
Tightening torque
3246 N·m {3.24.7 kgf·m, 2433 ft·lbf}

A6E5614W101

17. Install the clip to the SELECTOR CABLE as
shown in the figure.
18. Shift the selector lever to P position.
19. Turn the manual shaft lever to P position.

A6E5614W018

K17

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
20. Connect the selector cable.
21. Inspect for continuity at the TR switch. (See K14
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
• If not as specified, readjust the TR switch.
(See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR)
SWITCH ADJUSTMENT.)
22. Connect the TR switch connector.
23. Install the aircleaner component. (See F10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
24. Connect the negative battery cable.
25. Inspect operation of the TR switch. (See K14
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
• If not as specified, readjust the TR switch. (See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E5614W019

End Of Sie

TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH ADJUSTMENT

A6E561419440W03

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E5614W011

4. Rotate the manual shaft to the converter housing
side fully, then return 2 notches to set the N
position.

A6E5614W013

5. Disconnect the TR switch connector.

A6E5614W008

K18

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
6. Loosen the TR switch mounting bolts.

A6E5614W020

7. Measure the resistance between the terminals B
and C.
8. Adjust the switch to the point as follow.
Resistance standard value
750 ohms

9. Tighten the TR switch mounting bolts.
Tightening torque
811 N·m {82112 kgf·cm, 7197 in·lbf}
A6E5614W010

10. Move the selector lever to N position.
11. Verify that the TR switch is aligned with N
position.
12. Connect the TR switch connector.
13. Install the clip to the selector cable as shown in
the figure.

A6E5614W018

14. Connect the selector cable to the manual shaft
lever as shown in the figure.
15. Inspect operation of the TR switch. (See K14
TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
• If not as specified, readjust the TR switch.
16. Install the air cleaner component. (See F10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
17. Connect the negative battery cable.
A6E5614W019

End
Of Sie FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR INSPECTION
TRANSAXLE

A6E561419010W01

On-Vehicle Inspection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion. Be
sure not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.

K19

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
3. Disconnect the transaxle connector.

A6E5614W021

4. Measure the resistance between the terminals E
and H.
• If it is out of specification, perform the offvehicle inspection of TFT sensor. (See K21
TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
ATF temperature (°°C {°°F})
20 {4}
0 {32}
20 {68}
40 {104}
60 {140}
80 {176}
100 {212}
120 {248}
130 {266}

Resistance (kilohm)
236324
84.3110
33.542.0
14.717.9
7.088.17
3.614.15
1.962.24
1.131.28
0.870.98

A6E5614W022

5. Install the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Connect the negative battery cable.
Off-Vehicle Inspection
Warning
• When the transaxle and ATF are hot, they can badly burn. Turn off the engine and wait until they
are cool before replacing ATF.
1. Remove the control valve body. (See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL.)
2. Remove the transaxle connector.
3. Remove the TFT sensor from the strainer, and
connect it to the transaxle connector.
4. Place the TFT sensor and a thermometer in ATF
as shown, and heat the ATF gradually.

A6E5614W023

K20

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
5. Measure resistance between the terminals of the
TFT sensor.
• If not as specified, replace the TFT sensor.
(See K21 TRANSAXLE FLUID
TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
ATF temperature (°°C {°°F})
-20 {-4}
0 {32}
20 {68}
40 {104}
60 {140}
80 {176}
100 {212}
120 {248}
130 {266}

Resistance (kilohm)
236324
84.3110
33.542.0
14.717.9
7.088.17
3.614.15
1.962.24
1.131.28
0.870.98

A6E5614W024

6. Disconnect the TFT sensor from the transaxle connector, and install it to the oil strainer.
7. Install the transaxle connector.
8. Install the control valve body. (See K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

End Of Sie

TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E561419010W02

Warning
• When the transaxle and ATF are hot, they can badly burn. Turn off the engine and wait until they
are cool before replacing the ATF.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the oil pan. (See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL.)
Disconnect the TFT sensor connector.
Remove the TFT sensor.
Install a TFT sensor.
Connect the TFT sensor connector.
Install the oil pan. (See K35 CONTROL VALVE
BODY INSTALLATION.)
7. Carry out the mechanical system test. (See K6
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)

A6E5614W025

EndPRESSURE
Of Sie
OIL
SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E561421550W01

Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause poor connection or corrosion. Be sure
not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.
On-vehicle Inspection (harness inspection)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the under cover.

K21

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
3. Disconnect the cord assembly connector.

A6E5614W026

4. Verify that there is no continuity between cord
assembly terminal and ground.
• If as continuity, inspect the cord assembly.
• If the cord assembly is okay, inspect the oil
pressure switch. (See K22 On-vehicle
Inspection (oil pressure switch inspection).)
5. Connect the cord assembly connector.
6. Install the under cover.
7. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E5614W027

On-vehicle Inspection (oil pressure switch inspection)
1. Remove the under cover.
2. Disconnect the cord assembly connector.
3. Start the engine, with gear position in N or P.
4. Reaffirm that there is no continuity between cord
assembly terminal and ground.
5. Firmly depress the brake pedal with the left foot.
6. Shift the selector lever to D range.

A6E5614W026

7. Verify that there is no continuity between cord
assembly terminal and ground.
• If not as specified,replace the oil pressure
switch. (See K23 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
8. Connect the oil pressure switch connector.
9. Install the under cover.
10. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E5614W094

K22

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Off-vehicle inspection
1. Remove the oil pressure switch.
2. Apply air pressure at 400440 kPa {4.14.4kgf/cm2,5863psi}
3. Inspect continuity the between oil pressure switch
terminal and screw part.
• If not as continuity, replace the oil pressure
switch. (See K23 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Install the oil pressure switch.

A6E5614W028

End
Of Sie
OIL PRESSURE
SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E561421550W02

Warning
• When the transaxle and ATF are hot, they can badly burn. Turn off the engine and wait untill they
are cool before replacing ATF.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the under cover.
Disconnect the cord assembly connector.
Remove the oil pressure switch.
Install the oil pressure switch.
Tightening torque
17.122.1N·m {1.752.25kgf·m, 13
16ft·lbf}

6. Connect the oil pressure switch connector.
7. Install the under cover.
8. Connect the negative battery cable.
A6E5614W026

End Of Sie
INPUT/TURBINE
SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E561421550W03

Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion. Be
sure not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E5614W030

K23

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
5. Measure resistance between the terminals of the
input/turbine speed sensor.
• If not as specified, replace the input/turbine
speed sensor.
Resistance
250600 ohms (ATF temperature: 40160
°C {40320 ° F})
6. Connect the input/turbine speed sensor
connector.
7. Install the air cleaner component. (See F10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
8. Install the battery and battery tray.
9. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E5614W031

End Of Sie

INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E561421550W04

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the battery and battery tray.
Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disconnect the input/turbine speed sensor
connector.
5. Remove the input/turbine speed sensor.
6. Apply ATF to a new O-ring and install it on a new
input/turbine speed sensor.
7. Install the input/turbine speed sensor.
Tightening torque
811 N·m {82112 kgf·cm, 7197 in·lbf}

8. Connect the input/turbine speed sensor
connector.
9. Install the air cleaner component. (See F10
INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
10. Install the battery and battery tray.
11. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E5614W030

End Of Sie

VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR (VSS) INSPECTION

A6E561401030W05

Visual Inspection
1. Remove the VSS. (See K26 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Make sure that the sensor is free of any metallic shavings or particles.
• If any are found on the sensor, clean them off.
3. Install the VSS. (See K26 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Wave profile Inspection
1. Remove the PCM. (See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC connector.
3. Connect osilloscope test leads to the following PCM connector terminals.
• (+) lead: PCM terminal 3C
• (-) lead: PCM terminal 1D
4. Start the engine.
5. Monitor VSS PID.

K24

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
6. Inspect wave profile.
• PCM terminal: 3C (+) - 1D (-)
• Oscilloscope setting: 1 V/DIV (Y), 2.5 ms/DIV
(X), DC range
• Vehicle condition: drive the vehicle with 32
km/h{20 mph}
If wave profile or voltage are out of
specifications, carry out the Open Circuit
Inspection or Short Circuit Inspection

A6E5614W102

Power Supply Voltage Inspection
1. Disconnect the VSS connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON.
3. Measure voltage at VSS connector terminal B
(wiring harness side).
Specification
4.55.5 V

• If voltage is okay, go to Open Circuit
Inspection and Short Circuit Inspection.
• If voltage is wrong, repair wiring harness
between VSS and PCM.
A6E5614W033

Open Circuit Inspection
1. Inspect the following circuit for open.
• Power circuit (VSS connector terminal A to main relay terminal D)
• Ground circuit (VSS connector terminal C to GND)
• If an open circuit or short circuit is found, repair the malfunctioning wiring harness.
• If there are no open or short circuits, perform the sensor rotor inspection.
Short Circuit Inspection
1. Inspect the following circuit for short.
• Power circuit (VSS connector terminal A to
main relay terminal D)
• If an open circuit or short circuit is found,
repair the malfunctioning wiring harness.
• If there are no open or short circuits, perform
the sensor rotor inspection.

A6E5614W035

Sensor Rotor Inspection
1. Remove the VSS. (See K26 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Shift the selector lever to N position.
3. Inspect sensor rotor surface via VSS installation hole while rotating the front tire manually.
(1) Is sensor rotor free of damage and cracks?
(2) Is sensor rotor free of any metallic shavings or particles?
• If sensor rotor is okay, replace the VSS.
• If there is a problem, clean or replace the sensor rotor.

End Of Sie

K25

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER SENSOR (VSS) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E561401030W06

Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion. Be
sure not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.
• If foreign materials are stuck to the VSS, disturbance by magnetic flux can cause sensor output to
be abnormal and thereby negatively affect control. Make sure that foreign materials such as iron
filings are not stuck to the VSS during installation.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the under cover.
Disconnect the VSS connector.
Remove the VSS.
Apply ATF to a new O-ring and install it on a new
VSS.

A6E5614W037

6. Install the VSS.
Tightening torque
811 N·m {82112 kgf·cm, 7197 in·lbf}
7. Connect the VSS connector.
8. Install the under cover.
9. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E5614W037

End Of Sie VALVE INSPECTION
SOLENOID
Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle Inspection)

A6E561421280W01

Caution
• Water or foreign objects entering the connector can cause a poor connection or corrosion. Be
sure not to drop water or foreign objects on the connector when disconnecting it.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the transaxle connector.
Note
• When inspecting the pressure control
solenoid, connect the ground connection to
the ground terminal (terminal I) of the
pressure control solenoid inside the solenoid
valve connector.

A6E5614W021

K26

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
4. Measure the resistance between the following
terminals.
• If not as specified, inspect the ground, then
perform the operating inspection.
ATF temperature: 40150 °C {40302 ° F}
Terminal

Solenoid valve

AGND
CGND
GGND
BGND
FGND
DI

Shift solenoid A
Shift solenoid B
Shift solenoid C
Shift solenoid D
Shift solenoid E
Pressure control

Resistance
(ohm)
1.04.2
1.04.2
1.04.2
10.926.2
10.926.2
2.47.3

A6E5614W039

5. Connect the transaxle connector.
6. Install the air cleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Connect the negative battery cable.
Operating Inspection
1. Disconnect the transaxle connector.

Caution
• Do not apply battery position voltage to terminals A, B, C, D, F and G for more than three seconds.
Note
• Because the operation sound of the valves is small, perform inspection in a quiet place.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to terminals A,B,C, F or G and battery negative voltage to GND, and verify that
operating sound is heard from solenoid.
• If the "click" is not heard, inspect the transaxle harness.
If the transaxle harness is okay, perform the resistance inspection (off-vehicle inspection).
If there is a problem, repair or replace the transaxle harness.
3. Apply battery positive voltage to terminal D and
battery negative voltage to terminal I, and verify
that operating sound is heard from solenoid.
• If the "click" is not heard, inspect the transaxle
harness.
If transaxle harness is okay, perform the
resistance inspection (off-vehicle
inspection)
If there is a problem, repair or replace the
transaxle harness.
A6E5614W040

Resistance Inspection (Off-Vehicle Inspection)
1. Remove the control valve body. (See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Measure the resistance of each solenoid valve individually.
• If not as specified, replace the solenoid valve.
3. Install the control valve body. (See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

K27

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Pressure control solenoid
Resistance
2.47.3 ohms
(ATF temperature: 40150 ° C {40302
°F})

A6E5614W041

Shift solenoid A, B, C
Resistance
1.04.2 ohms
(ATF temperature: 40150 ° C {40302
°F})

A6E5614W042

Shift solenoid D, E
Resistance
10.926.2 ohms
(ATF temperature: 40150 ° C {40302
°F})

A6E5614W043

End Of Sie VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SOLENOID
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the under cover.
Remove the control valve body. (See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL.)
Remove the solenoid valve(s).
Apply ATF to a new O-ring and install it on the
solenoid valve.

A6E561421280W02

A6E5614W044

K28

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
6. Install the solenoid valve in the control valve
body.
Tightening torque
7.810.8 N·m
{80110 kgf·cm, 7095.4 in·lbf}
7. Install the control valve body. (See K34
CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL.)
8. Install the under cover.
9. Connect the negative battery cable.
10. Add ATF and, with the engine idling, inspect the
ATF level and inspect for leakage. (See K12
Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
11. Carry out the mechanical system test. (See K6 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)
12. Carry out the road test. (See K9 ROAD TEST.)

A6E5614W045

End Of Sie

PCM INSPECTION
1. Inspect the PCM. (See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

A6E561418880W01

End Of Sie

PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove and install the PCM. (See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E561418880W02

End Of Sie

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

A6E561401030W07

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the battery and battery tray.
Remove the aircleaner component. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front tires and splash shield.
Remove the under cover.
Remove the steering gear and power steering pipe. (See N10 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
7. Remove the front auto leveling sensor. (See T32 FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
8. Drain the ATF. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
Warning
• Improperly jacking a transaxle is dangerous. It can slip off the jack and may cause serious injury.
Caution
• To prevent the torque converter and transaxle from separating, remove the transaxle without
tilting it toward the torque converter.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

Remove in the order shown in the figure.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Adjust the headlight zeroset. (See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
Add ATF to the specified level. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
Carry out the mechanical system test. (See K6 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)
Test item
Service item

ATX replacement
ATX overhaul
Torque converter
replacement
Oil pump
replacement
Clutch system
replacement

Line
pressure
test
×
×
×

Stall test

Time lag
test

×
×

× : Test to be performed after the service work
14. Carry out the road test. (See K9 ROAD TEST.)

K29

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

A6E5614W046
.

O2 sensor connector

Oil pressure switch connector (for oil filter)

K30

3
4

Oil pressure switch connector (for ATX)
Input/turbin speed sensor connector

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

TR switch connector
Transaxle connector
VSS connector
Oil dipstick and filler tube
Harness bracket
Oil hose
Selector cable
Transaxle mounting bolt (upper side)
Starter
Endplate cover
Tie-rod end ball joint
(See N11 Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note)
Stabilizer control link
Damper fork
Lower arm (front, rear) ball joint
(See R19 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Drive shaft
(See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

20
21
22

23
24
25

26
27
28

Drive shaft
(See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Joint shaft
(See M12 JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
No.1 engine mount
(See K31 No.1 Engine Mount Bracket Removal
Note)
(See K33 No.1 Engine Mount and No.4 Engine
Mount Bracket Installation Note)
Crossmember bracket
Crossmember (See R23 FRONT
CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Torque converter installation nuts (See K32 Torque
Converter Nuts Removal Note)(SeeK33 Torque
Converter Nuts Installation Note)
No.4 engine mount
(See K33 No.1 Engine Mount and No.4 Engine
Mount Bracket Installation Note)
Transaxle mounting bolt (lower side)
Transaxle (See K31 Transaxle Removal Note)(K
32 Transaxle Installation Note)

No.1 Engine Mount Bracket Removal Note
1. Support the engine using the SST before removing the No.1 engine mount.
2. Remove the No.1 engine mount.

A6E5614W049

Transaxle Removal Note
1. Loosen the part marked A and lean the engine
toward the transaxle.
2. Support the transaxle on a jack.
3. Remove the transaxle mounting bolts.

A6E5614W050

K31

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
4. Remove the transaxle.

A6E5614W051

Transaxle Installation Note
1. Set the transaxle on a jack and lift it.
2. Install the transaxle mounting bolts.
Tightening torque
37.352 N·m {3.85.3 kgf·m, 2838 ft·lbf}

A6E5614W052

Torque Converter Nuts Removal Note
1. Hold the cankshaft pulley to prevent drive plate
from rotating.

A6E5614W091

2. Remove the torque converter nuts from the
starter installation hole.

A6E5614W092

K32

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Torque Converter Nuts Installation Note
1. Hold the cankshaft pulley to prevent drive plate
from rotating.
Caution
• Loosely and equally tighten the torque
converter nuts, then further tighten them
to the specified tightening torque.

A6E5614W091

2. Tighten the torque converter mounting nuts.
Tightening torque
34.360.8 N·m {3.56.2 kgf·m, 2545 ft·lbf}

A6E5614W092

Tightening torque
A, B, C: 66.693.1 N·m {6.89.4 kgf·m, 50
68 ft·lbf}
D: 85.3116.6 N·m {8.711.8 kgf·m, 6385
ft·lbf}

A6E5112W005

8. Tighten the bolt D to the No.1 engine mount.
Tightening torque
E: 85.3116.6 N·m {8.711.8 kgf·m, 6385
ft·lbf}
9. Remove the SST (49 E017 5A0).

A6E5112W006

EndSEAL
Of SieREPLACEMENT
OIL
1. Drain the ATF. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)

A6E561401032W01

Caution

K33

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
• The oil seal is easily damaged by the sharp edges of the drive shaft splines. Do not let the splines
contact the oil seal.
2. Remove the drive shaft. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the oil seal.
4. Using the SST and a hammer, tap a new oil seal
in evenly until the SST contacts the transaxle
case.
5. Coat the lip of the oil seal with transaxle oil.
6. Install the drive shaft. (See M17 DRIVE SHAFT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7. Add ATF to the specified level. (See K13
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)
8. Carry out the mechanical system test. (See K6
MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)
A6E5614W056

End Of SieVALVE BODY REMOVAL
CONTROL
On-Vehicle Removal

A6E561421100W01

Warning
• Using compressed air can cause dirt and other particles to fly out, causing injury to the eyes.
Wear protective eyes whenever using compressed air.
Caution
• Clean the transaxle exterior throughout with a steam cleaner or cleaning solvents before removal.
• If any old sealant gets into the transaxle during installation of the oil pan, trouble may occur in the
transaxle case and oil pan. Clean with cleaning fluids.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Drain the ATF into a separate suitable container. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)
3. Remove the under cover.
4. Remove the front tires and splash shield.
5. Remove the crossmember. (See R23 FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
6. Remove the oil pan.
7. Disconnect the transaxle connectors and transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor connector.
8. Remove the oil strainer.

A6E5614W025

9. Remove the control valve body installation bolts A
as shown, then remove the control valve body
component as shown.

A6E5614W058

K34

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
10. Remove the accumulators and accumulator
springs.

A6E5614W059

End Of SieVALVE BODY INSTALLATION
CONTROL

A6E561421100W02

On-Vehicle Installation
Caution
• Be sure to align the parking rod and the
manual valve.

A6E5614W060

1. Install the accumulator springs and accumulators
into the transaxle case.
Spring
Servo apply
accumulator
large spring
Servo apply
accumulator
small spring
Forward
accumulator
small spring
Forward
accumulator
large spring

Outer
diameter
(mm {in})

Free
Length
(mm
{in})

No. of
coils

Wire
diameter
(mm {in})

21.0
{0.827}

67.8
{2.669}

10.3

3.5
{0.138}

13.0
{0.512}

67.8
{2.669}

17.1

2.2
{0.087}

21.0
{0.827}

75.0
{2.953}

10.7

2.3
{0.091}

15.6
{0.614}

49.0
{1.929}

7.7

2.4
{0.094}

A6E5614W061

K35

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
2. Install the control valve body component.
Tightening torque
7.810.8 N·m
{80110 kgf·cm, 7095 in·lbf}
Bolt length (measured from below the head)
B: 40 mm {1.575 in}
No mark: 70 mm {2.756 in}
3. Install the oil strainer.
4. Match the harness colors, then connect the
solenoid connector and TFT sensor connector.
Spring
Pressure control solenoid
Shift solenoid A
Shift solenoid B
Shift solenoid C
Shift solenoid D
Shift solenoid E

A6E5614W062

Color of connector
(harness side)
Black
White
Blue
Green
white
Black

5. Install the ground.
Tightening torque
7.810.8 N·m {80110 kgf·cm, 7095
in·lbf}

A6E5614W063

6. Apply a light coat of silicon sealant to the contact
surfaces of the oil pan and transaxle case.
7. Install the oil pan.
Tightening torque
68 N·m {6281 kgf·cm, 5370 in·lbf}
8. Install the crossmember. (See R23 FRONT
CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
9. Install the front tires and splash shield.
10. Install the under cover.
11. Connect the negative battery cable.
12. Add ATF and with the engine idling, inspect the
ATF level. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
13. Carry out the mechanical system test. (See K6 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)
14. Carry out the road test. (See K9 ROAD TEST.)

A6E5614W064

End Of Sie

OIL COOLER FLUSHING

A6E561419900W01

Note
• The contaminated cooler line (oil pipes and hoses) and auxiliary cooler must be flushed completely when
ATX is overhauled or replaced.

K36

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
1. Remove the two oil cooler line hoses and apply
air pressure of 196 kPa {2.0 kgf/cm2, 28 psi}
from the return hose (pipe) side.
Caution
• Power flushing should be performed very
carefully when removing the
accumulated debris from the fluid baffle,
otherwise the debris cannot be removed
or the problem becomes even worse.
2. If there is no air blown out the feed side, flush the
oil cooler lines using the power-flushing tool. (See
K38 Power Flushing)
Recommended power-flushing manufacturer
Manufacturer

Part number

Kent Moore

J35944-AMAZ

OTC

60081

Description
Flushing kit or
equivalent
Portable torque
converter, oil cooler
cleaner or equivalent

3. If there is ventilation, carry out the following steps.
A6E5614W065

(1) Remove the oil pan and inspect the fluid filter
element from the front filter.
(2) If the element is covered with too much debris
or particles and cannot be seen, replace the
oil cooler. (See K39 OIL COOLER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.) (See K41 OIL
COOLER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
(3) If the element can be seen, flush the oil cooler
lines using the power-flushing tool.
• Performing back and reverse power
flushing two times each does not work
because debris or particles flow out from
the feed pipe side of ATX.

A6E5614W066

K37

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Power Flushing
Repair procedure
1. Before power flushing, inspect the hoses/lines and clamps. Power flushing must begin with back flushing
followed by forward flushing to quickly dislodge the restriction. If back flushing is not performed before forward
flushing, the restriction could further reduce the ATF flow through the internal mesh type baffle of the cooler
and flushing will not be effective or possible.
Inspecting oil lines and clamps
1. Be sure to inspect the lines (hoses/pipes) for cuts, crimps (pinched), cracks or any other damage before
reusing them.
• If any problems exist, replace lines and clamps.
Caution
• Always use new clamps when replacing hoses.
Back flushing
1. Using the power flushing equipment
manufacturer's instructions, connect equipment
so the flushing fluid flows in the opposite direction
of normal fluid flow.
2. Flush oil cooler/lines until discharge fluid is clean.
Caution
• If the cooler can not be properly flushed
using recommended equipment, send the
radiator out for sublet cleaning or
replace.
A6E5614W067

Forward flushing
1. Connect power flushing equipment so the flushing fluid flows in the direction of normal fluid flow.
2. Flush oil cooler/lines until discharge fluid is clean.

A6E5614W068

End Of Sie

K38

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
OIL COOLER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E561419900W02

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Drain the ATF into a container. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
3. Remove the radiator. (See E6 RADIATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Add ATF to the specified level. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
7. Connect the negative battery cable.
8. Inspect for oil leakage from the oil pipes and oil hoses.
9. Inspect for coolant from the hoses.
10. Inspect the ATF level and condition. (See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) INSPECTION.)
11. Carry out the line pressure test. (See K6 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)
12. Carry out the road test. (See K9 ROAD TEST.)
WITH OIL COOLER

A6E5614W069
.

1
2

Oil hose
(See K40 Oil Pipe, Hose Clamp, Oil Hose
Installation Note.)
Hose clamp
(See K40 Oil Pipe, Hose Clamp, Oil Hose
Installation Note.)

3
4
5
6

Oil cooler
Connector bolt
O-ring
Radiator (in tank oil cooler)
(See K40 Radiator (In Tank Oil Cooler) Installation
Note.)

K39

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
WITHOUT OIL COOLER

A6E5614W080
.

1
2
3

Oil hose
(See K40 Oil Pipe, Hose Clamp, Oil Hose
Installation Note.)
Hose clamp
(See K40 Oil Pipe, Hose Clamp, Oil Hose
Installation Note.)
Connector bolt

4
5

O-ring
Radiator (in tank oil cooler)
(See K40 Radiator (In Tank Oil Cooler) Installation
Note.)

Radiator (In Tank Oil Cooler) Installation Note
1. The automatic transaxle oil cooler flushing must be performed whenever a transaxle is removed for service
because the existing fluid may be contaminated, and to prevent contamination of new fluid.
Note
• The flushing must be performed after installation of the overhauled or replacing transaxle.
2. Follow the instructions in the manufacturers publication for flushing operation.
Oil Pipe, Hose Clamp, Oil Hose Installation Note
1. Apply compressed air to cooler-side opening, and
blow any remaining grime and foreign material
from the cooler pipes. Compressed air should be
applied for no less than one minute.

A6E5614W070

K40

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
2. Align the marks, and slide the oil hose onto the oil
pipe until it is fully seated as shown.
Note
• If reusing the hose, install the new hose
clamp exactly on the mark left by the
previous hose camp.Then apply force to the
hose clamp in the direction of the arrow in
order to fit the clamp in the place.
3. Install the new hose clamp onto the hose.
4. Verify that the hose clamp does not interfere with
any other components.

A6E5614W071

End Of Sie

OIL COOLER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E561419900W03

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
.

A6E5614W072

1
2

3
4

Mount rubber
Radiator outer tank (in tank oil cooler)
(See K42 Radiator Outer Tank (In Tank Oil Cooler)
Removal Note.)
(See K42 Radiator Outer Tank (In Tank Oil Cooler)
Installation Note.)
O-ring
Washer

5
6
7

Drain plug
ATF cooler
Radiator

K41

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Radiator Outer Tank (In Tank Oil Cooler) Removal Note
1. Inspect the height of the header tabs.
2. Insert the end of a medium tip screwdriver
between the end of the header tab and the outer
tank.
Note
• Do not open more tabs than necessary for
tank removal.

A6E5614W073

3. Pivot the screwdriver to pry the tab away from the
tank and repeat the procedure for each tab.
4. Remove the radiator outer tank and O-ring
(gasket) from the core header when all of the tabs
are opened.
Note
• If any header tabs are missing from the core,
replace the radiator.
5. Inspect the gasket surface of the radiator core
header to ensure it is clean and free of foreign
material or damage.
6. Inspect the radiator outer tank for warping. If it is
warped, replace radiator tank.

A6E5614W074

Radiator Outer Tank (In Tank Oil Cooler) Installation Note
1. Install a new O-ring and ensure it is not twisted.
Note
• The old O-ring must be replaced.
2. Position the radiator tank in the original direction
to the core using care not to scratch the tank
sealing surface with the header tabs.
Note
• Step 3 will set jaw opening to the correct
specification.

A6E5614W075

3. With the jaws of locking-type pliers (vise grips)
closed and locked, turn the adjusting screw to
position the jaws against the drill bit with the
diameter measured (height) in removal procedure
1. Tighten the lock nut on the adjusting screw
against the handle to lock the adjustment in
place.

A6E5614W093

K42

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
4. Squeeze the header tabs down in order as shown
against the lip of radiator outer tank base with
locking-type pliers while rotating the pliers toward
the tank.

A6E5614W076

5. Verify the height of the header tabs is same as
the height before removal.
6. Inspect for leakage from radiator. (See E4
ENGINE COOLANT LEAKAGE INSPECTION.)

A6E5614W073

End
OfPLATE
Sie REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DRIVE
1. Remove the transaxle.(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the figure.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E561419020W01

1
2
3

Drive plate mounting bolts
(See K44 Drive Plate Mounting Bolts Removal
Note.)
Adapter
Drive plate
(See K44 Drive Plate Installation Note.)

A6E5614W078

K43

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE
Drive Plate Mounting Bolts Removal Note
1. Set the SST or equivalent against the drive plate.
2. Remove the bolts and the drive plate.

A6E5614W079

Drive Plate Installation Note
Caution
• If the bolts are reused, remove the oil sealant from the bolt threads. Tightening a bolt that has old
sealant on it can cause thread damage.
1. Remove the sealant from the bolts hole in the crankshaft and from the drive plate mounting bolts.
Note
• If all the previous sealant cannot be removed from a bolt, replace the bolts.
• Do not apply sealant if a new bolts is used.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Install the drive plate.
Install the adapter.
Apply sealant to the drive plate mounting bolts and install them.
Set the SST or equivalent against the drive plate.
Caution
• When installing sealant covered bolts, tighten them immediately. Leaving these bolts in a half
installed condition could cause them to be stuck that way, due to the natural hardening or the
sealant.

6. Tighten the drive plate mounting bolts in two or
three steps in the order shown.
Tightening torque
1081116 N·m {11.011.8 kgf·m, 8085
ft·lbf}
7. Install the transaxle. (See K29 AUTOMATIC
TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E5614W081

End Of Sie

K44

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
SHIFT-LOCK INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
2. Verify that the selector lever is in P position.
3. Depress the brake pedal and verify that the selector lever can be shifted from P position.
• If a malfunction is found, inspect the interlock cable.
(See K45 INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION.)

A6E561630000W01

End Of Sie

KEY INTERLOCK INSPECTION

A6E561609000W01

1. Verify that the ignition key cannot be pulled out except in P position.
• If a malfunction is found, inspect the interlock cable. (See K45 INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION.)

End Of Sie

INTERLOCK CABLE INSPECTION
1. Remove the interlock cable.
2. With the slider pin as shown in the figure, verify that the interlock cable moves freely.
• If a malfunction is found, replace the interlock cable.

A6E561609000W02

A6E5616W001

End
Of Sie LEVER INSPECTION
SELECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn the ignition switch to ON (engine OFF).
With the brake pedal depressed, verify that there is a "click" at each range when shifted.
Verify that the selector lever can be shifted.
Verify that there is a "click" at each position when
shifted from P position to L range.
5. Verify that the positions of the selector lever and
the indicator are aligned.
• If not as specified, adjust the TR switch.(See
K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT.)
6. Verify that the vehicle operates in each selected
range.

A6E561646102W01

A6E5616W002

End Of Sie

K45

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
SELECTOR CABLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Remove the center console.
2. Shift the selector lever to P position.
3. Unlock the lock piece of the selector cable
(selector lever side) in the order shown in the
figure.
4. Verify that the manual shaft is in P position.

A6E561646102W02

A6E5616W003

5. Lock the lock piece of the selector cable (selector
lever side) in the order shown in the figure.
6. Install the center console.
7. Shift the selector lever from P position to L range,
and make sure that there are no other
components in that area to interfere with the
lever.

A6E5616W004

End Of Sie LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SELECTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

A6E561646102W03

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove battery and battery tray.
Remove the air cleaner compornent. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the console.
Remove the dashboard compleat.
(See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the SAS control module.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the climate control unit. (See U44 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL.) (See U45 CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION.)
Remove the rear heat duct. (See U23 REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order shown in the figure.
Remove the battery, battery tray and battery bracket.

K46

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E5616W005

1
2
3
4

Column cover(with key interlock)
Clip(with key interlock)
Clip(with key interlock)
Interlock cable(with key interlock)
(See K49 Interlock Cable Installation Note.)

5
6

Selector cable
(See K48 Selector Cable Removal Note.)
(See K48 Selector Cable Installation Note.)
Selector lever

K47

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
Selector Cable Removal Note
1. Remove the clip.
2. Remove the selector cable.

A6E5616W006

Selector Cable Installation Note
1. Install the selector cable to the selector lever certainly.
2. Install the selector cable to the bracket certainly.
Note
• Step 3, 4 is for the selector cable
replacement only.
3. Verify that the selector lever is in P position.

A6E5616W020

4. Lock the lock piece of the selector cable (selector
lever side) in the order shown in the figure.

A6E5616W004

5. Verify that the manual shaft is in P position.

A6E5616W007

K48

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
Caution
• Bending the selector cable in the manner
shown in the figure will damage the cable
and it may become loose when shifted.
When installing the selector cable, hold it
straight.
Note
• Install the selector lever to the manual shaft
lever with the spring side of the selector
cable end facing the front of the vehicle.

A6E5616W008

6. Install the selector lever to the manual shaft lever
in such a way that the selector cable does not bear a load.
7. Confirm that the end of the manual shift lever sticks out of the end of the selector cable.
8. Install the selector cable to the selector cable securely bracket.
Interlock Cable Installation Note
1. Verify that the shift the selector lever in P position and ignition key is in LOCK position.
2. Press the lock unit onto the brake pedal stopper bracket.
3. From this position, slide the lock unit to fix the
lock unit hook into the bracket hole securely as
shown in the figure.

Caution
• Allowing the interlock cable to be bent or
twisted during installation can affect the
lock unit operation.

A6E5616W009

4. Install the interlock cable end onto the cam pin on
the selector lever.

A6E5616W010

5. Fit the interlock cable in the Ugroove in the
selector lever base plate, and install the clip.
Caution
• Applying a load to the interlock cable
while pressing the lock piece in can
affect the lock unit operation.

A6E5616W011

K49

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
6. Press the interlock cable lock piece in unitl it is
locked.
Note
• Step 7 is for the interlock cable replacement
only.

A6E5616W012

7. Remove the lock unit pin as shown in the figure.
8. Turn the ignition key in ACC position.
9. Install the interlock cable to the key cylinder.

A6E5616W013

10. Slide the outer casing to the key cylinder, and
insert the clip over the convex part of the outer
casing.

A6E5616W014

End Of Sie

K50

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE SHIFT MECHANISM
SELECTOR LEVER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E561646102W04

1. Disassemble in the order shown in the figure.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E5616W015

1
2
3

Connector
(See K51 Connector Disassembly Note.)
Selector lever knob component
Cover

4
5
6

Indicator panel
Selector illumination light
Selector lever

Connector Disassembly Note
1. Insert a thin piece of metal from the terminal side
of the connector, and press down the terminal
locking tab.
2. Pull the terminal out of the connector.

A6E5616W016

End Of Sie

K51

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FOREWORD

A6E567001030W01

• When the customer reports a vehicle malfunction, check the malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), HOLD indicator
light flashing, and PCM memory for diagnostic trouble code (DTC), then diagnose the malfunction according to
following flowchart.
If the DTC exists, diagnose the applicable DTC. (See K53 DTC TABLE.)
If the DTC does not exist, MIL does not illuminate, and HOLD indicator light flashes, diagnose the
applicable symptom troubleshooting. (See K113 SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE.)

A6E5670W013

*:Malfunction indicator lamp (MIL), HOLD indicator light

End Of Sie

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
DTC Reading Procedure
(See F62 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST.)

A6E567001030W02

End Of Sie

AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE

A6E567001030W03

Caution
• After repairing a malfunction, perform this procedure to verify that the malfunction has been
corrected.
• When this procedure is carried out, be sure to drive the vehicle at lawful speed and pay attention
to the other vehicles.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Connect the WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
Turn the ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
Verify that DTCs are cleared from memory.
Decrease ATF temperature to 20 °C {68 °F} or below.
Start the engine then wait 180 seconds or more.
Warm up the engine and ATX.
• Engine coolant temperature: 60 °C {140 ° F} or above.
• Transaxle fluid temperature: 20 ° C {68 °F} or above.
7. Shift the selector lever between P position to L range while depressing brake pedal.
8. Drive the vehicle for 150 seconds or more at a vehicle speed between 25 and 59 km/h {15 and 36 mph},
then 60 km/h {37 mph} or more for 100 seconds or more.

K52

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
9. Drive the vehicle in D range and shift gears between 1st and 4th (TCC operation) gear.
10. Gradually slow down and stop the vehicle.
11. Make sure that the repaired DTC does not recur.

End Of Sie

DTC TABLE

A6E567001030W04

DTC No.

Condition

P0010
P0011
P0012
P0031
P0032
P0037
P0038
P0101
P0102
P0103
P0107
P0108
P0111
P0112
P0113
P0117
P0118
P0121
P0122
P0123
P0125
P0131
P0132
P0133
P0134
P0138
P0140
P0171
P0172
P0300
P0301
P0302
P0303
P0304
P0327
P0328
P0335
P0340
P0351
P0352
P0401
P0402
P0403
P0420

CMP actuator circuit malfunction
CMP timing over advanced
CMP timing over retarded
Front HO2S heater circuit low
Front HO2S heater circuit high
Rear HO2S heater circuit low
Rear HO2S heater circuit high
MAF sensor inconsistent with TP sensor
MAF circuit low input
MAF circuit high input
MAP sensor circuit low input
MAP sensor circuit high input
IAT circuit performance problem
IAT circuit low input
IAT circuit high input
ECT circuit low input
ECT circuit high input
Throttle position stuck close
TP circuit low input
TP circuit high input
Excessive time to enter closed loop fuel control
Front HO2S no inversion (low stuck)
Front HO2S no inversion (high stuck)
Front HO2S circuit malfunction
Front HO2S circuit no activity detected
Rear HO2S circuit high input
Rear HO2S circuit no activity detected
Fuel trim system too lean
Fuel trim system too rich
Random misfire detected
Cylinder No.1 misfire detected
Cylinder No.2 misfire detected
Cylinder No.3 misfire detected
Cylinder No.4 misfire detected
Knock sensor circuit low input
Knock sensor circuit high input
CKP sensor circuit malfunction
CMP sensor circuit malfunction
Ignition coil (No.1, No.4) circuit malfunction
Ignition coil (No.2, No.3) circuit malfunction
EGR flow insufficient detected
EGR flow excessive detected
EGR valve motor coils open or short
Catalyst system efficiency below threshold
Evaporative emission control system purge
control valve circuit malfunction
Fan control module circuit malfunction

P0443
P0480

HOLD
indicator
Monitor
MIL
DC
light
item
flashes
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

Memory
function

Page

(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

K53

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC No.

P0500
P0505
P0506
P0507
P0511
P0550
P0602
P0610
P0661
P0662
P0703
P0704
P0706

Condition
VSS circuit malfunction (MTX)
VSS circuit malfunction (ATX)
Idle control system malfunction
Idle control system RPM lower than expected
Idle control system RPM higher than expected
IAC valve circuit malfunction
PSP switch circuit malfunction
PCM programming error
Control module vehicle options error
VICS circuit low input
VICS circuit high input
Brake switch input malfunction
Clutch switch input malfunction
Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit range/
performance

HOLD
indicator
Monitor
DC
light
item
flashes
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

Memory
function

Page

CCM

(See K55 DTC
P0500)

MIL

YES

CCM

P0707

Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit low input

YES

CCM

P0708

Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit high input

YES

CCM

YES

CCM

YES

CCM

P0711
P0712
P0713

Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit
range/performance (Stuck)
Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit
malfunction (short to ground)
Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit
malfunction (open circuit)

P0715

Input/turbine speed sensor circuit malfunction

YES

CCM

P0731

Gear 1 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected) OFF

YES

CCM

P0732

Gear 2 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected) OFF

YES

CCM

P0733

Gear 3 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected) OFF

YES

CCM

P0734

Gear 4 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected) OFF

YES

CCM

P0741

Torque converter clutch (TCC) (stuck OFF)

OFF

YES

CCM

P0742

Torque converter clutch (TCC) (stuck ON)

OFF

YES

CCM

P0745

Pressure control solenoid malfunction

OFF

YES

CCM

P0751

Shift solenoid A stuck OFF

YES

CCM

P0752

Shift solenoid A stuck ON

YES

CCM

P0753

Shift solenoid A malfunction (electrical)

YES

CCM

P0756

Shift solenoid B stuck OFF

YES

CCM

P0757

Shift solenoid B stuck ON

YES

CCM

P0758

Shift solenoid B malfunction (electrical)

YES

CCM

P0761

Shift solenoid C stuck OFF

YES

CCM

K54

(See K57 DTC
P0706)
(See K58 DTC
P0707)
(See K60 DTC
P0708)
(See K63 DTC
P0711)
(See K64 DTC
P0712)
(See K65 DTC
P0713)
(See K68 DTC
P0715)
(See K70 DTC
P0731)
(See K71 DTC
P0732)
(See K73 DTC
P0733)
(See K75 DTC
P0734)
(See K77 DTC
P0741)
(See K78 DTC
P0742)
(See K80 DTC
P0745)
(See K82 DTC
P0751)
(See K83 DTC
P0752)
(See K85 DTC
P0753)
(See K87 DTC
P0756)
(See K89 DTC
P0757)
(See K90 DTC
P0758)
(See K93 DTC
P0761)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC No.

Condition

MIL

HOLD
indicator
light
flashes

Monitor
item

Memory
function

P0762

Shift solenoid C stuck ON

YES

CCM

P0763

Shift solenoid C malfunction (electrical)

YES

CCM

P0766

Shift solenoid D stuck OFF

YES

CCM

P0767

Shift solenoid D stuck ON

YES

CCM

P0768

Shift solenoid D malfunction (electrical)

YES

CCM

P0771

Shift solenoid E stuck OFF

YES

CCM

P0772

Shift solenoid E stuck ON

YES

CCM

P0773

Shift solenoid E malfunction (electrical)

YES

CCM

P0841

Oil pressure switch circuit malfunction

OFF

CCM

P0850
P1410
P1562
P2006
P2009
P2010
P2228
P2229
P2502
P2503
P2504
U0073

Neutral switch input malfunction
Variable air duct valve circuit malfunction
PCM +BB voltage low
VTCS stuck close
VTCS circuit low input
VTCS circuit high input
BARO sensor circuit low input
BARO sensor circuit high input
Generator output voltage signal no electricity
Battery overcharge
Generator terminal B circuit open
CAN bus off
PCM cannot receive any signals from ABS,
ABS/TCS or DSC HU/CM
PCM cannot receive any signals from
combination meter

U0121
U0155

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0500
DTC P0500

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Page
(See K95 DTC
P0762)
(See K96 DTC
P0763)
(See K99 DTC
P0766)
(See K100
DTC P0767)
(See K102
DTC P0768)
(See K104
DTC P0771)
(See K105
DTC P0772)
(See K107
DTC P0773)
(See K109
DTC P0841)

(See F67 DTC TABLE)
(See F67 DTC TABLE)

A6E567001030W05

Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) circuit malfunction
• Vehicle speed signal not input after following conditions are met and 4.5 seconds or more have passed
D, L, or S range.
Engine coolant temperature 60 °C {140 °F} or above.
Turbine speed 1,500 rpm or above.

Diagnostic support note:

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• HOLD indicator light flashes.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• VSS malfunction
• Open circuit between VSS terminal B and PCM terminal 3C
• Short to ground between VSS terminal B and PCM terminal 3C
• Open circuit between VSS terminal A and fuse block connector (X-01) terminal AJ
• Open circuit between VSS terminal C and body ground
• Damaged connectors between VSS and PCM
• PCM malfunction

K55

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0500

Vehicle speed sensor (VSS) circuit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME PID DATA been
recorded?
2
VERIFY RELATED SERVICE INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair Information available?
3

INSPECT VSS CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect VSS connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT VSS POWER CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Verify that VSS connector is disconnected.
• Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
• Check voltage between VSS terminal A
(harness-side) and ground
• Is voltage reading B+?
INSPECT VSS GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Verify that VSS connector is disconnected.
• Check for continuity between VSS terminal C
(harness-side) and ground
• Is there continuity?

K56

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
Information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace pin or connector, then go to Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 10.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
7
INSPECT VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN
• Disconnect PCM connector and VSS
connector.
• Inspect for continuity between VSS terminal B
and PCM terminal 3C.
• Is there continuity?
8
INSPECT VEHICLE SPEED SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Verity that VSS connector and PCM connector
are disconnected.
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
3C and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
9
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
10
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0500
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Warm up engine.
• Drive vehicle under following conditions for 4.5
seconds or more while monitoring PIDs.
Engine coolant temp: 60 °C {140 °F} or
above
Drive in L range
Frequency of input/turbine speed sensor:
800 Hz or above
• Is pending code present?
11
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace pin or connector, then go to Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 10.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 10.
No Repair VSS, then go to Step 14.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace pin or connector, then go to Step 10.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0706
DTC P0706

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E567001030W06

Transaxle range (TR) switch range/performance
• When all conditions below are satisfied and 100 seconds or more have passed.
Engine speed 530 rpm or above.
Vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or above.
voltage at PCM terminal 1W is 0.5 V or above.
P, R, N, D, S or L range/position not detected.

Diagnostic support note:

K57

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME PID DATA been
recorded?
2
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
3

INSPECT TR SWITCH
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect TR switch connector.
• Inspect for resistance between TR switch
terminals B and C (part-side).
• Is resistance okay?
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0706
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle in each range (D, S, L, and R) for
100 seconds or more under following
conditions.
Engine speed (RPM PID) 530 rpm or
above
Vehicle speed (VSS PID) 20 km/h {12 mph}
or above
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust TR switch, then go to next step.
(See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT.)

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0707
DTC P0707

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K58

A6E567001030W07

Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit low input
• When all conditions below satisfied and 100 seconds or more have passed:
Vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or above.
Engine speed 530 rpm or above.
Voltage at PCM terminal 1W is below 0.5 V.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
TR switch malfunction
Short to ground between TR switch terminal C and PCM terminal 1W
TR switch signal and TR switch ground circuits are shorted each other
PCM malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0707

Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit low input

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME PID DATA been
recorded?
2
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
3

INSPECT TR SWITCH CONNECTOR
• Turn ignition key OFF.
• Disconnect TR switch connector.
• Inspect for bent terminals of TR switch
terminals B and C (part-side).
• Are TR switch terminals okay?
INSPECT TR SWITCH
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect TR switch connector.
• Inspect for resistance between TR switch
terminals B and C (part-side).
• Is resistance okay?
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair terminals or replace TR switch, then go to Step 7.
(See K15 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust TR switch, then go to Step 7.
(See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT.)

K59

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT TR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector
• Check for continuity between TR switch
terminal C (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
6
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection at terminals 1W and
2H (damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
7
INSPECT TR SWITCH CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
• Check for continuity between TR switch
terminals B and C (harness-side).
• Is there continuity?
8
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0707
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle for 100 seconds or more under
following conditions.
Engine speed (RPM PID) 530 rpm or
above
Vehicle speed (VSS PID) 20 km/h {12 mph}
or above
• Is pending code present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Repair or replace harness for short to ground, then Go to
step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then Go to step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace harness for short, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0708
DTC P0708

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K60

A6E567001030W08

Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit high input
• When all conditions below satisfied and 100 seconds or more have passed:
Vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or above.
Engine speed 530 rpm or above.
Voltage at PCM terminal 1W is 4.79 V or above.

Diagnostic support note:

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is not available.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• HOLD indicator light flashes.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• TR switch malfunction
• Open circuit between TR switch terminal C and PCM terminal 1W
• Short to power circuit between TR switch terminal C and PCM terminal 1W
• Open circuit between TR switch terminal B and PCM terminal 2H
• Poor connection of TR switch or PCM connectors
• PCM malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0708

Transaxle range (TR) switch circuit high input

INSPECT TR SWITCH CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key OFF.
• Disconnect TR switch connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Are TR switch terminals okay?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair terminals or replace TR switch, then go to Step 9.
(See K15 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

K61

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT TR SWITCH
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect TR switch connector.
• Inspect for resistance between TR switch
terminals B and C (part-side).
• Is resistance okay?
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
5
INSPECT TR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure the voltage between TR switch
terminal C (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there voltage B+?
6
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection at terminals 1W and
2H (damaged/pulled-out pins, corrosion, etc.).
• Is there malfunction?
7
INSPECT TR SWITCH SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Check for continuity between TR switch
terminal C (harness-side) and PCM terminal
1W.
• Is there continuity?
8
INSPECT TR SWITCH GROUND CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Check for continuity between TR switch
terminal B (harness-side) and PCM terminal
2H.
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0708
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle for 100 seconds or more under
following conditions.
Engine speed (RPM PID) 530 rpm or
above
Vehicle speed (VSS PID) 20 km/h {12 mph}
or above
• Is pending code present?
10 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K62

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust TR switch, then go to Step 9.
(See K18 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
ADJUSTMENT.)

Yes Repair or replace harness for short to power, then go to
step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Repair or replace terminal, then Go to step 9.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to step 9.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness for open, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0711
DTC P0711

A6E567001030W09

Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit range/performance (stuck)
• When all conditions below are satisfied.
When 180 seconds have passed after engine is started, vehicle is driven for 150 seconds or more at
vehicle speed between 25 59 km/h {15 36 mph}, then 60 km/h {37 mph} or more for 100 seconds
or more.
P0712, P0713 not output.
Variation in ATF voltage below 0.06 V.

DETECTION Diagnostic support note:
CONDITION • This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is available if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
• HOLD indicator light does not flash.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• TFT sensor malfunction
POSSIBLE
• Connector corrosion
CAUSE
• PCM malfunction

INSPECT TFT SENSOR VOLTAGE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect breakout box to PCM.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure the voltage at PCM terminal 3D.
• Record terminal 3D voltage.
• Start engine.
• Drive vehicle at 60 km/h {37 mph} or above
for 430 seconds or more.
• Record terminal 3D voltage again.
• Is variation in voltage 0.06V or above?
INSPECT TERMINAL CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Inspect terminals for corrosion.
• Are terminals okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0711
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Decrease ATF temperature to 20 °C {68 °F} or
below.
• Start engine and wait for 180 seconds or
more.
• Drive vehicle at a vehicle speed between 25
59 km/h {15 36 mph} for 150 seconds or
more.
• Drive vehicle at vehicle speed 60 km/h {37
mph} or above for 100 seconds or more.
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace terminals, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

K63

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
End
Sie
DTC Of
P0712
DTC P0712

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E567001030W10

Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit malfunction (short to ground)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions for 150 seconds or more, PCM determines that TFT sensor
circuit has a malfunction.
TFT sensor voltage is 0.06 V or below and vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or above.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
TFT sensor malfunction
Short to ground between TFT sensor terminal A and ATX connector terminal E
Short to ground between TFT sensor terminal B and ATX connector terminal H
Short to ground between ATX connector terminal E and PCM terminal 3D
Damaged connectors between TFT sensor and PCM
PCM malfunction

K64

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect breakout box to PCM.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure the voltage at PCM terminal 3D.
• Are voltage readings above 0.06 V?
4
INSPECT TERMINAL CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Inspect for bent terminals.
• Are the terminals bent?
5
INSPECT TFT SENSOR CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Verify if voltage changes to 4.67 V or above at
PCM terminal 3D when ATX connector
disconnected.
• Does voltage change?
6
INSPECT TFT SENSOR TERMINALS
CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect TFT sensor connector.
• Inspect for bent TFT sensor terminals.
• Are the terminals bent?
7
INSPECT TFT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR SHORT
TO GROUND
• Inspect for continuity between TFT sensor
terminals (harness-side) and body ground.
A and body ground
B and body ground
• Is there continuity?
8
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between ATX connector
terminal E (vehicle harness-side) and body
ground.
• Is there continuity?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0712
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle under following condition for 150
seconds or more.
Vehicle speed (VSS PID) 20 km/h {12 mph}
or above.
• Is same DTC present?
10
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Go to intermittent concern troubleshooting procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair or replace terminals, then go to Step 9.
• If terminals cannot be repaired, replace harness, then
go to Step 9.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 8.

Yes Repair terminals or replace TFT sensor, then go to Step 9.
(See K21 TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.
Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 9.
No Replace TFT sensor, then go to step 9.
(See K21 TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0713
DTC P0713

DETECTION
CONDITION

A6E567001030W11

Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit malfunction (open circuit)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions for 150 seconds or more, PCM determines that TFT sensor
circuit has a malfunction.
TFT sensor voltage is 4.67 V or above and vehicle speed 20 km/h {12 mph} or above.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•

K65

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0713

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Transaxle fluid temperature (TFT) sensor circuit malfunction (open circuit)
• TFT sensor malfunction
• Open circuit between TFT sensor terminal A and ATX connector terminal E
• Open circuit between TFT sensor terminal B and ATX connector terminal H
• Open circuit between ATX connector terminal E and PCM terminal 3D
• Open circuit between ATX connector terminal H and PCM terminal 2H
• Damaged connectors between TFT sensor and PCM
• PCM malfunction

VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect breakout box to PCM.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure the voltage at PCM terminal 3D.
• Are voltage readings below 4.67 V?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect ATX connector connection.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion etc.).
• Is connection okay?

K66

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to intermittent concern troubleshooting procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT TFT SENSOR CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure the voltage at PCM terminal 3D when
connect between ATX connector terminals E
and H (vehicle harness-side) using jumper
wire.
• Verify that voltage changes to 0.06 V or below.
• Does voltage change?
6
INSPECT TFT SENSOR CONNECTOR FOR
POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove valve body cover.
• Disconnect TFT sensor connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
7
INSPECT TFT SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
• Check for continuity between TFT sensor
terminals (harness-side) and ATX connector
terminals (transaxle case side).
ATX connector terminal E and TFT sensor
terminal A
ATX connector terminal H and TFT sensor
terminal B
• Is there continuity?
8
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
9
INSPECT HARNESS FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Connect the PCM connector.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Inspect voltage at ATX connector terminal E
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 5 V?
10
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between ATX connector
terminal H (vehicle harness-side) and body
ground.
• Is there continuity?
11
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0713
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle under following condition for 150
seconds or more.
Vehicle speed (VSS PID) 20 km/h {12 mph}
or above.
• Is same DTC present?
12
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal or replace TFT
sensor, then go to Step 11.
(See K21 TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

Yes Replace TFT sensor, then go to Step 11.
(See K21 TRANSAXLE FLUID TEMPERATURE (TFT)
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

K67

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0715
DTC P0715

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E567001030W12

Input/turbine speed sensor circuit malfunction
• When all conditions below satisfied and 0.7 second or more have passed.
D, S or L range of TR switch input.
Driving vehicle with vehicle speed 40 km/h {25 mph} or above.
Input/turbine speed sensor signal not input.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
Short to ground between input/turbine speed sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 3J
Short to ground between input/turbine speed sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 3G
Open circuit between input/turbine speed sensor terminal A and PCM terminal 3J
Open circuit between input/turbine speed sensor terminal B and PCM terminal 3G
Damaged connectors between input/turbine speed sensor and PCM
PCM malfunction

K68

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY CURRENT INPUT SIGNAL STATUS
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Start engine.
• Measure frequency of input/turbine speed
sensor using a oscilloscope.
IG ON: 0 Hz
Idle: Within 320374 Hz (P, N position)
• Are frequency of input/turbine speed sensor
readings within specifications?
4
INSPECT INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect input/turbine speed sensor
connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
5
INSPECT INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
RESISTANCE
• Measure resistance between input/turbine
speed sensor terminals (part-side).
• Is resistance within 250600 ohms between
input/turbine speed sensor terminals (partside)?
(See K23 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
6
INSPECT INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
• Remove input/turbine speed sensor.
• Is there iron powder stuck on input/turbine
speed sensor?
(See K24 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
7
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
8
INSPECT INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
• Inspect input/turbine speed sensor terminals
(harness-side) and PCM terminals (harnessside).
A and 3J
B and 3G
• Is there continuity?
9
INSPECT INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Inspect input/turbine speed sensor terminal
(harness-side) and body ground.
A and body ground
B and body ground
• Is there continuity?
10
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0715
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle with vehicle speed 40 km/h {25
mph} or above for 0.7 second or more.
• Is same DTC present?
11
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

ACTION
Yes Go to intermittent concern troubleshooting procedure.
(See F227 INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace input/turbine speed sensor, then go to Step 10.
(See K24 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

Yes Clean input/turbine speed sensor, then go to Step 10.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 10.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

K69

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0731
DTC P0731

A6E567001030W13

Gear 1 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected)
• PCM monitors revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution when
the following monitoring conditions are met. If revolution ratio is below 2.157, PCM determines that there is
malfunction.

Monitoring condition:

ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 1GR in D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Throttle opening angle 5.67% or above
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771, P0772,
P0773.

DETECTION
CONDITION

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL does not illuminate.
HOLD indicator light flashes if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
Pending code is not available.
DTC stored in the PCM memory.
ATF level low
Deteriorated ATF
Shift solenoid A stuck
Pressure control solenoid stuck
Line pressure low
One-way clutch slipping
Forward clutch slipping
Control valve stuck
Oil pump
PCM malfunction

K70

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace ATF, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace solenoid that you could not hear click sound, then
go to Step 8.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No All ranges: Replace oil pump, then go to Step 8.
Any ranges: Replace control valve body, then go to Step 8.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT STALL SPEED
• Measure stall speed in D range.
(See K7 Stall Test.)
Specification
2,0002,600 rpm
• Is stall speed within specification?
7
INSPECT FREQUENCY OF INPUT/TURBINE
SPEED SENSOR WHEN DRIVING VEHICLE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Measure frequency of input/turbine speed
sensor while driving vehicle under the following
conditions:
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 20 km/h {12
mph}
Drive in D range, 1st gear
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): about 25%
• Was frequency of input/turbine speed sensor at
approx. 1,100 Hz?
8
VERIFY REPAIR OF DTC P0731
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC using WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up transaxle.
• Drive vehicle under the following conditions at
least 4 times for more than 1 second.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range, 1st gear
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 5.67% or
above
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 4 km/h {3 mph}
or above
• Are any DTCs present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0732
DTC P0732

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace automatic transaxle, then go to Step8.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace control valve body, then go to next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W14

Gear 2 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected)
• PCM monitors revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution when
the following monitoring conditions are met. If revolution ratio is below 1.249 or above 2.157, PCM
determines that there is malfunction.

Monitoring condition:

ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 2 GR in D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771, P0772,
P0773.

DETECTION
CONDITION

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•

K71

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0732

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Gear 2 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected)
• ATF level low
• Deteriorated ATF
• Shift solenoids A, B or C stuck
• Pressure control solenoid stuck
• Line pressure low
• 2-4 brake band slipping
• Forward clutch slipping
• Control valve stuck
• Oil pump
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
2
CHECK ATF CONDITION
• Check ATF condition.
(See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
(ATF) INSPECTION.)
• Is it okay?
3
CHECK ATF LEVEL
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Is ATF level within specification?
(See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
(ATF) INSPECTION.)
4
INSPECTION SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A, B
AND C FOR CLICK SOUND
• Perform inspection of operation. (See K26
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Verify the click sound of shift solenoid A, B,
and C when applying B+ to each transaxle
connector terminal.
• Was click heard from solenoids?
5
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressures.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,1601,320 kPa {11.913.4 kgf/cm2,
170190 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
6
INSPECT STALL SPEED
• Measure stall speed in D range.
(See K7 Stall Test.)
Specification
2,0002,600 rpm
• Is stall speed within specification?
7
INSPECT FREQUENCY OF INPUT/TURBINE
SPEED SENSOR WHEN DRIVING VEHICLE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Measure frequency of input/turbine speed
sensor while driving vehicle under the following
conditions:
Vehicle speed: 40 km/h {24 mph} (VSS
PID)
Drive in D range, 2nd gear
Throttle opening angle: about 25% (TP PID)
• Was frequency of input/turbine speed sensor at
approx. 1,156 Hz?

K72

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace ATF, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace solenoid that you could not hear click sound, then
go to Step 8.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

Yes Go to next step.
No All ranges: Replace oil pump, then go to Step 8.
Any ranges: Replace control valve body, then go to Step 8.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace automatic transaxle, then go to Step8.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace control valve body, then go to next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
8
VERIFY REPAIR OF DTC P0732
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC using WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up transaxle.
• Drive vehicle under the following conditions at
least 4 times for more than 1 seconds.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range, 2nd gear
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 3.8 km/h {2.4
mph} or above
• Are any DTCs present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0733
DTC P0733

A6E567001030W15

Gear 3 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected)
• PCM monitors revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution when
the following monitoring conditions are met. If revolution ratio is below 0.863 or above 1.249, PCM
determines that there is malfunction.

Monitoring condition:

ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 3 GR in D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771, P0772,
P0773.

DETECTION
CONDITION

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL does not illuminate.
HOLD indicator light flashes if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
Pending code is not available.
DTC stored in the PCM memory.
ATF level low
Deteriorated ATF
Shift solenoids A or C stuck
Pressure control solenoid stuck
Line pressure low
3-4 clutch slipping
Forward clutch slipping
Control valve stuck (Bypass, TCC or 3-4 shift valve)
Oil pump
PCM malfunction

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace ATF, then go to Step 8.

K73

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
CHECK ATF LEVEL
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Is ATF level within specification?
(See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
(ATF) INSPECTION.)
4
INSPECTION SHIFT SOLENOID VALVE A AND
C FOR CLICK SOUND
• Perform inspection of operation. (See K26
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION.)
• Verify the click sound of shift solenoid A and C
when applying B+ to each transaxle connector
terminal.
• Was click heard from solenoids?
5
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressures.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,1601,320 kPa {11.913.4 kgf/cm2,
170190 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
6
INSPECT STALL SPEED
• Measure stall speed in D range.
(See K7 Stall Test.)
Specification
2,0002,600 rpm
• Is stall speed within specification?
7
INSPECT FREQUENCY OF INPUT/TURBINE
SPEED SENSOR WHEN DRIVING VEHICLE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Measure frequency of input/turbine speed
sensor while driving vehicle under the following
conditions:
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 60 km/h {37
mph}
Drive in D range, 3rd gear
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): about 25%
• Was frequency of input/turbine speed sensor at
approx. 1,200 Hz?
8
VERIFY REPAIR OF DTC P0733
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC using WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up transaxle.
• Drive vehicle under the following conditions for
more than 2 seconds.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range, 3rd gear
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 4 km/h {3 mph}
or above
• Are any DTCs present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K74

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace solenoid that you could not hear click sound, then
go to Step 8.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace automatic transaxle, then go to Step 8.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace control valve body, then go to next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0734
DTC P0734

A6E567001030W16

Gear 4 incorrect (Incorrect Gear Ratio Detected)
• PCM monitors revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution when
the following monitoring conditions are met. If revolution ratio is below 0.6 or above 1.249, PCM
determines that there is malfunction.

Monitoring condition:

ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4 GR in D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Vehicle speed 50 km/h {31 mph} or above.
Closed throttle position.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771, P0772,
P0773.

DETECTION
CONDITION

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL does not illuminate.
HOLD indicator light flashes if PCM detects the above malfunction condition during first drive cycle.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
Pending code is not available.
DTC stored in the PCM memory.
ATF level low
Deteriorated ATF
Shift solenoids A, B or C stuck
Pressure control solenoid stuck
Line pressure low
2-4 brake band slipping
3-4 clutch slipping
Forward clutch slipping
Control valve stuck (Bypass or 3-4 shift valve)
Oil pump
PCM malfunction

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace ATF, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 8.

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace solenoid that you could not hear click sound, then
go to Step 8.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

Note
• Click from solenoid D is barely audible.
Remove solenoids to correctly inspect if
necessary.
• Was click heard from solenoids?

K75

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressures.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,1601,320 kPa {11.913.4 kgf/cm2,
170190 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
6
INSPECT STALL SPEED
• Measure stall speed in D range.
(See K7 Stall Test.)
Specification
2,0002,600 rpm
• Is stall speed within specification?
7
INSPECT FREQUENCY OF INPUT/TURBINE
SPEED SENSOR WHEN DRIVING VEHICLE
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Measure frequency of input/turbine speed
sensor while driving vehicle under the following
conditions:
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 80 km/h {49
mph}
Drive in D range, 4th gear
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): about 25%
• Was frequency of input/turbine speed sensor at
approx. 1,200 Hz?
8
VERIFY REPAIR OF DTC P0734
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC using WDS or equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up transaxle.
• Drive vehicle under the following conditions for
more than 5 seconds.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range, 4th gear
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 0%
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 50 km/h {31
mph} or above
• Are any DTCs present?
9
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Are any DTCs present?
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)

End Of Sie

K76

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No All ranges: Replace oil pump, then go to Step 8.
Any ranges: Replace control valve body, then go to Step 8.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Replace automatic transaxle, then go to Step 8.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Replace control valve body, then go to next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0741

A6E567001030W17

DTC P0741

Torque converter clutch (TCC) stuck OFF
• When all conditions below satisfied.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Vehicle speed within 60100 km/h {3762 mph}.
TCC operation
Shift solenoid A duty value exceeds 99%
Power or normal mode
Difference between engine speed and turbine speed more than 100 rpm
DETECTION
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
CONDITION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771, P0772,
P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL does not illuminate if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
ATF level low
Deteriorated ATF
Shift solenoids A, B, C, D, E, and pressure control solenoid stuck
Line pressure low
2-4 brake band slipping
3-4 clutch slipping
Control valve stuck.
PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
2

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 4.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 6.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
Yes Go to next step.
No • All ranges: Replace oil pump or control valve body, then
go to Step 6.
• Any ranges: Replace ATX, then go to Step 6.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)

K77

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0741
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up engine and ATX.
• Drive vehicle under following conditions for 5
seconds or more.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range, 4th gear (TCC operation)
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): within 60100
km/h {3762 mph}
• Are any DTCs present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0742

ACTION
Yes Replace ATX, then go to next step
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)
No Repair or replace shift valve and return spring, then go to
next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W18

DTC P0742

Torque converter clutch (TCC) stuck ON
• All of following conditions satisfied under each of following throttle conditions.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Vehicle speed below 70 km/h {43 mph}.
Torque converter clutch (TCC) no operation
Difference between engine speed and turbine speed below 50 rpm
DTC P0734 not output
DETECTION • Throttle conditions.
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) above 10.1% and 5 seconds or more have passed.
CONDITION
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) within 3.110.1% and 3 seconds or more have passed.
Throttle opening angle at closed throttle position and 5 seconds or more have passed.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K78

•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
2

CHECK ATF CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Check ATF condition.
Clear red: Normal
Milky: Water mixed in fluid
Reddish brown: Deteriorated ATF
• Is it okay?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF)
Condition Inspection.)
CHECK ATF LEVEL
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Is ATF level within specification?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressure.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,1601,320 kPa {11.913.4 kgf/cm2,
170190 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0742
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up engine and ATX.
• Drive vehicle under following.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range, 4th gear (TCC not in
operation)
Vehicle speed: below 70 km/h {43 mph}.
• Throttle conditions
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) above
10.1% and 5 seconds or more have
passed.
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) within
3.110.1% and 3 seconds or more have
passed.
Throttle opening angle at closed throttle
position and 5 seconds or more have
passed.
• Are any DTCs present?

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 6.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)

K
Yes Go to next step.
No • All ranges: Replace oil pump or control valve body, then
go to Step 6.
• Any ranges: Replace ATX, then go to Step 6.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)

Yes Replace ATX, then go to next step.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)
No Repair or replace shift valve and return spring, then go to
next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

K79

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0745
DTC P0745

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K80

A6E567001030W19

Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• If PCM detects either of following conditions, PCM determines that pressure control solenoid circuit has a
malfunction
Pressure control solenoid voltage stuck 0 V after engine start
Pressure control solenoid voltage stuck B+ after engine start

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL does not illuminate if PCM detects above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Pressure control solenoid malfunction
Open circuit between pressure control solenoid terminal B and ATX connector terminal I
Open circuit between ATX connector terminal I and PCM terminal 3V
Short to ground between ATX connector terminal D and PCM terminal 3Y
Short to power between ATX connector terminal D and PCM terminal 3Y
Open circuit between pressure control solenoid terminal A and ATX connector terminal D
Open circuit between ATX connector terminal D and PCM terminal 3Y
Damaged connector between pressure control solenoid and PCM
PCM malfunction

INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminal, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between ATX connector
(transaxle case side) terminals D and I.
• Is resistance within 2.47.3 ohms?
(See K26 Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle
Inspection).)
INSPECT PRESSURE CONTROL SOLENOID
CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect pressure control solenoid
connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminal, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between pressure control
solenoid terminals A and B.
• Is resistance within 2.47.3 ohms?
(See K27 Resistance Inspection (Off-Vehicle
Inspection).)
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between PCM (harnessside) and ATX connector (vehicle harnessside).
PCM terminal 3Y and ATX connector
terminal D
PCM terminal 3V and ATX connector
terminal I
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Inspect voltage at ATX connector terminal D
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 0 V?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between ATX connector
terminal D (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?

ACTION
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 10.

Yes Go to Step 6.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 10.

Yes Replace solenoid harness, then go to Step 10.
No Verify pressure control solenoid installation.
• If solenoid installed correctly, replace pressure control
solenoid, then go to Step 10.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, the go to Step 10.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 10.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.
No Go to next step.

K81

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
10 VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0745
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Make sure to wait more than 1 second after
turning ignition key to ON.
• Are any DTCs present?
11 VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0751

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W20

DTC P0751

Shift solenoid A stuck OFF
• When any of P0731, P0732, and P0733 are not generated, and all conditions below satisfied.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 225 4,988 rpm.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Torque converter clutch (TCC) not operating
Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution within 0.911.09.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
DETECTION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768, P0771,
CONDITION
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K82

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 7.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressure.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,1601,320 kPa {11.913.4 kgf/cm2,
170190 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
6
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0751
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0752

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No • All ranges: Replace oil pump or control valve body, then
go to Step 7.
• Any ranges: Replace ATX, then go to Step 7.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W21

DTC P0752

Shift solenoid A stuck ON
• When P0734 is not generated, and all conditions below satisfied in 1GR and 2GR.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Engine run.
Either of P0705 or P0706 output, or D range is selected.
Brake pedal depressed.
Throttle opening angle closed throttle position.
Vehicle speed 0 km/h {0 mph}.
Input/turbine speed sensor signal 187.5 rpm or above.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
DETECTION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768, P0771,
CONDITION
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K83

CHECK ATF CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Check ATF condition.
Clear red: Normal
Milky: Water mixed in fluid
Reddish brown: Deteriorated ATF
• Is it okay?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF)
Condition Inspection.)
CHECK ATF LEVEL
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Is ATF level within specification?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressure.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,2001,360 kPa {12.313.8 kgf/cm2,
175196 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0752
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K84

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 7.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
Yes Go to next step.
No • All ranges: Replace oil pump or control valve body, then
go to Step 7.
• Any ranges: Replace ATX, then go to Step 7.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0753
DTC P0753

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E567001030W22

Shift solenoid A malfunction (electrical)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions, PCM determines that shift solenoid A circuit has a
malfunction:
Shift solenoid A voltage is stuck at B+ after engine start.
Shift solenoid A voltage is stuck at 0 V after engine start.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Shift solenoid A malfunction
Short to ground between ATX connector terminal A and PCM terminal 4AB
Short to power between ATX connector terminal A and PCM terminal 4AB
Open circuit between shift solenoid A terminal B and ATX connector terminal A
Open circuit between ATX connector terminal A and PCM terminal 4AB
Open circuit between shift solenoid A terminal A and body ground point
Damaged connector between shift solenoid A and PCM
PCM malfunction

K85

INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Check resistance between ATX connector
terminal A (transaxle case side) and body
ground.
• Is resistance within 1.04.2 ohms?
(See K26 Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle
Inspection).)
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID A CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect shift solenoid A connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between shift solenoid A
terminals A and B (part-side).
• Is resistance within 1.04.2 ohms?
(See K27 Resistance Inspection (Off-Vehicle
Inspection).)
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
4AB (harness-side) and ATX connector
terminal A (vehicle harness-side).
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Inspect voltage at ATX connector terminal A
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 0 V?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
4AB (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?

K86

Yes Go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Replace solenoid harness, then go to Step 11.
No Verify shift solenoid A installation.
• If solenoid installed correctly, replace solenoid, then go
to Step 11.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
11
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0753
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 4GR.
• Are any DTCs present?
12
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0756

ACTION
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W23

DTC P0756

Shift solenoid B stuck OFF
• When any of DTC P0732, P0733, and P0734 are not generated, and all conditions below satisfied.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 1GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) 5.67% or above.
Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 2.157.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
DETECTION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768, P0771,
CONDITION
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 7.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)

K87

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressure.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,2001,360 kPa {12.313.8 kgf/cm2,
175196 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
6
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0756
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Engine speed: 450 rpm or above (RPM
PID)
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 5.67% or
above
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K88

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0757

A6E567001030W24

DTC P0757

Shift solenoid B stuck ON
• When either of DTC P0731 and P0733 are not generated, and both the following conditions are satisfied.
When all conditions below satisfied while driving in 2GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Driving in D range.
• Engine run.
• Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
• Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 1.249 or
more than 2.157.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0705, P0706, P0710, P0715,P0751, P0752,
P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771, P0772, P0773.
When all conditions below satisfied with driving in 4GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Driving in D range.
• Engine run.
• Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
DETECTION
• Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
CONDITION
• Vehicle speed 50 km/h {31 mph}.
• Throttle opening angle closed throttle position.
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.6 or
1.249 or above.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768,
P0771, P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 7.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)

K89

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0757
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
make sure that gears shift smoothly from 1GR
to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Engine speed: 450 rpm or above (RPM
PID)
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 0% (4th
gear only)
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 50 km/h {31
mph} (4th gear only)
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0758
DTC P0758

DETECTION
CONDITION

K90

A6E567001030W25

Shift solenoid B malfunction (electrical)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions, PCM determines that shift solenoid B circuit has a
malfunction:
Shift solenoid B voltage is stuck at B+ after engine start.
Shift solenoid B voltage is stuck at 0 V after engine start.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0758

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Shift solenoid B malfunction (electrical)
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Short to ground between ATX connector terminal C and PCM terminal 4AC
• Short to power between ATX connector terminal C and PCM terminal 4AC
• Open circuit between shift solenoid B terminal B and ATX connector terminal C
• Open circuit between ATX connector terminal C and PCM terminal 4AC
• Open circuit between shift solenoid B terminal A and body ground point
• Damaged connector between shift solenoid B and PCM
• PCM malfunction

K91

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between ATX connector
terminal C (transaxle case side) and body
ground.
• Is resistance within 1.04.2 ohms?
(See K26 Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle
Inspection).)
5
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID B CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect shift solenoid B connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
6
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between shift solenoid B
terminals A and B (part-side).
• Is resistance within 1.04.2 ohms?
(See K27 Resistance Inspection (Off-Vehicle
Inspection).)
7

INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
4AC (harness-side) and ATX connector
terminal C (vehicle harness-side).
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Check for voltage at ATX connector terminal C
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 0 V?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Check for continuity between PCM terminal
4AC (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0758
SHIFT SOLENOID B COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 4GR.
• Are any DTCs present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K92

ACTION
Yes Go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Replace solenoid harness, then go to Step 11.
No Verify shift solenoid B installation.
• If solenoid installed correctly, replace solenoid, then go
to Step 11.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0761

A6E567001030W26

DTC P0761

Shift solenoid C stuck OFF
• When either of DTC P0733 and P0734 are not generated, and both the following conditions are satisfied.
When all conditions below satisfied while driving in 1GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Driving in D range.
• Engine run.
• Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
• Throttle opening angle (TP PID) 5.67% or above.
• Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 2.157.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768,
P0771, P0772, P0773.
When all conditions below satisfied while driving in 2GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Driving in D range.
DETECTION
• Engine run.
CONDITION
• Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
• Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 1.249 or
2.157 or above.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768,
P0771, P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 7.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)

K93

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0761
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 5.67% or
above
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K94

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0762

A6E567001030W27

DTC P0762

Shift solenoid C stuck ON
• When either of DTC P0731 and P0732 are not generated, and both the following conditions are satisfied.
When all conditions below satisfied while driving in 3GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Driving in D range.
• Engine run.
• Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
• Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.863 or
1.249 or above.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768,
P0771, P0772, P0773.
When all conditions below satisfied while driving in 4GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Driving in D range.
• Engine run.
DETECTION
• Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
CONDITION
• Vehicle speed 50 km/h {31mph} or above.
• Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
• Throttle opening angle at closed throttle position
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.6 or
1.249 or above.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768,
P0771, P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to next step.
No Adjust ATF level, then go to Step 7.
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)

K95

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0762
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 0% (4GR
only)
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): 50 km/h {31
mph} or above (4GR only)
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End
Sie
DTC Of
P0763
DTC P0763

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K96

A6E567001030W28

Shift solenoid C malfunction (electrical)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions, PCM determines that shift solenoid C circuit has a
malfunction:
Shift solenoid C voltage is stuck at B+ after engine start.
Shift solenoid C voltage is stuck at 0 V after engine start.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Shift solenoid C malfunction
Short to ground between ATX connector terminal G and PCM terminal 4Y
Short to power between ATX connector terminal G and PCM terminal 4Y
Open circuit between shift solenoid C terminal B and ATX connector terminal G
Open circuit between ATX connector terminal G and PCM terminal 4Y
Open circuit between shift solenoid C terminal A and body ground point
Damaged connector between shift solenoid C and PCM.
PCM malfunction.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0763

Shift solenoid C malfunction (electrical)

Yes Go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

K97

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID C CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect shift solenoid C connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
6
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between shift solenoid C
terminals A and B (part-side).
• Is resistance within 1.04.2 ohms?
(See K27 Resistance Inspection (Off-Vehicle
Inspection).)
7

INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
4Y (harness-side) and ATX connector terminal
G (vehicle harness-side).
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Check voltage at ATX connector terminal G
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 0 V?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
4Y (harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0763
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 4GR.
• Are any DTCs present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K98

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Replace solenoid harness, then go to Step 11.
No Verify shift solenoid C installation.
• If solenoid installed correctly, replace solenoid, then go
to Step 11.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0766

A6E567001030W29

DTC P0766

Shift solenoid D stuck OFF
• When any of DTC P0731, P0732, and P0733 not output (correct judgment), and all conditions below are
satisfied.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Vehicle speed 50 km/h {31 mph} or above.
Throttle opening angle closed throttle position.
Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.6 or 1.249
or above.
DETECTION
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
CONDITION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768, P0771,
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

K99

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
6
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
7

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0766
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Throttle opening angle (TP PID): 0% (4GR
only)
Vehicle speed: 50 km/h {31 mph} or
above. (4GR only) (VSS PID)
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0767

ACTION
Yes Replace ATX, then go to next step.
(See K29 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)
No Repair or replace shift valve and return spring, then go to
next step.
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL, K35
CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95-FN4A99).)
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W30

DTC P0767

Shift solenoid D stuck ON
• When any of DTC P0731, P0732, P0734, and P0741 are not generated, and all conditions below are
satisfied.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Differential gear case (output) revolution speed 35 rpm or above.
Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.863 or
1.249 or above.
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
DETECTION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768, P0771,
CONDITION
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K100

CHECK ATF CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Check ATF condition.
Clear red: Normal
Milky: Water mixed in fluid
Reddish brown: Deteriorated ATF
• Is it okay?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF)
Condition Inspection.)
CHECK ATF LEVEL
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Is ATF level within specification?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressure.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,2001,360 kPa {12.313.8 kgf/cm2,
175196 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0767
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

K101

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0768
DTC P0768

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E567001030W31

Shift solenoid D malfunction (electrical)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions while driving in 4GR at D range, PCM determines that shift
solenoid D circuit has a malfunction:
Shift solenoid D voltage is stuck at B+ after engine start.
Shift solenoid D voltage is stuck at 0 V after engine start.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Shift solenoid D malfunction
Short to ground between ATX connector terminal B and PCM terminal 3S
Short to power between ATX connector terminal B and PCM terminal 3S
Open circuit between shift solenoid D terminal A and ATX connector terminal B
Open circuit between ATX connector terminal B and PCM terminal 3S
Damaged connector between shift solenoid D and PCM
PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME PID DATA been
recorded?

K102

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY RELATED REPAIR INFORMATION
AVAILABILITY
• Check for related Service Bulletins availability.
• Is any related repair information available?
3

INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between ATX connector
terminal B (transaxle case side) and body
ground.
• Is resistance within 10.926.2 ohms?
(See K26 Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle
Inspection).)
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID D CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect shift solenoid D connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• inspect resistance between shift solenoid D
terminal A (part-side) and body ground.
• Is resistance within 10.926.2 ohms?
(See K26 Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle
Inspection).)
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
3S (harness-side) and ATX connector terminal
B (vehicle harness-side).
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Inspect voltage at ATX connector terminal B
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 0 V?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between PCM terminal 3S
(harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0768
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 4GR.
• Are any DTCs present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

Yes Go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Replace solenoid harness, then go to Step 11.
No Verify shift solenoid D installation.
• If solenoid installed correctly, replace solenoid, then go
to Step 11.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

K103

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
End
Sie
DTC Of
P0771

A6E567001030W32

DTC P0771

Shift solenoid E stuck OFF
• When any of P0731, P0732, and P0734 are not generated, and all conditions below are satisfied.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Vehicle speed within 60100 km/h {3762 mph}.
TCC operation
Shift solenoid A duty value exceeds 99%
Power or normal mode
Difference between engine speed and turbine speed more than 100 rpm
DETECTION
Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715, P0751,
CONDITION
P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0767, P0768, P0771,
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K104

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0771
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Vehicle speed: within 60100 km/h {37
62 mph} (4th gear only).
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of
Sie
DTC
P0772

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W33

DTC P0772

Shift solenoid E stuck ON
• When any of DTC P0731, P0733, and P0734 are not generated, and all of following conditions satisfied
under each of following throttle conditions.
ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
Driving in 4GR at D range.
Engine run.
Turbine speed within 2254,988 rpm.
Vehicle speed below 70 km/h {43 mph}.
Torque converter clutch (TCC) no operation
Difference between engine speed and turbine speed below 50 rpm
• Throttle conditions.
DETECTION
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) above 10.1% and 5 seconds or more have passed.
CONDITION
Throttle opening angle (TP PID) within 3.110.1% and 3 seconds or more have passed.
Throttle opening angle at closed throttle position and 5 seconds or more have passed.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K105

CHECK ATF CONDITION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Check ATF condition.
Clear red: Normal
Milky: Water mixed in fluid
Reddish brown: Deteriorated ATF
• Is it okay?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF)
Condition Inspection.)
CHECK ATF LEVEL
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Is ATF level within specification?
(See K12 Automatic Transaxle Fluid (ATF) Level
Inspection.)
INSPECT LINE PRESSURE
• Start engine.
• Measure line pressure.
Specification
Idle: 330470 kPa {3.44.7 kgf/cm2, 4966
psi}
Stall: 1,2001,360 kPa {12.313.8 kgf/cm2,
175196 psi}
• Is line pressure within specification?
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
CHECK OPERATION OF EACH VALVE AND
EACH SPRING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove control valve body.
• Disassemble control valve body.
• Is each valve operation okay and is return
spring okay?
(See K34 CONTROL VALVE BODY REMOVAL,
K35 CONTROL VALVE BODY INSTALLATION.)
(See ATX Workshop Manual FN4A-EL (9999-95FN4A-99).)
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0772
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Start engine.
• Warm up ATX.
• Drive the vehicle under the following conditions
and make sure that gears shift smoothly from
1GR to 4GR.
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F} or above
Drive in D range
Vehicle speed (VSS PID): below 70 km/h
{43 mph} (4th gear only)
• Is pending code present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K106

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.
Yes Perform repair or diagnosis according to available repair
information.
• If vehicle is not repaired, go to next step.
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No If ATF color milky or reddish brown, replace ATF, then go to
Step 5.
(See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF)
REPLACEMENT.)

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0773
DTC P0773

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E567001030W34

Shift solenoid E malfunction (electrical)
• If PCM detects either of following conditions while driving in 4GR at D range with TCC operation, PCM
determines that shift solenoid E circuit has a malfunction:
Shift solenoid E voltage is stuck at B+ after engine start.
Shift solenoid E voltage is stuck at 0 V after engine start.

Diagnostic support note:
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction conditions during first drive cycle.
PENDING CODE is not available.
FREEZE FRAME DATA is available.
HOLD indicator light flashes.
DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
Shift solenoid E malfunction
Short to ground between ATX connector terminal F and PCM terminal 3P
Short to power between ATX connector terminal F and PCM terminal 3P
Open circuit between shift solenoid E terminal A and ATX connector terminal F
Open circuit between ATX connector terminal F and PCM terminal 3P
Damaged connector between shift solenoid E and PCM
PCM malfunction

K107

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ATX connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
4
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between ATX connector
terminal F (transaxle case side) and body
ground.
• Is resistance within 10.926.2 ohms?
(See K26 Resistance Inspection (On-Vehicle
Inspection).)
5
INSPECT SHIFT SOLENOID E CONNECTOR
FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect shift solenoid E connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
6
INSPECT RESISTANCE
• Inspect resistance between shift solenoid E
terminal A (part-side) and body ground.
• Is resistance within 10.926.2 ohms?
(See K27 Resistance Inspection (Off-Vehicle
Inspection).)
7

INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal 1
(harness-side) and ATX connector terminal F
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT ATX CONNECTOR CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Inspect voltage at ATX connector terminal F
(vehicle harness-side).
• Is voltage 0 V?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal 1
(harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0773
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle in D range and make sure that
gears shift smoothly from 1GR to 4GR.
• Are any DTCs present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End Of Sie

K108

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to Step 7.
No Go to next step.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Replace solenoid harness, then go to Step 11.
No Verify shift solenoid E installation.
• If solenoid installed correctly, replace solenoid, then go
to Step 11.
(See K28 SOLENOID VALVE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 11.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 11.
No Go to next step.

Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC P0841

A6E567001030W35

DTC P0841

Oil pressure switch circuit malfunction
• When each of DTC P0731, P0732, P0733 and P0734 are not generated and 10 seconds or more passed.
When all conditions below satisfied while driving in 1GR, 2GR or 3GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Oil pressure switch OFF
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.91 or
more than 3.08.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771,
P0772, P0773.
When all conditions below satisfied with driving in 4GR.
• ATF temperature 20 °C {68 °F} or above.
• Oil pressure switch ON
DETECTION
• Revolution ratio of forward clutch drum revolution to differential gear case revolution below 0.64 or
CONDITION
more than 0.82.
• Any of the following not generated: DTC P0500, P0706, P0707, P0708, P0712, P0713, P0715,
P0751, P0752, P0753, P0756, P0757, P0758, P0761, P0762, P0763, P0766, P0767, P0768, P0771,
P0772, P0773.

Diagnostic support note:

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• This is a continuous monitor (CCM).
• MIL illuminates if PCM detects the above malfunction condition in two consecutive drive cycles or in one
drive cycle while the DTC for the same malfunction has been stored in the PCM.
• PENDING CODE is not available.
• FREEZE FRAME DATA is not available.
• HOLD indicator light flashes.
• DTC is stored in the PCM memory.
• Oil pressure switch malfunction
• Open circuit between oil pressure switch terminal A and PCM terminal 3T
• Short to ground between oil pressure switch terminal A and PCM terminal 3T
• Damaged connector between oil pressure switch and PCM
• PCM malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY FREEZE FRAME DATA HAS BEEN
RECORDED
• Has FREEZE FRAME PID DATA been
recorded?

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Record FREEZE FRAME PID DATA on repair order, then
go to next step.

K109

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
INSPECTION
2
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
CONNECTOR FOR POOR CONNECTION
• Disconnect shift oil pressure switch connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
3
INSPECT CONTINUITY
• inspect for continuity between oil pressure
switch terminal A (part-side) and body ground.
• Is there any continuity?
4

INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR FOR POOR
CONNECTION
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Check for poor connection (damaged/pulledout terminals, corrosion, etc.).
• Is connection okay?
INSPECT OIL PRESSURE SWITCH CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN
• Inspect for continuity between PCM terminal
3T (harness-side) and ATX connector terminal
A (harness-side).
• Is there continuity between terminals?
INSPECT PCM CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO
GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between PCM terminal 3T
(harness-side) and body ground.
• Is there continuity?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING OF DTC P0841
COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory using WDS or
equivalent.
• Drive vehicle and make sure that gears shift
smoothly from 1GR to 4GR.
• Are any DTCs present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Perform After Repair Procedure.
(See K52 AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE.)
• Are any DTCs present?

End
Of SieMONITOR INSPECTION
PID/DATA
1. Connect the WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Measure the PID value.

ACTION
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminal, then go to
Step 7.

Yes Replace oil pressure switch, then go to Step 7.
(See K23 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
No Go to next step.
Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace connector and/or terminals, then go to
Step 7.

Yes Go to next step.
No Repair or replace harness, then go to Step 7.

Yes Repair or replace harness, then go to next step.
No Replace oil pressure switch, then go to next step.
(See K23 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
Yes Replace PCM, then go to next step.
(See F43 PCM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
No No concern is detected. Go to next step.

Yes Go to applicable DTC inspection.
No Troubleshooting completed.

A6E567001030W36

Note
• Perform part inspection for the output device after PCM inspection.
• The PID/DATA MONITOR function monitors the calculated value of the input/output signals in the PCM.
Therefore, if a monitored value of an output device is out of specification, it is necessary to inspect the
monitored value of the input device related to the output device control. Since an output device
malfunction is not directly indicated as a malfunction of the monitored value for the output device, it is
necessary to inspect the output device individually using the simulation function, etc.

K110

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
PID/DATA MONITOR AND RECORD function table
Monitor item
(Definition)

Unit/
Condition

GEAR
LINEDES
LPS
(Pressure
control
solenoid)
OP SW B
(Oil pressure
switch)
SSA/SS1
(Shift solenoid
A)
SSB/SS2
(Shift solenoid
B)
SSC/SS3
(Shift solenoid
C)

1GR: 1
2GR: 2
3GR: 3
4GR: 4

kPa

Condition/Specification

inHg Indicates target line pressure
Change current value according to
throttle opening angle

ATF 20 °C {68 °F}: 3.43.6 V
ATF 130 °C {266 °F}: 0.40.5 V

CTP: 0%
WOT:100%

CTP: 0.41.5 V
WOT: 4.05.0 V

Inspect TP sensor.
(See F51 THROTTLE POSITION (TP)
SENSOR INSPECTION.)

4GR: 99%
others: 0%

1GR at D range: 99%
Others: 0%

1GR/2GR: 99%
Others: 0%

ON/OFF

HOLD switch pressed: ON
HOLD switch released: OFF

TFT
(Transaxle fluid
temperature)

°C

Indicates transaxle fluid temperature

TR
(Transaxle
range)

°F

TR SENS
(TR switch)
TSS
(Input/turbine
speed)
VPWR
(Battery
positive
voltage)
VSS
(Vehicle
speed)

End Of Sie

rpm

km/h

Inspect following PIDs:
TFT, TFT V, VPWR, TP, TSS, VSS, TR
Inspect pressure control solenoid.
(See K26 SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION.)

1, 2 or 3GR: ON
Other: OFF

TCS
(HOLD switch)

THOP
(Throttle
position
sensor)
TP
(Throttle
position sensor
signal voltage)

Inspect following PIDs: SSA/SS1, SSB/
SS2, SSC/SS3, SSD/SS4, SSE/SS5

Inspect oil pressure switch inspection.
(See K21 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Inspect shift solenoid A.
(See K26 SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION.)
Inspect shift solenoid B.
(See K26 SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION.)
Inspect shift solenoid C.
(See K26 SOLENOID VALVE
INSPECTION.)
Inspect HOLD switch.
(See K13 HOLD SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
Inspect TFT sensor.
(See K19 TRANSAXLE FLUID
TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
Inspect TFT sensor.
(See K19 TRANSAXLE FLUID
TEMPERATURE (TFT) SENSOR
INSPECTION.)
Inspect TP sensor.
(See F51 THROTTLE POSITION (TP)
SENSOR INSPECTION.)

ON/OFF

TFTV
(Transaxle fluid
signal voltage)

Action

P position: P
R position: R
N position: N
D range: D
S range: S
L range: L
P position: 4.344.79 V
R position: 3.834.18 V
N position: 3.053.50 V
D range: 2.232.66 V
S range: 1.461.84 V
L range: 0.801.09 V
Ignition switch ON: 0 rpm
Idle: 700800 rpm (P, N position)
Indicates Input/turbine speed
Ignition switch ON: B+
Engine running: B+

mph Indicates vehicle speed

Inspect TR switch.
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR)
SWITCH INSPECTION.)

Inspect input/turbine speed sensor.
(See K23 INPUT/TURBINE SPEED
SENSOR INSPECTION.)
Inspect main relay.
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION.)
Inspect buttery.
(See G4 BATTERY INSPECTION.)
Inspect VSS.
(See K24 VEHICLE SPEEDOMETER
SENSOR (VSS) INSPECTION.)

PCM
terminal
3P, 3S,
3Y, 4Y,
4AB, 4AC
3V, 3Y
3V, 3Y

3T
4AB
4AC
4Y
3Q

3G, 3J

2Y, 2Z

K111

TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
FOREWORD

A6E568001030W01

• Refer to Section GI and thoroughly read and understand the basic flow of troubleshooting in order to properly
perform the procedures.

End Of Sie

BASIC INSPECTION
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Perform the mechanical system test.
(See K6 MECHANICAL SYSTEM TEST.)
Is mechanical system okay?

A6E568001030W02

ACTION
Yes
No

Turn IG SW to ON.
When selector lever is moved, dose the selector
illumination indicate synchronized position to
lever location? Also, when other ranges are
selected from N or P during idling, does vehicle
moves within 12 seconds?

Yes
No

Inspect ATF color and condition.
(See K12 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID
(ATF) INSPECTION.)
Are ATF color and ordor normal?

Yes
No

Perform line pressure test.
(See K6 Line Pressure Test.)
Is line pressure okay?

Yes
No

Perform stall test.
(See K7 Stall Test.)
Is stall speed okay?

Yes
No

Inspect the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• TFT
• TFT V
• VPWR
• TR
• TR SENS
• ECT
• TCS
• RPM
• TP
• TSS
• VSS
Is PID value okay?

Yes
No

End Of Sie

K112

Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection result.
Go to next step.
Inspect selector lever and TR switch. Repair or replace
defected areas.
(See K45 SELECTOR LEVER INSPECTION.)
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION.)
If selector lever and TR switch are okay, go to next step.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection result.
Flush ATX and cooler line as necessary.
Go to next step.
Adjust accelerator cable as necessary.
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection result.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection result.
Perform symptom troubleshooting and follow procedures.
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection result.

TROUBLESHOOTING
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM TABLE

A6E568001030W03

• Use the chart below to verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the appropriate area.
No.
1

2
3

4
5
6
7
8

9
10
11

12
13
14

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
Vehicle does not move in D, S, L
ranges, or in R position

DESCRIPTION
PAGE
Vehicle does not move when AP depressed. (See K117 NO.1 VEHICLE
DOES NOT MOVE IN D, S, L
RANGES, OR IN R
POSITION.)
Vehicle moves in N position
Vehicle creeps in N position.
(See K117 NO.2 VEHICLE
Vehicle creeps if brake pedal is not
MOVES IN N POSITION.)
depressed in N position.
Vehicle moves in P position, or
Vehicle rolls when on a downward slope and (See K118 NO.3 VEHICLE
parking gear does not disengage
tires do not lock in P position.
MOVES IN P POSITION, OR
when P position is disengaged
Tires locked when P position is disengaged, PARKING GEAR DOES NOT
vehicle does not move in D, S, L ranges,
DISENGAGE WHEN P IS
and R position when AP depressed, and
DISENGAGED.)
engine remains in stall condition.
Excessive creep
Vehicle accelerates in D, S, L ranges, and R (See K118 NO.4 EXCESSIVE
position without depressing accelerator
CREEP.)
pedal.
No creep at all
Vehicle does not move in D, S, L ranges, or (See K118 NO.5 NO CREEP
R position when idling on flat paved road.
AT ALL.)
Low maximum speed and poor
Vehicle acceleration poor at start.
(See K119 NO.6 LOW
acceleration
Delayed acceleration when accelerator
MAXIMUM SPEED AND
pedal depressed while driving.
POOR ACCELERATION.)
No shifting
Single shift range only.
(See K120 NO.7 NO
Sometimes is shifts correctly.
SHIFTING.)
Does not shift to fourth gear (4GR)
Vehicle does not upshift from 3GR to 4GR
(See K120 NO.8 DOES NOT
even though vehicle speed is increased.
SHIFT TO FOURTH GEAR
Vehicle does not shift to 4GR even though (4GR).)
accelerator pedal is released in D range at
60 km/h {37 mph}.
Abnormal shifting
Shifts incorrectly (incorrect shift pattern).
(See K122 NO.9 ABNORMAL
SHIFTING.)
(See K122 NO.10
Frequent shifting
Downshifting occurs immediately even
when accelerator pedal depressed slightly in FREQUENT SHIFTING.)
D, S, L ranges except HOLD mode.
Shift point is high or low
Shift point considerably different from
(See K122 NO.11 SHIFT
automatic shift diagram.
POINT IS HIGH OR LOW.)
Shift delays when accelerating.
Shift occurs quickly when accelerating and
engine speed does not increase.
Torque converter clutch (TCC) nonTCC does not operate when vehicle
(See K123 NO.12 TORQUE
operation
reaches TCC operation range.
CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
NON-OPERATION.)
No kickdown
Does not downshift when accelerator pedal (See K123 NO.13 NO
fully depressed within kickdown range.
KICKDOWN.)
Engine flares up or slips when
When accelerator pedal is depressed for
(See K124 NO.14 ENGINE
upshifting or downshifting
driveway, engine speed increases but
FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN
vehicle speed increase slowly.
UPSHIFTING OR
When accelerator pedal is depressed while DOWNSHIFTING.)
driving, engine speed increases but vehicle
speed does not.
Engine flares up or slips when
Engine flares up when accelerator pedal is (See K124 NO.15 ENGINE
accelerating vehicle
depressed for upshifting.
FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN
Engine flares up suddenly when accelerator ACCELERATING VEHICLE.)
pedal is depressed for downshifting.
Judder upon torque converter clutch
Vehicle jolts when TCC is engaged.
(See K125 NO.16 JUDDER
(TCC) operation
UPON TORQUE
CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
OPERATION.)
Excessive shift shock from N to D or N Strong shock is felt when shifting from N to (See K126 NO.17
to R position/range
D or N to R position/range at idle.
EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK
FROM N TO D OR N TO R
POSITION/RANGE.)

K113

TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
18

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
Excessive shift shock is given when
upshifting and downshifting

Excessive shift shock on torque
converter clutch (TCC)

Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is
stopped in all positions/ranges

Transaxle is noisy in all positions and
ranges when vehicle idling.

Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is
stopped in D, S, L ranges, or in R
position

Transaxle is noisy in driving ranges when
vehicle idling.

No engine braking in HOLD mode

Transaxle overheats

Engine stalls when shifted to D, S, L
ranges, or in R position

Engine speed drops to idle but vehicle
coasts when accelerator pedal is released
during cruising at medium to high speeds.
Engine speed drops to idle but vehicle
coasts when accelerator pedal is released
when in L range at low vehicle speed.
Burnt smell emitted from transaxle.
Smoke is emitted from transaxle.
Engine stalls when shifting from N or P
position to D, S, L ranges or R position at
idle.

Engine stalls when driving at slow
speeds or stopping

Starter does not work

DESCRIPTION
Excessive shift shock is felt when
depressing accelerator pedal to accelerate
at upshifting.
During cruising, excessive shift shock is felt
when depressing accelerator pedal at
downshifting.
Strong shock is felt when TCC engaged.

Engine stalls when brake pedal is
depressed while driving at low speed or
stopping.

Starter does not work even when P or N
position is selected.
HOLD indicator light does not
HOLD indicator light in dashboard does not
illuminate when HOLD switch is turned illuminate when HOLD switch is turned on
ON
and IG SW at ON.
HOLD indicator light illuminates when
HOLD switch is not turned ON

End Of Sie

K114

HOLD indicator light in dashboard
illuminates even though HOLD switch
turned off and IG SWat ON.

PAGE
(See K127 NO.18
EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK IS
FELT WHEN UPSHIFTING
AND DOWNSHIFTING.)
(See K127 NO.19
EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK
ON TORQUE CONVERTER
CLUTCH (TCC).)
(See K128 NO.20 NOISE
OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN
VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN ALL
POSITIONS/RANGES.)
(See K128 NO.21 NOISE
OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN
VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN D,
S, L RANGES, OR IN R
POSITION.)
(See K129 NO.22 NO
ENGINE BRAKING IN HOLD
MODE.)

(See K129 NO.23
TRANSAXLE OVERHEATS.)
(See K130 NO.24 ENGINE
STALLS WHEN SHIFTED TO
D, S, L RANGES, OR IN R
POSITION.)
(See K130 NO.25 ENGINE
STALLS WHEN DRIVING AT
SLOW SPEEDS OR
STOPPING.)
(See K130 NO.26 STARTER
DOES NOT WORK.)
(See K130 NO.27 HOLD
INDICATOR LIGHT DOES
NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN
HOLD SWITCH IS TURNED
TO ON.)
(See K131 NO.28 HOLD
INDICATOR LIGHT
ILLUMINATES WHEN HOLD
SWITCH IS NOT TURNED TO
ON.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
QUICK DIAGNOSIS CHART

A6E568001030W04

A6E5680W001

K115

TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E5680W002

End Of Sie

K116

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.1 VEHICLE DOES NOT MOVE IN D, S, L RANGES, OR IN R POSITION
1
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W05

Vehicle does not move in D, S, L ranges, or in R position
• Vehicle does not move when AP depressed.
• If the vehicle does not move in D, S, L ranges or R position, basically, the malfunction is in the ATX.
(Vehicle will move even with a malfunction in the PCM.) Since a malfunction is in the sensor circuit or
output circuit is the cause of the malfunction in the ATX, inspect the sensors, output circuit, and the
related harnesses.
1. Clutch slipped, worn (D, S, L ranges-Forward clutch, R position-Reverse clutch, Low and reverse
brake)
• Line pressure low
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Control valve body malfunction
2. Selector lever malfunction
3. Parking mechanism not properly operation
4. Torque converter malfunction
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
When vehicle is stopped on a flat, level road and
engine is off, does vehicle move when pushed?
(in D, S ranges or N, R positions and brake is
released)
2

Disconnect PCM.
Is resistance between ground terminal at PCM
connector and body ground less than 5.0
ohms?
Check LPS PID value using WDS or equivalent.
Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes

End Of
Sie
NO.2
VEHICLE
MOVES IN N POSITION
2
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ACTION
Go to next step.
Check for parking mechanism. (See ATX workshop manual
(FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop manual
supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Repair or replace any defective parts.
A6E568001030W06

Vehicle moves in N position
• Vehicle creeps in N position.
• Vehicle creeps if brake pedal is not depressed in N position.
• If the vehicle moves in N position, basically, the malfunction is in the ATX. Since a malfunction in the
sensor circuit or output circuit is the cause of the malfunction in the ATX, inspect the sensors, output
circuit, and the related harnesses.
1. Clutch burned (Forward clutch)
• Control valve body malfunction
2. Selector lever position disparity (Although the selector indicator shows N position, hydraulic circuit
shows D range or R position)
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Does vehicle creep when selector lever is
moved slightly in N position?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Adjust selector lever. (See K46 SELECTOR CABLE
ADJUSTMENT.)

K117

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
Disconnect PCM.
Is resistance between ground terminal at PCM
connector and body ground less than 5.0
ohms?
3
Check LPS PID value using WDS or equivalent.
Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No
Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit.
Reconnect PCM.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts.
If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and repair or replace
any defective parts.
(See ATX workshop manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].)
(See ATX workshop manual supplement (FN4A-EL)
[1746-1*-02C].)
Repair or replace any defective parts.

End
Sie
NO.3Of
VEHICLE
MOVES IN P POSITION, OR PARKING GEAR DOES NOT DISENGAGE WHEN P IS
DISENGAGED
3
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W07

Vehicle moves in P position, or parking gear does not disengage when P is disengaged
• Vehicle rolls on a downward slope in P position.
• Tires are locked when P is disengaged. Vehicle does not move in D, S, L ranges, and R position when
AP is depressed, and engine remains in stall condition.
1. Parking mechanism malfunction (May have effect on noise or shock from transaxle)
2. Improper adjustment of selector lever
3. If vehicle moves in N position, perform No.2 "Vehicle moves in N position"

End
Sie
NO.4Of
EXCESSIVE
CREEP
4
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W08

Excessive creep
• Vehicle accelerates in D, S, L ranges, and R position without depressing accelerator pedal.
1. Engine idle speed high (transaxle system is not cause of problem)
2. Go to No.7 Fast idle/runs on (See F198 NO.7 SLOW RETURN TO IDLE.)

End Of
NO.5
NOSie
CREEP AT ALL
5
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W09

No creep at all
• Either the transaxle is stuck in 3GR position, or there is clutch circuit slippage
• Either transaxle is stuck in 3GR or 4GR position, or clutch circuit slippage due to a stuck 34 clutch is
stuck.
1. Clutch burned
• Line pressure low
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Control valve body malfunction
2. Transaxle fixed in 3GR (Operation of fail-safe function)
• Short or open circuit in wiring
• Poor connection of connector
• The electronic parts of output and input system is malfunction
3. The engine torque is not start
• Torque converter is malfunction
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Does vehicle creep in any range/position?

K118

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Inspect or adjust selector lever.
(See K46 SELECTOR LEVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
Check the value at the following PID using the
WDS or equivalent.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• TP
Is PID value okay?
3
Disconnect PCM.
Is resistance between ground terminal at PCM
connector and body ground less than 5.0
ohms?
4
Check LPS PID value.
Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit.

Yes

End Of
SieMAXIMUM SPEED AND POOR ACCELERATION
NO.6
LOW
6
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W10

Low maximum speed and poor acceleration
• Vehicle acceleration is poor at start.
• Delayed acceleration when accelerator pedal is depressed while driving.
• If the clutch is stuck or does not stay in 3GR, the malfunction is in engine circuit.
1. Clutch slipped, burned
• Line pressure low
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Control valve body malfunction
2. Signal malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. Transaxle fixed in 3GR (Operation of fail-safe function)
• Short or open circuit in wiring
• Poor connection of connector
• The electronic parts of output and input system have malfunction
4. Insufficient starting torque (Suspected when in-gear condition, shift control and engine circuit are
normal)
• The torque converter have malfunction (Poor operation, stuck)
5. Engagement of TCC operation range (Operation of fail-safe function)
• Transaxle fluid temperature sensor malfunction (Short or open circuit)
6. Transaxle fixed in HOLD mode
• HOLD switch malfunction
7. TR switch adjustment incorrect
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
With ignition switch at ON, does HOLD indicator
light indication correspond to HOLD switch
operation?

Go to No.12 "Lack/loss of power".
(See F207 NO.12 LACK/LOSS OF
POWER-ACCELERATION/CRUISE.) Does CIS
system okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Go to No.26 "HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE WHEN HOLD SWITCH IS TURNED ON.".
No.27 "HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN
HOLD SWITCH IS NOT TURNED ON."
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

K119

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
3
Disconnect solenoid connector.
Does vehicle operate as follows?

Yes
No

D, S ranges: 3GR (fixed) L range: 1GR (fixed)
R position: Reverse

Drive vehicle in D, S, and L ranges except HOLD
mode. Does vehicle start from stop in first gear?

Yes
No

Check the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• SSA/SS1
• SSB/SS2
• SSC/SS3
Are PID values okay?

Yes
No

Perform the stall test. (See K7 Stall Test.)
Is stall speed okay?

Yes
No

End Of
NO.7
NOSie
SHIFTING
7
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

DESCRIPTION

K120

A6E568001030W11

No shifting
• Single shift range only.
• Sometimes it shifts correctly.
• When the gear position is fixed in 3GR due to the fail-safe operation, the malfunction is in the ATX.
• Perform malfunction diagnosis according to No.6 "Low maximum speed and poor acceleration".
1. Clutch slippage, burned
• Line pressure low
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Control valve body malfunction
2. Signal malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. Transaxle fixed in 3GR (Operation in fail-safe function)
• Short or open circuit in wiring
• Poor connection of connector
• Disconnected shift solenoid connector
• Poor ground of shift solenoid
4. Transaxle fixed in HOLD mode
• HOLD switch malfunction

End Of
Sie NOT SHIFT TO FOURTH GEAR (4GR)
NO.8
DOES
8

ACTION
Go to next step.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts.
(See ATX workshop manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].)
(See ATX workshop manual supplement (FN4A-EL)
[1746-1*-02C].)
Go to next step.
Check the value at the following PIDs using the WDS or
equivalent.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• TP
• VSS
• TSS
• TR
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Go to next step.
Check the value at the following PIDs using the NGS tester.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• TP
• VSS
• TSS
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Reverify symptoms of malfunction.
Overhaul transaxle and repair or replace any defective
parts. (See ATX workshop manual (FN4A-EL)
[1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop manual supplement
(FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)

A6E568001030W12

Does not shift to fourth gear (4GR)
• Vehicle does not upshift from 3GR to 4GR even though vehicle speed increased.
• Vehicle does not shift to 4GR even though accelerator pedal is released in D range at 60 km/h {37
mph}.

TROUBLESHOOTING
• Basically, TCC does not operate when fail-safe is operating. Verify the DTCs first. If the TCC operates
when driving at high speeds only, malfunction (improper adjustment) is in the HOLD switch circuit or TR
switch circuit.
Caution
• If the TCC is stuck, inspect it. In addition, inspect the oil cooler for foreign particles which
may have mixed in with the ATF.

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

1. TCC piston slipped, burned
• Line pressure low
• TP sensor malfunction
• Engine coolant temperature sensor malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
2. Transaxle fluid temperature sensor malfunction
• Short or open circuit in wiring
• Poor connection of connector
• Sensor malfunction
3. TR switch malfunction
• Short or open circuit in wiring
• Poor connection of connector
• Sensor malfunction
• Selector lever adjustment incorrect
• TR switch adjustment incorrect
4. Shift solenoid A, shift solenoid B, shift solenoid D valve malfunction
• Short or open circuit in wiring
• Poor connection of connector
• Solenoid valve stuck
5. HOLD switch malfunction
6. Control valve body malfunction

Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
With indicator switch at ON, does HOLD
indicator light indication correspond to HOLD
switch operation?

Check the value at the following PID using the
WDS or equivalent. (See F45 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TFT
• TFTV
Is PID value okay?
Check the value at the following PIDs using the
NGS tester. (See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• SSA/SS1
• SSB/SS2
• SSC/SS3
Are PID values okay?
Disconnect PCM.
Is resistance between ground terminal at PCM
connector and body ground less than 5.0
ohms?

Yes
No

Yes

No
Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Go to No.26 "HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE WHEN HOLD SWITCH IS TURNED ON.",
No.27 "HOLD INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN
HOLD SWITCH IS NOT TURNED ON."
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Go to next step.
Check the value at the following PIDs using the WDS or
equivalent. (See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• TR
• TSS
• VSS
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.

End Of Sie

K121

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.9 ABNORMAL SHIFTING
9
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W13

Abnormal shifting
• Shift incorrectly (incorrect shift pattern).
• There is a malfunction in the signal circuit which controls shifting (TP sensor, input/turbine speed
sensor, vehicle speed sensor), the control valve is stuck, the accumulator (forward or servo apply) is
stuck, or the clutch circuit is stuck.
1. Clutch slipped, burned
• Line pressure low
• Control valve body malfunction
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Accelerator cable misadjustment
2. Signal malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction or mis-adjustment
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. TR switch malfunction
• Selector lever adjustment incorrect
• TR sensor adjustment incorrect
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Disconnect PCM Is resistance between ground
terminal at PCM connector and body ground
less than 5.0 ohms?
2
Check the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent. (See 3940 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TP
• TSS
• VSS
Is PID value okay?

End OfFREQUENT
Sie
NO.10
SHIFTING
10
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

End Of Sie

K122

Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Repair or replace any defective parts.

A6E568001030W14

Frequent shifting
• Downshifting occurs immediately even when accelerator pedal is depressed slightly in D, S, L ranges
except HOLD mode.
• The circuit which is the cause is basically the same as No.9 Abnormal shifting. However, a
malfunction of the input signal to the TP sensor, input/turbine speed sensor, vehicle speed sensor
(including the sensor GND, sensor harness and connector), or clutch slippage (clutch stuck, low
pressure in line) may also be the cause.

End OfSHIFT
Sie POINT IS HIGH OR LOW
NO.11
11

Yes
No

A6E568001030W15

Shift point is high or low
• Shift point considerably different from automatic shift diagram.
• Shift delays when accelerating.
• Shift occurs quickly when accelerating and engine speed does not increase.
• If the transaxle does not shift abnormally, there is a malfunction of the input signal to the TP sensor,
input/turbine speed sensor, or vehicle speed sensor (including sensor GND).
• If the engine speed is high or low, regardless normal shifting, inspect the tachometer.
• Verify that the output signal of the TP sensor changes linearly.

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.12 TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) NON-OPERATION
12
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W16

Torque converter clutch (TCC) non-operation
• TCC does not operate when vehicle reaches TCC operation range.
• Basically, the TCC does not operate when the fail-safe is operating. Verify the DTC first.
Caution
• If the TCC is stuck, inspect it. In addition, inspect the oil cooler for foreign particles which
may have mixed in with the ATF.
1. TCC burned
(1) Input sensor system malfunction
• Transaxle fluid temperature sensor
• Vehicle speed sensor
• Input/turbine speed sensor
• Sensor GND
(2) Output solenoid valve system malfunction (Sticking)
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
(3) Control valve body malfunction system (Poor operation, stuck)
• TCC hydraulic pressure system
2. TP sensor malfunction (Not operating linear)
3. Input/turbine speed sensor or vehicle speed sensor malfunction
4. Brake switch malfunction (Always ON)
5. ECT sensor malfunction

Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
With indicator switch at ON, does HOLD
indicator light indication correspond to HOLD
switch operation?

Check the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent. (See F45 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TP
• VSS
• TSS
Are PID values okay?
Disconnect PCM.
Is resistance between ground terminal at PCM
connector and body ground less than 5.0
ohms?
Check resistance between shift solenoid A and
E control circuit at PCM connector and control
valve body connector. Check resistance
between shift solenoid A and E circuit at PCM
connector and control valve body connector. Are
the resistances less than 5.0 ohms?
Inspect shift solenoid A and E. (See K26
SOLENOID VALVE INSPECTION.) Are the shift
solenoids operating properly?

End
OfNO
SieKICKDOWN
NO.13
13
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair shift solenoid A or E control. Reconnect PCM.

Yes
No

Replace PCM.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts.(See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)

Yes
No

A6E568001030W17

No kickdown
• Does not downshift when accelerator pedal is fully depressed within kickdown range.
• If transaxle does not downshift though shifting is normal, malfunction is in TP sensor circuit (including
sensor GND, sensor harness and connector).

K123

TROUBLESHOOTING
End
OfENGINE
Sie
NO.14
FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN UPSHIFTING OR DOWNSHIFTING
14
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W18

Engine flares up or slips when upshifting or downshifting
• When accelerator pedal is depressed for driveway, engine speed increases but vehicle speed
increases slowly.
• When accelerator pedal is depressed while driving, engine speed increases but vehicle does not.
• There is clutch slip because clutch is stuck or line pressure is low.
1. Clutch stuck, slippage (forward clutch, 34 clutch, 24 brake band, one-way clutch)
• Line pressure low
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Accelerator cable misadjustment
• Control valve body malfunction
2. Signal malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction or mis-adjustment
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. Poor operation of mechanical pressure
• Selector lever position disparity
• TR switch position disparity
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Is shift point okay?
2

3
4

Check the value at the following PID using the
WDS or equivalent. (See F45 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TP
Is PID value okay?
Disconnect PCM. Is resistance between ground
terminal at PCM connector and body ground
less than 5.0 ohms?
Check LPS PID value.
Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Go to No.9 "ABNORMAL SHIFTING"
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.

Yes

End OfENGINE
Sie
NO.15
FLARES UP OR SLIPS WHEN ACCELERATING VEHICLE
15
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

End Of Sie

K124

A6E568001030W19

Engine flares up or slips when accelerating vehicle
• Engine flares up when accelerator pedal is depressed for upshifting.
• Engine flares up suddenly when accelerator pedal is depressed for downshifting.
• The malfunction is basically the same as for No.14 "Engine flares up or slips when upshifting or
downshifting". If conditions for No.14 worsen, the malfunction will develop to No.15.

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.16 JUDDER UPON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC) OPERATION
16
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W20

Judder upon torque converter clutch (TCC) operation
• Vehicle jolts when TCC is engaged.
• Poor TCC engagement due to either slippage because the TCC is stuck or the line pressure is low
Caution
• If the TCC is stuck, inspect it. In addition, inspect the oil cooler for foreign particles which
may have mixed in with the ATF.
1. Torque converter clutch piston slipped, burned
• Line pressure high
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Control valve body malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
2. Signal malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• TFT sensor malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction or mis-adjustment
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. Torque converter malfunction

Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Check the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent. (See F45 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TSS
Are PID values okay?
2
Disconnect PCM. Is resistance between ground
terminal at PCM connector and body ground
less than 5.0 ohms?
3
Check resistance between shift solenoid A
control circuit at PCM connector and control
valve body connector. Check resistance
between shift solenoid A circuit at PCM
connector and control valve body connector. Are
the resistance less than 5.0 ohms?
4
Inspect Shfit solenoid. (See K26 SOLENOID
VALVE INSPECTION.) Is the solenoid valve
operating properly?

Check LPS PID value.
Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair shift solenoid A circuit.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Replace PCM.

Yes

End Of Sie

K125

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.17 EXCESSIVE SHIFT SHOCK FROM N TO D OR N TO R POSITION/RANGE
17
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W21

Excessive shift shock from N to D or N to R position/range
• Strong shock felt when shifting from N to D or N to R position/range.
• Shift shock may worsen when the fail-safe is operating. If no DTC is output, the shift shock may worsen
due to poor operation of the control valve body or sticking of the clutch.
1. Clutch burned (N→D: Forward clutch, N→R: Reverse clutch or low and reverse brake)
• Line pressure low, high
• TP sensor malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Accelerator cable misadjustment
• Control valve body malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
2. Poor hydraulic operation (Malfunction in range change)
• Forward accumlator malfunction
• Servo apply accumulator malfunction
• Pressure switch malfunction
3. Idle speed high
4. Poor tightening torque of engine mount, exhaust mount
5. Poor operation of mechanical pressure
• Selector lever position disparity
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Does shift shock occur only when engine cold?
2

Disconnect PCM. Is resistance between ground
terminal at PCM connector and body ground
less than 5.0 ohms?

Perform the stall test. (See K7 Stall Test.) Is
stall speed okay?

Check the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent. (See F45 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TR
Is PID value okay?

6
7

ACTION
Yes
No
Yes

No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 3.
Check the value at the following PIDs using the WDS or
equivalent. (See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
• TP
• TFT
• TFTV
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.
Go to next step.
Go to Step 5.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.

Yes

No
Yes
No
Yes

K126

TROUBLESHOOTING
End OfEXCESSIVE
Sie
NO.18
SHIFT SHOCK IS FELT WHEN UPSHIFTING AND DOWNSHIFTING
18
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W22

Excessive shift shock is felt when upshifting and downshifting
• Excessive shift shock felt when depressing accelerator pedal to accelerate at upshifting. During
cruising, excessive shift shock is felt when depressing accelerator pedal at downshifting.
• Shift shock may worsen when fail-safe is operating. The shift shock has worsened if the TP sensor,
input/turbine speed sensor, or vehicle speed sensor signal malfunctions.
1. Clutch slipped, burned (Forward clutch, 24 brake band, 34 clutch)
• Line pressure low, high
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid A malfunction
• Shift solenoid B malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Pressure control solenoid malfunction
• Accelerator cable misadjustment
• Control valve body malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
2. Signal malfunction
• Transaxle temperature sensor malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. Poor hydraulic operation (Malfunction in range change)
• Pressure switch malfunction
• Forward accumulator malfunction
• Servo apply accumulator malfunction
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Perform the stall test. (See K7 Stall Test.) Is
stall speed okay?
2

3
4

Check the value at the following PIDs using the
WDS or equivalent. (See F45 PCM
INSPECTION.)
• TP V
Is PID value okay?
Disconnect PCM. Is resistance between ground
terminal at PCM connector and body ground
less than 5.0 ohms?
Check LPS PID value.
Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.

Yes

End OfEXCESSIVE
Sie
NO.19
SHIFT SHOCK ON TORQUE CONVERTER CLUTCH (TCC)
19
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W23

Excessive shift shock on torque converter clutch (TCC)
• Strong shock is felt when TCC engaged.
• The troubleshooting flow is the same as No.16 Judder upon TCC operation.

End Of Sie

K127

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.20 NOISE OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN ALL POSITIONS/RANGES
20
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W24

Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is stopped in all positions/ranges
• Transaxle noisy in all positions and ranges when vehicle is idling.
• The malfunction is in the oil pump which causes a high-pitched noise to be emitted from the transaxle at
idle.
Note
• If a noise is emitted during shifting only, the malfunction is in shift solenoid D, E or shift solenoid A, B,
C. If a noise is emitted during shifting at certain gears only or during deceleration only, it is gear
noise.
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
Inspect engine condition.
Is any engine concern (i. e. rough idle)?
2

Does noise stop when solenoid connector is
disconnected?

4
5

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to appropriate symptom troubleshooting. (See Section
F.)
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Overhaul control valve body and repair or replace any
defective parts. If problem remains, overhaul transaxle and
repair or replace any defective parts. (See ATX workshop
manual (FN4A-EL) [1623-10-98E].) (See ATX workshop
manual supplement (FN4A-EL) [1746-1*-02C].)
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair open ground circuit. Reconnect PCM.

Yes

Yes
No
Yes
No

End OfNOISE
Sie OCCURS AT IDLE WHEN VEHICLE IS STOPPED IN D, S, L RANGES, OR IN R POSITION
NO.21

A6E568001030W25

21
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

End Of Sie

K128

Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is stopped in D, S, L ranges, or in R position
• Transaxle noisy in driving ranges when vehicle idling.
• Although the malfunction is basically the same as No.20 "Noise occurs at idle when vehicle is stopped
in all positions/ranges", other causes may be selector lever position disparity or TR switch position
disparity.

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.22 NO ENGINE BRAKING IN HOLD MODE
22
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W26

No engine braking in hold mode
• Engine speed drops to idle but vehicle coasts when accelerator pedal is released during cruising at
medium to high speeds.
• Engine speed drops to idle but vehicle coasts when accelerator pedal is released when in L range at
low vehicle speed.
1. Clutch slippage, burned (low and reverse brake)
• Line pressure low
• Shift solenoid D malfunction
• Shift solenoid E malfunction
• Shift solenoid C malfunction
• Control valve body malfunction
• Body GND malfunction
2. Signal malfunction
• TP sensor malfunction
• Vehicle speed sensor malfunction
• Sensor GND malfunction
• Input/turbine speed sensor malfunction
3. HOLD switch ON not judged by PCM (short, or open circuit, poor operation)
• HOLD switch signal malfunction
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Do following symptoms concurrently occur?
Engine flares up or slips during
acceleration.
Engine flares up or slips when shifting.

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to symptom troubleshooting NO.14 "Engine flares up or
slips when upshifting or downshifting" or No.15 "Engine
flares up or slips when accelerating vehicle".
Repeat basic inspection and repair or replace any defective
parts according to inspection result.
(See K112 BASIC INSPECTION.)

End OfTRANSAXLE
Sie
NO.23
OVERHEATS
23
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W27

Transaxle overheats
• Burnt smell emitted from transaxle.
• Smoke emitted from transaxle.
• The malfunction is restricted to hindrance of coolant at the oil cooler. In addition, overheating of the
transaxle may be caused by a malfunction of the transaxle fluid temperature sensor.
1. Burned (TCC)
• Line pressure low
• Control valve body malfunction
• Accelerator cable misadjustment
2. Oil cooler malfunction (Foreign material mixed ATF)
3. Transaxle fluid temperature sensor malfunction
4. Excessive amount of ATF
5. Torque converter malfunction
Note
• Before following troubleshooting steps, make sure that Automatic Transaxle On-Board Diagnostic
and Automatic Transaxle Basic Inspection are conducted.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2
3

INSPECTION
• Inspect for bent, damage, corrosion or kinks
of oil cooler pipes.
• Are oil cooler pipes okay?
• Perform the stall test.
(See K7 Stall Test.)
• Is stall speed okay?
• Check the value at the following PID using
the WDS or equivalent.
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)
TP
• Is PID value okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

K129

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
4

INSPECTION
• Disconnect PCM.
• Is resistance between ground terminal at
PCM connector and body ground less than
5.0 ohms?
• Check LPS PID value.
• Is LPS PID value okay?
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION.)

Yes
No
Yes

End
OfENGINE
Sie
NO.24
STALLS WHEN SHIFTED TO D, S, L RANGES, OR IN R POSITION
24
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W28

Engine stalls when shifted to D, S, L ranges, or in R position
• Engine stalls when shifting from N or P position to D, S, L ranges or R position at idle.
• The malfunction is on the engine control side (i.e. IAC system). Otherwise, the malfunction is in the
input/turbine speed sensor (engine sometimes starts) or TCC circuit (engine always stalls).

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Go to symptom troubleshooting No.10 Low
idle/stalls during deceleration.
(See F202 NO.10 LOW IDLE/STALLS
DURING DECELERATION.)
• Is engine control system okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Repeat basic inspection and repair or replace any defective
parts according to inspection result.
(See K112 BASIC INSPECTION.)
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection results.

End
OfENGINE
Sie
NO.25
STALLS WHEN DRIVING AT SLOW SPEEDS OR STOPPING
25
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W29

Engine stalls when driving at slow speeds or stopping
• Engine stalls when brake pedal is depressed while driving at low speed or stopping.
• The malfunction on engine control side (e.g. Fuel injection control, IAC system) Otherwise, the
malfunction is in the control valve body, shift solenoid E or TCC.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Go to symptom troubleshooting No.9 Low
idle/stalls during deceleration.
(See F201 NO.9 FAST IDLE/RUNS ON.)
• Does engine control system okay?
• Go to symptom troubleshooting No.4
"Engine Stalls."
(See F189 NO.4 HARD TO START/LONG
CRANK/ERRATIC START/ERRATIC
CRANK.)
• Is engine control system okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection results.
Repeat basic inspection and repair or replace any defective
parts according to inspection result.
(See K112 BASIC INSPECTION.)
Repair or replace any defective parts according to
inspection results.

End OfSTARTER
Sie
NO.26
DOES NOT WORK
26
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W30

Starter does not work
• Starter does not work even when P or N position.
• Selector lever misadjustment
• TR switch misadjustment
• Open or short circuit in TR switch

End OfHOLD
Sie INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WHEN HOLD SWITCH IS TURNED TO ON
NO.27

A6E568001030W31

27
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

K130

HOLD indicator light does not illuminate when HOLD switch is turned to ON
• HOLD indicator light in dashboard does not illuminate when HOLD switch is turned on and IG SW at
ON.
• HOLD switch, HOLD indicator light or related wiring harness malfunction.

TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2
3

INSPECTION
• Are other indicator lights illuminated with
ignition switch is at ON?
• Check the HOLD switch
(See K13 HOLD SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is HOLD switch okay?
• Disconnect PCM.
• Turn ignition switch on.
• Is voltage between 3Q terminal at the PCM
connector and body ground greater than
10.5 V?
• Check the HOLD indicator light.
• Is HOLD indicator light okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Inspect meter fuse.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.

Yes
No

Replace PCM.
Reconnect PCM.
Go to next step.

Yes

Inspect for open circuit or disconnected connector in
harness between the following:
• Ignition switch and HOLD indicator light
• HOLD indicator light and PCM
Repair or replace any defective parts.

End
OfHOLD
Sie INDICATOR LIGHT ILLUMINATES WHEN HOLD SWITCH IS NOT TURNED TO ON
NO.28
28
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E568001030W32

HOLD indicator light illuminates when HOLD switch is not turned to ON
• HOLD indicator light in dashboard illuminates even though HOLD switch is turned off and IG SW at ON.
• HOLD switch or related wiring harness malfunction.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Check the HOLD switch
(See K13 HOLD SWITCH INSPECTION.)
• Is HOLD switch okay?
• Disconnect PCM.
• Turn ignition switch off.
• Is resistance between 3Q terminal at the
PCM connector and body ground greater
than 10 kilohms?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace any defective parts.
Replace PCM.
Repair short circuit between HOLD indecator light and PCM.
Reconnect PCM.

End Of Sie

K131

FRONT AND REAR AXLES

LOCATION INDEX ................................................ M-2
FRONT AXLE/DRIVE SHAFT
LOCATION INDEX........................................... M-2
REAR AXLE LOCATION INDEX......................... M-3
GENERAL PROCEDURES ................................... M-3
PRECAUTION (FRONT AND REAR AXLE) ....... M-3
FRONT AXLE ........................................................ M-4
WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE
PRE-INSPECTION........................................... M-4
WHEEL HUB BOLT REPLACEMENT ................ M-4
WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................. M-5
REAR AXLE .......................................................... M-9
WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE
PRE-INSPECTION........................................... M-9
WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........................... M-10
DRIVE SHAFT ..................................................... M-12
JOINT SHAFT PRE-INSPECTION ................... M-12
JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...... M-12
JOINT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .... M-14
DRIVE SHAFT PRE-INSPECTION................... M-16
DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..... M-17
DRIVE SHAFT (ATX)
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ......................... M-19
DRIVE SHAFT (MTX)
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ......................... M-24

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
FRONT AXLE/DRIVE SHAFT LOCATION INDEX

A6E630004000W01

A6E0612W106
.

1
2

Hub bolt
(See M4 WHEEL HUB BOLT REPLACEMENT)
Wheel hub, steering knuckle
(See M4 WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE
PRE-INSPECTION)
(See M5 WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Joint shaft
(See M12 JOINT SHAFT PRE-INSPECTION)
(See M12 JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See M14 JOINT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)

End Of Sie

Drive shaft
(See M16 DRIVE SHAFT PRE-INSPECTION)
(See M17 DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See M19 DRIVE SHAFT (ATX) DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
(See M24 DRIVE SHAFT (MTX) DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)

LOCATION INDEX, GENERAL PROCEDURES
REAR AXLE LOCATION INDEX

A6E630005000W01

A6E0312W016
.

Wheel hub, hub spindle
(See M9 WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE PREINSPECTION)
(See M10 WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

GENERAL PROCEDURES
PRECAUTION (FRONT AND REAR AXLE)

A6E631001018W01

Wheel and Tire Removal/Installation
1. The removal and installation procedures for the wheels and tires are not mentioned in this section. When a
wheel is removed, tighten it to 88118 N·m {9.012.0 kgf·m, 65.087.0 ft·lbf}
Brake Line Disconnection/Connection
Caution
• Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. If brake fluid gets on a painted surface, wipe it off
immediately.

1. Tighten the brake pipe flare nut using the SST (49 0259 770B). Be sure to modify the brake pipe flare nut
tightening torque to allow for use of a torque wrench-SST combination. (See GI16 TORQUE FORMULAS.)
2. If any brake line has been disconnected any time during the procedure, add brake fluid, bleed the brakes, and
inspect for leakage after the procedure has been completed.
Suspension Arm Removal/Installation
1. Tighten any part of the suspension that uses rubber bushings only after vehicle has been lowered and
unloaded.
Note
• Unloaded: Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack, and tools
are in designated position.

End Of Sie

FRONT AXLE

FRONT AXLE
WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE PRE-INSPECTION
Wheel Bearing Play Inspection
1. Position a dial indicator against the wheel hub.
2. Push and pull the wheel hub by hand in the axial
direction and measure the wheel bearing play.

A6E631204000W01

Maximum wheel bearing play
0.05 mm {0.002 in}
3. If the bearing play exceeds the specification,
replace and tighten the locknut to the specified
torque and retest.
• Replace the wheel bearing as necessary.
A6E0311W010

End Of Sie

WHEEL HUB BOLT REPLACEMENT
1. Remove the hub bolt using the SSTs.

A6E631233060W01

Note
• If the dust cover interferes with the wheel
hub bolt and the wheel hub bolt cannot be
removed, tap the part shown in the figure
with a chisel lightly and bend the processing
point back to the steering knuckle side.
2. Install the hub bolt into the wheel hub and install a
washer and hub nut on the hub bolt.
A6E0311W011

3. Tighten the hub nut while holding the wheel hub
using a brass bar.

A6E0311W012

End Of Sie

FRONT AXLE
WHEEL HUB, STEERING KNUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E631204000W02

Caution
• Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may
possibly cause an open circuit in the harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the
following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate
place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while the vehicle is being serviced.
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. After installation, inspect the front wheel alignment. (See R5 FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

A6E0612W075
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Locknut
(See M6 Locknut Removal Note)
(See M9 Locknut Installation Note)
Brake caliper component
Disc plate
(See P20 Disc Plate Removal Note)
Tie-rod end ball joint
(See N11 Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note)
Bolt
Front lower arm (front) ball joint
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Front lower arm (rear) ball joint
(See R19 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Front upper arm ball joint
(See R13 Front Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal
Note)

9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Wheel hub, steering knuckle, dust cover
Wheel hub component
(See M6 Wheel Hub Component Removal Note)
(See M8 Wheel Hub Component Installation Note)
Retaining ring
Wheel bearing
(See M6 Wheel Bearing Removal Note)
(See M8 Wheel Bearing Installation Note)
Dust cover
(See M7 Dust Cover Removal Note)
(See M8 Dust Cover Installation Note)
Steering knuckle
Hub bolt
(See M7 Hub Bolt Removal Note)
(See M7 Hub Bolt Installation Note)

FRONT AXLE
Locknut Removal Note
1. Knock the crimped portion of the locknut outward
using a small chisel and a hammer.
2. Lock the hub by applying the brakes.
3. Remove the locknut.

A6E6321W001

Wheel Hub Component Removal Note
1. Remove the wheel hub component using the
SSTs.

A6E0311W015

2. If the bearing inner race remains on the front
wheel hub component, grind a section of the
bearing inner race until approx. 0.5 mm {0.02 in}
remains. Then remove it using a chisel.

A6E6312W002

Wheel Bearing Removal Note
1. Remove the wheel bearing using the SSTs.

A6E0311W017

FRONT AXLE
Dust Cover Removal Note
Note
• The dust cover does not need to be removed unless it is being replaced.
1. Mark the dust cover and steering knuckle for
proper installation.

A6E0311W018

2. Remove the dust cover using a chisel.

A6E0311W019

Hub Bolt Removal Note
Note
• The hub bolts do not need to be removed unless they are being replaced.
1. Remove the hub bolts using a press.

A6E6312W003

Hub Bolt Installation Note
1. Install the new hub bolts using a press.

A6E6312W004

FRONT AXLE
Dust Cover Installation Note
1. Mark the new dust cover in the same way as the
removed one.
2. Align the marks of the new dust cover and the
knuckle.

A6E0312W010

3. Install the new dust cover using the SSTs.

A6E0312W011

Wheel Bearing Installation Note
1. Install the new wheel bearing using the SSTs.

A6E0312W012

Wheel Hub Component Installation Note
1. Install the wheel hub component using the SSTs.

A6E0312W013

FRONT AXLE, REAR AXLE
Locknut Installation Note
1. Install a new locknut and stake it as shown.

A6E0312W015

End Of Sie

REAR AXLE
WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE PRE-INSPECTION
Wheel Bearing Play Inspection
1. Position a dial indicator against the wheel hub.
2. Push and pull the wheel hub by hand in the axial
direction and measure the wheel bearing play.

A6E631405000W01

A6E0312W019

End Of Sie

REAR AXLE
WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E631405000W02

A6E0312W078

1
2
3
4
5
6

Hub cap
Locknut
(See M10 Locknut Removal Note)
(See M11 Locknut Installation Note)
Parking brake cable
Brake caliper component
Disc plate
(See P20 Disc Plate Removal Note)
Wheel hub component

7
8
9
10
11

Wheel hub
Hub bolt
(See M7 Hub Bolt Removal Note)
(See M7 Hub Bolt Installation Note)
ABS sensor rotor (with ABS)
(See M11 ABS Sensor Rotor Removal Note)
(See M11 ABS Sensor Rotor Installation Note)
Dust cover
Hub spindle

Locknut Removal Note
1. Knock the crimped portion of the locknut outward
using a small cape chisel and a hammer.
2. Lock the hub by applying the brakes.
3. Remove the locknut.

A6E0312W021

M10

REAR AXLE
ABS Sensor Rotor Removal Note
Note
• The sensor rotor does not need to be removed unless it is being replaced.
1. Remove the sensor rotor using a chisel.

A6E6314W001

ABS Sensor Rotor Installation Note
Caution
• Position the SST so that marking B faces the bottom.

1. Set the SST as shown in the figure.

A6E0313W011

2. Press on the new sensor rotor using the SST and
a press.

A6E0313W012

Locknut Installation Note
1. Install a new locknut and stake it as shown.

A6E0313W013

M11

DRIVE SHAFT
End Of Sie

DRIVE SHAFT
JOINT SHAFT PRE-INSPECTION
1. Verify that the joint shaft is not twisted or cracked.
• Replace it as necessary.
2. Turn the joint shaft by hand and verify that the
bearing rotates smoothly and freely.
• Replace it as necessary.

A6E631625700W01

A6E0313W015

End Of Sie

JOINT SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E631625700W02

Caution
• Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may
possibly cause an open circuit in the harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the
following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor and fix it to an appropriate place
where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while the vehicle is being serviced.
1. Drain the transaxle oil. (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
(See J3 TRANSAXLE OIL REPLACEMENT.)
2. Remove the ABS sensor. (SeeP32 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E0313W016
.

M12

DRIVE SHAFT
1
2
3

4
5

Tie-rod end ball joint
(See N11 Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note)
bolt
Lower arm (front, rear) ball joint
(See R15 FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See R19 FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Stabilizer control link
Brake caliper component
(See M13 Brake Caliper Component Removal
Note)

6
7
8
9
10

Disk plate
(See P20 Disc Plate Removal Note)
Wheel hub, steering knuckle and drive shaft
(See M13 Wheel Hub, Steering Knuckle and Drive
Shaft Removal Note)
Joint shaft bracket bolt
Joint shaft
Clip
(See M14 Clip Installation Note)

Brake Caliper Component Removal Note
1. Suspend the caliper aside with wire.

A6E0313W056

Wheel Hub, Steering Knuckle and Drive Shaft Removal Note
Caution
• The sharp edges of the joint shaft can slice or puncture the oil seal. Be careful when removing the
joint shaft from the transaxle.
1. Pull the joint shaft straight out.
2. Install the SST into the transaxle to hold the side
gears after the joint shaft is removed.

A6E0313W019

M13

DRIVE SHAFT
Clip Installation Note
1. Install a new clip onto the joint shaft with the opening facing upward. Ensure that the diameter of the clip does
not exceed the specification on installation.
2. After installation, measure the outer diameter. If it
exceeds the specification, repeat Step 1 using a
new clip.
Outer diameter specification
31.2 mm {1.23 in} max.

A6E0313W021

End Of Sie

JOINT SHAFT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E631625700W03

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E0313W026

1
2

Joint shaft
(See M14 Joint Shaft Disassembly Note)
(See M16 Joint Shaft Assembly Note)
Bearing
(See M15 Bearing Disassembly Note)
(See M15 Bearing Assembly Note)

3
4
5

Dust seal (Left)
(See M16 Dust Seal (Left) Assembly Note)
Dust seal (Right)
(See M15 Dust Seal (Right) Assembly Note)
Bracket

Joint Shaft Disassembly Note
1. Disassemble the joint shaft.

A6E0313W052

M14

DRIVE SHAFT
Bearing Disassembly Note
1. Remove the bearing using the SSTs.

A6E0313W053

Dust Seal (Right) Assembly Note
1. Apply grease to the new dust seal lip.
2. Install the new right side dust seal using the
SSTs.

A6E0313W028

Bearing Assembly Note
1. Install the new bearing using the SSTs.

A6E0313W027

M15

DRIVE SHAFT
Dust Seal (Left) Assembly Note
1. Apply grease to the new dust seal lip.
2. Install the new left side dust seal using a steel
plate and the SSTs.

A6E0313W030

Joint Shaft Assembly Note
1. Assemble the joint shaft using a press and the
SST.

A6E0313W029

End Of Sie

DRIVE SHAFT PRE-INSPECTION
1. Inspect the dust boot on the drive shaft for cracks,
damage, leaking grease, and looseness in the
boot band.
2. Inspect the drive shaft for bends, cracks, and
wear in the joint or splines.
• Repair or replace the drive shaft or boot/band
as necessary.

A6E631625500W01

A6E0313W033

End Of Sie

M16

DRIVE SHAFT
DRIVE SHAFT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E631625500W02

Caution
• Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may
possibly cause an open circuit in the harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the
following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate
place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while the vehicle is being serviced.
1. Drain the transaxle oil (left side). (See K13 AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE FLUID (ATF) REPLACEMENT.)
(SeeJ3 TRANSAXLE OIL REPLACEMENT.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E0313W055
.

1
2
3
4
5

Locknut
(See M6 Locknut Removal Note)
(See M9 Locknut Installation Note)
Brake caliper component
(See M13 Brake Caliper Component Removal
Note)
Disc plate
(See P20 Disc Plate Removal Note)
Tie-rod end ball joint
(See N11 Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note)
Front stabilizer control link
(See R22 FRONT STABILIZER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

6
7
8
9
10

Bolt
Front lower arm (rear) ball joint
(See R19 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Front lower arm (front) ball joint
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Drive shaft
(See M18 Drive Shaft Removal Note)
(See M19 Drive Shaft Installation Note)
Clip
(See M18 Clip Installation Note)

M17

DRIVE SHAFT
Drive Shaft Removal Note
1. Install a spare nut onto the drive shaft so that the nut is flush with the end of the drive shaft.
2. Tap the nut with a copper hammer to loosen the
drive shaft from the front wheel hub.
3. Separate the drive shaft from the wheel hub.
Caution
• The sharp edges of the drive shaft can
slice or puncture the oil seal. Be careful
when removing the drive shaft from the
transaxle.

A6E6316W001

4. Separate the left side drive shaft from the
transaxle by prying with a bar inserted between
the outer ring and the transaxle, as shown in the
figure.

A6E6316W002

5. Install the SST into the transaxle to hold the side
gears after the drive shaft is removed.

A6E0313W038

Clip Installation Note
1. Install a new clip onto the joint shaft with the opening facing upward. Ensure that the diameter of the clip does
not exceed the specification on installation.
2. After installation, measure the outer diameter. If it
exceeds the specification, repeat Steps 12
using a new clip.
Outer diameter specification
31.2 mm {1.23 in} max.

A6E0313W021

M18

DRIVE SHAFT
Drive Shaft Installation Note
Caution
• The sharp edges of the drive shaft can
slice or puncture the oil seal. Be careful
when installing the drive shaft to the
transaxle.
• The oil seals are damaged easily if this
procedure is not done correctly.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Insert the drive shaft into the wheel hub.
Apply transaxle oil to the oil seal lip.
Push the drive shaft into the transaxle.
After installation, pull the transaxle side outer ring
forward to confirm that the drive shaft is securely
held by the clip.

A6E6316W003

End Of Sie

DRIVE SHAFT (ATX) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E631625500W03

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E0313W043
.

3
4

Boot band (wheel side)
(See M20 Boot Band (Wheel Side) Disassembly
Note)
(See M23 Boot Band (Wheel Side) Assembly
Note)
Boot band (transaxle side)
(See M20 Boot Band (Transaxle Side)
Disassembly Note)
(See M23 Boot Band (Transaxle Side) Assembly
Note)
Outer ring
(See M20 Outer Ring Disassembly Note)
(See M22 Outer Ring Assembly Note)
Snap ring
(See M20 Snap Ring, Tripod Joint Disassembly
Note)
(See M22 Tripod Joint, Snap Ring Assembly Note)

6
7
8

9
10

Tripod joint
(See M20 Snap Ring, Tripod Joint Disassembly
Note)
(See M22 Tripod Joint, Snap Ring Assembly Note)
Free ring
Boot
(See M21 Boot Disassembly Note)
(See M22 Boot Assembly Note)
ABS sensor rotor (with ABS)
(See M21 ABS Sensor Rotor (With ABS)
Disassembly Note)
(See M22 ABS Sensor Rotor (With ABS) Assembly
Note)
Shaft and ball joint component
Dynamic damper
(See M21 Dynamic Damper Assembly Note)

M19

DRIVE SHAFT
Boot Band (Wheel Side) Disassembly Note
Note
• The boot band does not need to be removed unless it is being replaced.
1. Remove the boot clamp with end clamp pliers as
shown and discard the clamp.

A6E6316W004

Boot Band (Transaxle Side) Disassembly Note
1. Pry up the locking clips using a screwdriver.
2. Pull back the end of the band.

A6E6316W005

Outer Ring Disassembly Note
1. Mark the outer ring and the shaft for proper
assembly.
2. Remove the outer ring.

A6E0313W046

Snap Ring, Tripod Joint Disassembly Note
1. Mark the shaft and tripod joint for proper assembly.
2. Remove the snap ring using snap-ring pliers.
3. Remove the tripod joint from the shaft.
Caution
• Do not tap the tripod joint with a hammer.

A6E0313W047

M20

DRIVE SHAFT
Boot Disassembly Note
Note
• The wheel side boot does not need to be removed unless replacing it or the ball joint and shaft
component.
• Do not strip the tape until the boot is assembled.
1. Wrap the shaft splines with tape.
2. Remove the boot.

A6E0313W048

ABS Sensor Rotor (With ABS) Disassembly Note

Caution
• Do not remove the sensor rotor unless it is necessary.
• Do not reuse the sensor rotor if removed.
1. Tap the ABS sensor rotor off the drive shaft using
a chisel.

ZLU0313W105

Dynamic Damper Assembly Note
1. Install the dynamic damper as shown in the
figure.
Standard length
334.7340.7 mm {13.213.4 in}
2. Install the new boot band onto the dynamic
damper.

A6E6316W006

M21

DRIVE SHAFT
ABS Sensor Rotor (With ABS) Assembly Note
1. Set a new ABS sensor rotor on the drive shaft
and press it on using the SSTs.

A6E0313W050

Boot Assembly Note
Note
• The wheel side and transaxle side boots are different.
1. Fill the boot (wheel side) with the specified grease.
Caution
• Do not touch grease with your hand. Apply it from the tube to prevent foreign matter from entering
the boot.
Grease amount
90110 g {3.183.88 oz}
2. With the splines of the shaft still wrapped in tape from disassembly, install the boot.
3. Remove the tape.
Tripod Joint, Snap Ring Assembly Note
1. Align the marks and install the tripod joint using a
bar and a hammer.
Caution
• Do not damage the roller.
2. Install the new snap ring using snap-ring pliers.
Caution
• Be sure the snap ring engages correcting
in the groove of the shaft.
A6E0313W051

Outer Ring Assembly Note
1. Fill the outer ring and boot (transaxle side) with the specified grease.
Caution
• Do not touch grease with your hand. Apply it from the tube to prevent foreign matter from entering
the boot.
Grease amount
195215 g {6.887.58 oz}
2. Install the outer ring.
3. Set the drive shaft to the standard length.
Standard length
Left side
674.5684.5
{26.5626.94}

M22

mm {in}

Right side
631.2641.2
{24.8625.24}

DRIVE SHAFT
4. Release any trapped air from the boots by
carefully lifting up the small end of each boot with
a cloth wrapped screwdriver.
Caution
• Do not let grease leak.
• Do not damage the boot.
5. Verify that the drive shaft length is within the
standard.
A6E6316W007

Boot Band (Transaxle Side) Assembly Note
1. Fold the band in the direction opposite to the
forward revolving direction of the drive shaft and
use pliers to pull it tight.
2. Lock the end of the band by bending the locking
clips.
Caution
• Install the band into the groove securely.

A6E6316W008

Boot Band (Wheel Side) Assembly Note
1. Adjust clearance A by turning the adjusting bolt of
the SST.
Clearance A
2.9 mm {0.11 in}

A6E0350W012

2. Crimp the wheel side small boot band using the
SST. Verify that clearance B is within the
specification.
• If clearance B is more than the specification,
reduce clearance A of the SST and crimp the
boot again.
• If clearance B is less than the specification,
replace the boot band, increase clearance A
of the SST, and crimp the new boot.
Clearance B
2.42.8 mm {0.0950.110 in}

A6E0350W013

3. Verify that the boot band does not protrude from
the boot band installation area.
• If it does, replace the boot band and repeat Steps 2 and 3.
4. Fill the boot with the repair kit grease.
5. Adjust clearance A by turning the adjusting bolt of the SST.
Clearance A
3.2 mm {0.13 in}

M23

DRIVE SHAFT
6. Crimp the wheel side big boot band using the SST.
7. Verify that clearance B is within the specification.
• If clearance B is more than the specification, reduce clearance A of the SST and crimp the boot again.
• If clearance B is less than the specification, replace the boot band, increase clearance A of the SST and
crimp the new boot.
Clearance B
2.42.8 mm {0.0950.110 in}
8. Verify that the boot band does not protrude from the boot band installation area.
• If it does, replace the boot band and repeat Steps 7 and 8.

End Of Sie

DRIVE SHAFT (MTX) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E631625500W04

A6E6316W009
.

M24

DRIVE SHAFT
1

3
4
5
6

Boot band (wheel side)
(See M20 Boot Band (Wheel Side) Disassembly
Note)
(See M23 Boot Band (Wheel Side) Assembly
Note)
Boot band (transaxle side)
See M20 Boot Band (Transaxle Side) Disassembly
Note
See M23 Boot Band (Transaxle Side) Assembly
Note
Clip
See M25 Clip Disassembly Note
See M26 Outer Ring, Clip Assembly Note
Outer ring
(See M26 Outer Ring, Clip Assembly Note)
Snap ring
(See M26 Cage, Inner Ring, Balls, Snap Ring
Assembly Note)
Balls
(See M25 Balls, Inner Ring, Cage Disassembly
Note)
(See M26 Cage, Inner Ring, Balls, Snap Ring
Assembly Note)

9
10
11

Inner Ring
(See M25 Balls, Inner Ring, Cage Disassembly
Note)
(See M26 Cage, Inner Ring, Balls, Snap Ring
Assembly Note)
Cage
(See M25 Balls, Inner Ring, Cage Disassembly
Note)
(See M26 Cage, Inner Ring, Balls, Snap Ring
Assembly Note)
Boot
(See M26 Boot Assembly Note)
Dynamic damper
(See M26 Dynamic Damper Assembly Note)
ABS sensor rotor
(See M21 ABS Sensor Rotor (With ABS)
Disassembly Note)
(See M22 ABS Sensor Rotor (With ABS) Assembly
Note)
Shaft and ball joint component

Clip Disassembly Note
1. Mark the drive shaft and outer ring for proper
assembly.
Caution
• Mark with paint; do not use a punch.
2. Remove the clip.

A6E6316W010

Balls, Inner Ring, Cage Disassembly Note
1. Mark the inner ring and cage.
Caution
• Mark with paint; do not use a punch.
2. Remove the snap ring using snap-ring pliers.
3. Turn the cage approximately 30 degree and pull
the cage and balls away from the inner ring.

A6E6316W015

M25

DRIVE SHAFT
Dynamic Damper Assembly Note
1. Install the dynamic damper as shown in the
figure.
Standard length
334.7340.7 mm {13.213.4 in}
2. Install the new boot band onto the dynamic
damper.

A6E6316W006

Boot Assembly Note
Note
• The wheel side and transaxle side boots are different.
1. Fill the boot (wheel side) with the specified grease.
Caution
• Do not touch grease with your hand. Apply it from the tube to prevent foreign matter from entering
the boot.
Grease amount
90110 g {3.183.88 oz} (L8, LF left side)
105125 g {3.714.40 oz} (L8, LF right side and L3)
2. With the splines of the shaft still wrapped in tape from disassembly, install the boot.
3. Remove the tape.
Cage, Inner Ring, Balls, Snap Ring Assembly Note
1. Align the marks and install the balls and cage to
the inner ring in the direction shown in the figure.
Caution
• Install the cage with the offset facing the
snap ring groove. If incorrectly installed,
the drive shaft may become disengaged.
2. Install a new snap ring.

A6E6316W011

Outer Ring, Clip Assembly Note
1. Fill the outer ring and boot (transaxle side) with the specified grease.
Caution
• Do not touch grease with your hand. Apply it from the tube to prevent foreign matter from entering
the boot.
Grease amount
105125 g {3.714.40 oz} (L8, LF left side),
120140 g {4.244.93 oz} (L8, LF right side and L3)
2.
3.
4.
5.

Align the marks, and install the outer ring on to the shaft.
Install a new clip.
Install the boot.
Set the drive shaft to the standard length.

M26

DRIVE SHAFT
Standard length

L8, LF
L3

Left side
677.7687.7
{26.6927.07}
676.6686.6
{26.6427.03}

mm {in}
Right side
628.6638.6
{24.7525.14}

6. Release any trapped air from the boots by
carefully lifting up the small end of each boot with
a cloth wrapped screwdriver.
Caution
• Be careful not to allow the grease to leak.
• Do not damage the boot.
7. Verify that the drive shaft length is within the
specification.
A6E6316W007

End Of Sie

M27

STEERING SYSTEM

LOCATION INDEX .................................................N-2
STEERING LOCATION INDEX ...........................N-2
GENERAL PROCEDURES ....................................N-3
PRECAUTION (STEERING)................................N-3
ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER
STEERING ..............................................................N-3
AIR BLEEDING ....................................................N-3
POWER STEERING FLUID INSPECTION..........N-4
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
INSPECTION ....................................................N-6
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..............................N-7
STEERING SHAFT INSPECTION .......................N-9
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................N-10
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
DISASSEMBLY...............................................N-12
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
INSPECTION .....................................................N-16
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
ASSEMBLY........................................................N-16
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................N-22
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..........................N-22

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
STEERING LOCATION INDEX

A6E660001036W01

A6E0610W010
.

1
2

Power steering fluid
(See N4 POWER STEERING FLUID
INSPECTION)
Steering wheel and column
(See N6 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
INSPECTION)
(See N7 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Steering shaft
(See N9 STEERING SHAFT INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

Steering gear and linkage
(See N10 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See N12 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
DISASSEMBLY)
(See N16 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
INSPECTION)
(See N16 STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE
ASSEMBLY)
Power steering oil pump
(See N22 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See N22 POWER STEERING OIL PUMP
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)

GENERAL PROCEDURES , ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING

GENERAL PROCEDURES
PRECAUTION (STEERING)

A6E661001036W01

Wheels and Tires Removal/Installation
1. The removal and installation procedures for the wheels and tires are not mentioned in this section. When a
wheel is removed, tighten it to
88118 N·m {9.012.0 kgf·m, 65.087.0 ft·lbf}.
Power Steering Components Removal/Installation
1. If any power steering fluid line has been disconnected anytime during the procedure, add ATF M-III or
equivalent (e.g. Dexron®II), bleed the fluid lines, and inspect for leakage after the procedure has been
completed.

Connectors Disconnection/Connection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable before doing any work that requires handling of connectors. Reconnect
the negative battery cable only after the work is completed.
Suspension Arm Removal/Installation
1. Tighten any part of the suspension that uses rubber bushings only after vehicle has been lowered and
unloaded.
Note
• Unloaded: Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack, and tools
are in designated position.

End Of Sie

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
AIR BLEEDING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Inspect the fluid level. (See N4 POWER STEERING FLUID INSPECTION.)
Jack up the front of the vehicle and support it on safety stands.
Turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times with the engine not running.
Reinspect the fluid level.
• If it has dropped, add fluid.
Repeat Steps 3 and 4 until the fluid level stabilizes.
Lower the vehicle.
Start the engine and let it idle.
Turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right several times.
Verify that the fluid is not foamy and that the fluid level has not dropped.
• If the fluid level has dropped, add fluid as necessary and repeat Steps 8 and 9.

A6E661401036W01

End Of Sie

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
POWER STEERING FLUID INSPECTION
Fluid Level Inspection
1. Inspect the power steering fluid level.
• Add fluid to the specified level as necessary.

A6E661432040W01

Fluid specification
ATF M-III or equivalent (e.g. Dexron®II)
Fluid Leakage Inspection
1. Start the engine and let it idle.
2. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right
to apply fluid pressure.
Caution
• If the steering wheel is kept in the fully
turned position for more than 5 seconds,
the fluid temperature will rise excessively
and adversely affect the oil pump.
3. Inspect for fluid leakage.
• If fluid leakage is found, replace related pipe
or hose.
Note
• The points where fluid leakage may occur
are indicated in the figure.

A6E0612W094

Fluid Pressure Inspection
1. Assemble the SSTs as shown in the figure.

A6E0612W101

2. Disconnect the pressure pipe from the oil pump,
and connect the SSTs.
Tightening torque
29.444.1 N·m {3.04.4 kgf·m, 2232 ft·lbf}
3. Bleed the air from the system.
4. Open the gauge valve fully.
5. Start the engine and turn the steering wheel fully
left and right to raise the fluid temperature to 50
60 °C {122140 ° F}.
A6E0612W012

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
6. Close the gauge valve completely.
7. Increase the engine speed to 1,0001,500 rpm
and measure the fluid pressure generated by the
oil pump.
• If the pressure is not within the specification,
repair or replace the oil pump component.
Caution
• If the valve is left closed for more than 5
seconds, the fluid temperature will rise
excessively and adversely affect the oil
pump.

A6E0612W081

Oil pump fluid pressure
10.8011.29 MPa {110.2115.2 kgf/cm2, 15671637 psi}
8. Open the gauge valve fully and increase the
engine speed to 1,0001,500 rpm.
9. Turn the steering wheel fully to the left and right,
then measure the fluid pressure generated at the
gear housing.
• If the pressure is not within the specification,
repair or replace the steering gear
component.
Caution
• If the steering wheel is kept in the fully
turned position for more than 5 seconds,
the fluid temperature will rise excessively
and adversely affect the oil pump.

A6E0612W080

Gear housing fluid pressure
10.8011.29 MPa {110.2115.2 kgf/cm2, 15671637 psi}
10. Remove the SSTs. Install and tighten the pressure pipe to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
29.444.1 N·m {3.04.4 kgf·m, 2232 ft·lbf}
11. Bleed the air from the system.

End Of Sie

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN INSPECTION

A6E661432010W01

Steering Wheel Play Inspection
1. With the wheels in the straight-ahead position, gently turn the steering wheel to the left and right and verify that
the play is within the specification.
• If the play exceeds the specification, either the steering joints are worn or the backlash of the steering gear
is excessive. Correct as necessary.
Play
030 mm {01.18 in}
Steering Wheel Looseness Inspection
1. Move the steering wheel as shown in the figure to
inspect for column bearing wear, steering shaft
joint play, steering wheel looseness, and column
looseness.
• Repair or replace as necessary.

A6E0612W015

Steering Wheel Effort Inspection
1. Inspect the following points:
• Tire size and tire pressure
• Fluid level
• Drive belt deflection
2. With the vehicle on a hard, level surface, put the wheels in the straight-ahead position.
3. Remove the air bag module.
Warning
• See DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION for removal/installation of the air
bag module after inspection.
4. Start the engine and warm the power steering fluid to 5060 ° C {122140 ° F}.
5. Measure the steering wheel effort using a torque
wrench.
• If not within the specification, verify the
following:
No air in steering system
No fluid leakage at hose or connectors
Function of oil pump and steering gear
Steering wheel effort
7.8 N·m {80 kgf·cm, 58 in·lbf} max.
Note
• To determine whether the steering effort is
satisfactory or not, perform the inspection on
another vehicle of the same model and under the same conditions, and compare the results.
• The steering wheel effort varies with conditions as shown below.
Road conditions, such as dry or wet, and asphalt or concrete.
Tire conditions, such as brand, wear, and tire pressure.

End Of Sie

A6E0612W016

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E661432010W02

Warning
• Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which may
seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNINGS before handling the air bag module. (See
T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3.

A6E0612W017

1
2
3
4
5
6

Air bag module
(See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Locknut
Steering wheel
(See N8 Steering Wheel Removal Note)
(See N8 Steering Wheel Installation Note)
Column cover
Clock spring
(See T125 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Combination switch

7
8
9
10
11

Lower panel
Steering shaft
(See N8 Steering Shaft Installation Note)
Joint cover
Dust cover
Steering lock mounting bolts
(See N8 Steering Lock Mounting Bolts Removal
Note)
(See N8 Steering Lock Mounting Bolts Installation
Note)
Steering lock component

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Steering Wheel Removal Note
Caution
• Do not try to remove the steering wheel by hitting the shaft with a hammer. The column will
collapse.
1. Set the vehicle in the straight-ahead position.
2. Remove the steering wheel using a suitable puller.
Steering Lock Mounting Bolts Removal Note
1. Make a groove in the heads of the steering lock
mounting bolts using a chisel and a hammer.
2. Remove the bolts using a screwdriver.
3. Disassemble the steering lock component.

A6E0612W018

Steering Lock Mounting Bolts Installation Note
1. Assemble the steering lock component to the steering shaft.
2. Verify that the lock operates correctly.
3. Install new steering lock mounting bolts.
4. Tighten the bolts until the heads break off.

A6E0612W020

Steering Shaft Installation Note
Caution
• Do not apply a shock in the axial direction of the shaft.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Lock the tilt lever.
Tighten bolt A.
Tighten nut B.
Tighten nut C.

A6E0612W103

Steering Wheel Installation Note
1. Set the wheels in the straight-ahead position, and install the steering wheel.

End Of Sie

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
STEERING SHAFT INSPECTION
1. Inspect the following.
(1) Column bearing for damage
(2) Steering shaft length
• Replace the steering shaft component as
necessary.

A6E661432100W01

Length
211.6 mm {8.3 in}

A6E0612W022

2. Inspect the tilt and telescope operation
(1) Verify that the adjusting lever moves smoothly
from unlock position to lock position.
(2) Verify that the steering shaft is fixed firmly
when the adjusting lever is locked.
• Replace the steering shaft component as
necessary.

N
A6E0612W023

End Of Sie

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E661432960W01

A6E0612W108
.

2
3
4

Bolt (intermediate shaft)
(See N11 Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Removal Note)
(See N12 Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Installation
Note)
Cotter pin
Nuts (tie-rod end ball joint)
Tie-rod end ball joint
(See N11 Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note)

N10

5
6
7

Pressure pipe
Return pipe
Steering gear and linkage
(See N11 Steering Gear and Linkage Removal
Note)
(See N12 Steering Gear and Linkage Installation
Note)

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Removal Note
1. Mark the pinion shaft and gear housing for proper
installation.

A6E0612W084

Tie-rod End Ball Joint Removal Note
1. Remove the tie rod-nut.
2. Separate the tie-rod end from the steering
knuckle using the SSTs.

A6E0612W085

Steering Gear and Linkage Removal Note
L.H.D.
Caution
• Excessively loosening the crossmember nuts may possibly cause the crossmember to fall off.
The crossmember nuts must remain threaded on the studs when loosening.
1. Support the crossmember using jack before
removing the crossmember bracket.
2. Loosen the jack and lower the crossmember.
3. Remove the steering gear and linkage by pulling
it from the left side.

A6E0612W107

R.H.D.
1. Remove the steering gear and linkage by pulling it from the right side.

N11

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Steering Gear and Linkage Installation Note
1. Loosely tighten bolts.
2. Tighten the mounting bracket bolts to the specified
torque in the order shown.
Tightening torque
74.4104.8 N·m {7.610.6 kgf·m, 5577 ft·lbf}
3. Tighten the crossmember installation nuts. (L.H.D.)
Tightening torque
Nut: 119.6154.8 N·m {12.215.7 kgf·m, 89114
ft·lbf}
Bolt: 93.1131.3 N·m {9.513.3 kgf·m, 6996
ft·lbf}

A6E0612W027

Bolt (Intermediate Shaft) Installation Note
1. Align the marks and install the intermediate shaft and bolt.

End Of Sie

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE DISASSEMBLY

A6E661432960W02

Caution
• Place copper plates, rag, or similar material in a vise, when securing the mounting bracket portion
of the steering gear.
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

A6E0612W028

N12

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Oil pipe
Tie-rod end
Locknut
Boot clamp
Boot band
Boot
Tie rod
(See N13 Tie Rod Disassembly Note)
Washer
Locknut (adjusting cover)
(See N13 Locknut (Adjusting Cover) Disassembly
Note)
Adjusting cover
(See N14 Adjusting Cover Disassembly Note)
Yoke spring
Support yoke
Bolt
Pinion shaft and housing component
(See N14 Pinion Shaft and Housing Component
Disassembly Note)
Pinion shaft component
(See N14 Pinion Shaft Component Disassembly
Note)
O-ring
Snap ring
(See N14 Snap Ring Disassembly Note)
Control valve component

19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34
35
36

Seal ring
Pinion shaft
Valve housing component
Upper bearing
(See N15 Upper Bearing, Oil Seal Disassembly
Note)
Oil seal
(See N15 Upper Bearing, Oil Seal Disassembly
Note)
Return pipe
Valve Housing
Holder
(See N15 Holder Disassembly Note)
O-ring
U-gasket
Backup ring
Steering rack
Seal ring
O-ring
Oil seal
(See N15 Oil Seal, Inner Guide Disassembly Note)
Inner guide
(See N15 Oil Seal, Inner Guide Disassembly Note)
Gear housing
Mounting rubber
(See N15 Mounting Rubber Disassembly Note)

Tie Rod Disassembly Note
1. Unclamp the washer.
2. Remove the tie rod.

A6E0612W031

Locknut (Adjusting Cover) Disassembly Note
1. Remove the locknut using the SST.

A6E0612W056

N13

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Adjusting Cover Disassembly Note
1. Remove the adjusting cover.

A6E0612W033

Pinion Shaft and Housing Component Disassembly Note
1. Hold the pinion shaft as shown, and pull out the
pinion shaft and housing component.

A6E0612W038

Pinion Shaft Component Disassembly Note
Note
• If the pinion shaft does not come out easily, remove it using a press.
1. Push out the pinion shaft componet from the
valve housing as shown.

A6E0612W034

Snap Ring Disassembly Note
1. Carefully remove the snap ring without damaging
the pinion shaft component.

A6E0612W074

N14

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Upper Bearing, Oil Seal Disassembly Note
1. Set the SST as shown.
2. Using a press, remove the oil seal and upper
bearing without applying pressure to the edge of
the valve housing.

A6E0612W035

Holder Disassembly Note
1. Cut away the staked area by using a drill.
Caution
• Carefully pull out the holder without
damaging the U gasket.
2. Disassemble the holder.

A6E0612W037

Oil Seal, Inner Guide Disassembly Note
1. Set the SSTs into the valve side.
2. Install the SST to the gear housing.
3. Press out the oil seal and inner guide.

A6E0612W086

Mounting Rubber Disassembly Note
• Press the mounting rubber out from the gear
housing using the SSTs and a press.

A6E0612W040

End Of Sie

N15

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE INSPECTION
Rack Inspection
1. Inspect the rack for cracking, damage, and tooth wear. Replace it as necessary.
2. Measure the runout of the rack.

A6E661432960W03

Runout
Near point A: 0.15 mm {0.006 in} max.
Near point B: 0.20 mm {0.008 in} max.
3. If not within the specification, replace the rack.

A6E0612W041

Tie-rod End Inspection
1. Inspect the tie-rod end for damage and boot cracks. Replace it as necessary.
2. Inspect the ball joint for looseness. Replace the tie-rod end as necessary.
3. Rotate the ball joint five times.
4. Measure the rotation torque of the ball joint using
the SST and a pull scale.
Rotation torque
0.42.7 N·m {3.527.5 kgf·cm, 3.123.8
in·lbf}
Pull scale reading
3.425.5 N {0.352.60 kgf, 0.85.7 lbf}
5. If not within the specification, replace the tie-rod
end.
A6E6316W100

Tie rod Inspection
1. Inspect the tie rod for bending and damage. Replace it as necessary.
2. Inspect the ball joint for looseness. Replace the tie rod as necessary.
3. Swing the tie rod five times.
4. Measure the swinging torque using a pull scale.
Swinging torque
0.14.0 N·m {140.7 kgf·cm, 0.935.3
in·lbf}
Pull scale reading
0.624.5 N {0.062.49 kgf, 0.25.50 lbf}
5. If not within the specification, replace the tie-rod.

A6E0612W043

End Of Sie

STEERING GEAR AND LINKAGE ASSEMBLY

A6E661432960W04

Caution
• Place copper plates, rag, or similar material in a vise, when secure the mounting bracket portion of
the steering gear.

N16

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
1. Assemble in the order indicated in the table.

A6E0612W044

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Gear housing
Mounting rubber
(See N18 Mounting Rubber Assembly Note)
Oil seal
(See N18 Oil Seal, Inner Guide Assembly Note)
Inner guide
(See N18 Oil Seal, Inner Guide Assembly Note)
O-ring
Seal ring
Steering rack
Backup ring
U-gasket
O-ring
Holder
(See N19 Holder Assembly Note)
Oil seal
(See N20 Oil Seal Assembly Note)
Valve housing
Upper bearing
(See N20 Upper Bearing Assembly Note)
Pinion shaft

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33

Control valve
Seal ring
(See N20 Seal Ring Assembly Note)
Snap ring
O-ring
Bolt
Support yoke
Yoke spring
Adjusting cover
(See N20 Adjusting Cover Assembly Note)
Locknut (adjusting cover)
Washer
Tie rod
Boot
Boot band
Boot clamp
Locknut
Tie-rod end
Oil pipe
Return pipe

N17

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Mounting Rubber Assembly Note
1. Apply soapy water to the rubber part of the mounting rubber.
2. Press the mounting rubber until the mounting
rubber end comes out completely from the gear
housing using the SSTs and a press.

A6E0612W087

3. Reverse the gear housing, then press the
mounting rubber until the mounting rubber end
comes out completely from the other side. At this
time, mounting rubber end and steel pipe are
aligned.

A6E0612W088

Oil Seal, Inner Guide Assembly Note
1. Install a new O-ring and a new seal ring to the racks piston.
2. After installing the seal ring, seat it properly at the piston circumference.
3. Apply grease to a new oil seal and inner guide.
4. Install the oil seal to the SST.

A6E0612W048

N18

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
5. Using the SST, place the oil seal and inner guide
at the edge of the steering racks pinion, and
remove the SST.

A6E0612W049

6. After installing the steering rack to the gear
housing, press the oil seal and inner guide using
the SSTs until the force required suddenly
increases.

N
A6E0612W039

Holder Assembly Note
1. Apply grease to the U-gasket and O-ring.
2. Assemble the U-gasket, backup ring and O-ring into the holder.
3. Assemble the SST to the steering rack.

A6E0612W090

4. Stake the holder to the cylinder using a punch.

A6E6316W012

N19

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Oil Seal Assembly Note
1. Apply grease to a new oil seal.
2. Press in the new oil seal using the SSTs.

A6E0612W036

Upper Bearing Assembly Note
1. Apply grease to a new upper bearing.
2. Press in the upper bearing using the SST.

A6E0612W051

Seal Ring Assembly Note
1. Install a new seal ring to the valve part of the pinion shaft using the SST.
2. After installing it, seat it properly using the SST.
3. Install the snap ring.

A6E0612W052

Adjusting Cover Assembly Note
1. Set the rack to the center position.
2. Tighten the adjusting cover to 4.9 N·m {50
kgf·cm, 36 in·lbf} three times, then return it 25°°
using the SST.
3. Apply sealant to the threads of the locknut.
4. Attach the locknut.

A6E0612W062

N20

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
5. Measure the pinion torque using the SST and a
pull scale.
Standard
Center of rack ±90°°
0.81.2 N·m
{8.212.2 kgf·cm, 5.88.8 in·lbf}
[Pull scale reading
812 N {0.91.2 kgf, 1.82.6 lbf}]
Except center of rack ±90°°
Less than 1.6 N·m
{16.3 kgf·cm, 11.8 in·lbf}
[Pull scale reading
Less than 16.7 N {1.7 kgf, 3.8 lbf}]

A6E0612W042

6. If not as specified, repeat steps 2 through 5.
7. Install the locknut using the SST (49 B032 320).
Tightening torque
4049 N·m {4.14.9 kgf·m, 3036 ft·lbf}

A6E0612W056

Hermetic sealing inspection
1. Connect the SSTs to the power cylinder section of the gear housing.
2. Apply 53.3 kPa {400 mmHg, 15.7 inHg} vacuum
with a vacuum pump and verify that it is held for at
least 30 seconds.
3. If the vacuum is not held, replace the oil seal.

A6E0612W054

End Of Sie

N21

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
POWER STEERING OIL PUMP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E661432650W01

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
.

A6E0612W092

1
2
3

Drive belt
Pressure switch connector
Pressure pipe

4
5

Suction hose
Power steering oil pump

End Of Sie

POWER STEERING OIL PUMP DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E661432650W02

Note
• The following procedure is for replacement of the O-ring and oil seal only. Replace the pump component if
other repairs are necessary.
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

N22

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING

A6E0612W068
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Power steering oil pump component
(See N24 Power Steering Oil Pump Component
Disassembly Note)
Pressure switch component
Connector
O-rings
Control valve
Spring
Clip
(See N24 Clip Disassembly Note)
(See N24 Clip Assembly Note)
Power steering reservoir tank
O-ring
Rear pump body
(See N25 Rear Pump Body Assembly Note)

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

O-ring
Clip
Cam ring
(See N25 Cam Ring Assembly Note)
Rotor
Vane
(See N25 Vane Assembly Note)
Side plate
O-ring
Oil seal
(See N25 Oil Seal Assembly Note)
Shaft component
Front pump body

N23

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Power Steering Oil Pump Component Disassembly Note
1. Secure the power pressure oil pump using the
SST.
Caution
• Use the SST to prevent damage to the
pump when securing it in a vise.

Clip Disassembly Note
1. Lift up the clip tab using a flathead screwdriver.
2. Remove the clip pushing with a flathead
screwdriver and a hammer as shown in the figure.

Clip Assembly Note
1. Push the clip slowly to the direction shown in the
figure.
2. Confirm that the clip tab is caught correctly.

A6E0612W070

A6E0612W098

A6E0612W100

N24

ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Oil Seal Assembly Note
1. Install the oil seal in the front pump body using
the SST and plastic hammer.

A6J6612W100

Vane Assembly Note
1. Place the vanes in the rotor with the rounded
edges contacting the cam.

A6E6316W013

Cam Ring Assembly Note
1. Install the cam ring in the front pump body with
the mark facing upward.

A6E6316W014

Rear Pump Body Assembly Note
1. After installing the rear body, manually turn the shaft to verify that it rotates smoothly.

End Of Sie

N25

BRAKING SYSTEM

LOCATION INDEX ................................................. P-3
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE LOCATION INDEX ... P-3
PARKING BRAKE LOCATION INDEX ................ P-4
ABS/TCS LOCATION INDEX .............................. P-4
DSC LOCATION INDEX ...................................... P-5
GENERAL PROCEDURES .................................... P-6
PRECAUTION (BRAKES) ................................... P-6
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM...................... P-6
AIR BLEEDING .................................................... P-6
VACUUM HOSE CHECK VALVE INSPECTION
(POWER BRAKE UNIT) ................................... P-7
BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION ............................. P-7
BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION........................... P-8
BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....... P-9
MASTER CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-10
FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION ............. P-12
MASTER CYLINDER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... P-12
POWER BRAKE UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-14
POWER BRAKE UNIT INSPECTION ................ P-14
DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE
INSPECTION (WITHOUT ABS)...................... P-16
DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE
REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT ABS)................. P-16
FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION .............. P-17
FRONT BRAKE (DISC)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-20
DISC PAD (FRONT) REPLACEMENT .............. P-21
CALIPER (FRONT)
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... P-22
REAR BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION ................. P-23
REAR BRAKE (DISC)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-24
DISC PAD (REAR) REPLACEMENT................. P-25
PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM ................................ P-26
PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE)
INSPECTION .................................................. P-26
PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE)
ADJUSTMENT................................................ P-26
PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-26
ABS/TCS .............................................................. P-27
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM SYSTEM
INSPECTION .................................................. P-27
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-28
ABS (ABS/TCS) or DSC HU/CM
CONFIGURATION.......................................... P-29
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION ............. P-29
TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-31
TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION........... P-32
FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ P-32
FRONT/REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR INSPECTION.................................. P-33

REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ P-34
DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL ....................... P-35
DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION............................. P-35
DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......... P-38
DSC HU/CM INSPECTION................................ P-40
COMBINE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ P-42
COMBINE SENSOR INSPECTION ................... P-43
COMBINE SENSOR INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE ................................................. P-44
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ P-44
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION .... P-44
DSC OFF SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ P-44
DSC OFF SWITCH INSPECTION ..................... P-44
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)................ P-45
ABS (ABS/TCS) SYSTEM WIRING
DIAGRAM ....................................................... P-45
ABS (ABS/TCS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS........ P-46
DTC B1318 ........................................................ P-50
DTC B1342 ........................................................ P-52
DTC C1095, C1096............................................ P-52
DTC C1119 ........................................................ P-54
DTC C1140 ........................................................ P-55
DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 .................. P-56
DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236........................... P-59
DTC C1186, C1266............................................ P-62
DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254........................ P-63
DTC C1414 ........................................................ P-64
DTC C1508 ........................................................ P-64
DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 .................. P-64
DTC U2021 ........................................................ P-65
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
(DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)..................... P-66
DSC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM.................... P-66
DSC ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS .......................... P-67
DTC B1318 ........................................................ P-72
DTC B1342 ........................................................ P-74
DTC B1483, B1484, B1486................................ P-74
DTC B1627 ........................................................ P-76
DTC B2477 ........................................................ P-77
DTC C1095, C1096............................................ P-77
DTC C1119 ........................................................ P-79
DTC C1125 ........................................................ P-80
DTC C1140 ........................................................ P-81
DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175 .................. P-81
DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236........................ P-83
DTC C1186, C1266............................................ P-86
DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400,
C1410, C1957, C1958 .................................... P-87
DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952,
C1959.............................................................. P-88

DTC C1414 ........................................................P-91
DTC C1507, C1508............................................P-91
DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 ..................P-92
DTC C1953, C1954............................................P-92
DTC C1955, C1956............................................P-93
DTC U2021 ........................................................P-96
TROUBLESHOOTING
(ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL) ....P-97
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM ............................ P-97
FOREWORD...................................................... P-99
PRECAUTION.................................................... P-99
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING.................. P-104
NO.1 ABS WARNING LIGHT,
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT,
TCS OFF LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE
WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON ......................P-107
NO.2 NEITHER ABS WARNING LIGHT
NOR BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHTILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION
SWITCH ON.................................................. P-108
NO.3 ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION
SWITCH ON.................................................. P-109
NO.4 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION
SWITCH ON.................................................. P-109
No.5 TCS OFF LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION
SWITCH ON.................................................. P-110
No.6 BOTH ABS WARNING LIGHT AND
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
STAY ON MORE THAN 4 SECONDS
WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON ......................P-111
No.7 ABS WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON
MORE THAN 4 SECONDS WITH
IGNITION SWITCH ON................................. P-113
NO.8 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
STAYS ON MORE THAN 4 SECONDS
WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON ......................P-114
NO.9 TCS OFF LIGHT STAYS ON MORE
THAN 4 SECONDS WITH IGNITION
SWITCH ON.................................................. P-116
NO.10 TCS DOES NOT WORK
CORRECTLY ................................................P-117
NO.11 THERE IS MALFUNCTION IN
THE SYSTEM EVEN THOUGH ABS
WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT, TCS OFF LIGHT DO
NOT ILLUMINTE........................................... P-117
NO.1 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS
DO NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION
SWITCH ON: (ABS WARNING LIGHT,
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT,
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR
TCS-OFF LIGHT)..........................................P-117
NO.2 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS
STAY ON: (ABS WARNING LIGHT,
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT,
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR
TCS-OFF LIGHT)..........................................P-119
NO.3 THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE
SYSTEM EVEN THOUGH ABS WARNING
LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT,
DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND TCS-OFF
LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE ......................P-120

NO.4 ABS OR TCS*1 OPERATES
FREQUENTLY/TCS DOES NOT WORK
CORRECTLY*1: DSC SYSTEM
FUNCTION CONTAINs TRACTION
CONTROL FUNCTION, DSC INDICATOR
LIGHT GOES ON AND OFF WHILE DSC
OPERATES...................................................P-120
NO.5 DSC*2 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/DSC
DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY*2: DSC
INDICATOR LIGHT GOES ON AND OFF
WHILE DSC OPERATES..............................P-121

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE LOCATION INDEX

A6E690001015W01

A6E6900W001
.

Brake pedal
(SeeP7 BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION)
(SeeP9 BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION)
Master cylinder
(SeeP10 MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP12 FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION)
(SeeP12 MASTER CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Power brake unit
(SeeP14 POWER BRAKE UNIT INSPECTION)
(SeeP14 POWER BRAKE UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

7
8

Dual proportioning valve (without ABS)
(SeeP16 DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE
INSPECTION (WITHOUT ABS))
(SeeP16 DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE
REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT ABS))
Front brake (disc)
(SeeP17 FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION)
(SeeP20 FRONT BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP22 CALIPER (FRONT) DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Rear brake (disc)
(SeeP23 REAR BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION)
(SeeP24 REAR BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
L.H.D.
R.H.D.

End Of Sie

LOCATION INDEX
PARKING BRAKE LOCATION INDEX

A6E690001015W02

A6E6900W005
.

Parking bake lever
(SeeP26 PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE)
INSPECTION)
(SeeP26 PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE)
ADJUSTMENT)
(SeeP26 PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

ABS/TCS LOCATION INDEX
End Of Sie

A6E690001015W03

A6E6900W003
.

ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
(SeeP27 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM SYSTEM
INSPECTION)
(SeeP29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION)
(SeeP28 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP29 ABS (ABS/TCS) or DSC HU/CM
CONFIGURATION)

Front ABS wheel-speed sensor
(SeeP32 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(SeeP33 FRONT/REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
3
4

Rear ABS wheel-speed sensor
(SeeP34 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
TCS OFF switch
(SeeP31 TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP32 TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION)

5
6

L.H.D.
R.H.D.

End Of Sie

DSC LOCATION INDEX

A6E690001015W04

A6E6900W004
.

DSC HU/CM
(SeeP40 DSC HU/CM INSPECTION)
(SeeP38 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP40 DSC HU/CM INSPECTION)
Combine sensor
(SeeP42 COMBINE SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP43 COMBINE SENSOR INSPECTION)
(SeeP44 COMBINE SENSOR INITIALIZATION
PROCEDURE)
Steering angle sensor
(SeeP44 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(SeeP44 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION)

6
7
8

DSC OFF switch
(SeeP31 TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeP32 TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION)
Front wheel-speed sensor
(SeeP32 FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(SeeP33 FRONT/REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR INSPECTION)
Rear wheel-speed sensor
(SeeP34 REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
L.H.D.
R.H.D.

End Of Sie

GENERAL PROCEDURES, CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM

GENERAL PROCEDURES
PRECAUTION (BRAKES)

A6E691001020W01

Caution
• Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. If brake fluid does get on a painted surface, wipe it off
immediately.
1. Tighten the brake pipe flare nut using the SST (49 0259 770B). Be sure to modify the brake pipe flare nut
tightening torque to allow for use of a torque wrench-SST combination.
• If any brake line has been disconnected anytime during the procedure, add brake fluid, bleed the brakes,
and inspect for leakage after the procedure has been completed.
Connectors Disconnection
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable before doing any work that requires handling of connectors. Reconnect
the negative battery cable only after the work is completed.
ABS, ABS/TCS, or DSC Components Operations
1. Make sure that there are no DTCs in the ABS, ABS/TCS, or DSC memory after working on ABS, ABS/TCS or
DSC components.
• If there are any DTCs in the memory, clear them.

End Of Sie

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
AIR BLEEDING

A6E691243001W01

Caution
• Maintain the fluid level in the reservoir tank properly while bleeding the air.
Specified fluid
European
(L.H.D. U.K.)
specs.
GCC specs.

SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT3 OR DOT4
SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT3

Note
• The brakes should be bled whenever a brake line is disconnected. If a hydraulic line is disconnected at
the master cylinder, start at the slave cylinder farthest from the brake master cylinder, and move to the
next farthest slave cylinder until all four cylinders have been bled. If the disconnection point is anywhere
except the master cylinder, start at the point closest to the disconnection, and move to the next closest
slave cylinder until all four cylinders have been bled.
1. Remove the bleeder cap and attach a vinyl tube to the bleeder screw.
2. Place the other end of the vinyl tube in a clear, fluid-filled container.
3. One person should depress the brake pedal a few times, and then hold it in the depressed position.

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
4. A second person should loosen the bleeder
screw, drain out the fluid and close the screw
using the SST.
Tightening torque
Front:6.99.8 N·m
{7199 kgf·cm, 6286 in·lbf}
Rear:5.98.8 N·m
{6189 kgf·cm, 5377 in·lbf}
5. Repeat steps 3 and 4 until no air bubbles are
seen.
6. Bleed air from each component by following the
procedure above.
7. After air bleeding, check the following:
• Brake operation
• fluid leakage
• fluid level
VACUUM HOSE CHECK VALVE INSPECTION (POWER BRAKE UNIT)

A6E6912W001

End Of Sie

1. Remove the clamps and vacuum hose.
2. Apply both suction and pressure to the engineside hose, and verify that air blows only toward
that side.
• If air flows in both directions or not at all,
replace the vacuum hose.

A6E691243980W01

A6E6912W002

BRAKE PEDAL INSPECTION
End Of Sie

A6E691243300W01

Brake Pedal Height Inspection
1. Verify that the distance from the carpet to the center of the upper surface of the pedal pad is as specified.
Pedal height (reference value)
R.H.D.
L.H.D.

172 mm {6.77 in}
187 mm {7.36 in}

Brake Pedal Height Adjustment
1. Loosen locknut B and turn the bolt A until it does
not contact the pedal.
2. Loosen locknut D and turn rod C to adjust the
height.
3. Tighten the bolt with locknut B .
Tightening torque
9.814.7 N·m
{100149 kgf·cm, 116130 in·lbf}
4. After adjustment, inspect the pedal play and the
brake light operation.

A6E6912W017

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake Pedal Play Inspection
1. Depress the pedal a few times to eliminate the vacuum in the system.
2. Remove the spring pin, verify that the holes in the fork and in the pedal are aligned, and reinstall the pin. (See
P9 BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Gently depress the pedal by hand until resistance is felt, and check the pedal play.
Pedal play
03 mm {00.1 in}
Brake Pedal Play Adjustment
1. Remove the spring pin and clevis pin. (See P9 BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Loosen locknut D and turn rod C to align the
holes in the fork and in the pedal.
3. Install the clevis pin and the spring pin.
4. Tighten locknut D.
Tightening torque
15.721.6 N·m
{1.612.20 kgf·m, 11.615.9 ft·lbf}
5. Check the pedal height and the brake light
operation.
A6E6912W027

Pedal-to-floor Clearance Inspection
1. Start the engine and depress the brake pedal with
a force of 588 N {60 kgf, 132 lbf}
2. Verify that the distance from the floor panel to the
pedal pad center is as specified when the pedal is
depressed.
• If the distance is less than specified, check for
the air in brake system.
Specification
68 mm {2.7 in} min.
A6E6912W003

End Of Sie
BRAKE
SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the brake switch connector harness.
3. Inspect for continuity between the brake switch connector terminals.
• If not as specified, replace the brake switch.

A6E6912W033

End Of Sie

A6E691266490W01

A6E6912W034

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
BRAKE PEDAL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. For ATX model, remove the lock unit with brake switch (R.H.D. only).
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

A6E691243300W02

Brake switch connector
Spring pin
Clevis pin
Brake pedal
Brake switch
(See P9 Brake switch Installation Note)
Pedal pad

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E6912W020

Brake switch Installation Note
1. Fix the brake switch on a bracket with pressing down at 50 N {5.1 kgf·m, 37 ft·lbf}.
2. Rotate the brake switch 45°° counterclockwise.
3. Verify that the brake switch is locked securely.
Note
• Stopper bolt and pedal stopper clearance
adjustment dose not need after the brake
switch is locked securely.

A6E6912W051

End Of Sie

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
R.H.D.

A6E691243400W01

A6E6912W028

L.H.D.

A6E6912W018

1
2
3
4
5

Brake fluid level sensor connector
Brake pipe
Hose (MTX)
Master cylinder
(See P11 Master Cylinder Installation Note
O-ring

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

P10

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Master Cylinder Installation Note
Caution
• Always install the gasket of the power brake unit push rod before performing measurement
inspections or adjustments.
1. Install the SST to the power brake unit as shown,
and tighten within the specified torque.
Tightening torque
9.816.0 N·m {100163 kgf·cm, 87141
in·lbf}

A6E6912W042

2. Using a vacuum gauge, create a vacuum
pressure of 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg} in
the power brake unit.
3. Using calipers, measure dimension L as shown.
Specification
22.7 mm{8.94 in}

A6E6912W029

A6E6912W030

4. If dimension L is not within the specification as
shown, remove SST (49 E043 001) and use SST
(49 B043 004) to adjust the length of the push rod
while using SST (E043 003A) to keep the push
rod from rotating.
5. Remove the SSTs, replace SST (49 E043 001)
and measure dimension L again.

A6E6912W031

P11

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
6. Install the master cylinder to the power brake unit.
Caution
• If after installing the master cylinder, air
does not bleed properly from the brake
lines even after performing air bleeding,
brake drag occurs or other
characteristics are present, it is possible
that the master cylinder piston is jammed
against the power brake unit. If air cannot
be bled properly, brake drag exists or
other malfunctions occur, remove the
master cylinder and reinstall properly.

A6E6912W032

FLUID LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
End Of Sie

A6E691243540W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the sensor connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between terminals of fluid level sensor.
• If not as specified, replace the fluid level sensor.

A6E6912W024

A6E6912W023

End Of Sie
MASTER
CYLINDER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E691243400W02

Caution
• If the master cylinder body is damaged, replace the unit as a component. When securing the
master cylinder in a vise, tighten only the flange of the master cylinder.
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E6912W019
.

Cap set

P12

Screw

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Reservoir
Joint bushing
Snap ring
Piston guide
Cup
Stopper
Primary piston

10
11
12
13

Stop pin and O-ring (with ABS)
(See P13 Stop Pin and O-ring (with ABS)
Assembly Note)
Stop screw and O-ring (without ABS)
(SeeP13 Stop Screw and O-ring (without ABS)
Assembly Note)
Secondary piston
Master cylinder body

Stop Screw and O-ring (without ABS) Assembly Note
1. Install the secondary piston and primary piston.
2. Install the new O-ring onto the stop screw.
3. Push the primary piston assembly in full.
4. Install and tighten the stop screw.
Tightening torque
2.02.4 N·m {2124 kgf·cm, 1821 in·lbf}
5. Push and release the secondary piston
component to verify that it is held properly by the
stop screw.

A6E6912W025

Stop Pin and O-ring (with ABS) Assembly Note
1. Install the secondary piston with the piston hole facing the stop pin and primary piston.
2. Install the new O-ring onto the stop pin.
3. Push the primary piston assembly in full.
4. Install and tighten the stop pin.
Tightening torque
6.99.8 N·m {7199 kgf·cm, 6286 in·lbf}
5. Push and release the secondary piston
component to verify that it is held properly by the
stop pin.

A6E6912W043

End Of Sie

P13

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
POWER BRAKE UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A6E691243800W02

Remove the master cylinder. (See P10 MASTER CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the wiper arm. (See T57 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the cowl grille. (See S50 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the wiper motor. (See T56 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the cowl panel. (See S119 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
For L.H.D., remove the A/C bracket.
For L.H.D., remove the ABS/TCS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM . (See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.) (See P38 DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.
For R.H.D., remove the alternator cover.
For R.H.D., remove the insulator.
For R.H.D., remove the vacuum pipe bracket.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Vacuum hose
Snap pin
Clevis pin
Nut
Fork
Power brake unit
Gasket
Nut

12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E6912W044

End Of Sie
POWER
BRAKE UNIT INSPECTION

A6E691243800W01

Warning
• The following inspection methods are the simple inspection methods to judge the function of
power brake.
• If there is malfunction in power brake unit, replace the power brake unit as a component.
Power Brake Unit Function Check (Simple Method)
Step 1
1. With the engine stopped, depress the pedal a few times.
2. With the pedal depressed, start the engine.
3. If the pedal moves down slightly immediately after the engine starts, the unit is operating.
Step 2
1. Start the engine.
2. Stop the engine after it has run for 1 or 2 minutes.
3. Depress the pedal with the usual force.
4. If the first pedal stroke is long and becomes shorter with subsequent strokes, the unit is operating.
• If a problem is found, inspect for damage of the vacuum hose, and vacuum tank. Repair if necessary, and
inspect it again.
Step 3
1. Start the engine.
2. Depress the pedal with usual force.
3. If the pedal height does not change, the unit is operating.
4. Hold the pedal down for about 30 seconds.
5. If the pedal height does not change, the unit is operating.

P14

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Power Brake Unit Function Check (Inspection Using The Testers)
1. Connect the SSTs, vacuum gauge, and pedal
depression force gauge as shown in the figure to
bleed the air from SSTs and brake line. (Bleed
the air from SSTs using a air bleed valve A.)

A6E6912W005

Checking for vacuum loss (unloaded condition)
1. Stop the engine when the vacuum gauge reading reaches 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg}.
2. Observe the vacuum gauge for 15 seconds.
• If the gauge shows 63.366.7 kPa {475500 mmHg, 18.719.6 inHg}, the unit is operating.
• If not, inspect for damage on the check valve or vacuum hose, and examine the installation. Repair as
necessary, and inspect it again.
Checking for vacuum loss (loaded condition)
1. Start the engine.
2. Depress the brake pedal with a force of 196 N {20 kgf, 44 lbf}.
3. Stop the engine when the vacuum gauge reading reaches 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg}.
4. Observe the vacuum gauge for 15 seconds.
5. If the gauge shows 63.366.7 kPa {475500 mmHg, 18.719.6 inHg}, the unit is operating.

Checking for hydraulic pressure
1. When the engine is stopped (vacuum 0 kPa {0 mmHg, 0 inHg}) and the fluid pressure is within the
specification, the unit is operating.
Pedal force

Fluid pressure

200 N {20 kgf, 44 lbf}

588 kPa {5.95 kgf/cm2, 84.7 psi}
min.

2. Start the engine. Depress the brake pedal when the vacuum reaches 66.7 kPa {500 mmHg, 19.7 inHg}.
• If the fluid pressure is within the specification, the unit is operating.
• If the fluid pressure is not as specified, inspect for damage to the check valve or vacuum hose, and fluid
leakage of the hydraulic line. Repair as necessary, and inspect again.
Pedal force

Fluid pressure

200 N {20 kgf, 44 lbf}

8,787 kPa {89.60 kgf/cm2,
1,274 psi} min.

End Of Sie

P15

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE INSPECTION (WITHOUT ABS)
1. Connect the SSTs to the brake pipes as shown in
the figure.
2. Bleed the air from the brake system.
3. Measure the fluid pressure of the master cylinder
and the rear brake.
• If not within the specification, replace the dual
proportioning valve.

A6E691243900W01

A6E6912W006

A6E6912W007

Fluid pressure
A
2,450 {25, 355}

kPa {kgf/cm2, psi}
A'
2,450 {25, 355} ± 200 {2, 29}

B
5,880 {60, 853}

DUAL PROPORTIONING VALVE REPLACEMENT (WITHOUT ABS)

B'
3,480 {35.5, 505} ± 300 {3, 44}

End Of Sie

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E691243900W02

Brake pipe
Bolt
Dual proportioning valve
(See P17 Dual Proportioning Valve Installation
Note)

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E6912W035

P16

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Dual Proportioning Valve Installation Note
1. Install the dual proportioning valve so that the R
mark faces the left side of the vehicle.

A6E6912W045

FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION
End Of Sie

Brake Judder Repair Hint
Description
1. Brake judder concern has the following 3 characteristics:

A6E691233980W01

Steering wheel vibration
1. Steering wheel vibrates in the direction of its rotation. This characteristic is most noticeable when applying
brakes at a vehicle speed of 100140 km/h {62.186.8 mph}.
Floor vibration
1. When applying brakes, the vehicle body shakes back and forth. The seriousness of shake is not influenced by
vehicle speed.
Brake pedal vibration
1. When applying brakes, a pulsating force tries to push the brake pad back occurs. The pulsation is transmitted
to the brake pedal.
2. The following are the main possible causes of brake judder:
Due to an excessive runout (side-to-side wobble) of disc plate, the thickness of disc plate is uneven.
1. If the runout is more than 0.05 mm {0.002 in} to 10 mm {0.39 in} from the disc plate edge, an uneven wear
occurs on the disc plate because the pad contacts the plate unevenly.
2. If the runout is less than 0.05 mm {0.002 in}, uneven wear does not occur.
The disc plate is deformed by heat.
1. Repeated panic braking may raise the temperature in some portions of disc plate by approximately 1,000 ° C
{1,832 °F}. This results in deformed disc plate.
Due to corrosion, the thickness and friction coefficient of disc plate change.
1. If a vehicle is parked under damp conditions for a long time, corrosion occurs on the friction surface of disc
plate.
2. The thickness of corrosion is uneven and sometimes appears like a wave pattern, which changes the friction
coefficient and causes a reaction force.

P17

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Inspection and repair procedure

A6E6912W008

Lateral runout inspection
1. To secure the disc plate and the hub, tighten the hub nuts upside down or insert a washer (thickness 10 mm
{0.39 in}, inner diameter more than 12 mm {0.47 in}) between the hub bolt and the hub nut.
Note
• The component parts of the SST (49 B017 001 or 49 G019 003) can be used as a suitable washer.
2. After tightening all the hub nuts to the same torque, put the dial gauge on the friction surface of disc plate 10
mm {0.39 in} from the disc plate edge.
3. Rotate the disc plate one time and measure the runout.
Runout limit
0.05 mm {0.002 in}

P18

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Thickness variation inspection
1. Clean the disc plate-to-pad friction surface using a brake cleaner.
2. Measure the points indicated in the illustration
using a caliper (micrometer).
3. Subtract the minimum value from the maximum,
and if the result is not within specification,
machine the disc plate using a lathe.
Thickness variation limit
0.015 mm {0.00059 in}
Warning
• Do not exceed minimum disc plate
thickness.

X3U411WAR

Disc Plate Thickness Inspection
Caution
• Excessive runout may result if the disc plate is removed from the vehicle then machined. Machine
the disc plate while installed on the vehicle.
1. Measure the thickness of the disc plate.
• If the thickness is not within the specification, replace the disc plate.
Minimum
22 mm {0.87 in}
Minimum thickness after machining using a brake lathe on-vehicle
22.8 mm {0.90 in}

Disc Pad Thickness Inspection
1. Jack up the front of the vehicle and support it with safety stands.
2. Remove the wheel and tires.
3. Verify the remaining thickness of the pads.
Minimum thickness
2.0 mm {0.079 in} min.
4. Replace the pads as a set: right and left wheels, if
either one is at or less than the minimum
thickness.

X3U411WAS
End Of Sie

P19

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
FRONT BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E691233980W02

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. After installation, depress the pedal a few times, rotate the wheel by hand, and verify that the brake does not
drag.

A6E6912W021
.

1
2
3
4
5

Flexible hose
Cap
Guide pin
Caliper
M-spring

6
7
8
9

Disc pad
(See P21 Disc Pad Installation Note)
Guide plate
Mounting support
Disc plate
(See P20 Disc Plate Removal Note)
(See P20 Disc Plate Installation Note)

Disc Plate Removal Note
1. Mark the wheel hub bolt and disc plate before
removal for reference during installation.

A6E6912W037

Disc Plate Installation Note
1. Remove any rust or grime on the contact face of the disc plate and wheel hub.
2. Install the disc plate and align the marks made before removal.

P20

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Disc Pad Installation Note
1. Push the piston fully inward using the SST.
2. Install the disc pad.

A6E6912W038

DISC PAD (FRONT) REPLACEMENT
End Of Sie

A6E691233630W01

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E6912W022
.

1
2
3
4

Bolt
Bolt
Cap
Guide pin

5
6
7

M-spring
Disc pad
(See P21 Disc Pad Installation Note)
Guide plate

End Of Sie

P21

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
CALIPER (FRONT) DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A6E691233990W01

Dust seal
Piston
(See P22 Piston Disassembly Note)
Piston seal
(See P22 Piston Seal Disassembly Note)
Bleeder cap
Bleeder screw
(See P23 Bleeder Screw Assembly Note)
Caliper body
Boot

2. Assemble in the reverse order of removal.

A6E6912W046

Piston Disassembly Note
Caution
• Blow the compressed air slowly to prevent the piston from suddenly popping out.
1. Place a piece of wood in the caliper, then blow
compressed air through the hole to force the
piston out of the caliper.

A6E6912W047

Piston Seal Disassembly Note
1. Remove the piston seal from the brake caliper
using the SST.

A6E6912W048

P22

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Bleeder Screw Assembly Note
1. Assemble the bleeder screw to the caliper using
the SST.
Tightening torque
6.99.8 N·m {7199 kgf·cm, 6286 in·lbf}

A6E6912W049

REAR BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION
End Of Sie

Brake Judder Repair Hint
1. (See P17 FRONT BRAKE (DISC) INSPECTION.)

A6E691226980W01

Disc Plate Thickness Inspection
Caution
• Excessive runout may result if the disc plate is removed from the vehicle then machined. Machine
the disc plate while installed on the vehicle.

1. Measure the thickness of the disc plate.
• If the thickness is not within the specification, replace the disc plate.
Minimum
8 mm {0.31 in}
Minimum thickness after machining using a brake lathe on-vehicle
8.8 mm {0.35 in}
Disc Pad Thickness Inspection
1. Jack up the front of the vehicle and support it with safety stands.
2. Remove the wheel and tires.
3. Verify the remaining thickness of the pads.
Minimum thickness
2.0 mm {0.079 in} min.
4. Replace the pads as a set: right and left wheels, if
either one is at or less than the minimum
thickness.

X3U411WAS
End Of Sie

P23

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
REAR BRAKE (DISC) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E691226980W02

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. After installation, depress the pedal several times, rotate the wheel by hand, and verify that the brake does not
drag.

A6E6912W026
.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Parking brake cable, clip
Flexible hose
Bolt
Caliper
Spring
Disc pad
(See P25 Disc Pad Installation Note)

P24

7
8
9
10

Shim
Guide plate
Disc plate
(See P20 Disc Plate Removal Note)
(See P20 Disc Plate Installation Note)
Mounting support

CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Disc Pad Installation Note
1. Turn the manual adjustment gear
counterclockwise with an Allen wrench to pull the
brake caliper piston inward. (Turn until it stops.)
2. Install the disc pads.
3. Turn the manual adjustment gear clockwise until
the brake pads just touch the disc plate. Turn the
manual adjustment gear back 1/3-turn.

A6E6912W039

DISC PAD (REAR) REPLACEMENT
End Of Sie

A6E691226630W01

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

Z3U0411W009
.

1
2
3

Parking brake cable, clip
Screw plug
Lock bolt

4
5
6

Disc pad
(See P25 Disc Pad Installation Note)
Shim
Guide plate

End Of Sie

P25

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE) INSPECTION

A6E691444000W01

1. Pull the parking brake lever a few times.
2. Depress the brake pedal a few times.
3. Inspect the parking brake stroke by pulling the parking brake lever with a force of 98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf}.
Stroke
36 notches

End Of SieBRAKE (LEVER TYPE) ADJUSTMENT
PARKING
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A6E691444000W02

Start the engine and depress the brake pedal several times.
Stop the engine.
Remove the ashtray behind the center console.
Turn the adjusting nut as shown in the figure.
After adjustment, inspect the following points:
(1) Turn the ignition switch to ON, pull the parking
brake lever one notch, and verify that the
parking brake warning light illuminates.
(2) Verify that the rear brakes do not drag.

A6E6914W002

End
Of SieBRAKE (LEVER TYPE) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
PARKING
1. Remove the center console. (See S86 CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the rear seat cushion (4SD) or rear seat (5HB) . (See S110 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the exhaust pipe bracket.
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the parking brake stroke. (See P26 PARKING BRAKE (LEVER TYPE) ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E691444000W03

A6E6914W001
.

1
2
3

Parking brake switch
Adjusting nut
Parking brake lever

End Of Sie

P26

4
5

Clip
Parking brake cable

ABS/TCS

ABS/TCS
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM SYSTEM INSPECTION

A6E692143780W01

System Inspection
Preparation
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged. With the ignition switch on, verify that the ABS and BRAKE system
warning lights goes out after 2.4 seconds.
2. If the lights stays on after 2.4 seconds, the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM detects a failure. Follow the
troubleshooting procedures.
3. Turn the ignition switch off.
4. On level ground, jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands. Shift the transaxle to N position.
5. Release the parking brake.
6. Rotate the wheels by hand, and inspect for brake drag.
Operation of ABS inspection
1. Perform the Preparation.
2. Connect the SSTs (WDS or equivalent) to the
data link connector-2 (DLC-2).
3. Set up an active command mode inspection
according to the combination of commands
below.

A6E6921W007

OPERATION
Pressure retention
Pressure reduction

PMP_MOTOR
OFF
ON

COMMAND NAME
RF_OUTLET
RF_INLET
OFF
ON
ON
ON

ABS_POWER
ON
ON

COMMAND TYPE
Manual

The chart above shows an example of a right wheel inspection.
Note
• When working with two people, one should press on the brake pedal, the other should attempt to rotate
the wheel being inspected.
4. Send the command while pressing on the brake pedal and attempting to rotate the wheel being inspected.
5. When pressure is being maintained, and click sound indicating the solenoid is operating comes from the ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM, confirm that the wheel does not rotate. When pressure is being reduced, and click sound
indicating the solenoid is operating comes from the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, confirm that the wheel rotates,
even though the brake pedal is being depressed.
Note
• To protect the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, the solenoid valve used for simulations and the ABS motor stay
on for 10 seconds each time they are switched on.
• Performing the inspections above determines the following.
The ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM brake lines are normal.
The ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM hydraulic system is not significantly abnormal.
The ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM wiring is normal.
• However, the following items cannot be checked.
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM input system harness and parts
Extremely small leaks in the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM internal hydraulic system
Unusual intermittent occurrences in the above items
End Of Sie

P27

ABS/TCS
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E692143700W01

Caution
• When replacing the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, configuration procedure must be done before
removing the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM. If configuration is not completed before removing the ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM, TCS will not work properly (with TCS model).
• Do not drop the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM. Replace it if it is subjected to an impact.
1. Configurate the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (when only replacing it). (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) or DSC HU/CM
CONFIGURATION.)
2. Remove the battery, battery tray and battery tray bracket. (See G3 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the under cover.
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
.

A6E6921W002

1
2

Brake pipe
Connector
(See P29 Connector Removal Note)
(See P29 Connector Installation Note

P28

3
4

ABS HU/CM
(See P29 ABS HU/CM Removal/Installation Note)
Stud

ABS/TCS
Connector Removal Note
1. Pull the lock lever up and make it unlock.
2. Remove the connector.

A6E6916W006

ABS HU/CM Removal/Installation Note
1. When removing/installing the ABS HU/CM from/to the vehicle, attach a strip of protective tape on the ABS HU/
CM connector to prevent brake fluid from entering.
Connector Installation Note
1. Verify that the lock lever of the harness connector
is completely pulled up.

A6E6916W007

ABS (ABS/TCS) OR DSC HU/CM CONFIGURATION
End Of Sie

1. Connect the WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
2. Input vehicle information following the direction
on the WDS or equivalent screen.
3. Select Module programming.
4. Select Programmable module installation.
5. Select ABS/TCS.
6. Retrieve DTCs by the WDS or equivalent, then
verify that there is no DTC present.
• If DTC is present, perform applicable DTC
inspection.

A6E692143700W02

A6E3970W002

ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION
End Of Sie

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Connect the SST between the ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM and harness connector with the ignition
switch off.
3. Attach the tester leads to the SST and inspect
voltage referring the table below.

A6E692167650W01

A6E6921W005

P29

ABS/TCS
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)
(Engine is idling, and connector is connected unless otherwise indicated.)

A6E6921W001

Terminal

Signal

A
B

RR wheel-speed

RR wheel-speed
sensor

C
F

LR wheel-speed

LR wheel-speed
sensor

G
D

RF wheel-speed

RF wheel-speed
sensor

I
E

LF wheel-speed

LF wheel-speed
sensor

H
K
L
M
N
O
P*1
Q
R
S
T

TCS OFF switch TCS OFF switch

P30

CAN-L

Vehicle speed
output

CAN-H

U*2

Connected to

OBD

DLC

Test condition
Voltage (V)
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
• Inspect by using the wave profile.
(See P31 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
• Inspect by using the wave profile.
(See P31 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
• Inspect by using the wave profile.
(See P31 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
• Inspect by using the wave profile.
(See P31 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))

No need to check
When switch is
Below 1.0
pressed
When switch is not
B+
pressed

No need to check

Cruise actuator,
Wiper and washer
switch,
Audio unit,
Vehicle is stopped
0
Car-navigation unit,
Headlight leveling
actuator

It cannot be determined with terminal
voltage whether the condition is good or
KLN terminal of
bad because advanced function
DLC-2
diagnostic output is performed with
serial communication. Inspect with
service codes.

Action

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect ABS wheel-speed
sensor

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect TCS OFF switch

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect ABS wheel-speed
sensor

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect ABS/TCS HU/CM

ABS/TCS
Terminal

Signal

Connected to

Brake switch

Power supply
Power supply
(Solenoid valve)
Power supply
(ABS motor)
Ground
Ground

Ignition switch

AA
AB
AC
AD

Test condition
Brake pedal is
depressed
Brake pedal is
released

Voltage (V)
1014
Below 0.5
B+

Battery

B+

Battery

B+

Ground
Ground

0
0

*1 : With TCS
*2 : Use this terminal at factory only, not used for inspection and repair at field

Action
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect related harness

Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference)
Wheel speed
• ABS/TCS HU/CM terminal:
RR : A ( + ) B ( - )
LR : C ( + ) F ( - )
RF : D ( + ) G ( - )
LF : E ( + ) I ( - )
• Oscilloscope setting:
1 V/DIV (Y), 2 ms/DIV (X), AC range
• Vehicle condition: Driving 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
•

Note
• As vehicle speed increases, period of wave
shortens.
• If there is malfunctioning in the sensor rotor,
wave profile warps.

Z3U0413W201

Vehicle speed output
• ABS/TCS HU/CM terminal: V( + ) AC ( - )
• Oscilloscope setting:
1 V/DIV (Y), 5 ms/DIV (X), DC range
• Vehicle condition: Driving 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
•

Note
• As vehicle speed increases, period of wave
shortens.

Z3U0413W202

TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
End Of Sie

1. Press the hooks of the TCS OFF switch and pull the switch out.
2. Disconnect the connector.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E692167650W02

A6E6921W008
End Of Sie

P31

ABS/TCS
TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E692167650W03

1. Remove the TCS OFF switch.
2. Inspect for continuity between the TCS OFF switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.

A6E6921W010

A6E6921W009

• If not within the specification, replace the TCS OFF switch.
FRONT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
End Of Sie

1. Remove the mud guard.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E692143720W01

A6E6916W001

1
2

Connector
Bolt

P32

Front ABS wheel-speed sensor

ABS/TCS
FRONT/REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR INSPECTION
End Of Sie

A6E692143720W02

Visual Inspection
1. Remove the wheel and tire, and inspect the sensor for looseness and damage. Replace the sensor if
necessary.
Clearance Inspection
1. Inspect the clearance between the wheel-speed
sensor and the sensor rotor.
Clearance
0.31.1 mm {0.0120.043 in}

A6E6921W003

Resistance Inspection
1. Disconnect the ABS wheel-speed sensor connector.
2. Inspect the resistance at the ABS wheel-speed sensor.
• If not as specified, replace the ABS wheel-speed sensor.

Resistance
1.31.7 kilohm
Voltage Inspection
1. On level ground, jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands.
2. Disconnect the ABS wheel-speed sensor connector.
3. Inspect each sensor by rotating each wheel one revolution per second.
• If not as specified, replace the ABS wheel-speed sensor.
Voltage
0.251.2 V (AC)
Voltage Pattern Inspection
1. On level ground, jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands.
2. Disconnect the ABS wheel-speed sensor connector.
3. Using an oscilloscope, inspect voltage pattern for
distortion and noise by rotating each wheel.
• If there is distortion or noise, inspect the ABS
sensor rotor.

A6E6921W004
End Of Sie

P33

ABS/TCS
REAR ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the tire house trim.S91 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E692143710W01

A6E6916W002
.

1
2

Connector
Bolt

End Of Sie

P34

Rear ABS wheel-speed sensor

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION
Preparation
1. Verify that the battery is fully charged.
2. With ignition switch on, verify that the ABS warning light goes out after 2.4 seconds.
3. Turn the ignition switch off.
4. On level ground, jack up the vehicle and support it evenly on safety stands.
5. Shift the transaxle to N position.
6. Release the parking brake.
7. Rotate the wheels by hand, and inspect for brake drag.

A6E692067650W01

Operation of DSC Inspection
1. Perform the Preparation.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
3. Set up an active command modes inspection
according to the combination of commands
below.
Note
• When working with two people, one should
press on the brake pedal, the other should
attempt to rotate the wheel being inspected.

P
A6E3970W002

Pressure retention
Command name
LF_TC_VLV
RF_TC_VLV
LF_DSC_V
RF_DSC_V
ABS_POWER
LF_INLET
LF_OUTLET
LR_INLET
LR_OUTLET
RF_INLET
RF_OUTLET
RR_INLET
RR_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR

Wheels
LF

OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF

OFF

ON
OFF
OFF

ON
OFF

P35

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
Pressure reduction
Command name
LF_TC_VLV
RF_TC_VLV
LF_DSC_V
RF_DSC_V
ABS_POWER
LF_INLET
LF_OUTLET
LR_INLET
LR_OUTLET
RF_INLET
RF_OUTLET
RR_INLET
RR_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR

Wheels
LF

OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF
ON

OFF

ON
OFF
OFF

ON
ON

Note
• To protect the DSC HU/CM, the solenoid valve used for simulations and the ABS motor stay on for 10
seconds each time they are switched on.
4. Send the command while pressing on the brake pedal and attempting to rotate the wheel being inspected.
5. When pressure is being maintained, and a click sound indicating the solenoid is operating comes from the DSC
HU/CM, confirm that the wheel does not rotate. When pressure is being reduced, and a click sound indicating
the solenoid is operating comes from DSC HU/CM, confirm that the wheel rotates, even though the brake pedal
is being depressed.
• Performing the inspections above determines the following.
The DSC HU/CM brake lines are normal
The DSC HU/CM hydraulic system is not significantly abnormal
The DSC HU/CM wiring is normal
Output system harness in DSC HU/CM (solenoid, relay) are normal
• However, the following items cannot be checked.
The DSC HU/CM input system harness and parts
Extremely small leaks in the DSC HU/CM internal hydraulic system
Unusual intermittent occurrences in the above items
DSC Control Inspection
1. Perform the Preparation.
2. Connect WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
3. Set up an active command modes inspection
according to the combination of commands
below.

A6E3970W002

P36

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
Pressure retention
Command name
LF_TC_VLV
RF_TC_VLV
LF_DSC_V
RF_DSC_V
ABS_POWER
LF_INLET
LF_OUTLET
LR_INLET
LR_OUTLET
RF_INLET
RF_OUTLET
RR_INLET
RR_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR

Wheels
Inhibition of understeer tendency Inhibition of oversteer tendency
control
control
LF
RF
LR
RR
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
ON
OFF
OFF
ON
ON

OFF
OFF

OFF

OFF
ON
OFF

OFF
ON

Note
• To protect the DSC HU/CM, the solenoid valve used for simulations and the ABS motor stay on for 10
seconds each time they are switched on.
4. Send the command while attempting to rotate the wheel being inspected.
5. When pressure is being maintained, and a click sound indicating the solenoid is operating comes from the DSC
HU/CM, confirm that the wheel does not rotate.
• Performing the inspections above determines the following.
The DSC HU/CM brake lines are normal
The DSC HU/CM hydraulic system is not significantly abnormal
The DSC HU/CM wiring is normal
Output system harness in DSC HU/CM (solenoid, relay) are normal
• However, the following items cannot be checked.
The DSC HU/CM input system harness and parts
Extremely small leaks in the DSC HU/CM internal hydraulic system
Unusual intermittent occurrences in the above items
End Of Sie

P37

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
DSC HU/CM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E692067650W03

Caution
• When replacing the DSC HU/CM, configuration procedure must be done before removing the DSC
HU/CM. If configuration is not completed before removing the DSC HU/CM, DTC B2477 will be
detected.
• Do not drop the DSC HU/CM. Replace it if it is subjected to an impact.
1. Configurate the DSC HU/CM (when only replacing it).(See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) or DSC HU/CM
CONFIGURATION.)
2. Remove the battery, battery tray and battery tray bracket.(See G3 BATTERY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the under cover.
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E6920W001
.

1
2

Connector
(See P39 Connector Removal Note)
(See P39 Connector Installation Note)
Brake pipe

P38

3
4
5

DSC HU/CM and Bracket
(See P39 DSC HU/CM and Bracket Removal/
Installation Note)
Bracket
DSC HU/CM

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
Connector Removal Note
1. Rotate the lock lever 40° to the direction A, then
push the lock lever to the direction B.
Caution
• After rotated the lever 40°° , do not push
the lock lever to the direction C. The lock
lever will be damaged.
2. Verify that the lock lever is completely returned.
3. Remove the harness side connector to the
direction D.

A6E6920W011

DSC HU/CM and Bracket Removal/Installation Note
1. When removing/installing the DSC HU/CM from/to the vehicle, attach a strip of tape on the DSC HU/CM
connector to prevent brake fluid from entering.
Connector Installation Note
1. Verify that the connection part and waterproof packing are free of foreign material, then connect the connector.
2. Verify that the lock lever is completely pushed in.

A6E6916W005
End Of Sie

P39

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
DSC HU/CM INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the battery and battery bracket.
Disconnect the DSC HU/CM connector.
Connect the SST (49 G066 004) to the DSC HU/CM connector and harness side connector.
Inspect voltage referring the table below.

A6E692067650W04

Terminal Voltage Table (reference value)
(Ignition switch is at ON, and connector is connected unless indicated otherwise.)

A6E6920W009

Terminal
Signal
A
Ground (1)
B
Ground (2)
Solenoid valve
C
(power supply)
Pump motor
D
(power supply)
E*

Connected to
Ground part 1
Ground part 2

Test condition

Voltage (V)
Below 1.0
Below 1.0

Battery

B+

Battery

B+

Check
connector

No need to
check
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
LF wheel-speed • Inspect using the wave profile.
sensor
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
RR wheel• Inspect using the wave profile.
speed sensor
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
RF wheel• Inspect using the wave profile.
speed sensor
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
Vehicle is stopped
0 (AC)
LR wheel-speed • Inspect using the wave profile.
sensor
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))

F
J

LF wheel-speed

K
H

RR wheel-speed

M
I

RF wheel-speed

Q
N

LR wheel-speed

Battery (IG)

Ignition switch

Brake switch

Lateral-G
(lateral-G signal)

Combine
sensor

Ignition switch ON
When brake pedal is
depressed
Vehicle is stopped
Right cornering
Left cornering

Combine sensor
power output

Combine
sensor

Steering angle
(ground)

Steering angle
sensor

P40

Ignition switch ON

B+
1014
2.12.9
Fluctuation
between
2.54.0
Fluctuation
between
2.51.0
4.755.25
Below 1.0

•
•
•
•
•
•

Action
Inspect related harness
Inspect related harness
Inspect DSC HU/CM
Inspect related harness
Inspect DSC HU/CM
Inspect related harness

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect wheel-speed
sensor
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect wheel-speed
sensor
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect wheel-speed
sensor
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect wheel-speed
sensor
•
•
•
•

Inspect related harness
Inspect ignition switch
Inspect related harness
Inspect brake switch

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect combine sensor

•
•
•
•

Inspect related harness
Inspect combine sensor
Inspect related harness
Inspect steering angle
sensor

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
Terminal
S

Signal
Combine sensor

Connected to
Combine
sensor

Test condition

Voltage (V)

3.55.0

Vehicle is stopped
T

Yaw rate
(yaw rate signal)

Combine
sensor

Right cornering
Left cornering

U
V
W
X
Y
AA

Steering angle
(neutral signal)

Steering angle
(steering angle
signal 2)
Steering angle
(steering angle
signal 1)
Combine sensor
(ground)
DSC OFF switch

Steering angle
sensor
Steering angle
sensor

DSC OFF
switch

OBD

KLN terminal of
DLC-2

Auto cruise set
signal output

Auto cruise unit

Steering position:
Below 1.0
center position 25°29°
Except above condition
Approx. 4

• Inspect using the wave profile.
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
• Inspect using the wave profile.
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))

Combine
sensor

Steering angle
sensor

Audio unit,
Wiper and
washer switch,
Car-navegation
unit, Auto
leveling control
unit, Cruise
actuator

Vehicle speed
output

CAN-L

CAN-H

Below 1.0

When switch is pressed
Below 1.0
When switch is not pressed
B+
It cannot be determined with terminal
voltage whether the condition is good or bad
because advanced function diagnostic
output is performed with serial
communication. Inspect with service codes.
When auto cruise is ON
Below 1.0
When auto cruise is OFF
B+

Vehicle is stopped
0

2.32.7
Fluctuation
between
2.54.62
Fluctuation
between
2.50.33

• Inspect using the wave profile.
(See P41 Inspection Using An
Oscilloscope (Reference))
No need to
check
No need to
check

Action
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect combine sensor

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect yaw rate sensor

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect steering angle
sensor

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect steering angle
sensor
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect steering angle
sensor
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect combine sensor
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect DSC OFF switch

P
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect DSC HU/CM
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect DSC HU/CM

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect front wheel-speed
sensor

: Used for vehicle manufacturing, not used for DSC.

Inspection Using An Oscilloscope (Reference)
Steering angle (steering angle signal 1 and 2)
• DSC HU/CM terminal:
Steering angle signal 2 : W ( + ) R ( - )
Steering angle signal 1 : X ( + ) R ( - )
• Oscilloscope setting:
1 V/DIV (Y), 25 ms/DIV (X), DC range
• Vehicle condition: Rotating steering wheel at one
revolution per second
Note
• As steering wheel rotation speed increases,
period of wave shortens.
• As for shape of steering angle signals 1 and
2, the phase is different.

A6E6921W014

P41

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
Wheel speed
• DSC HU/CM terminal:
RF : M ( + ) I ( - )
RR : K ( + ) H ( - )
LF : F ( + ) J ( - )
LR : Q ( + ) N ( - )
• Oscilloscope setting:
1 V/DIV (Y), 2 ms/DIV (X), AC range
• Vehicle condition: Driving 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
Note
• As vehicle speed increases, period of wave
shortens.
• If there is malfunctioning in the sensor rotor,
wave profile warps.

A6E6921W013

Vehicle speed output
• DSC HU/CM terminal: AE ( + ) A( - )
• Oscilloscope setting:
1 V/DIV (Y), 5 ms/DIV (X), DC range
• Vehicle condition: Driving 30 km/h (18.6 mph)
Note
• As vehicle speed increases, period of wave
shortens.

A6E6921W012

COMBINE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
End Of Sie

A6E692067650W05

Caution
• Be careful and do not allow the combine sensor to fall. If by chance it is subjected to strong
impact, replace it.
1. Remove the center console.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

Combine sensor connector
Combine sensor

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. After installation, perform the combine sensor
initialization procedure. (See P44 COMBINE
SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE.)

A6E6920W004
End Of Sie

P42

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
COMBINE SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E692067650W06

Caution
• Be careful and do not allow the lateral-G sensor to fall. If by chance it is subjected to strong
impact, replace it.
1. Connect the connector.
2. Turn ignition switch on, verify the voltage between
terminals B and E under the following conditions.
• If not within the specification, replace the
lateral-G sensor.
(1) Lateral-G
1) Horizontal
Voltage
2.42.6 V

A6E6920W008

2) Facing up (inclined 90° from horizontal)
Voltage
3.33.7 V

A6E6920W002

3) Facing down (declined 90° from
horizontal)
Voltage
1.31.7 V

A6E6920W003

(2) Yaw rate
1) Measure yaw rate sensor voltage under
static condition.

A6E6920W008

P43

DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL
2) Measure voltage at output terminal D and
ground terminal E when the yaw rate
sensor is rotated left and right.
Caution
• Be careful when turning the yaw rate
sensor rotation position while it is in a
reversed state because the rotation
direction and voltage will be reversed.
Voltage
Right rotation:
fluctuation between 2.54.62 V
Left rotation:
fluctuation between 2.50.33 V
COMBINE SENSOR INITIALIZATION PROCEDURE

A6E6920W005

End Of Sie

1. Set the SST (WDS or equivalent) to the DLC-2
2. Access the active command mode and select the
YAWRATE, then follow the indication on the
monitor.
3. Select the LATACCEL and follow the indication
on the monitor.

A6E692067650W07

A6E3970W002

STEERING ANGLE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
End Of Sie

1. (See T38 COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E692067650W08

End Of Sie

1. (See T39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION.)
DSC OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E692067650W09

End Of Sie

1. (See P31 TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
DSC OFF SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E692067650W10

End Of Sie

1. (See P32 TCS (DSC) OFF SWITCH INSPECTION.)
End Of Sie

P44

A6E692067650W11

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
ABS (ABS/TCS) SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM

A6E697567650W01

A6E6921T001
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

IG switch
SUS 15 A fuse
ABS 60 A fuse
Meter
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light
TCS OFF light
TCS indicator light
CAN driver
Brake light

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Cruise actuator
TCS OFF switch
DLC-2
CAN-H
CAN-L
ABS Wheel-speed sensor
Battery
Brake switch
Audio unit, Wiper and washer switch, Car-navigation
unit, Auto leveling control unit

P45

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
ABS (ABS/TCS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
End Of Sie

A6E697567650W02

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Test Description
• The OBD test inspects the integrity and function of the ABS (ABS/TCS) and outputs the results when
requested by the specific tests.
• On-board diagnostic test also:
Provides a quick inspection of the ABS (ABS/TCS) usually performed at the start of each diagnostic
procedure.
Provides verification after repairs to ensure that no other faults occurred during service.
• The OBD test is divided into 3 tests:
Read/clear diagnostic results, PID monitor and record and active command modes.
Read/clear diagnostic results
• This function allows you to read or clear DTCs in the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM memory.

PID/data monitor and record
• This function allows you to access certain data values, input signals, calculated values, and system status
information.
Active command modes
• This function allows you to control devices through the WDS or equivalent.
Reading DTCs Procedure
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector.
2. Retrieve DTC by WDS or equivalent.

A6E3970W002

Clearing DTCs Procedures
1. After repairs have been made, perform the DTCs reading procedure.
2. Erase DTC by WDS or equivalent.
3. Ensure that the customers concern has been resolved.
PID/Data Monitor and Record Procedure
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector.
2. Access and monitor PIDs by WDS or equivalent.

A6E3970W002

P46

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
Active Command Modes Procedure
Note
• When driving, the ABS motor and each valve forcibly turn ABS_VOLT on, and then each command on.
ABS_VOLT regulates the power supply for the ABS motor and 8 valves.
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (Engine OFF) or
start engine.
3. Activate active command modes using WDS or
equivalent.

A6E3970W002

DTC Table
DTC
WDS or
equivalent
B1318
B1342
C1095
C1096
C1119
C1140
C1145
C1148

Diagnosis system component
ABS (ABS/TCS) power supply
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
Motor relay, pump motor
Motor relay, pump motor
Engine control system
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (pump)
Right front wheel-speed sensor
Right front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1155
C1158

Left front wheel-speed sensor
Left front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1165
C1168

Right rear wheel-speed sensor
Right rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1175
C1178

Left rear wheel-speed sensor
Left rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1186
C1194

Fail-safe relay
Left front pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1198

Left front pressure retention solenoid valve

C1210

Right front pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1214

Right front pressure retention solenoid valve

C1233

Left front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1234

Right front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1235

Right rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1236

Left rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1242

Left rear pressure reduction solenoid valve

Page
(See P50 DTC B1318)
(See P52 DTC B1342)
(See P52 DTC C1095, C1096)
(See P52 DTC C1095, C1096)
(See P54 DTC C1119)
(See P55 DTC C1140)
(See P56 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P56 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P56 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P56 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P62 DTC C1186, C1266)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P59 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)

P47

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
DTC
WDS or
equivalent
C1246

Diagnosis system component
Right rear pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1250

Left rear pressure retention solenoid valve

C1254

Right rear ABS pressure retention solenoid valve

C1266

Fail-safe relay

C1414
C1508
C1510

ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
ABS/TCS HU/CM
Right front solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor
Left front solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed sensor/
sensor rotor
Right rear solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor
Left rear solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed sensor/
sensor rotor
Can communication
Invalid/fault data received
Can communication

C1511
C1512
C1513
U1900
U2021
U2516

Page
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254)
(See P63 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254 )
(See P64 DTC C1414 )
(See P64 DTC C1508 )
(See P64 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P64 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P64 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P64 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See T144 DTC U0073, U1900, U2516 )
(See P65 DTC U2021 )
(See T144 DTC U0073, U1900, U2516 )

PID/DATA Monitor Table
PID Name
(Definition)
RPM
(Engine speed signal
input)
CCNTABS
(Number of continuous
codes)

Unit/Condition

Condition/Specification

RPM

• Engine is stopped: 0 RPM
• Engine is running:
Indicates engine speed

DTC is detected: 1255
DTC is not detected: 0

PMPSTAT
(Pump motor output state)

ON/OFF

BOO_ABS
(Brake pedal switch input)

ON/OFF

ABS_LAMP
(ABS warning light driver
output state)
BRAKE_LMP
(BRAKE system warning
light output state)

ABSRR_O
(Right rear ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

P48

ON/OFF

• Pump motor is activated:
ON
• Pump motor is
deactivated: OFF
• Brake pedal is depressed:
ON
• Brake pedal is released:
OFF
• ABS warning light is
illuminated: ON
• ABS warning light is not
illuminated: OFF
• BRAKE system warning
light is illuminated: ON
• BRAKE system warning
light is not illuminated:
OFF
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)

Action

ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM/
CM terminal

Inspect PCM.

Perform inspection using
appropriate DTC.

Inspect ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM.
(See P27 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM SYSTEM
INSPECTION )
Inspect brake switch.

Y
Inspect ABS warning light.

Inspect BRAKE system
warning light.

Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
PID Name
(Definition)

ABSLR_O
(Left rear ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSRF_O
(Right front ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSLF_O
(Left front ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSRR_I
(Right rear ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSLR_I
(Left rear ABS pressure
retention solenoid valve
output state)

ABSRF_I
(Right front ABS pressure
retention solenoid valve
output state)

ABSLF_I
(Left front ABS pressure
retention solenoid valve
output state)

Unit/Condition

ON/OFF

ABSVLVRLY
(Fail-safe relay output
state)

ON/OFF

ABSPMPRLY
(Motor relay output state)

ON/OFF

LF_WSPD
(Left front wheel-speed
sensor input)

KPH or MPH

Condition/Specification

Action

• During ABS or EBD
control: ON/OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS and EBD control:
OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS or EBD
control: ON/OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS and EBD control:
OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• Fail-safe relay is
activated: ON
• Fail-safe relay is
deactivated: OFF
• Motor relay is activated:
ON
• Motor relay is deactivated:
OFF
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed

Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM. Replace ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
(See P28 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Inspect ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM.
(See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM INSPECTION )
Inspect ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM.
(See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM INSPECTION )
Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.

ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM/
CM terminal

E, I

P49

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
PID Name
(Definition)

Unit/Condition

RF_WSPD
(Right front wheel-speed
sensor input)

KPH or MPH

LR_WSPD
(Left rear wheel-speed
sensor input)

KPH or MPH

RR_WSPD
(Right rear wheel-speed
sensor input)

KPH or MPH

ABS_VOLT
(System battery voltage
value)

Condition/Specification
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Ignition key at ON: B+
• Idle: Approx. 1416 V

ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM/
CM terminal

Action
Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.

D, G

Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.

C, F

Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.

A, B

Inspect power supply circuit.
(See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM INSPECTION )

Acrive Command Mode
Command Name
ABS_POWER
LR_OUTLET
LR_INLET
RR_INLET
RR_OUTLET
LF_INLET
LF_OUTLET
RF_INLET
RF_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR
VS_OUTPUT

Definition
Fail-safe relay
Left rear ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
Left rear ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Right rear ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Right rear ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
Left front ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Left front ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
Right front ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Right front ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
ABS motor
Vehicle speed signal output

DTC B1318

Operation
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
SPEED

Note

Ignition key at ON
(Engine OFF), and
driving

End Of Sie

A6E697567650W03

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harness connector, the SST (49 G066
001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
DTC B1318
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

P50

ABS (ABS/TCS) power supply
• Low voltage is detected at the voltage monitor of solenoid valve monitor, or the motor monitor.
•
•
•
•

Malfunction of fuse (SUS 15 A)
Open or short to power circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal G and battery positive terminal
Open circuit in harness between body ground and ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal A
Battery and/or generator malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Is battery terminal voltage okay?
2

INSPECT BATTERY GRAVITY
• Is battery specific gravity as specified?

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
• Are generator and drive belt tension okay?

INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Start engine.
• Measure voltage between ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM terminal Z and ground.
• Is voltage above 10 V?
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM GROUND
CIRCUIT FOR POOR GROUND OR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Measure resistance between ground and
DSC HU/CM terminal AC.
• Is resistance within 01 ohm?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

ACTION
Make sure that battery terminal connection is okay.
Go to next step.
Charge or replace battery, then go to Step 6.
Go to next step.
Replace battery, then go to Step 6.
Go to next step.
Adjust drive belt tension as necessary.
Replace generator and/or drive belt as necessary.
Go to next step.
Go to Step 6.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
If there is no continuity:
• Repair or replace harness for open circuit between ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM and ground, then go to next step.
If resistance is not within 01 ohm:
• Repair or replace harness for poor ground then go to
next step.
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

P51

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
DTC B1342
End Of Sie

A6E697567650W04

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harness connector, the SST (49 G066
001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
DTC B1342
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
The on-board diagnostic function detects control module malfunction.
• Malfunction of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY CURRENT STATUS OF
MALFUNCTION
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Is same DTC present?
2
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

DTC C1095, C1096

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Inspect intermittent concern using the same procedure as
engine control system.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

A6E697567650W06

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harnesses connector the SST (49
G066 001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
DTC

C1095, C1096
Motor relay, pump motor
• C1095:
ABS motor stuck OFF when vehicle is started or during ABS operation, ABS motor ON is
commanded.
DETECTION
• C1096:
CONDITION
ABS motor stuck OFF when vehicle is started or during ABS operation, ABS motor ON is
commanded.
Motor monitor ON signal is not input after specified time when the motor signal is switched from ON
to OFF by ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM.
• Open, or short to power or short to ground of motor relay and/or ABS motor in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
POSSIBLE
• Stuck motor relay and/or ABS motor
CAUSE
• Open circuit of ABS motor power supply
• Open circuit of ABS motor ground

P52

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN RECORDED
• If any of DTC C1186 and/or C1266 has also
been stored?
2
INSPECT ABS FUSE CONDITION
• Is ABS fuse (60 A) okay?
3

INSPECT MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector.
• Connect SST (adapter harness) to ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM connector (harness side
only).
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM terminal AB (harness side) of SST
and ground.
• Is voltage B+?
INSPECT PUMP MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM terminal AD (harness side) of SST
and ground.
• Is there continuity?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace fuse, then go to Step 6.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between battery
positive terminal and ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal AC,
then go to Step 6.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal AB and ground, then go to Step
6.

P53

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
STEP
INSPECTION
5
VERIFY PUMP MOTOR OPERATION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove SST (adapter harness) and connect
all disconnected connectors.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Access ABS_POWER and PMP_MOTOR
active command modes using WDS or
equivalent.
• Does pump motor operate?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes

Go to applicable DTC inspection.

DTC C1119
End Of Sie

DTC C1119
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

P54

A6E697567650W07

Engine control system, torque reduction inhibit signal line
• Engine RPM information through CAN is out of specification or invalid value
• Throttle information through CAN is out of specification or invalid value
• Malfunction of PCM

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR CAN FOR DTCs
• If any of DTC U1900 and/or U2516 has also
been stored?
2

CHECK FOR PCM FOR DTCs
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Is DTC for engine control system obtained?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures
• Start engine.)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

No
Yes
No

ACTION
Follow inspection procedures for CAN system.
See T144 DTC U0073, U1900, U2516
Go to next step.
Follow inspection procedures for engine control system.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

Yes

DTC C1140
End Of Sie

A6E697567650W09

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harness connector, the SST (49 G066
001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
DTC C1140
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (pump)
Right front and left rear wheels, or left front and right rear wheel-lock is detected during ABS (ABS/TCS)
operation.
Stuck pump motor in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
OPERATION
• Perform ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM system
inspection.
(See P27 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
SYSTEM INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
2
INSPECT CONVENTIONAL BRAKE
OPERATION
• Inspect brake fluid level.
• Start engine.
• Perform a road test to verify conventional
vehicle braking performance.
• Is there any concern.
3
INSPECT REAR BRAKE DRAGGING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Jack-up vehicle and support it with safety
stand.
• Release parking brake.
• Turn rear wheel by hand and inspect for rear
brake drag.
• Is rear brake dragging?
4
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above at least one minute.
• Gradually slow down vehicle and stop.
• Is same DTC present?
5
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to Step 4.

Yes
No

Inspect conventional brake line, then go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair parking brake system, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

P55

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175
End Of Sie

A6E697567650W10

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harness connector, the SST (49 G066
001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
C1145
C1155
DTC
C1165
C1175
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

P56

RF wheel-speed sensor
LF wheel-speed sensor
RR wheel-speed sensor
LR wheel-speed sensor
• Abnormal input is detected.
• Open or short to ground circuit in harness between ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal and wheel-speed
sensor(s) terminal below
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal GRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal DRF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal ILF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal ELF ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal ARR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal BRR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal CLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal A
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal FLR ABS wheel-speed sensor terminal B
• ABS wheel-speed sensor(s) malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)

P57

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector.
• Measure resistance between suspected
sensor terminals of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector (harness side).
RF wheel-speed sensor: GD
LF wheel-speed sensor: IE
RR wheel-speed sensor: AB
LR wheel-speed sensor: CF
• Is resistance within 1.31.7 kilohm?
2
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between suspected sensor
terminal(s) of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector (harness side) and ground(s).
RF wheel-speed sensor: GD
LF wheel-speed sensor: IE
RR wheel-speed sensor: AB
LR wheel-speed sensor: CF
• Is there continuity?
3
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect suspected sensor connector(s)
and inspect resistance between sensor
terminals (part side).
• Is resistance within 1.31.7 kilohm?
4
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM TO
WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR
OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between suspected sensor
terminal(s) of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector (harness side) and wheel-speed
sensor connector. (vehicle harness side)
RF wheel-speed sensor (+): GA
RF wheel-speed sensor (): DB
LF wheel-speed sensor (+): IA
LF wheel-speed sensor (): EB
RR wheel-speed sensor (+): AA
RR wheel-speed sensor (): BB
LR wheel-speed sensor (+): CA
LR wheel-speed sensor (): FB
• Is there continuity?
5
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
6
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?
End Of Sie

P58

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 3.

Yes
No

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM and wheel-speed
sensor(s), then go to Step 5.
Go to Step 5.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wheel-speed sensor, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Repair or replace poor connections of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/
CM connector and/or wheel-speed sensor connector(s),
then go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuits between ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM and wheel-speed sensor(s), then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236

A6E697567650W11

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harness connector, the SST (49 G066
001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
C1148, C1234
RF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
C1158, C1233
LF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
DTC
C1168, C1235
RR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
C1178, C1236
LR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
• C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178:
Abnormal sensor output is detected on any of four vehicle wheels when the vehicle goes from start
to a speed of 10 km/h {6.2 mph}.
DETECTION
Greater than specified amount of ABS demand occurs from front wheel sensors when vehicle is
CONDITION
started.
• C1234, C1233, C1235, C1236:
Abnormal sensor output due to chipping of sensor rotor teeth, etc. is detected
ABS control operates for 60 seconds or more
• Short to ground circuit of wheel-speed sensor(s) circuit
• Malfunction of ABC wheel-speed sensor(s)
• Damaged sensor rotor(s)
POSSIBLE
• Incorrect clearance between ABC wheel-speed sensor and sensor rotor
CAUSE
• Poor installation of ABC wheel speed sensor and/or sensor rotor (If the sensor rotor is installed twisted,
it may cause output of abnormal wave form at high speeds.)
• ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM internal damage (Solenoid valve malfunction, pump motor malfunction, or pipe
clogging)

P59

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN RECORDED
• Have DTCs related to solenoid valve, pump
motor, or pump motor relay been stored?

P60

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY IF CURRENT CONCERNED INPUT
SIGNAL STATUS IS INTERMITTENT OR
CONSTANT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Start engine and drive vehicle.
• Access LF_WSPD, LR_WSPD, RF_WSPD
and RR_WSPD using WDS or equivalent
• Do vehicle speeds correspond approximately
to the four PIDs above?
3
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT
PULSE
• Start engine and drive vehicle.
• Inspect output voltage pattern using an
oscilloscope.

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 8.
If there is a difference in speed of four wheels: Go to next
step.
If any wheel speed is 0 km/h {0 mph}: Go to Step 4.

Yes

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 6.

• Is output voltage pattern okay?
INSPECT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM and
wheel-speed sensor connectors.
• Inspect continuity between suspected sensor
terminal(s) of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector (harness side) and ground(s).
RF wheel-speed sensor: Gground
LF wheel-speed sensor: Iground
RR wheel-speed sensor: Aground
LR wheel-speed sensor: Cground
• Is there continuity?
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect suspected wheel-speed sensor
connector(s) and inspect resistance between
wheel-speed sensor terminal(s) (part side).
• Is resistance within 1.31.7 kilohm?
INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR CLEARANCE
• Jack-up vehicle and support it with safety
stands.
• Remove suspected wheel(s).
• Inspect clearance between wheel-speed
sensor and sensor rotor.
• Is clearance within 0.31.1 mm {0.012
0.043 in}?
INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR FOR DAMAGE
• Jack-up vehicle and support it with safety
stands.
• Remove suspected wheel(s).
• Visually inspect sensor rotor for missing,
deformed and obstructed teeth.
Number of teeth: 44
• Is sensor rotor okay?

Yes
No

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM and ABC wheel-sped
sensor, then go to Step 9.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wheel-speed sensor(s), then go to Step 9.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wheel-speed sensor(s), then go to Step 9.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace sensor rotor, then go to Step 9.

P61

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
STEP
INSPECTION
8
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
OPERATION
• Perform ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM system
inspection.
(See P27 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
SYSTEM INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Gradually slow down vehicle and stop.
• Is same DTC present?
10
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

DTC C1186, C1266

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

A6E697567650W12

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM harnesses connector the SST (49
G066 001) must be used. (See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM INSPECTION.)
DTC

C1186, C1266
Fail-safe relay
• C1186:
Fail-safe relay in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM stuck OFF when ignition switch is turned ON, fail-safe
DETECTION
relay ON is commanded.
CONDITION
• C1266:
Fail-safe relay in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM stuck ON when ignition switch is turned ON, fail-safe relay
OFF is commanded.
• Malfunction of fuse (ABS 60 A)
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit in harness between ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal AA and battery positive terminal
CAUSE
• Open or short of fail-safe relay in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
• Stuck fail-safe relay in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

P62

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT ABS FUSE CONDITION
• Is ABS fuse (60 A) okay?
2

INSPECT FAIL-SAFE RELAY POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector.
• Connect SST (adapter harness) to ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM connector (harness side only).
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM terminal AA (harness side) of SST
and ground.
• Is voltage B+?
VERIFY FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove SST (adapter harness) and connect
all disconnected connectors.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Access ABS_VOLT using WDS or
equivalent.
• Does fail-safe relay operate?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace fuse, then go to Step 4.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between battery
positive terminal and ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminal AA,
then go to Step 4.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254

End Of Sie

C 1210
C 1214
C 1194
C 1198
DTC
C 1246
C 1254
C 1242
C 1250
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697567650W13

RF pressure reduction solenoid valve
RF pressure retention solenoid valve
LF pressure reduction solenoid valve
LF pressure retention solenoid valve
RR pressure reduction solenoid valve
RR pressure retention solenoid valve
LR pressure reduction solenoid valve
LR pressure reduction solenoid valve
• Solenoid monitor signal does not track in response to solenoid ON/OFF command.
• Open, short to power, or short to ground circuit in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
• Stuck solenoid valve in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY SOLENOID VALVE OPERATION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove SST (adapter harness) and connect
all disconnected connectors.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Access solenoid valve(s) PIDs using WDS or
equivalent.
• Does solenoid valve operate?
2
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
• Is same DTC present?
3
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

P63

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
DTC C1414
End Of Sie

DTC C1414
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697567650W14

ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM mismatched installation
• Detection of situation where vehicle-type or drive system input signal and ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
information remains incongruent through CAN information.
• Mismatched installation of ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) UNIT FOR
MISMATCHED INSTALLATION
• Verify ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM part number.
• Has a ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM with the
correct part number been installed?
2
Configulate ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
• Does ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM configulate
properly?
3
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnected all disconnect
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
4
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace with correct ABS (ABS/TCS) unit part number, then
go to Step 3.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1508
End Of Sie

DTC C1508
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697567650W17

TCS control
• TCS control continues operation for 60 seconds or more
• System is normal
For protection of solenoid valves in the ABS/TCS HU/CM, or protection of the engine, sustained and
continual control of TCS is inhibited

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY CURRENT STATUS OF
MALFUNCTION
• Clear DTC from memory
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Is same DTC present?
2
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM, then go to next step.
Inspect intermittent concern using the same procedure as
engine control system.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513
End Of Sie

C1510
C1511
DTC
C1512
C1513
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

P64

•
•
•
•
•
•

RF solenoid valve, motor or RF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
LF solenoid valve, motor or LF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
RR solenoid valve, motor or RR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
LR solenoid valve, motor or LR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
Wheel lock is detected during ABS operation (pressure reduction inoperative).
Pressure reduction on a single wheel continues for more than 20 seconds.
Malfunction of solenoid valve in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
Malfunction of wheel-speed sensor
Damaged sensor rotor
Stuck pump motor in ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM

A6E697567650W15

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (ABS/TCS)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN RECORDED
• Has any ABS wheel-speed sensor, sensor
rotor, solenoid valve, pump motor, or motor
relay related DTC been output?
2
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
OPERATION
• Perform ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM system
inspection.
(See P27 ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
SYSTEM INSPECTION
• Is it okay?
3
VERIFY CURRENT STATUS OF
MALFUNCTION
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above at least one minute.
• Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
• Is same DTC present?
4
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC U2021
End Of Sie

A6E697567650W16

Note
• To warm up the engine completely, idle the engine and wait for more than 5 minutes.
DTC U2021
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Engine coolant temperature
• After engine is warmed up, engine coolant temperature is 0 °C {32 °F} or less, and TCS operation is
inhibited by PCM.
• System is normal. When engine coolant temperature rises, TCS operation is executed by PCM.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK WHETHER ENGINE HAS WARMED
UP
• Has engine warmed up?
2

VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER ENGINE IS WARMED UP
• Warm up the engine.
• Is TCS indicator light also illuminated and
DTC C1119 obtained?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Warm up the engine.
If TCS OFF light goes out, system is normal.
Go to DTC C1119 chart.
If TCS OFF light goes out, system is normal.
If TCS OFF light does not goes out, go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

P65

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DSC SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM

A6E697367650W01

A6E6920T005
.

1
2
3

IG switch
SUS 15A fuse
ABS 60 A fuse

P66

4
5
6

Meter
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

DSC OFF light
DSC indicator light
CAN driver
Battery
Cruise actuator
DSC OFF switch
DLC-2
CAN-H
CAN-L

16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23

Wheel-speed sensor
Combine sensor
Steering angle sensor
Brake switch
Brake light
Back-up light switch (MTX only)
Back-up light
Audio unit, Wiper and washer switch,
Car-navegation unit, Auto leveling control unit

DSC ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
End Of Sie

A6E697367650W02

On-Board Diagnostic (OBD) Test Description
1. (See P46 ABS (ABS/TCS) ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS)
DTC Table
DTC
WDS or
equivalent
B1318
B1342
B1483
B1484
B1486
B1627
B2477
C1095
C1096
C1119
C1125
C1140
C1145
C1148

Diagnosis system component
DSC power supply
DSC HU/CM
Stop switch signal
Stop switch signal
Stop switch signal
Reverse signal
Module configuration
Motor relay, pump motor
Motor relay, pump motor
Engine control system
Brake fluid level sensor
DSC HU (pump)
Right front wheel-speed sensor
Right front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1155
C1158

Left front wheel-speed sensor
Left front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1165
C1168

Right rear wheel-speed sensor
Right rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1175
C1178

Left rear wheel-speed sensor
Left rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1186
C1194

Fail-safe relay
Left front pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1198

Left front pressure retention solenoid valve

C1210

Right front pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1214

Right front pressure retention solenoid valve

C1233

Left front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

Page
(See P72 DTC B1318)
(See P74 DTC B1342)
(See P74 DTC B1483, B1484, B1486)
(See P74 DTC B1483, B1484, B1486)
(See P74 DTC B1483, B1484, B1486)
(See P76 DTC B1627)
(See P77 DTC B2477)
(See P77 DTC C1095, C1096)
(See P77 DTC C1095, C1096)
(See P79 DTC C1119)
(See P80 DTC C1125)
(See P81 DTC C1140)
(See P81 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P81 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P81 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P81 DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P86 DTC C1186, C1266)
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958)
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958)
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958)
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)

P67

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC
WDS or
equivalent
C1234

Right front wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1235

Right rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1236

Left rear wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor

C1242

Left rear pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1246

Right rear pressure reduction solenoid valve

C1250

Left rear pressure retention solenoid valve

C1254

Right rear ABS pressure retention solenoid valve

C1266
C1280

Fail-safe relay
Combine sensor

C1400

Right front traction switch solenoid valve

C1410

Left front traction switch solenoid valve

C1414
C1507
C1508
C1510

C1730

DSC HU/CM
DSC control
DSC control
Right front solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor
Left front solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed sensor/
sensor rotor
Right rear solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor
Left rear solenoid valve, motor or wheel-speed sensor/
sensor rotor
Combine sensor

C1951

Combine sensor

C1952

Combine sensor

C1953
C1954
C1955
C1956
C1957

Brake fluid pressure sensor
Brake fluid pressure sensor
Steering angle sensor
Steering angle sensor
Right front DSC switch solenoid valve

C1958

Left front DSC switch solenoid valve

C1959

Combine sensor

U1900
U2021

Can communication
Invalid/fault data received

C1511
C1512
C1513

P68

Diagnosis system component

Page
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P83 DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178,
C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236)
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P86 DTC C1186, C1266 )
(See P88 DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952,
C1959 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P91 DTC C1414 )
(See P91 DTC C1507, C1508 )
(See P91 DTC C1507, C1508 )
(See P92 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P92 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P92 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P92 DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513 )
(See P88 DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952,
C1959 )
(See P88 DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952,
C1959 )
(See P88 DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952,
C1959 )
(See P92 DTC C1953, C1954 )
(See P92 DTC C1953, C1954 )
(See P93 DTC C1955, C1956 )
(See P93 DTC C1955, C1956 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P87 DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214,
C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410,
C1957, C1958 )
(See P88 DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952,
C1959 )
(See T144 DTC U0073, U1900, U2516 )
(See P96 DTC U2021 )

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC
WDS or
equivalent
U2516

Diagnosis system component
Can communication

Page
(See T144 DTC U0073, U1900, U2516 )

PID/DATA Monitor Table
PID Name
(Definition)
RPM
(Engine speed signal
input)

Unit/Condition
RPM

Condition/Specification
• Engine is stopped: 0 RPM
• Engine is running:
Indicates engine speed
• Selector lever position is
displayed

ATX

TRANSGR
(Transaxle gear position)

TRAC_SW
(TCS OFF switch input)

1/2/3/4/P/R/N

ON/OFF

1GR: 1
2GR: 2
3GR: 3
4GR: 4
5GR: 5
Neutral: N
Reverse: R
• TCS (DSC) OFF switch is
depressed: ON
• TCS(DSC) OFF switch is
released: OFF

ON/OFF

TC RVAL
(Traction switch solenoid
valve (RF-LR))

ON/OFF

• Solenoid valve is
activated: ON
• Solenoid valve is
deactivated: OFF

ON/OFF

• Solenoid valve is
activated: ON
• Solenoid valve is
deactivated: OFF

ON/OFF

• Solenoid valve is
activated: ON
• Solenoid valve is
deactivated: OFF

CCNTABS
(Number of continuous
codes)
PMPSTAT
(Pump motor output state)
BRK_FLUID
(Brake fluid level sensor
input)

ABS/TCS HU/
CM or DSC HU/
CM terminal

Inspect PCM, TR switch, or
DSC HU/CM.

MTX

• Solenoid valve is
activated: ON
• Solenoid valve is
deactivated: OFF

R_DSC O
(Stability control solenoid
valve (RF-LR))

Inspect PCM.

D range (1GR): 1
D range (2GR): 2
D range (3GR): 3
D range (4GR): 4
P position: P
N position: N
R position: R

TC LVAL
(Traction switch solenoid
valve (LF-RR))

L_DSC O
(Stability control solenoid
valve (LF-RR))

Action

ON/OFF

YES/NO

Inspect TCS(DSC) OFF
switch.
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

DTC is detected: 1255
DTC is not detected: 0

Perform inspection using
appropriate DTC.

• Pump motor is activated:
ON
• Pump motor is
deactivated: OFF
• Brake fluid is above LOW:
YES
• Brake fluid is below LOW:
NO

Inspect DSC HU/CM.
(See P40 DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION)
Inspect brake fluid level.
Inspect brake fluid level
sensor.

P69

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
PID Name
(Definition)

Unit/Condition

BOO_ABS
(Brake pedal switch input)

ON/OFF

ABS_LAMP
(ABS warning light driver
output state)

ON/OFF

BRAKE_LMP
(BRAKE system warning
light output state)
ABSRR_O
(Right rear ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSLR_O
(Left rear ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSRF_O
(Right front ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)
ABSLF_O
(Left front ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)
ABSRR_I
(Right rear ABS pressure
reduction solenoid valve
output state)

ABSLR_I
(Left rear ABS pressure
retention solenoid valve
output state)

ABSRF_I
(Right front ABS pressure
retention solenoid valve
output state)
ABSLF_I
(Left front ABS pressure
retention solenoid valve
output state)

P70

ON/OFF

Condition/Specification
• Brake pedal is depressed:
ON
• Brake pedal is released:
OFF
• ABS warning light is
illuminated: ON
• ABS warning light is not
illuminated: OFF
• BRAKE system warning
light is illuminated: ON
• BRAKE system warning
light is not illuminated:
OFF
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF (solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
• (solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS or EBD
control: ON/OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS and EBD control:
OFF (solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF (solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF (solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS or EBD
control: ON/OFF
(solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS and EBD control:
OFF (solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF (solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)
• During ABS control: ON/
OFF (solenoid valve is
activated/deactivated)
• Not ABS control: OFF
(solenoid valve is
deactivated)

Action

ABS/TCS HU/
CM or DSC HU/
CM terminal

Inspect brake switch.
L
Inspect ABS warning light.

Inspect BRAKE system
warning light.

Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Internal fault of DSC HU/
CM. Replace DSC HU/CM.
(See P38 DSC HU/CM
REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
PID Name
(Definition)

Unit/Condition

ABSVLVRLY
(Fail-safe relay output
state)

ON/OFF

ABSPMPRLY
(Motor relay output state)

ON/OFF

SWA POS
(Steering angle sensor
input)

DEG

LF_WSPD
(Left front wheel-speed
sensor input)

KPH or MPH

RF_WSPD
(Right front wheel-speed
sensor input)

KPH or MPH

LR_WSPD
(Left rear wheel-speed
sensor input)
RR_WSPD
(Right rear wheel-speed
sensor input)

LAT ACC
(Lateral-G sensor input)

YAW_RATE
(Yaw rate sensor input)

MCYLI P
(Brake fluid pressure
sensor input)
TCSOUTD
(Torque reduction request
value)
TPI
(Throttle position signal
input)
ABS_VOLT
(System battery voltage
value)

KPH or MPH

DG/S

MPA

Condition/Specification
• Fail-safe relay is
activated: ON
• Fail-safe relay is
deactivated: OFF
• Motor relay is activated:
ON
• Motor relay is deactivated:
OFF
• Steering wheel is in neutral
position: 0 DEG
• Steering wheel is turned to
left: Changes between 0
DEG and -1,638.40 DEG
• Steering wheel is turned to
right: Changes between 0
DEG and 1,638.35 DEG
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Vehicle is stopped: 0 KPH
{0 MPH}
• Vehicle is driving:
Indicates vehicle speed
• Vehicle is stopped or
driving straight: 0 G
• Cornering to left: Changes
between 0 G and 1.27 G
• Cornering to right:
Changes between 0 G and
-1.28 G
• Vehicle is stopped or
driving straight: 0 DG/S
• Cornering to left: Changes
between 0 DG/S and 127
DG/S
• Cornering to right:
Changes between 0 DG/S
and -128 DG/S
• Brake pedal is released: 0
MPA
• Brake pedal is depressed:
Changes between 0 MPA
and 25.5 MPA
• Torque reduction is not
requested: 0 %
• Torque reduction is
requested: Changes
between 0 % and 100 %
• Closed throttle position: 0
• Wide open throttle:
Changes between 1 and 7
• Ignition key at ON: B+
• Idle: Approx. 1416 V

Action
Inspect DSC HU/CM.
(See P40 DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION )
Inspect DSC HU/CM.
(See P40 DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION )

ABS/TCS HU/
CM or DSC HU/
CM terminal

Inspect steering angle
sensor.
R, U, W, X

Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.
Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.
Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.
Inspect wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.

F, J

I, M

P
N, Q

H, K

Inspect ABS wheel-speed
sensor/sensor rotor.
O

Inspect combine sensor.
(See P43 COMBINE
SENSOR INSPECTION )
T

Inspect DSC HU/CM.
(See P40 DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION )

Inspect PCM and throttle
position sensor.

Inspect power supply circuit.
(See P40 DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION )

P71

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Active Command Modes Table
Command Name
RF_DSC_V
LF_DSC_V
ABS_POWER
LR_OUTLET
LR_INLET
RR_INLET
RR_OUTLET
LF_INLET
LF_OUTLET
RF_INLET
RF_OUTLET
PMP_MOTOR
RF_TC_VLV
LF_TC_VLV
TRAC OFF
STAB_IND
YAWRATE
LATACCEL

Definition
Stability control solenoid valve (RF-LR)
Stability control solenoid valve (LF-RR)
Fail-safe relay
Left rear ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
Left rear ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Right rear ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Right rear ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
Left front ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Left front ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
Right front ABS pressure retention solenoid valve
Right front ABS pressure reduction solenoid valve
ABS motor
Traction switch solenoid valve (RF-LR)
Traction switch solenoid valve (LF-RR)
Traction control off indicator
DSC indicator light
Yaw rate sensor initialization start
Lateral accel sensor initialization start

DTC B1318

Operation
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
ON/OFF
TRUE/FALSE

Note

Ignition key at ON
(Engine OFF), and
driving

End Of Sie

A6E697367650W03

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC B1318
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

P72

DSC power supply
• Low voltage is detected at the voltage monitor of solenoid valve monitor, or the motor monitor.
•
•
•
•

Malfunction of fuse (SUS 15 A)
Open or short to power circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal G and battery positive terminal
Open circuit in harness between body ground and DSC HU/CM terminal A
Battery and/or generator malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT BATTERY VOLTAGE
• Is battery terminal voltage okay?
2

INSPECT BATTERY GRAVITY
• Is battery specific gravity as specified?

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
• Are generator and drive belt tension okay?

INSPECT DSC HU/CM POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Start engine.
• Measure voltage between DSC HU/CM
terminal G and ground.
• Is voltage above 10 V?
INSPECT DSC HU/CM GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR POOR GROUND OR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Measure resistance between ground and
DSC HU/CM terminal A.
• Is resistance within 01 ohm?

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Go to next step.
If there is no continuity:
• Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM and ground, then go to next step.
If resistance is not within 01 ohm:
• Repair or replace harness for poor ground, then go to
next step.
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

P73

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC B1342
End Of Sie

A6E697367650W04

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC B1342
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

DSC HU/CM
The on-board diagnostic function detects control module malfunction.
• Malfunction of DSC HU/CM

DTC B1483, B1484, B1486

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Inspect intermittent concern using the same procedure as
engine control system.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

A6E697367650W05

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC B1483, B1484, B1486
Brake switch signal
DETECTION
• Low voltage is detected at the voltage monitor of solenoid valve monitor, or the motor monitor
CONDITION
• B1483
Malfunction of brake switch
• B1484
POSSIBLE
Open circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal I and brake switch
CAUSE
• B1486
Short to ground circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal I and brake switch
• Short to power circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal I and brake switch

P74

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DSC HU/CM TO BRAKE SWITCH
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM and brake switch
connector
• Inspect continuity DSC HU/CM terminal L
and brake switch
• Is there continuity?
2
INSPECT DSC HU/CM TO BRAKE SWITCH
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity DSC HU/CM terminal L
and ground
• Is there continuity?
3
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH
• Inspect bake switch.
• Is it okay?
4
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
5
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM and brake switch, then go to next step.

Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM and brake switch, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace bake switch, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace bake switch, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

P75

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC B1627

A6E697367650W06

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC B1627
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

P76

Reverse signal
• Reverse signal is input for 10 seconds or more while driving at a vehicle speed of
65 km/h {40.3 mph}.
• Short to power circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal Z and back-up light switch (MTX)
• Malfunction of TR switch (ATX) or back-up light switch (MTX)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK TR SWITCH FOR DTCs (ATX)
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Is DTC for TR switch obtained?
2
INSPECT BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH (MTX)
• Inspect back-up light switch.
• Is it okay?
3
INSPECT REVERSE SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER (MTX)
• Shift select lever to neutral position.
• Turn ignition key to ON.
• Measure voltage between DSC HU/CM
terminal Z and ground.
• Is voltage above 10 V?
4
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
5
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Follow inspection procedures for TR switch.
Go to step 4.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace back-up light switch, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace back-up light switch, then go to next step.
Replace reverse signal circuit, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC B2477
End Of Sie

DTC B2477
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W07

Module configuration
• Configuration write failure is detected.
• Module configuration procedure is not done properly.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK WHETHER DSC HU/CM IS
CONFIGURED
• Is DSC HU/CM configured?
2

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

DTC C1095, C1096

ACTION
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Configurate DSC using WDS or equivalent.
(See P29 ABS (ABS/TCS) or DSC HU/CM
CONFIGURATION)
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

A6E697367650W08

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC

C1095, C1096
Motor relay, pump motor
• C1095 (54):
No motor monitor signal congruency is detected in relation to DSC HU/CM ON signal.
DETECTION
• C1096 (53):
CONDITION
No motor monitor signal congruency is detected in relation to DSC HU/CM OFF signal.
Motor monitor ON signal is not input after specified time when the motor signal is switched from ON
to OFF by DSC HU/CM.
• Malfunction of fuse (ABS 60 A)
• Open circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal D and battery positive terminal
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal B and body ground
CAUSE
• Open or short of motor relay and/or pump motor in DSC HU/CM
• Stuck motor relay and/or pump motor in DSC HU/CM

P77

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN RECORDED
• If any of DTC C1186 and/or C1266 has also
been stored?
2
INSPECT ABS FUSE CONDITION
• Is ABS fuse (60 A) okay?
3

P78

INSPECT MOTOR RELAY POWER SUPPLY
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM connector.
• Connect SST (adapter harness) to DSC HU/
CM connector (harness side only).
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between DSC HU/CM
terminal D (harness side) of SST and
ground.
• Is voltage B+?
INSPECT PUMP MOTOR GROUND CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal B (harness side) of SST and
ground.
• Is there continuity?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace fuse, then go to Step 6.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between battery
positive terminal and DSC HU/CM terminal D, then go to
Step 9.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal B and ground, then go to Step 6.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
5
VERIFY PUMP MOTOR OPERATION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove SST (adapter harness) and connect
all disconnected connectors.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Access ABS_POWER and PMP_MOTOR
active command modes using WDS or
equivalent.
• Does pump motor operate?
6
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
• Is same DTC present?
7
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1119
End Of Sie

DTC C1119
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W09

•
•
•
•

Engine control system, torque reduction inhibit signal line
Engine RPM information through CAN is out of specification.
Throttle information through CAN is out of specification.
Malfunction of PCM
Malfunction of CAN

P79

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR PCM FOR DTCs
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Is DTC for engine control system obtained?
2
MONITOR CAN SIGNAL
• Access PID RPM and TP using WDS or
equivalentI.
• Are engine speed and throttle position within
specification?
3
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine.
• Is same DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Follow inspection procedures for engine control system.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Follow inspection procedures for engine control system.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

DTC C1125
End Of Sie

DTC C1125
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W10

Brake fluid level sensor
• Brake fluid level remains low for 5 seconds or more.
• Decrease in amount of brake fluid
• Malfunction of brake fluid level sensor

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR CAN FOR DTCs
• Is any of DTC U1900 and/or U2516 has also
been stored?
2
3

End Of Sie

P80

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
• Inspect brake fluid level.
• Is it okay?
INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect brake fluid level sensor
connector.
• Measure resistance between brake fluid
level sensor terminals.
Brake fluid level above MIN: resistance
about 500 ohms
Brake fluid level below MIN: resistance
within 01 ohm
• Is it okay?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnected all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

No
Yes
No

ACTION
Follow inspection procedures for CAN system.
(See T144 DTC U0073, U1900, U2516)
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Add brake fluid to specified level, then go to Step 3.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair brake fluid level sensor, then go to Next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

Yes

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC C1140
DTC C1140
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W11

DSC HU/CM (pump)
Right front and left rear wheels, or left front and right rear wheel-lock is detected during DSC operation.
Stuck pump motor in DSC HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DSC HU/CM OPERATION
• Perform DSC HU/CM system inspection.
(See P35 DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
2
INSPECT CONVENTIONAL BRAKE
OPERATION
• Inspect brake fluid level.
• Start engine.
• Perform a road test to verify conventional
vehicle braking performance.
• Is there any concern.
3
INSPECT REAR BRAKE DRAGGING
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Jack-up vehicle and support it with safety
stand.
• Release parking brake.
• Turn rear wheel by hand and inspect for rear
brake drag.
• Is rear brake dragging?
4
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above at least one minute.
• Gradually slow down vehicle and stop.
• Is same DTC present?
5
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to Step 4.

Yes
No

Inspect conventional brake line, then go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair parking brake system, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

P
Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1145, C1155, C1165, C1175
End Of Sie

A6E697367650W12

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
C1145
C1155
DTC
C1165
C1175
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

RF wheel-speed sensor
LF wheel-speed sensor
RR wheel-speed sensor
LR wheel-speed sensor
• Abnormal input is detected.
• Open or short to ground circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal and wheel-speed sensor(s)
terminal below
DSC HU/CM terminal MRF wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal IRF wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal FLF wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal JLF wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal KRR wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal HRR wheel-speed sensor terminal B
DSC HU/CM terminal QLR wheel-speed sensor terminal A
DSC HU/CM terminal NLR wheel-speed sensor terminal B
• Malfunction of wheel-speed sensor(s)

P81

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM connector.
• Measure resistance between suspected
sensor terminals of DSC HU/CM connector
(harness side).
RF wheel-speed sensor: MI
LF wheel-speed sensor: FJ
RR wheel-speed sensor: KH
LR wheel-speed sensor: QN
• Is resistance within 1.31.7 kilohm?

P82

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 3.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
2
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between suspected sensor
terminal(s) of DSC HU/CM connector
(harness side) and ground(s).
RF wheel-speed sensor (+): M
RF wheel-speed sensor (): I
LF wheel-speed sensor (+): F
LF wheel-speed sensor (): J
RR wheel-speed sensor (+): K
RR wheel-speed sensor (): H
LR wheel-speed sensor (+): Q
LR wheel-speed sensor (): N
• Is there continuity?
3
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect suspected sensor connector(s)
and inspect resistance between sensor
terminals (part side).
• Is resistance within 1.31.7 kilohm?
4
INSPECT DSC HU/CM TO WHEEL-SPEED
SENSOR CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between suspected sensor
terminal(s) of DSC HU/CM connector
(harness side) and wheel-speed sensor
connector. (vehicle harness side)
RF wheel-speed sensor (+): MA
RF wheel-speed sensor (): IB
LF wheel-speed sensor (+): FA
LF wheel-speed sensor (): JB
RR wheel-speed sensor (+): KA
RR wheel-speed sensor (): HB
LR wheel-speed sensor (+): QA
LR wheel-speed sensor (): NB
• Is there continuity?
5
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
6
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

ACTION
Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between DSC HU/CM and wheel-speed sensor(s), then go
to Step 5.
Go to Step 5.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wheel-speed sensor, then go to Step 5.

Yes

Repair or replace poor connections of DSC HU/CM
connector and/or wheel-speed sensor connector(s), then go
to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuits between DSC
HU/CM and wheel-speed sensor(s), then go to next step.

Yes

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178, C1233, C1234, C1235, C1236
End Of Sie

A6E697367650W13

C1148, C1234
RF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
C1158, C1233
LF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
DTC
C1168, C1235
RR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
C1178, C1236
LR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
• C1148, C1158, C1168, C1178:
Abnormal sensor output is detected on any of four vehicle wheels when the vehicle goes from start
to a speed of 10 km/h {6.2 mph}.
DETECTION
Greater than specified amount of ABS demand occurs from front wheel sensors when vehicle is
CONDITION
started.
• C1234, C1233, C1235, C1236:
Abnormal sensor output due to chipping of sensor rotor teeth, etc. is detected.
ABS control operates for 60 seconds or more.
• Short to ground circuit of wheel-speed sensor(s) circuit
• Malfunction of wheel-speed sensor(s)
• Damaged sensor rotor(s)
POSSIBLE
• Incorrect clearance between wheel-speed sensor and sensor rotor
CAUSE
• Poor installation of wheel speed sensor and/or sensor rotor (If the sensor rotor is installed twisted, it
may cause output of abnormal wave form at high speeds).
• DSC HU/CM internal damage (Solenoid valve malfunction, pump motor malfunction, or pipe clogging)

P83

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN RECORDED
• Have DTCs related to solenoid valve, pump
motor, or pump motor relay been stored?

P84

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY IF CURRENT CONCERNED INPUT
SIGNAL STATUS IS INTERMITTENT OR
CONSTANT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Start engine and drive vehicle.
• Access LF_WSPD, LR_WSPD, RF_WSPD
and RR_WSPD using WDS or equivalent.
• Do vehicle speeds correspond approximately
to the four PIDs above?
3
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR OUTPUT
PULSE
• Start engine and drive vehicle.
• Inspect output voltage pattern using an
oscilloscope.

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 8.
If there is a difference in speed of four wheels, go to next
step.
If any wheel speed is 0 km/h {0 mph}, go to Step 4.

Yes

Go to Step 9.

Go to Step 6.

• Is output voltage pattern okay?
INSPECT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM and wheel-speed
sensor connectors.
• Inspect continuity between suspected sensor
terminal(s) of DSC HU/CM connector
(harness side) and ground(s).
RF wheel-speed sensor: Mground
LF wheel-speed sensor: Fground
RR wheel-speed sensor: Kground
LR wheel-speed sensor: Qground
• Is there continuity?
INSPECT WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect suspected wheel-speed sensor
connector(s) and inspect resistance between
wheel-speed sensor terminal(s) (part side).
• Is resistance within 1.31.7 kilohm?
INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR CLEARANCE
• Jack-up vehicle and support it with safety
stands.
• Remove suspected wheel(s).
• Inspect clearance between wheel-speed
sensor and sensor rotor.
• Is clearance within 0.31.1 mm {0.012
0.043 in}?
INSPECT SENSOR ROTOR FOR DAMAGE
• Jack-up vehicle and support it with safety
stands.
• Remove suspected wheel(s).
• Visually inspect sensor rotor for missing,
deformed and obstructed teeth.
Number of teeth: 44
• Is sensor rotor okay?

Yes
No

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between DSC HU/CM and wheel-sped sensor, then go to
Step 9.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wheel-speed sensor, then go to Step 9.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wheel-speed sensor(s), then go to Step 9.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace sensor rotor, then go to Step 9.

P85

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
8
INSPECT DSC HU/CM OPERATION
• Perform DSC HU/CM system inspection.
• See P35 DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION
• Is it okay?
9
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnect all disconnected
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Gradually slow down vehicle and stop.
• Is same DTC present?
10
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

DTC C1186, C1266

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

A6E697367650W14

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC

C1186, C1266
Fail-safe relay
• C1186:
Fail-safe relay in DSC HU/CM stuck OFF when ignition switch is turned ON, fail-safe relay ON is
DETECTION
commanded.
CONDITION
• C1266:
Fail-safe relay in DSC HU/CM stuck ON when ignition switch is turned ON, fail-safe relay OFF is
commanded.
• Malfunction of fuse (ABS 60 A)
POSSIBLE
• Open circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal C and battery positive terminal
CAUSE
• Open or short of fail-safe relay in DSC HU/CM
• Stuck fail-safe relay in DSC HU/CM

P86

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT ABS FUSE CONDITION
• Is ABS fuse (60 A) okay?
2

INSPECT FAIL-SAFE RELAY POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM connector.
• Connect SST (adapter harness) to DSC HU/
CM connector (harness side only).
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between DSC HU/CM
terminal C (harness side) of SST and
ground.
• Is voltage B+?
VERIFY FAIL-SAFE OPERATION
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Remove SST (adapter harness) and connect
all disconnected connectors.
• Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Access ABS_POWER using WDS or
equivalent.
• Does fail-safe relay operate?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace fuse, then go to Step 4.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between battery
positive terminal and DSC HU/CM terminal C, then go to
Step 4.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1194, C1198, C1210, C1214, C1242, C1246, C1250, C1254, C1400, C1410, C1957, C1958

End Of Sie

C 1210
C 1214
C 1194
C 1198
C 1246
C 1254
DTC
C 1242
C 1250
C 1400
C 1410
C 1957
C 1958
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W15

RF pressure reduction solenoid valve
RF pressure retention solenoid valve
LF pressure reduction solenoid valve
LF pressure retention solenoid valve
RR pressure reduction solenoid valve
RR pressure retention solenoid valve
LR pressure reduction solenoid valve
LR pressure reduction solenoid valve
RF traction switch solenoid valve
LF traction switch solenoid valve
RF DSC switch solenoid valve
LF DSC switch solenoid valve
• Solenoid monitor signal does not track in response to solenoid ON/OFF command.
• Stuck solenoid valve in DSC HU/CM

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.

P87

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above.
• Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
• Is same DTC present?
3
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

DTC C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952, C1959

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

A6E697367650W17

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.

P88

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC

C1280, C1730, C1951, C1952, C1959 Combine sensor
• C1280:
Yaw rate sensor part 0-point correction value is 3 or more, or 2 or less.
Output voltage value from yaw rate sensor part remains absolutely unchanged.
Difference between estimated yaw rate value, calculated from wheel speed-sensor, lateral-G
sensor, steering angle sensor, and the value output from yaw rate sensor exceeds specification.
• C1730
Voltage to combine sensor is detected out of range.
• C1952:
DETECTION
Voltage of yaw rate sensor monitor is detected at 3.5 V or less.
CONDITION
• C1951:
Monitor voltage of lateral-G sensor is detected at 4.5 V or more, or 0.5 V or less.
Monitor voltage difference of 1.25 V or more, within 1 cycle is detected 8 times in 1 second.
• C1959:
Lateral-G sensor part 0-point correction value is 3 or more, or 2 or less.
Output voltage value from lateral-G sensor part remains absolutely unchanged.
Difference between estimated lateral-G force calculated from steering angle sensor, and the value
output from lateral-G sensor exceeds specification.
• Open circuit in harness between combine sensor terminal C and DSC HU/CM terminal P
• Open, short to power, or short to ground circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal T and
Combine sensor terminal D
• Open circuit, short to power, or short to ground in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal O and
POSSIBLE
combine sensor terminal B
CAUSE
• Open circuit in harness between combine sensor terminal E and DSC HU/CM terminal Y
• Open circuit, short to power, or short to ground in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal S and
combine sensor terminal F
• Malfunction of combine sensor

P89

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT COMBINE SENSOR POWER
SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between combine sensor
terminal C (harness side) of and ground.
• Is voltage 4.55.5 V?
2
INSPECT COMBINE SENSOR GROUND
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM and yaw rate
sensor connectors.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal Y (harness side) and combine
sensor terminal E (harness side).
• Is there continuity?
3
INSPECT YAW RATE SENSOR PART SIGNAL
CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal T (harness side) and combine
sensor terminal D (harness side).
• Is there continuity?
4
INSPECT LATERAL-G SENSOR PART
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal O (harness side) and combine
sensor terminal B (harness side).
• Is there continuity?
5
INSPECT YAW RATE SENSOR PART SIGNAL
CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal T (harness side) and ground.
• Is there continuity?
6
INSPECT LATERAL-G SENSOR PART
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal O (harness side) and ground.
• Is there continuity?
7
INSPECT DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT FOR OPEN
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal S (harness side) and combine
sensor terminal F.
• Is there continuity?
8
INSPECT DIAGNOSIS SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal S (harness side) and combine
sensor terminal F.
• Is there continuity?
9
INSPECT COMBINE SENSOR
• Inspect combine sensor.
(See P43 COMBINE SENSOR
INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
10
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
11
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

P90

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between yaw rate
sensor terminal C and ignition switch, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal Y and yaw rate sensor terminal E, then go
to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal T and yaw rate sensor terminal D, then go
to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal O and combine sensor terminal B, then go
to Step 8.

Yes

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between DSC HU/CM terminal T and combine sensor
terminal D, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between DSC HU/CM terminal O and combine sensor
terminal B, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal S and combine sensor terminal F, then go
to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between DSC HU/CM terminal S and combine sensor
terminal F, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace yaw rate sensor, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC C1414
End Of Sie

DTC C1414
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W16

DSC HU/CM mismatched installation
• Detection of situation where vehicle-type or drive system input signal and DSC HU/CM information
remains incongruent through CAN information
• Mismatched installation of DSC HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DSC HU/CM FOR MISMATCHED
INSTALLATION
• Verify DSC HU/CM part number
• Has a DSC HU/CM with the correct part
number been installed?
2
INSPECT RELATED WIRING HARNESS FOR
MISMATCHED INSTALLATION
• Verify wiring harness part number
• Has a wiring harness with the correct part
number been installed?
3
Configulate ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
• Can DSC HU/CM configulate properly?
4

VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Make sure to reconnected all disconnect
connectors.
• Clear DTC from memory.
See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace with correct DSC HU/CM part number, then go to
Step 7.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace with correct DSC HU/CM part number, then go to
next Step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace DSC HU/CM
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

P
Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1507, C1508
End Of Sie

DTC

C1507
C1508

DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E697367650W20

DSC control
• C1507:
Brake TCS or DSC controls continue operation for 20 seconds or more.
• C1508:
Engine TCS control continues operation for 60 seconds or more.
• System is normal
For protection of solenoid valves in the DSC HU/CM, or protection of the engine, sustained and
continual control of DSC and TCS is inhibited.

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Inspect intermittent concern using the same procedure as
engine control system.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

P91

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC C1510, C1511, C1512, C1513
C1510
C1511
DTC
C1512
C1513
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

•
•
•
•
•
•

A6E697367650W21

RF solenoid valve, motor or RF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
LF solenoid valve, motor or LF wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
RR solenoid valve, motor or RR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
LR solenoid valve, motor or LR wheel-speed sensor/sensor rotor
Wheel lock is detected during ABS operation (pressure reduction inoperative).
Pressure reduction on a single wheel continues for 20 seconds or more.
Malfunction of solenoid valve in DSC HU/CM
Malfunction of wheel-speed sensor
Damaged sensor rotor
Stuck pump motor in DSC HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY OTHER DTC HAS BEEN RECORDED
• Has any wheel speed sensor, sensor rotor,
solenoid valve, pump motor, or motor relay
related DTC been output?
2
INSPECT DSC HU/CM OPERATION
• Perform DSC HU/CM system inspection.
See P35 DSC SYSTEM INSPECTION
• Is it okay?
3
VERIFY CURRENT STATUS OF
MALFUNCTION
• Clear DTC from memory.
See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures
• Start engine and drive vehicle at 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} or above at least one minute.
• Gradually slow down and stop vehicle.
• Is same DTC present?
4
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

DTC C1953, C1954
End Of Sie

A6E697367650W18

DTC

C1953, C1954
Brake fluid pressure sensor
• C1953:
Monitor voltage of the brake fluid pressure sensor is detected at 4.5 V or more, or 0.5 V or less.
Monitor voltage difference of 0.4 V or more within 1 cycle is detected 8 times in 1 second.
DETECTION
• C1954:
CONDITION
Brake fluid pressure sensor 0-point correction value is 0.3 V or less, or 0.9 V or more.
Output voltage value from brake fluid pressure sensor does not increase above 0.06 V.
Difference between estimated brake pressure value and output value of brake fluid pressure sensor
exceeds specification.
POSSIBLE
• Malfunction of brake fluid pressure sensor
CAUSE

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT BRAKE FLUID PRESSURE
SENSOR
• Inspect PID/DATA in brake fluid pressure
sensor.
• Inspect MCYLIP item using WDS or
equivalent.
• Is pressure value change between 022.5
MPa when brake pedal is pressed?
2
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
3
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?
End Of Sie

P92

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair DSC HU/CM.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC C1955, C1956

A6E697367650W19

Caution
• When attaching the tester lead to the DSC HU/CM connector the SST (49 G066 004) must be used.
DTC

C1955, C1956
Steering angle sensor
• C1955:
Output voltages from steering angle sensors 1 and 2 are not at 1 V or less, or not at 3.25 V or
more.
DETECTION
• C1956:
CONDITION
Sensor 1 voltage remains unchanged, sensor 2 voltage changes.
Sensor 2 voltage remains unchanged, sensor 1 voltage changes.
When steering wheel is turned in specified direction, neutral position is detected even when rotated
at 18 degrees or more.j
• Open circuit in harness between steering angle sensor terminal A and ignition switch
• Open, short to power, or short to ground circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal X and
steering angle sensor terminal B
• Open, short to power, or short to ground circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal W and
POSSIBLE
steering angle sensor terminal C
CAUSE
• Open, short to power, or short to ground circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal U and
steering angle sensor terminal D
• Open circuit in harness between DSC HU/CM terminal Rand steering angle sensor terminal F
• Malfunction of steering angle sensor

P93

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT FOR OPEN
CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between steering angle
sensor terminal A (harness side) and ground.
• Is voltage B+?
2
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
GROUND CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM and steering angle
sensor connectors.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal R (harness side) and steering angle
sensor terminal F (harness side).
• Is there continuity?

P94

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between steering
angle sensor terminal A and ignition switch, then go to Step
7.

Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal R and steering angle sensor terminal F,
then go to Step 7.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR OPEN CIRCUIT
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal (harness side) and steering angle
sensor terminal (harness side) below.
Sensor 1: DSC HU/CM X and steering
angle sensor B
Sensor 2: DSC HU/CM W and steering
sensor C
Neutral: DSC HU/CM U and steering
angle sensor D
• Is there continuity?
4
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO POWER
• Turn ignition key to ON (engine OFF).
• Measure voltage between DSC HU/CM
terminal (harness side) and ground below.
Sensor 1: DSC HU/CM X and ground
Sensor 2: DSC HU/CM W and ground
Neutral: DSC HU/CM U and ground
• Is voltage B+?
5
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
SIGNAL CIRCUIT FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition key to OFF.
• Inspect continuity between DSC HU/CM
terminal (harness side) and ground below.
Sensor 1: DSC HU/CM X and ground
Sensor 2: DSC HU/CM W and ground
Neutral: DSC HU/CM U and ground
• Is there continuity?
6
INSPECT STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
• Inspect steering angle sensor.
(See P44 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
7
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
8
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No

Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace harness for open circuit between DSC
HU/CM terminal and steering angle sensor terminal, then go
to Step 7.

Repair or replace harness for short to power circuit between
DSC HU/CM terminal and steering angle sensor terminal,
then go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Repair or replace harness for short to ground circuit
between DSC HU/CM terminal and steering angle sensor
terminal, then go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace steering angle sensor, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

P95

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC (DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DTC U2021

A6E697367650W22

Note
• To warm up the engine completely, idle the engine and wait for more than 5 minutes.
DTC U2021
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK WHETHER ENGINE HAS WARMED
UP
• Has engine warmed up?
2

End Of Sie

P96

VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER ENGINE IS WARMED UP
• Warm up the engine.
• Is DSC indicator light also illuminated and
DTC C1119 obtained?
VERIFY TROUBLESHOOTING COMPLETED
• Clear DTC from memory.
(See P46 Clearing DTCs Procedures)
• Is same DTC present?
VERIFY AFTER REPAIR PROCEDURE
• Is there any other DTC present?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Warm up the engine.
If DSC OFF light goes out, system is normal.
Go to DTC C1119 chart.
If DSC OFF light goes out, system is normal.
If DSC OFF light does not go out, go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Troubleshooting completed.

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
SYSTEM WIRING DIAGRAM

A6E699067650W01

ABS (ABS/TCS)

A6E6921T001
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

IG switch
SUS 15 A fuse
ABS 60 A fuse
Meter
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light
TCS OFF light
TCS indicator light
CAN driver
Brake light

11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Cruise actuator
TCS OFF switch
DLC-2
CAN-H
CAN-L
ABS Wheel-speed sensor
Battery
Brake switch
Audio unit, Wiper and washer switch, Car-navigation
unit, Auto leveling control unit

P97

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
DSC

A6E6920T005
.

1
2
3
4
5
6

IG switch
SUS 15A fuse
ABS 60 A fuse
Meter
ABS warning light
Brake system warning light

P98

7
8
9
10
11
12

DSC OFF light
DSC indicator light
CAN driver
Battery
Cruise actuator
DSC OFF switch

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
13
14
15
16
17
18

DLC-2
CAN-H
CAN-L
Wheel-speed sensor
Combine sensor
Steering angle sensor

19
20
21
22
23

Brake switch
Brake light
Back-up light switch (MTX only)
Back-up light
Audio unit, Wiper and washer switch,
Car-navegation unit, Auto leveling control unit

FOREWORD
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W02

• Before performing the steps in Symptom Troubleshooting, perform the On-board Diagnostic Inspection. To
check the DTC, follow the DTC Inspection steps.
PRECAUTION
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W03

Vehicles with ABS/TCS
1. The ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, TCS indicator light and/or TCS OFF light illuminate even
when the system is normal.
Warning lights that may
illuminate and/or flash
Any or all the following light(s)
illuminate:
• ABS warning light
• BRAKE system warning
light(*1)

All the following lights
illuminate:
• ABS warning light
• BRAKE system warning
light

Cases in which the light may
illuminate
Under any of the following
conditions:
• When the front wheels are
jacked up, stuck, or placed
on a chassis roller, and
only the front wheel ABS
wheel speed sensors are
spun for more than 60
seconds.
Parking brake is not fully
released while driving.
Brake drag.
Sudden acceleration/
deceleration.
Left/right or front/rear tires are
different. (Size, radius, tire
pressure, or wear is other than
that listed on tire label.)
Battery voltage at ABS-TCS
HU/CM ignition terminal Z
drops below about 9 to 10
V.(*2)

Conditions in which the
light will go out
After turning ignition switch
OFF, vehicle is driven at
speed greater than 10 km/h
{6.2 mph} and normal
operation is confirmed.

ABS, EBD, TCS and DSC
control
• ABS: Cuts control.
• EBD:
1. Cuts control, in cases
where the light may
illuminate, only when ABS
CM detects that a wheel
speed sensor determines
that more than the two rear
wheels are malfunctioning.
2. Operates control, if wheel
speed sensor determines
that more than 3 wheels
are functioning correctly.

Battery voltage rises abobe
ABS: Operates control.
about 10 V.
EBD: Operates control.
(Only BRAKE system warning
light goes out.)

: In cases where the light may illuminate, only when ABS/TCS HU/CM detects that speed sensor of rear wheel
is malfunctioning.
*2 : If battery voltage drops below 9 V while vehicle speed is greater than 6 km/h{3.7mph}, ABS HU/CM records
DTC B1318.

P99

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Warning lights that may
illuminate and/or flash
All the following lights
illuminate:
• TCS OFF light

Cases in which the light may
illuminate
When the engine coolant
temperature is below
0°°C {32 F}.(*2)

Conditions in which the
light will go out
When engine is started and
engine coolant temperature
rises above 0°°C {32 F}.)

All the following lights flash:
• ABS warning light
• BRAKE system warning
light
Following light illuminates:
• TCS OFF light

When confirming DTC,PID/
When ABS ON-BOARD
DATA and ACTIVE COMAND DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM is
MODES item using WDS or
released.
equivalent.

ABS, EBD, TCS and DSC
control
ABS: Cuts control.
EBD: Cuts control.
TCS:
1. If TCS is operating, cuts
control after gradually
released TCS control
value.
2. If TCS is not operating,
cuts control.
ABS: Cuts control.
EBD: Cuts control.
TCS: Cuts control.

1 : DTC U2021 for past malfunction is not recorded in the ABS/TCS HU/CM. DTC U2021 for present malfunction
displayed, but goes out when engine coolant temperature rises above 0°°C {32F}.
*2 : When malfunctions happen that display DTCs, flashes the ABS warning light.
2. Precautions during servicing of ABS/TCS
The ABS/TCS is composed of electrical and mechanical parts.It is necessary to categorize malfunctions as
being either electrical or hydraulic when performing troubleshooting.
(1) Malfunction in electrical system
• The ABS/TCS hydraulic unit and control module (ABS/TCS HU/CM) has an on-board diagnostic
function. With this function, the ABS warning light and/or BRAKE system warning light will come on
when there is a problem in the electrical system. Also, past and present malfunctions are recorded in
the ABS/TCS HU/CM. This function can find malfunctions that do not occur during periodic inspections.
Connect the WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2. The stored malfunction will be displayed in the order of
occurrence. To find out the causes of ABS/TCS malfunction, use these on-board diagnostic results.
• If malfunction occurred in the past but is now normal, the cause is likely a temporary poor connection of
the harness. The ABS/TCS HU/CM usually operates normally. Be careful when searching for the cause
of malfunction.
• After repair, it is necessary to clear the
DTC from the ABS/TCS HU/CM memory. Also, if the ABS/TCS related parts have been replaced, verify
that the no DTC has been displayed after repairs.
• After repairing the ABS wheel-speed sensor or ABS sensor rotor, or after replacing the ABS CM (ABS
motor or ABS motor relay or solenoid valve), the ABS warning light may not go off (*) even when the
ignition switch is turned on. In this case, drive the vehicle at a speed of more than 10km/h{6.2mph},
make sure that ABS warning light goes off, and then clear the DTC.
* The BRAKE system warning light also illuminates when any rear wheel malformations.
• When repairing, if the ABS/TCS related connectors are disconnected and the ignition switch is turned
on, the ABS/TCS CM will mistakenly detect a fault and record it as a malfunction.
• To protect the ABS/TCS HU/CM, make sure the ignition is off before connecting or disconnecting the
ABS/TCS CM connector.
• To protect the terminal, use the SST (ABS/TCS: 49 G066 001, DSC: 49 G066 004) when connecting
the tester lead to the ABS/TCS HU/CM connector.
(2) Malfunction in hydraulic system
• Symptom in hydraulic system malfunction are similar to those in conventional brake malfunction.
However, it is necessary to determine if the malfunction is in an ABS component or the conventional
brake system.
• The ABS hydraulic unit contains delicate mechanical parts. If foreign materials get into the component,
the ABS may fail to operate. Also, it will likely become extremely difficult to find the location of the
malfunction in the event that the brakes operate but the ABS does not. Make sure foreign materials do
not get inside when servicing the ABS (e.g. brake fluid replacement, pipe removal).

P100

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Vehicle with DSC
1. The ABS warning light and/or BRAKE system warning light and/or DSC indicator light and/or TSC OFF light
illuminate even when the system is normal.
Warning lights that may
illuminate and/or flash
• ABS warning light
• BRAKE system warning
light
• DSC indicator light
• DSC OFF light

• Brake system warning
light
• DSC indicator light
• TSC OFF light

Cases in which the light may
illuminate
Under any of the following
conditions:
• When the front wheels are
jacked up, struck, or
placed on a chassis roller,
and only the front wheel
ABS wheel speed sensors
are spun for more than 60
senconds.
Parking brake is not fully
released while driving.
Brake drag.
Sudden
acceleration/deceleration.
Left/right or front/rear tires are
different. (Size, radius, tire
pressure, or wear is other than
that listed on tire label.)
Battery voltage at DSC HU/
CM ignition terminal drops
below about 9.5 V.
Brake fluid amount is low.

Conditions in which the
light will go out
After turning ignition switch
OFF, vehicle is driven at
speed greater than 10 km/h
{6.2MPH} and normal
operation is confirmed.

ABS, EBD, TCS and DSC
control
• ABS: Cuts control.
• EBD: Cuts control.
• TCS: Cuts control.
• DSC: Cuts control.

Battery voltage rises above
about 9.5 V.

ABS: Operates control.
EBD: Operates control.
TCS: Operates control.
DSC: Operates control.
ABS: Operates control.
EBD: Operates control.
TCS: Cuts control.
DSC: Cuts control.

Brake fluid level lower than
recommended amount.

2. Precautions during servicing of DSC The DSC is composed of electrical and mechanical parts. It is necessary
to categorize malfunctions as being either electrical or hydraulic when performing troubleshooting.
(1) Malfunction in electrical system
• The control module has an on-board diagnostic function. With this function, the ABS warning light and/
or BRAKE system warning light and/or DSC indicator light and/or TSC OFF light will come on when
there is a problem in the electrical system.
Also, past and present malfunction are recorded in the control module. This function can find
malfunction that do not occur during periodic inspections. Connect the WDS or equivalent to the DLC-2.
The stored malfunction will be displayed in the order of occurrence. To find out the causes of DSC
malfunction, use these on-board diagnostic results.
• If a malfunction occurred in the past but is now normal, the cause is likely a temporary poor connection
of the harness.
The control module usually operates normally. Be careful when searching for the cause of malfunction.
• After repair, it is necessary to clear the DTC from the control module memory.
Also, if the DSC related parts have been replaced, verify that the no DTC has been displayed after
repairs.
• After repairing the ABS wheel-speed sensor or ABS sensor rotor, or after replacing the control module,
the ABS warning light may not go off even when the ignition switch is turned on. In this case, drive the
vehicle at a speed of more than 10 km/h {6.2 mph}, make sure the ABS warning light goes off, and
then clear the DTC.
• When repairing, if the DSC related connectors are disconnected and the ignition switch is turned on,
the control module will mistakenly detect a fault and record it as malfunction.
Caution
• In DSC vehicles, when any DSC HU/CM, steering angle sensor, lateral-G sensor, yaw rate sensor
are replaced. Perform the sensor standard point installation of each sensor.
• To protect the control module, make sure the ignition is off before connecting or disconnecting the
control module connector.
• To protect the terminal, use the SST (ABS/TCS: 49 G066 001, DSC: 49 G066 004) when connecting
the tester lead to the DSC HU connector.

P101

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
(2) Malfunction in hydraulic system
• Symptom in hydraulic system malfunction are similar to those in a conventional brake malfunction.
However, it is necessary to determine if the malfunction is in a DSC component or the conventional
brake system.
• The hydraulic unit contains delicate mechanical parts. If foreign materials get into the component, the
DSC may fail to operate. Also, it will likely become extremely difficult to find the location of the
malfunction in the event that the brakes operate but the DSC does not. Make sure foreign materials do
not get inside when servicing the DSC (e.g.brake fluid replacement, pipe removal).
Intermittent Concern Troubleshooting
Vibration method
• If malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating, perform the
steps below.
Note
• There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical malfunction. Check
the following:
Connectors not fully seated.
Wire harnesses not having full play.
Wires laying across brackets or moving parts.
Wires routed too close to hot parts.
• An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose harness can cause wiring to become pinched
between parts.
• The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wire harnesses pass through the firewall, body
panels, etc. are the major areas to be checked.
Inspection method for switch connectors or wires
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.
4. Turn switch on manually.
5. Shake each connector or wire harness a bit
vertically and horizontally while monitoring the
PID.
• If PID value is unstable, check for poor
connection.

YDE6980W003

Inspection method for sensor connectors or wires
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.

P102

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
4. Shake each connector or wire harness a bit
vertically and horizontally while monitoring the
PID.
• If PID value is unstable, check for poor
connection.

YDE6980W002

Inspection method for sensors
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to DLC-2.
2. Turn ignition key to ON (Engine OFF).
Note
• If engine starts and runs, perform the following steps at idle.
3. Access PIDs for the switch you are inspecting.
4. Vibrate the sensor slightly with your finger.
• If PID value is unstable or malfunction occurs, check for poor connection and/or poorly mounted sensor.
Malfunction data monitor method
1. Perform malfunction reappearance test according to malfunction reappearance mode and malfunction data
monitor. The malfunction cause is found in the malfunction data.
Malfunction data monitor using SST (ABS/TCS: 49 G066 001, DSC: 49 G066 004)

A6E6921W016

Connector terminal check method
1. Check the connection condition of each female terminal.
2. Insert male terminal; fit female terminal size to
female terminal and check to see whether
malfunction is in female terminal or not.

Y3E6980W001
End Of Sie

P103

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
SYMPTOM TROUBLESHOOTING
• Verify the symptoms, and perform troubleshooting according to the appropriate number.
Vehicles with ABS/TCS
No.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

A6E699067650W04

Symptom
ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, TCS OFF light do not illuminate with ignition switch on.
Neither ABS warning light nor BRAKE system warning light illuminate with ignition switch on.
ABS warning light does not illuminate with ignition switch on.
BRAKE system warning light does not illuminate with ginning switch on.
TCS OFF light and TCS indicator light do not illuminate with ignition switch on.
Both ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light stay on more than 4 seconds with ignition with on.
ABS warning light stays on more than 4 seconds with ingestion switch on.
BRAKE system warning light stays on more than 4 seconds with ignition switch on. (Parking brake is released.)
TCS OFF light stays on more than 4 seconds with ignition switch on.
TCS does not work correctly.
There is a malfunction in the system even through ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, TCS OFF
light,TCS indicator light do not illuminate.

Vehicles with DSC
No.
1

*1
*2

Symptom
Any of the following lights do not illuminate with ignition switch on.
• ABS warning light
• BRAKE system warning light
• DSC indicator light
• DSC OFF light
Any of the following lights stay on:
• ABS warning light.
• BRAKE system warning light
• DSC indicator light
• DSC OFF light
There is a malfunction in the system even though ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, DSC indicator
light and DSC OFF light do not illuminate.

ABS or TCS*1 operates frequently.
TCS does not work correctly.

DSC*2 operates frequently.
DSC does not work correctly.

: DSC system contains traction control function, DSC indicator light goes on and off while DSC operates.
: DSC indicator light goes on and off while DSC operates.

P104

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Vehicle with ABS/TCS

A6E6980W002

P105

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Vehicle with DSC

A6E6980W001
End Of Sie

P106

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.1 ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT, TCS OFF LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE
WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON

A6E699067650W05

Vehicle with ABS/TCS

ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, TCS OFF light do not illuminate with ignition switch
on.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Malfunction of instrument cluster or ABS/TCS HU/CM
• Improper configuration (instrument cluster)
1

STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
COMMON POWER SUPPLY, OR IN OTHER
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
• Do other warning and indicator lights
illuminate when IG switch is turned ON?
2
INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER
SUPPLY FUSE
• Is instrument cluster ignition power supply
fuse okay?
*3

VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER POWER SUPPLY AND
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR CONTINUITY)
OR INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Turn ignition switch ON.
• Measure voltage at instrument cluster
connector (24-pin ) terminal 2V.
• Is voltage approximately 12V?
COMFIRM DTC U1900 USING WDS OR
EQUIVALENT
• Retrieve DTC from PCM, ABS/TCS and
instrument cluster.
• Is DTC U1900 retrieved?
COMFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING
WDS OR EQUIVALENT:
• ABS_MSG
• PCM_MSG
• Is not present massage displayed on WDS
or equivalent?
COMFIRM DTC B2477 FOR INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER USING WDS OR EQUIVALENT
• Is DTC B2477 retrieved?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Go to next step.

Go to next step.
Check for a short to ground on blown fuses circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
Install appropriate amperage fuse.
Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Check for open circuit between instrment cluster and
ground.
Repair or replace as neccessary.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect instrment cluster. If OK, then go to step6.

Yes

Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Network communication, for related system is malfunction.
Repair or replace as neccessary.

Yes
No

Re-configure the instrument cluster.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM.

P107

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.2 NEITHER ABS WARNING LIGHT NOR BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT ILLUMINATE WITH
IGNITION SWITCH ON

A6E699067650W06

Neither ABS warning light nor BRAKE system warning light illuminate with ignition switch
on.

[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Malfunction of instrument cluster or ABS/TCS HU/CM
• Improper configuration (instrument cluster)
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
COMMON POWER SUPPLY, OR IN OTHER
WARNING LIGHTS AND INDICATOR LIGHTS
• Do other warning and indicator lights
illuminate when IG switch is turned ON?
2
INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER POWER
SUPPLY FUSE
• Is instrument cluster ignition power supply
fuse okay?
*3

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect instrment cluster. If OK, then go to step6.

Yes

Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Network communication, for related system is malfunction.
Repair or replace as neccessary.

Yes
No

Re-configure the instrument cluster.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM.

End Of Sie

P108

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.3 ABS WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON

A6E699067650W07

3
ABS warning light does not illuminate with ignition switch on.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Malfunction of instrument cluster or ABS/TCS HU/CM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
COMFIRM DTC U1900 USING WDS OR
EQUIVALENT
• Retrieve DTC from PCM, ABS/TCS and
instrument cluster.
• Is DTC U1900 retrieved?
2
COMFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING
WDS OR EQUIVALENT:
• ABS_MSG
• PCM_MSG
• Is not present massage displayed on WDS
or equivalent?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Inspect instrment cluster. If OK, then go to step6.

Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Network communication, for related system is malfunction.
Repair or replace as neccessary.

NO.4 BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W08

4
BRAKE system warning light does not illuminate with ignition switch on.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Malfunction of instrument cluster or ABS/TCS HU/CM
STEP
INSPECTION
1
COMFIRM DTC U1900 USING WDS OR
EQUIVALENT
• Retrieve DTC from PCM, ABS/TCS and
instrument cluster.
• Is DTC U1900 retrieved?
2
COMFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING
WDS OR EQUIVALENT:
• ABS_MSG
• PCM_MSG
• Is not present massage displayed on WDS
or equivalent?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Inspect instrment cluster. If OK, then go to step6.

Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Network communication, for related system is malfunction.
Repair or replace as neccessary.

End Of Sie

P109

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.5 TCS OFF LIGHT, TCS INDICATOR LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON

A6E699067650W09

5
TCS OFF light , TCS indicator light do not illuminate with ignition switch on.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Malfunction of instrument cluster or ABS/TCS HU/CM
• Improper configuration (ABS/TCS HU/CM)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2 ) FOR CONTINUITY AND
SHORTS
Activate TRAC_OFF (TCS OFF light) using
WDS or equivalent.
Is error message displayed regarding
communication between ABS/TCS CM and
WDS or equivalent?
2
CHECK TCS OFF LIGHT BULB FOR
MALFUNCTIONS BY USING INSPECTION
FUNCTION IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Activate TRAC_OFF (TCS OFF light) using
WDS or equivalent
Does TCS OFF light illuminate?
3
COMFIRM DTC U1900 USING WDS OR
EQUIVALENT
• Retrieve DTC from PCM, ABS/TCS and
instrument cluster.
• Is DTC U1900 retrieved?
4
COMFIRM THE FOLLOWING PIDs USING
WDS OR EQUIVALENT:
• ABS_MSG
• PCM_MSG
• Is not present massage displayed on WDS
or equivalent?
5
COMFIRM DTC B2477 FOR INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER USING WDS OR EQUIVALENT
• Is DTC B2477 retrieved?
*6
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR CONTINUITY
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and data link connector?
*7
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO B+
Is voltage approximately 12 V at SST
connector terminal X?
8
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
If there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and ground?

P110

ACTION
If a communication error message is displayed even after
inspecting according to procedures displayed on the WDS
or equivalent, go to Step 6.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to next step3.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect instrment cluster. If OK, then go to step6.

Yes

Replace instrument cluster (open circuit in instrument
cluster).
Network communication, for related system is malfunction.
Repair or replace as neccessary.

Yes

Yes
No

Re-configure the instrument cluster.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Go to next step.

No
Yes
No

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (communication circuit
malfunction in ABS/TCS HU/CM).

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP

INSPECTION

ACTION

P
• When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness and connectors while
doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If
there is a problem, check to make sure connectors, terminals and wiring harnesses are connected correctly
and undamaged.
NO.6 BOTH ABS WARNING LIGHT AND BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT STAY ON MORE THAN 4
SECONDS WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W10

Both ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light stay on more than 4 seconds with ignition
6
switch on.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• ABS/TCS HU/CM detects ABS proportioning system malfunction.
• ABS/TCS HU/CM detects low voltage in power supply (ABS/TCS CM ingestion terminal Z voltage is below about 9
to 10 V).
• ABS/TCS HU/CM does not operate.
• Malfunction of communication network.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT ABS/TCS HU/CM POWER SUPPLY
FUSE
Is ABS/TCS HU/CM ignition power supply fuse
okay?
2

ACTION
Yes

Go to next step.
Check for a short to ground on blown fuses circuit.
Repair or replace as necessary.
Install appropriate amperage fuse.
If a communication error message is displayed even after
inspecting according to procedure displayed on WDS or
equivalent, go to step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

No
Yes

P111

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT PID/DATA IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Inspect the following items using WDS or
equivalent PID/DATA monitor function.
• ABS_LAMP (ABS warning light)
• BRAKE_ LAMP (BRAKE system warning
light)
• ABS_VOLT (power supply voltage)
Is ABS_LAMP and BRAKE_LAMP ON after
more than 4 seconds with ignition switch on?
5
INSPECT ABS/TCS HU/CM IGNITION POWER
SUPPLY SYSTEM (TERMINAL Z)
Check the voltage for PID/DATA monitor
ABS_VOLT item.
Specification: about 10 V
Is voltage within specification?
6
INSPECT BATTERY
Is battery voltage normal?
7
*8

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
Is battery voltage normal with electrical load (A/
C, headlight, etc.) on and engine idling?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM POWER SUPPLY AND ABS/TCS
HU/CM FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect ABS/TCS HU/CM connector.
Connect the SST (49 G066 001) (vehicle
harness side only).
Is voltage approximately 12 V at SST
connector terminal Z?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM GROUND FOR CONTINUITY
Turn ignition switch to LOCK.
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal AC and ground?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (open or short in ground circuit in
ABS/TCS HU/CM)
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect battery and charging system.
Go to Step 7.
Inspect charging system (drive belt tension, generator, etc.).

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Check for connection of ABS/TCS HU/CM connector
securely.

Yes

If a malfunction error message is displayed on WDS or
equivalent in Step 1 inspection, go to next step.
If a malfunction error message is not displayed on WDS or
equivalent in Step 1 inspection, troubleshooting is
completed.
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
ground.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
DLC-2.

*10

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR CONTINUITY
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and DLC-2?

Yes
No

*INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN

Yes

ABS/TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO BATTERY
Is voltage approximately 12 V at SST
connector terminal X?
12

*INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN

ABS/TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Is there continuity between SST connector
Terminal X and DLC-2?

P112

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
DLC-2.
Go to next step.

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
DLC-2.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (communication circuit
malfunction in ABS/TCS HU/CM)

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP

INSPECTION

ACTION

P
NO.7 ABS WARNING LIGHT STAYS ON MORE THAN 4 SECONDS WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W11

7
ABS warning light stays on more than 4 seconds with ignition switch on.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• ABS/TCS CM detects ABS system malfunction.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR CONTINUITY AND
SHORTS
Perform DTC inspection.
Is error message displayed regarding
communication between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
WDS or equivalent?
2
CHECK FOR DTCs IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
3

INSPECT PID/DATA IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Inspect the following items using WDS or
equivalent PID/DATA monitor function.
• ABS_LAMP (ABS warning light)
Is ABS_LAMP ON after more than 4
seconds with ignition switch on?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect ABS/TCS HU/CM connector.
Connect the SST ( 49 G066 001) (vehicle
harness side only).
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and data link connector?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO B+
Is voltage approximately 12V at SST connector
terminal X?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
If the communication error message is displayed even after
inspecting according to procedures displayed in the WDS or
equivalent, go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (open circuit or short to ground in
ABS/TCS HU/CM).
Inspect instrment cluster.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Go to next step.

P113

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
STEP
*6

INSPECTION
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and ground?

Yes
No

ACTION
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (communication circuit
malfunction is ABS/TCS HU/CM).

A6E699067650W12

BRAKE system warning light stays on more than 4 seconds with ignition switch on. (Parking brake
8
is released.)
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Malfunction of instrment cluster or ABS/TCS HU/CM
• Short to ground in circuit in parking brake switch and/or brake fluid level sensor

Diagnostic procedure
1

INSPECT BRAKE FLUID LEVEL
Is brake fluid level okay?

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2 ) FOR CONTINUITY AND
SHORTS
Inspect the following items using WDS or
equivalent PID/DATA monitor function.
• BRAKE_LAMP(BRAKE system warning
light)
Is error message displayed regarding
communication between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
WDS or equivalent?
CHECK FOR DTCs IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?

P114

Yes
No
Yes

Go to next step.
Add brake fluid.
If a communication error message is displayed even after
inspecting according to procedures displayed on WDS or
equivalent.
Go to next step6.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
4

INSPECT PID/DATA IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Inspect (BRAKE system warning light) using
WDS or equivalent PID/DATA monitor function.
Is BRAKE_LAMP on after more than 4
seconds with ignition switch on?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
PARKING BRAKE SWITCH OR BRAKE FLUID
LEVEL SENSOR, OR IN SOME OTHER PART
Disconnect the following in order:
1. Parking brake switch connector
2. Brake fluid level sensor connector
Does BRAKE system warning light go out with
ignition switch on?

Yes

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR CONTINUITY
Disconnect ABS/TCS HU/CM connector.
Connect the SST ( 49 G066 001) (vehicle
harness side only).
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and data link connector?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO B+
Is voltage approximately 12 V at SST
connector terminal X?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal X and ground?

Yes
No

No
Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

Connect ABS/TCS HU/CM connector terminal X securely,
then go to next step.
Go to step 6.
Replace parking brake switch and/or brake fluid level sensor
(shorted on some internal part).
Perform the following inspections. Repair if necessary.
• Short to ground in wiring harness between instrument
cluster ( BRAKE system warning light) and parking
brake switch.
• Short to ground in wiring harness between instrument
cluster (BRAKE system warning light) and brake fluid
level sensor.
Inspect instrument cluster.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (communication circuit
malfunction in ABS/TCS HU/CM).

P115

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.9 TCS OFF LIGHT STAYS ON MORE THAN 4 SECONDS WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON

A6E699067650W13

BRAKE system warning light stays on more than 4 seconds with ignition switch on. (Parking brake
9
is released.)
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Warning light circuit open or shorted to ground in ABS/TCS HU/CM
1

2
3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR CONTINUITY AND
SHORTS
Perform DTC inspection.
Is error message displayed regarding
communication between ABS/TCS HU/CM and
WDS or equivalent?
CHECK FOR DTCS IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
INSPECT PID/DATA IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Inspect the following items using WDS or
equivalent PID/DATA monitor function.
• TRAC_SW (TCS OFF switch)
Is TRAC_SW ON displayed on WDS or
equivalent?
CHECK FOR SHORT TO GROUND IN ABS/
TCS HU/CM
Disconnect ABS/TCS HU/CM connector.
Does TCS OFF light go out with ignition switch
on?
INSPECT TCS OFF SWITCH
Disconnect TCS OFF switch connector.
Is TRAC_SW ON displayed on WDS or
equivalent?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN ABS/TCS HU/
CM AND TCS OFF SWITCH FOR SHORT TO
GROUND) OR ABS/TCS HU/CM
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal P and ground?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO B+
Is voltage approximately 12 V at SST
connector terminal T?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS/
TCS HU/CM AND DLC-2 (DATA LINK
CONNECTOR-2) FOR SHORT TO GROUND
Is there continuity between SST connector
terminal T and ground?

Yes
No

If a communication error message is displayed even after
inspecting according to procedures displayed on WDS or
equivalent, go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.
Go to Step 5 (TCS OFF switch system malfunction).
Go to next step.

Yes

Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (short to ground in ABS/TCS
HU/CM).
Inspect instrument cluster.

No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace TCS OFF switch (TCS will not turn off, even though
switch is OFF).

Yes

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM (terminal
P) and TCS OFF switch.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM (terminal
P) and data link connector.
Go to next step.

No
Yes
No

Repair wiring harness between ABS/TCS HU/CM and data
link connector.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM (communication circuit
malfunction in ABS/TCS HU/CM).

P116

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.10 TCS DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY

A6E699067650W14

10
TCS does not work correctly.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• There is difference in size or air pressure between the front and rear tires.
• There is malfunction in the engine control system.
• ABS/TCS HU/CM detects TCS system malfunction.

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK TIRE SIZE AND AIR PRESSURE
Inspect tire size and air pressure.
Are size and air pressure as specified?
2
CHECK FOR DTCS IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
3

CHECK FOR DTCS IN PCM
Check the DTC for the PCM ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
CHECK TO MAKE SURE TORQUE
REDUCTION SIGNAL GOING FROM ABS/TCS
HU/CM TO PCM IS BEING RECEIVED
CORRECTLY
Select ENG - TRQ (engine torque reduction
signal) using WDS or equivalent.
Increase the engine speed to 3,000 rpm.
Input 280 N·m ENG _ TRQ to PCM using WDS
or equivalent.
Does engine speed decrease?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace with specified tires or adjust tire air pressure.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.
Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

Yes

System is normal.
Recheck customer's complaint.
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM.

NO.11 THERE IS MALFUNCTION IN THE SYSTEM EVEN THOUGH ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT, TCS OFF LIGHT, TCS INDICATOR LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINTE
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W15

There is a malfunction in system even though ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, TCS
OFF light, TCS indicator light do not illuminate.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• There is a difference in size or air pressure between the front and rear tires
11

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR DTCs IN ABS/TCS HU/CM
Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
2

INSPECT ABS HYDRAULIC UNIT
Perform "ABS hydraulic unit system inspection".
Is system okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.
Inspect conventional brake system.
If wheels do not rotate:
Replace ABS/TCS HU/CM.
If wheels rotate but order in which wheels rotate is
incorrect:
Inspect brake pipe passage to ABS/TCS HU/CM.

NO.1 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS DO NOT ILLUMINATE WITH IGNITION SWITCH ON: (ABS
WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR DSC OFF LIGHT)
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W16

Any of the following lights do not illuminate with ignition switch on: (ABS warning light, BRAKE
1
system warning light, DSC indicator light and/or DSC OFF light).
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Check each light in the instrument cluster for malfunction.
• Poor connection at DSC HU/CM connector
• ABS warning light circuit or BRAKE system warning light circuit shorted out
(when harness is shorted out between DSC HU/CM and ABS warning light or BRAKE system warning light, each
warning lights go off.)
• DSC indicator light circuit and/or DSC OFF light circuit may be open.
(when DSC indicator light circuit and/or DSC OFF light circuit is open, each circuits warning lights go off.)

P117

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR DTCS IN DSC HU/CM
• Check the DTC for the DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
• Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
2
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN INSTRUMENT CLUSTER SYSTEM OR
OTHER SYSTEM
• Do other warning and indicator lights
illuminate when IG switch is turned ON?
3
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR IS
CONNECTED
• Is DSC HU/CM securely connected?
4

VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR
TERMINAL OR RELATED CONNECTOR
TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED
• Are DSC HU/CM connector terminal, or
instrument cluster connector terminal, or
related connector terminals securely
connected?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALUNCTION IS
IN DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND TCS OFF
LIGHT OR ABS WARNING LIGHT AND
BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
• If DSC indicator light and TCS OFF light do
not illuminate, go to Step 6.
• If ABS warning light and BRAKE system
warning light do not illuminate, go to Step 8.
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN DSC HU/CM OR OTHER
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM.
• Connect the DSC indicator light terminal and
DSC OFF light terminal to body ground.
• Do both indicator lights illuminate with
ignition switch on?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND DSC HU/CM
FOR CONTINUITY
• Is there continuity between each indicator
light terminals of instrument cluster and DSC
HU/CM connector terminal?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN DSC HU/CM OR OTHER
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM and turn ignition
switch on.
• Do ABS warning light and BRAKE system
warning lights illuminate with ignition switch
on?
(If above lights illuminate, both lights circuits
are normal.)
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND DSC HU/CM
FOR SHORT
• Is there continuity between each warning
light terminal of DSC HU/CM and ground?

End Of Sie

P118

Yes
No

ACTION
Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect or repair instrument cluster (power supply system,
ground system).

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Connect DSC HU/CM connector securely, then go to next
step.
Go to next step.
Connect DSC HU/CM connector terminal etc. related
connector terminal securely.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM (open in DSC HU/CM).
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Inspect or repair indicator light circuit in instrument cluster.
Repair malfunctioning part.

Yes
No

Replace DSC HU/CM (short in DSC HU/CM).
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair malfunctioning part.
Inspect or repair warning light circuit in instrument cluster.

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.2 ANY OF THE FOLLOWING LIGHTS STAY ON: (ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM WARNING
LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND/OR DSC OFF LIGHT)

A6E699067650W17

Any of the following lights stay on: (ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light, DSC indicator
light and/or DSC OFF light)
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• Brake fluid amount is low.
• Parking brake does not release.
• No connection at DSC HU/CM connector
(when DSC HU/CM connector comes off, ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light illuminate.)
• DSC HU/CM detected malfunction (input and output device malfunction)
• DSC HU/CM detects low voltage in power supply.
• DSC HU/CM ground malfunction
(when DSC HU/CM ground is not securely connected, ABS warning light and BRAKE system warning light
illuminate but diagnostic trouble code does not display)
• DSC HU/CM does not operate (DSC HU/CM malfunction.)
• DSC OFF light circuit shorted in ground (when DSC OFF circuit is shorted in ground, DSC OFF light illuminated.)
• ABS warning light circuit or BRAKE system warning light circuit open
(when the harness is open between DSC HU/CM and each warning light, each warning light illuminates)
2

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT BRAKE FLUID AMOUNT AND
VERIFY THAT PARKING BRAKE RELEASES
• Is brake fluid amount normal?
• Is parking brake lever released?
2
CHECK FOR DTCS IN DSC HU/CM
• Check the DTC for the DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
• Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
3
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN CONTROL MODULE CONNECTOR,
TERMINAL OR OTHER
• Do ABS warning light and BRAKE system
warning light go off after 4 seconds with
ignition switch on?
4
INSPECT BATTERY
• Is battery voltage normal?
5
6

INSPECT CHARGING SYSTEM
• Is battery voltage normal with electrical load
(A/C, headlight, etc.) on and engine idling?
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR IS
CONNECTED
• Is DSC HU/CM securely connected?
VERIFY THAT DSC HU/CM CONNECTOR
TERMINAL OR RELATED CONNECTOR
TERMINALS ARE CONNECTED
• Are DSC HU/CM connector terminal or
instrument cluster connector terminal etc.
related connector terminals securely
connected?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND DSC HU/CM
FOR CONTINUITY
• Is there continuity between each warning
light terminal of instrument cluster and DSC
HU/CM connector terminal?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND DSC HU/CM
FOR SHORT IN GROUND
• Is there continuity between each indicator
light terminal of DSC HU/CM and ground?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Add brake fluid or release parking brake lever.

Yes
No

Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Temporary poor connection in control module connector.
Inspect DSC HU/CM connector, then go to Step 6.
Inspect DSC HU/CM connector terminal, then go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect battery and charging system.
Go to next step.
Inspect charging system (drive belt tension, generator, etc.).

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Connect DSC HU/CM connector securely, then go to next
step.
Go to next step.
Connect DSC HU/CM connector terminal etc. related
connector terminals securely.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair malfunctioning part.

Yes
No

Repair malfunctioning part.
Inspect power supply harness and ground harness of DSC
HU/CM.
If above wiring harness are okay, replace DSC HU/CM.
If above wiring harness are malfunctioning, repair
malfunctioning wiring harness.

End Of Sie

P119

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.3 THERE IS A MALFUNCTION IN THE SYSTEM EVEN THOUGH ABS WARNING LIGHT, BRAKE SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT AND DSC OFF LIGHT DO NOT ILLUMINATE

A6E699067650W18

There is a malfunction in the system even though ABS warning light, BRAKE system warning light,
DSC indicator light and DSC OFF light do not illuminate.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• There is mechanical malfunction in system.
3

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK DSC HU/CM FOR DTCs
• Check the DTC for the DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
• Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
2
INSPECT DSC SYSTEM
• Perform DSC system inspection.
• Is the system okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Inspect conventional brake system.
Repair or replace malfunctioning part.

NO.4 ABS OR TCS*1 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/TCS DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY*1: DSC SYSTEM
FUNCTION CONTAINS TRACTION CONTROL FUNCTION, DSC INDICATOR LIGHT GOES ON AND OFF
WHILE DSC OPERATES
End Of Sie

A6E699067650W19

ABS or TCS (*1) operates frequently./TCS does not work correctly.
(*1): DSC system function contains traction control function, DSC indicator light goes on and off
while DSC operates.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• There is difference in size or air pressure between the front and rear tires.
• Incorrect ABS wheel-speed signal is inputted to DSC HU/CM.
• There is malfunction in the engine control system (TCS malfunction.)
4

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR DTCS IN DSC HU/CM
• Check the DTC for the DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
• Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
2
CHECK TIRE SIZE AND AIR PRESSURE
• Inspect tire size and air pressure.
• Are size and air pressure as specified?
3
INSPECT ABS WHEEL-SPEED SENSOR
OUTPUT PULSE
• Start engine and drive vehicle.
• Inspect output voltage pattern using WDS or
equivalent (oscilloscope).
• Is output voltage pattern okay?

End Of Sie

P120

Yes
No

ACTION
Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace with specified tires and adjust tire air pressure.

Yes

Found malfunctioning part according to INTERMITTENT
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING.
• ABS wheel-speed sensor installation inspection:
Inspect the sensor for looseness and confirm it is
securely adhered.
• Sensor rotor installation inspection:
Inspect the sensor rotor for poor installation and
chipping of sensor rotor teeth. (If sensor rotor is installed
poorly, it may cause output of abnormal wave form at
high speed.)

TROUBLESHOOTING (ABS/TCS/DYNAMIC STABILITY CONTROL)
NO.5 DSC*2 OPERATES FREQUENTLY/DSC DOES NOT WORK CORRECTLY*2: DSC INDICATOR LIGHT
GOES ON AND OFF WHILE DSC OPERATES

A6E699067650W20

DSC (*2) operates frequently. /DSC does not work correctly.
(*2): DSC indicator light goes on and off while DSC operates.
[TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS]
• DSC HU/CM detected malfunction (input and output device malfunction)
• Poor installation with combine sensor and/or steering angle sensor
(If any of the above sensors are poorly installed, DSC may operate intermittently.)
• When replacing DSC HU/CM, combine sensor or steering angle sensor, initialization is not performed.
(If initialization is not performed correctly, DSC may not work correctly.)
5

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK DSC HU/CM FOR DTCs
• Check the DTC for the DSC ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC SYSTEM.
• Have DTCs been recorded in memory?
2
VERIFY THAT EACH SENSOR IS INSTALLED
• Are yaw rate sensor, lateral-G sensor and
steering angle sensor securely installed?
*3
VERIFY THAT EACH SENSOR IS INITIALIZED
• Did each sensor initialize after replacement
of DTC unit, yaw rate sensor, lateral-G
sensor or steering angle sensor?

Yes
No

ACTION
Perform inspection using appropriate DTC.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Install malfunctioning sensor securely.

Yes

Find malfunctioning part according to INTERMITTENT
CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING.
Perform initialization.

End Of Sie

P121

SUSPENSION

LOCATION INDEX .................................................R-2
FRONT SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX.........R-2
REAR SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX ...........R-3
GENERAL PROCEDURES ....................................R-4
PRECAUTION (SUSPENSION) ..........................R-4
WHEEL ALIGNMENT.............................................R-4
WHEEL ALIGNMENT PRE-INSPECTION...........R-4
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.............................R-5
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT ...............................R-6
WHEEL AND TIRE .................................................R-7
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT
(16 INCH AND 17 INCH
ALUMINUM ALL WHEEL) ................................R-7
FRONT SUSPENSION ...........................................R-9
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND
SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...............R-9
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
INSPECTION ..................................................R-12
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
DISPOSAL ......................................................R-12
FRONT UPPER ARM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-13
FRONT UPPER ARM INSPECTION .................R-14
FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-15
FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT)
INSPECTION ..................................................R-18
FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-19
FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR)
INSPECTION ..................................................R-21
FRONT STABILIZER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-22
STABILIZER CONTROL LINK
INSPECTION ..................................................R-23
FRONT CROSSMEMBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-23
TRANSVERSE MEMBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-27
REAR SUSPENSION ...........................................R-28
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-28
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
INSPECTION ..................................................R-28
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
DISPOSAL ......................................................R-28
REAR COIL SPRING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-29
REAR LOWER ARM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-30
REAR UPPER ARM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-31
REAR LATERAL LINK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-33
REAR STABILIZER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................R-34
STABILIZER CONTROL
LINK INSPECTION .........................................R-35

TRAILING LINK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................R-35
REAR CROSSMEMBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................R-37

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
FRONT SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX

A6E740001015W01

A6E7414W033
.

1
2

Front shock absorber and coil spring
(See R9 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND
SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Front shock absorber
(See R12 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
INSPECTION)
(SeeR12 FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER
DISPOSAL)
Front upper arm
(See R13 FRONT UPPER ARM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See R14 FRONT UPPER ARM INSPECTION)
Front lower arm (front)
(See R15 FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See R18 FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT)
INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

6
7
8
9

Front lower arm (rear)
(See R19 FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR)
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See R21 FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR)
INSPECTION)
Front stabilizer
(See R22 FRONT STABILIZER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Stabilizer control link
(See R23 STABILIZER CONTROL LINK
INSPECTION)
Front crossmember
(See R23 FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Transverse member
(See R27 TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
REAR SUSPENSION LOCATION INDEX

A6E740001016W01

A6E7416W016
.

2
3
4

Rear shock absorber
(SeeR28 REAR SHOCK ABSORBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See R28 REAR SHOCK ABSORBER
INSPECTION)
(See R28 REAR SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL)
Rear coil spring
(SeeR29 REAR COIL SPRING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear upper arm
(SeeR31 REAR UPPER ARM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear lower arm
(SeeR30 REAR LOWER ARM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

5
6
7
8
9

Rear lateral link
(SeeR33 REAR LATERAL LINK REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Trailing link
(SeeR35 TRAILING LINK REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear stabilizer
(SeeR34 REAR STABILIZER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Stabilizer control link
(SeeR35 STABILIZER CONTROL LINK
INSPECTION)
Rear crossmember
(SeeR37 REAR CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

GENERAL PROCEDURES , WHEEL ALIGNMENT

GENERAL PROCEDURES
PRECAUTION (SUSPENSION)
Wheels and Tires Removal/Installation
1. When a wheel is installed, tighten it to
88118 N·m {9.012.0 kgf·m, 65.087.0 ft·lbf}.

A6E741001013W01

Suspension Links Removal/Installation
1. Tighten any part of the suspension that uses rubber bushings only after the vehicle has been lowered and
unloaded.
Note
• Unloaded: Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified levels. Spare tire, jack and tools
are in designated position.
Brake Lines Disconnection/Connection
Caution
• Brake fluid will damage painted surfaces. If brake fluid does get on a painted surface, wipe it off
immediately.
1. Tighten the brake pipe flare nut using the SST (49 0259 770B). Be sure to modify the brake pipe flare nut
tightening torque to allow for use of a torque wrench-SST combination.
(See GI16 TORQUE FORMULAS.)
2. If any brake line has been disconnected anytime during the procedure, add brake fluid, bleed the brakes, and
inspect for leakage after the procedure has been completed.
Power Steering Components Removal/Installation
1. If any power steering fluid line has been disconnected anytime during the procedure, add ATF M-III or
equivalent (e.g. Dexron®II), bleed the fluid line, and inspect for leakage after the procedure has been
completed.

End Of Sie

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
WHEEL ALIGNMENT PRE-INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A6E741201013W01

Inspect the tire inflation, and adjust to the recommended pressure as necessary.
Inspect the front wheel bearing play and correct it if necessary. (See M4 Wheel Bearing Play Inspection.)
Inspect the wheel and tire runouts. (See TD8 SUSPENSION.)
Inspect the ball joints and steering linkage for excessive looseness.
Shake the vehicle to inspect the operation of the shock absorbers.

Note
• The vehicle must be on level ground and unloaded.
• Unloaded: Fuel tank is full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack and tools
are in designated position.
6. Measure the height from the center of the wheel
to the fender brim. The difference between the left
and right measurement must not exceed 10 mm
{0.39 in}.

A6E7412W001

End Of Sie

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT

A6E741201015W01

Specification (Unloaded)*1
Normal
Item
Total toe-in
Maximum steering angle

Empty
(mm {in})
(degree)
Inner
Outer

Caster angle*2 (reference value)

Fuel gauge indication
1/4
1/2
3/4
Tire: 2±4 {0.08±0.16}, Rim inner: 1±3 {0.04±0.12}
0°11′±0°22′
39°±3°
31°±3°

3°37'±1°

3°39'±1°

Camber angle*2(reference value)

3°41'±1°

3°44'±1°

Full

3°47'±1°

-0°16'±1°

-0°17'±1°

5°26'

5°28'

Steering axis inclination (reference value)

Elevated*3
Item
Total toe-in
Maximum steering angle

Empty
(mm {in})
(degree)
Inner
Outer

Caster angle*2 (reference value)

Fuel gauge indication
1/4
1/2
3/4
Tire: 2±4 {0.08±0.16}, Rim inner: 1±3 {0.04±0.12}
0°11′±0°22′
39°±3°
31°±3°

3°32'±1°

Camber angle*2(reference value)
Steering axis inclination (reference value)

3°34'±1°

3°36'±1°

3°39'±1°

Full

3°42'±1°

-0°09'±1°

-0°10'±1°

5°17'

5°18'

*1 : Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack and tools are in designated position.
*2 : Difference between left and right must not exceed 1°30'.
*3
: Distance between wheel center and fender brim is 402 mm {15.8 in} (reference value).
Maximum Steering Angle Adjustment
1. Loosen the tie-rod end locknuts.
2. Remove the steering gear boot clamp.
3. Turn the tie rods to equalize the length L.
Maximum left/right difference
3 mm {0.12 in}
4. Turn the tie rods equally to provide the correct
maximum steering angle.
5. Tighten the tie-rod end locknuts.
Tightening torque
68.698.0 N·m
{7.009.99 kgf·m, 50.672.2 ft·lbf}

A6E7412W002

6. Verify that the boot is not twisted, and install the boot clamp.
7. Adjust the toe-in after adjusting the steering angle.
Total Toe-in Adjustment
1. Center the steering wheel and confirm that the vehicle wheels/tires are pointing straight.
2. Loosen the left and right tie-rod end locknuts and turn the tie-rods equally. Both tie rods are right threaded, so
turning the right tie-rod toward the front of the vehicle and the left toward the rear increases toe-in.
Note
• Turning both tie-rods one complete turn changes toe-in by about 6 mm {0.24 in} (0°° 36').
3. Tighten the tie-rod end locknuts to the specified torque.
Tightening torque
68.698.0 N·m {7.009.99 kgf·m, 50.672.2 ft·lbf}
4. Verify that the boot is not twisted, and install the boot clamp.
End Of Sie

WHEEL ALIGNMENT
REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT

A6E741201016W01

Specification (Unloaded)*1
Normal
Item

Empty
(mm {in})
(degree)

Total toe-in
Camber angle*2
Thrust angle

1°05′±1°

Fuel gauge indication
1/4
1/2
3/4
Tire: 2±4 {0.08±0.16}, Rim inner: 1±3 {0.04±0.12}
0°11′±0°22′
1°07′±1°

(degree)

1°09′±1°

1°11′±1°

Full

1°13′±1°

0°±0°48′

Elevated*3
Item

Empty
(mm {in})
(degree)

Total toe-in
Camber angle*2
Thrust angle

0°56′±1°
(degree)

Fuel gauge indication
1/4
1/2
3/4
Tire: 2±4 {0.08±0.16}, Rim inner: 1±3 {0.04±0.12}
0°11′±0°22′
0°58′±1°

1°00′±1°

1°02′±1°

Full

1°05′±1°

0°±0°48′

*1 : Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack and tools are in designated position.
*2 : Difference between left and right must not exceed 1°30'.
*3 : Distance between wheel center and fender brim is 392 mm {15.4 in} (reference value).
Note
• Adjust the toe-in after adjusting the camber.
Camber Adjustment
1. Loosen the cam nut on the lower arm.
2. Turn the adjusting cam bolt to provide the correct
camber angles as indicated.
Left wheel
Positive direction

Clockwise

Negative direction

Counterclockwise

Right wheel
Counterclockwise
Clockwise

3. Tighten the cam nut.
Tightening torque
86.2116.6 N·m
{8.7911.88 kgf·m, 63.5885.99 ft·lbf}

A6E7412W003

Total Toe-in Adjustment
1. Loosen the locknut of the lateral link.

A6E7412W004

WHEEL ALIGNMENT, WHEEL AND TIRE
2. Adjust the toe-in turning the adjusting link.
Specification
Total Toe-in: 2±
±4 mm {0.08±
±0.16 in}
Note
• Toe change amount: 0°43′ / one rotation

A6E7412W005

3. Tighten the locknut.
Tightening torque
68.698.1 N·m
{7.010.0 kgf·m, 50.672.3 ft·lbf}

A6E7412W004

End Of Sie

WHEEL AND TIRE
WHEEL BALANCE ADJUSTMENT (16 INCH AND 17 INCH ALUMINUM ALLOY WHEEL)

A6E741701014W01

Caution
• Adjust the outer wheel balance first, then the inner wheel balance.
• Be careful not to scratch the wheels.
Adhesive-type Balance Weight (Outer)
1. Remove the old balance weight from the wheel.
2. Remove the double-sided adhesive tape remaining on the wheel, then clean and degrease the bonding area.
3. Set the wheel on a wheel balancer, measure the amount of unbalance and the position with the mode set for
knock-type balance weight.
4. Multiply the amount of unbalance by 1.6 to get the balance weight value.
5. Select a balance weight closest to the weight
value and attach the balance weight on the
position (outer) indicated by the wheel balancer.
Example calculation of balance weight value
Indicated amount of unbalance: 23 g
{0.81 oz}
23 g {0.81 oz}×
×1.6 = 36.8 g {1.30 oz}
Selected balance weight value: 35 g
{1.24 oz}
Note
• When selecting a balance weight, select one
closest to the calculated value.
Example: 32.4 g {1.14 oz}= 30 g {1.06 oz}, 32.5 g {1.15 oz}= 35 g {1.24 oz}

Z5U0212W101

Caution
• Use a genuine balance weight or equivalent (steel).
• When attaching the weight balance, press the balance weight with a force of 25 N {2.5 kgf, 5.5 lbf}
per 5 g for 2 seconds or more.

WHEEL AND TIRE
6. If attaching 2 balance weights, position them so
that each is on either side of the position indicated
by the wheel balancer.
Caution
• Do not attach weight balances in a row.
• Do not overlap the balance weights.
• Total weight must not exceed 160g
{5.65 oz}.

Z5U0212W102

Knock-type Balance Weight (Inner)
1. Measure the amount of unbalance with a wheel balancer.
2. Attach a balance weight corresponding to the
measured weight value on the position (inner)
indicated by the wheel balancer.
Caution
• Do not attach 3 or more balance weights.
• One balance weight must not exceed 60g
{2.12 oz}, and a total of 2 balance weights
must not exceed 100g {3.53 oz}.

Z5U0212W103

Remaining Amount of Unbalance Confirmation
1. After installing the outer and inner balance weights, operate the wheel balancer again.
2. Confirm that the remaining unbalance does not exceed followings on either side.
Outer
10 g {0.35 oz}
9 g {0.32 oz}

16 inch wheel
17 inch wheel

Inner
8 g {0.28 oz}
7 g {0.25 oz}

• If the remaining unbalance exceeds 10 g {0.35 oz} (16 inch wheel) or 9g {0.32 oz} (17 inch wheel), perform
wheel balance adjustment again.
Allowable remaining unbalance value (g)
Dynamic unbalance (at rim)
16 inch
wheel
17 inch
wheel

Outer

Inner

10 g {0.35 oz}
max.
9 g {0.32 oz}
max.

8 g {0.28 oz}
max.
7 g {0.25 oz}
max.

End Of Sie

Static
unbalance
(at rim)
13 g {0.46 oz}
max.
11 g {0.39 oz}
max.

FRONT SUSPENSION

FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER AND SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741404910W01

A6E7414W017
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Bolt (ABS wheel-speed sensor)
Bolt (brake hose bracket)
Nut (front stabilizer control link)
Bolt (front shock absorber lower side)
(See R10 Bolt (Front Shock Absorber Lower Side)
Removal Note)
Dynamic damper
Damper fork
(See R12 Damper Fork Installation Note)
Nut (front shock absorber upper side)

8
9
10
11
12
13
14

Front shock absorber and coil spring
(See R11 Front Shock Absorber and Coil Spring
Installation Note)
Piston rod nut
(See R10 Piston Rod Nut Removal Note)
Mounting rubber
Bound stopper
Dust boot
Coil spring
(See R10 Coil Spring Installation Note)
Front shock absorber

FRONT SUSPENSION
Bolt (Front Shock Absorber Lower Side) Removal Note
1. Support the knuckle with a jack to prevent from falling.
Piston Rod Nut Removal Note
Warning
• Removing the piston rod nut is dangerous. The shock absorber and spring could fly off under
tremendous pressure and cause serious injury or death. Secure the shock absorber in the SSTs
before removing the piston rod nut.
1. Protect the coil spring using a piece of cloth, then set the SSTs.
2. Compress the coil spring using the SSTs, and
remove the piston rod nut.

A6E7414W008

Coil Spring Installation Note
1. Temporarily install the coil spring, dust boot and mounting rubber on the shock absorber so that the lower end
of the coil spring is seated on the step of the lower spring seat.
2. Mark the coil spring, dust boot and mounting
rubber for proper installation as shown in the
figure.
3. Align the marks of the coil spring and dust boot.
Protect the coil spring and dust boot using a piece
of cloth, then set the SSTs.

A6E7414W039

R10

FRONT SUSPENSION
4. Compress the coil spring using the SSTs.
5. Install the shock absorber so that the lower end of
the coil spring is seated on the step of the lower
spring seat.
6. Make sure that the marks on the shock absorber
and dust boot are aligned.
7. Install the mounting rubber and piston rod nut,
then remove the SSTs.
Piston rod nut tightening torque
39.252.9 N·m
{4.005.39 kgf·m, 29.039.0 ft·lbf}

A6E7414W029

Front Shock Absorber and Coil Spring Installation Note
1. Install the stud bolts at a 27°33° angle from
where the stabilizer control link is installed (center
line), towards the inner side of the vehicle.

A6E7414W004

R11

FRONT SUSPENSION
Damper Fork Installation Note
1. Align the gap of the damper fork with the
projections of the damper.
2. Tighten the bolt.

A6E7414W005

End Of Sie

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E741434700W01

Remove the front shock absorber from the vehicle.
Inspect for damage and oil leakage.
Inspect the rubber bushing for deterioration and wear.
Compress and extend the shock piston at least three times. Verify that the operational force does not change
and that there is no unusual noise.
• If not as specified, replace the shock absorber.
(1) Compress the shock absorber piston and release it.
(2) Verify that the piston extends fully at a normal speed.

End Of Sie

FRONT SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL

A6E741434700W02

Warning
• Whenever drilling into a shock absorber, wear protective eye wear. The gas in the shock absorber
is pressurized, and could spray metal chips into the eyes and face when drilling.
1. Clamp a shock absorber on a flat surface or with the piston pointing downwards.
2. Drill a 23 mm {0.080.12 in} hole at a point
2030 mm {0.81.2 in} from the bottom of the
tube, so that the gas can escape.
3. Turn the hole downwards.
4. The oil can be collected by moving the piston rod
several times up and down and cutting the tube at
the end.
5. Dispose of waste oil according to the waste
disposal law.
Note
• Shock absorber gas is nitrogen gas.
• Shock absorber oil is mineral oil.

End Of Sie

R12

A6E7414W022

FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT UPPER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741434200W01

A6E7414W035
.

1
2
3
4

Bolt (ABS wheel-speed sensor)
Bolt (brake hose bracket)
Nut (stabilizer control link)
Front upper arm ball joint
(SeeR13 Front Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal
Note)

5
6
7
8
9

Bolt (front upper arm)
(See R14 Bolt (Front Upper Arm) Removal Note)
Front upper arm
Dynamic Damper
Clip
(See R14 Clip Installation Note)
Dust boot

Front Upper Arm Ball Joint Removal Note
1. Support the knuckle using the jack.

R13

FRONT SUSPENSION
2. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle using the
SST.

A6E7414W006

Bolt (Front Upper Arm) Removal Note
1. Remove the nuts (3 locations) from the upper part of the front shock absorber.
2. Pull the front shock absorber and coil spring out
of the way, towards the outer side of the vehicle.
3. Remove the bolts.

A6E7414W023

Clip Installation Note
1. Wipe the grease off the ball stud.
2. Fill the inside of the new dust boot with grease.
3. Install the boot on the ball joint.
4. Install the new clip using the SST.
5. Verify that the clip is installed securely to the
groove.
6. Wipe away the excess grease.

A6E7414W024

End Of Sie

FRONT UPPER ARM INSPECTION
1. Remove the upper arm from the vehicle.
2. Inspect for damage, cracks, and bending.
3. Inspect the ball joint rotation torque.
(1) Rotate the ball joint five times.
(2) Measure the rotation torque using a suitable
allen socket and a torque wrench.
• If not within the specification, replace the
lower arm component.

A6E741434200W02

Rotation torque
1.5 N·m {15.0 kgf·cm, 13.2 in·lbf} max.

A6E7414W043

R14

FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
End Of Sie

A6E741434300W01

1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7414W018
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Front lower arm (front) ball joint
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Bolt (front shock absorber lower side)
Dynamic damper
Bolt (front lower arm inner side)
Front lower arm (front) component
Clip
(See R18 Clip Installation Note)
Dust boot

Front lower arm (front) bushing (inner side)
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Inner
Side) Removal Note)
(See R17 Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Inner
Side) Installation Note)
Front lower arm (front) bushing (outer side)
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Outer
Side) Removal Note)
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Outer
Side) Installation Note)

R15

FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint Removal Note
1. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W030

Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Inner Side) Removal Note
1. Press the bushing (inner side) out using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W001

Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Outer Side) Removal Note
1. Press the bushing (outer side) out using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W010

Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Outer Side) Installation Note
1. Mark the new bushing as shown in the figure.

A6E7414W011

R16

FRONT SUSPENSION
2. Press the bushing in to the marking using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W012

3. Verify that clearance distance AB is 8.75 mm
10.75 mm {0.3445 in0.4232 in}.

A6E7414W003

Front Lower Arm (Front) Bushing (Inner Side) Installation Note
1. Mark the new bushing as shown in the figure.

A6E7414W013

2. Press the bushing in to the marking using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W002

R17

FRONT SUSPENSION
3. Verify that clearance distance AB is 12.75
mm14.75 mm {0.5020 in0.5807 in}.

A6E7414W007

A6E7414W025

End Of Sie

FRONT LOWER ARM (FRONT) INSPECTION
1. Remove the lower arm (front) from the vehicle.
2. Inspect for damage, cracks, and bending.
3. Inspect the ball joint rotation torque.
(1) Rotate the ball joint five times.
(2) Measure the rotation torque using a suitable
allen socket and a torque wrench.
• If not within the specification, replace the
lower arm component.

A6E741434300W03

Rotation torque
1.182.23 N·m
{12.122.7 kgf·cm, 10.519.7 in·lbf}
A6E7414W044

End Of Sie

R18

FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR) REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front crossmember component.
(See R23 FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. Inspect the front wheel alignment.
(See R5 FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

A6E741434300W02

A6E7414W019
.

1
2
3

Front lower arm (rear) ball joint
(See R19 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Front lower arm (rear)
(See R21 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Installation
Note)
Clip
R21 Clip Installation Note

4
5

Dust boot
Front lower arm (rear) bushing
(See R20 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Bushing
Removal Note)
(See R20 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Bushing
Installation Note)

Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint Removal Note
1. Separate the ball joint from the knuckle using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W031

R19

FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Lower Arm (Rear) Bushing Removal Note
1. Press the bushing out using the SSTs.
2. Remove the front lower arm (rear) from the press
and tap the bushing out with a hammer.

A6E7414W014

Front Lower Arm (Rear) Bushing Installation Note
1. Mark the new bushing as shown in the figure.

A6E7414W026

2. Press the bushing in to the marking using the
SSTs.

A6E7414W027

3. Verify that clearance distance AB is 23.75
mm25.75 mm {0.936 in1.013 in}.

A6E7414W028

R20

FRONT SUSPENSION
Clip Installation Note
1. Wipe the grease off the ball stud.
2. Fill the inside of the new dust boot with grease.
3. Install the boot on the ball joint.
4. Install the new clip using the SST.
5. Verify that the clip is installed securely to the
groove.
6. Wipe away the excess grease.

A6E7414W025

Front Lower Arm (Rear) Installation Note
1. Install the lower arm (rear) so that identification mark (L or R) faces toward the front of the vehicle.

End Of Sie

FRONT LOWER ARM (REAR) INSPECTION
1. Remove the lower arm (rear) from the vehicle.
2. Inspect for damage, cracks, and bending.
3. Inspect the ball joint rotation torque.
(1) Rotate the ball joint five times.
(2) Measure the rotation torque using a suitable
allen socket and a torque wrench.
• If not within the specification, replace the
lower arm component.

A6E741434300W04

Rotation torque
1.002.22 N·m
{10.222.6 kgf·cm, 8.8619.6 in·lbf}
A6E7414W045

End Of Sie

R21

FRONT SUSPENSION
FRONT STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front crossmember component. (See R23 FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. Adjust the headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
5. Inspect the front wheel alignment.
(See R5 FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)
.

1
2
3
4

Stabilizer control link
Stabilizer bracket
(See R22 Stabilizer Bracket Installation Note)
Stabilizer bushing
Front stabilizer

A6E7414W020

Stabilizer Bracket Installation Note
1. Apply rubber grease to the inside surface of the stabilizer bushing.
2. Align the bushing with the inside of positioning plate on the stabilizer bar.
3. Install the stabilizer bracket.

A6E7414W015

End Of Sie

R22

FRONT SUSPENSION
STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
1. Remove the stabilizer control link from the vehicle.
2. Inspect for bending and damage.
3. Measure the ball joint starting torque.
(1) Rock the ball joint stud side to side 10 times.
(2) Rotate the ball joint stud 10 times.
(3) Measure the starting torque using a suitable
allen socket and a torque wrench.

A6E741434150W01

Starting torque
0.230.47 N·m
{2.44.7 kgf·cm, 2.14.1 in·lbf}

A6E7414W021

End Of Sie

FRONT CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741434800W01

1. Remove the under cover.
2. Remove the splash shield.
3. Remove the front auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the transverse member.
(See R27 TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the steering gear and linkage, and pipe assembly installation bolts from the front crossmember, then
suspend the steering gear and linkage with a cable.
Tightening torque
• Steering gear and linkage: 74.4104.8 N·m {7.85710.68 kgf·m, 54.8877.29 ft·lbf}
• Pipe assembly: 7.810.8 N·m {79.6110.0 kgf·cm, 69.195.5 in·lbf}
6. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
8. Adjust the headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
9. Inspect the front wheel alignment.
(See R5 FRONT WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

R23

FRONT SUSPENSION

A6E7414W100
.

1
2
3
4
5
6

Nut (stabilizer control link)
Front lower arm (front) ball joint
(See R16 Front Lower Arm (Front) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Front lower arm (rear) ball joint
(See R19 Front Lower Arm (Rear) Ball Joint
Removal Note)
Bolt (front shock absorber lower side)
No.1 engine mount center bolt
(See R25 No.1 Engine Mount Center Bolt Removal
Note)
Crossmember bracket
(See R25 Crossmember Bracket Removal Note)

R24

7
8
9
10
11
12
13

Crossmember component
Stabilizer bracket and bushing
Front Stabilizer
Front lower arm (front)
Front lower arm (rear)
Front crossmember
Front crossmember bushing
(See R25 Front Crossmember Bushing Removal
Note)
(See R26 Front Crossmember Bushing Installation
Note)

FRONT SUSPENSION
No.1 Engine Mount Center Bolt Removal Note
1. Suspend the engine using the SST.
2. Remove the No.1 engine mount center bolt.

A6E7414W016

Crossmember Bracket Removal Note
Warning
• Removing the crossmember is dangerous. The crossmember component could fall and cause
serious injury or death. Verify that the jack securely supports the crossmember component before
removing the crossmember bracket.
1. Support the crossmember component with a jack
and remove the nuts.
2. Remove the crossmember bracket.

A6E7414W036

Front Crossmember Bushing Removal Note
1. Mark the crossmember as shown in the figure
(rear upper side only).

A6E7414W040

2. Remove the bushings using screw driver (-),
being care not to damage the front crossmember.

A6E7414W032

R25

FRONT SUSPENSION
Front Crossmember Bushing Installation Note
1. Set the bushings as shown in the figure.

A6E7414W041

2. Install the bushing onto the crossmember using
the SSTs.

A6E7414W042

End Of Sie

R26

FRONT SUSPENSION
TRANSVERSE MEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E741434890W01

Transverse member and transverse cover
Transverse cover (European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.)
(See R27 Transverse Cover Installation Note)
Transverse member

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7414W037

Transverse Cover Installation Note
1. Install the transverse cover.
2. Stake area A as shown in the figure.

A6E7414W038

End Of Sie

R27

REAR SUSPENSION

REAR SUSPENSION
REAR SHOCK ABSORBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741628700W01

1
2
3

Rear shock absorber and bracket
Bracket
(See R28 Bracket Installation Note)
Rear shock absorber

A6E7416W003

Bracket Installation Note
1. Install the bracket as shown in the figure.

A6E7416W024

End Of Sie

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER INSPECTION

A6E741628700W02

1. Inspect the rear shock absorber in the same way as the front shock absorber. (See R12 FRONT SHOCK
ABSORBER INSPECTION.)

End Of Sie

REAR SHOCK ABSORBER DISPOSAL

A6E741628700W03

1. Dispose the rear shock absorber in the same way as the front shock absorber. (See R12 FRONT SHOCK
ABSORBER DISPOSAL.)

End Of Sie

R28

REAR SUSPENSION
REAR COIL SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. Adjust the headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
5. Inspect the rear wheel alignment.
(See R6 REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

A6E741628011W01

A6E7416W022
.

1
2
3

Bolt (stabilizer control link lower side)
Bolt (rear lower arm outer side)
(See R29 Bolt (Rear Lower Arm Outer Side)
Removal Note)
Rear coil spring
(See R30 Rear Coil Spring Installation Note)

4
5
6
7

Upper spring seat rubber
Lower spring seat
Bound stopper (spring side)
Bound stopper (body side)
(See R30 Bound Stopper (Body Side) Removal/
Installation Note)

Bolt (Rear Lower Arm Outer Side) Removal Note
1. Support the lower arm with a jack.
2. Loosen the inner bolt of the lower arm.
3. Remove the outer bolt of the lower arm.

A6E7416W019

R29

REAR SUSPENSION
Bound Stopper (Body Side) Removal/Installation Note
1. Remove or/and install the bound stopper (body side) using the extension bar.
Rear Coil Spring Installation Note
1. Install the coil spring so that the distinguisher
mark is located on under side.
2. Position the jack under the lower arm and jack up
slowly.
Warning
• Installing the coil spring is dangerous.
The coil spring could fly off, and cause
serious injure of death.
3. Install the lower arm (outer side) bolt.
A6E7416W015

End Of Sie

REAR LOWER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. Inspect the rear wheel alignment.
(See R6 REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

A6E741628310W01

A6E7416W008

1
2
3

Rear coil spring component
(See R29 REAR COIL SPRING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Bolt (rear lower arm inner side)
Rear lower arm

End Of Sie

R30

REAR SUSPENSION
REAR UPPER ARM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741628210W01

A6E7416W009
.

1
2
3
4

ABS wheel-speed sensor
Parking brake cable
Bolt (rear shock absorber lower side)
(See R32 Bolt (Rear Shock Absorber Lower Side)
Removal Note)
Bolt (trailing link front side)

5
6
7

Bolt (rear upper arm)
(See R32 Bolt (Rear Upper Arm) Removal Note)
Rear upper arm
Rear upper arm bushing
(See R32 Rear Upper Arm Bushing Removal Note)
(See R32 Rear Upper Arm Bushing Installation
Note)

R31

REAR SUSPENSION
Bolt (Rear Shock Absorber Lower Side) Removal Note
1. Support the trailing link with a jack.

A6E7416W005

Bolt (Rear Upper Arm) Removal Note
1. Loosen the bolts on the inner and outer side of the lateral link.
Rear Upper Arm Bushing Removal Note
1. Press the upper arm bushing out using the SSTs.

A6E7416W010

Rear Upper Arm Bushing Installation Note
1. Mark the new bushing as shown in the figure.

A6E7416W011

2. Press the bushing in to the marking using the
SSTs.

A6E7416W012

R32

REAR SUSPENSION
3. Verify that clearance distance AB is 14.0 mm
16.0 mm {0.56 in-0.62 in}.

A6E7416W013

End Of Sie

REAR LATERAL LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741628600W01

A6E7416W017
.

1
2
3

ABS wheel-speed sensor
Parking brake cable
Bolt (rear shock absorber lower side)
(SeeR34 Bolt (Rear Shock Absorber Lower Side)
Removal Note)

4
5

Bolt (trailing link front side)
Rear lateral link

R33

REAR SUSPENSION
Bolt (Rear Shock Absorber Lower Side) Removal Note
1. Support the trailing link with a jack.
Caution
• Removing the trailing link is dangerous.
The trailing link could fall and cause
serious injury or death. Verify that the
jack securely supports the trailing link.

A6E7416W005

End Of Sie

REAR STABILIZER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. Adjust the headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)

A6E741628100W01

A6E7416W004
.

1
2

Stabilizer control link
Stabilizer bracket

End Of Sie

R34

3
4

Bushing
Rear stabilizer

REAR SUSPENSION
STABILIZER CONTROL LINK INSPECTION
1. Remove the stabilizer control link from the vehicle.
2. Inspect for bending and damage.
3. Measure the ball joint starting torque.
(1) Rock the ball joint stud side to side 10 times.
(2) Rotate the ball joint stud 10 times.
(3) Measure the starting torque using a suitable
Allen socket and a torque wrench.

A6E741634150W01

Starting torque
0.230.47 N·m
{2.44.7 kgf·cm, 2.14.1 in·lbf}

A6E7414W021

End Of Sie

TRAILING LINK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741628200W01

Caution
• Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may
possibly cause an open circuit in the harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the
following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate
place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while servicing the vehicle.
1. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
4. Adjust the headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
5. Inspect the rear wheel alignment.
(See R6 REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

R35

REAR SUSPENSION

A6E7416W018
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

ABS wheel-speed sensor
Parking brake cable
Calliper component
(See R37 Caliper Component Removal Note)
Disc plate
Spindle and hub component
(See M10 WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Bolt (stabilizer control link lower side)
Bolt (rear lower arm outer side)
(See R29 Bolt (Rear Lower Arm Outer Side)
Removal Note)
Spring component

R36

9
10

11
12
13

Bolt (rear shock absorber lower side)
Bolt (trailing link front side)
(See R37 Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Removal
Note)
(See R37 Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Installation
Note)
Bolt (rear lateral link outer side)
(See R37 Bolt (Rear Lateral Link Outer Side)
Removal Note)
Bolt (rear upper arm outer side)
Trailing link

REAR SUSPENSION
Caliper Component Removal Note
1. Suspend the caliper aside with cable.
Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Removal Note
1. Support the trailing link with a jack.
Caution
• Removing the trailing link is dangerous.
The trailing link could fall and cause
serious injury or death. Verify that the
jack securely supports the trailing link.
2. Remove the bolts (trailing link front side).

A6E7416W005

Bolt (Rear Lateral Link Outer Side) Removal Note
1. Loosen the bolt (lateral link inner side).
2. Remove the bolt (lateral link outer side).
Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Installation Note
1. Support the trailing link with a jack.
2. Tighten the bolts (trailing link front side).

A6E7416W005

End Of Sie

REAR CROSSMEMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E741628400W01

Caution
• Performing the following procedures without first removing the ABS wheel-speed sensor may
possibly cause an open circuit in the harness if it is pulled by mistake. Before performing the
following procedures, remove the ABS wheel-speed sensor (axle side) and fix it to an appropriate
place where the sensor will not be pulled by mistake while servicing the vehicle.
1. Remove the rear auto leveling sensor and harness.
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the middle pipe.
(See F35 EXHAUST SYSTEM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET.)
6. Inspect the rear wheel alignment.
(See R6 REAR WHEEL ALIGNMENT.)

R37

REAR SUSPENSION

A6E7416W020
.

1
2
3
4

ABS wheel-speed sensor
Parking brake cable
Caliper component
(See R39 Caliper Component Removal Note)
Disc plate

R38

5
6
7

Spindle and hub component
(See M10 WHEEL HUB, HUB SPINDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Bolt (stabilizer control link)
Rear coil spring
(See R29 REAR COIL SPRING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

REAR SUSPENSION
8
9
10

11
12

Rear lower arm
(See R30 REAR LOWER ARM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Bolt (rear shock absorber lower side)
Bolt (trailing link front side)
(See R39 Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Removal
Note)
(See R40 Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Installation
Note)
Nut (crossmember)
Crossmember component
(See R39 Crossmember Component Removal
Note)

13
14
15
16
17
18

Trailing link
Rear lateral link
Rear upper arm
Rear stabilizer
Rear crossmember
Rear crossmember Bushing
(See R39 Rear Crossmember Bushing Removal
Note)
(See R40 Rear Crossmember Bushing Installation
Note)

Caliper Component Removal Note
1. Remove the caliper, and suspend it aside with cable.
Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Removal Note
1. Support the trailing link with a jack.
2. Loosen the bolt (lateral link inner side).

R
A6E7416W005

Crossmember Component Removal Note
1. Support the crossmember component using a
jack and remove the nuts.
Warning
• Removing the crossmember is
dangerous. The crossmember
component could fall and cause serious
injury or death. Verify that the jack
securely supports the crossmember
component.
2. Remove the crossmember component.

A6E7416W014

Rear Crossmember Bushing Removal Note
1. Remove the bushing using screw driver (-), being
care not to damage the rear crossmember.

A6E7416W001

R39

REAR SUSPENSION
Rear Crossmember Bushing Installation Note
1. Set the bushings as shown in the figure.

2. Tap the bushing onto the rear crossmember using
the SSTs.

A6E7416W021

A6E7416W002

Bolt (Trailing Link Front Side) Installation Note
1. Support the trailing link with a jack.
2. Tighten the bolts (trailing link front side).

End Of Sie

R40

A6E7416W005

BODY

LOCATION INDEX ................................................. S-4
EXTERIOR........................................................... S-4
INTERIOR............................................................ S-6
DOOR .................................................................. S-9
BONNET ............................................................... S-10
BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............... S-10
BONNET ADJUSTMENT................................... S-10
FRONT FENDER PANEL..................................... S-12
FRONT FENDER PANEL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-12
DOOR ................................................................... S-13
FRONT DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW................ S-13
REAR DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW .................. S-14
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...... S-15
REAR DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........ S-15
DOOR ADJUSTMENT ....................................... S-16
FRONT DOOR GLASS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-16
REAR DOOR GLASS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-17
FRONT DOOR UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-18
REAR DOOR UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-18
FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... S-19
REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... S-19
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-20
FRONT OUTER HANDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-21
REAR OUTER HANDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-21
INNER HANDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-22
REGULATOR HANDLE REMOVAL .................. S-22
REGULATOR HANDLE INSTALLATION .......... S-22
POWER WINDOW SYSTEM ................................ S-23
INITIAL SETTING .............................................. S-23
TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION
OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE
SWITCHING PROCEDURE ........................... S-23
DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE
PROCEDURE ................................................. S-24
POWER WINDOW SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-25
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. S-26
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. S-28
POWER WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-28
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ S-29
POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION .................................................. S-29

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM .......................... S-30
FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION .................................................. S-30
REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION .................................................. S-32
TRUNK LID LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION .................................................. S-32
LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION .................................................. S-33
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-33
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT
INSPECTION .................................................. S-34
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT ID CODE
CHANGE......................................................... S-36
TRANSMITTER BATTERY
REPLACEMENT ............................................. S-37
TRANSMITTER BATTERY INSPECTION ......... S-38
TRUNK LID ........................................................... S-39
TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........... S-39
TRUNK LID DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ......... S-40
TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT ............................... S-41
STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL .............................. S-41
LIFTGATE............................................................. S-42
LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............. S-42
LIFTGATE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ........... S-44
STAY DAMPER DISPOSAL .............................. S-44
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT................................. S-45
FUEL-FILLER LID AND OPENER ....................... S-46
FUEL-FILLER LID AND OPENER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-46
FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT..................... S-46
BUMPER............................................................... S-47
FRONT BUMPER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-47
FRONT BUMPER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... S-48
BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-48
REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.... S-49
EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT .................................. S-50
RADIATOR GRILLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-50
COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..... S-50
FRONT FLAP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........ S-51
REAR FLAP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......... S-51
REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL ................. S-51
REAR DOOR GARNISH INSTALLATION ......... S-52
SIDE PROTECTOR REMOVAL......................... S-52
SIDE PROTECTOR INSTALLATION................. S-53
EXTRACTOR CHAMBER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-53
REAR FINISHER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-54
REAR SPOILER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-54
ROOF CARRIER BRACKET
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-54

MOLDING ............................................................. S-55
FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL ........ S-55
FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
INSTALLATION............................................... S-55
REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL...........S-56
REAR BELTLINE MOLDING
INSTALLATION............................................... S-56
ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL ............................ S-57
ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION .................... S-57
OUTSIDE MIRROR............................................... S-58
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-58
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... S-58
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR
INSPECTION ..................................................S-59
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-60
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH
INSPECTION ..................................................S-60
REARVIEW MIRROR ...........................................S-61
REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL...................... S-61
REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION.............. S-61
BASE REMOVAL ............................................... S-61
BASE INSTALLATION ....................................... S-62
REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER ............................ S-63
FILAMENT REPAIR ...........................................S-63
FILAMENT INSPECTION .................................. S-63
WINDOW GLASS .................................................S-64
WINDSHIELD REMOVAL .................................. S-64
WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION .......................... S-65
QUARTER WINDOW GLASS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-67
REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL.................S-68
REAR WINDOW GLASS INSTALLATION......... S-70
SLIDING SUNROOF............................................. S-74
DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........ S-74
GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .....S-74
GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT ......................... S-75
FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL..................... S-75
FRONT DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION............. S-75
REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL .......................S-76
REAR DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION ............... S-76
SUNROOF UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-76
SUNROOF UNIT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... S-77
SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL ........................S-79
SUNROOF MOTOR INSTALLATION ................ S-79
SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION.................... S-79
SUNROOF RELAY INSPECTION ..................... S-80
SUNROOF SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-81
SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION ................... S-81
DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE ........................... S-82
DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... S-82
DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY...... S-83
SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION......... S-83
COLUMN COVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-84
METER HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...... S-84
LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....S-84
CENTER BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION....... S-85
GLOVE COMPARTMENT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ S-85

CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............S-86
CONSOLE DISASSEmBLY/ASSEMBLY ...........S-86
TRIM......................................................................S-87
A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL ...............................S-87
A-PILLAR TRIM INSTALLATION .......................S-87
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-88
B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-88
FRONT SIDE TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-88
FRONT SCUFF PLATE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-89
REAR SCUFF PLATE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-89
C-PILLAR TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-89
FRONT DOOR TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-90
REAR DOOR TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-90
TIRE HOUSE TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-91
REAR PACKAGE TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-92
TRUNK SIDE TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-92
TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-93
TRUNK LID TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-93
TRUNK END TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-93
LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-94
LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-94
LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-95
HEADLINER .........................................................S-96
HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION..........S-96
SHOCK ABSORBING PAD
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-97
ASSIST HANDLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-97
SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...........S-98
FLOOR COVERING..............................................S-99
FRONT FLOOR COVERING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................S-99
SEAT BELT ........................................................S-100
FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........................S-100
REAR SIDE SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........................S-101
REAR CENTER SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........................S-101
FRONT BUCKLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........................S-102
REAR BUCKLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........................S-102
SEAT BELT INSPECTION ...............................S-103
BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION.....................S-104
CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........................S-104

SEAT................................................................... S-105
FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..... S-105
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ... S-106
REAR SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... S-110
REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ...... S-112
REMOTE HANDLE LEVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... S-114
SEAT BACK STRIKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... S-115
POWER SEAT SWITCH INSPECTION........... S-115
FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION ............... S-116
REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION ................. S-116
SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION ......................... S-116
RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION ................. S-116
SEAT WARMER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... S-117
SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION ........ S-117
SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION .............. S-118
BODY SHELL ..................................................... S-119
SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION S-119
COWL PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .... S-119
TROUBLESHOOTING
[POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]............................ S-120
INTERMITTENT CONCERN
TROUBLESHOOTING.................................. S-120
FOREWORD.................................................... S-120
BASIC POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
INSPECTION ................................................ S-121
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX ......................... S-123
NO. 1 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
DOES NOT GO UP AND DOWN IN
AUTOMATIC MODE ..................................... S-123
NO. 2 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN
ENCOUNTERING A FOREIGN OBJECT
IN ITS PATH ................................................. S-126
NO. 3 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS
DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN
OBJECT WHILE IT IS GOING UP IN
AUTOMATIC MODE ..................................... S-127
TROUBLESHOOTING
[KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM] ............................ S-128
FOREWORD.................................................... S-128
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
CHECK SHEET ............................................ S-129
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM
PRELIMINARY INSPECTION....................... S-129
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION........... S-130
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX ......................... S-131
NO. 1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS
INOPERATIVE.............................................. S-131
NO. 2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE........................ S-132
NO. 3 TRANSMITTER ID CODE CANNOT
BE REPROGRAMMED................................. S-133

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
EXTERIOR

A6E770001086W01

Front

A6E7700W001
.

1
2
3

4
5
6
7
8

Shroud panel
(See S119 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Radiator grille
(See S50 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front bumper
(See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S48 FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Bumper reinforcement
(See S48 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Bonnet
(See S10 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S10 BONNET ADJUSTMENT)
Cowl panel
(See S119 COWL PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Cowl grille
(See S50 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Windshield
(See S64 WINDSHIELD REMOVAL)
(See S65 WINDSHIELD INSTALLATION)
Sunroof motor and relay
(See S79 SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL)
(See S79 SUNROOF MOTOR INSTALLATION)
(See S79 SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION)
(See S80 SUNROOF RELAY INSPECTION)
Deflector
(See S74 DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

12
13
14
15

Glass panel
(See S74 GLASS PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S75 GLASS PANEL ADJUSTMENT)
Sunroof unit
(See S76 SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S77 SUNROOF UNIT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Front fender panel
(See S12 FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front flap
(See S51 FRONT FLAP REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front drain hose
(See S75 FRONT DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL)
(See S75 FRONT DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION)
Power outside mirror
(See S58 POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S58 POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See S59 POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR
INSPECTION)
Fuel-filler lid and opener
(See S46 FUEL-FILLER LID AND OPENER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S46 FUEL-FILLER LID ADJUSTMENT)
Extractor chamber
(See S53 EXTRACTOR CHAMBER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
Rear

A6E7700W002
.

1
2

3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Rear spoiler
(See S54 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear window glass
(See S68 REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL)
(See S70 REAR WINDOW GLASS
INSTALLATION)
Filament
(See S63 FILAMENT REPAIR)
(See S63 FILAMENT INSPECTION)
Rear finisher
(See S54 REAR FINISHER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear bumper
(See S49 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear drain hose
(See S76 REAR DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL)
(See S76 REAR DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION)
Rear flap
(See S51 REAR FLAP REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Roof molding
(See S57 ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL)
(See S57 ROOF MOLDING INSTALLATION)
Roof carrier bracket
(See S54 ROOF CARRIER BRACKET REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear door garnish (5HB)
(See S51 REAR DOOR GARNISH REMOVAL)
(See S52 REAR DOOR GARNISH
INSTALLATION)
Rear beltline molding
(See S56 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING
REMOVAL)
(See S56 REAR BELTLINE MOLDING
INSTALLATION)

11
12

14
15

Side protector
(See S52 SIDE PROTECTOR REMOVAL)
(See S53 SIDE PROTECTOR INSTALLATION)
Front beltline molding
(See S55 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
REMOVAL)
(See S55 FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING
INSTALLATION)
Liftgate
(See S42 LIFTGATE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S44 LIFTGATE DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
(See S45 LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT)
Liftgate upper trim
(See S94 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Liftgate side trim
(See S94 LIFTGATE SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Liftgate lower trim
(See S95 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Liftgate lock actuator
(See S33 LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
Trunk lid
(See S39 TRUNK LID REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S40 TRUNK LID DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
(See S41 TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT)
Trunk lid trim
(See S93 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Trunk lid lock actuator
(See S32 TRUNK LID LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

LOCATION INDEX
INTERIOR

A6E770001086W02

Front

A6E7700W003
.

1
2

3
4
5
6

8
9

A-pillar trim
(See S87 A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL)
(See S87 A-PILLAR TRIM INSTALLATION)
Dashboard
(See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S83 DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Center box
(See S85 CENTER BOX REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Meter hood
(See S84 METER HOOD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Side panel
(See S83 SIDE PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Power outside mirror switch
(See S60 POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S60 POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Power window main switch
(See S25 POWER WINDOW SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S26 POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
INSPECTION)
(See S23 INITIAL SETTING)
(See S23 TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION
OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING
PROCEDURE)
(See S24 DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE
PROCEDURE)
Front door trim
(See S90 FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front scuff plate
(See S89 FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

10
11
12

15
16
17

18
19
20

Lower panel
(See S84 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Column cover
(See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Console
(See S86 CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S86 CONSOLE DISASSEmBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Seat warmer switch
(See S117 SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S117 SEAT WARMER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Door lock timer unit
(See S33 DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S34 DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT
INSPECTION)
(See S36 DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT ID CODE
CHANGE)
Glove compartment
(See S85 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front side trim
(See S88 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front seat
(See S105 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S106 FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Rear tilt motor
(See S116 REAR TILT MOTOR INSPECTION)
Front tilt motor
(See S116 FRONT TILT MOTOR INSPECTION)
Slide motor
(See S116 SLIDE MOTOR INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
21
22

Recliner motor
(See S116 RECLINER MOTOR INSPECTION)
Power seat switch
(See S115 POWER SEAT SWITCH
INSPECTION)

Seat warmer unit
(See S118 SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION)

Rear

A6E7700W004
.

3
4
5

Rearview mirror
(See S61 REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL)
(See S61 REARVIEW MIRROR INSTALLATION)
(See S61 BASE REMOVAL)
(See S62 BASE INSTALLATION)
Sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S81 SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION)
Sunvisor
(See S98 SUNVISOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Shock absorbing pad
(See S97 SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
B-pillar upper trim
(See S88 B-PILLAR UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

6
7

8
9

Headliner
(See S96 HEADLINER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front seat belt
(See S100 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION )
(See S103 SEAT BELT INSPECTION )
B-pillar lower trim
(See S88 B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Power window subswitch
(See S25 POWER WINDOW SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S28 POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH
INSPECTION )
Assist handle
(See S97 ASSIST HANDLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
11
12
13
14

15
16

Rear door trim
(See S90 REAR DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
C-pillar trim
(See S89 C-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear buckle
(See S102 REAR BUCKLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Trunk side trim
(See S92 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Trunk side upper trim
(See S93 TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Trunk end trim
(See S93 TRUNK END TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear center seat belt
(See S101 REAR CENTER SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION )
(See S103 SEAT BELT INSPECTION )
Tire house trim
(See S91 TIRE HOUSE TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

18
19
20
21

22
23
24

Rear scuff plate
(See S89 REAR SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front floor covering
(See S99 FRONT FLOOR COVERING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Child restraint seat anchor
(See S104 CHILD RESTRAINT SEAT ANCHOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Rear seat
(See S110 REAR SEAT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S112 REAR SEAT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Remote handle lever
(See S114 REMOTE HANDLE LEVER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Rear package trim
(See S92 REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Transmitter
(See S37 TRANSMITTER BATTERY
REPLACEMENT)
(See S38 TRANSMITTER BATTERY
INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
DOOR

A6E770001086W03

A6E7700WH01
.

3
4
5
6
7

Front door
(See S15 FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S16 DOOR ADJUSTMENT)
Rear door
(See S15 REAR DOOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S16 DOOR ADJUSTMENT)
Front door glass
(See S16 FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear door glass
(See S17 REAR DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front door unit
(See S18 FRONT DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear door unit
(See S18 REAR DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front door latch and lock actuator
(See S19 FRONT DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S30 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
Rear door latch and lock actuator
(See S19 REAR DOOR LATCH AND LOCK
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S32 REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)

9
10
11

12
13

14
15

Front outer handle
(See S21 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Rear outer handle
(See S21 FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front door key cylinder
(See S20 FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See S30 FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
Inner handle
(See S22 INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Regulator handle
(See S22 REGULATOR HANDLE REMOVAL)
(See S22 REGULATOR HANDLE
INSTALLATION)
Power window regulator
(See S28 POWER WINDOW REGULATOR
REMOVAL/installation)
Power window motor
(See S29 POWER WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See S29 POWER WINDOW MOTOR
INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

BONNET

BONNET
BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E771001084W01

Warning
• Removing the bonnet without supporting can be dangerous. The bonnet may fall and injure you.
Always perform the following procedure with at least another person.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the windshield washer hose.
To remove the bonnet hinge, remove the front fender panel.
To remove the bonnet lock, remove the radiator grille.
To remove the bonnet release cable, remove the driver-side mud guard.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

Bonnet insulator
Shroud seal weatherstrip
Parting seal weatherstrip
Bonnet
Bonnet hinge
Bonnet stay
Bonnet switch connector (With theft-deterrent
system)
Bonnet lock
Bonnet release lever
Bonnet release cable

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Adjust the bonnet. (See S10 BONNET
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7710W001

End
Of Sie
BONNET
ADJUSTMENT
Gap Adjustment
1. Remove the front fender.
2. Loosen the bonnet hinge installation bolts and
reposition the bonnet.
3. Tighten the bolts.

A6E771001084W02

A6E7710W002

S10

BONNET
4. Verify that the gap between the bonnet and the
body is within the specification.
Clearance
a: 2.54.5 mm {0.080.17 in}

A6E7710W004

Height Adjustment
1. Turn the stop rubber to adjust the height of the
bonnet.

A6E7710W006

A6E7710W003

2. Verify that the height between the bonnet and the
body is within the specification.
Clearance
a: 3.06.0 mm {0.120.23 in}
b: 3.06.0 mm {0.120.23 in}
c: -1.01.0 mm {-0.040.04 in}

A6E7710W005

End Of Sie

S11

FRONT FENDER PANEL

FRONT FENDER PANEL
FRONT FENDER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1
2

A6E771252110W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the front side turn light.
Remove the fender molding. (See S50 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front bumper. (See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front combination light. (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Front fender panel
Seal plate

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7712W001

End Of Sie

S12

DOOR

DOOR
FRONT DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW

A6E771458010W01

A6E7714W001
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Front door
Front door hinge
Checker
Front door latch and lock actuator
Front door unit
Hole cover
Power window motor
Power window regulator
Inner handle

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Protector
Outer handle
Front door key cylinder
Front door glass
Glass run channel
Front door weatherstrip A
Front door lower weatherstrip
Front door weatherstrip B
Striker

End Of Sie

S13

DOOR
REAR DOOR STRUCTURAL VIEW

A6E771472010W01

A6E7714W002
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11

Rear door
Rear door hinge
Checker
Rear door latch and lock actuator
Rear door unit
Hole cover
Power window motor
Regulator handle
Power window regulator
Manual window regulator
Inner handle

End Of Sie

S14

12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21

Outer handle
Rear door glass
Quarter window glass
Glass run channel
Glass guide
Quarter window molding
Rear door weatherstrip A
Rear door lower weatherstrip
Rear door weatherstrip B
Striker

DOOR
FRONT DOOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. To remove the front door hinge, remove the front fender panel.
3. To remove the checker, remove the door
speaker.
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E771458010W02

Connector
(See S15 Connector Removal Note)
Front door hinge
Front door
Checker

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the front door. (See S16 DOOR
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7714W006

Connector Removal Note
1. Push the rubber boot backward.
2. Pull down the cover in the direction indicated by
the arrow and disconnect the connector.

A6E7714W007

End
OfDOOR
Sie REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR

A6E771472010W02

Warning
• Handling the side air bag sensor improperly can accidentally deploy the side air bag module,
which may seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before working
around the B-pillar areas. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Note
• The side air bag sensor is located in the B-pillar.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. To remove the checker, turn the rear door speaker.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

Connector
Rear door hinge
Rear door
Checker

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the rear door. (See S16 DOOR
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7714W023

S15

DOOR
End
OfADJUSTMENT
Sie
DOOR

A6E771458010W03

1. Measure the gap and height between the front or rear door and the body.
2. If not as specified, loosen the front or rear door hinge installation bolts or the door lock striker installation
screws, and reposition the door.
Clearance
a: 2.54.5 mm {0.100.18 in}
b: -0.81.2 mm {-0.030.05 in}
c: -0.31.7 mm {-0.010.07 in}
d: -1.01.0 mm {-0.040.04 in}
e: -0.51.5 mm {-0.020.06 in}

A6E7714W025

3. Tighten the bolts or screws.

End Of Sie

FRONT DOOR GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Operate the front door glass so that the distance
from the top of the front door glass to the upper
part of the rear beltline molding is 210 mm
{8.3 in}.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the front door trim.
4. Remove the hole cover.

A6E771458510W01

A6E7714W022

S16

DOOR
5. Remove the screws.
6. Insert your hand in hole of the front door unit, and
lift out the front door glass.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W003

End OfDOOR
Sie GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Fully down the rear door glass.
Remove the rear door trim.
Remove the hole cover.
Pull up the rear door weatherstrip and remove the screw.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the glass run channel from the rear door
glass guide.

A6E771472510W01

A6E7714W014

7. Lift the rear door glass to the position where the
rear door glass installation screw is visible.
8. Remove the screw.
9. Insert your hand through the rear door unit hole
and lift out the rear door glass.
10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W015

End Of Sie

S17

DOOR
FRONT DOOR UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

10.

A6E771458971W01

Remove the front door glass.
Remove the inner handle.
Remove the front door speaker.
Disconnect the power window motor connector, front door lock actuator connector, power outside mirror
connector.
Remove the door harness from the front door unit.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the screw.
Remove the front door actuator hook from the
front door unit.
Pull the front door unit slightly towards you, and
while keeping the power window regulator from
catching on the door, remove the door unit from
the door.
Pull out the inner handle cable and door lock knob
cable from the hole.

A6E7714W011

11. Remove the power window motor and power
window regulator from the door unit.
12. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W012

End OfDOOR
Sie UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Remove the rear door glass.
Remove the inner handle.
Remove the rear door speaker.
Disconnect the power window motor connector, and power door lock actuator connector.
Remove the rear door harness from the rear door unit.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the rear door lock actuator hook from the
rear door unit.
8. Pull the rear door unit slightly towards you, and
while keeping the power window regulator or
manual window regulator from catching on the
door, remove the door unit from the door.
9. Pull out the inner handle cable and door lock knob
cable from the hole.

A6E771458971W02

A6E7714W016

S18

DOOR
10. For power window system-equipped vehicles,
remove the power window motor and power
window regulator from the door unit. For manual
window system-equipped vehicles, remove the
regulator handle and manual window regulator.
11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W017

End Of Sie
FRONT
DOOR LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front door unit.
2. Remove the screws, then remove the front door
latch and door lock actuator.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E771458310W01

S
A6E7714W013

End OfDOOR
Sie LATCH AND LOCK ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1. Remove the rear door unit.
2. Remove the screws, then remove the rear door
latch and lock actuator.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E771472310W01

A6E7714W020

End Of Sie

S19

DOOR
FRONT DOOR KEY CYLINDER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front door unit.
2. Remove the cover, then remove the bolt.

A6E771458310W03

A6E7714W027

3. For protector-equipped vehicles, pull out the
protector tab from the latch and remove the
protector.
4. Disconnect the rod.
5. Remove the front outer handle.

A6E7714W028

6. Turn the key cylinder in the direction indicated by
the arrow (1) and move the hook to the notch.
7. Pull the key cylinder towards you (2) to remove it.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W029

End Of Sie

S20

DOOR
FRONT OUTER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the front door glass.
Detach the outer handle and front door latch rod.
For protector-equipped vehicles, refer to key cylinder removal/installation to remove the protector.
Remove the bolts.

A6E771458410W01

A6E7714W004

5. With the rear side of the outer handle fixed and
the outer handle lever pulled out (1), remove the
rear side of the outer handle from the front door.
6. Pull out the front side of the outer handle from the
front door.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W005

End OfOUTER
Sie HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the rear door glass.
Remove the rear door unit.
Remove the rear door latch.
Remove the bolts.
Detach the rear outer handle and rear door latch
rod.

A6E771458410W02

A6E7714W018

6. With the rear side of the rear outer handle fixed
and the outer handle lever pulled out (1), remove
the rear side of the rear outer handle from the
rear door.
7. Pull out the front side of the rear outer handle
from the rear door.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7714W019

End Of Sie

S21

DOOR
INNER HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front door trim.
2. Using a flathead screwdriver, press and hold the
hook in the direction indicated by arrow (1), and
pull the shaft in the direction indicated by arrow
(2), remove the shaft.
3. Pull off the inner handle, and remove the door
lock knob cable and inner handle cable.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E771458330W01

A6E7714W010

End Of Sie HANDLE REMOVAL
REGULATOR
1. Remove the regulator handle clip using a rag as
shown.

A6E771458580W01

A6E7714W008

End Of Sie HANDLE INSTALLATION
REGULATOR
1. Install the clip in the regulator handle.
2. Close the door glass fully and push the regulator
handle on as shown.

A6E771458580W02

A6E7714W009

End Of Sie

S22

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
INITIAL SETTING

A6E771666350W01

Note
• A driver side window will not fully close automatically under following the conditions:
The battery has been disconnected during vehicle maintenance or for other reasons.
The power window main switch connector, or driver-side power window motor connector has been
disconnected.
• Carry out the following procedure to resume operation:
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Press the driver side power window main switch and fully open the driver side window.
3. Pull up the driver side power window main switch to manual-up position to fully close the driver side window,
and keep holding the switch up at the position for about 2 seconds to complete initial setting.

End Of Sie

TWO-STEP DOWN FUNCTION OPERATIVE/NON-OPERATIVE SWITCHING PROCEDURE

A6E771666350W02

Note
• By following the procedure below, the two-step down function is switched to non-operative when it is
operative, and to operative when it is non-operative.

A6E7716W014

End Of Sie

S23

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
DOOR GLASS POSITION CHANGE PROCEDURE

A6E771666350W03

Note
• After performing the following procedure, verify that the two-step down function operates normally and the
door glass position has changed. If the two-step down function does not operate or the door glass position
has not changed, the procedure was not performed properly. Repeat the procedure from the beginning.

A6E7716W015

End Of Sie

S24

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the front door trim or rear door trim.
3. Remove the screws, then the power window
switch.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E771666350W04

A6E7716W003

End Of Sie

S25

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E771666350W05

Drivers side
1. Remove the driver-side front door trim.
2. Connect the power window main switch connector.
3. Measure the voltage at the power window main switch terminals as indicated below.
4. Disconnect the power window main switch connector before inspecting for continuity at terminals 1M (1J*2) and
1F (1L*2).
• If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Action.
• If the parts and wiring harnesses are okay but the system still does not work properly, replace the power
window main switch.
Terminal voltage list (Reference)

A6E7716W001

Terminal

Open
output

Power window
motor

1L*1
1D

Close
output

Power window
motor

Door
switch

While door glass is opening

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
B+

While door glass is closing

Below 1.0

While door glass is opening

Below 1.0

While door glass is closing

B+

Connected to

1N*1
1F*2
1B*3

1F
1L*2

Door switch

Test condition

Any door is open (door switch is
on): inspect for continuity to
ground
All doors are closed (door switch is
off): inspect for continuity to
ground
Ignition switch is at ON position

Yes
No
B+

Action
• Power window motor
• Inspect related
harness
• Power window motor
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect door switch
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect P. WIND 30 A
fuse
• Inspect related
harness
• P. WIND 20 A fuse
• Inspect related
harness

1H
1B*2

IG1

P. WIND 30 A fuse

1J
1H*2

Power
supply

P. WIND 20 A fuse

Under any condition

B+

1M
1J*2

Ground

GND

Under any condition: inspect for
continuity to ground

Yes

• Inspect GND

Ground

Power window
motor

Under any condition: inspect for
continuity to ground

Yes

• Power window motor
• Inspect related
harness

Pulse 2

Power window
motor

Door glass is in motion

Power window
motor

Door glass is in motion

2D
*1
*2
*3

Signal

Pulse 1
Power
supply

Power window
motor

Ignition switch is at LOCK position

Door glass is not in motion

Door glass is not in motion
Under any condition

: With rear power window system (L.H.D.)
: Without rear power window system (L.H.D.)
: R.H.D.

S26

Below 1.0

Alternates
between 0 and
5
0 or 5
Alternates
between 0 and
5
0 or 5
9

• Power window motor
• Inspect related
harness
• Power window motor
• Inspect related
harness
• Power window motor
• Inspect related
harness

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
Except drivers side
1. Turn the power-cut switch to UNLOCK.
2. Inspect for continuity between the power window main switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the power window main switch.

A6E7716W009

End Of Sie

S27

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
POWER WINDOW SUBSWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the power window
subswitch terminals.
• If not as specified, replace the power window
subswitch.

A6E771666370W01

A6E7716W011

A6E7716W013

End Of Sie

POWER WINDOW REGULATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the front door glass/rear door glass.
Remove the front door speaker/rear door speaker.
Remove the power window motor.
Remove the nuts.

A6E771658560W01

A6E7716W005

6. Insert hand through the speaker installation hole,
rotate the regulator drum housing in the direction
shown in the figure and disengage the regulator
drum housing from the door unit connection
hooks.

A6E7716W006

S28

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
7. Remove the power window regulator from the
speaker installation hole.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7716W007

End Of Sie
POWER
WINDOW MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the front door trim or rear door trim.
Disconnect the power window motor connector.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the power window motor from the power
window regulator drum.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E771659560W01

Note
• When installing the power window motor to
the power window regulator drum, the drum
housing hook may come off the door unit. If
this happens, remove the door speaker,
insert your hand in the speaker installation
hole, connect the drum housing hooks, and
while supporting the drum housing, install
the power window motor to the drum.

A6E7716W004

End Of Sie
POWER
WINDOW MOTOR INSPECTION
Drivers Side
1. Disconnect the power window motor connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the power
window motor terminals E and F and inspect the
operation the power window motor operation.
• If not as specified, replace the power window
motor.
Motor operation
UP
DOWN

A6E771659560W02

Terminal
F
GND
B+

E
B+
GND

3. Apply battery positive voltage to the power
window motor terminal D and connect terminal C
to ground.
4. Measure the voltage at terminal B and A while performing Step 3.
• If not as specified, replace the power window motor.

A6E7716W008

Voltage
Pulse wave: MAX. 5 V, MIN. 0 V

S29

POWER WINDOW SYSTEM, POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Except Driver's Side
1. Apply battery positive voltage to the power
window motor terminals and inspect the operation
of the power window motor.
• If not as specified, replace the power window
motor.
Motor operation
UP
DOWN

Terminal
F
GND
B+

E
B+
GND
A6E7716W010

End Of Sie

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM

FRONT DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Door Lock Actuator
1. Disconnect the front door lock actuator connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the front door
lock actuator terminals and inspect the operation
of the front door lock actuator.
• If not as specified, replace the front door lock
actuator.
With double locking system
Actuator operation
Lock
Double lock
Unlock

A6E771858310W01

Connection
B+
A
(F)
A
(F)
C and B
(D and E)

GND
C
(D)
B
(E)
A
(F)

( ) : RH
Without double locking system
Actuator operation
Lock
Unlock

( ) : RH

S30

Connection
B+
A
(F)
A
(F)

GND
B
(E)
B
(E)

A6E7718W011

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Door Lock-link Switch
1. Disconnect the front door lock actuator connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the door lock-link
switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the front door lock
actuator.

A6E7718W008
A6E7718W012

Door Key Cylinder Switch
1. Disconnect the front door lock actuator connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the door lock-link
switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the front door lock
actuator.

A6E7718W015
A6E7718W022

End Of Sie

S31

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
REAR DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
Door Lock Actuator
1. Disconnect the front door lock actuator connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the front door
lock actuator terminals and inspect the operation
of the front door lock actuator.
• If not as specified, replace the front door lock
actuator.
With double locking system
Connection
B+
GND
A
F
(F)
(A)
F
A
(A)
(F)
F and E
E
(A and B)
(A)

A6E771872310W01

Actuator operation
Lock
Double lock
Unlock

( ) : RH
Without double locking system
Actuator operation
Lock
Unlock

Connection
B+
A
(F)
B
(E)

GND
B
(E)
A
(F)

A6E7718W018

( ) : RH
Door Lock-link Switch (With Theft-deterrent System
1. Disconnect the front door lock actuator connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the door lock-link
switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the front door lock
actuator.

A6E7718W010
A6E7718W019

End
Of Sie
TRUNK
LID LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the trunk lid lock actuator connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the trunk lid lock
actuator terminals and inspect the operation of the
trunk lid lock actuator.
• If not as specified, replace the trunk lid lock.
Actuator operation
Lock
Unlock

A6E771856840W02

Connection
B+
A
B

GND
B
A

A6E7718W016

End Of Sie

S32

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
LIFTGATE LOCK ACTUATOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the liftgate lock actuator connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the liftgate lock
actuator terminals and inspect the operation of
the liftgate lock actuator.
• If not as specified, replace the liftgate lock.
Actuator operation
Lock
Unlock

A6E771862310W01

Connection
B+
A
B

GND
B
A

A6E7718W016

End OfLOCK
Sie TIMER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
DOOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the glove compartment. (L.H.D.)
Remove the bolt.
While inclining the door lock timer unit along the
body panel in the direction indicated by the arrow,
disengage the bracket hook from the hole in the
body panel.
5. Disconnect the door lock timer unit connector.
6. Remove the door lock timer unit.

A6E771867830W01

A6E7718W004

7. Remove the screw, then remove the bracket.
Note
• The screw which fixes the door lock timer
unit and bracket is for a body ground
connection. Be sure to secure the screw
when installing.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7718W020

End Of Sie

S33

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT INSPECTION

A6E771867830W02

1. Measure the voltage at the door lock timer unit terminals (other than terminal 1E and 2W) as indicated below.
• If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Action.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Disconnect the door lock timer unit connector and inspect for continuity between terminal 1E or 2W and the
bracket.
4. Inspect for continuity at terminal 1E and 2W as indicated below.
5. If the parts and wiring harnesses are okay but the system still does not work properly, perform the troubleshooting.
Terminal voltage list (Reference)

A6E7718W017

Terminal

Signal

Power
supply

Room light
control

1E
1F*1

Unlock
output

Lock output

Power
ground

Connected to

D. LOCK 30 A fuse

• Front map light
• Rear map light
• Courtesy light

• Door lock
actuator
• Trunk lid lock
actuator (4SD)
• Liftgate lock
actuator (5HB)

Test condition

Under any condition

Any door is open

While lock actuator is unlocking

Other

Double lock
Door lock actuator
output

While lock actuator is locking

Other

Door lock actuators are double
locked
Other

Power
supply

METER IG 15 A fuse Under any condition

IG1

ROOM 15 A fuse

Ignition switch is at ON position

S34

Below 1.0

Below
1.0→B+→Below
1.0

Below 1.0

B+

Below 1.0

Under any condition: inspect for
continuity to ground

GND

Voltage (V)/
Continuity

Ignition switch is at LOCK or
ACC position
-

Yes
Below
1.0→B+→Below
1.0
Below 1.0
B+
B+
Below 1.0
-

Action
• Inspect D. LOCK
30 A fuse
• Inspect the vehicle
battery
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect ROOM 15 A
fuse
• Inspect door switch
• Inspect front map light
• Inspect rear map light
• Inspect courtesy light
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect door lock
actuator
• Inspect trunk lid lock
actuator (4SD)
• Inspect liftgate lock
actuator (5HB)
• Inspect D. LOCK
30 A fuse
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect door lock
actuator
• Inspect trunk lid lock
actuator (4SD)
• Inspect liftgate lock
actuator (5HB)
• Inspect D. LOCK
30 A fuse
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect GND
• Inspect door lock
actuator
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect METER IG
15 A fuse
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect ROOM 15 A
fuse
• Inspect related
harness
-

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
Terminal

Signal

Connected to

2D
2E

2G
2H

Hazard

2J*1

Door open/
closed

2L
2N
2M
2O

2T
2U
2V
2W
2X

Key reminder switch

Liftgate
Door switch
open/closed

Security
light output

2P*2

*1
*2

Key
reminder
switch

Theftdeterrent
alarm
control
Lock input

Flasher unit

Instrument cluster

Door switch
Theft-deterrent
control module

Door lock-link switch

Unlock input Door lock-link switch

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
B+

•

Other

Below 1.0

•

Lliftgate is open (cargo
compartment light switch is on)

Below 1.0

Liftgate are closed (cargo
compartment light switch are off)

B+

Test condition
Key reminder switch at on

Transmitter LOCK
button is pressed
Except
vehicles
Transmitter
with theft- UNLOCK button is
deterrent pressed
system
No transmitter
buttons are pressed

B+→Below
1.0→B+
B+→Below
1.0→B+→Below
1.0→B+

B+

Double locking system operated

1.4

Other

B+

Ignition switch is at ON position
Other
Drivers side door is locked:
inspect for continuity to ground
Drivers side door is unlocked:
inspect for continuity to ground
Drivers side door is locked:
inspect for continuity to ground
Drivers side door is unlocked:
inspect for continuity to ground
At the moment of key cylinder is
locked
At the moment of key cylinder is
unlocked

• Door key cylinder
switch (drivers
Lock/Unlock
side)*1
input
• Door key cylinder
switch
(passengers side) Key cylinder at neutral position
Signal
Under any condition: inspect for
GND
ground
continuity to ground
-

•
•

Inspect key reminder
switch
Inspect related
harness
Inspect cargo
compartment light
switch
Inspect related
harness
-

• Inspect flasher unit
• Inspect related
harness

B+

Vehicles
with theftUnder any condition
deterrent
system

Any door is open (any door
switch is on)
All door are closed (door
switches are off)
-

Action

Below 1.0
B+
B+→Below
1.0→B+
B+
Yes
No
No
Yes
Approx. 2.5
Below 1.0
Approx. 5
Yes
-

• Inspect theftdeterrent control
module
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect instrument
cluster
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect door
switches
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect theftdeterrent control
module
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect door lock-link
switch
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect door lock-link
switch
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect key cylinder
switch
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect GND
-

: Vehicles with double locking system
: Vehicles with theft-deterrent system

S35

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
End
OfLOCK
Sie TIMER UNIT ID CODE CHANGE
DOOR

A6E771801097W01

Note
• When programming the ID code into a door lock timer unit, verify that other transmitters are not being
operated in the vicinity.

A6E7718W021

End Of Sie

S36

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
TRANSMITTER BATTERY REPLACEMENT
1. Insert a small screwdriver into the slot and gently
pry open the transmitter.

A6E771800110W01

A6E7718W001

2. Press the portion of the battery indicated by A and
remove the battery.
3. Install a new battery (CR2025) into the front
portion of the holder with the positive pole (+)
facing up. Press on the B portion of the battery to
set the battery.

A6E7718W002

4. Align the front and back covers and snap the
transmitter shut.

Battery specification
Lithium CR2025 × 1
Note
• The batteries will last about 2 years when
used 10 times a day.

A6E7718W003

End Of Sie

S37

POWER DOOR LOCK SYSTEM
TRANSMITTER BATTERY INSPECTION

A6E771800110W02

Caution
• Since the battery voltage does not drop fully if the button is pushed for only 4 seconds or less, it
can not be properly examined to see whether it is good or bad. Always push the button for 5
seconds.
Note
• A correct measurement can not be obtained if the battery temperature is low. Make sure the battery is at
18 °C {64 °F} or more for at least 30 minutes before reinspecting if a measurement value is under the
standard voltage.
1. Remove the transmitter cover.
2. Apply the circuit tester leads to the positions as
indicated in the figure.

A6E7718W005

3. While pressing the battery as shown in the figure,
press the LOCK and UNLOCK buttons on the
transmitter at the same time to start measurement
of the voltage.
4. Release the buttons after 5 seconds.
5. Verify that the minimum voltage is the standard
voltage or more for 10 seconds after starting
measurement.
• If the voltage is under the standard voltage,
replace the battery.
Standard voltage
2.7 V

End Of Sie

S38

A6E7718W006

TRUNK LID

TRUNK LID
TRUNK LID REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E772052610W01

Warning
• Removing the stay damper without supporting the trunk lid can be dangerous. The trunk lid may
fall and injure you. Open the trunk lid fully and support it before removing the stay damper.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the trunk lid harness connector, pull
the trunk lid harness out from the cabin.

A6E7720W001

3. Disconnect the hooks, which secure the trunk lid
harness to the trunk lid hinge.

A6E7720W004

4. Pry away the stay damper's band with a
screwdriver.
5. Pry out the connecting part of the stay damper
and the hinge with a screwdriver to disconnect
them. Then remove the stay damper.

A6E7720W002

S39

TRUNK LID
6. Remove the nuts, then remove the trunk lid.
7. Remove the bolts, then remove the trunk lid
hinge.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
9. Adjust the trunk lid. (See S41 TRUNK LID
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7720W007

End Of Sie
TRUNK
LID DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the trunk lid trim.
To remove the trunk lid outer handle and trunk lid key cylinder, remove the rear finisher.
Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E772052610W02

A6E7720W006

1
2
3
4

Trunk Lid latch and lock actuator
Trunk Lid outer handle
Trunk Lid key cylinder
Clip

End Of Sie

S40

5
6
7

Stopper
Trunk Lid weatherstrip
Trunk Lid

TRUNK LID
TRUNK LID ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height between the front door and the body.
2. If not as specified, loosen the door hinge
installation bolts or the door lock striker
installation screws, and reposition the door.

A6E772052610W03

Clearance
a: 2.54.5 mm {0.100.18 in}
b: -1.01.0 mm {-0.040.04 in}
c: 4.08.0 mm {0.160.31 in}
3. Tighten the bolts or screws.

A6E7720W005

End
Sie
STAYOfDAMPER
DISPOSAL

A6E772052610W04

Note
• The gas in the stay damper is colorless, odorless, and non-toxic.
1. Wear protective eye wear.
2. Lay the stay damper flat.
3. Saw through the stay damper body using a
hacksaw.
4. Allow the gas to escape from the stay damper.
5. Discard the stay damper.

A6E7722W006

End Of Sie

S41

LIFTGATE

LIFTGATE
LIFTGATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E772262010W01

Warning
• Removing the stay damper without supporting the liftgate can be dangerous. The liftgate may fall
and injure you. Open the liftgate fully and support it before removing the stay damper.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the liftgate lower upper trim.
3. Press the liftgate harness connector's bracket, which is attached to the liftgate, to the (1) direction shown in the
figure, and then detach the fit. Then remove the connector toward the (2) direction shown in the figure.
4. Disconnect the vehicle harness connector and the liftgate connector. Then remove the grommet from the
liftgate.

A6E7722W003

5. Pry away the stay damper's band with a
screwdriver.
6. Pry out the connecting part of the stay damper
and the hinge with a screwdriver to disconnect
them. Then remove the stay damper.
7. Remove the bolts A, then remove the liftgate.
8. To remove the hinge, remove the headliner and
the nut.

A6E7722W005

S42

LIFTGATE
9. To remove the stay damper, remove the bolt B.

A6E7722W001

10. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

S43

LIFTGATE
LIFTGATE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the liftgate lower trim.
To remove the liftgate outer handle and liftgate key cylinder, remove the rear finisher.
To remove the stud ball, separate the stud ball and the stay damper.
Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E772262010W02

A6E7722W007

1
2
3
4
5

Liftgate latch and lock actuator
Liftgate outer handle
Liftgate key cylinder
Clip
Stud ball

6
7
8
9

Liftgate wedge
Liftgate dovetail
Liftgate
Stpper

End OfDAMPER
Sie
STAY
DISPOSAL
1. Referring to procedures for trunk lid stay damper disposal, dispose of the liftgate stay damper.

End Of Sie

S44

A6E772262620W01

LIFTGATE
LIFTGATE ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the gap and height between the liftgate and the body.
2. If not as specified, loosen the liftgate hinge
installation bolts or the liftgate striker installation
screws, and reposition the liftgate.

A6E772262010W03

Clearance
a: 3.07.0 mm {0.120.28 in}
b: -1.03.4 mm {-0.04013 in}
c: 2.85.2 mm {0.110.24 in}
d: -1.21.2 mm {0.050.05 in}
e: 2.85.8 mm {0.110.22 in}
f:4.08.0 mm {0.160.31 in}
3. Tighten the bolts or screws.

A6E7722W004

End Of Sie
S

S45

FUEL-FILLER LID AND OPENER

FUEL-FILLER LID AND OPENER
FUEL-FILLER LID AND OPENER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E772456890W01

1. To remove the fuel-filler lid opener, remove the left side trunk side trim (4SD) or trunk side lower trim (5HB).
2. To remove the fuel-filler lid opener cable, perform the following and turn over the floor covering.
(1) Remove the driver-side front seat.
(2) Remove the driver-side front scuff plate.
(3) Remove the driver-side rear scuff plate.
(4) Remove the driver-side B-pillar lower trim.
(5) Remove the driver-side tire house trim.
(6) Remove the rear seat cushion. (R.H.D., 4SD)
(7) Remove the rear seat installation bolts (front side), then lift the rear seat cushion. (R.H.D., 5HB)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Fuel-filler lid
Lift spring
Fuel-filler lid opener
Cover
Fuel-filler lid opener lever
Fuel-filler lid opener cable

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the fuel-filler lid. (See S46 FUEL-FILLER
LID ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7724W001

End Of Sie LID ADJUSTMENT
FUEL-FILLER
1. If not as specified, loosen the fuel-filler lid installation bolts, and reposition the fuel-filler lid.
2. Measure the gap and height between the fuel-filler lid and the body.

A6E772442410W01

Clearance
a: 1.73.7 mm {0.0670.145 in}
b: -0.51.5 mm {-0.0190.059 in}
3. Tighten the bolts.

A6E7724W002

End Of Sie

S46

BUMPER

BUMPER
FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

A6E772650031W01

Screw A
Fastener A
Screw B
Bolt
Fastener B
Front bumper
(See S47 Front Bumper Removal Note)
(See S48 Front Bumper Installation Note)

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7726W003

Front Bumper Removal Note
1. Pull the front bumper ends (wheel arch) outward to disengage from the bumper slider.
Caution
• If only one side of the front bumper is disengaged from the bumper slider and the bumper falls, it
could be damaged. When disengaging the front bumper from the slider, secure the bumper so that
it does not fall.
2. Remove the front bumper from the body.

A6E7726W006

S47

BUMPER
Front Bumper Installation Note
1. Spread the front bumper ends (wheel arches) apart.
2. Attach the front bumper to the body.
3. Press the front bumper connection portion into the body to engage with the bumper slider.

End Of Sie

FRONT BUMPER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E772650031W02

Front bumper mesh
Front bumper fascia

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E7726W004

End Of Sie
BUMPER
REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the front bumper. (See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the headlight. (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Suport the radiator and the condenser using the wire.
Remove the bolt.
Remove the bumper reinforcement.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772650031W03

A6E7726W005

End Of Sie

S48

BUMPER
REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear combination light.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10

A6E772650221W01

Screw A
Screw B
Screw C
Fastener A
Bolt A
Fastener B
Rear bumper
(See S49 Rear Bumper Removal Note)
(See S49 Rear Bumper Installation Note)
Refractor
(See S50 Refractor Removal Note)
Bolt B
Rear bumper reinforcement

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7726W001

Rear Bumper Removal Note
1. Pull the rear bumper ends (wheel arch) outward
to disengage with the bumper slider.

Caution
• If only one side of the rear bumper is
disengaged from the bumper slider and
the bumper falls, it could be damaged.
When disengaging the rear bumper from
the slider, secure the bumper so that it
does not fall.

A6E7726W007

Rear Bumper Installation Note
1. Spread the rear bumper ends (wheel arches) apart.
2. Attach the rear bumper to the body.
3. Press the rear bumper connection portion into the body to engage with the bumper slider.

S49

BUMPER, EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT
Refractor Removal Note
1. Lift the refractor up in the direction of the arrow,
then unhook it from the rear bumper.

A6E7726W002

End Of Sie

EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT
RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws.
2. Press clip A in the direction of the arrow, pll the
radiator grille outward and remove from the front
bumper.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772850710W01

A6E7728W005

End
OfGRILLE
Sie
COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E772850790W01

1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See T57 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Front fender molding
Weatherstrip
Cowl grille

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7728W004

End Of Sie

S50

EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT
FRONT FLAP REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws and fastner.
2. Remove the front flap.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772851840W01

A6E7728W011

End OfFLAP
Sie REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1. Remove the screws.
2. Remove the rear flap.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772851940W01

A6E7728W012

End
OfDOOR
Sie GARNISH REMOVAL
REAR

A6E772850030W01

1. Disengage the door garnish clips using a fastener remover.
2. While cutting the double-sided adhesive tape using a screwdriver or a razor, separate the rear door garnish
from the body.
Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
3. Remove the rear door garnish.

A6E7728W009

End Of Sie

S51

EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT
REAR DOOR GARNISH INSTALLATION

A6E772850030W02

Note
• Double-sided adhesive tape has already been attached to the new rear door garnish.
Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
1. When installing a new rear door garnish, follow the procedure below:
(1) Remove the adhesive remaining on the body using razor.
(2) Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the body.
2. When reusing the rear door garnish, follow the procedure below:
(1) Remove the adhesive remaining on the rear door garnish and the body using a razor.
(2) Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the rear door garnish and the body.
(3) Apply primer to the bonding area of the rear door garnish.
(4) Attach double-sided adhesive tape to the rear
door garnish as shown.
3. Peel off the backing of the double-sided adhesive
tape, then install the rear door garnish to the
body.

A6E7728W010

End Of
Sie
SIDE
PROTECTOR
REMOVAL
1. Pry the side protector end 2030 mm {0.81.1 in} using a flathead screwdriver or a razor.

A6E772850680W01

Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
Note
• The side protector is installed with double-sided adhesive tape. If the side protector is difficult to remove,
soften the double-sided adhesive tape using a hot air blower.
2. Pull the side protector toward you, then remove it.

A6E7728W006

End Of Sie

S52

EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT
SIDE PROTECTOR INSTALLATION

A6E772850680W02

1. Remove the adhesive remaining on the side protector (if it will be reused) and the body using a razor.
2. Remove any grease or dirt from the adhesion surface of the side protector (if it will be reused) and the body.
3. Attach double-sided adhesive tape to the side
protector as shown (if it will be reused).
Clearance
a: 30.0 mm {1.18 in}
b: 3.0 mm {0.11 in}
c: 12.0 mm {0.47 in}
d: 3.0 mm {0.11 in}
e: 3.0 mm {0.11 in}
f: 1.03.0 mm {0.040.11 in}
g: 5.0 mm {0.19 in}
h: 2.0 mm {0.07 in}

A6E7728W007

4. Peel off the backing paper from the double-sided
adhesive tape and attach the side protector onto
the body as shown.
Clearance
a: 1.24.2 mm {0.050.16 in}
b: 3.26.2 mm {0.130.24 in}

A6E7728W008

End Of Sie CHAMBER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
EXTRACTOR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the rear bumper. (See S49 REAR BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the left side trunk side trim.
Remove the screw.
Squeeze the clips with your fingers and remove
the extractor chamber from the vehicle side.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772851920W01

A6E7728W001

End Of Sie

S53

EXTERIOR ATTACHMENT
REAR FINISHER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the trunk lid trim (4SD).
Remove the liftgate lower trim (5HB).
Remove the nuts.
Pull the rear finisher toward you, then disengage
clip A from the body.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772850850W01

A6E7728W002

End OfSPOILER
Sie
REAR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the trunk lid trim. (4SD)
Remove the liftgate lower trim. (5HB)
Remove the bolts.
Disconnect the high-mount brake light connector. (4SD)
Remove the rear spoiler.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772851920W02

A6E7728W003

End OfCARRIER
Sie
ROOF
BRACKET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the headliner.
Remove the nuts.
Remove the roof carrier bracket.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E772870600W01

A6E7728W013

End Of Sie

S54

MOLDING

MOLDING
FRONT BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL

A6E773050640W01

Note
• When removing the front beltline molding, the clip may be damaged. If the clip is damaged, replace it with
a new one.
1. Pull the A section upward and remove the clip.
2. Rotate the B section of the front beltline molding
in direction (2), along the direction (1) shown in
the figure and remove it from the body.

A6E7730W001

End
Of Sie
FRONT
BELTLINE MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Press the clip into the body.
2. Press in the B section of the front beltline molding
along the direction (1) shown in the figure to
attach it to the body.

A6E773050640W02

Note
• If the front beltline molding is difficult to
attach, apply soapy water.

A6E7730W003

End Of Sie

S55

MOLDING
REAR BELTLINE MOLDING REMOVAL

A6E773050660W01

Note
• When removing the rear beltline molding, the clip may be damaged. If the clip is damaged, replace it with
a new one.
1. Pull the A section upward and remove the clip.
2. Rotate the B section of the front beltline molding
in direction (2), along the direction (1) shown in
the figure and remove it from the body.
3. Pull the C section upward and remove the clip.
Then remove the front beltline molding.

A6E7730W004

End OfBELTLINE
Sie
REAR
MOLDING INSTALLATION
1. Press the clip at the C section into the body.
2. Press in the B section of the rear beltline molding
along the direction (1) to attach it to the body.
3. Press the clip at the A section in and attach the
rear beltline molding.

A6E773050660W02

Note
• If the rear beltline molding is difficult to
attach, apply soapy water.

A6E7730W005

End Of Sie

S56

MOLDING
ROOF MOLDING REMOVAL
1. Detach the clips which secure A and B sections of
roof molding, using a screwdriver or equivalent
tool.
2. While pulling the roof molding up, detach the fit
for the T stat of the A section and the roof molding
and then remove the roof molding.

A6E773050620W01

A6E7730W007

End OfMOLDING
Sie
ROOF
INSTALLATION
1. Attach the roof molding to the T stud at the A
section.
2. Press in the roof molding along the direction (1)
shown in the figure and attach it to the clip A at
the B section.
3. Hook the roof molding to the clip B at the C
section, press it in, and attach the roof molding to
the clip B.
4. Press the roof molding along the direction (2)
shown in the figure and attach it to the clip A at
the B section.
5. Attach the roof molding to the T stud at the D
section.

A6E773050620W02

A6E7730W006

End Of Sie

S57

OUTSIDE MIRROR

OUTSIDE MIRROR
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the inner garnish.
Remove the front door trim.
Disconnect the power outside mirror connector.
Remove the screws and the mirror retention clips.
Remove the power outside mirror.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E773269110W01

A6E7732W006

End Of Sie
POWER
OUTSIDE MIRROR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E773269110W02

Outside mirror glass
(See S58 Outside Mirror Glass Disassembly Note)
(See S59 Outside Mirror Glass Assembly Note)
Connector (with heated outside mirror)
Cover
(See S59 Cover Disassembly Note)
Outside mirror holder

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
A6E7732W002

Outside Mirror Glass Disassembly Note
1. Press area A of the glass so that area B moves
toward you.
2. Insert a screwdriver into the notch and remove
the glass from the mirror base.

A6E7732W003

S58

OUTSIDE MIRROR
Cover Disassembly Note
1. Pull off the mirror holder tab with a screwdriver
and press the mirror cover tab downward.

A6E7732W004

Outside Mirror Glass Assembly Note
1. Press the mirror into the base so that the pin does
not dislodge.

S
A6E7732W005

End
Of Sie
POWER
OUTSIDE MIRROR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the power outside mirror connector.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the power
outside mirror terminals and inspect the operation
of the power outside mirror.
• If not as specified, replace the power outside
mirror.
Mirror operation
Up
Down
Left
Right

A6E773269110W03

Terminal
B+
B
D
F
D

GND
D
B
D
F

A6E7732W007

3. Inspect for continuity between the power outside
mirror heater terminals.
• If not as specified, replace the power outside
mirror.

A6E7732W010
A6E7732W009

End Of Sie

S59

OUTSIDE MIRROR
POWER OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the front door trim.
3. Remove the screws and the power outside mirror
switch.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E773266600W01

A6E7732W008

End
Of Sie
POWER
OUTSIDE MIRROR SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the power outside
mirror switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the power outside
mirror switch.

A6E773266600W02

A6E7732W001

A6E7734W003

End Of Sie

S60

REARVIEW MIRROR

REARVIEW MIRROR
REARVIEW MIRROR REMOVAL
1. Insert a screwdriver between the mirror and the
base.
2. Push the base pin down to remove the rearview
mirror.

A6E773469220W01

A6E7734W001

End
Of Sie MIRROR INSTALLATION
REARVIEW
1. Install the rearview mirror onto the base.

A6E773469220W02

S
A6E7734W002

End
OfREMOVAL
Sie
BASE
1. Remove the rearview mirror.
2. Wind each end of a wire around a bar.

A6E773469240W01

Warning
• Using a SST (piano wire) with bare hands
can cause injury. Always wear gloves
when using a SST (piano wire).
Note
• Use a long sawing action to spread the work
over the whole length of the SST (piano
wire) to prevent it from breaking.
3. Saw through the sealant to remove the base.

A6E7734W006

End Of Sie

S61

REARVIEW MIRROR
BASE INSTALLATION
1. Cut away all of the original sealant using a razor.
2. Clean and degrease the ceramic coating on the glass and the base.
3. Apply primer to the bonding area of the glass and the base.

A6E773469240W02

Caution
• Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface or the primer may not properly
bond to the surface of the glass.
4. Apply a height of 3.0 mm {0.12 in} sealant to the
base.
Note
• Use only glass primer on the glass, and
body primer on the base. Allow the primer to
dry for approximately 30 minutes.

A6E7734W004

5. Center the base in the ceramic coating and press
it onto the glass.
6. Use isopropyl alcohol to remove any excess
repair sealant.
Hardening time of sealant
Temperature

Surface
hardening time

5 °C {41 °F}
20 °C {68 °F}
35 °C {95 °F}

Approx. 1.5 h
Approx. 1 h
Approx. 10 min.

7. Install the rearview mirror.

End Of Sie

S62

Time required
until vehicle can
be put into
service
Approx. 12 h
Approx. 4 h
Approx. 2 h

A6E7734W005

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER

REAR WINDOW DEFROSTER
FILAMENT REPAIR
1. Use isopropyl alcohol to clean around the damaged section of the filament.
2. Attach tape above and below the damaged
section of the filament.
3. Using a small brush or marking pen, repair the
filament with silver paint or equivalent.
4. After 23 minutes, carefully remove the tape
without disturbing the repaired area.
Caution
• Do not use the rear window defroster
until the paint is completely dry. It may
cause other malfunctions if it is used
before the paint is dry.

A6E773663930W01

A6E7736W003

5. Use a hot air blower heated to 150 °C {302 ° F} for
30 minutes or let the paint set for 24 hours at 25 ° C {77 ° F} to allow it to dry completely.

End Of Sie

FILAMENT INSPECTION
1. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
2. Turn the rear window defroster switch on.

A6E773663930W02

Caution
• Directly touching the rear window defroster filament with the lead of the voltmeter will damage it.
Wrap aluminum foil around the end of the lead and test the filament by touching it with the foil.

3. Connect the positive (+) lead of the voltmeter to
the positive side of each filament and the
negative (−) lead to ground.
4. Gradually, slide the positive (+) lead from the
positive side to the negative side and measure
the voltage. Verify that the voltage decreases
accordingly.
• If the voltage is not as specified or it changes
rapidly, the filament is faulty. Repair the
filament.
Measurement place
(1)→(2)

Voltage (Reference value)
Approx. 12 V→ Approx. 0 V

A6E7736W001

A6E7736W002

End Of Sie

S63

WINDOW GLASS

WINDOW GLASS
WINDSHIELD REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Remove the rearview mirror.
Remove the cowl grille.
Remove the headliner.
Apply protective tape along the edge of the body to protect it from damage.
Apply protective tape to the dashboard to protect it from damage.
Cut the lip of the windshield molding using a
razor.

A6E773863900W01

Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause
injury. Always wear gloves when using a
razor.
Note
• The windshield molding is a replacement
part.
A6E7738W006

Not Reusing Windshield
1. Remove the base.
Note
• For the areas of the sealant that are difficult to cut, use a SST (piano wire) and follow the procedure under
Reusing Windshield.
2. Use a SST, and insert the blade into the sealant.
3. Pull through the sealant around the edge of the
glass.
4. Remove the winshield.

A6E7738W022

Reusing Windshield
Note
• Before removing the windshield from the body, mark the position of the windshield by affixing tape to the
windshield and body panel.
1. Make a hole through the sealant, avoiding pins,
from the inside of the vehicle using an awl.

A6E7738W007

S64

WINDOW GLASS
2. Pass the SST (piano wire) through the hole.
Warning
• Using a SST (piano wire) with bare hands
can cause injury. Always wear gloves
when using a SST (piano wire).
3. Wind each end of the SST (piano wire) around a
bar.
Note
• Use a long sawing action to spread the work
over the whole length of the SST (piano
wire) to prevent it from breaking.

A6E7738W008

4. Working with another person, saw through the
sealant around the edge of the glass.
5. Remove the windshield.
6. Remove the pins from the windshield.
7. Remove the winshield molding from the
windshield glass.

A6E7738W021

End
Of Sie INSTALLATION
WINDSHIELD

A6E773863900W02

Caution
• To prevent the sealant from cracking or the glass from being pushed out by air pressure if a door
is closed, open all of the windows and leave them open until the sealant has hardened.
1. Cut away the old sealant using a razor so that 12 mm {0.040.07 in} thickness of sealant remains around
the circumference of the frame.
Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
2. If the sealant has come off completely in any one
place, apply some primer after degreasing, and
allow it approximately 30 minutes to dry. Then
put on new sealant to create a 2 mm {0.08 in}
layer.
3. Clean and degrease an approximately 50.0 mm
{1.97 in} wide strip around the circumference of
the glass and the bonding area on the body.

A6E7738W023

S65

WINDOW GLASS
4. If installing reused glass, install pins at the
ceramic void on the upper part of the windshield.
5. If installing reused glass, align the front
windshield molding marking and the center of the
upper section of the windshield, then install the
molding to the winshield.
6. Use only glass primer on the glass, and body
primer on the body and the molding. Allow it to
dry for approximately 30 minutes.
Caution
• Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and
do not touch the surface or the primer
may not properly bond to the surface of
the glass and body, which may cause leaks to occur.

A6E7738W005

A6E7738W001

7. Apply urethane to the area of the glass surface as
shown in the figure.
8. Set the the windshield in place and insert the pins
into the body. Install the windshield.

A6E7738W002

S66

WINDOW GLASS
9. Verify that the gap of the A pillar part as shown
the figure.

A6E7738W003

10. Keeping the measurement of the molding lip gap
within specification, press completely along the
perimeter of the glass.
11. Install the seaming welt.
12. Install the cowl grille.
13. Install the headliner
14. Install the interior light. (See T48 FRONT MAP
LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
15. Allow the sealant to harden completely.
Sealant hardening time: 24 hours
A6E7738W004

End Of SieWINDOW GLASS REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
QUARTER
1. Remove the rear door trim.
2. Remove the screw and bolt, then remove the
glass guide.
3. Remove the quarter window and the molding
together in one piece.
4. Remove the molding from the glass.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E773862580W01

A6E7738W024

End Of Sie

S67

WINDOW GLASS
REAR WINDOW GLASS REMOVAL
1. For the 4SD, remove the following parts:
(1) Remove the headliner.
(2) Remove the rear package trim.
2. For the 5HB, remove the following parts.
(1) Remove the rear wiper arm and blade.
(2) Remove the liftgate lower trim.
3. Apply protective tape along the edge of the body to protect it from damage.
4. Cut the lip of the rear window molding using a
razor.

A6E773863931W01

Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause
injury. Always wear gloves when using a
razor.
Note
• The rear window molding is a replacement
part.

A6E7738W009

Not Reusing Glass
Note
• For the areas of the sealant that are difficult to cut, use a SST (piano wire) and follow the procedure under
Reusing Glass.
1. Use a SST, and insert the blade into the sealant.
2. Pull through the sealant around the edge of the
glass.
3. Remove the glass.

A6E7738W022

S68

WINDOW GLASS
Reusing Glass
Note
• Before removing the rear window glass from the body, mark the position of the glass by affixing tape to
the glass and body panel.
1. Make a hole through the sealant, avoiding pins,
from the inside of the vehicle using an awl.

A6E7738W010

2. Pass the SST (piano wire) through the hole.
Warning
• Using a SST (piano wire) with bare hands
can cause injury. Always wear gloves
when using a SST (piano wire).
3. Wind each end of the SST (piano wire) around a
bar.
Note
• Use a long sawing action to spread the work
over the whole length of the SST (piano
wire) to prevent it from breaking.

A6E7738W011

S69

WINDOW GLASS
4. Working with another person, saw through the
sealant around the edge of the glass.
5. Remove the rear window glass.
6. Remove the pins from the glass.
7. Remove the rear window molding from the glass.

A6E7738W021

End OfWINDOW
Sie
REAR
GLASS INSTALLATION

A6E773863931W02

Caution
• To prevent the sealant from cracking or the glass from being pushed out by air pressure if a door
is closed, open all of the windows and leave them open until the sealant has hardened.
1. Cut away the old sealant using a razor so that 12 mm {0.040.07 in} thickness of sealant remains around
the circumference of the frame.
Warning
• Using a razor with bare hands can cause injury. Always wear gloves when using a razor.
2. If the sealant has come off completely in any one place, apply some primer after degreasing, and allow it
approximately 30 minutes to dry. Then put on new sealant to create a 2 mm {0.08 in} layer.
3. Clean and degrease an approximately 50.0 mm {1.97 in} wide strip around the circumference of the glass
and the bonding area on the body.
4. Install the molding as shown in the figure.

A6E7738W025

S70

WINDOW GLASS
5. Use only glass primer on the glass, and body primer on the body and the molding. Allow it to dry for
approximately 30 minutes.
Caution
• Keep the area free of dirt and grease, and do not touch the surface or the primer may not properly
bond to the surface of the glass and body, which may cause leaks to occur.

A6E7738W019

S71

WINDOW GLASS
6. Apply urethane to the area of the glass surface as
shown in the figure.

A6E7738W020

7. Set the position of the front windshield glass and
insert a pin into the body. Install the glass.

A6E7738W018

8. Verify that the gap of the upper part is 7.3 mm
{0.29 in} and the A pillar part is 6.8 mm {0.27 in}.
(Only for 4SD)

A6E7738W016

S72

WINDOW GLASS
9. Keeping the measurement of the molding lip gap
within specification, press completely along the
perimeter of the glass.
10. For the 4SD, install the following parts:
(1) Install the headliner.
(2) Install the rear package trim.
11. For the 5HB, install the following points.
(1) Install the rear wiper motor.
(2) Install the liftgate lower trim.
12. Allow the sealant to harden completely.
Sealant hardening time: 24 hours

A6E7738W017

End Of Sie

S73

SLIDING SUNROOF

SLIDING SUNROOF
DEFLECTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Fully open the glass panel.
Remove the headliner.
Remove the screws.
Disengage the hooks.
(1) Press the rear end of each hook.
(2) After sliding the hooks rearward, press them upward.
5. Remove the deflector.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774069880W01

A6E7740W003

End Of PANEL
Sie
GLASS
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Fully close the glass panel.
2. Fully open the sunshade.
3. Remove the screws, and then remove the glass
panel.

A6E774069810W01

A6E7740W004

4. Peel the weatherstrip off the glass panel.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the glass panel. (See S75 GLASS
PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7740W006

S74

SLIDING SUNROOF
End Of Sie
GLASS
PANEL ADJUSTMENT
1. Fully close the glass panel.
2. Measure the gap and height between the glass panel and body.
3. If not as specified, loosen the glass panel installation screws and reposition the glass panel.

A6E774069810W02

Clearance
a: -0.81.2 mm {-0.0320.047 in}
b: 0 mm {0 in}
4. Tighten the installation screws.
5. Insert a prepaid card between the weatherstrip
and the body of the vehicle. Verify that the
sunroof is shut tightly (there is resistance when
the prepaid card is moved).
• If the sunroof is not shut tightly, readjust by
performing Steps 3 and 4.

A6E7740W007

A6E7740W008

End Of Sie
FRONT
DRAIN HOSE REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the headliner.
Disconnect the front drain hose from the sunroof frame.
Remove the front drain hose from the clips.
Pull the front drain hose into the room side.
Remove the front drain hose.

A6E774069920W01

A6E7740W009

End
Of Sie
FRONT
DRAIN HOSE INSTALLATION

A6E774069920W02

Caution
• If the front drain hose is pinched or bent anywhere, the water in the hose may not discharge and
enter the inside of the vehicle. During and after installation of the trims and the headliner, always
make sure there is no interference with the front drain hose. Fix any problem if found.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Apply soapy water to the front drain hose inserting area.
Insert one end (the wider end) of the front drain hose into the sunroof frame.
Install the front drain hose to the clips, parallel to the pillar and free of slack.
Insert the front drain hose joint into the hinge pillar inner hole.
Install the headliner.

S75

SLIDING SUNROOF
End
OfDRAIN
Sie HOSE REMOVAL
REAR
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the trunk side trim. (4SD)
3. Remove the trunk side upper trim and trunk side trim. (5HB)
4. Disconnect the rear drain hose from the sunroof frame.
5. Remove the rear drain hose from the clips.
6. Pull the rear drain hose into the room side.
7. Remove the rear drain hose.
4SD

A6E774069922W01

A6E7740W010

5HB

A6E7740W011

End OfDRAIN
Sie HOSE INSTALLATION
REAR

A6E774069922W02

Caution
• If the rear drain hose is pinched or bent anywhere, the water in the hose may not discharge and
enter the inside of the vehicle. During and after installation of the trims and the headliner, always
make sure there is no interference with the rear drain hose. Fix any problem if found.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Apply soapy water to the rear drain hose inserting area.
Insert one end (the wider side) of the rear drain hose into the sunroof frame.
Install the rear drain hose to the clips parallel to the pillar and free of slack.
Insert the rear drain hose joint into the rear pillar inner hole.
Install the trunk side trim. (4SD)
Install the trunk side upper trim and trunk side trim. (5HB)
Install the headliner.

End Of Sie

SUNROOF UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the headliner.
Remove the glass panel.
Disconnect the front and rear drain hose from the sunroof frame.
Remove the bolt A, and then remove the rear set bracket.

S76

A6E774069850W01

SLIDING SUNROOF
6. Remove the bolt B and nuts, and then remove the
sunroof unit.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
8. Adjust the glass panel. (See S75 GLASS
PANEL ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E7740W005

End Of SieUNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
SUNROOF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A6E774069850W02

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the deflector.
Remove the glass panel.
Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E7740W001
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

Drip rail
Position plate
Slider
(See S78 Slider Disassembly Note)
Rear stopper A
Sunshade
Sunroof motor
Rear stopper B
Decoration link
(See S78 Decoration Link Assembly Note)

9
10
11
12
13
14

Guide
(See S78 Guide Disassembly Note)
Drive unit
(See S78 Guide Assembly Note)
Set plate A
Set plate B
Front stopper
Frame

S77

SLIDING SUNROOF
Slider Disassembly Note
1. Remove the screw.
2. Slide the slider rearward, and remove it from the
sunroof frame.

A6E7740W012

Guide Disassembly Note
1. Slide the guide rearward, and remove it from the
sunroof frame.

A6E7740W013

Decoration Link Assembly Note
1. Set the pin in the decoration link.

A6E7740W014

Guide Assembly Note
1. Move the guide by hand until it comes to the front stopper.
2. Move the guide by hand until center of pin comes
between mark A and B.

A6E7740W015

End Of Sie

S78

SLIDING SUNROOF
SUNROOF MOTOR REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the headliner.
Disconnect the connector.
Remove the screws, and then remove the sunroof
motor.

A6E774069870W01

A6E7740W002

End Of SieMOTOR INSTALLATION
SUNROOF
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.

Connect the sunroof motor connector.
Connect the sunroof switch connector.
Connect the negative battery cable.
Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
Press the CLOSE side of the slide switch until the sunroof motor stops.
Disconnect the sunroof switch connector.
Install the screws, and then install the sunroof motor.
Install the headliner.

A6E774069870W02

End Of Sie

SUNROOF MOTOR INSPECTION

A6E774069870W03

Motor
1. Remove the sunroof motor.
2. Apply battery positive voltage to the sunroof motor terminals and inspect the operation of the sunroof motor.
• If not as specified, replace the sunroof motor.
Connection
2A
2B
B+
GND
GND
B+

Motor operation
Turn left (Slide close/Tilt up)
Turn right (Slide open/Tilt down)

A6E7740W016

S79

SLIDING SUNROOF
Limit Switch
1. Remove the headliner. (See S96 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Verify the glass panel position.
3. Disconnect the connector.
4. Inspect for continuity between the sunroof motor terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the sunroof motor.

A6E7740W021

A6E7740W020

End
Of SieRELAY INSPECTION
SUNROOF

A6E774069873W01

Note
• Sunroof relay is built in the sunroof motor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the headliner. (See S96 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Connect the sunroof switch connector.
Measure the voltage at the sunroof relay terminals as indicated below.
Disconnect the sunroof relay connector before inspecting for continuity at terminal 1G.
• If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Action and the related wiring harnesses.
• If the parts and wiring harnesses are okay but the system still does not work properly, replace the sunroof
relay.
5. Connect the negative battery cable.
Terminal voltage list (Reference)

A6E7740W019

Terminal

1B
1C
1D
1E

S80

Signal

Tilt down

IG2

Connected to

Sunroof switch

Sunroof motor

Slide close

Sunroof switch

Test condition
Sunroof is tilting down. (Not
including position when fully
closed)
Other
Ignition switch is at ON
position.

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
0
B+
B+

Other

Sunroof is closing. (Including
position when fully closed and
open)
Other

0
B+

Action
• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect A/C 15 A fuse
• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

SLIDING SUNROOF
Terminal

Signal

Connected to

Test condition
Sunroof is fully opening.

Slide open

Sunroof relay
GND
ground

Tilt up

Slide close/
tilt up

Sunroof switch

Sunroof motor

Other
Under any condition: inspect
for continuity to ground.
Sunroof is tilting up. (Including
position when fully closed)
Other
Sunroof is opening/tilting
down.
Sunroof is closing/tilting up.
Other

Slide open/tilt
Sunroof motor
down

Sunroof is opening/tilting
down.
Sunroof is closing/tilting up.
Other

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
0
B+
Yes
0
B+
0
B+
0
B+
0
0

End Of SieSWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SUNROOF

Action
• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect sunroof motor
(See S79 SUNROOF
MOTOR INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect sunroof switch
(See S81 SUNROOF
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect sunroof motor
(See S79 SUNROOF
MOTOR INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
A6E774066560W01

Note
• The sunroof switch is together with the map light.

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the map light from the headliner.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

SUNROOF SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the sunroof switch.
2. Inspect for continuity between the sunroof switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the sunroof switch.

A6E7740W022

A6E774066560W02

A6E7740W023

End Of Sie

S81

DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE

DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE
DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.

A6E774255100W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the glove compartment.
Remove the console.
Remove the meter hood.
Remove the instrument cluster.
Remove the column cover.
Remove the lower panel.
Remove the steering shaft.
Remove the A-pillar trims.
Remove the front scuff plates.
Remove the front side trims.
Remove the side panels.
For vehicles equipped with the wire-type climate control unit, disconnect the wires for the front A/C unit. (See to
U44 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL.) (See to U45 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION.)
14. Disconnect the dashboard harness connectors.
15. Remove the bolts.
Warning
• Removing the dashboard without
supporting it can be dangerous. The
dashboard may fall and injure you.
Always perform these procedures
together with at least another person.

A6E7742W004

16. Pull out the support pins from the body to remove
the dashboard.
17. Take the dashboard off from the driver-side door
opening.
18. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7742W005

End Of Sie

S82

DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE
DASHBOARD DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

A6E774255100W02

Remove the passenger-side air bag module.
Remove the ventilator grilles.
Remove the audio unit.
Remove the climate control unit.
Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E7742W003
.

1
2

Dashboard harness
Dashboard member

End Of
Sie REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
SIDE
PANEL
1. Disengage clips using a tape-wrapped flathead
screwdriver.
2. Pull the side panel toward you, then disengage
tabs from dashboard, and remove the side panel.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

3
4

Damper
Dashboard

A6E774264960W01

A6E7742W010

End Of Sie

S83

DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE
COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Detach the fit of the upper column cover from the
meter hood rubber.
2. Remove the upper column cover.
3. Remove the ignition key illumination.
4. Remove the screws.
5. Remove the lower column cover.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774260200W01

A6E7742W008

End Of Sie
METER
HOOD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws.
2. Pull the meter hood toward you, then detach the
column cover.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774255420W01

A6E7742W002

End Of Sie
LOWER
PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the bonnet release lever.
2. Remove the screws.
3. Pull the lower panel toward you, then disengage
clips A and tabs B from the dashboard, and
remove the lower panel.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774264280W01

A6E7742W009

End Of Sie

S84

DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE
CENTER BOX REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the center panel module.
Remove the screws.
Pull the center box forward, then disengage the
tabs
5. Disconnect the LDC unit connector.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774264030W01

A6E7742W012

End
Of Sie
GLOVE
COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the stay damper to the direction shown in the
figure. Then detach the fit for the glove
compartment from the stay damper.

A6E774264030W02

A6E7742W006

2. Bend the stoppers inward to remove.
3. Turn the glove compartment downward and pull
the clips to remove it.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7742W007

End Of Sie

S85

DASHBOARD AND CONSOLE
CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. For MT vehicle, remove the shift lever knob.
2. Remove the cup holder panel using a tapewrapped screwdriver.
3. Remove the boot panel using a tape-wrapped
screwdriver, disconnect the cigarette lighter
connector, and remove the front ashtray
illumination.
4. Remove the bolts.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774264270W01

A6E7742W011

End
Of SieDISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
CONSOLE
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

A6E774264270W02

Console lid (only large console box)
Box
Rear ashtray case
Bracket
Console
Console cover
Box storage
Lock No.1
Inner console lid
Lid core
Lock No.2
Hinge
Outer console lid
Front ashtray
Boot
Boot panel
Cup holder
Cup holder panel

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

End Of Sie

S86

A6E7742W001

TRIM

TRIM
A-PILLAR TRIM REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn the seaming welt over.
Disengage clips A using a fastener remover.
Pull the A-pillar trim, then disengage clip B (1).
Pull the A-pillar trim upward, then disengage clip
B from the A-pillar trim (2).

A6E774468160W01

A6E7744W023

5. Pull clip B out, then rotate 45° .
6. Remove clip B from the grommet by pulling it
toward you.

A6E7744W024

End Of SieTRIM INSTALLATION
A-PILLAR
1. Cut A-pillar trim tab A to the same length as tab B.
2. Install clip B to the A-pillar trim.
3. Install the A-pillar trim by tapping the clip into the
body.

A6E774468160W02

A6E7744W022

End Of Sie

S87

TRIM
B-PILLAR LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front scuff plate.
2. Remove the rear scuff plate.
3. Pull the area marked A, then remove one side of
the B-pillar lower trim.
4. Pull the B-pillar lower trim, then remove the pin
from the body.
5. Remove the B-pillar lower trim.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468220W01

A6E7744W021

End
Of SieUPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
B-PILLAR
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the upper anchor of the front seat belt.
Remove the B-pillar lower trim.
Turn the seaming welt over.
Pull the B-pillar upper trim toward you, then
disengage, clip B, and pin C from the body.
5. Disengage hook A from the body, then remove Bpillar upper trim.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468210W01

A6E7744W025

End Of SIDE
Sie TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
FRONT
1. Remove the front scuff plate.
2. Turn the seaming welt over.
3. Pull the front side trim toward you, then
disengage clip A and the stud bolt, then remove
the front side trim.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468370W01

A6E7744W014

End Of Sie

S88

TRIM
FRONT SCUFF PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the front scuff plate upward, then disengage
clips B, pins C, D and hooks E from the body, and
remove the front scuff plate.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468710W01

A6E7744W017

End OfSCUFF
Sie PLATE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1. Pull the rear scuff plate upward, then disengage
clips A, pin B, and hooks C from the body, and
remove the rear scuff plate.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468730W01

A6E7744W018

End Of SieTRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
C-PILLAR
4SD
1. Remove the tire house trim.
2. Turn the seaming welt over.
3. Remove the cap using a fastener remover, and
remove the bolt (with curtain air bag system).
4. Disengage clips A and clip B using a fastener
remover.
5. Pull the C-pillar trim forward, then disengage
hook C from the body, and remove the C-pillar
trim.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468240W01

A6E7744W019

5HB
1. Remove the tire house trim.
2. Remove the trunk side upper trim
3. Turn the seaming welt over.
4. Remove the cap using a fastener remover the
bolt. (with curtain air bag system)
5. Disengage clips A and pin B using a fastener
remover.
6. Pull the C-pillar trim forward, then disengage the
hook from the body.
7. Remove the rear center seat belt tongue from the
C-pillar trim. (LH only)
8. Remove the C-pillar trim.
9. Install in the reverse order of removal.
A6E7744W020

End Of Sie

S89

TRIM
FRONT DOOR TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Open the cap using a small screwdriver, then
remove the screw.
3. Remove the inner handle cover.
4. Remove the inner garnish.

A6E774468420W01

A6E7744W009

5. Remove the cover, then remove screw A.
6. Remove the lens cover, then remove screw B.
7. Disengage clips A from the front door using a
fastener remover.
8. Pull the front door trim upward, then disengage
hooks B from the front door.
9. Disconnect the power door mirror switch
connector and the power window main switch
connector (drivers side) or power window
subswitch connector (passengers side).
10. Remove the courtesy light.
11. Remove the front door trim.
12. Remove the switch panel from the front door trim.
13. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7744W010

End OfDOOR
Sie TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable if equipped with power window system.
2. Remove the regulator handle if equipped.
3. Open the cap using a small screwdriver, then
remove the screw.
4. Remove the inner handle cover.
5. Remove the cover, then remove screw.
6. Disengage clips A from the rear door using a
fastener remover.

A6E774468520W01

A6E7744W009

S90

TRIM
7. Pull the rear door trim upward, then disengage
hooks B from the rear door.
8. Disconnect the power window subswitch
connector if equipped.
9. Remove the rear door trim.
10. Remove the switch panel from the rear door trim.
11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7744W011

End Of
Sie TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
TIRE
HOUSE
4SD
1. Remove the rear scuff plate.
2. Remove the rear seat side.
3. Remove the fastener.
4. Pull the tire house trim upward, then disengage
clips A from the body, and remove the tire house
trim.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468760W01

A6E7744W015

5HB
1. Remove the rear scuff plate.
2. Pull the tire house trim toward you, then
disengage clip B from the body and clip A, hooks
C, D from the trunk side trim.
3. Remove the tire house trim.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7744W016

End Of Sie

S91

TRIM
REAR PACKAGE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the high-mount brake light.
Fold the rear seat back.
Remove the fasteners.
Pull the rear package trim upward, then
disengage the clips from the body.
5. Disengage the hooks, then remove the rear
package trim.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468320W01

A6E7744W026

End
Of Sie
TRUNK
SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
1. Remove the trunk end trim.
2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the trunk
side trim.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468860W01

A6E7744W007

5HB
1. Remove the trunk end trim.
2. Remove the trunk side upper trim.
3. Remove the cargo hooks.
4. Remove the fasteners.
5. Pull the trunk side trim toward you, then
disengage clips A from the body.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7744W008

End Of Sie

S92

TRIM
TRUNK SIDE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable. (LH only)
Remove the tire house trim.
Remove the rear seat remote lever.
Remove the screw.
Pull the trunk side upper trim toward you, then
disengage clips A from the body.
6. Disconnect the cargo compartment light
connector. (LH only)
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468860W02

A6E7744W006

End Of Sie
TRUNK
LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Pull the handle toward you, then remove the
handle.
2. Remove the fasteners, then remove the trunk lid
trim.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774458800W01

A6E7744W005

End Of Sie
TRUNK
END TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
1. Remove the fasteners.
2. Pull the trunk end trim upward, then disengage
clips A, pins B, and hooks.
3. Remove the trunk end trim.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468890W01

A6E7744W012

S93

TRIM
5HB
1. Pull the trunk end trim upward, then disengage
clips A, pins B, and hooks.
2. Remove the trunk end trim.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7744W013

End Of SieUPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LIFTGATE
1. Pull the liftgate upper trim toward you, then
disengage clips A, and pin B from the body.
2. Remove the liftgate upper trim.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468930W01

A6E7744W002

End Of SieSIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LIFTGATE
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim.
2. Position the strap hanger as shown in the figure.

A6E774468940W01

A6E7744W003

S94

TRIM
3. Pull the liftgate side trim toward you, then
disengage clips A, pin B and the strap hanger
from the body and pin B, hook C, D from the
liftgate lower trim.
4. Remove the liftgate side trim.
5. Remove the hanger strap from the liftgate side
trim.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7744W004

End Of SieLOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
LIFTGATE
1. Remove the liftgate upper trim.
2. Remove the liftgate side trim.
3. Pull the handle toward you, then remove the
handle.
4. Pull the liftgate lower trim toward you, then
disengage clips A, B and pins C, D from the body.
5. Remove the liftgate lower trim.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774468960W01

A6E7744W001

End Of Sie

S95

HEADLINER

HEADLINER
HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

A6E774668030W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Turn the seaming welt and weatherstrip over.
Remove the sunroof seaming welt. (vehicles with sunroof only)
Remove the A-pillar trims.
Remove the B-pillar upper trims.
Remove the C-pillar trims.
Remove the front and rear map light. (See T48 FRONT MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
(See T49 REAR MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the sunvisors.
Remove the assist handle.
Disconnect the roof harness connector, remove the clip, and remove the connector.
Remove the fasteners.
Disconnect the front and rear drain hose.
Disconnect the rear washer hose (5HB).
Remove the hook holding the roof panel and remove the headliner.

A6E7746W004

15. Take the headliner off from the passenger-side door opening.
16. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

S96

HEADLINER
SHOCK ABSORBING PAD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the headliner.
2. Remove the fastener, then remove the shock
absorbing pad.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E774668H10W01

A6E7746W003

End
Of Sie
ASSIST
HANDLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Insert a screwdriver into the assist handle notch
and remove the assist handle cover.

A6E774669440W01

A6E7746W001

2. Pull the assist handle forward you, then remove
the assist handle.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7746W002

End Of Sie

S97

HEADLINER
SUNVISOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the screws, then the sunvisor.

A6E774669270W01

A6E7746W005

2. Disengage the center adapter (sunvisor stopper)
from the body using a fastener remover.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

YTA7746W103

End Of Sie

S98

FLOOR COVERING

FLOOR COVERING
FRONT FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.
12.
13.
14.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the front seats. (See S105 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the rear seat.
Remove the front scuff plates.
Remove the rear scuff plates.
Remove the console.
Remove the front side trims.
Remove the B-pillar lower trims.
Remove the lower anchor of the front seat belt installation bolts.
Remove the tire house trim. (5HB)
Remove the fuel-filler lid opener bezel.
Remove the fasteners.
Remove the cap nuts.
Remove the clips.

A6E774868670W01

A6E7748W001

15. Take the front floor covering off from the passenger-side door opening.
16. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

S99

SEAT BELT

SEAT BELT
FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E775057630W01

Warning
• Handling the front seat belt (pre-tensioner seat belt) improperly can accidentally deploy the pretensioner, which may seriously injure you. Read SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the front
seat belt. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Warning
• The side air bag sensor is attached to the lower part of the B-pillar. When working around the Bpillar, disconnect the negative battery cable or work carefully, avoiding excessive impact to the
lower part of the B-pillar.
Caution
• The ELR has a spring that will unwind if the retractor's cover is removed. The spring cannot be
rewound by hand. If this occurs, the ELR will not work properly. Therefore, do not disassemble the
retractor.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
Remove the B-pillar lower trim.
Using a screwdriver, pry out the pre-tensioner
seat belt connector's stopper plate.
5. Disconnect the pre-tensioner seat belt connector.

A6E7750W008

6. Remove the covers.
7. Remove the bolts and screw, then remove the
front seat belt.
8. Install in the reverse order of removal.
9. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there
are malfunction in the system. Inspect the
system using the on-board diagnostic
function.

A6E7750W007

End Of Sie

S100

SEAT BELT
REAR SIDE SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E775057730W01

Caution
• The ELR has a spring that will unwind if the retractor's cover is removed. The spring cannot be
rewound by hand. If this occurs, the ELR will not work properly. Therefore, do not disassemble the
retractor.
4SD
1. Fold the rear seat back.
2. Remove the rear side seats.
3. Remove the rear package trim.
4. Remove the bolts.
5. Remove the rear seat belt.
6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7750W005

5HB
Note
• Rear side seat belts are embedded in the rear seat back. See rear seat disassembly/assembly, remove/
install the rear center seat belt.

End Of Sie

REAR CENTER SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E775057730W02

Caution
• The ELR has a spring that will unwind if the retractor's cover is removed. The spring cannot be
rewound by hand. If this occurs, the ELR will not work properly. Therefore, do not disassemble the
retractor.
4SD
1. Fold the rear seat back.
2. Remove the rear package trim.
3. Remove the bolt.
4. Remove the rear center seat belt.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7750W003

S101

SEAT BELT
5HB
1. Remove the rear scuff plate.
2. Remove the tire house trim.
3. Remove the trunk side upper trim.
4. Remove the C-pillar trims.
5. Remove the bolts.
6. Remove the rear center seat belt.
7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7750W004

End Of Sie
FRONT
BUCKLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Perform the following procedure for vehicles with seat belt warning.
(1) Disconnect the negative battery cable.
(2) Remove the front seat.
(3) Disconnect the buckle switch connector.
2. Perform the following procedure for vehicles without seat belt warning.
(1) Remove the console.
3. Remove bolt.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E775057620W01

A6E7750W002.

End
OfBUCKLE
Sie
REAR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the rear seat cushion.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the rear buckles.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E775057720W01

A6E7750W006

End Of Sie

S102

SEAT BELT
SEAT BELT INSPECTION
Belt
1. Confirm that the seat belt is installed correctly.
2. Inspect the seat belt for damage and deformation of metal parts.
• If any damage is found, replace as necessary.

A6E775057000W01

ELR
1. Verify that the belt can be pulled out smoothly,
and that it moves smoothly when wound.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.
2. Verify that the retractor locks when the belt is
quickly pulled.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.
3. Remove the retractor.

YMU811WB0

4. Make sure that the seat belt does not lock when
the retractor is tilted slowly up to 15°° from the
mounted position and locks when the retractor is
tilted 40°° or more.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.

S
YMU811WA4

ALR
1. Pull the belt out fully and the lock mode changes from ELR to ALR.
2. Verify that retractor makes a clicking sound as the belt slowly retracts. If no sound is heard, the lock mode has
not changed to ALR. If necessary, repeat the above Step 1.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.
3. Verify that the belt locks when pulled.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.
4. Verify that the lock mode changes to ELR when the belt fully retracts.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.
Load Limiter Retractor
Warning
• When the load limiter operates, the belt and anchor rub against each other strongly leaving a trace
of wear. If the seat belt is used in this state, the seat belt will not function to its designed effect and
there is the possibility of serious injury to passengers. Be sure to replace the seat belt once the
load limiter operates.
1. If the vehicle has been subjected to a shock in an
accident, pull the belt from the retractor and
confirm that there is no trace of wear (the load
limiter has not operated) by visually inspecting
and feeling the belt.
• If not as specified, replace the seat belt.

YMU811WA6

End Of Sie

S103

SEAT BELT
BUCKLE SWITCH INSPECTION
Driver's Seat
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the buckle switch connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between the buckle switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the front buckle.

A6E775057620W02

A6E7750W009
A6E7750W010

End OfRESTRAINT
Sie
CHILD
SEAT ANCHOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the cover.
2. Remove the bolt and child restraint seat anchor.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E77505777ZW01

A6E7750W001

End Of Sie

S104

SEAT

SEAT
FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E775257100W01

Warning
• Handling the front seat (side air bag) improperly can accidentally deploy the side air bag, which
may seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the front
seat. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
1. Turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Connector
Cover
Front seat

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7752W002

End Of Sie

S105

SEAT
FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E775257100W02

Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
Remove the side air bag module. (See T121 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

Driver's Seat (Normal Seat)

A6E7752W017
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Headrest
Lumber support lever
(See S109 Lumber support lever disassembly
note.)
Recliner dial (dial type)
(See S109 Recliner dial disassembly note.)
Recliner lever (lever type)
Lift lever outer
Lift lever inner
Side cover
(See S109 Side cover disassembly note.)
Reverce cover

S106

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18

Front buckle
Pole guide
Seat back trim
Seat warmer unit (European (L.H.D.) specs. only)
Seat back pad
Seat back frame
Seat cushion trim
Seat warmer unit (European (L.H.D.) specs. only)
Seat cushion pad
Seat cushion frame
Slide adjuster

SEAT
Driver's Seat (Power Seat)

A6E7752W027
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Headrest
Lumber support lever
(See S109 Lumber support lever disassembly
note.)
Slider and lifter switch knob
Recliner switch knob
Side cover
(See S109 Side cover disassembly note.)
Power seat switch
Reverce cover
Front cover No. 1
Front cover No. 2

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20

S107

SEAT
Passenger's Seat
Warning
• Do not disassemble the seat cushion. Doing so will necessitate reassembly which may damage or
press the occupancy sensor. This will cause the misoperation of the air bag system, which may
seriously injure you.

A6E7752W003
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Headrest
Recliner lever
Side cover
(See S109 Side cover disassembly note.)
Reverse cover
Front buckle
Pole guide
Seat back trim

S108

8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Seat warmer unit (European (L.H.D.) specs. only)
Seat back pad
Seat back frame
Seat cushion trim
Seat warmer unit (European (L.H.D.) specs. only)
Seat cushion pad
Seat cushion frame
Slide adjuster

SEAT
Lumber support lever disassembly note
1. Remove the pin from the lumber support lever
installation part with rag.

A6E7752W018

Recliner dial disassembly note
1. Remove the pin from the recliner dial installation
part with rag.

A6E7752W019

Side cover disassembly note
1. Remove the screws.
2. Disengage the clips.
3. Lift the side cover up in the direction of the arrow,
then unhook it from slide adjuster.

A6E7752W004

S109

SEAT
End
OfSEAT
Sie REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
REAR

A6E775257200W01

4SD
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
.

A6E7752W006

1
2

Rear seat cushion
Rear side seat

S110

Rear seat back

SEAT
5HB
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
.

A6E7752W012

Remote wire
(See S111 Remote wire removal note.)

Rear seat
(See S112 Rear seat removal note.)

Remote wire removal note
1. Turn over the trunk floor mat.
2. Remove the case.
3. Remove the remote wire.

A6E7752W014

S111

SEAT
Rear seat removal note
1. Remove the front hinge installation bolts.
2. Lift the rear seat cushion, then remove the rear
hinge installation bolts.

A6E7752W013

End OfSEAT
Sie DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
REAR

A6E775257200W02

4SD
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
.

A6E7752W007

1
2
3
4

Seat cushion trim
Seat cushion pad
Headrest
Striker cover

S112

5
6
7
8

Armrest assembly
Cup holder
Armrest hinge
Armrest trim

SEAT
9
10
11

Armrest pad
Pole guide
Seat back trim

12
13

Seat back pad
Seat back frame

5HB
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
.

A6E7752W015

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12

Headrest
Hinge cover
Seat cushion trim
Seat cushion pad
Seat cushion frame
Remote button cover
Seat back catch cover
Child seat anchor cover
Seat back board
Pole guide
Remote button
Armrest assembly

13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24

Cup holder
Armrest hinge
Armrest trim
Armrest pad
Seat back trim
Seat back pad
Seat belt guide
Retractor cover
Rear seat belt
Seat back catch
Remote wire
Seat back frame

S113

SEAT
End
Of Sie
REMOTE
HANDLE LEVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
1. To remove the remote wire, remove the trunk side trim.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E775200166W01

Remote handle lever
Remote wire
Remote catch

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7752W005

5HB
1. To remove the remote wire, remove the trunk side upper trim and trunk side trim.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Remote handle lever
Cover
Remote wire

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7752W011

End Of Sie

S114

SEAT
SEAT BACK STRIKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Remove the tire house trim.
Remove the trunk side upper trim and trunk side lower trim.
Remove the bolts.
Remove the seat back striker.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E775262361W01

A6E7752W016

End
Of Sie
POWER
SEAT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the power seat switch connector.
2. Disconnect the rear tilt motor connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between the power seat switch connector terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the power seat switch.

A6E775257155W01

A6E7752W029

S115

SEAT
End
Of Sie
FRONT
TILT MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the front tilt motor connector.
2. Inspect the front tilt motor operation when B+ is
applied to the terminals as shown.
• If not as specified, replace the seat cushion
frame.
Motor operation
Up
Down

Connection
B+
A
(B)
B
(A)

GND
B
(A)
A
(B)

( ) : R.H.D.

A6E7752W008

End OfTILT
Sie MOTOR INSPECTION
REAR
1. Disconnect the rear tilt motor connector.
2. Inspect the rear tilt motor operation when B+ is
applied to the terminals as shown.
• If not as specified, replace the seat cushion
frame.
Motor operation
Up
Down

GND
B
(A)
A
(B)
A6E7752W009

End OfMOTOR
Sie
SLIDE
INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the slide motor connector.
2. Inspect the slide motor operation when B+ is
applied to the terminals as shown.
• If not as specified, replace the seat cushion
frame.

Forward
Backward

A6E775288651W01

Connection
B+
A
(B)
B
(A)

( ) : R.H.D.

Motor operation

A6E775288650W01

A6E775288662W01

Connection
B+
A
B

GND
B
A

A6E7752W010

End
Of Sie MOTOR INSPECTION
RECLINER
1. Disconnect the recliner motor connector.
2. Inspect the recliner motor operation when B+ is
applied to the terminal as shown.
• If not as specified, replace the seat cushion
frame.
Motor operation
Forward
Backward

A6E775288663W01

Connection
B+
B
A

GND
A
B

A6E7752W028

End Of Sie

S116

SEAT
SEAT WARMER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the brake boots panel. (See S86 CONSOLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E775259000W01

Seat warmer switch
(See S117 Seat Warmer Switch Removal Note.)
Connector

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7752W001

Seat Warmer Switch Removal Note
1. Squeeze the tabs of seat warmer switch and pull it forward to remove it.

End Of Sie

SEAT WARMER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the seat warmer switch.
2. Inspect for continuity between the seat warmer switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the seat warmer switch.
Drivers side

A6E775259000W02

A6E7752W024

A6E7752W025

Passengers side

A6E7752W024

A6E7752W026

End Of Sie

S117

SEAT
SEAT WARMER UNIT INSPECTION
1. Remove the front seat. (See S105 FRONT SEAT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the seat cushion trim.
3. While inspecting for continuity between the
terminals A and B of the connector, use a dryer to
warm the thermostat of the seat warmer unit on
seat cushion.

A6E775259000W03

A6E7752W020

4. When the indication on the ohmmeter is no
continuity, turn off the dryer, then use a
thermometer to measure the temperature of the
thermostat.
5. Verify that the temperature is approximately
29 °C {84 °F}.

A6E7752W021

6. Verify that there is continuity between the
terminals of seat warmer units connector using an
ohmmeter when temperature drops to
approximately 20 °C {68 °F}.

A6E7752W023

A6E7752W022

End Of Sie

S118

BODY SHELL

BODY SHELL
SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E775453140W01

Remove the bonnet. (See S10 BONNET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front bumper. (See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front combination light. (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the front bumper reinforcement. (See S48 BUMPER REINFORCEMENT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

Radiator mount cover
Radiator mount rubber
Bolt
Shroud panel

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.

S
A6E7754W001

End OfPANEL
Sie
COWL
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E775453580W01

1. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See T57 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the cowl grille.
3. Remove the windshield wiper motor. (See T56 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

Gusset
Cowl panel

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E7754W002

End Of Sie

S119

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
INTERMITTENT CONCERN TROUBLESHOOTING

A6E778058000W01

Vibration Method
• If malfunction occurs or becomes worse while driving on a rough road or when engine is vibrating, perform the
steps below.

Note
• There are several reasons why vehicle or engine vibration could cause an electrical malfunction. Some of
the things to check for:
Connectors not fully seated.
Wire harnesses not having full play.
Wires laying across brackets or moving parts.
Wires routed too close to hot parts.
• An improperly routed, improperly clamped, or loose harness can cause wiring to become pinched
between parts.
• The connector joints, points of vibration, and places where wire harnesses pass through the firewall, body
panels, etc. are the major areas to be checked.
• Check for DTCs or malfunctions by shaking
harnesses and connectors that are
suspected to be causing malfunction.

YDE7780W001

Connector Terminal Check Method
1. Check the connection condition of each female terminal.
2. Insert male terminal into the female terminals to
check for looseness.

YDA8180W000

End Of Sie
FOREWORD

A6E778058000W02

• Always perform basic power window system inspection before troubleshooting.
• Troubleshooting gives content unique to trouble caused by problems in the automatic window return function.

End Of Sie

S120

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
BASIC POWER WINDOW SYSTEM INSPECTION

A6E778058000W03

Manual Mode Function Inspection
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Do all windows go up and down in manual
mode using power window main switch?

Yes
No

• Does each window go up and down in
manual mode using power window
subswitch?

Yes
No

• Turn power-cut switch UNLOCK.
• Push/pull power window main switch
(switches for all doors in manual mode).
• Does only driver-side front window go up and
down?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
• Inspect the following items:
Power window main switch power supply fuses
Power window main switch ground wiring harness
Power window main switch power supply wiring
harnesses
Wiring harness between power window main switch
and power window motor
Power window main switch
Power window motor
Each power window motor wire installation point
Each window installation point on its carrier plate
Each power window regulator installation point on
each door
• Repair or replace the problem area, then go to Step 4.
Go to next step.
• Inspect the following items:
Power window main switch (power-cut switch system
malfunction)
Power window subswitch
Subswitch power supply wiring harnesses
• Repair or replace the problem area, then go to automatic
mode function inspection.
• Manual mode function is normal.
• Go to automatic mode function inspection.
Replace power window main switch, then go to automatic
mode function inspection (power-cut switch system
malfunction).

Automatic Mode Function Inspection
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Operate power window main switch for
driver-side front door in automatic mode.
• Does driver-side front window go up and
down?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.

Driver-side front window does not go up and
down in automatic mode:

• Go to Step 1 of NO. 1 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
DOES NOT GO UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC
MODE.

Driver-side front window go up and down in
automatic mode, but driver-side front window
reverses:

• Gently pull the driver-side front power
window switch while driver-side front window
is going down in automatic mode.
• Does the glass stop?
• Gently press the driver-side front power
window switch while driver-side front window
is going up in automatic mode.
• Does the glass stop?

Yes
No
Yes
No

• Go to Step 1 of NO. 3 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS
GOING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE.
Go to next step.
Replace power window main switch, then go to automatic
window return function inspection.
• Automatic mode function is normal.
• Go to automatic window return function inspection.
Replace power window main switch, then go to automatic
window return function inspection.

S121

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
Automatic Window Return Function Inspection
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Lower driver-side front window completely.
• Use power window main switch to close
driver's window in automatic mode.
• Does window automatically reverse even
though the glass does not encounter a
foreign object while it is going up in
automatic mode?
• Lower driver-side front window completely.
• Take a hammer and hold it against the inside
of the top of the window frame so that the
window will hit its handle when it is closed.
• Raise the window using automatic mode.
• When the window hits the hammer handle,
does it immediately reverse and go down to
approximately 200 mm {7.87 in} from the
completely closed position?

Yes

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 1 of NO. 3 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS GOING
UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE.
Go to next step.

• Automatic window return function inspection is normal.
• Go to IG OFF timer function inspection.
Go to Step 1 of NO. 2 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A
FOREIGN OBJECT IN ITS PATH.

IG OFF Timer Function Inspection
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• In automatic mode, push down power
window main switch for driver-side front
window. Window should go down within
approximately 42 seconds from ignition
switch OFF position.
• In manual mode (finger continuously
depressing power window main switch),
window should go down within
approximately 42 seconds from ignition
switch OFF position.
• Does driver-side front window go down?
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• In automatic mode, pull up power window
main switch for driver-side front window.
Window cannot go up within approximately
4 seconds from ignition switch OFF position.
• Verify that driver-side front window does not
operate.
• Does driver-side front window go up?
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Lower driver-side front window completely.
• Take a hammer and hold it against the inside
of the top of the window frame so that the
window will hit its handle when it is closing.
• Raise the window using manual mode.
• When the window hits the hammer handle,
does it immediately reverse and go down to
approximately 200 mm {7.87 in} from the
completely raised position?
• Open any door.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Push/pull power window main switch for
driver-side front window within
approximately 42 seconds from ignition
switch OFF position.
• Verify that driver-side front window does not
go up or down.
• Does driver-side front window go up or
down?

S122

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace power window main switch, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace power window main switch, then go to next step.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace power window main switch, then go to next step.

Yes

• Inspect door switch and related warning harness.
• If above parts are okay, replace power window main
switch, then go to next step.
• If above parts are incorrect, repair or replace malfunction
part(s), then go to next step.
Go to next step.

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
STEP
5

INSPECTION
• Close all doors.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Push/pull power window main switch for
driver-side front window after approximately
60 seconds from ignition switch OFF
position.
• Verify that driver-side front window does not
go up or down.
• Does driver-side front window go up or
down?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace power window main switch, then go to two-step
down function inspection.
• IG OFF timer function is normal.
• Go to two-step down function inspection..

Two-step Down Function Inspection
• The distance the door glass opens can be changed using the two-step down function. (Approximately 20-100
mm {0.79-3.93 in})
• The two-step down function can be made non-operative. (The function is operative at the initial setting.)
• The two-step down function does not function during IG OFF timer.
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Raise driver-side front window completely.
• When the driver-side front window is lowered
using manual mode, does it go down to
approximately 30 mm {1.18 in} from the
completely closed position and stop for 1
second? (This inspection cannot be carried
out during IG OFF timer function operation.)

Yes
No

ACTION
• two-step down function is normal.
• Recheck malfunction symptoms.
Replace power window main switch.

End Of Sie
TROUBLESHOOTING
INDEX
No.
1
2
3

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
Driver-side front window does not go up and down in
automatic mode.
Driver-side front window does not reverse, even when
encountering a foreign object in its path.
Driver-side front window reverses even though the
glass does not encounter a foreign object while it is
going up in automatic mode.

A6E778058000W04

PAGE
(See S123 NO. 1 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW DOES
NOT GO UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE.)
(See S126 NO. 2 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW DOES
NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A
FOREIGN OBJECT IN ITS PATH.)
(See S127 NO. 3 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW
REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT
ENCOUNTER A FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS GOING
UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE.)

End
Sie
NO. 1Of
DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT WINDOW DOES NOT GO UP AND DOWN IN AUTOMATIC MODE
1

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E778058000W05

Driver-side front window does not go up and down in automatic mode
• Open or short to B+ circuit in position sensor 1 signal, ground signal from wiring harness (between
power window main switch and driver-side front power window motor), inner power window main
switch, or inner motor: Steps 36
• Open or short to B+/ground circuit in position sensor 2 signal from wiring harness (between power
window main switch and driver-side front power window motor), inner power window main switch, or
inner motor: Steps 711
Note
• The automatic function and the ignition off timer function do not operate while power window main
switch is in fail-safe mode. The fail-safe operates when position sensor 1, and/or position sensor 2,
and/or position sensor 2 power supply malfunctions.
• Position sensor 1 and/or 2 malfunction
When driver-side front window is kept up down, main switch can not sense a pulse signal from
position sensor 1 during that can sense 5 pulses (2.5 cycles) from position 2.
When driver-side front window is kept up down, main switch can not sense a pulse signal from
position sensor 2 during that can sense 5 pulses (2.5 cycles) from position 1.
There are 3 abnormal pulse from a pulse signal during driver-side front window is kept up or
down.
There are 20 cycle pulses from a close position during driver-side front window is kept up.
There is no pulse signal during 1 sec. after down is operated.

S123

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT WHETHER POWER WINDOW MAIN
SWITCH ENTERS FAIL-SAFE MODE OR NOT
• Did driver-side front window go up or down in
automatic mode?
2
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch ON position.
• Test voltage at power window main switch
connector terminal 2C (position sensor 1
signal).
• Is voltage alternate between 0 V and
approximately 5 V when driver-side front
window is being gone up and down?
3
VERIFY POSITION SENSOR 1 OUTPUT
SIGNAL
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltage at driver-side front power
window motor connector terminal H (position
sensor 1 signal).
• Is voltage alternate between 0 V and
approximately 12 V when driver-side front
window is being gone up and down at
manual mode?
4
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND
DRIVER-SIDE FRONT POWER WINDOW
MOTOR FOR CONTINUITY
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect power window main switch
connector.
• Is there continuity between the following
power window main switch connector
terminals and driver-side front power window
motor connector terminals?
2CH (position sensor 1 signal)
2DE (position sensor power supply)
2AF (ground signal)
5
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at the following power
window main switch connector terminals:
2C (position sensor 1 signal)
2A (ground signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
6
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Is continuity between following power
window main switch connector terminals and
ground?
2C (position sensor 1 signal)
2D (position sensor power supply)

S124

Yes
No

ACTION
Recheck malfunction symptoms.
Go to next step. (Power window main switch may enter failsafe mode.)

Yes
No

Go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace driver-side front power window motor, then go to
Step 12.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor, then go to Step
12.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor, then go to Step
12.
Replace power window main switch (open or short to B+ in
power window main switch).

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor, then go to Step
12.
Go to next step.

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
7
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltage at power window main switch
connector terminal 2B (position sensor 2
signal).
• Does voltage alternate between 0 V and
approximately 12 V when driver-side front
window is being gone up down?
8
VERIFY POSITION SENSOR 2 OUTPUT
SIGNAL
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltage at driver-side front power
window motor connector terminal G (position
sensor 2 signal).
• Is voltage alternate between 0 V and
approximately 12 V when driver-side front
window is being gone up down?
9
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect power window main switch
connector and driver-side front power
window motor connector.
• Is there continuity between power window
main switch connector terminal 2B (position
sensor 2 signal) and driver-side front power
window motor connector terminal G (position
sensor 2 signal)?
10
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Is there continuity between power window
main switch connector terminal 2B (position
sensor 2 signal) and ground?
11
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at power window main
switch connector terminal 2B (position
sensor 2 signal).
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
12
RECHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER
REPAIR
• Did malfunction disappear?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace power window main switch. (malfunction in power
window main switch automatic mode control), then go to
Step 11.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace driver-side front power window motor, then go to
Step 12.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor, then go to Step
12.

S
Yes
No

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor, then go to Step
12.
Go to next step.

Repair wiring harness between power window main switch
and front driver-side power window motor, then go to next
step.
Replace power window main switch (open or short to B+/
ground in power window main switch), then go to next step.

• Troubleshooting completed.
• Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

S125

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
NO. 2 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW DOES NOT REVERSE, EVEN WHEN ENCOUNTERING A FOREIGN
OBJECT IN ITS PATH

A6E778058000W06

2
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Driver-side front window does not reverse, even when encountering a foreign object in its path.
• Automatic window return range did not reset after battery disconnect: Step 2

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK FOR CUSTOMER COMPLAINT
• Did customer complain that driver-side front
window did not reverse when nearing
complete close?
2

RESET REVERSE AREA STORED IN
DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW MOTOR
• Reset the main switch to recognize driverside front window fully closed position.
• Did malfunction disappear?

End Of Sie

S126

Yes

No
Yes
No

ACTION
• System normal.
• Explain to customer that automatic window return power
window system does not operate when nearing of
complete close.
Go to next step.
• Troubleshooting completed.
• Explain to customer that misadjustment of automatic
window return range was the problem.
Replace power window main switch.

TROUBLESHOOTING [POWER WINDOW SYSTEM]
NO. 3 DRIVER-SIDE FRONT WINDOW REVERSES EVEN THOUGH THE GLASS DOES NOT ENCOUNTER A
FOREIGN OBJECT WHILE IT IS GOING UP IN AUTOMATIC MODE

A6E778058000W07

3
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Driver-side front window reverses even though the glass does not encounter a foreign object while
it is going up in automatic mode.
• Too much driver-side front window friction resistance: Steps 15
• Short to ground in position sensor 1 signal from wiring harness (between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor), inner driver-side front power window motor, or inner power
window main switch: Steps 6, 7

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT FOR FOREIGN OBJECT IN DRIVERSIDE FRONT WINDOW
• Is there a foreign object in driver-side front
window?
2
INSPECT ACRYLIC VISOR BRACKET
INSTALLATION
• Is acrylic visor bracket properly installed?
3
INSPECT TO SEE IF GLASS RUN CHANNEL
INTERFERES WITH DRIVER-SIDE FRONT
WINDOW
• Remove driver-side front door trim.
• Does glass run channel interfere with driverside front window?
4
INSPECT LUBRICANT ON DRIVER-SIDE
CARRIER PLATE
• Is there lubricant on driver-side carrier plate?
5
INSPECT INSTALLATION OF DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW SYSTEM
COMPONENTS
• Are the following parts properly installed?
Driver-side front door glass
Driver-side power window motor wire
Driver-side power window motor
Driver-side power window regulator frame
Driver-side carrier plate
Driver-side glass run channel
6
VERIFY POSITION SENSOR 1 OUTPUT
SIGNAL
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltage at driver-side front power
window motor connector terminal H (position
sensor 1 signal).
• Is voltage alternate between 0 V and
approximately 12 V when driver-side front
window is being gone up and down at
manual mode?
7
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN POWER
WINDOW MAIN SWITCH AND DRIVER-SIDE
FRONT POWER WINDOW MOTOR) OR
POWER WINDOW MAIN SWITCH
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect power window main switch.
• Is there continuity between power window
main switch connector terminal 2C (position
sensor 1 signal) and ground?
8
RECHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER
REPAIR
• Did malfunction disappear?

ACTION
Yes
No

Remove the object.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Reinstall acrylic visor bracket properly.

Yes
No

Repair or replace glass run channel, then go to Step 9.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Apply lubricant (mineral oil).

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Reinstall part(s) properly, then go to Step 9.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace driver-side front power window motor, then go to
Step 8.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between power window main switch
and driver-side front power window motor, then go to next
step.
Replace power window main switch (short to ground in
power window main switch), then go to next step.

Yes
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
• Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

S127

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
FOREWORD

A6E778269000W01

• Go to troubleshooting after identifying the specific malfunction by doing a keyless entry system preliminary
inspection.
Flowchart

A6E7782W002

End Of Sie

S128

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM CHECK SHEET

A6E778269000W02

• Use the sheet below as a customer interview sheet when accepting a vehicle for service.
• If the symptom is Power door lock system does not operate with transmitter at all, find out how the customer
uses the keyless entry system by following the check sheet below.

A6E7782W001

End Of SieENTRY SYSTEM PRELIMINARY INSPECTION
KEYLESS
• Perform the following preliminary inspection before troubleshooting.
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is system an after-market one?

Yes

• Did customer activate keyless entry system
when ignition switch was in LOCK position?

No
Yes
No

A6E778269000W03

ACTION
Perform troubleshooting according to after-market keyless
entry system manual.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
• Explain to customer that system does not work when
ignition is in ON position.
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position, then go to next
step.

S129

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
STEP
3

INSPECTION
• Did customer use keyless entry system in
particular area, such as being near TV
towers, power plants, power lines, or
factories?

Yes

ACTION
Attempt to lock/unlock doors with transmitter in
non-interference area.

If system operates:

• Area of operation is bad. Explain effect of outside
interference on transmitter to customer.

If system does not operate:

• Are any of the following after-market
electrical parts on the vehicle?
Cellular phone
Radio-wave equipment
Remote engine starter
TV, etc.

• Perform on-board diagnostic function.
(See S130 ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTION.)
• Does on-board diagnostic function work?

• Attempt to reprogram transmitter ID code.
• Can transmitter ID code be reprogrammed?

End Of Sie DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTION
ON-BOARD

No
Yes

• Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Disconnect after-market electrical part connectors and
attempt to lock/unlock doors with transmitter.

If system operates:

• After-market electrical parts are interfering with keyless
entry system.

If system does not operate:
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

• Go to next step.
Go to next step.
Go to next step.
• Go to Step 1 of NO. 1 ONE OR MORE ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE.
• Go to Step 1 of NO. 2 ALL ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE.
System is normal now.
Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting NO. 3 TRANSMITTER ID
CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED.
A6E778269000W04

A6E7782W003

End Of Sie

S130

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
No.
TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
1 One or more on-board
diagnostic functions inoperative.
2

All on-board diagnostic
functions inoperative.

Transmitter ID code cannot be
reprogrammed.

A6E778269000W05

DESCRIPTION
• Malfunction in hazard warning light system
(except vehicle with theft-deterrent system), or
door lock linkage system, drivers door key
cylinder switch system.
• Malfunction in door lock timer unit power
supply circuit, door switch circuit, cargo
compartment light circuit or door lock timer
unit ground circuit.
• Malfunction in transmitter battery, transmitter,
door lock timer unit bracket, door lock timer
unit bracket ground screw or door lock timer
unit circuit.

PAGE
(See S131 NO. 1 ONE OR
MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE)
(See S132 NO. 2 ALL
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE)
(See S133 NO. 3
TRANSMITTER ID CODE
CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED)

End 1OfONE
SieOR MORE ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE
NO.

A6E778269000W06

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

One or more on-board diagnostic functions inoperative
• Malfunction in hazard warning light system, or door lock linkage system, drivers door key cylinder
switch system.
• Malfunction in hazard warning light system
Hazard warning light circuit
Door lock timer unit malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between door lock timer unit and flasher unit
• Malfunction in door lock linkage
• Malfunction in door lock timer unit door lock/unlock signal circuit
Door lock timer unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
Note
• For with theft-deterrent system, follow the procedure from Step 4.
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT HAZARD WARNING LIGHT
OPERATION DURING ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSIS
• Did hazard warning lights flash during onboard diagnostic function operation?
2
INSPECT HAZARD WARNING LIGHT
CIRCUIT
• Do hazard warning lights flash when hazard
warning switch is on?
*3
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN DOOR
LOCK TIMER UNIT AND FLASHER UNIT) OR
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT
• Measure voltage at door lock timer unit
connector terminal I (24 pin) during on-board
diagnostic function operation.
When hazard warning light flashed:
B+⇔below 1.0 V
• Is voltage as above?
4
MAKE SURE THAT ALL DOORS LOCK AND
UNLOCK DURING ON-BOARD DIAGNOSIS
• Did all doors unlock and lock during onboard diagnostic function operation?
5
INSPECT DOOR LOCK LINKAGE
• Operate door lock knob and make sure door
locks and unlocks manually.
• Does every door lock system work?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect hazard warning light circuit.

Yes

Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction reoccurs.
• Inspect wiring harness between door lock timer unit and
flasher unit.
If wiring harness is OK, replace door lock timer unit
and reprogram transmitter ID code, then go to Step 7.
If wiring harness malfunction, repair wiring harness,
then go to Step 7.

Yes
No

Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction reoccurs.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect door lock linkage.

S131

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
*6
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN DOOR LOCK ACTUATOR, DOOR LOCK
TIMER UNIT GROUND CIRCUIT OR
ELSEWHERE
• Measure voltage at door lock timer unit
connector terminal C, D (6 pin) during onboard diagnostic function operation.
All door locked: below 1.0 V→B+→below
1.0 V (terminal D, 6 pin)
All door unlocked: B+→below 1.0 V→B+
(terminal C, 6 pin)
• Is voltage as above?
7
RECHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER
REPAIR
• Does keyless entry system operate
properly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction reoccurs.
• Inspect door lock timer unit connector.
• Inspect wiring harness between door lock timer unit and
door lock actuator.
If above parts are OK, go to next step.
If above parts malfunction, repair malfunction part.

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction reoccurs.

End
SieON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC FUNCTIONS INOPERATIVE
NO. 2Of
ALL

A6E778269000W07

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

All on-board diagnostic functions inoperative
• Malfunction in door lock timer unit power supply circuit, door switch circuit, cargo compartment light
circuit or door lock timer unit ground circuit.
• Malfunction in IG1, B+ signal circuit of door lock timer unit
Door lock timer unit power supply fuse malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between door lock timer unit power supply fuse(s) and door lock timer
unit itself
• Malfunction in door lock timer unit's door open/closed signal circuit
Door switch system malfunction
Door lock timer unit malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between door lock timer unit and door switch
• Malfunction in door lock timer unit's liftgate or trunk lid open/closed signal circuit
Cargo compartment light switch system malfunction
Door lock timer unit malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between door lock timer unit and cargo compartment light switch
• Malfunction in door lock timer unit GND signal circuit
Malfunction in wiring harness between door lock timer unit and ground

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT POWER
SUPPLY FUSES
• Are door lock timer unit power supply fuses
okay?

ACTION
Yes
No

INSPECT DOOR SWITCH INSTALLATION
• Are door switches installed securely?

Yes
No

CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT) OR ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at following door lock timer
unit terminals:
IG1 signal (Terminal B (24 pin))
B+ signal (Terminal A (24 pin))
• Is voltage B+?

Yes
No

S132

Go to next step.
Check for a short to ground on blown fuse's circuit. Repair
or replace as necessary.
Install appropriate amperage fuse.
Go to next step.
Install door switch(es) securely, then go back to Step 5 of
keyless entry system preliminary inspection.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between fuse block and door lock
timer unit, then go to Step 8.

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
*4
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO B+
BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND DOOR LOCK
TIMER UNIT, OR BETWEEN DOOR LOCK
TIMER UNIT AND GROUND) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect door lock timer unit connector.
• Measure voltage at following door lock timer
unit connector terminals:
IG1 signal (Terminal B (24 pin))
• Is voltage B+?
*5
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN DOOR LOCK TIMER
UNIT AND GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
• Is there continuity between door lock timer
unit connector terminal W (24 pin) and
ground?
6
INSPECT FOR CHECK CODE 04 IN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Inspect door switch using instrument cluster
input/output check mode.
(See Section T)
• Does DTC 04 function properly?
7
INSPECT DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT OR
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN DOOR LOCK
TIMER UNIT AND DOOR SWITCHES, CARGO
COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH FOR
CONTINUITY)
• Open the driver-side door.
• Is there continuity between door lock timer
unit connector terminal K, G (24 pin) and
ground?
8
RECHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER
REPAIR
• Does keyless entry system operate
properly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Repair malfunctioning wiring harness, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between door lock timer unit and
ground, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair door switch system using DTC 04 inspection
procedure, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace door lock timer unit and reprogram door lock timer
unit ID code, then go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between door lock timer unit and door
switch(es), cargo compartment light switch then go to next
step.

Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction reoccurs.

End 3OfTRANSMITTER
Sie
NO.
ID CODE CANNOT BE REPROGRAMMED
3
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E778269000W08

Transmitter ID code cannot be reprogrammed
• Malfunction in transmitter battery, transmitter door lock timer unit bracket, door lock timer unit bracket
ground screw or door lock timer unit circuit.
• Malfunction in transmitter battery, transmitter, door lock timer unit bracket, door lock timer unit bracket
ground screw or door lock timer unit circuit
Transmitter battery, transmitter, door lock timer unit bracket, door lock timer unit bracket ground
screw or door lock timer unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY
INSTALLATION AND TYPE
• Visually inspect transmitter battery.
• Are below items okay?
Transmitter battery installation (correct
polarity)
Battery type (CR2025)
2
INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY
TERMINALS FOR RUST AND POOR
CONNECTION
• Visually inspect transmitter.
Is there rust on transmitter battery
terminals (positive or negative pole)?
Is there poor connection between
terminals and battery?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Set transmitter battery properly or replace with specified
transmitter battery (CR2025), then go to Step 8.

Yes

Replace transmitter battery or repair transmitter battery
terminal, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

S133

TROUBLESHOOTING [KEYLESS ENTRY SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT TRANSMITTER BATTERY
• Inspect transmitter battery.
• Is battery voltage normal?
4
INSPECT DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT
BRACKET INSTALLATION
• Is door lock timer unit bracket installed
securely?
5
INSPECT GROUND SCREW INSTALLATION
BETWEEN DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT AND
DOOR LOCK TIMER UNIT BRACKET
• Are door lock timer unit and door lock timer
unit bracket connected securely to ground
screw?
6
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN TRANSMITTER BATTERY OR
ELSEWHERE
• Replace with a known good transmitter
battery.
• Does keyless entry system operate
properly?
7
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN TRANSMITTER OR DOOR LOCK TIMER
UNIT
• Reprogram door lock timer unit ID code by
using another known good transmitter.
• Does keyless entry system operate okay?
8
RECHECK MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM AFTER
REPAIR
• Does keyless entry system operate
properly?

End Of Sie

S134

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace transmitter battery, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Install bracket securely, then go back to Step 6 of keyless
entry system preliminary inspection.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Install screw securely, then go back to Step 6 of keyless
entry system preliminary inspection.

Yes
No

Replace transmitter battery, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes

Replace transmitter and reprogram transmitter ID code,
then go to next step.
Replace door lock timer unit and reprogram door lock timer
unit ID code, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction reoccurs.

BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

LOCATION INDEX ................................................. T-5
POWER SYSTEM................................................ T-5
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM ......................... T-6
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM .......................... T-9
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM ...................... T-10
WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM............. T-12
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM ........................ T-13
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM .................................... T-14
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM ................ T-15
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM ........................... T-17
AIR BAG SYSTEM............................................. T-18
POWER SYSTEM................................................. T-19
FUSE SERVICE CAUTION ............................... T-19
MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......... T-19
FUSE BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ....... T-20
IGNITION SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-20
IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION ..................... T-20
KEY REMINDER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-21
KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION.......... T-21
CIGARETTE LIGHTER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-21
CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION ............... T-22
RELAY LOCATION............................................ T-23
RELAY INSPECTION ........................................ T-24
EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM.......................... T-25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT
SERVICE WARNINGS ................................... T-25
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-26
HEADLIGHT AIMING......................................... T-26
HEADLIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-28
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-30
AUTO LEVELING CONTROL UNIT
CONFIGURATION.......................................... T-30
HEADLIGHT ZEROSET .................................... T-31
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-32
REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-32
PARKING LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-33
FRONT TURN LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-33
FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-33
FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING ............................ T-34
FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-34
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-35
INBOARD COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-35
HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................ T-36

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-37
COMBINATION SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-37
COMBINATION SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... T-38
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................. T-39
LIGHT SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-39
LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION .......................... T-40
HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-41
FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-42
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-43
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-43
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-43
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION ......... T-44
FLASHER UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-44
FLASHER UNIT INSPECTION .......................... T-44
RUNNING LIGHT UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-45
RUNNING LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION .............. T-46
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM ........................... T-48
FRONT MAP LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-48
FRONT MAP LIGHT INSPECTION ................... T-48
REAR MAP LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-49
REAR MAP LIGHT INSPECTION...................... T-49
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-50
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
INSPECTION .................................................. T-50
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-50
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-51
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-51
COURTESY LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-51
DOOR SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-52
DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION .......................... T-52
ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-52
IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-53
GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-53
PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-53

PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-54
WIPER AND WASHER......................................... T-56
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-56
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... T-56
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
INSPECTION .................................................. T-56
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-57
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT ................................................ T-58
WASHER TANK
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-58
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-59
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
INSPECTION .................................................. T-59
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-59
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR
INSPECTION .................................................. T-60
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-60
WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE
CLEANING...................................................... T-60
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-61
REAR WASHER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-61
REAR WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION ........... T-61
REAR WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-62
REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION ............... T-62
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-63
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT ................................................ T-64
REAR WASHER NOZZLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-64
REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT ........ T-64
REAR WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING.............. T-64
REAR WASHER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-65
INTERMITTENT REAR WIPER RELAY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-66
INTERMITTENT REAR WIPER RELAY
INSPECTION .................................................. T-66
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-67
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-68
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-69
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
INSPECTION .................................................. T-70
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-70
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
ADJUSTMENT ................................................ T-70
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
CLEANING...................................................... T-70
HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-71

HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-71
HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
INSPECTION .................................................. T-71
WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM ............... T-72
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-72
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION .......................................... T-72
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... T-73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION ........... T-73
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REPAIR.................... T-74
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE .................... T-75
PID/DATA MONITOR AND
RECORD PROCEDURE................................. T-83
FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
INSPECTION .................................................. T-83
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION........... T-84
HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.................... T-84
INFORMATION DISPLAY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-84
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM............................ T-85
BONNET SWITCH INSPECTION ...................... T-85
THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-86
THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE
INSPECTION .................................................. T-86
INTRUDER SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-89
THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-89
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM....................................... T-90
COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION...................... T-90
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE ................................................. T-90
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM................... T-93
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM....................................... T-93
CENTER PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-96
CENTER PANEL MODULE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... T-97
AUDIO UNIT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .......................... T-97
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-98
LCD UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.............. T-98
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................ T-99
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION ................................................ T-100
AUDIO AMPLIFIER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......................... T-100
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......................... T-101
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
INSPECTION ................................................ T-101
REAR DOOR SPEAKER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION .......................... T-102
REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION........... T-102
TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION........... T-103
TWEETER INSPECTION................................. T-103
WOOFER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............ T-103
WOOFER INSPECTION .................................. T-104

NOISE FILTER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-104
NOISE FILTER INSPECTION ......................... T-105
CONDENSER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-106
CENTER ROOF ANTENNA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-107
CENTER ROOF ANTENNA
INSPECTION ................................................ T-107
GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION .................... T-107
GPS ANTENNA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-108
ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION ..................... T-108
FRONT ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION.... T-109
REAR ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION ...... T-109
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM ............................ T-110
CRUISE ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-110
CRUISE ACTUATOR INSPECTION................ T-110
ACTUATOR CABLE REMOVAL ...................... T-112
ACTUATOR CABLE INSTALLATION .............. T-114
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-115
CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION ................................................ T-116
AIR BAG SYSTEM ............................................. T-117
SERVICE WARNINGS .................................... T-117
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-120
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-121
SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-121
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-122
CRASH ZONE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-123
SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-123
SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ........... T-124
SAS UNIT CONFIGURATION ......................... T-124
CLOCK SPRING
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-125
CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT..................... T-125
CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION....................... T-126
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......................... T-127
AIR BAG MODULE AND
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES................... T-127
AIR BAG MODULE AND
PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
DISPOSAL PROCEDURES.......................... T-139
INSPECTION OF SST
(DEPLOYMENT TOOL) ................................ T-140
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
[MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM] ............................................................ T-141
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION
SYSTEM ....................................................... T-141
DTC TABLE ..................................................... T-142
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE .......................... T-142
PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING
THE LOCATION OF A MALFUNCTION ....... T-142

DTC U0073, U1900, U2516 ............................. T-144
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
[HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING
SYSTEM] ............................................................ T-147
FOREWORD.................................................... T-147
DTC TABLE ..................................................... T-148
DTC B1342 ...................................................... T-148
DTC B2141, B2477 .......................................... T-148
DTC B2390 ...................................................... T-149
DTC B2607 ...................................................... T-151
DTC B2615 ...................................................... T-153
DTC B2616 ...................................................... T-155
DTC B2619 ...................................................... T-157
DTC B2626, B2477 .......................................... T-158
DTC B2735 ...................................................... T-159
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
[IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM] .................................. T-160
FOREWORD.................................................... T-160
DTC TABLE ..................................................... T-160
DTC B1681 ...................................................... T-161
DTC B2103 ...................................................... T-162
DTC B1600 ...................................................... T-163
DTC B2431 ...................................................... T-163
DTC B1602 ...................................................... T-163
DTC B1601 ...................................................... T-164
DTC B1213 ...................................................... T-164
DTC B1342 ...................................................... T-164
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO] .................. T-165
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
TEST MODE ................................................. T-165
SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION
PROCEDURE ............................................... T-165
DTC CLEARING PROCEDURE ...................... T-166
DTC TABLE ..................................................... T-166
DTC 09:ER22................................................... T-166
DTC 09:ER20................................................... T-167
DTC 00:ER10................................................... T-168
DTC 03:ER10................................................... T-168
DTC 05:ER10................................................... T-169
DTC 06:ER10................................................... T-169
DTC 07:ER10................................................... T-170
DTC 03:ER01................................................... T-170
DTC 03:ER02................................................... T-170
DTC 03:ER07................................................... T-171
DTC 00:ER01................................................... T-171
DTC 00:ER03................................................... T-172
DTC 00:ER04................................................... T-172
DTC 05:ER01................................................... T-172
DTC 05:ER07................................................... T-173
DTC 06:ER01................................................... T-173
DTC 06:ER02................................................... T-174
DTC 06:ER07................................................... T-174
DTC 07:ER01................................................... T-175
DTC 07:ER02................................................... T-175
DTC 07:ER07................................................... T-176
DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION ................. T-176
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
[CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM].......................... T-179
FOREWORD.................................................... T-179
INSPECTION OF DTCS
FOR OPERATION MODE............................. T-179
DTC 21............................................................. T-181
DTC 22............................................................. T-181
DTC 31............................................................. T-182

DTC 35............................................................. T-183
DTC 37............................................................. T-184
INSPECTION OF DTCS
FOR CONDITION DETECTION MODE........ T-185
DTC 01............................................................. T-186
DTC 05............................................................. T-186
DTC 07............................................................. T-186
DTC 11............................................................. T-187
DTC 12............................................................. T-187
DTC 13............................................................. T-188
DTC 15............................................................. T-188
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
[AIR BAG SYSTEM]........................................... T-189
FOREWORD.................................................... T-189
DTC TABLE ..................................................... T-192
PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE .......................... T-195
ACTIVE COMMAND MODE TABLE ................ T-197
DTC B1231 ...................................................... T-198
DTC B1342 ...................................................... T-198
DTC B1869, B1870 .......................................... T-198
DTC B1871 ...................................................... T-200
DTC B1877, B1878, B1879, B1885 ................. T-202
DTC B1881, B1882, B1883, B1886 ................. T-203
DTC B1884, B1890 .......................................... T-205
DTC B1913, B1916, B1932, B1934 ................. T-208
DTC B1913, B1925, B1933, B1935 ................. T-210
DTC B1921 ...................................................... T-211
DTC B1992, B1993, B1994, B1995 ................. T-212
DTC B1996, B1997, B1998, B1999 ................. T-213
DTC B2228, B2230, B2232, B2234 ................. T-215
DTC B2229, B2231, B2233, B2235 ................. T-217
DTC B2296 ...................................................... T-218
DTC B2444, U2017.......................................... T-220
DTC B2445, U2018.......................................... T-222
DTC B2477 ...................................................... T-224
DTC B2773, B2774, B2775, B2776 ................. T-224
DTC B2777, B2778, B2779, B2780 ................. T-226
DTC B2867 ...................................................... T-227
TROUBLESHOOTING........................................ T-229
CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM .......................... T-229
NO.1 WHILE VEHICLE IS IN REVERSE,
VEHICLE LOCATOR MARK
GOES FORWARD. ....................................... T-229
NO.2 IN NAVIGATION MODE,
VEHICLE LOCATOR MARK SKIPS. ............ T-229
NO.3 EVEN WHEN HEADLIGHT SWITCH IS
TURNED ON, DAYTIME SCREEN DOES NOT
CHANGE TO NIGHT TIME SCREEN.
(FRONT AND REAR COMBINATION LIGHTS
OPERATE NORMALLY.) .............................. T-230
AIR BAG SYSTEM........................................... T-230
NO.1 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ............................. T-231
NO.2 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT IS
ILLUMINATED ALL THE TIME ..................... T-232
NO.3 PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
DOES NOT ILLUMINATE ............................. T-235
NO.4 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED
ALL THE TIME .............................................. T-237

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
POWER SYSTEM

A6E810001072W01

A6E8110W124
.

1
2
3

Main fuse
(See T19 MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Fuse block
(See T20 FUSE BLOCK REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Ignition switch
(See T20 IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T20 IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION)

6
7

Key reminder switch
(See T21 KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T21 KEY REMINDER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Cigarette lighter
(See T21 CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T22 CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION)
Cooling fan relay No.2
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Horn relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Cooling fan relay No.3
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Stater relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Cooling fan relay No.4
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Woofer relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Rear window defroster relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Rear fog light relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
A/C relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Main relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

16
17
18
19
20
21
22

Headlight relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
TNS relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Cooling fan relay No.1
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Headlight cleaner relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Front fog light relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Blower motor relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Fuel pump relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

A6E810001052W01

A6E8112W160
.

LOCATION INDEX
1

2
3

4
5
6

Front combination light
(See T25 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE
WARNINGS)
(See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T26 HEADLIGHT AIMING)
Headlight bulb
(See T28 HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Discharge headlight bulb
(See T25 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE
WARNINGS)
(See T28 HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Parking light bulb
(See T33 PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front turn light
(See T33 FRONT TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front fog light bulb
(See T34 FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T34 FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING)

8
9

Discharge headlight control unit
(See T25 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE
WARNINGS)
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T30 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL UNIT
CONFIGURATION)
Front side turn light
(See T33 FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Front auto leveling sensor
(See T32 FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET)
Rear auto leveling sensor
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET)
Back-up light switch
(See T43 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T44 BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION)

A6E8112W161
.

Combination switch
(See T37 COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T38 COMBINATION SWITCH
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
Light switch
(See T39 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION
(See T40 LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
(See T42 FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHT
SWITCH INSPECTION

3
4
5

Steering angle sensor (with DSC)
(See T39 STEERING ANGLE SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Hazard warining switch
(See T41 HAZARD WARNING SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Headlight leveling switch
(See T43 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T43 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH
INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
6

Flasher unit
(See T44 FLASHER UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T44 FLASHER UNIT INSPECTION)
Running light unit
(See T45 RUNNING LIGHT UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T46 RUNNING LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION)

A6E8112W162
.

1
2

Rear combination light
(See T35 REAR COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Inboard combination light
(See T35 INBOARD COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

End Of Sie

3
4

License plate light
(See T37 LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
High-mount brake light
(See T36 HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

A6E810001052W02

A6E8114W130
.

4
5

Front map light
(See T48 FRONT MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T48 FRONT MAP LIGHT INSPECTION)
Rear map light
(See T49 REAR MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T49 REAR MAP LIGHT INSPECTION)
Cargo compartment light
(See T50 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T50 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
INSPECTION)
Cargo compartment light switch
(See T50 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT
SWITCH INSPECTION)
Trunk compartment light
(See T51 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T51 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT
SWITCH INSPECTION)
Trunk compartment light switch
(See T51 TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT
SWITCH INSPECTION)

7
8

9
10
11
12

Courtesy light
(See T51 COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Door switch
(See T52 DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T52 DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION)
Ashtray illumination
(See T52 ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Ignition key illumination
(See T53 IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Grove compartment light
(See T53 GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Panel light control switch
(See T53 PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T54 PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
WIPER AND WASHER SYSTEM
End Of Sie

A6E810001052W03

A6E8116T101
.

Windshield wiper arm and blade
(See T57 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND
BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T58 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND
BLADE ADJUSTMENT)
Windshield wiper motor
(See T56 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T56 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See T56 WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR
INSPECTION)

T10

4
5

Windshield washer nozzle
(See T60 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T60 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE
CLEANING)
Washer tank
(See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Windshield washer motor
(See T59 WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T59 WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR
INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
6

8
9
10

13
14

Rear washer motor (5HB)
(See T61 REAR WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T61 REAR WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION)
Washer fluid-level sensor (5HB)
(See T59 WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T60 WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Windshield washer hose
(See T61 WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Rear washer hose (5HB)
(See T65 REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Wiper and washer switch
(See T67 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T68 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Headlight cleaner motor
(See T69 HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
T70 HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR
INSPECTION)
Headlight cleaner nozzle
(See T70 HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T70 HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
ADJUSTMENT)
(See T70 HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
CLEANING)
Headlight cleaner hose
(See T71 HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Headlight cleaner switch
(See T71 HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T71 HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Rear wiper arm and blade (5HB)
T63 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T64 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT)
Rear wiper motor (5HB)
(See T62 REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T62 REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION)
Rear washer nozzle (5HB)
(See T64 REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T64 REAR WASHER NOZZLE
ADJUSTMENT)
(See T64 REAR WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING)
Intermittent rear wiper relay (5HB)
(See T66 INTERMITTENT REAR WIPER RELAY
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T66 INTERMITTENT REAR WIPER RELAY
INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

T11

LOCATION INDEX
WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM

A6E810001067W01

A6E8118W012
.

Instrument cluster
(See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T73 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See T73 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
INSPECTION)
(See T74 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REPAIR)
(See T75 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/
OUTPUT CHECK MODE)

End Of Sie

T12

2
3
4
5

Fuel gauge sender unit
(See T83 FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT
INSPECTION)
Oil pressure switch
(See T84 OIL PRESSURE SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Horn
(See T84 HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Information display
(See T84 INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

A6E810050000W01

A6E8120W007
.

Theft-deterrent control module
(See T86 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T86 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL
MODULE INSPECTION)
Bonnet switch
(See T85 BONNET SWITCH INSPECTION)

3
4
5

Intruder sensor (Vehicle with sliding sunroof)
(See T89 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Intruder sensor (Vehicle without sliding sunroof)
(See T89 INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Theft-deterrent siren
(See T89 THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

T13

LOCATION INDEX
IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

A6E810067000W01

A6E8122W004
.

1
2

Coil
(See T90 COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Key (transponder)
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)

End Of Sie

T14

PCM
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)

LOCATION INDEX
AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM

A6E810001066W01

Audio System

A6E8124W044
.

Audio unit
(See T93 ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
(See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T97 CENTER PANEL MODULE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See T97 AUDIO UNIT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Front door speaker
(See T101 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T101 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
INSPECTION)
Rear door speaker
(See T102 REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T102 REAR DOOR SPEAKER
INSPECTION)
Tweeter
(See T103 TWEETER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T103 TWEETER INSPECTION)
Woofer
(See T103 WOOFER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T104 WOOFER INSPECTION)

7
8

10
11
12

Center roof antenna
(See T107 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T107 CENTER ROOF ANTENNA
INSPECTION)
Glass antenna
(See T107 GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION)
Antenna feeder
(See T108 ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION)
(See T109 FRONT ANTENNA FEEDER
INSPECTION)
(See T109 REAR ANTENNA FEEDER
INSPECTION)
Noise filter
(See T104 NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T105 NOISE FILTER INSPECTION)
Condenser
(See T106 CONDENSER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Audio amplifier
(See T100 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Audio control switch
(See T99 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T100 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION)

T15

LOCATION INDEX
Car-navigation System

A6E8124W045
.

1
2
3
4

Car-navigation unit
(See T98 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Car-navigation unit
(See T98 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
GPS antenna
(See T108 GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Audio unit
(See T93 ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM)
(See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T97 CENTER PANEL MODULE
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See T97 AUDIO UNIT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)

End Of Sie

T16

Front door speaker
(See T101 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T101 FRONT DOOR SPEAKER
INSPECTION)
Tweeter
(See T103 TWEETER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T103 TWEETER INSPECTION)
Audio amplifier
(See T100 AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

A6E810001011W01

A6E8128W017
.

Cruise actuator
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR INSPECTION)
Actuator cable
(See T112 ACTUATOR CABLE REMOVAL)
(See T114 ACTUATOR CABLE INSTALLATION)

Cruise control switch
(See T115 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T116 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION)

End Of Sie

T17

LOCATION INDEX
AIR BAG SYSTEM

A6E810001046W01

A6E8130W049
.

Driver-side air bag module
(See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T127 AIR BAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT
PROCEDURES)
Passenger-side air bag module
(See T121 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T127 AIR BAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT
PROCEDURES)
Side air bag module
(See T121 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T127 AIR BAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT
PROCEDURES)
Curtain air bag module
(See T122 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See T127 AIR BAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT
PROCEDURES)

End Of Sie

T18

6
7
8
9

Pre-tensioner seat belt
(See T127 AIR BAG MODULE AND PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT
PROCEDURES)
SAS unit
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Crash zone sensor
(See T123 CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Side air bag sensor
(See T123 SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Clock spring
(See T125 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See T126 CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION)
(See T125 CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT)
Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light
(See T127 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

POWER SYSTEM

POWER SYSTEM
FUSE SERVICE CAUTION

A6E811066000W01

Caution
• Determine and correct the cause of the burnt fuse before replacing it with the specified type. If the
fuse is replaced before doing this, it may burn again.

End Of Sie

MAIN FUSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the main fuse block cover.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811066761W01

Nut
Bolt (See T19 Bolt Removal Note)
Main fuse

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8110W108

Bolt Removal Note
1. Press and remove the tabs on the main fuse
block at the positions indicated by the arrows.

A6E8110W119

2. Lift up the main fuse block and remove the bolts.

A6E8110W120

End Of Sie

T19

POWER SYSTEM
FUSE BLOCK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the left-side front side trim. (See S88 FRONT SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811066730W01

Connector
Bolt
Fuse block

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8110W107

End Of Sie

IGNITION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811066151W01

Connector
Screw
Ignition switch

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8110W101

End Of Sie

IGNITION SWITCH INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Disconnect the ignition switch connectors.
Inspect for continuity between the ignition switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the ignition switch.

A6E811066151W02

A6E8110W116

A6E8110W114

End Of Sie

T20

POWER SYSTEM
KEY REMINDER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the column cover.
Disconnect the key reminder switch connector.
Remove the key reminder switch.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E811066152W01

A6E8110W102

End Of Sie

KEY REMINDER SWITCH INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Disconnect the key reminder switch connector.
Inspect for continuity between the key reminder
switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the key reminder
switch.

A6E811066152W02

T
A6E8110W115

A6E8110W117

End Of Sie

CIGARETTE LIGHTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811067000W01

Cigarette lighter plug
Connector
Socket
(See T22 Socket Removal Note)
Ring
(See T22 Ring Removal Note)

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
A6E8110W103

T21

POWER SYSTEM
Socket Removal Note
1. Insert a tape-wrapped screwdriver into the socket
hole, then press against the ring protrusion to lift
the socket toward you.

A6E8110W104

2. As shown in the figure, lift out the socket until the
ring protrusion locks into the lower socket hole.
3. Remove the boot panel.

A6E8110W106

4. From behind the boot panel, slide a tape-wrapped
screwdriver in between the socket and the ring
protrusion..
5. While twisting the ring protrusion with the
screwdriver, push out and remove the socket.

A6E8110W201

Ring Removal Note
1. Pull the ring forward while compressing the
hooks.

A6E8110W105

End Of Sie

CIGARETTE LIGHTER INSPECTION

A6E811067000W02

1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position.
2. Verify that the cigarette lighter comes out within 1020 seconds, after pressing the plug into the socket.
• If the cigarette lighter does not operate normally, replace the cigarette lighter plug and socket.

End Of Sie

T22

POWER SYSTEM
RELAY LOCATION

A6E811067730W01

A6E8110T102
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Cooling fan relay No.2
Horn relay
Cooling fan relay No.3
Stater relay
Cooling fan relay No.4
Woofer relay
Rear window defroster relay
Rear fog light relay
A/C relay

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17

Main relay
Headlight relay
TNS relay
Cooling fan relay No.1
Headlight cleaner relay
Front fog light relay
Fuel pump relay
Blower relay

End Of Sie

T23

POWER SYSTEM
RELAY INSPECTION

A6E811067730W02

Relay Type
Terminal type
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
Four-terminal

Type A

•
•
•
•
•

Type B
Five-terminal

Type C

•
•
•
•
•

Parts name
Main relay
Fuel pump relay
Stater relay
TNS relay
Front fog light relay
Rear fog light relay
Horn relay
Headlight cleaner
relay
Rear window
defroster relay
Woofer relay
A/C relay
Blower relay
Cooling fan relay No.1
(except L3 engine)
Cooling fan relay No.2
Cooling fan relay No.3
Cooling fan relay No.4
Headlight relay
Cooling fan relay No.1
(L3 engine only)

Four-terminal
Type A
1. Remove the relay.
2. Inspect for continuity between the relay terminals
using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the relay.

A6E8110W121
A6E8110W118

Type B
1. Remove the relay.
2. Inspect for continuity between the relay terminals
using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the relay.

A6E8110W123
A6E8110W125

T24

POWER SYSTEM, EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Type C
1. Remove the relay.
2. Inspect for continuity between the relay terminals
using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the relay.

A6E8110W126
A6E8110W122

End Of Sie

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS

A6E811251060W01

Discharge headlight bulb service warnings
• To prevent electrical shock when replacing the discharge headlight bulb, dry hands thoroughly, and
carry out work in an area out of rain.
• When the light switch is on, approx. 25,000 V
of high voltage passes through the discharge
headlight bulb socket. Because of the danger
of electrical shock, do not insert fingers or a
circuit tester.
• When the headlights are on, high voltage
flows around the socket and bulb. When
turning on the discharge headlights while
working, always leave the headlights in the
vehicle-installed condition to prevent
electrical shock.

A6E8112W163

Discharge headlight control unit service warnings
• Because of the danger of electrical shock,
when inspecting with a circuit tester or similar
device, do not inspect the discharge headlight
control unit as a single unit or disassemble it.
• If there are scratches or damage to the
discharge headlight control unit, or it has
been impacted, there may be damage despite
apparent normal operation. Therefore, to
prevent electrical shock or operation error,
replace with new parts.
A6E8112W164

End Of Sie

T25

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811251060W02

Caution
• Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing
the discharge headlights, always refer to the Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Note
• When the ignition switch is turned to ON, it is normal to hear the headlight leveling actuator operating for a
few second, as it verifies headlight auto leveling system operating condition.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the front bumper. (See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5

Connector
Bolt
Clip
Cover
Front combination light

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the headlight aiming. (See T26
HEADLIGHT AIMING.)
A6E8112W101

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT AIMING
Low-beam
1. Set up a screen as shown in the figure below for
aiming the headlights.

A6E811251030W01

A6E8112W132

2. Adjust the tire air pressure to the specification.
3. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level
surface.
4. Seat one person in the driver's seat.
5. Position the vehicle straight ahead and
perpendicular to a wall.

A6E8112W133

T26

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.
11.

Set the headlights 3 m {10 ft} from the wall.
While adjusting one headlight, mask the other.
Start the engine to charge the battery.
Turn on the lower-beam headlight.
Set the headlight leveling switch to 0 position.
Adjust the headlights by turning the adjusting
screws as shown in the figure. Loosen the screws
first, then tighten them.
Note
• If the adjusting screws are tightened first,
then loosened, they will continue to loosen
when the vehicle is in motion and may cause
the headlights to become misaligned.

A6E8112W157

12. Turn the adjusting screws and adjust the
headlight so that the elbow point in the shaded
area in the figure.

A6E8112W125

A6E8112W134

A6E8112W135

High-beam
1. Adjust the tire air pressure to the specification.
2. Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level surface.
3. Seat one person in the driver's seat.
4. Position the vehicle straight ahead and perpendicular to a wall.

T27

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

Set the headlights 3 m {10 ft} from the wall.
While adjusting one headlight, mask the other.
Start the engine to charge the battery.
Turn on the high-beam headlights.
Set the headlight leveling switch to 0 position.

A6E8112W157

10. Adjust the headlights by turning the adjusting
screws as shown in the figure. Loosen the screws
first, then tighten them.
Note
• If the adjusting screws are tightened first,
then loosened, they will continue to loosen
when the vehicle is in motion and may cause
the headlights to become misaligned.

A6E8112W124

A6E8112W136

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Low-beam
Halogen type
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the front combination light. (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811251030W02

Cover
Connector
Headlight bulb (See T28 Headlight bulb removal
note)

Caution
• A halogen bulb generates extremely high
heat when it is used. If the surface of the
bulb is soiled, excessive heat will build
up and the light's life will be shortened.
When replacing the bulb, hold the metal
flange, not the glass.
4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Headlight bulb removal note
1. Release the bulb pressing wire to remove the headlight bulb.

T28

A6E8112W105

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Discharge type
Caution
• Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlights could result in electrical shock. Before servicing
the discharge headlights, always refer to the Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Disconnect the front combination light. (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

Cover
Connector
Bulb cover
Discharge headlight bulb

Caution
• A bulb generates extremely high heat
when it is used. If the surface of the bulb
is soiled, excessive heat will build up and
the light's life will be shortened. When
replacing the bulb, hold the metal flange,
not the glass.

A6E8112W106

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
High-beam
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Cover
Connector
Headlight bulb (See T28 Headlight bulb removal
note)

A6E8112W107

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Headlight bulb removal note
1. Release the bulb pressing wire to remove the headlight bulb.

End Of Sie

T29

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811251030W03

Caution
• Incorrect servicing of the discharge headlight control unit could result in electrical shock. Before
servicing the discharge headlight control unit, always refer to the Discharge headlight service
warnings. (See T25 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
• When replacing the discharge headlight control unit, configuration procedure must be done
before removing the auto leveling control unit. After replacing the discharge headlight control
unit, perform the headlight zeroset for auto leveling control unit.
1. Configurate the discharge headlight control unit (when only replacing it). (See T30 AUTO LEVELING
CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Remove the front combination light. (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

Bolt
Discharge headlight control unit

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Perform the headlight zeroset for the discharge
headlight control unit (when only replacing it).
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET)

A6E8112W141

AUTO LEVELING CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION
End Of Sie

1. Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent) to the
DLC-2.
2. Input vehicle information following the directions
on the screen.
3. Select Module programming.
4. Select Programmable module installation.
5. When performing configuration corresponding to
each auto leveling control unit, select the
following items and perform procedures
according to directions on the screen.
Items
• Main: LHID
• Sub: RHID
6. Retrieve DTCs by the WDS or equivalent, then verify that there is no DTC present.
• If DTC is present, perform applicable DTC inspection.

End Of Sie

T30

A6E811251030W04

A6E3970W002

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT ZEROSET

A6E811251030W05

Note
• When the configuration is not set for the auto leveling control unit, headlight zeroset cannot be executed.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Adjust the tire air pressure to the specification.
Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level surface.
Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent) to the DLC-2.
Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
Turn on the headlights (low-beam).
Input the vehicle information following the directions on the screen.
Confirm that the WDS or equivalent identifies the vehicle, and select Datelogger.
After the screen appears, select LHID under Modules from the cascading menu.
After the next screen appears, select CALAXLSN#.
On the graphic display that appears, press the
icon near the top right of the screen indicated by a
1 in the figure.

A6E8112W158

11. After the next screen appears, press the icon
indicated by a 2 in the figure.
12. After pressing the icon indicated by the 2, press
the icon indicated by a 3 or 4 in the figure to
execute the zeroset setting.

Note
• Pressing an icon indicated by 3 or 4 once
will execute the headlight zeroset setting.
13. After executing the headlight zeroset setting,
perform an on-board diagnostic test and verify
that no DTCs are displayed.
14. Perform the headlight aiming adjustment. (See T
26 HEADLIGHT AIMING)

A6E8112W159

End Of Sie

T31

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Jack up the vehicle and remove the wheel and tire.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811251030W06

Connector
Bolt
Bracket
Front auto leveling sensor

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the headlight zeroset. (See T31
HEADLIGHT ZEROSET)

A6E8112W165

End Of Sie

REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Jack up the vehicle.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811251030W07

Connector
Bolt
Rear auto leveling sensor

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the headlight zeroset. (See T31
HEADLIGHT ZEROSET)

A6E8112W156

End Of Sie

T32

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
PARKING LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811251040W01

Cover
Socket
Parking light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W109

End Of Sie

FRONT TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.

A6E811251050W01

1
2

Socket
Front turn light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W110

End Of Sie

FRONT SIDE TURN LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811268370W01

Front side turn light
Connector

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W127

End Of Sie

T33

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
FRONT FOG LIGHT AIMING
1.
2.
3.
4.

Adjust the tire air pressure to the specification.
Position the unloaded vehicle on a flat, level surface.
Seat one person in the drivers seat.
Position the vehicle 3 m {10 ft} in front of a white
screen.
5. While adjusting one fog light, mask the other.
6. Start the engine to charge the battery.
7. Turn the front fog light on.

A6E811251680W01

A6E8112W157

8. Adjust the front fog light by turning the adjusting
screws as shown in the figure. Loosen the screws
first, then tighten them.
Note
• If the adjusting screws are tightened first,
then loosened, they will continue to loosen
when the vehicle is in motion and may cause
the front fog lights to become misaligned.

A6E8112W117

A6E8112W137

End Of Sie

FRONT FOG LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811251680W02

Cover
Connector
Front fog light bulb (See T34 Front Fog Light Bulb
Removal Note)

Caution
• A halogen bulb generates extremely high
heat when it is used. If the surface of the
bulb is soiled, excessive heat will build
up and the lights life will be shortened.
When replacing the bulb, hold the metal
flange, not the glass.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Front Fog Light Bulb Removal Note
1. Release the bulb pressing wire to remove the front fog light bulb.
End Of Sie

T34

A6E8112W111

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
REAR COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the trunk side trim. (See S92 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

A6E811251150W01

Connector
Bolt
Rear combination light
Socket
Rear turn light bulb
Brake light/taillight bulb

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
A6E8112W118

End Of Sie

INBOARD COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811251380W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the trunk lid trim (liftgate lower trim). (See S93 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION) (See
S95 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Connector
Nut
Inboard combination light (See T35 Inboard
Combination Light Installation Note)
Socket
Back-up light bulb
Rear fog light bulb (L.H.D.: left side only, R.H.D.:
right side only)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

T
A6E8112W119

Inboard Combination Light Installation Note
1. Insert the inboard combination light into the trunk
lid (liftgate) as shown in the figure, then pivot it
inward and fix in place.

A6E8112W120

T35

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
2. Pleace the bracket in the proper position as
shown in the figure and press it to the trunk lid
(liftgate) to attach.

A6E8112W121

End Of Sie

HIGH-MOUNT BRAKE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
In-vehicle-type
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811251580W01

Connector
High-mount brake light
Socket
High-mount brake light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W123

Rear spoiler type
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear spoiler. (See S54 REAR SPOILER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
2

Bolt
Cover
High-mount brake light (See T37 High-mount
brake light removal note)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W115

T36

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
High-mount brake light removal note
1. Tie a string to the end of the connector of the
high-mount brake light beforehand so that the
connector can be passed easily through the rear
spoiler during installation.

A6E8112W116

5HB
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See S95 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Connector
Nut
High-mount brake light
Lens
Socket
High-mount brake light bulb

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
A6E8112W142

End Of Sie

LICENSE PLATE LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear finisher. (See S54 REAR FINISHER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

T
A6E811251270W01

Connector
License plate light
Lens
License plate light bulb

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W108

End Of Sie

COMBINATION SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811266120W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the steering wheel. (See N7 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
5. Remove the clock spring. (without DSC) (See T125 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

T37

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
6. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Connector
Screw
Combination switch

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W102

End Of Sie

COMBINATION SWITCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
1
2
3
4

A6E811266120W02

Screw
Wiper and washer switch (Light switch)
Light switch (Wiper and washer switch)
Body

A6E8112W103

End Of Sie

T38

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
STEERING ANGLE SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E811266120W03

With DSC
1. Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Disconnect the steering angle sensor connector.
3. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal A and ground to terminal F of the steering angle sensor.
4. Turn the steering wheel to the right and left, and
verify that the voltage and pulses at the terminals
are as shown in the figure.
• If not as specified, replace the body of the
combination switch.

A6E8112W143

End Of Sie

LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811266121W01

Connector
Screw
Light switch

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W112

End Of Sie

T39

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
Light switch LH side
1. Remove the light switch. (See T39 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the light switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the light switch.

A6E811266121W02

Headlight switch

A6E8112W129

A6E8112W144

Turn switch

A6E8112W130
A6E8112W145

T40

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Light switch RH side
1. Remove the light switch. (See T39 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the light switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the light switch.
Headlight switch

A6E8112W131

A6E8112W146

Turn switch

A6E8112W139
A6E8112W147

End Of Sie

HAZARD WARNING SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Inspection the hazard warning switch. (See U47 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION)

A6E811266401W01

End Of Sie

T41

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
FRONT AND REAR FOG LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
Light switch LH side
1. Remove the light switch. (See T39 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect for continuity between the light switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the light switch.

A6E811266402W01

A6E8112W140

A6E8112W148

Light switch RH side
1. Remove the light switch. (See T39 LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect for continuity between the light switch
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the light switch.

A6E8112W166

A6E8112W167

End Of Sie

T42

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811251030W08

Headlight leveling switch (See T43 Headlight
Leveling Switch Removal Note)
Connector

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W138

Headlight Leveling Switch Removal Note
1. Insert your hand from the lower side of the dashboard and squeeze the tabs of the headlight leveling switch.
2. Pull the headlight leveling switch forward to remove it.

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the headlight leveling switch. (See T43 HEADLIGHT LEVELING SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect for continuity between the headlight
leveling switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the headlight
leveling switch.

A6E811251030W09

A6E8112W152

A6E8112W151

End Of Sie

BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811217640W01

Connector
Back-up light switch

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W104

End Of Sie

T43

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
BACK-UP LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the back-up light switch connector.
2. Inspect for continuity between the back-up light
switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the back-up light
switch.

A6E811217640W02

A6E8112W153

A6E8112W128

End Of Sie

FLASHER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811266830W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the instrument cluster. (See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Connector
Screw
Flasher unit

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W114

End Of Sie

FLASHER UNIT INSPECTION

A6E811266830W02

1. Connect the connector to the flasher unit.
2. Connect the negative battery cable.
3. Measure the voltage at the flasher unit using voltmeter.
• When inspecting terminal F for continuity, disconnect the flasher unit connector.
4. If the value are not as specified in the Terminal Voltage List (Reference), inspect the parts under Action and
related wiring harnesses.
5. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the flasher unit.

T44

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Terminal Voltage List (Reference)

A6E8112W154

Terminal

Signal

Connected to

Power supply

HAZARD 10 A
fuse

Turn signal
flasher (LH)

Turn signal light
(LH)

Flasher unit
ground

GND

Turn signal
flasher (RH)

Turn signal light
(RH)

Hazard warning Hazard warning
on
switch

Turn switch on/
off (RH)

Combination
switch

Turn switch on/
off (LH)

Combination
switch

Test condition
Under any condition

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
B+

Turn signal light (LH) flashes
Alternates
Hazard warning switch at on below 1.0 and
B+
position
Other
Below 1.0
Constant: inspect for
Yes
continuity to ground
Turn signal light (RH) flashes
Alternates
Hazard warning switch at on below 1.0 and
B+
position
Other
Below 1.0
Hazard warning switch at on
Below 1.0
position
Hazard warning switch at off
B+
position
Ignition switch is at ON and
B+
turn switch (RH) on
Other
Below 1.0
Ignition switch is at ON and
B+
turn switch (LH) on
Other
Below 1.0

Action
• Inspect HAZARD 10 A
fuse
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect turn signal light
(LH)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect GND
• Inspect turn signal light
(RH)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect hazard warning
switch
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect combination
switch
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect combination
switch
• Inspect related harness

End Of Sie

RUNNING LIGHT UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811266731W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the glove compartment. (See S85 GLOVE COMPARTMENT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Nut
Running light unit
Connector

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8112W126

End Of Sie

T45

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
RUNNING LIGHT UNIT INSPECTION

A6E811266731W02

1. Connect the connector to the running light unit.
2. Connect the negative battery cable.
3. Measure the voltage at the running light unit using voltmeter.
• When inspecting terminal D, H or P for continuity, disconnect the running light unit connector.
4. If the value are not as specified in the Terminal Voltage List (Reference), inspect the parts under Action and
related wiring harnesses.
5. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the running light unit.
Terminal Voltage List (Reference)

A6E8112W155

Terminal

Signal

Illumination
light on/off

Connected to

TNS relay

• Instrument
Illumination
cluster
light operation • Panel control
switch

Headlight
relay (highbeam) on/off

Headlight relay

Running light
unit ground

GND

IG1

METER IG 15 A
fuse

T46

Front fog light Front fog light
relay on/off
relay

TNS relay on/
TNS relay
off

Test condition
Ignition switch at ON position
Headlight switch
(light) at TNS or
headlight
Ignition switch
position
at LOCK or
ACC position
Headlight switch
(light) at OFF
position
Headlight switch (light) at TNS or
headlight position
Headlight switch (light) at OFF
position
Ignition switch at ON position
Headlight switch
Headliht switch (dimmer) at LO
position
(light) at
headlight
Headlight switch
position
(dimmer) at HI
position
Flash-to-pass on
Under any condition: inspect for
continuity to ground
Ignition switch at ON position
Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC
position
Headlight switch
(light) at TNS or
headlight
Front fog light
position
switch at ON
position
Headlight switch
(light) at OFF
position
Ignition switch at ON position
Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC
position and headlight switch
(light) at OFF position

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
B+
Below 1.0

B+
B+
Below 1.0

Action
• Inspect ILLUMI 10 A
fuse
• Inspect TNS relay (See
T24 RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

B+
B+
B+

• Inspect headlight relay
(See T24 RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

B+
Yes

• Inspect GND

B+

• Inspect METER IG
15 A fuse
• Inspect related harness

Below 1.0
Below 1.0

B+
Below 1.0
B+

• Inspect TNS relay (See
T24 RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspect front fog light
relay (See T24
RELAY INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect TNS relay (See
T24 RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

EXTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Terminal

Signal

Front fog light Front and rear
on/off
fog light switch

TNS on/off

Headlight
relay on/off

Connected to

Headlight switch

Headlight relay

Flash-to-pass Headlight switch
on/off
(dimmer switch)

Headlight
high
operation

Headlight
(high-beam)
on/off

Headlight switch
(dimmer switch:
HI position)

Headlight switch

Test condition
Front and rear fog light switch at
OFF position: inspect for continuity
to ground
Front and rear fog light switch at
ON position: inspect for continuity
to ground
Headlight switch (light) at OFF
position
Headlight switch (light) at TNS or
headlight position
Ignition switch at ON position
Ignition switch at LOCK or ACC
and headlight switch (light) at OFF
position
Headlight switch (light) at OFF or
TNS position
Headlight switch (light) at headlight
position
Flash-to-pass on
Ignition switch at ON position
Headlight switch (light) at headlight
position and headlight switch
(dimmer) at LO position
Headlight switch (light) at headlight
position and headlight switch
(dimmer) at HI position
Flash-to-pass on
Headlight switch (dimmer) at LO
position: inspect for continuity to
ground
Headlight switch (dimmer) at HI
position: inspect for continuity to
ground

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
No
Yes
No
Yes
Below 1.0
B+
No
Yes
Yes
B+
B+
Below 1.0

Action
• Inspect front and rear
fog light switch (See T
42 FRONT AND REAR
FOG LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect headlight
switch (See T40
LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect headlight relay
(See T24 RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect headlight
switch (See T40
LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

• Inspect headlight
switch (See T40
LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

Below 1.0
No
Yes

• Inspect headlight
switch (See T40
LIGHT SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

End Of Sie

T47

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
FRONT MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811451310W01

Front map light (See T48 Front Map Light Removal
Note)
Connector
Socket
Map light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W102

Front Map Light Removal Note
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the headliner and the front map light.
2. Push the hooks to remove the front map light.

A6E8114W103

End Of Sie

FRONT MAP LIGHT INSPECTION
1. Remove the front map light. (See T48 FRONT MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect for continuity between the front map light
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the front map light.

A6E811451310W02

A6E8114W117

A6E8114W118

End Of Sie

T48

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
REAR MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811451311W01

Rear map light (See T49 Rear Map Light Removal
Note)
Connector
Socket
Rear map light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W104

Rear Map Light Removal Note
1. Insert a tape-wrapped flathead screwdriver into the gap between the headliner and the rear map light.
2. Push the hooks to remove the rear map light.

A6E8114W105

End Of Sie

REAR MAP LIGHT INSPECTION
1. Remove the rear map light. (See T49 REAR MAP LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Inspect for continuity between the rear map light
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the rear map light.

A6E811451311W02

A6E8114W127

A6E8114W128

End Of Sie

T49

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811451441W01

Cargo compartment light
Connector
Lens
Cargo compartment light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W101

End Of Sie

CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT INSPECTION
1. Remove the cargo compartment light. (See T50 CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the cargo
compartment light terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the cargo
compartment light.

A6E8114W114

A6E811451441W02

A6E8114W111

End Of Sie

CARGO COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See S95 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Disconnect the cargo compartment light switch connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between the cargo
compartment light switch terminals using an
ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the liftgate lock.

A6E8114W120

End Of Sie

T50

A6E811451442W01

A6E8114W119

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811451440W01

Lens
Trunk compartment light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W112

End Of Sie

TRUNK COMPARTMENT LIGHT SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the trunk lid trim. (See S93 TRUNK LID TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Disconnect the trunk compartment light switch connector.
3. Inspect for continuity between the trunk
compartment light switch terminals using an
ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the trunk lock.

A6E8114W121

A6E811451440W02

A6E8114W119

End Of Sie

COURTESY LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811469971W01

Lens
Courtesy light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W110

End Of Sie

T51

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Front
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811466540W01

Screw
Door switch
Connector

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W108

Rear
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Screw
Door switch
Connector

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W109

End Of Sie

DOOR SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the door switch. (See T52 DOOR SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the door switch
terminal and a body ground using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the door switch.

A6E811466540W02

A6E8114W122
A6E8114W115

End Of Sie

ASHTRAY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the boot panel.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811455431W01

Socket
Ashtray illumination bulb

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W106

T52

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
IGNITION KEY ILLUMINATION BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
End Of Sie

1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Remove the ignition key illumination bulb.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E811460231W01

A6E8114W129

End Of Sie

GLOVE COMPARTMENT LIGHT BULB REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811451445W01

Socket
Glove compartment light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W113

End Of Sie

PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811466600W01

Panel light control switch (See T53 Panel Light
Control Switch Removal Note)
Connector

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8114W116

Panel Light Control Switch Removal Note
1. Insert your hand from the lower side of the dashboard and squeeze the tabs of the panel light control switch.
2. Pull the panel light control switch forward to remove it.

End Of Sie

T53

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
PANEL LIGHT CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E811466600W02

1. Connect the connector to the panel light control switch.
2. Connect the negative battery cable.
3. Measure the voltage at the panel light control switch using voltmeter.
• When inspecting terminal B for continuity, disconnect the panel light control switch connector.
4. If the value are not as specified in the Terminal Voltage List (Reference), inspect the parts under Action and
related wiring harnesses.
5. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the panel light control switch.
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)

A6E8114W123

Terminal

Signal

Connected to

Test condition
Headlight switch at TNS or headlight
position

TNS (Without
running light
system)

TNS relay

Headlight switch at TNS or headlight
position
Running light
(With running
light system)

Running light unit

Illumination

Ground

T54

Other

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
B+

B+

Other

Each illumination

Inspect using an oscilloscope (See T
55 Terminal C inspection)

GND

Under any condition: inspect for
continuity to ground

Yes

Action
• Inspect TNS
relay (See T24
RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspect ILLUMI
10A fuse
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect running
light unit
(See T46
RUNNING LIGHT
UNIT
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect each
illumination
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect GND
• Inspect related
harness

INTERIOR LIGHTING SYSTEM
Terminal C inspection
1. Measure the wave pattern of the terminal C on
the panel light control switch using an
oscilloscope.
2. Set the headlight switch to either the TNS or
headlight position.
3. Set the panel light control switch to the brightest
position.

A6E8114W124

4. Verify that the pattern on the screen is as shown
in the figure.

A6E8114W125

5. Verify that the pattern on the screen matches the
pattern shown in the figure as the panel light
control switch is gradually turned to the darkest
position.

A6E8114W126

End Of Sie

T55

WIPER AND WASHER

WIPER AND WASHER
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811667340W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See T57 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the cowl grille. (See S50 COWL GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Connector
Bolt
Windshield wiper motor

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See
T58 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT.)
A6E8116W102

End Of Sie

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811667340W02

Windshield wiper link (See T56 Windshield Wiper
Link Removal Note)
Bolt
Windshield wiper motor

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E8116W140

Windshield Wiper Link Removal Note
1. Pry off the connection between the windshield wiper motor and windshield wiper link.

End Of Sie

WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION
L.H.D.
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor connector.
2. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal E or
D and ground to terminal B, and inspect the
operation of the windshield wiper motor as
indicated below.
Terminal
E
D

Operation
High
Low

3. Disconnect battery positive voltage from terminal
E of the motor while the wipers are operating.
4. Verify that the wipers do not stop in the park
position.
5. Short between the motor terminals A and D and
connect battery positive voltage to the motor terminal C.
6. Verify that the wipers operate at low speed again, then stop in the park position.
• If not as specified, replace the windshield wiper motor.

T56

A6E811667340W03

A6E8116W127

WIPER AND WASHER
R.H.D.
1. Disconnect the windshield wiper motor connector.
2. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal B or
A and ground to terminal D, and inspect the
operation of the windshield wiper motor as
indicated below.
Terminal
B
A

Operation
High
Low

3. Disconnect battery positive voltage from terminal
B of the motor while the wipers are operating.
4. Verify that the wipers do not stop in the park
position.
5. Short between the motor terminals E and A and
connect battery positive voltage to the motor terminal C.
6. Verify that the wipers operate at low speed again, then stop in the park position.
• If not as specified, replace the windshield wiper motor.

A6E8116W128

End Of Sie

WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5

A6E811667320W01

Cap
Nut
Windshield wiper arm (See T57 Windshield Wiper
Arm Installation Note)
Windshield wiper blade
Rubber brush

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. Adjust the windshield wiper arm and blade. (See
T58 WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E8116W111

Windshield Wiper Arm Installation Note
1. Clean the windshield wiper arm connector shafts
using a wire brush before installing the windshield
wiper arms.

A6E8116W103

End Of Sie

T57

WIPER AND WASHER
WINDSHIELD WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT
1. Operate the windshield wiper motor to set the wipers in the park position.
2. Set the windshield wiper arms height as shown.

A6E811667320W02

A6E8116W107

End Of Sie

WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

A6E811667481W01

Bolt
Connector
Washer hose
Clip
Headlight cleaner hose
Washer tank

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W117

End Of Sie

T58

WIPER AND WASHER
WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811676670W01

Windshield washer motor
Grommet

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W123

End Of Sie

WINDSHIELD WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Connect battery positive voltage to the motor
terminal B and ground to the motor terminal A.
4. Verify that the windshield washer motor operates.
• If the motor does not operate, replace the
windshield washer motor.

A6E811676670W02

A6E8116W129

End Of Sie

WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the headlight cleaner motor. (See T69 HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811676670W03

Connector
Washer fluid-level sensor
Grommet

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W114

End Of Sie

T59

WIPER AND WASHER
WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Insoect for continuity between the washer fluidlevel sensor terminals using an ohmmeter.
4. Verify that the windshield washer motor operates.
• If not as specified, replace the washer fluidlevel sensor.

A6E811676670W04

A6E8116W130

A6E8116W144

End Of Sie

WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Remove the bonnet insulator.
Remove the windshield washer hose from the windshield washer nozzle.
Compress the hooks of the windshield washer nozzle.
Pull the windshield washer nozzle out to remove
it.
5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E811667510W01

A6E8116W143

End Of Sie

WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING
1. Clean the washer nozzle by inserting and moving
a needle or an equivalent tool back and forth.
• If the nozzle becomes clogged again after
cleaning, remove the hose from washer
nozzle. Make sure there is enough washer
fluid. Then turn the washer switch on and
flush the inside of the hose.

A6E811667510W03

A6E8116W124

End Of Sie

T60

WIPER AND WASHER
WINDSHIELD WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the bonnet insulator.
2. Partially peel off the right side mud guard.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811650601W01

Clip
Joint pipe
Windshield washer hose

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W126
End Of Sie

REAR WASHER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811676672W01

Rear washer motor
Grommet

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W104
End Of Sie

REAR WASHER MOTOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Connect battery positive voltage to the terminal B and ground to the terminal A of the motor.
Verify that the rear washer motor operates.
• If the motor does not operate, replace the rear
washer motor.

A6E811676672W02

A6E8116W131

End Of Sie

T61

WIPER AND WASHER
REAR WIPER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear wiper arm and blade. (See T63 REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See S95 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E811667450W01

Connector
Outer bushing
Bolt
Rear wiper motor

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Adjust the rear wiper arm and blade. (See T64
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT.)
A6E8116W110

End Of Sie

REAR WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E811667450W02

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the liftgate lower trim. (See S95 LIFTGATE LOWER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Disconnect the rear wiper motor connector.
Connect battery positive voltage to the rear wiper motor terminal A and the ground to a bare metal part of the
vehicle and the rear wiper motor terminal B.
5. Verify that the rear wiper motor operates.

A6E8116W119

6. Disconnect the ground to the terminal B while the
rear wiper is operating.

A6E8116W132

T62

WIPER AND WASHER
7. Verify that the rear wiper stops in the park
position.
• If not as specified, replace the rear wiper
motor.

A6E8116W119

A6E8116W133

End Of Sie

REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5

A6E811667420W01

Cap
Nut
Rear wiper arm (See T63 Rear Wiper Arm
Installation Note)
Rear wiper blade
Rubber brush

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. Adjust the rear wiper arm and blade. (See T64
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE
ADJUSTMENT)

A6E8116W112

Rear Wiper Arm Installation Note
1. Clean the rear wiper arm connector shaft using a
wire brush before installing the rear wiper arm.

A6E8116W103

End Of Sie

T63

WIPER AND WASHER
REAR WIPER ARM AND BLADE ADJUSTMENT
1. Operate the rear wiper motor to set the wiper in the park position.
2. Set the rear wiper arm onto the ceramics end line.

A6E811667420W02

A6E8116W109

End Of Sie

REAR WASHER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See S94 LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Remove the rear washer hose from the rear washer nozzle.
Compress the tabs of the rear washer nozzle.
Pull the rear washer nozzle out to remove it.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Adjust the rear washer nozzle. (See T64 REAR
WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT.)

A6E811667511W01

A6E8116W105

End Of Sie

REAR WASHER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Insert a needle or an equivalent tool into the spray
hole of the rear washer nozzle and adjust the
nozzle direction as shown.

A6E811667511W02

A6E8116W108

End Of Sie

REAR WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING
1. Clean the rear washer nozzle. (See T60 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING.)

End Of Sie

T64

A6E811667511W03

WIPER AND WASHER
REAR WASHER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Partially peel off the right side mud guard.
Remove rear washer hose No.1 from the clips.
Remove rear washer hose No.1 and joint pipe A.
Remove the A-pillar trim. (See S87 A-PILLAR
TRIM REMOVAL)

A6E811667470W01

A6E8116W148

7.
8.
9.
10.

Remove rear washer hose No.2 from clip A.
Remove clips B from the body.
Remove rear washer hose No.2 and joint pipes B.
Remove the C-pillar trim. (See S89 C-PILLAR
TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
11. Remove the liftgate upper trim. (See S94
LIFTGATE UPPER TRIM REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

A6E8116W149

12.
13.
14.
15.

Remove rear washer hose No.3 from clip C.
Remove clips D from the body.
Remove rear washer hose No.3 and joint pipe C.
Remove the headliner. (See S96 HEADLINER
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

A6E8116W201

16. Remove the tape from rear washer hose No.4.
17. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W202

End Of Sie

T65

WIPER AND WASHER
INTERMITTENT REAR WIPER RELAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
5HB
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the trunk side trim. (See S92 TRUNK SIDE TRIM REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811666810W01

Connector
Bolt
Interittent rear wiper relay

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W101

End Of Sie

INTERMITTENT REAR WIPER RELAY INSPECTION

A6E811666810W02

1. Connect the connector to the intermittent rear wiper relay.
2. Connect the negative battery cable.
3. Measure the voltage at the intermittent rear wiper relay using voltmeter.
• When inspecting terminal D for continuity, disconnect the intermittent rear wiper relay connector.
4. If the value are not as specified in the Terminal Voltage List (Reference), inspect the parts under Action and
related wiring harnesses.
5. If the system does not work properly even though the parts or related wiring harnesses do not have any
malfunction, replace the intermittent rear wiper relay.
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)

A6E8116W134

Terminal

Signal

Connected to

Test condition
Rear wiper is operating (INT
position or ON position)

Autostop

Rear wiper motor

GND

T66

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
Alternates 0
and B+

Other

B+

Under any condition: inspect for
continuity to ground

Yes

Action
• Inspect R. WIP 10 A
fuse
• Inspect wiper and
washer switch (See T
68 WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect rear wiper
motor (See T62
REAR WIPER MOTOR
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect GND
• Inspect related harness

WIPER AND WASHER
Terminal

Signal

Rear wiper
switch INT

IG 2

Connected to

Test condition

Rear wiper
switch at INT
position
Ignition switch at • Rear wiper
Rear wiper switch
switch at
ON position
OFF position
• Rear wiper
switch at ON
position
Ignition switch at ON position
R. WIP 10 A fuse
Other

Voltage (V)/
Continuity
0

B+

B+
0

Action
• Inspect R. WIP 10 A
fuse
• Inspect wiper and
washer switch (See T
68 WIPER AND
WASHER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect R. WIP 10 A
fuse
• Inspect related harness

End Of Sie

WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the column cover. (See S84 COLUMN COVER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811666122W01

Connector
Screw
Wiper and washer switch

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W203

A6E8116W204

End Of Sie

T67

WIPER AND WASHER
WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH INSPECTION
Windshield Wiper And Washer Switch
Without vehicle-speed sensing type wipers
1. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See T67 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the wiper and
washer switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the wiper and
washer switch.

A6E811666122W02

A6E8116W146

A6E8116W135

With vehicle-speed sensing type wipers
1. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See T67 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the wiper and
washer switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the wiper and
washer switch.

A6E8116W146

3. Connect the negative battery cable.
A6E8116W145

T68

WIPER AND WASHER
4. Inspect whether the vehicle speed signal to the wiper and washer switch terminal N (D) is input correctly using
an oscilloscope.
• Connect the oscilloscope probes to the wiper and washer switch terminal N (D) (+) and terminal M (C) (-).
• Set oscilloscope to 1V/DIV (Y), 5ms/DIV (X).
• Verify that the wave pattern below is
displayed while the vehicle is moving at 30
km/h {19 mph}.
Note
• As the vehicle speed increases, the
frequency shortens.
5. If the vehicle speed input signal and continuity for
the wiper and washer switch is correct, inspect
the windshield wiper motor.iSee T56
WINDSHIELD WIPER MOTOR INSPECTION)
• Even if the windshield wiper motor is normal,
if the vehicle-speed-sensing wipers do not
operate correctly, replace the wiper and washer switch.

A6E8116W147

Rear Wiper and Washer Switch
1. Remove the wiper and washer switch. (See T67 WIPER AND WASHER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
2. Inspect for continuity between the wiper and
washer switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the wiper and
washer switch.

A6E8116W121

A6E8116W136

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
3. Remove the washer fluid-level sensor. (See T59 WASHER FLUID-LEVEL SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5

A6E811651030W01

Connector
Bolt
Bracket
Headlight cleaner motor
Grommet

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W113

End Of Sie

T69

WIPER AND WASHER
HEADLIGHT CLEANER MOTOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the washer tank. (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Connect battery positive voltage to terminal D and ground to terminal C of the motor.
Verify that the headlight cleaner motor operates.
• If the motor does not operate, replace the
headlight cleaner motor.

A6E811651030W02

A6E8116W137

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front bumper. (See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Disconnect the headlight cleaner hose. (See T71 HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811651030W03

Screw
Spacer
Headlight cleaner nozzle

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Adjust the headlight cleaner nozzle. (See T70
HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE
ADJUSTMENT.)
A6E8116W142

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE ADJUSTMENT
1. Use a needle or equivalent to adjust the headlight
cleaner nozzle so that the center of fluid properly
sprays on the headlight as shown in the figure.

A6E811651030W04

A6E8116W115

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT CLEANER NOZZLE CLEANING
1. Clean the rear washer nozzle. (See T60 WINDSHIELD WASHER NOZZLE CLEANING.)

End Of Sie

T70

A6E811651030W05

WIPER AND WASHER
HEADLIGHT CLEANER HOSE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the front bumper. (See S47 FRONT BUMPER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811651030W06

Clip
Headlight cleaner hose
Check valve

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W118

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E811651030W07

Headlight cleaner switch (See T71 Headlight
Cleaner Switch Removal Note)
Connector

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8116W125

Headlight Cleaner Switch Removal Note
1. Insert your hand from the lower side of the dashboard and squeeze the tabs of the headlight cleaner switch.
2. Pull the headlight cleaner switch forward to remove it.

End Of Sie

HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the headlight cleaner switch. (See T71 HEADLIGHT CLEANER SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
3. Inspect for continuity between the headlight
cleaner switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the light switch.

A6E811651030W08

A6E8116W139
A6E8116W138

End Of Sie

T71

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E811855430W01

Caution
• When replacing the instrument cluster, the configuration procedure must be performed before
removing the instrument cluster. If the configuration procedure is not performed before removing
the instrument cluster, it is possible that the instrument cluster will not operate normally.
1. Configurate the instrument cluter (when only replacing it). (See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONFIGURATION.)
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
3. Pull down the adjusting lever of the tilt steering wheel and push the steering wheel down.
4. Pull the steering wheel toward you.
5. Remove the meter hood.
6. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Screw
Connector
Instrument cluster
(See T72 Instrument Cluster Removal Note)

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8118W003

Instrument Cluster Removal Note
1. When removing the instrument cluster, in order to
prevent damage to the lens, cover the steering
shaft with a cloth.

A6E8118W005

End Of Sie

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER CONFIGURATION
1. Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent) to the
DLC-2.
2. Input vehicle information following the directions
on the screen.
3. Select Module programming.
4. Select Programmable module installation.
5. Select the following items and perform
procedures according to directions on the screen.

A6E811855430W02

Items
• IC
6. Retrieve DTCs by the SST (WDS or equivalent),
then verify that there is no DTC present.
• If DTC is present, perform applicable DTC inspection.

End Of Sie

T72

A6E3970W002

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E811855430W03

Caution
• If the instrument cluster is dropped or the print plate is damaged, the system will not work
properly and it may be the cause of trouble or malfunctions.
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Lens
Case
Meter unit

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E8118W004

End Of Sie

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INSPECTION
Speedometer
Using the input/output check mode
1. Inspect the speedometer by setting it in the input/output check mode DTC 12.

A6E811855430W04

Using a speedometer tester
1. Adjust the tire air pressure to the specification.
2. Using a speedometer tester, verify that the speedometer indication is within the allowable ranges shown below.
Speedometer tester
indication (km/h)
20
40
60
80
100
120
140
Speedometer tester
indication (mph)
10
20
30
40
50
60
70
80

Allowable range (km/h)
2024
4044
6064
8085
100105
120126
140146

Allowable range (mph)
1012
2022
3032
4043
5053
6063
7073
8084

3. Verify that fluctuation of the speedometer needle is within the allowable range.
• If the speedometer needle does not move or the indication is outside of the allowable range, inspect the
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (vehicles with ABS (ABS/TCS), DSC HU/CM (vehicles with DSC), PCM (vehicles
without ABS) and related wiring harness.
If the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (vehicles with ABS (ABS/TCS), DSC HU/CM (vehicles with DSC), PCM
(vehicles without ABS) and related wiring harness are normal, replace the instrument cluster.
Needle fluctuation allowable range
Within 3.0 km/h

T73

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
Tachometer
Using the input/output check mode
1. Inspect the tachometer by setting it in the input/output check mode DTC 13.
Using the SSTs (WDS or equivalent)
Caution
• If the engine speed exceeds the allowable range, the engine could be damaged. Therefore, when
inspecting the tachometer, do not allow the engine speed to exceed the allowable range indication
on the tachometer.
1. Connect the SSTs (WDS or equivalent) to the
vehicle DLC-2 16-pin connector.
2. Access and monitor PIDs by SSTs (WDS or
equivalent).

A6E3970W002

Fuel Gauge
1. Inspect the fuel gauge by setting it in the input/output check mode DTC 23.
Water Temperature Gauge
1. Inspect the water temperature gauge by setting it in the input/output check mode DTC 25.

End Of Sie

INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REPAIR

A6E811855430W05

Note
• The needle of speedometer or tachometer may continue to rotate clockwise until it indicates over
maximum graduation. If a customer complains of this concern, repair the needle position according to the
following steps.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

Verify the concern.
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Connect the negative battery cable.
Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
Verify that the needle returns to zero.
• If the needle does not return to zero, replace
the instrument cluster

A6E8118W011

End Of Sie

T74

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/OUTPUT CHECK MODE

A6E811855430W06

Note
• In this mode, it is possible to check the items in the following chart.
Diagnostic Trouble Code Chart
DTC
01

Checked item
Buckle switch

Door switch

TNS relay

12
13
14
16
18
22
23
25
26
31

Speedometer
Tachometer
Buzzer
Fuel-level warning light
Ignition key cylinder illumination
Fuel gauge sender unit
Fuel gauge
Water temperature gauge
LCD
Key reminder switch

Related item
Buckle switch
• Ignition key illumination
• Key reminder warning buzzer
• Interior light control
• Power door lock system
• Lights-on reminder warning buzzer
• Lights-on reminder warning buzzer
• Each illumination
Speedometer
Tachometer
Buzzer
Fuel-level warning light
Ignition key cylinder illumination
Fuel gauge
Fuel gauge
Water temperature gauge
LCD
Key reminder warning buzzer

Note
• Diagnostic trouble codes which are not listed may be indicated, but they cannot be inspected.
• The diagnostic trouble codes are displayed in numerical order. (While performing the inspection, if you
want to inspect a diagnostic trouble code of which the number is smaller than the code number you are
currently inspecting, terminate the check mode then repeat the inspection from the beginning.)
• If the speed signal is put into the instrument cluster (the front wheels are rotated) while a code other than
DTC 00 is display, the input/output check mode will be cancelled.
• The diagnostic trouble codes can be fast-forwarded by pushing and holding the odometer/tripmeter switch
for 1 second or more.

T75

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
Operating Order

A6E8118W009

T76

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
Checking Order
Note
• When inspecting more than two DTCs, perform the inspection by following the priority order of inspection
indicated in the chart below.
Priority order
of inspection
1
2
3

IG switch
position
ON
LOCK

Check code
22
01, 04, 08, 12, 13, 14, 16, 18, 23, 25, 26
31

Inspection of Diagnostic Trouble Codes
DTC 01 Buckle switch on/off signal

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Unfasten driver-side seat belt.
(Buckle switch on.)

INDICATION

ACTION
Go to next step.

Fasten driver-side seat belt. (Buckle
switch off.)

Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2G.
Is voltage 0 V?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Buckle switch
Wiring harness (Buckle switchinstrument
cluster)
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2G.
Is voltage B+?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Buckle switch
Wiring harness (Buckle switchinstrument
cluster)
Input signal to instrument cluster is okay.

T77

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
DTC 04 Door switch on/off signal

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Open driver-side door. (Door switch
on.)

Open passenger-side door. (Door
switch on.)

Open rear door on drivers side.
(Door switch on.)

Open rear door on passengers
side. (Door switch on.)

INDICATION

ACTION
Close driver-side door, then go to next step.

Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 1J.
Is voltage 0 V?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Door switch
Wiring harness (Instrument clusterdoor switch)
Close passenger-side door, then go to next step.

Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 1I.
Is voltage 0 V?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Door switch
Wiring harness (Instrument clusterdoor switch)
Close rear door on drivers side, then go to next step.

T78

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
STEP
5

INSPECTION
Close all doors. (Door switch off.)

INDICATION

ACTION
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminals 1I and
1J.
Is voltage B+?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Door switch
Wiring harness (Instrument clusterdoor switch)
Input signals to instrument cluster are okay.

DTC 08 TNS relay on/off signal

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Turn headlight switch to TNS
position. (TNS relay on.)

INDICATION

ACTION
Go to next step.

Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2K.
Is voltage B+?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
TNS relay
Wiring harness (BatteryTNS relayinstrument
cluster)
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2K.
Is voltage 0 V?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
TNS relay
Wiring harness (TNS relayinstrument cluster)
Input signal to instrument cluster is okay.

Turn headlight switch off. (TNS relay
off.)

DTC 12 Operation signal to speedometer
INSPECTION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 12.

INDICATION

SITUATION
Speedometer needle
moves full scale then
returns to 60 km/h or 60
MPH.
Other than stated above.

ACTION
Speedometer is okay.

Replace instrument
cluster.

T79

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
DTC 13 Operation signal to tachometer
INSPECTION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 13.

INDICATION

SITUATION
ACTION
Tachometer needle moves Tachometer is okay.
full scale then returns to
3000 rpm.
Other than stated above.
Replace instrument
cluster.

DTC 14 Operation signal to buzzer
INSPECTION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 14.

INDICATION

DTC 16 Operation signal to fuel-level warning light
INSPECTION
INDICATION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 16.

SITUATION
Buzzer continuously
sounds.
Buzzer does not
continuously sound.

ACTION
Buzzer is okay.

SITUATION
Fuel-level warning light
turns on and off three
times.
Other than stated above.

ACTION
Fuel-level warning light is
okay.

SITUATION
Ignition key illumination
turns on and off three
times.
Other than stated above.

ACTION
Ignition key illumination is
okay.

Replace instrument
cluster.

DTC 18 Ignition key illumination on/off signal

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 18.

T80

INDICATION

Measure voltage at
instrument cluster terminal
2C.
Is voltage B+?
• If as specified, replace
instrument cluster.
• If not as specified,
inspect following parts.
Ignition key
illumination
Wiring harness
(Batteryignition
key illumination
instrument cluster)

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
DTC 22 Fuel level signal

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Select DTC 22 with fuel gauge
sender unit connector disconnected.

INDICATION

Other than stated
above.
2

Connect between instrument cluster
terminals 2D and 2M.

Using SST (Fuel and thermometer
checker) or resistor, input 20 ohms
to between instrument cluster
terminals 2D and 2M.

Using SST (Fuel and thermometer
checker) or resistor, input 60 ohms
to between instrument cluster
terminals 2D and 2M.

Replace instrument cluster.
Go to next step.

Other than stated
above.
5

Replace instrument cluster.
Go to next step.

Other than stated
above.
4

Replace instrument cluster.
Go to next step.

Other than stated
above.
3

ACTION
Go to next step.

Using SST (Fuel and thermometer
checker) or resistor, input 100 ohms
to between instrument cluster
terminals 2D and 2M.

Replace instrument cluster.
Inspect fuel gauge sender unit.

Other than stated
above.

Replace instrument cluster.

T81

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
DTC 23 Operation signal to fuel gauge
INSPECTION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 23.

INDICATION

SITUATION
Fuel gauge indicates in
following order for every 2
seconds.
• F→1/2→E→F (fixed)
Other than stated above.

ACTION
Fuel gauge is okay.

Replace instrument
cluster.

Replace instrument cluster.

DTC 25 Operation signal to water temperature gauge
INSPECTION
INDICATION
Wait for 2 seconds after selecting DTC 25.

DTC 26 LCD indication
INSPECTION
Select DTC 26.

INDICATION

SITUATION
ACTION
Water temperature gauge Water temperature gauge
indicates in following order is okay.
for every 2 seconds.
• H→Center→C→H
(fixed)
Other than stated above.
Replace instrument
cluster.
Replace instrument cluster.

SITUATION
Indication is normal.
Other than stated above.

ACTION
LCD is okay.
Replace instrument
cluster.

DTC 31 Key reminder on/off signal

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
Remove key from steering lock and
then insert key into steering lock
after selecting DTC 31. (Key
reminder switch on.)

INDICATION

ACTION
Go to next step.

Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2B.
Is voltage B+?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, replace following parts.
Key reminder switch
Wiring harness (Batterykey reminder switch
instrument cluster)

T82

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
STEP
2

INSPECTION
Remove key from steering lock (Key
reminder switch off.)

INDICATION

ACTION
Measure voltage at instrument cluster terminal 2B.
Is voltage 0 V?
• If as specified, replace instrument cluster.
• If not as specified, inspect following parts.
Key reminder switch
Wiring harness (Key reminder switch
instrument cluster)
Input signal to instrument cluster is okay.

End Of Sie

PID/DATA MONITOR AND RECORD PROCEDURE

A6E811855430W07

1. Connect SST (WDS or equivalent) to the vehicle
DLC-2 16-pin connector.
2. Access and monitor PIDs using SST (WDS or
equivalent).

A6E3970W002

Monitor Item Table
• The PID/DATA monitoring items for the instrument cluster is as shown in the table below.
: Not applicable
PID item
CCNT_HE
ECT_GAUGE
FUEL
ODOMETR
SPEEDSG
RPM

Definition
Continuous codes
Temperature gauge
Fuel flow
Total distance
Speedometer
Tachometer

Unit/Condition
Number of continuous codes
°C
°F
l/min
km
mile
km/h
mile/h
rpm

Terminal

2W, 2X
2M
2W, 2X

End Of Sie

FUEL GAUGE SENDER UNIT INSPECTION
1. Move the float to the topmost and bottommost
positions, and verify that the resistance between
terminals A and B of the unit and the position of
the float are as indicated in the figure.
• If they are not as indicated, replace the fuel
gauge sender unit.

A6E811860960W01

A6E8118W002

End Of Sie

T83

WARNING AND INDICATOR SYSTEM
OIL PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E811818500W01

1. Verify that the oil pressure warning light illuminates when the ignition switch is at ON position.
2. Verify that the oil pressure warning light goes off when the engine is started.
• If the oil pressure warning light does not illuminate or remains illuminated, inspect the related wiring
harness.
If the related wiring harness are normal, inspect the oil pressure. (See D3 OIL PRESSURE
INSPECTION.)
• If the oil pressure is normal, replace the oil pressure switch.

End Of Sie

HORN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Bend the mud guard.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E811866790W01

Bolt
Connector
Horn

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8118W001

End Of Sie

INFORMATION DISPLAY REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
1
2
3

A6E811855000W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the center panel module. (See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the LCD unit. (with car-navigation system) (See T98 LCD UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the center box. (without car-navigation system)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Short harness
Information display
(See T84 Information Display Removal Note)
LCD unit (with car-navigation system)
Center box (without car-navigation system)

A6E8118W008

Information Display Removal Note
1. Squeeze the tabs of information display and pull it forward to it.

End Of Sie

T84

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
BONNET SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E812001084W01

Note
• Bonnet switch has a built-in bonnet lock.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Open the bonnet.
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the radiator grille.
Disconnect the bonnet switch connector.
Check the continuity between the bonnet switch
terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.
• If there is continuity, replace the bonnet
switch.

A6E8120W002

6. Lock the bonnet lock using a flat-head
screwdriver or equivalent as shown.
7. Check the no continuity between the bonnet
switch terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.
• If there is no continuity, replace the bonnet
switch.
Caution
• After the inspection, unlock the bonnet
lock. If closing the bonnet with the
bonnet lock locked, the bonnet lock and/
or bonnet striker may be broken.

A6E8120W003

End Of Sie

T85

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E812067790W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the center panel module. (See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Screw
Connector
Theft-deterrent control module

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8120W001

End Of Sie

THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE INSPECTION

A6E812067790W02

1. Remove the theft-deterrent control module without disconnecting the connectors.
2. Measure the voltage at the theft-deterrent control module terminals as indicated below.
3. Disconnect the theft-deterrent control module connector before inspecting for continuity at terminals L, Q, S, T,
and V.
4. If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Action.
• If the parts and wiring harnesses are okay but the system still does not work properly, replace the
theft-deterrent control module.
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)

A6E8120W004

Terminal

Signal

Connected to

IG1

METER IG 15 A
fuse

Power supply

ROOM 15 A fuse

D
E

Intruder sensor power
supply

Intruder sensor

Security light on/off

Security light

Hazard warning signal
output

T86

Flasher unit

Test condition

Ignition switch at ON
position
Ignition switch at
LOCK or ACC position

Voltage (V)/
continuity

B+
Below 1.0

Under any condition

B+

Theft-deterrent system
pre-arming or arming
Other
Security light on
Security light off

Theft-deterrent system
alarm: Active
Theft-deterrent system
alarm: Other

B+
Below 1.0
Below 2.0
B+
Alternates
between
below 1.0
and B+
B+

Action

• Inspect ignition switch
(See T20 IGNITION
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect METER IG 15 A
fuse
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect ROOM 15 A fuse
• Inspect related harness

• Inspect related harness
• Inspect security light
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect flasher unit
(See T44 FLASHER
UNIT INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
Terminal

Signal

Theft-deterrent siren
on/off

• Theft-deterrent
system recognition
signal output
• Keyless entry
system operation
signal input

Connected to

Theft-deterrent
siren

Horn on/off

Horn relay

Theft-deterrent control
module ground

GND

N
O
P

Key reminder switch
on/off

Intruder sensor on/off

Bonnet open/closed

Trunk compartment
light switch/cargo
compartment light
switch on/off

Door open/closed

Theft-deterrent system
alarm: Active
Theft-deterrent system
alarm: Other

Door lock timer unit Under any condition

Test condition

Key reminder
switch

Intruder sensor

Bonnet switch

• Trunk
compartment
light switch
• Cargo
compartment
light switch

Door switch

Voltage (V)/
continuity
Alternates
between
below 1.0
and B+

B+

Theft-deterrent system
alarm: Active

Alternates
between
below 1.0
and B+

Key reminder switch
off (key removed)

Theft-deterrent system
pre-arming or arming

Bonnet switch on:
inspect for continuity
to ground
Bonnet switch off:
inspect for continuity
to ground
Trunk compartment
light switch/cargo
compartment light
switch on
Trunk compartment
light switch/cargo
compartment light
switch off
Any door open:
inspect for continuity
to ground
All doors closed:
inspect for continuity
to ground

• Inspect related harness

B+

Theft-deterrent system
alarm: Other

Under any condition:
inspect for continuity
to ground
Key reminder switch
on (key inserted)

Action

Yes
B+
Below 1.0

Alternates
between
below 1.0
and B+

Yes
No

Below 1.0

B+

Yes
No

• Inspect door lock timer
unit
(See S34 DOOR LOCK
TIMER UNIT
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect horn relay
(See T24 RELAY
INSPECTION)
• Inspection related
harness
• Inspect GND
• Inspect key reminder
switch
(See T21 KEY
REMINDER SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

• Inspect related harness

• Inspect bonnet switch
(See T85 BONNET
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect trunk
compartment light switch
(See T51 TRUNK
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect cargo
compartment light switch
(See T50 CARGO
COMPARTMENT LIGHT
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect door switch
(See T52 DOOR
SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

T87

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
Terminal

Signal

Lock/unlock

Engine speed

Connected to

• Passengers
door lock-link
switch
• Rear door
lock-link switch

• Drivers door
lock-link switch

Test condition
Passengers and rear
door lock-link switch
locked: inspect for
continuity to ground

Passengers or any
rear door lock-link
switch unlocked:
inspect for continuity
to ground

Yes

Drivers door lock-link
switch locked: inspect
for continuity to
ground
Drivers door lock-link
switch unlocked:
inspect for continuity
to ground

• ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM (with
ABS (ABS/
(See T88 W Terminal
TCS))
Inspection)
• DSC HU/CM
(with DSC)

W Terminal Inspection
1. Connect SST (WDS or equivalent) to the vehicle
DLC-2 16-pin connector.
2. Access and monitor RPM of PID using SST
(WDS or equivalent).
• If engine speed signal normal, go to next step.
• If engine speed signal abnormal, inspect the
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM, DSC HU/CM and
related wiring harness.
3. Inspect for continuity between the ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM terminal X and the theft-deterrent
control module terminal W, or DSC HU/CM
terminal AB and the theft-deterrent control
module terminal W using an ohmmeter.
• If not continuity, replace the related wiring
harness.
• If wiring harness is normal, replace the theft-deterrent control.

End Of Sie

T88

Voltage (V)/
continuity

Yes

Action
• Inspect passengers or
rear door lock-link switch
(See S30 FRONT
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
(See S32 REAR DOOR
LOCK ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

• Inspect drivers door
lock-link switch
(See S30 FRONT
DOOR LOCK
ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness
• Inspect ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM
(See P29 ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM
INSPECTION)
• Inspect DSC HU/CM
(See P40 DSC HU/CM
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related harness

A6E3970W002

THEFT-DETERRENT SYSTEM
INTRUDER SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E812000172W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the headliner.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8120W005
.

1
2

Connector
Screw

Intruder sensor

End Of Sie

THEFT-DETERRENT SIREN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the left side trunk side trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812000173W01

Nut
Connector
theft-deterrent siren

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8120W006

End Of Sie

T89

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E812267004W01

Note
• Do not remove the coil unless you are replacing it.
• When only the coil is replaced, the immobilizer system reprogram procedure is not necessary.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the column cover.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

Connector
Coil

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8122W001

End Of Sie

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM PROCEDURE

A6E812267000W01

Note
• When an error occurs during the reprogram procedures, except when the PCM is replaced, repeat the
procedure from Step 1. If you still cannot reprogram, confirm how many keys can start the engine. Then,
perform the key replacement or addition reprogram procedure according to the valid key number.
• To make a copy of the key or replace the immobilizer system component parts (the key(s), and/or PCM),
the customer should bring all keys to the dealer. This is because the previously programmed key IDs are
erased when reprogramming the key IDs into the PCM.
• The PCM cannot be changed from one car to another. If an PCM is replaced with one from another car,
the engine will not start.
• The PCM should not be newly replaced as a trial during troubleshooting. If this is done, the ID and code
word will be programmed into the new unit and it cannot be used for other cars even if you find that the old
unit was normal.
• The immobilizer system cannot be deactivated.
• Confirm that all keys registered can start the engine after the reprogram procedure. When confirming, wait
for more than 5 seconds before inserting the next key.
• When the customer does not need to register more than two keys, the following procedures can be
stopped after registering two keys.
Key Replacement or Addition
When the customer has two or more valid keys

A6E8122W003

Note
• If no specific time interval is given, each step should be performed within 30 seconds of the previous
step.

T90

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
1. Cut new transponder-equipped key(s).
2. Using key 1, turn ignition switch to ON position.
(1) Observe illumination of security light in instrument cluster.
(2) After the security light turns off, turn key 1 to LOCK position within 2 seconds and remove it from the
steering lock.
3. Repeat Step 2 with key 2.
4. Repeat Step 2 with key 3.
5. If there are 48 keys (valid and/or new keys), repeat Step 2.
When the customer has only one or no valid key

A6E8122W002

1. Cut new transponder equipped key(s) if necessary.
2. Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent).
3. Using key 1, turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Valid key: The security light illuminates, then turns off after approx. 3 seconds.
• New key: The security light illuminates. After approx. 1 minute DTC B1601 (DTC 15) is output
(1) Perform security access approval. (See T92 Security Access Procedure.)
(2) Select "Ignition Key Code Erase".

Note
• Do not select any other command from this menu.

4.
5.
6.
7.

(3) Turn key 1 to LOCK position for more than 1 second.
(4) Turn key 1 to ON position for more than 1 second. (After approx. 1 minute DTC B1213 (DTC 21) is
output.)
(5) Verify the security light is illuminated, then turn key 1 to LOCK position.
(6) Remove key 1 from steering lock.
Using key 2, turn ignition switch to ON position for more than 1 second. Observe that security light illuminates
(for approx. 3 seconds).
(1) Verify the security light is illuminated, then turn key 2 to LOCK position and remove from steering lock.
Repeat Step 4 with key 3.
If there are 48 keys (valid and/or new keys), repeat Step 5.
After reprogramming, clear DTCs of PCM with SST (WDS or equivalent).

PCM Replacement
• After PCM replacement, refer to the procedure for "When the customer has only one or no valid key", and
perform registration. (See T91 When the customer has only one or no valid key.)

T91

IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
Enabling/Disabling Key Reprograming Without Using SST (WDS or Equivalent)
Note
• With this function, the need for use of the SST (WDS or equivalent) to perform key registration when
following the "When the customer has two or more valid keys" procedure can be optionally inhibited or
prohibited. This function is provided to prohibit drivers from performing the reprogram procedure on
vehicles owned by rental car companies or other large vehicle fleet owners.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent).
Using valid or new key, turn ignition switch to ON position.
Perform security access approval. (See T92 Security Access Procedure.)
Select "Customer Spare Key Programming Enable/Disable".
• Enable: Key registration can be performed without using the SST (WDS or equivalent).
• Disable: Key registration can only be performed using the SST (WDS or equivalent).
Note
• At the time of new vehicle delivery, the function is set on "Enable".

Security Access Procedure
Note
• When using a SST (WDS or equivalent) or equivalent to perform "Ignition Key Code Erase" or "Customer
Spare Key Programming Enable/Disable", it is necessary to obtain security access approval.
1.
2.
3.
4.

Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent).
Select "Tool box", "Body", "Security", and then "PATS Functions" (in this order).
The SST (WDS or equivalent). will read out an outcode depending on the designated procedure.
Access the Mazda official website to obtain the incode that corresponds to the outcode. Refer to Service
Information Ref. No. A001/02 for details of this procedure.
5. Input the incode to the SST (WDS or equivalent).

End Of Sie

T92

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM

A6E812466900W01

Alarm Conditions
• If the anti-theft system protection has been activated, any one of the following conditions will trigger the system:
Disconnected battery cable
Discharged battery
Disconnected audio unit connectors
• If the system is triggered, the audio unit will then be inoperative when it is reconnected to a power source, and
code will flash on the display until the preselected code number is input. If the anti-theft system is triggered,
follow the procedures in Canceling Anti-theft Operation to reset the unit.
Operation
Input code number to activate anti-theft system
Delete previous code number and set new number
Resume audio unit operation after anti-theft system is triggered

Reference
Setting the Code Number
Canceling the Code Number
Canceling Anti-theft Operation

Setting the Code Number
Complete each step (Steps 13) within 10 seconds or the setting procedure will be canceled.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position and then turn off the audio unit.
2. First press the AUTO-M button, then
simultaneously press channel button 6 for
approximately 2 seconds until CODE appears
on the display.

T
A6E8124W025

3. Press the AUTO-M button again, then
simultaneously press channel button 6 until bars
appear on the display.
4. Select a personal code number and record it
before inputting it. If the number is input and then
forgotten, it cannot be canceled, and if the unit is
disconnected again, the audio unit will be
inoperative.

A6E8124W026

5. Use channel buttons 14 to input the selected
code number. Press button 1 for the first digit, 2
for the second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the last
digit. Input the number within 10 seconds. If the
display is deleted, repeat the procedure from Step
1.
Note
• Perform Step 6 within 10 seconds after
Step 5.
A6E8124W027

T93

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
6. With the code number displayed, press the
AUTO-M button, then simultaneously press
channel button 6 for approximately 2 seconds.
CODE will be displayed for approximately 5
seconds. After it disappears, the code number is
set.
7. If Err (error) appears on the display, repeat the
procedure from Step 1. If input error is repeated
three times, turn the ignition switch to LOCK
position and repeat the procedure from Step 1.
A6E8124W025

Canceling the Code Number
Complete each step (Steps 13) within 10 seconds or the canceling procedure will be canceled.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position and then turn off the audio unit.
2. First press the AUTO-M button, then
simultaneously press channel button 6 for
approximately 2 seconds until CODE appears
on the display.

A6E8124W025

3. Press the AUTO-M button again, then
simultaneously press channel button 6 until bars
appear on the display.

A6E8124W026

4. Use channel buttons 14 to input the current code
number. Press button 1 for the first digit, 2 for the
second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the last digit.
Input the number within 10 seconds. If the
display is deleted, repeat the procedure from Step
1.
Note
• Perform Step 5 within 10 seconds after
Step 4.
A6E8124W027

T94

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
5. With the code number displayed, press the
AUTO-M button, then simultaneously press
channel button 6 for approximately 2 seconds.
CODE will be displayed for approximately 5
seconds. After it disappears, the code number is
canceled.
6. If Err (error) appears on the display, repeat the
procedure from Step 4.

A6E8124W025

Canceling Anti-theft Operation
Properly input the selected code number to deactivate the anti-theft system and resume normal audio operation.
1. Turn the ignition switch to ACC position. (CODE will flash on the display.)
2. First press the AUTO-M button, then
simultaneously press channel button 6 for
approximately 2 seconds until bars appears on
the display.
Note
• Perform Step 3 within 10 seconds after
Step 2.

A6E8124W026

3. Use channel buttons 14 to input the selected
code number. Press button 1 for the first digit, 2
for the second, 3 for the third, and 4 for the last
digit. Input the number within 10 seconds. If the
display is deleted, repeat the procedure from Step
1.
Caution
• Three consecutive errors, including
turning the ignition switch to LOCK
position and disconnecting the audio
unit, will activate the anti-theft system
and render the audio unit completely
inoperative.

A6E8124W027

4. With the code number displayed, press the
AUTO-M button, then simultaneously press
channel button 6 for approximately 2 seconds.
CODE will flash for approximately 5 seconds..
5. If Err (error) appears on the display, repeat the
procedure from Step 1.

A6E8124W025

End Of Sie

T95

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

Cancel the anti-theft operation. (with anti-theft system) (See T93 ANTI-THEFT SYSTEM.)
Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the glove compartment.
Remove the rear console.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.

A6E812466900W02

Dial (manual A/C only)
Screw (manual A/C only)
Screw
Bolt
Center panel module
(See T96 Center Panel Module Removal Note)
Connector
Antenna feeder

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
Caution
• Make certain that the wiring harness and
antenna feeder are not caught between
the unit and dashboard. If the harness or
the antenna feeder is caught between the
unit and dashboard, it may cause trouble
or malfunctions.

A6E8124W020

7. Operate the anti-theft system by setting the code number. (with anti-theft system) (See T93 ANTI-THEFT
SYSTEM.)
Center Panel Module Removal Note
1. Pull the center panel module toward you, then
disengage clip A from the dashboard, and remove
the center panel module.

A6E8124W029

End Of Sie

T96

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CENTER PANEL MODULE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY

A6E812466900W03

Caution
• Before disassembling the center panel module, spread a cloth on the floor to put the
disassembled parts on. This protects the surface of the panel from scratches or dirt.
1. Remove the center panel module. (See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15

Screw
Audio unit
Screw
Circuit board (manual A/C only)
Cover (upper module)
Cover (lower module)
Passenger-side air bag cut indicator light bulb
Socket
Screw
Bracket
Screw
Climate control unit (auto A/C only)
Screw
Ventilator grille
Center panel

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W012

End Of Sie

AUDIO UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Remove the audio unit. (See T97 CENTER PANEL MODULE DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY.)
2. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8

A6E812466900W04

Cover (without upper module)
Screw
Upper module
Screw
Lower module
Screw
Wiring harness
Base unit

3. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E8124W013

End Of Sie

T97

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the glove compartment.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466902W01

Bolt
Car-navigation unit
(See T98 Car-navigation Unit Installation Note)
Connector

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W015

Car-navigation Unit Installation Note
1. Insert the car-navigation unit bracket into the
dashboard member hole, and with the carnavigation unit fixed in place install the bolt.

A6E8124W016

End Of Sie

LCD UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E812466902W02

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the center panel module. (See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5

Cover
Bolt
Screw
LCD unit
(See T98 LCD Unit Removal Note)
Connector

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
A6E8124W014

LCD Unit Removal Note
1. Pull up the front part of the LCD unit.

A6E8124W017

T98

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
2. While pressing down the unit behind the LCD
unit, pull the LCD unit out from the dashboard.

A6E8124W018

End Of Sie

AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E812400148W01

Note
• The audio control switch and the cruise control switch use a common connector.
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the steering wheel.
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6

Bolt
Bracket
Screw
Cover
Screw
Audio control switch/cruise control switch

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
A6E8124W019

End Of Sie

T99

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E812400148W02

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the audio control switch connector.
4. Measure the resistance and inspect for continuity
between the cruise control switch terminals using
an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the cruise control
switch.

A6E8124W043

A6E8124W028

End Of Sie

AUDIO AMPLIFIER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466910W01

Bolt
Connector
Audio amplifier

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W010

End Of Sie

T100

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FRONT DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the front door trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466960W01

Screw
Connector
Front door speaker
(See T101 Front Door Speaker Installation Note)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W001

Front Door Speaker Installation Note
1. Attach the speaker with the wiring harness placed
in the groove of the door unit panel.

Caution
• If the speaker is attached with the
harness placed outside of the groove, the
wiring harness might be broken.

A6E8124W002

End Of Sie

FRONT DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION
1. Inspect for resistance between the front door
speaker terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the front door
speaker.

A6E812466960W02

A6E8124W040
A6E8124W032

2. To verify that the front door speaker outputs sound, apply voltage to the front door speaker and release using a
1.5-V battery.
• If not outputs sound, replace the front door speaker.

End Of Sie

T101

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
REAR DOOR SPEAKER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear door trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466964W01

Screw
Connector
Rear door speaker
(See T102 Rear Door Speaker Installation Note)

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W003

Rear Door Speaker Installation Note
1. Attach the speaker with the wiring harness placed
in the groove of the door unit panel.
Caution
• If the speaker is attached with the
harness placed outside of the groove, the
wiring harness might be broken.

A6E8124W002

End Of Sie

REAR DOOR SPEAKER INSPECTION
1. Inspect for resistance between the rear door
speaker terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the rear door
speaker.

A6E812466964W02

A6E8124W040
A6E8124W032

2. To verify that the rear door speaker outputs sound, apply voltage to the rear door speaker and release using a
1.5-V battery.
• If not outputs sound, replace the rear door speaker.

End Of Sie

T102

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
TWEETER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5

A6E812468966W01

Inner garnish
Connector
Screw
Cover
Tweeter

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W004

End Of Sie

TWEETER INSPECTION
1. Inspect for resistance between the tweeter
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the tweeter.

A6E812468966W02

A6E8124W033

2. To verify that the tweeter outputs sound, apply
voltage to the tweeter and release using a 1.5-V
battery.
• If not outputs sound, replace the tweeter.

A6E8124W041

End Of Sie

WOOFER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear package trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466967W01

Screw
Connector
Woofer

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W005

T103

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
5HB
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

Temporary spare tire cover
Wing bolt
Connector
Woofer

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W006

End Of Sie

WOOFER INSPECTION
1. Inspect for continuity between the audio amplifier
connector terminals and woofer connector
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the related wiring
harnesses.

A6E812466967W02

A6E8124W024

2. Verify that there is battery positive voltage at the
woofer connector terminal A (4SD) or C (5HB)
using a voltmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the related wiring
haness.
3. Inspect continuity between the woofer connector
terminal B and body ground using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the related wiring
harness.
• If as specified, replace the woofer.

A6E8124W046

End Of Sie

NOISE FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
Brake Light Noise Filter
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466869W01

Nut
Connector
Noise filter

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W008

T104

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Rear Window Defroster Noise Filter
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear package trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Bolt
Connector
Noise filter

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W009

End Of Sie

NOISE FILTER INSPECTION
Brake Light Noise Filter
1. Inspect for resistance and continuity between the
noise filter terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the noise filter.

A6E812466869W02

T
A6E8124W035

A6E8124W034

T105

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Rear Window Defroster Noise Filter
1. Inspect for resistance and continuity between the
noise filter terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the noise filter.

A6E8124W037

A6E8124W036

End Of Sie

CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
4SD
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the rear package trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E812466869W03

Bolt
Connector
Condenser

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W007

5HB
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the liftgate lower trim.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Bolt
Connector
Condenser

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W021

End Of Sie

T106

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
CENTER ROOF ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the headliner. (See S96 HEADLINER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E812466939W01

Antenna rod
Antenna feeder
Nut
Center roof antenna

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. After installation, verify that the rubber of the
center roof antenna is installed to the roof panel
with no space between them.
A6E8124W023

End Of Sie

CENTER ROOF ANTENNA INSPECTION
1. Verify that there is no continuity between the
center roof antenna terminals A and C using an
ohmmeter.
2. Inspect for continuity between the center roof
antenna terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the center roof
antenna.

A6E812466939W02

A6E8124W048

A6E8124W031

End Of Sie

GLASS ANTENNA INSPECTION
1. Inspect the glass antenna for damage visually.
2. Inspect for continuity between the glass antenna
terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, repair the glass antenna.
(See S63 FILAMENT REPAIR.)

A6E812466931W01

A6E8124W031
A6E8124W030

End Of Sie

T107

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
GPS ANTENNA REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E812466936W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the instrument cluster.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

Connector
GPS antenna

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8124W022

End Of Sie

ANTENNA FEEDER LOCATION

A6E812466941W01

A6E8124W038
.

1
2
3

Front antenna feeder
Rear antenna feeder No.1
Rear antenna feeder No.2

End Of Sie

T108

4
5

With center roof antenna
With glass antenna

AUDIO AND NAVIGATION SYSTEM
FRONT ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION
1. Verify that there is no continuity between the front
antenna feeder terminals A and B using an
ohmmeter.
2. Inspect for continuity between the front antenna
feeder terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the instrument
panel harness.

A6E812466941W02

A6E8124W039

A6E8124W047

End Of Sie

REAR ANTENNA FEEDER INSPECTION
1. Verify that there is no continuity between antenna feeder terminals A and B using an ohmmeter.

A6E812466942W01

A6E8124W042

2. Inspect for continuity between the antenna feeder terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the rear harness.

A6E8124W047

End Of Sie

T109

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7

A6E812866310W01

Cover
(See T110 Cover Removal Note)
Nut
Connector
Actuator cable
(See T112 ACTUATOR CABLE REMOVAL)
(See T114 ACTUATOR CABLE INSTALLATION)
Screw
Bracket
Cruise actuator

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8128W001

Cover Removal Note
1. Unclamp the clips of the heater hoses at the front
of the cover.

A6E8128W002

End Of Sie

CRUISE ACTUATOR INSPECTION

A6E812866310W02

1. Disconnect the cruise actuator connector.
2. Measure the voltage, continuity and resistance at the cruise actuator terminals as indicated below.
• If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Action.
• If the parts and wiring harnesses are okay but the system still does not work properly, replace the cruise
actuator.

T110

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminal Voltage Table (Reference)

A6E8128W013

Terminal

Signal

Vehicle speed

Brake switch on/off

O/D control
(ATX only)

MTX

F
ATX

Connected to

• DSC HU/CM
(with DSC)
• ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM
(with ABS
(ABS/TCS))

Brake switch

1. Ignition switch at ON
position and cruise control
main switch held at on.
2. Front tire rotating

PCM

TR switch

Voltage (V)
/Continuity

Alternates
below 1.0
and 5

Depress brake pedal

B+

Replace brake pedal

Below 1.0

Clutch
switch on/off Clutch switch

Selector
lever
position

Test condition

Ignition switch at ON position

Inspect for
continuity to
ground

Depress
crutch switch
Other
Selector lever
at N or P
position
Other

Ignition switch at ON position

B+

Yes
No
Yes

No
B+

Cruise set indicator Cruise set
light output
indicator light

Cruise main
indicator light
output

Cruise main
indicator light

Under any condition: inspect
for continuity to ground

Yes

Cruise actuator
ground

GND

Under any condition: inspect
for continuity to ground

Yes

Ignition switch at LOCK
position or ACC position

Below 1.0

Action
• Inspect METER IG 15
A fuse
• Inspect DSC HU/CM
(See P40 DSC HU/
CM INSPECTION)
• Inspect ABS (ABS /
TCS) HU/CM
(See P29 ABS (ABS/
TCS) HU/CM
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related
harness

• Inspect brake switch
(See P8 BRAKE
SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related
harness

• Inspect PCM
(See F45 PCM
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect clutch switch
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect TR switch
(See K14
TRANSAXLE RANGE
(TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect starter
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect METER IG 15
A fuse
• Inspect instrument
cluster
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect instrument
cluster
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect GND

T111

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminal

Signal

Cruise control
switch position

Connected to

Cruise control
switch

Brake switch on/off

Brake switch 2

IG1

METER IG 15 A
fuse

Test condition

Inspect for
resistance

Ignition switch
at ON position

Cruise control
main switch
held at on
SET/COAST
switch held at
on
RESUME/
ACCEL switch
held at on
CANCEL
switch held at
on
Depress brake
pedal
Other

Ignition switch at ON position
Ignition switch at LOCK
position or ACC position

Voltage (V)
/Continuity

Action

0 ohm
Approx.
680 ohms
Approx.
2200 ohms

• Inspect cruise control
switch
(See T116 CRUISE
CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related
harness

Approx.
120 ohms
Below 1.0
B+
B+
Below 1.0

• Inspect brake switch 2
(See P8 BRAKE
SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Inspect related
harness
• Inspect METER IG 15
A fuse
• Inspect related
harness

End Of Sie

ACTUATOR CABLE REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.

A6E812866311W01

Remove the plug hole plate.
Remove the cover from the cruise actuator. (See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the installation nut and pull the cruise actuator toward you.
Move the throttle, and remove the end fitting of
the actuator cable from the throttle.
5. Squeeze the hooks of the grommet, and remove
the actuator cable.

A6E8128W007

T112

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
6. Remove the actuator cable from the bracket

A6E8128W004

7. Remove the end fitting of the actuator cable from
the cruise actuator.

A6E8128W005

8. Squeeze the hooks of the grommet, and remove
it from the cruise actuator.
9. Remove the actuator cable.

A6E8128W008

End Of Sie

T113

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
ACTUATOR CABLE INSTALLATION
1. Slide the lock lever in the direction shown by the
arrow to unlock the adjuster.

A6E812866311W02

A6E8128W009

2. Turn the ratchet ring to release lock in the
direction shown by the arrow.

A6E8128W010

3. Install the actuator cable to the cruise actuator.
Caution
• Due to the possibility of actuator cable
damage, make sure there is no twisting in
the cable when installing.
4. Install the cruise actuator. (See T110 CRUISE
ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E8128W005

5. Pass the actuator cable under the accelerator
cable.
6. Install the actuator cable to the bracket.

A6E8128W004

T114

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
7. Install the grommet to the cable bracket.
8. Move the throttle, and install the end fitting of the
actuator cable to the throttle.
Caution
• Due to the possibility of actuator cable
damage, make sure there is no twisting in
the cable when installing.

A6E8128W011

9. To adjust the free play, push or pull the actuator
cable directly behind the spring two times.

A6E8128W014

10. Turn the ratchet ring in the direction shown by the
arrow to lock it.

A6E8128W015

11. Slide the lock lever in the direction shown by the
arrow to lock the adjuster.
12. Install the cover to the cruise actuator.
13. Install the plug hole plate.

A6E8128W016

End Of Sie

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E812866341W01

Note
• The audio control switch and the cruise control switch use a common connector.
• (See T99 AUDIO CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

T115

CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM
End Of Sie

CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E812866341W02

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Disconnect the cruise control switch connector.
4. Inspect for resistance and continuity between the
cruise control switch terminals using an
ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the cruise control
switch.

A6E8128W012

A6E8128W006

End Of Sie

T116

AIR BAG SYSTEM

AIR BAG SYSTEM
SERVICE WARNINGS
Component Disassembly
• Disassembling and reassembling the
components of the air bag system can render
the system inoperative, which may result in
serious injury or death in the event of an
accident. Do not disassemble any air bag
system components.

A6E813001046W01

A6E8130W044

Wiring Harness Repair
• Incorrectly repairing an air bag system wiring
harness can accidentally deploy the air bag
module or pre-tensioner seat belt, which can
cause serious injury. If a problem is found in
the system wiring, replace the wiring harness.
Do not try to repair it.

A6E8130W045

Air Bag Module Inspection
• Inspecting an air bag module using an
ohmmeter can deploy the air bag module,
which may cause serious injury. Do not use
an ohmmeter to inspect an air bag module.
Always use the on-board diagnostic to
diagnose the air bag module for malfunctions.

A6E8130W024

T117

AIR BAG SYSTEM
Air Bag Module Handling
• A live (undeployed) air bag module may
accidentally deploy when it is handled and
cause serious injury. When carrying a live
(undeployed) air bag module, point the front
surface away from your body to lessen the
chance of injury in case it deploys.

A6E8130W022

• A live (undeployed) air bag module placed
face down on a surface is dangerous. If the air
bag module deploys, the motion of the
module can cause serious injury. Always face
the front surface up to reduce the motion of
the module in case it accidentally deploys.

A6E8130W021

Side Air Bag Module Handling
• When the side air bag module deploys due to a collision, the interior of the seat back (pad, frame, etc.)
may become damaged. If the seat back is reused and the side air bag module does not deploy properly,
a serious accident may result. When the side air bag module deploys, always replace both the side air
bag module and the seat back (pad, frame, trim) with new parts. After service, confirm that the seat
operates normally and that the harness is positioned properly.
SAS Unit Handling
• Disconnecting the SAS unit connector or removing the SAS unit with the ignition switch at ON position
can cause the air bag modules to deploy, which may seriously injure you. Before disconnecting the
SAS unit connector or removing the SAS unit, turn the ignition switch to LOCK position, then
disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute to allow the backup power
supply of the SAS unit to deplete its stored power.
• Connecting the SAS unit connector without firmly installing the SAS unit to the vehicle is dangerous.
The crash sensor inside the control module may send an electrical signal to the air bag modules. This
will deploy the air bag modules, which may result in serious injury. Therefore, before connecting the
connector, firmly mount the control module to the vehicle.
• For vehicles with a single point sensor, once an air bag module is deployed due to an accident or other
causes, the SAS unit must be replaced with a new one even if the used one does not have any external
signs of damage. The used SAS unit may have been damaged internally which may cause improper
operation, resulting in major injuries or even death. The used single point SAS unit cannot be
bench-checked or self-checked.
Crash Zone Sensor Handling
• Disconnecting the crash zone sensor connector or removing the crash zone sensor with the ignition
switch at ON position can cause the crash zone sensor to operate and the air bag modules and pretensioner seat belts to deploy, which may seriously injure you. Before disconnecting the crash zone
sensor connector or removing the crash zone sensor, always turn the ignition switch to LOCK
position, then disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute to allow the
backup power supply of the SAS control module to deplete its stored power.
• If the crash zone sensor is subjected to shock or the sensor is disassembled, the air bag modules and
pre-tensioner seat belts may operate (deploy) suddenly and cause injury, or it may fail to operate
normally and cause a serious accident. Do not subject the crash zone sensor to shock or disassemble
the sensor.
• Because a sensor is built into the crash zone sensor, when the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts operates (deploys), there may be a problem, such as an internal malfunction, even if there is not
any external damage or deformation. If the crash zone sensor is reused, the air bag modules and pretensioner seat belts may fail to operate normally and cause a serious injury. Always replace the crash
zone sensor with a new part. The crash zone sensor cannot be bench-checked or self-checked.

T118

AIR BAG SYSTEM
Side Air Bag Sensor Handling
• Disconnecting the side air bag sensor connector or removing the side air bag sensor with the ignition
switch at ON position can cause the side air bag sensor to operate and the side air bag module to
deploy, which may seriously injure you. Before disconnecting the side air bag sensor connector or
removing the side air bag sensor, always turn the ignition switch to LOCK position, then disconnect
the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute to allow the backup power supply of the
SAS control module to deplete its stored power.
• If the side air bag sensor is subjected to shock or the sensor is disassembled, the side air bag module
may operate (deploy) suddenly and cause injury, or it may fail to operate normally and cause a serious
accident. Do not subject the side air bag sensor to shock or disassemble the sensor.
• Because a sensor is built into the side air bag sensor, when the side air bag module operates
(deploys), there may be a problem, such as an internal malfunction, even if there is not any external
damage or deformation. If the side air bag sensor is reused, the side air bag module may fail to operate
normally and cause a serious injury. Always replace the side air bag sensor with a new part. The side
air bag sensor cannot be bench-checked or self-checked.
Pre-tensioner Seat Belt Inspection
• Inspecting a pre-tensioner seat belt using an
ohmmeter can deploy the pre-tensioner seat
belt, which can cause serious injury. Do not
use an ohmmeter to inspect the pre-tensioner
seat belt. Always use the on-board diagnostic
to diagnose the pre-tensioner seat belt for
malfunctions.

A6E8130W025

Component Handling
• Oil, grease, water, etc on components may cause the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts to
fall to deploy in an accident, which may cause serious injury. Do not allow oil, grease, water, etc., on
components.
• Inserting a screwdriver, etc., into the
connector of an air bag module or a pretensioner seat belt may damage the connector
and cause the air bag module or the pretensioner seat belt to deploy improperly,
which may cause serious injury. Do not insert
any foreign objects into the connector.

A6E8130W023

Component Reuse
• Even if an air bag module or a pre-tensioner seat belt does not deploy in a collision and does not have
any external signs of damage, it may have been damaged internally, which may cause improper
operation. Improper operation may cause serious injury. Always self-check the undamaged air bag
module or pre-tensioner seat belt to determine whether it can be reused.
End Of Sie

T119

AIR BAG SYSTEM
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813057010W01

Warning
• Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which may
seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the air bag
module. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
• Due to the adoption of 2-step deployment control in both the driver-side air bag module,
depending on the impact force, it is possible that inflator No. 2 might not deploy. In such cases,
before disposing of the air bag module, make sure to follow the inflator deployment procedures
and verify complete deployment of inflator No. 1 and 2.
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

Cover
Bolt
Connector
(See T120 Connector Removal Note)
Driver-side air bag module

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.
5. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
6. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
A6E8130W001
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there are malfunctions in the system. Inspect the system using the
on-board diagnostic.
Connector Removal Note
1. Using a flathead screwdriver, pry out the
connector's stopper plate.
2. Disconnect the connector.

A6E8130W002
End Of Sie

T120

AIR BAG SYSTEM
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813057050W01

Warning
• Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which may
seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the air bag
module. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
• Due to the adoption of 2-step deployment control in both the passenger-side air bag module,
depending on the impact force, it is possible that inflator No. 2 might not deploy. In such cases,
before disposing of the air bag module, make sure to follow the inflator deployment procedures
and verify complete deployment of inflator No. 1 and 2.
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
Remove the glove compartment.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Connector
(See T121 Connector Removal Note)
Bolt
Passenger-side air bag module

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
7. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there
are malfunctions in the system. Inspect the system using the on-board diagnostic.

A6E8130W003

Connector Removal Note
1. Using a flathead screwdriver, pry out the
connector's stopper plate.
2. Disconnect the connector.

A6E8130W002

End Of Sie

SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813000147W01

Warning
• Handling the air bag module improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module, which may
seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the air bag
module. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Warning
• If the side air bag module is installed with debris in the seat back, the foreign material may be
scattered when the side air bag module operates (deploys), causing injury. Verify that there is no
foreign material in the seat back before installing the side air bag module.

T121

AIR BAG SYSTEM
1. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

Cover
Bolt
Connector
(See T122 Connector Removal Note)
Side air bag module

2. Install in the reverse order of removal.
3. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
4. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there
are malfunctions in the system. Inspect the system using the on-board diagnostic.

A6E8130W004

Connector Removal Note
1. Using a flathead screwdriver, pry out the
connector's stopper plate.
2. Disconnect the connector.

A6E8130W002

End Of Sie
CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813000171W01

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
Remove the headliner.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Install in the reverse order of removal.
Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
Verify that the air bag system warning light illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not operate in the manner described above, there are malfunctions
in the system. Inspect the system using the on-board diagnostic.

A6E8130W026
.

1
2

Connector
(See T123 Connector Removal Note)
Bolt

T122

Curtain air bag module
(See T123 Curtain Air Bag Module Installation
Note (4SD Right Side))

AIR BAG SYSTEM
Connector Removal Note
1. Using a flathead screwdriver, pry out the
connector's stopper plate.
2. Disconnect the connector.

A6E8130W002

Curtain Air Bag Module Installation Note (4SD Right Side)
1. Pass the curtain air bag module harness through
the hole in the body.

A6E8130W056
End Of Sie

CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813000145W01

Warning
• Handling the crash zone sensor improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag module and pre-tensioner
seat belt, which may seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the
crash zone sensor. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)

1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2
3
4
5

Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
Remove the radiator grille.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Bolt
Cover
Bolt
Connector
Crash zone sensor

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
7. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
A6E8130W007
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there are malfunctions in the system. Inspect the system using the
on-board diagnostic function.

End Of Sie

SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813000146W01

Warning
• Handling the side air bag sensor improperly can accidentally deploy the side air bag module,
which may seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before handling the
side air bag sensor. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
1. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
2. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
3. Remove the B-pillar lower trim.

T123

AIR BAG SYSTEM
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Bolt
Connector
Side air bag sensor

A6E8130W005

End Of Sie

SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813057030W01

Warning
• Handling the SAS unit improperly can accidentally deploy the air bag modules and pre-tensioner
seat belt, which may seriously injure you. Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS before
handling the SAS unit. (See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS.)
Caution
• When replacing the SAS unit, configuration procedure must be done before removing the SAS
unit. If configuration is not completed before removing the SAS unit, DTC B1921 will detected.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
1
2
3

Configurate the SAS unit (when only replacing it). (See T124 SAS UNIT CONFIGURATION.)
Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
Partially peel off the floor covering.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Bolt
Connector
SAS unit

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
8. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there
are malfunctions in the system. Inspect the
system using the on-board diagnostic.

A6E8130W006

End Of Sie

SAS UNIT CONFIGURATION
1. Connect the SST (WDS or equivalent) to the
DLC-2.
2. Input vehicle information following the directions
on the screen.
3. Select Module programming.
4. Select Programmable module installation.
5. Select the following items and perform
procedures according to directions on the screen.

A6E813057030W02

Items
• RCM
6. Retrieve DTCs by the SST (WDS or equivalent),
then verify that there is no DTC present.
• If DTC is present, perform applicable DTC inspection.

End Of Sie

T124

A6E3970W002

AIR BAG SYSTEM
CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813066123W01

1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove the steering wheel. (See N7 STEERING WHEEL AND COLUMN REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the column cover.
5. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

Screw
Connector
Clock spring
(See T125 Clock Spring Installation Note)

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Verify that the air bag system warning light
illuminates for approximately 6 seconds and
then goes off.
• If the air bag system warning light does not
operate in the manner described above, there
are malfunctions in the system. Inspect the
system using the on-board diagnostic.

A6E8130W008

Clock Spring Installation Note
Caution
• If the clock spring is not adjusted, the spring wire in the clock spring will break due to overtension
when the steering wheel is turned. Always adjust the clock spring after installing it.
• Adjust the clock spring after installing it. (See T125 CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT.)

End Of Sie

CLOCK SPRING ADJUSTMENT

A6E813066123W02

Note
• The adjustment procedure is also specified on the caution label of the clock spring.
1. Set the front wheels straight ahead.
Caution
• The clock spring will break if
over-wound. Do not forcibly turn the
clock spring.
2. Turn the clock spring clockwise until it stops.

A6E8130W046

3. Turn the clock spring counterclockwise 2 3/4
turns.

A6E8130W047

T125

AIR BAG SYSTEM
4. Align the mark on the clock spring with the mark
on the outer housing.

A6E8130W048

End Of Sie

CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION
1. Remove the clock spring.
2. Inspect for continuity between the clock spring terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the clock spring.

A6E813066123W03

A6E8130W009

A6E8130W010

Note
• When the vehicle-side connector of clock spring is disconnected, the terminals 1A,1B, 1C and 1D are
shorted to prevent unexpected deployment of the air bag module. When it is connected, the terminals are
open.

T126

AIR BAG SYSTEM
End Of Sie
PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E813001046W02

1. Remove the center panel module. (See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

Socket
Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light bulb

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8130W057

End Of Sie

AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DEPLOYMENT PROCEDURES

A6E813057000W01

Warning
• A live (undeployed) air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt may accidentally deploy when it is
disposed of and cause serious injury. Do not dispose of a live (undeployed) air bag module and
pre-tensioner seat belt. If the SSTs (Deployment tool and Adapter harness) are not available,
consult the nearest Mazda representative for assistance.
Caution
• Deploying the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts inside the vehicle may cause damage
to the vehicle interior. When the vehicle is not to be scrapped, always deploy the air bag modules
and pre-tensioner seat belts outside the vehicle.
• When the vehicle is to be scrapped, deploy the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts inside the vehicle.
(See T127 Deployment Procedure for Inside of Vehicle (Only When Vehicle Is To Be Scrapped).)
• When the vehicle is not to be scrapped, deploy the air bag modules and pre-tensioner seat belts outside the
vehicle. (See T131 Deployment Procedure for Outside of Vehicle.)
Note
• When disposing of deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt, refer to the disposal procedure,
(See T139 AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DISPOSAL PROCEDURES.)
Deployment Procedure for Inside of Vehicle (Only When Vehicle Is To Be Scrapped)
1. Inspect the SST (Deployment tool). (See T140 INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL).)
2. Move the vehicle to an open space, away from strong winds, and close all of the vehicles doors and windows.
3. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
4. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
5. Follow the appropriate procedure for deploying the driver-side air bag module, passenger-side air bag module,
side air bag module, curtain air bag module, or pre-tensioner seat belt.
Driver-side air bag module
Warning
• Driver-side air bag module is the dual inflator type. When the inflators are forced to be deployed
simultaneously, one of them may fail to deploy. When disposing the air bag module, the inflators
may be deployed accidentally. Make sure to deploy the inflators sequentially, following the
procedures below.
1. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

T127

AIR BAG SYSTEM
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the driverside air bag module as shown in the figure.
3. Install the driver-side air bag module. (See T120
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)

A6E8130W011

4. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
5. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
6. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
7. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} away from the vehicle.

A6E8130W050

8. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the driver-side air
bag module.
9. Disconnect the SST (Deployment tool) from the
SST (Adapter harness).
10. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
11. Perform steps 5 through 8, in order to deploy the
driver-side air bag module.

A6E8130W028

Passenger-side air bag module
Warning
• Passenger-side air bag module is the dual inflator type. When the inflators are forced to be
deployed simultaneously, one of them may fail to deploy. When disposing the air bag module, the
inflators may be deployed accidentally. Make sure to deploy the inflators sequentially, following
the procedures below.
1. Remove the glove compartment.
2. Disconnect the passenger-side sir bag module connector.
3. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the
passenger-side air bag module as shown it the
figure.

A6E8130W014

T128

AIR BAG SYSTEM
4. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
5. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
6. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
7. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} away from the vehicle.

A6E8130W050

8. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the passenger-side
air bag module.
9. Disconnect the SST (Deployment tool) from the
SST (Adapter harness).
10. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
11. Perform steps 5 through 8, in order to deploy the
passenger-side air bag module.

A6E8130W028

Side air bag module
1. Disconnect the side air bag module connector.
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the side
air bag module.

A6E8130W029

3. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
4. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
5. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
6. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} from the vehicle.

A6E8130W027

T129

AIR BAG SYSTEM
7. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the side air bag
module.

A6E8130W028

Curtain air bag module
1. Remove the side tire house trim. (4SD)
2. Remove the side trunk side trim. (5HB)
3. Disconnect the curtain air bag module connector.
4. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the curtain
air bag module.

A6E8130W012

5. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
6. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
7. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
8. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} from the vehicle.

A6E8130W051

T130

AIR BAG SYSTEM
9. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the curtain air bag
module.

A6E8130W028

Pre-tensioner seat belt
1. Remove the B-pillar lower trim.
2. Remove the pre-tensioner seat belt and connect
the SST (Adapter harness) to it as shown in the
figure. (See S100 FRONT SEAT BELT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Install the pre-tensioner seat belt.

A6E8130W030

A6E8130W052

8. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the pre-tensioner
seat belt.

A6E8130W028

Deployment Procedure for Outside of Vehicle
1. Inspect the SST (Deployment tool). (See T140 INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL).)
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
3. Disconnect the negative battery cable and wait for more than 1 minute.
4. Follow the appropriate procedure for deploying the driver-side air bag module, passenger-side air bag module,
side air bag module, curtain air bag module, or pre-tensioner seat belt.

T131

AIR BAG SYSTEM
Driver-side air bag module
Warning
• Driver-side air bag module is the dual inflator type. When the inflators are forced to be deployed
simultaneously, one of them may fail to deploy. When disposing the air bag module, the inflators
may be deployed accidentally. Make sure to deploy the inflators sequentially, following the
procedures below.
1. Remove the driver-side air bag module. (See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the driverside air bag module as shown in the figure,

A6E8130W011

3. Place the driver-side air bag module on the center
of the tire wheel with the module facing up. To
secure the air bag module to the tire wheel, wrap
the wire harness through the wheel and around
the bolt installation hole at least four times.
Warning
• If the air bag module is not properly
installed to the tire wheel, serious injury
may occur when the module is deployed.
When installing the air bag module to the
tire wheel, make sure the module is
facing up.

A6E8130W031

4. Stack three tires on top of the tire with the air bag
module. Stack another tire that has a wheel on
top of the four tires.

A6E8130W033

5. Tie all tires together with wire.

A6E8130W034

T132

AIR BAG SYSTEM
6. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
7. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
8. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
9. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} away from the vehicle.

A6E8130W032

10. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the driver-side air
bag module.
11. Disconnect the SST (Deployment tool) from the
SST (Adapter harness).
12. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
13. Perform steps 7 through 10, in order to deploy the
driver-side air bag module.

A6E8130W028

Passenger-side air bag module
Warning
• Passenger-side air bag module is the dual inflator type. When the inflators are forced to be
deployed simultaneously, one of them may fail to deploy. When disposing the air bag module, the
inflators may be deployed accidentally. Make sure to deploy the inflators sequentially, following
the procedures below.
1. Remove the passenger-side air bag module. (See T121 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION.)
2. Install the bolts to the passenger-side air bag
module.

A6E8130W035

3. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the
passenger-side air bag module as shown in the
figure.

A6E8130W015

T133

AIR BAG SYSTEM
4. Tie the passenger-side air bag module to the tire
with the module facing the center of the tire. Wrap
the wire harness through the tire and around the
bolts at least four times.
Warning
• If the air bag module ia not properly
installed to the tire, serious injury may
occur when the module is deployed,
When installing the air bag module to the
tire, make sure the module is facing the
center of the tire.

A6E8130W036

5. Stack the tire with the passenger-side air bag
module on top of two tires. Stack another tire that
has a wheel on top of the four tires.

A6E8130W037

6. Tie all tires together with wire.

A6E8130W034

7. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
8. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
9. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
10. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} away from the vehicle.

A6E8130W038

11. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the passenger-side
air bag module.
12. Disconnect the SST (Deployment tool) from the
SST (Adapter harness).
13. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
14. Perform steps 8 through 11, in order to deploy the
passenger-side air bag module.

A6E8130W028

T134

AIR BAG SYSTEM
Side air bag module
1. Remove the side air bag module. (See T121 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the side
air bag module as shown in the figure.

A6E8130W016

3. Tie the side air bag module to the tire with the
module facing the center of the tire. Wrap the wire
harness through the tire and around the bracket
at least four times.
Warning
• If the air bag module is not properly
installed to the tire, serious injury may
occur when the module is deployed.
When installing the air bag module to the
tire, make sure the module is facing the
center of the tire.

A6E8130W017

4. Stack the tire with the side air bag module on top
of two tires. Stack a tire on top of three tires.
Stack another tire that has a wheel on top of the
four tires.

A6E8130W053

5. Tie all tires together with wire.

A6E8130W034

T135

AIR BAG SYSTEM
6. Control the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
7. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
8. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
9. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} from the vehicle.

A6E8130W054

10. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the side air bag
module.

A6E8130W028

Curtain air bag module
1. Remove the curtain air bag module. (See T122 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Secure the curtain air bag module in a vise, and
cut off the deployment section, as shown in the
figure.
Warning
• Be sure not to collapse the pipe on the
side where it is cut. If it is collapsed, the
interior pressure of the pipe will build up
and can cause it to explode during air
bag module deployment.
A6E8130W013

3. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the curtain
air bag module as shown in the figure. (5HB)

A6E8130W040

T136

AIR BAG SYSTEM
4. Tie the side air bag module to the tire with the
module facing the center of the tire. Wrap the wire
harness through the tire and around the bracket
at least four times.
Warning
• If the air bag module is not properly
installed to the tire, serious injury may
occur when the module is deployed.
When installing the air bag module to the
tire, make sure the module is facing the
downward.

A6E8130W018

5. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the curtain
air bag module as shown in the figure. (4SD, RH
only)

A6E8130W019

6. Stack the tire with the curtain air bag module on
top of two tires. Stack a tire on top of three tires.
Stack another tire that has a wheel on top of the
four tires.

A6E8130W020

7. Tie all tires together with wire.

A6E8130W034

T137

AIR BAG SYSTEM
8. Control the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
9. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
10. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
11. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} from the vehicle.

A6E8130W055

12. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the curtain air bag
module.

A6E8130W028

Pre-tensioner seat belt
1. Remove the pre-tensioner seat belt. (See S100 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Warning
• If the pre-tensioner seat belt is not properly installed to the tire, serious injury may occur when the
pre-tensioner part is deployed. When installing the pre-tensioner seat belt to the tire, make sure
the pre-tensioner part is inside the tire.
2. Connect the SST (Adapter harness) to the pretensioner seat belt as shown in the figure.

A6E8130W030

3. With the pre-tensioner part inside the tire, tie the
pre-tensioner seat belt to the tire. Wrap the wire
harness through the tire and around the pretensioner seat belt at least four times.

A6E8130W041

T138

AIR BAG SYSTEM
4. Stack the tire with the pre-tensioner seat belt on
top of two tires. Stack a tire on top of the three
tires. Stack another tire that has a wheel on top of
the four tires.

A6E8130W039

5. Tie all tires together with wire.

A6E8130W034

6. Connect the SST (Deployment tool) to the SST
(Adapter harness).
7. Connect the red clip of the SST (Deployment tool)
to the positive battery terminal and the black clip
to the negative battery terminal.
8. Verify that the red light on the SST (Deployment
tool) is illuminated.
9. Make sure all persons are standing at least 6 m
{20 ft} from the vehicle.

A6E8130W054

10. Press the activation switch on the SST
(Deployment tool) to deploy the pre-tensioner
seat belt.

A6E8130W028

End Of Sie

AIR BAG MODULE AND PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT DISPOSAL PROCEDURES

A6E813057000W02

Warning
• Before scrapping a vehicle with a live (undeployed) air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt,
deploy the air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt. Never dispose of a live (undeployed) air
bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt.
• The air bag module and the pre-tensioner seat belt are very hot immediately after they are
deployed. You can get burned. Do not touch the air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt for at
least 15 minutes after deployment.
• Pouring water on the deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt is dangerous. The water
will mix with the residual gases to form a gas that can make breathing difficult. Do not pour water
on the deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt.

T139

AIR BAG SYSTEM
• The deployed air bag module and pre-tensioner seat belt may contain deposits of sodium
hydroxide, a caustic byproduct of the gas-generated combustion. If this substance gets into your
eyes or on your hands, it can cause irritation and itching. When handling the deployed air bag
module and pre-tensioner seat belt, wear gloves and safety glasses.
• Due to the adoption of 2-step deployment control in both the driver and passenger-side air bag
modules, depending on the impact force, it is possible that inflator No. 2 might not deploy. In such
cases, before disposing of the air bag module, make sure to follow the inflator deployment
procedures and verify complete deployment of inflator No. 1 and 2.
1. Put on gloves and safety glasses.
2. Put the deployed air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt in a plastic bag, seal it, and then dispose of it.
3. Wash your hands after removing your gloves.

End Of Sie

INSPECTION OF SST (DEPLOYMENT TOOL)

A6E813001046W03

• Use the SST (Deployment tool) to deploy a live (undeployed) air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt before
disposing of it.
• Before using the SST (Deployment tool), inspect
its operation.

A6E8130W043

Inspection Procedure
1. Follow the steps below to verify that the SST
(Deployment tool) is operating correctly.
• If not as specified, do not use the SST
(Deployment tool) because it may cause the
air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt to
unexpectedly deploy upon connection to the
air bag module or pre-tensioner seat belt.
Step
1

2
3

Inspection procedure
Connect red clip to positive
battery terminal and black
clip to negative battery
terminal.
Connect connectors A and
B of SST (Deployment
tool).
Press activation switch.

Light condition
Green
Red
On

Off

A6E8130W042

End Of Sie

T140

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM

A6E816255430W01

Outline
• In case the controller area network (CAN) system is malfunctioning, read the DTCs of the following modules,
using the SST (WDS or equivalent) to determine the malfunctioning system.
PCM
DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (with ABS (ABS/TCS)
Instrument cluster
Flowchart
• Use the following flowchart to verify the cause of the trouble.

A6E8162W001
End Of Sie

T141

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE
DTC
U0073
U0121
U0155
U1900
U2516

A6E816255430W02

Malfunction location

Related module

CAN system communication error
Communication error to ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM PCM
or DSC HU/CM
Communication error to instrument cluster
CAN system communication error
• ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM (with
ABS (ABS/TCS)
CAN system wiring harness open and short
• DSC HU/CM (with DSC)
circuit
• Instrument cluster

Page
(See T144 DTC U0073,
U1900, U2516)

(See T144 DTC U0073,
U1900, U2516)

End Of Sie

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE

A6E816255430W03

PID name (definition)

Condition

IC_MSG
(Missing message from the
instrument cluster)

Present

ABS_MSG
(Missing message from the
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM or
DSC HU/CM)

PCM_MSG
(Missing message from the
PCM)

Present

Specification
Circuit in the instrument cluster
is normal.
Circuit in the instrument cluster
is abnormal.
Circuit in the ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM or DSC HU/CM is
normal.
Circuit in the ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM or DSC HU/CM is
abnormal.
Circuit in the PCM is normal.

Not Present

Circuit in the PCM is abnormal.

Not Present
Present
Not Present

Related module

Terminal

ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM or DSC HU/
CM

Instrument cluster

• ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM or DSC
HU/CM
• Instrument
cluster

• ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM: O, R
• DSC HU/CM: AF,
AG
• Instrument cluster:
2W, 2X

End Of Sie

PROCEDURES FOR DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A MALFUNCTION
System Wiring Diadram

A6E816255430W04

A6E8162W002

T142

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
PCM
1. Check the display of DTC U0121 and/or U0155, using the SST (WDS or equivalent). (See T142 DTC TABLE.)
2. Referring to the following table, determine the malfunctioning part of the CAN system.
X: Normal
: Communication error
Module

PCM

Communication status
• ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
Instrument cluster
• DSC HU/CM

Malfunction location
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Wiring harness A
PCM
Wiring harness B
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
DSC HU/CM
Wiring harness C
Instrument cluster

ABS/TCS HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
1. Accec and monitor the PCM MSG and IC MSGof PID using the SST (WDS or equivalent).
2. Referring to the PID/DATA MONITOR, confirm the display status of the PID. (See T142 PID/DATA MONITOR
TABLE.)
3. Referring to the following table, determine the malfunctioning part of the CAN system.
X: Normal
: Communication error
Module

• ABS (ABS/TCS)
HU/CM
• DSC HU/CM

PCM

Communication status
Instrument cluster

Malfunction location
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Wiring harness B
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
DSC HU/CM
Wiring harness A
PCM
Wiring harness C
Instrument cluster

Instrument Cluster
1. Accec and monitor the PCM MSG and ABS MSG of PID using the SST (WDS or equivalent).
2. Referring to the PID/DATA MONITOR, confirm the display status of the PID. (See T142 PID/DATA MONITOR
TABLE.)
3. Referring to the following table, determine the malfunctioning part of the CAN system.
X: Normal
: Communication error
Module

Instrument cluster

Communication status
• ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
PCM
• DSC HU/CM

Malfunction location
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Wiring harness C
Instrument cluster
Wiring harness A
PCM
Wiring harness B
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
DSC HU/CM

End Of Sie

T143

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
DTC U0073, U1900, U2516
DTC

U0073
U1900
U2516

DETECTION
CONDITION

CAN system communication error
CAN system wiring harness open and short circuit
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816255430W05

•
•
•
•

CAN system related harness malfunction
Related module communication error
Open or short circuit in wiring harness
Malfunction of connectors between PCM, ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM or DSC HU/CM and Instrument
cluster
PCM malfunction
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM malfunction (with ABS (ABS/TCS))
DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC)
Instrument cluster malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A
MALFUNCTION
• Determine the malfunctioning part of the
CAN system.
(See T142 PROCEDURES FOR
DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A
MALFUNCTION)
• Is the malfunctioning part the wiring harness
C or the instrument cluster?
2
DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A
MALFUNCTION
• Is the malfunctioning part the wiring harness
B or the ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM? (with ABS
(ABS/TCS))
• Is the malfunctioning part the wiring harness
B or the DSC HU/CM? (with DSC)
3
DETERMINING THE LOCATION OF A
MALFUNCTION
• Is the malfunctioning part the wiring harness
A or the PCM?
4
INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
CONNECTOR
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Disconnect instrument cluster connector.
• Is poor connection detection bars of
instrument cluster connector okay?
5
• Is vehicle equipped with DSC?

T144

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 12.
Troubleshooting completed.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 7.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DSC
HU/CM AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM connector.
• Inspect following wiring harness between
DSC HU/CM and instrument cluster
terminals for short to ground, short power
supply, and open circuit:
AF2W (CAN_L)
AG2X (CAN_H)
• Is wiring harness okay?
7
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector.
• Inspect following wiring harness between
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM and instrument
cluster terminals for short to ground, short
power supply, and open circuit:
R2W (CAN_L)
O2X (CAN_H)
• Is wiring harness okay?
8
INSPECT ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM OR DSC
HU/CM CONNECTOR
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM or DSC
HU/CM connector.
• Is poor connection detection bars of ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM or DSC HU/CM
connector okay?
9
• Is vehicle equipped with DSC?
10

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN DSC
HU/CM AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Disconnect instrument cluster connector.
• Inspect following wiring harness between
DSC HU/CM and instrument cluster
terminals for short to ground, short power
supply, and open circuit:
AF2W (CAN_L)
AG2X (CAN_H)
• Is wiring harness okay?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
• Disconnect instrument cluster connector.
• Inspect following wiring harness between
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM and instrument
cluster terminals for short to ground, short
power supply, and open circuit:
R2W (CAN_L)
O2X (CAN_H)
• Is wiring harness okay?
INSPECT PCM CONNECTOR
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Is poor connection detection bars of PCM
connector okay?
• Is vehicle equipped with DSC?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace instrument cluster, then go to Step 16.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Replace instrument cluster, then go to Step 16.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 11.
Replace DSC HU/CM , then go to Step 16.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Replace ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM , then go to Step 16.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 15.

T145

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [MULTIPLEX COMMUNICATION SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
14
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN PCM
AND DSC HU/CM
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Disconnect DSC HU/CM connector.
• Inspect following wiring harness between
PCM and DSC HU/CM terminals for short to
ground, short power supply, and open circuit:
2RAF (CAN_L)
2UAG (CAN_H)
• Is wiring harness okay?
15
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN PCM
AND ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector.
• Inspect following wiring harness between
PCM and ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM terminals
for short to ground, short power supply, and
open circuit:
2RR (CAN_L)
2UO (CAN_H)
• Is wiring harness okay?
16
CHECK DTC INDICATE
• Connect PCM connector.
• Connect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM or DSC
HU/CM connector.
• Connect instrument cluster connector.
• Clear DTC from module memory using SST
(WDS or equivalent).
• Perform KOEO/KOER self-test.
• Are DTCs U0073, U1900 and/or U2516
indicated?

End Of Sie

T146

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace PCM, then go to Step 16.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Replace PCM, then go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Repeat from Step 1.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
FOREWORD

A6E816467000W01

Outline
• The OBD (on-board diagnostic) test inspects the integrity and function of the headlight auto leveling system
and output the results when reqested by the specitic tests.
• OBD test also:
Provides a quick inspection of the headlight auto leveling system.
Is usually performed at the start of each deagnostic procedure.
Provides verification after repairs to ensure that no other faults occurred during service.
• Diagnostic DTC can be read/cleared, using the SST (WDS or equivalent).
Read/clear diagnostic results
• This function allows you to read or clear DTCs in the auto leveling control unit (main) memory.
Reading DTCs Procedure Using WDS or equivalent
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector.
2. Retrieve DTC by WDS or equivalent.

A6E3970W002

Clearing DTCs Procedures Using WDS or equivalent
1. After repairs have been made, perform the DTCs reading procedure.
2. Erase DTC by WDS or equivalent.
3. Ensure that the customer′s concern has been resolved.
Active Command Modes Procedure
1. Connect WDS or equivalent to the vehicle DLC-2
16-pin connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON (Engine OFF) or
start engine.
3. Turn on the headlight (low-beam).
4. Activate active command modes using WDS or
equivalent.

A6E3970W002

End Of Sie

T147

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE

A6E816467000W02

• DTCs are common for present and past malfunction diagnosis.
DTC
B1342
B2141
B2390
B2477
B2607
B2615
B2616
B2619
B2626
B2735

Description
Auto leveling control unit system.
Configuration setting system for auto leveling control unit.
Communication system between auto leveling control unit (main) and
auto leveling contro unit (sub).
Auto leveling control unit setting system.
Auto leveling control unit controlling system.
Front auto leveling sensor or rear auto leveling sensors power supply
system.
Front auto leveling sensor signal system.
Rear auto leveling sensor signal system.
Headlight zerosetting system for auto leveling control unit.
Headlight leveling actuator signal system.

Page
(See T148 DTC B1342)
(See T148 DTC B2141, B2477)
(See T149 DTC B2390)

(See T151 DTC B2607)
(See T153 DTC B2615)
(See T155 DTC B2616)
(See T157 DTC B2619)
(See T158 DTC B2626, B2477)
(See T159 DTC B2735)

End Of Sie
DTC B1342

DTC B1342

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816467000W03

Auto leveling control unit system.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Auto leveling control unit does not work properly.
• Auto leveling control unit malfunction
• Poor fit of auto leveling control unit

Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION

INSPECT AUTO LEVELING CONTROL
UNIT CONNECTION
1

• Check fit of auto leveling control unit.
• Is condition of the fit okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace auto leveling control unit.
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, replace auto leveling control
unit. (See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL
UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

DTC B2141, B2477
DTC B2141,
B2477

DETECTION
CONDITION

A6E816467000W04

Configuration setting system for auto leveling control unit.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Configuration for auto leveling control unit is not set.

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• Configuration for auto leveling control unit is not set or the setting is invalid

Diagnostic procedure
ACTION
Check connections of each sensor and the unit. Then connect WDS or equivalent and perform configuration.
(See T30 AUTO LEVELING CONTROL UNIT CONFIGURATION)

End Of Sie

T148

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC B2390
DTC B2390

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816467000W05

Communication system between auto leveling control unit (main) and auto leveling control unit
(sub).
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Communication between auto leveling control unit (main) and auto leveling control unit (sub) is not
performed.
• Auto leveling control unit (main) malfunction
• Open or shortcircuit in wiring harness between auto leveling control unit (main) and auto leveling
control unit (sub)

T149

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION

ACTION
Go to next step.
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.

INSPECT CONNECTOR CONNECTION

Yes
No

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH) AND
HEADLIGHT (RH)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight. Replace
headlight (LH) or headlight (RH). (See T26 FRONT
COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
HEADLIGHT (LH) CONNECTOR AND
HEADLIGHT (RH) CONNECTOR

Yes

Repair auto leveling control unit (main).
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Repair or replace wiring harness between headlight (LH)
and headlight (RH).

• Check fit of auto leveling control units and
headlight connectors on both sides (auto
leveling control unit (main) and (sub)).
• Are installation condition and fit okay?

• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (12-pin) and auto leveling control
unit (sub) connector (20-pin) and headlight
(RH) connector (12-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal I) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 1F)
Auto leveling control unit (sub) connector
(terminal P) and headlight (RH) connector
(terminal 1F)

• Disconnect headlight (LH) connector (12-pin)
and headlight (RH) connector (12-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Headlight (LH) connector (terminal 1F)
and headlight (RH) connector (terminal
1F)

End Of Sie

T150

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC B2607
DTC B2607

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816467000W06

Auto leveling control unit controlling system.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Operation of auto leveling control unit (main) and auto leveling control unit (sub) are reversed.
• Mounting of auto leveling control unit (main) and auto leveling control unit (sub) changed
• Poor fit of auto leveling control unit
• Headlight malfunction
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between auto leveling sensors and headlight (LH)

Remark: In this case other DTCs can be reported for wrong side.

T151

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure for headlight (LH)
STEP
1

INSPECTION

ACTION
Go to next step.
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.

INSPECT CONNECTION

Yes
No

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTORS AND HEADLIGHT
(LH) CONNECTOR

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between front auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes

Clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, replace auto leveling control
unit.
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Replace headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION
LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

• Check fit of auto leveling control unit and fit
of connectors.
• Is fit okay?.

• Disconnect front and rear auto leveling
sensor connector (6-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there no continuity between the following
connectors?
Headlight (LH) connector (terminal 2C)
and front auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal A)
Headlight (LH) connector (terminal 2D)
and front auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal D)
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there no continuity between the following
connectors?
Headlight (LH) connector (terminal 2B)
and auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (terminal H)
Headlight (LH) connector (terminal 2A)
and auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (terminal F)

Diagnostic procedure for headlight (RH)
STEP
1

INSPECTION

INSPECT CONNECTION

Yes
No

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (RH)

Yes

• Check fit of auto leveling control unit.
• Is fit okay?.
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (sub)
connector (20-pin).
• Is there no continuity between the following
connectors?
Terminals F and K

End Of Sie

T152

ACTION
Go to next step.
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.
Clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, replace auto leveling control
unit.
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Replace headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION
LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC B2615
DTC B2615

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816467000W07

Front or rear auto leveling sensors power supply system.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Front auto leveling sensor or rear auto leveling sensor supply voltage (5 V), which is generated by auto
leveling control unit (main), is incorrect.
• Front auto leveling sensor malfunction
• Rear auto leveling sensor malfunction
• Auto leveling control unit malfunction
• Short circuit in wiring harness between front auto leveling sensor and headlight (LH)
• Short circuit in wiring harness between rear auto leveling sensor and headlight (LH)
• Headlight (LH) malfunction

T153

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to step 4.

INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR

Yes

Replace front auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
After replacement, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between front auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

• Disconnect headlight (LH) connector (4-pin).
• Turn the ignition switch to ON.
• Measure voltage at headlight (LH) connector
terminal 2A.
• Is voltage approximately 5 V?

• Turn the ignition switch to OFF and connect
headlight (LH) connector (4-pin) again.
• Disconnect front auto leveling sensor
connector (6-pin).
• Measure voltage at front auto leveling sensor
connector terminal D.
• Is voltage approximately 5 V?

INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF
REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
3

ACTION

INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF
HEADLIGHT (LH)

• Disconnect rear auto leveling sensor
connector.
• Measure voltage at rear auto leveling sensor
connector terminal D.
• Is voltage approximately 5 V?

Yes

Replace front auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
After replacement, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between rear auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight (LH). Replace
headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes

Replace auto leveling control unit.
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight (LH). Replace
headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal K) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2A)
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin).
• Is there no continuity between the following
connectors?
Terminals K and E
Terminals K and D
Terminals K and L

End Of Sie

T154

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC B2616
DTC B2616

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUS

A6E816467000W08

Front auto leveling sensor signal system.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Output signal is not sent from the front auto leveling sensor.
• Front auto leveling sensor malfunction
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between front auto leveling sensor and headlight (LH)
• Headlight (LH) malfunction

T155

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION

ACTION
Go to next step.
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.

INSPECT FRONT LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTION

Yes
No

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTOR AND HEADLIGHT (LH)
CONNECTOR

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between front auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTOR AND HEADLIGHT (LH)
CONNECTOR

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between front auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight (LH). Replace
headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes

Replace front auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 FRONT AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight (LH). Replace
headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

• Check installation condition of front auto
leveling sensor and fit of connector.
• Are installation condition and fit okay?

• Disconnect front auto leveling sensor
connector (6-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Front auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal B) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2C)

• Disconnect front auto leveling sensor
connector (6-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there no continuity between the following
connectors?
Front auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal B) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2B)
Front auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal B) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2A)
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal H) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2C)
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal G) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2C)
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal K) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2C)
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal E) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2C)

End Of Sie

T156

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC B2619
DTC B2619

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816467000W09

Rear auto leveling sensor signal system.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Output signal is not sent from the rear auto leveling sensor.
• Rear auto leveling sensor malfunction
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between rear auto leveling sensor and headlight (LH)
• Headlight (LH) malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION

INSPECT REAR LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTION

Yes
No

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTOR AND HEADLIGHT (LH)
CONNECTOR

Yes
No

• Check installation condition of rear auto
leveling sensor and fit of connector.
• Are installation condition and fit okay?

ACTION
Go to next step.
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.
Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between rear auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

• Disconnect rear auto leveling sensor
connector (6-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Rear auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal B) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2D)

T157

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
STEP

INSPECTION

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace wiring harness between rear auto leveling
sensor and headlight (LH).

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR
CONNECTOR AND HEADLIGHT (LH)
CONNECTOR

Yes
No

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight (LH). Replace
headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

INSPECT HEADLIGHT (LH)

Yes

Replace rear auto leveling sensor.
(See T32 REAR AUTO LEVELING SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Possible cause is an open circuit in headlight (LH). Replace
headlight (LH). (See T26 FRONT COMBINATION LIGHT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

• Disconnect rear auto leveling sensor
connector (6-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there no continuity between the following
connectors?
Rear auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal B) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2B)
Rear auto leveling sensor connector
(terminal B) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2A)
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal F) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2D)
• Disconnect auto leveling control unit (main)
connector (20-pin) and headlight (LH)
connector (4-pin).
• Is there continuity between the following
connectors?
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal G) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2D)
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal K) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2D)
Auto leveling control unit (main) connector
(terminal E) and headlight (LH) connector
(terminal 2D)

End Of Sie

DTC B2626, B2477
DTC B2626,
B2477

DETECTION
CONDITION

A6E816467000W10

Headlight zeroset system for auto leveling control unit.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Headlight zeroset for auto leveling control unit is not set.

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• Headlight zeroset for auto leveling control unit is not set or the setting is invalid

Diagnostic procedure
ACTION
Check connections of each sensor and the unit. Then connect WDS or equivalent and perform headlight zeroset.
(See T31 HEADLIGHT ZEROSET)

End Of Sie

T158

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [HEADLIGHT AUTO LEVELING SYSTEM]
DTC B2735
DTC B2735

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E816467000W11

Headlight leveling actuator signal system.
Warning
• incorrect servicing of the auto leveling control unit could result in electrical shock because
the unit is integrated with the discharge headlight control unit. Before servicing the auto
leveling control unit, always refer to Discharge headlight service warnings. (See T25
DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT SERVICE WARNINGS)
Output signal to headlight leveling actuator is abnormal.
• Headlight leveling actuator malfunction
• Auto leveling control unit malfunction
• Headlight malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION

INSPECT CONNECTOR CONNECTION
1

Yes

• Check fit of auto leveling control unit.
• Is condition of the fit okay?

• Does headlight leveling actuator work
properly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Possible cause is headlight wiring harness malfunction or
malfunctioning headlight leveling acutuator.
Replace headlight and go to next step. (See T26 FRONT
COMBINATION LIGHT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
After correcting fit, clear DTC and check DTC again.
• If DTC is displayed again, go to next step.
Troubleshooting completed.
Replace auto leveling control unit.
(See T30 DISCHARGE HEADLIGHT CONTROL UNIT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

T159

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
FOREWORD

A6E817067000W01

Caution
• When the engine does not start or stalls and the following DTCs are not indicated, go to engine
symptom troubleshooting.
Note
• When the immobilizer system is defective, the engine cannot be started.
• If engine condition is normal but light stays on, inspect for short circuit between security light. Repair or
replace the wiring harness if necessary.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Turn the ignition switch to START position for 2 seconds, then back to ON position.
Wait for 1 minute.
Verify the security light condition and read the DTC if indicated.
Verify the DTC with WDS or equivalent.
If the DTC is indicated, go to troubleshooting referring to the DTC table.

End Of Sie

DTC TABLE

A6E817067000W02

DTC

Security light flashing
pattern

Description

Page

WDS or
equivalent

Security
light

B1681

Coil signal is not received.

(See T161 DTC
B1681)

B2103

Coil not connected.

(See T162 DTC
B2103)

ID number signal is not input into PCM.

(See T163 DTC
B1600)

Transponder programming failure.

(See T163 DTC
B2431)

B1600
13
B2431

B1602

PCM received invalid format of ID number
from transponder.

(See T163 DTC
B1602)

B1601

PCM received incorrect ID number from
transponder.

(See T164 DTC
B1601)

B1213

Number of valid keys is below minimum.

(See T164 DTC
B1213)

B1342

PCM is defective.

(See T164 DTC
B1342)

T160

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
Note
• Perform the following if the security light stays on:
If gasoline engine stalls, go to symptom troubleshooting NO.11 ENGINE STALLS/QUITS, ENGINE
RUNS ROUGH, MISSES, BUCK/JERK, HESITATION/STUMBLE, SURGES in. (See F204 NO.11
ENGINE STALLS/QUITS, ENGINE RUNS ROUGH, MISSES, BUCK/JERK, HESITATION/
STUMBLE, SURGES.)
If gasoline engine wont start, go to symptom troubleshooting NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL
NOT START in. (See F195 NO.6 CRANKS NORMALLY BUT WILL NOT START.)
If engine condition is normal but light stays on, inspect for continuity between the following wiring
harness and body ground: security light and PCM connector terminal 2W. Repair or replace the wiring
harness.

End Of Sie
DTC B1681

DTC B1681
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817067000W03

Coil signal is not received.
• Defective coil
• Defective PCM
• Defective wiring harness

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF COIL
• Disconnect coil connector.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal D of coil
connector.
• Is voltage more than 10 V?
2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN COIL
AND GROUND
• Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
• Inspect wiring harness between coil
connector terminal C and ground for
following.
Short to power supply
Open circuit
• Is wiring harness okay?
3
INSPECT COIL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Connect coil connector.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal B of coil
connector.
• Is voltage more than 9 V?
4
INSPECT COIL INPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
• Disconnect coil connector.
• Measure resistance between coil connector
terminal B and ground.
• Is resistance more than 10 kilohms?
5
INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
(INPUT) FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect coil and PCM connectors.
• Is there continuity between coil connector
terminal B and PCM terminal 2T?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to Step 5.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 12.
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wirimg harness.

T161

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Connect coil and PCM connectors.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal A of coil
connector.
• Is voltage more than 9 V?
7
INSPECT COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
• Turn ignition switch to OFF position.
• Disconnect PCM connector.
• Measure resistance between PCM connector
terminal 2Q and ground.
• Is resistance more than 10 kilohms?
8
INSPECT COIL OUTPUT SIGNAL CIRCUIT
FOR SHORT TO GND
• Disconnect coil connector.
• Measure resistance between coil connector
terminal A and ground.
• Is resistance more than 10 kilohms?
9
INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
(OUTPUT) FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect coil and PCM connectors.
• Is there continuity between coil connector
terminal A and PCM terminal 2Q?
10
INSPECT COMMUNICATION CIRCUIT
(OUTPUT) FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect coil and PCM connectors.
• Is there continuity between coil connector
terminal A and PCM terminal 2Q?
11
INSPECT COIL OUTPUT CIRCUIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
• Disconnect coil connector.
• Measure voltage at terminal A of coil
connector.
• Is there voltage?
12
INSPECT PCM
• Turn ignition switch from LOCK position to
START position for 2 seconds.
• Does security light indicate DTC B1681
again?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 10.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 9.
Go to next step.

Yes

Replace coil.
(See T90 COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)
Repair wirimg harness.
Replace coil.
(See T90 COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wirimg harness.
Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)

Yes

Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)
Troubleshooting is completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B2103
DTC B2103
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817067000W04

Coil not connected.
• Defective Coil
• Poor connection of coil connector

Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION

INSPECT CONNECTOR CONNECTION
• Is connector of coil and PCM connected
securely?

End Of Sie

T162

ACTION
Yes
No

Replace coil.
(See T90 COIL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Connect connector securely.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
DTC B1600

A6E817067000W05

DTC B1600
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

ID number is not input into PCM.
• No transponder in the key
• Defective transponder in the key (ID number is not output.)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
REPROGRAM NEW KEY
• Register new key.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
REPROGRAM PROCEDURE)
• Clear DTCs with WDS or equivalent.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position with new
key.

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Immobilizer system is okay.

Note
• Two or more valid keys are held in a
manner of not interfering each other.

• Does security light indicate DTC B1600
again?
INSPECT FOR OTHER PROPER KEYS
• Does engine start with other proper keys?

INSPECT PCM
• Turn ignition switch from LOCK position to
START position For 2 seconds.
• Does security light indicate DTC B1600
again?

Yes

No
Yes
No

Dispose of defective key.
Duplicate key if necessary.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)
Go to next step.
Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)
Troubleshooting is completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B2431
DTC B2431
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817067000W06

ID number programing failure.
• The procedure fails to program the transponder into PCM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP

INSPECTION

ACTION
Go to ID number input procedure.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)

End Of Sie
DTC B1602

DTC B1602
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817067000W07

PCM received invalid format of ID number from key (transponder)
• Defective transponder in the key
• Defective coil
• Defective PCM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT FOR OTHER PROPER KEYS
• Does engine start with other proper keys?

INSPECT COIL
• Replace coil.
(See T90 COIL REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
• Does engine start?

ACTION
Yes

No
Yes
No

Dispose of defective key.
Duplicate key if necessary.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)
Go to next step.
Coil was defective.
Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)

T163

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM]
End
Sie
DTC Of
B1601

A6E817067000W08

DTC B1601
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

PCM received incorrect ID number from key (transponder).
• Defective transponder in the key

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION

INSPECT KEYS
• Turn ignition switch to ON position with first
encoded key for 3 seconds.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position with
second encoded key for 3 seconds.
• Turn ignition switch to START position with
second encoded key.
• Does engine start?

Yes
No

ACTION
Immobilizer system is okay.
Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)

End Of Sie
DTC B1213

A6E817067000W09

DTC B1213
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Number of valid keys is below minimum.
• Less than two valid keys

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION

REPROGRAM NEW KEY
• Register new key.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM
REPROGRAM PROCEDURE)

Yes
No

ACTION
Troubleshooting is completed.
Reprogram immobilizer system again.

Note
• Two or more valid keys are necessary
to start engine.
• After reprogramming, does the security light
illuminate for approximately 3 seconds and
then go out?

End Of Sie
DTC B1342

DTC B1342
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817067000W10

PCM is defective
• Defective PCM

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION

INSPECT PCM
• Clear DTCs with WDS or equivalent.
• Does security light indicate DTC B1342
again.

End Of Sie

T164

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace PCM and reprogram immobilizer system.
(See T90 IMMOBILIZER SYSTEM REPROGRAM
PROCEDURE)
Connect connectors properly.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
STARTING PROCEDURE FOR ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC TEST MODE

A6E817566900W01

Note
• All DTCs displayed in the on-board diagnostic test mode should be entered in the Audio Repair Order
Form.
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ACC or ON position.
2. First press the POWER button, then
simultaneously press the AM button and TAPE/
MD button for 2 seconds or more.
1
2
3
4
5
6

AM button
TAPE/MD button
SEEK button (type A)
SEEK button (type B)
POWER button (type A)
POWER button (type B)

Note
• If several DTCs are in the memory, they can
be displayed by the SEEK button.

A6E8175W010

3. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

End Of Sie

SUPPLIER IDENTIFICATION PROCEDURE

A6E817566900W02

Note
• When asking the supplier (service center) for repair or replacement, verify which supplier the module
belongs to and enter in the Audio Repair Order Form.
Identification With Printed Numbers/Label
1. Remove the audio unit.
2. Verify the supplier name written on the label attached on each module.
Identification With On-board Diagnostic Test Mode
1. Start the on-board diagnostic test mode.
2. Verify the part number and supplier code
displayed in the LCD.
Note
• When no DTCs are in the memory, part
numbers and supplier codes will not be
displayed.
Part number
00
03
05
06
07
09

Part name
Cassette deck (lower module)
CD player (upper module)
CD changer (external type)
CD changer (upper module)
MD player (lower module)
Base unit

A6E8175W008

Supplier code
Supplier name
1
FMS Audio
2
Panasonic
3
Clarion

End Of Sie

T165

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
DTC CLEARING PROCEDURE

A6E817566900W03

1. Start the on-board diagnostic test mode.
2. First press the POWER button, then
simultaneously press AUDIO CONT button for 2
seconds or more.
1
2

POWER button (type A)
AUDIO CONT button (type B)
AUDIO CONT button (type A)
POWER button (type B)

Caution
• Before clearing the DTCs, be sure to
enter all of them displayed in the onboard diagnostic test mode in the Audio
Repair Order Form.

A6E8175W009

3. To stop the on-board diagnostic test mode, turn the ignition switch to the LOCK position.

End Of Sie

DTC TABLE
DTC
09:Er22
09:Er20
00:Er10
03:Er10

A6E817566900W04

Screen display
Output signal

Malfunction location

Page

Base unit (peripheral circuit)
Power supply circuit of base unit
Cassette deckbase unit communication line
CD playerbase unit communication line
CD changer (external type)base unit
communication line
CD changer (upper module)base unit
communication line
MD playerbase unit communication line
CD player

(See T166 DTC 09:ER22)
(See T167 DTC 09:ER20)
(See T168 DTC 00:ER10)
(See T168 DTC 03:ER10)

05:Er10

06:Er10

07:Er10
03:Er01

03:Er02

CHECK*1 CD*2

CD player

(See T170 DTC 03:ER02)

03:Er07

CHECK*1 CD*2

CD player

(See T171 DTC 03:ER07)

00:Er01
00:Er03

Cassette deck
Cassette deck

(See T171 DTC 00:ER01)
(See T172 DTC 00:ER03)

00:Er04

CHECK*1 TAPE*2

Cassette tape

(See T172 DTC 00:ER04)

05:Er01

(See T169 DTC 05:ER10)
(See T169 DTC 06:ER10)
(See T170 DTC 07:ER10)
(See T170 DTC 03:ER01)

CD changer (external type)

(See T172 DTC 05:ER01)

CD changer (external type)

(See T173 DTC 05:ER07)

06:Er01

CHECK*1 CD*2

CD changer (upper module)

(See T173 DTC 06:ER01)

06:Er02

CHECK*1 CD*2

CD changer (upper module)

(See T174 DTC 06:ER02)

06:Er07

CD changer (upper module)

(See T174 DTC 06:ER07)

07:Er01

CHECK*1 CD*2

MD player

(See T175 DTC 07:ER01)

07:Er02

CHECK*1 MD*2

MD player

(See T175 DTC 07:ER02)

07:Er07

CHECK*1 MD*2

MD player

(See T176 DTC 07:ER07)

NO Err

05:Er07

*1,*2

No stored DTCs

: When an error occurs, the error messages are displayed three times in the order of *1 and *2, respectively.

End Of Sie

DTC 09:ER22
DTC 09:Er22
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

T166

A6E817566900W05

Base unit (peripheral circuit)
• Base unit detects malfunction in its inner circuit (related to tuner).
• Base unit malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
INSPECT BASE UNIT
• Clear DTC.
• Turn on radio and operate it for 3 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 09:Er22 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace base unit.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 09:ER20
DTC 09:Er20
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W06

Power supply circuit of base unit
• Voltage detected at base unit terminals 1B and 1R is less than 8.5 V, or more than 16 V (must not be
16V).
• Weak battery
• Malfunction in wiring harness between battery and base unit

T
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT FUSE
• Remove MIRROR 5 A fuse and ROOM 15 A
fuse.
• Inspect MIRROR 5 A fuse and ROOM 15 A
fuse.
• Are fuses okay?
2
INSPECT BATTERY
• Measure battery voltage.
• Is voltage 8.5 V 16 V?
3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BATTERY AND FUSE BLOCK
• Turn ignition switch to ACC position.
• Measure voltage at fuse block connector
(JB-01) terminals B and fuse block connector
(JB-02) terminals D.
• voltage 8.5 V 16 V?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
FUSE BLOCK AND BASE UNIT
• Install MIRROR 5 A fuse and ROOM 15 A
fuse.
• Measure voltage at base unit connector
terminals 1B and 1R.
• Is voltage 8.5 V 16 V?
INSPECT BASE UNIT
• Clear DTC.
• Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position
and hold for 30 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 09:Er20 displayed?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace fuse.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Battery is weak.
• Inspect charge/discharge system.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between battery and fuse block.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between fuse block and base unit.

Yes
No

Replace base unit.
Troubleshooting completed.

T167

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
DTC 00:ER10
End Of Sie

DTC 00:Er10
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W07

Cassette deckbase unit communication line
• Base unit detects communication error with cassette deck.
• Malfunction of connectors between base unit and cassette deck
• Cassette deck malfunction
• Base unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CONNECTOR
• Remove cassette deck and inspect
connector for the following.
Deformation of pin
Poor connection of female terminal
Pinching of foreign material
• Is connector okay?
2
VERIFY THAT CASSETTE DECK IS
INSTALLED WITH BASE UNIT
• Install cassette deck and verify its installation
condition.
• Is cassette deck securely installed?
3
INSPECT CASSETTE DECK
• Clear DTC.
• Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position
and hold for 3 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 00:Er10 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair connector, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Securely install cassette deck, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace base unit and cassette deck.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 03:ER10
DTC 03:Er10
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W08

CD playerbase unit communication line
• Base unit detects communication error with CD player.
• Malfunction of connectors between base unit and CD player
• CD player malfunction
• Base unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CONNECTOR
• Remove CD player and inspect connector for
the following.
Deformation of pin
Poor connection of female terminal
Pinching of foreign material
• Is connector okay?
2
VERIFY THAT CD PLAYER IS INSTALLED
WITH BASE UNIT
• Install CD player and verify its installation
condition.
• Is CD player securely installed?
3
INSPECT CD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position
and hold for 3 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 03:Er10 displayed?

End Of Sie

T168

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair connector, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Securely install CD player, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace base unit and CD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
DTC 05:ER10
DTC 05:Er10
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W09

CD changer (external type)base unit communication line
• Base unit detects communication error with CD changer (external type).
• Malfunction of connectors between base unit and CD changer (external type)
• CD changer (external type) malfunction
• Base unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CONNECTOR
• Inspect base unit and CD changer (external
type) connectors for connection.
• Are connectors securely connected?
2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN CD
CHANGER (EXTERNAL TYPE) AND BASE
UNIT
• Inspect wiring harness between base unit
and CD changer (external type).
• Is wiring harness okay?
3
INSPECT CD CHANGER (EXTERNAL TYPE)
• Clear DTC.
• Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position
and hold for 3 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 05:Er10 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Reconnect connector, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Securely install CD changer (external type), then go to next
step.

Yes
No

Replace base unit and CD changer (external type).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 06:ER10
DTC 06:Er10
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W10

CD changer (upper module)base unit communication line

• Base unit detects communication error with CD changer (upper module).
• Malfunction of connectors between base unit and CD changer (upper module)
• CD changer (upper module) malfunction
• Base unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CONNECTOR
• Remove CD changer (upper module) and
inspect connector for the following.
Deformation of pin
Poor connection of female terminal
Pinching of foreign material
• Is connector okay?
2
VERIFY THAT CD CHANGER (UPPER
MODULE) IS INSTALLED WITH BASE UNIT
• Install CD changer (upper module) and verify
its installation condition.
• Is CD changer (upper module) securely
installed?
3
INSPECT CD CHANGER (UPPER MODULE)
• Clear DTC.
• Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position
and hold for 3 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 06:Er10 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair connector, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Securely install CD changer (upper module), then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Replace base unit and CD changer (upper module).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T169

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
DTC 07:ER10
DTC 07:Er10
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W11

MD playerbase unit communication line
• Base unit detects communication error with MD player.
• Malfunction of connectors between base unit and MD player
• MD player malfunction
• Base unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CONNECTOR
• Remove MD player and inspect connector
for the following.
Deformation of pin
Poor connection of female terminal
Pinching of foreign material
• Is connector okay?
2
VERIFY THAT MD PLAYER IS INSTALLED
WITH BASE UNIT
• Install MD player and verify its installation
condition.
• Is MD player securely installed?
3
INSPECT MD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Turn ignition switch to ACC or ON position
and hold for 3 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 07:Er10 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair connector, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Securely install MD player, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace base unit and MD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 03:ER01
DTC 03:Er01
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W12

CD player
• CD player cannot implement insert and eject commands.
• Defective CD (broken or foreign material stuck/attached)
• CD player malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Is CD able to be ejected?
INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?
INSPECT CD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and eject CD with no defect.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 03:Er01 displayed?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace CD player.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Replace CD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 03:ER02
DTC 03:Er02
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

T170

A6E817566900W13

CD player
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK CD is displayed in the LCD.
• Cannot play CD normally or change tracks.
• Defective CD (scratches or dirt)
• CD player malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN CD
PLAYER OR CD
• Play CD and select other song (change
tracks).
• Does CD player change tracks?

INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?
INSPECT CD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Play CD and select other song (change
tracks).
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 03:Er02 displayed?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 3.
Not able to change particular Go to next step.
tracks.
Not able to change any
Change CD and perform
tracks.
track-change again.
• If CD player changes
tracks, then go to Step 3.
• If not, replace CD player.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.
Replace CD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 03:ER07
DTC 03:Er07
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W14

CD player
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK CD is displayed in the LCD.
• Base unit detects CD reading error.
• Defective CD (scratches or dirt)
• CD player malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?
2
INSPECT CD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and play CD with no defect.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 03:Er07 displayed?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Replace CD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 00:ER01
DTC 00:Er01
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W15

Cassette deck
• Cassette deck cannot implement insert and eject commands.
• Defective cassette tape (deformation, broken, or foreign material stuck/attached)
• Cassette deck malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Is cassette tape able to be ejected?
INSPECT CASSETTE TAPE
• Inspect condition of cassette tape where
error has occurred.
• Is cassette tape okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace cassette deck.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace cassette tape,
then go to next step.

T171

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT CASSETTE DECK
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and eject cassette tape with no defect.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 00:Er01 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace cassette deck.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 00:ER03
DTC 00:Er03
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W16

Cassette deck
• Base unit detects that reel built into cassette deck does not operate.
• Defective cassette tape (tape slack, pinched tape in internal cassette deck)
• Cassette deck malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CASSETTE TAPE
• Inspect condition of cassette tape where
error has occurred.
• Is cassette tape okay?
2
INSPECT CASSETTE DECK
• Clear DTC.
• Insert cassette tape with no defect.
• Play cassette tape for 20 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 00:Er03 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair (remove tape slack or repair pinched tape) or
replace cassette tape, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace cassette deck.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 00:ER04
DTC 00:Er04
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W17

Cassette tape
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK TAPE is displayed in the LCD.
• Cassette tape is worn out.
• Tape wear
• Cassette deck malfunction

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace cassette tape, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace cassette deck.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 05:ER01
DTC 05:Er01
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

T172

A6E817566900W18

CD changer (external type)
• Changer function does not operate.
• Defective CD (broken or foreign material)
• Magazine malfunction
• CD changer (external type) malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN CD
CHANGER OR OTHER PARTS
• Operate changer function.
• Is function okay?
2

3
4

INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?
INSPECT MAGAZINE
• Inspect magazine.
• Is magazine okay?
INSPECT CD CHANGER (EXTERNAL TYPE)
• Clear DTC.
• Operate changer.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 05:Er01 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 4.
Not able to change particular Go to next step.
CD.
Not able to change any CD. Go to Step 3.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace magazine, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace CD changer (external type).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 05:ER07
DTC 05:Er07
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W19

CD changer (external type)
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK CD is displayed in the LCD.
• Base unit detects CD reading error.
• Defective CD (scratches or dirt)
• CD changer (external type) malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN CD
CHANGER OR OTHER PARTS
• Play all CD in magazine.
• Is CD changer able to read them properly?
2

INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?
INSPECT CD CHANGER (EXTERNAL TYPE)
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and play CD with no defect.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 05:Er07 displayed?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 3.
Not able to change particular Go to next step.
CD.
Not able to change any CD. Go to Step 3.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.
Replace CD changer (external type).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 06:ER01
DTC 06:Er01
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W20

CD changer (upper module)
• CD changer (upper module) cannot implement insert, eject, and disc change commands.
• Defective CD (broken or foreign material stuck/attached)
• CD changer (upper module) malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Is CD able to be ejected?
INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace CD changer (upper module).
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.

T173

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT CD CHANGER (UPPER MODULE)
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and eject CD with no defect.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 06:Er01 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace CD changer (upper module).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 06:ER02
DTC 06:Er02
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W21

CD changer (upper module)
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK CD is displayed in the LCD.
• Cannot play CD normally or change tracks.
• Defective CD (scratches or dirt)
• CD changer (upper module) malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN CD
CHANGER (UPPER MODULE) OR CD
• Play all CDs in changer and select other
song (change tracks).
• Is CD changer able to change tracks?

INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?
INSPECT CD CHANGER (UPPER MODULE)
• Clear DTC.
• Play CD and select other song (change
tracks).
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 06:Er02 displayed?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 3.
Not able to change particular Go to next step.
tracks.
Not able to change any
Change CD and perform
tracks.
track-change again.
• If CD changer changes
tracks, go to Step 3.
• If not, replace CD
changer (upper module).
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.
Replace CD changer (upper module).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 06:ER07
DTC 06:Er07
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W22

CD changer (upper module)
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK CD is displayed in the LCD.
• Base unit detects CD reading error.
• Defective CD (scratches or dirt)
• CD changer (upper module) malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN CD
CHANGER (UPPER MODULE) OR CD
• Play all CDs in changer.
• Is CD changer able to read them properly?
2

INSPECT CD
• Inspect condition of CD where error has
occurred.
• Is CD okay?

T174

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 3.
Not able to read particular
Go to next step.
CD.
Not able to read any CD.
Go to Step 3.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace CD, then go to
next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT CD CHANGER (UPPER MODULE)
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and play CD for 12 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 06:Er07 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace CD changer (upper module).
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 07:ER01
DTC 07:Er01
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W23

MD player
• MD player cannot implement insert and eject commands.
• Defective MD (broken or foreign material stuck/attached)
• MD player malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Is MD able to be ejected?
INSPECT MD
• Inspect condition of MD where error has
occurred.
• Is MD okay?
INSPECT MD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and eject MD with no defect.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 07:Er01 displayed?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace MD player.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace MD, then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Replace MD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC 07:ER02
DTC 07:Er02
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W24

MD player
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK MD is displayed in the LCD.
• Cannot play MD normally or change tracks.
• Defective MD (scratches or dirt)
• MD player malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN MD
PLAYER OR MD
• Play MD and select other song (change
tracks).
• Is MD player able to change tracks?

INSPECT MD
• Inspect condition of MD where error has
occurred.
• Is MD okay?
INSPECT MD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Play MD and select other song (change
tracks).
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 07:Er02 displayed?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to Step 3.
Not able to change particular Go to next step.
tracks.
Not able to change any
Change MD and perform
tracks.
track-change again.
• If MD player changes
tracks, then go to Step 3.
• If not, replace MD player.
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace MD, then go to
next step.
Replace MD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T175

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
DTC 07:ER07
DTC 07:Er07
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817566900W25

MD player
Note
• When error occurs, error message CHECK MD is displayed in the LCD.
• Base unit detects MD reading error.
• Defective MD (scratches or dirt)
• MD player malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT MD
• Inspect condition of MD where error has
occurred.
• Is MD okay?
2
INSPECT MD PLAYER
• Clear DTC.
• Insert and play MD for 12 seconds or more.
• Start on-board diagnostic test mode.
• Is DTC 07:Er07 displayed?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair (remove foreign material) or replace MD, then go to
next step.

Yes
No

Replace MD player.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DIAGNOSTIC ASSIST FUNCTION

A6E817566900W26

Structural View
Switch location

A6E8175W001
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

FM1 button
FM2 button
AM button
CD button
TAPE/MD button
SEEK button (upper) (type A)
SCAN button (type B)
SEEK button (lower) (type A)
AUTO-M button (type B)
TA button (type A)
SEEK button (upper) (type B)
AUTO-M button (type A)
SEEK button (lower) (type B)

T176

10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

AF button (type A)
PYT button (type A)
POWER button (type A)
AUDIO CONT button (type B)
AUDIO CONT button (type A)
POWER button (type B)
Preset button 1
Preset button 2
Preset button 3
Preset button 4
Preset button 5
Preset button 6

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
LCD Inspection
1. With audio on, first press the POWER button, then simultaneously press the SEEK button (upper) for
approximately 1 second.
2. Inspect the LCD according to the following table:
Inspection
Start LCD inspection
mode.

Display

Action
Characters displayed in LCD LCD is okay.
are not truncated or faint.
Other than above.
Replace base unit.

3. Turn the audio off or the ignition switch to the LOCK position to stop the diagnostic assist function.
Button Inspection
1. With audio on, first press the POWER button, then simultaneously press the TAPE/MD button for
approximately 1 second.
2. Inspect the button according to the following table:
Inspection
• Start button inspection mode.
• Press the all buttons.

Display
Buzzer sounds.
Buzzer does not sound.

Action
Button is okay.
Replace base unit.

3. Turn the audio off or the ignition switch to the LOCK position to stop the diagnostic assist function.
Speaker Inspection
1. With audio on, first press the POWER button, then simultaneously press the AUTO-M button for
approximately 1 second.
2. Inspect the speaker according to the following table:
Inspection
• Start speaker inspection mode.
• Does each speaker output sound in the
following order?
1. Left front door speaker and tweeter
2. Right front door speaker and tweeter
3. Right rear door speaker and woofer
4. Left rear rear door speaker and woofer

Display
Yes

Action
Speakers and wiring harness between base
unit and speakers are okay.
Inspect the following parts.
• Malfunctioning speaker
• Wiring harness between base unit and
malfunctioning speaker

3. Turn the audio off or the ignition switch to the LOCK position to stop the diagnostic assist function.
Radio Reception Condition Inspection
1. With audio on and at radio mode, first press the POWER button, then simultaneously press the preset button
2 for approximately 1 second.
2. Inspect the radio reception condition according to the following table:
Inspection
Start radio reception
condition inspection mode.

Display

Action
Antenna, antenna feeder, and base unit are okay.

Change frequency (channel) and inspect again.

Inspect antenna and antenna feeder.
• If either one of them is not okay, replace malfunctioning
part.
• If both are okay, replace base unit.

3. Turn the audio off or the ignition switch to the LOCK position to stop the diagnostic assist function.

T177

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AUDIO]
Audio Amplifier (External) Inspection
1. With audio on, first press the POWER button, then simultaneously press the SCAN button for approximately 1
second.
2. Inspect the audio amplifier (external) according to the following table:
Inspection
Start audio amplifier
(external) inspection mode.

Display
Speakers output
sound.
Speakers do not
output sound.

Action
System is okay.
Inspect following parts.
• Audio amplifier (external)
• Speakers
• Woofer relay
• Wiring harness
(base unitaudio amplifier
(external)Woofer relay)

Replace base unit.

3. Turn the audio off or the ignition switch to the LOCK position to stop the diagnostic assist function.

End Of Sie

T178

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
FOREWORD

A6E817266350W01

Outline
• There are two on-board diagnostic functions: Operation mode, which inspects for and indicates correct
operation of the input signals to the control module, and condition detection mode, which indicates troubles in
the system.
• The two functions can be done using either of the following methods:
Verifying the flashing pattern of the cruise set indicator light in the instrument cluster.
Inspection Order

A6E8172W001

End Of Sie

INSPECTION OF DTCS FOR OPERATION MODE

A6E817266350W02

Note
• The cruise set indicator light will illuminate for 3 seconds when operation mode is on.
• If the cruise set indicator light does not illuminate for 3 seconds (Operation mode is not on) the following
may be the cause of the malfunction:
Cruise actuator ignition power supply fuse
Cruise set indicator light power supply fuse
Cruise control switch
Cruise control main switch
Clock spring for air bag system
Print plate in instrument cluster
Cruise set indicator light bulb
Cruise actuator
Open or short circuit in following wiring harnesses:
• Between cruise set indicator light and cruise actuator terminal G
• Between fuse block and cruise actuator terminal L
• Between fuse block and instrument cluster
• Between cruise actuator and clock spring
• Between clock spring and cruise control switch
Open circuit in following wiring harnesses:
• Between cruise actuator terminal I and ground
• Between clock spring and ground
1. Turn the ignition switch to the ON position.
2. Verify that the cruise control main switch is off.

T179

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
3. Press and hold the RESUME/ACCEL switch on
(1), and turn on the cruise control main switch (2).
Keep the RESUME/ACCEL switch on for 3
seconds or more after the cruise control main
switch released. (The cruise set indicator light will
illuminate for 3 seconds, showing that the system
inspection has started.)
4. Operate each switch as described in the
operation code list and note the operation code
list pattern.
• If the cruise set indicator light does not flash,
inspect the corresponding system area.
A6E8172W002
• If it flashes, the corresponding DTC(s) will be
indicated and mode can be judged normal.
5. The operation mode is canceled by turning the ignition switch to LOCK position or turning off the cruise control
main switch.
Operation Code List
Operation

DTC

Turn SET/COAST switch
on

Cruise control switch
(SET/COAST switch)

(See T181
DTC 21)

Turn RESUME/ACCEL
switch on

Cruise control switch
(RESUME/ACCEL
switch)

(See T181
DTC 22)

Depress brake pedal

Brake switch

(See T182
DTC 31)

MTX:

Depress clutch pedal

ATX:

Diagnosed circuit

MTX:
35

Shift selector lever to P
or N position

Drive vehicle above 40
km/h {25 mph}

Output pattern

Clutch switch

ATX:

Page

(See T183
DTC 35)

TR switch

Vehicle speed sensor

(See T184
DTC 37)

Inspection of Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Foreword
• When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection shake the wiring harness and connectors while
doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If
there is a problem check to make sure connectors terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and
undamaged.

End Of Sie

T180

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
DTC 21

A6E817266350W03

DTC 21
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Cruise control switch (SET/COAST switch)
• Resistance detected between cruise actuator connector terminal J and ground is other than
approximately 680 ohms.
• Cruise actuator malfunction
• Cruise control switch malfunction
• Clock spring malfunction
• Open circuit in wiring harness between clock spring and ground
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between cruise actuator and clock spring

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
INSPECT SIGNAL LINE OF CRUISE
CONTROL SWITCH POSITION
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector.
• Turn SET/COAST switch on.
• Is resistance at cruise actuator connector
terminal J approximately 680 ohms?
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
• Inspect cruise control switch.
(See T116 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Is cruise control switch okay?
INSPECT CLOCK SPRING
• Inspect clock spring.
(See T126 CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION)
• Is clock spring okay?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLOCK SPRING AND GROUND FOR
CONTINUITY
• Disconnect cruise control switch connector.
• Is there continuity between clock spring
connector terminal C and ground?

ACTION
Yes
No

Replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace cruise control switch.
(See T115 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace clock spring.
(See T125 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Repair wiring harness. (cruise actuatorclock spring)
Repair wiring harness. (clock springground)

Yes
No

End Of Sie
DTC 22

DTC 22
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W04

Cruise control switch (RESUME/ACCEL switch)
• Resistance detected between cruise actuator connector terminal J and ground is other than
approximately 2.2 kilohms.
• Cruise actuator malfunction
• Cruise control switch malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
INSPECT CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
• Inspect cruise control switch.
(See T116 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Is cruise control switch okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
• Replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
• Replace cruise control switch.
(See T115 CRUISE CONTROL SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

T181

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
DTC 31

A6E817266350W05

DTC 31
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Brake switch
• Voltage detected at cruise actuator connector terminal C is not approximately 12 V or voltage detected
at cruise actuator connector terminal K is not approximately 0 V.
• Burnt STOP 15 A fuse
• Cruise actuator malfunction
• Brake switch and/or brake switch 2 malfunction
• Open circuit in wiring harness between STOP 15 A fuse and brake switch
• Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch and cruise actuator terminal C
• Short circuit in wiring harness between brake switch 2 and cruise actuator terminal K

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY WHICH BRAKE SWITCH CIRCUIT IS
MALFUNCTIONING
• Does brake light illuminate when brake pedal
depressed?
2
INSPECT STOP 15 A FUSE FOR FUSION
• Is STOP 15 A fuse okay?
*3

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
STOP 15 A FUSE AND BRAKE SWITCH FOR
CONTINUITY
• Depress brake pedal.
• Is voltage at brake switch connector terminal
D approximately 12 V?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
STOP 15 A FUSE AND BRAKE SWITCH FOR
CONTINUITY
• Is voltage at brake switch connector terminal
B approximately 12 V?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BRAKE SWITCH AND BRAKE LIGHT FOR
CONTINUITY
• Depress brake pedal.
• Is voltage at brake light connector terminal
(power supply side) approximately 12 V?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BRAKE SWITCH AND CRUISE ACTUATOR
FOR CONTINUITY
• Depress brake pedal.
• Is voltage at cruise actuator connector
terminal C approximately 12 V?

T182

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 6.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace fuse after inspecting and repairing wiring harness.
Go to Step 5.
Go to next step.

Yes

Inspect brake switch.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION)
Repair wiring harness. (STOP 15 A fuseBrake switch)

No
Yes
No

Inspect following electrical parts.
• Brake light bulb
• Wiring harness between brake light and ground
Repair wiring harness. (Brake switchBrake light)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness. (Cruise actuatorBrake switch)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
*7
VERIFY WHICH IS MALFUNCTIONING
CRUISE ACTUATOR AND WIRING HARNESS
(BRAKE SWITCH 2 AND CRUISE
ACTUATOR) OR BRAKE SWITCH 2
• Disconnect brake switch connector.
• Turn ignition switch ON position.
• Is voltage at brake switch connector terminal
B approximately 12 V?
*8
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BRAKE SWITCH 2 AND CRUISE ACTUATOR
FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector.
• Turn ignition switch ON position.
• Is voltage at cruise actuator connector
terminal K approximately 12 V?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Inspect brake switch 2.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION)

Repair wiring harness. (Cruise actuatorBrake switch 2)
Repalce cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

DTC 35

A6E817266350W06

DTC 35
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Clutch switch (MTX), TR switch (ATX)
• Voltage detected at cruise actuator connector terminal F is not approximately 0 V.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Cruise actuator malfunction
Starter relay malfunction (ATX)
Clutch switch malfunction (MTX)
TR switch malfunction (ATX)
Open circuit in wiring harness between PCM and clutch switch (MTX)
Open circuit in wiring harness between starter relay and TR switch (ATX)
Open circuit in wiring harness between cruise actuator and clutch switch (MTX) or TR switch (ATX)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1
2
*3

INSPECTION
• Does vehicle has MTX?
INSPECT CLUTCH SWITCH
Is clutch switch okay?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLUTCH SWITCH AND GROUND FOR
CONTINUITY
• Disconnect clutch switch connector.
• Is there continuity between clutch switch
connector terminal B and ground?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CRUISE ACTUATOR AND CLUTCH SWITCH
FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector.
• Is there continuity between cruise actuator
connector terminal F and clutch switch
connector terminal A?

ACTION
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to step 5.
Go to next step.
Replace clutch switch.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness.
(Clutch switchground)

Yes

Replace cluise actuator.
(SeeT110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Repair wiring harness.
(Cruise actuatorclutch switch)

T183

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
5
INSPECT TR SWITCH
• Inspect TR switch.
(See K14 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
INSPECTION)
• Is TR switch okay?
*6
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN TR
SWITCH AND GROUND FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect TR switch connector.
• Is there continuity between TR switch
connector terminal A and ground?
*7
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CRUISE ACTUATOR AND TR SWITCH FOR
CONTINUITY
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector.
• Is there continuity between cruise actuator
connector terminal F and TR switch
connector terminal F?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair TR switch.
(See K15 TRANSAXLE RANGE (TR) SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness (TR switchground ) or inspect
starter.

Yes

Replace cruise actuator.
(SeeT110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Repair wiring harness. (cruise actuatorTR switch)

End Of Sie
DTC 37

A6E817266350W07

DTC 37
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Vehicle speed sensor
• Vehicle speed signal is not detected at cruise actuator connector terminal A.
• Cruise actuator malfunction
• DSC HU/CM (with ABS/TCS HU/CM)
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between ABS/TCS cruise actuator and DSC HU/CM (without
DSC: ABS/TCS HU/CM)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

T184

INSPECTION
INSPECT SPEEDOMETER OPERATION
• Does speedometer operate correctly?

INSPECT PCM ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
• Drive the vehicle at more than 40 km/h {25 mph}.
• Check the DTC for PCM ON-BOARD
DIAGNOSTIC.
• Is DTC P0500 displayed?
VERIFY WHICH IS MALFUNCTIONING WIRING
HARNESS WITH DSC OR CRUISE ACTUATOR
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector and DSC
HU/CM connector.
• Is there continuity between cruise actuator
connector terminal A and DSC HU/CM connector
terminal AE?
With ABS/TCS
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector and ABS/
TCS HU/CM connector.
• Is there continuity between cruise actuator
connector terminal A and ABS/TCS connector
terminal V?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Perform instrument cluster input/output check
mode.
(See T75 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER INPUT/
OUTPUT CHECK MODE)
Go to applicable DTC inspection.
Go to next step.

Replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Repair wiring harness.
With DSC
(DSC HU/CMCruise actuator)
With ABS/TCS
(ABS/TCS HU/CMCruise actuator)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
INSPECTION OF DTCS FOR CONDITION DETECTION MODE
End Of Sie

A6E817266350W08

Note
• The cruise set indicator light will illuminate for 3 seconds, when condition detection mode is on.
• If the RESUME/ACCEL switch on the cruise control switch is malfunctioning, the cruise set indicator light
will not give a correct indication when you inspect the system.
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Drive the vehicle at 30 km/h {19 mph} or more.
Press on the cruise control main switch (1).
Operate each of the cruise control switches.
Stop the vehicle and let it idle.
Turn and hold the RESUME/ACCEL switch on for
at least 3 seconds (2). The cruise set indicator
light will illuminate for 3 seconds, and then go off
for at least 2 seconds. Thus, the condition
detection mode begins.
• If a DTC is indicated, inspect the
corresponding system area.
• If normal, DTC(s) will not be indicated.
6. The condition detection mode is canceled by
turning the ignition switch to LOCK position or
turning off the cruise control main switch.

A6E8172W013

Condition Code List
DTC

Output pattern

Diagnosed circuit

Page

Cruise actuator (Drive circuit)

(See T186 DTC 01)

Brake switch

(See T186 DTC 05)

Brake switch
Brake switch 2

(See T186 DTC 07)

Cruise control switch (SET/
COAST switch)

(See T187 DTC 11)

Cruise control switch (RESUME/
(See T187 DTC 12)
ACCEL switch)

Cruise control switch (Ground
circuit)

(See T188 DTC 13)

Cruise actuator (Control circuit)

(See T188 DTC 15)

Note
• When two or more DTCs are indicated, inspect the malfunction with the smallest number first.
Inspection of Diagnostic Trouble Codes
Foreword
• When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection shake the wiring harness and connectors while
doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If
there is a problem check to make sure connectors terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and
undamaged.

End Of Sie

T185

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
DTC 01
DTC 01
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W09

Cruise actuator (Drive circuit)
• Malfunction in cruise actuator circuit (drive circuit)
• Cruise actuator malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
ACTION
REPLACE CRUISE ACTUATOR IF IT IS MALFUNCTIONING
• Replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie
DTC 05

DTC 05
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W10

Brake switch
• Voltage detected at cruise actuator connector terminal C is always approximately 0 V.
• Cruise actuator malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
INSPECT DTC FOR OPERATION MODE
• Was operation mode for DTC 31 performed?

Yes

ACTION
Perform operation mode for DTC 31 on-board diagnostic
again. Even if no malfunction is detected in operation mode,
if DTC 05 is indicated in condition detection mode on-board
diagnostic, replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Perform operation mode for DTC 31.

End Of Sie
DTC 07

DTC 07
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

T186

A6E817266350W11

Brake switch
Brake switch 2
• Voltage detected at cruise actuator connector terminal C or K is always approximately 12 V.
• Voltage detected at cruise actuator connector terminal K is always approximately 0 V.
• METER IG15 A fuse burnt out
• Brake switch and/or brake switch 2 malfunction
• Cruise actuator malfunction
• Open circuit in wiring harness between STOP 15 A fuse and brake switch
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between brake switch and cruise actuator terminal C
• Open circuit in wiring harness between brake switch 2 and METER IG15 A fuse
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between cruise actuator terminal K and brake switch 2

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH
• Disconnect brake switch connector.
• Inspect brake switch.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Is brake switch okay?
2
INSPECT BRAKE SWITCH 2
• Inspect brake switch 2.
(See P8 BRAKE SWITCH INSPECTION)
• Is brake switch okay?
3
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BRAKE SWITCH AND CRUISE ACTUATOR
FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect cruise actuator connector.
• Is there continuity between brake switch
connector D and cruise actuator connector
C.
4
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BRAKE SWITCH 2 AND CRUISE ACTUATOR
FOR SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
• Connect brake switch connector.
• Turn ignition switch ON position.
• Is voltage at cruise actuator connector
terminal K approximately 12 V?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace brake switch.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace brake switch.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness. (Cruise actuatorBrake switch)

Yes

Replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Repair wiring harness. (Cruise actuatorBrake switch 2)

End Of Sie
DTC 11

DTC 11
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W12

Cruise control switch (SET/COAST switch)
• Resistance detected between cruise actuator connector terminal J and ground is always
approximately 680 ohms.
• Cruise actuator malfunction
• Cruise control switch malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
INSPECT DTC FOR OPERATION MODE
• Was operation mode for DTC 21 performed?

Yes

ACTION
Perform operation mode for DTC 21 on-board diagnostic
again. Even if no malfunction is detected in operation mode,
if DTC 11 is indicated in condition detection mode on-board
diagnostic, replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Perform operation mode for DTC 21.

End Of Sie
DTC 12

DTC 12
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W13

Cruise control switch (RESUME/ACCEL switch)
• Resistance detected between cruise actuator connector terminal J and ground is always
approximately 2.2 kilohms.
• Cruise actuator malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
INSPECT DTC FOR OPERATION MODE
• Was operation mode for DTC 22 performed?

Yes

ACTION
Perform operation mode for DTC 22 on-board diagnostic
again. Even if no malfunction is detected in operation mode,
if DTC 12 is indicated in condition detection mode on-board
diagnostic, replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Perform operation mode for DTC 22.

End Of Sie

T187

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [CRUISE CONTROL SYSTEM]
DTC 13
DTC 13
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W14

Cruise control switch (ground circuit)
• Resistance detected between cruise actuator connector terminal J and ground is always
approximately 0 ohm.
• Cruise actuator malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
INSPECT DTC FOR OPERATION MODE
• Was operation mode for DTCs 21 and 22 performed?

Yes

ACTION
Perform operation mode for DTCs 21 and 22 on-board
diagnostic again. Even if no malfunction is detected in
operation mode, if DTC 13 is indicated in condition detection
mode on-board diagnostic, replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Perform operation mode for DTCs 21 and 22.

End Of Sie
DTC 15

DTC 15
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817266350W15

Cruise actuator (control circuit)
• Malfunction in cruise actuator circuit (control circuit)
• Cruise actuator malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
ACTION
REPLACE CRUISE ACTUATOR IF IT IS MALFUNCTIONING
• Replace cruise actuator.
(See T110 CRUISE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

T188

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
FOREWORD

A6E817401046W01

Outline
• The OBD (on-board diagnostic) test inspects the integrity and function of the air bag system and outputs the
results when requested by the specific tests.
• OBD test also:
Provides a quick inspection of the air bag system.
Is usually performed at the start of each diagnostic procedure.
Provides verification after repairs to ensure that no other faults occurred during service.
• The OBD test is divided into three tests:
Read/clear diagnostic results
PID/data monitor and record
Active command mode
• Diagnostic DTC can be read/cleared, using the SST (WDS or equivalent).

Note
• When the air bag system is malfunctioning, turn the ignition switch to the ON position to display the
current DTC, using the air bag system warning light on the instrument cluster. However this light is strictly
for reference. Make sure to inspect the system, using the SST (WDS or equivalent).
Read/clear diagnostic results
• This function allows you to read or clear DTCs in the SAS unit memory.
PID/data monitor and record
• This function allows you access certain data values, input signals, calculated values, and system status
information.
Active command modes
• This function allows you to control devices through WDS or equivalent.

T189

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
Flowchart
• Use the following flowchart to verify the cause of the trouble.
Note
• While performing the inspection of the past malfunction code, the applicable DTCs may be added to
memory by removing or disconnecting the related parts. Inspect only the DTCs that were indicated before
inspecting.
• When DTCs of present malfunction are no longer output after present and/or past malfunctions have been
repaired, be sure to perform past malfunction display cancellation to prevent repair of malfunctions that
have already been repaired.

A6E8174W013

T190

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTCs Reading Procedure
1. Connect SST (WDS or equivalent) to the vehicle
DLC-2 16-pin connector.
2. Retrieve DTC using SST (WDS or equivalent).

A6E3970W002

Clearing DTCs Procedure
1. After repairs have been made, perform the DTCs reading procedure.
2. Erase DTCs using SST (WDS or equivalent).
3. Ensure that the customer's concern has been resolved.
PID/Data Monitor and Record Procedure
1. Connect SST (WDS or equivalent) to the vehicle
DLC-2 16-pin connector.
2. Access and monitor PIDs using SST (WDS or
equivalent).

A6E3970W002

Active Command Mode Procedure
1. Connect SST (WDS or equivalent) to the vehicle
DLC-2 16-pin connector.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
3. Activate active command mode using SST (WDS
or equivalent).

A6E3970W002

End Of Sie

T191

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC TABLE

A6E817401046W02

• DTCs are common for present and past malfunction diagnosis.

Note
• When DTCs not shown in the DTC table are displayed, replace the SAS unit.
• If the air bag system warning light does not illuminate or remains illuminated when the ignition switch is
turned to ON position, inspect and repair the air bag system warning light circuitry and then confirm that
the air bag system warning light is operational.
• The air bag system warning light will flash the DTC pattern for five cycles, and then will remain illuminated
until the ignition switch is turned to the LOCK position.
DTC
Air bag system warning light

WDS or
equivalent
B1231

B1342

Flashing pattern

SAS unit activation
(See T198 DTC
(deployment) control freeze B1231)

SAS unit

Air bag system warning light is illuminated all
the time.
Air bag system warning light is illuminated all
the time.

1
1

Air bag system warning light is illuminated
does not illuminate.

Air bag system warning light is illuminated all
the time.

B1871
48

B1877
B1878

B1879
B1881
B1882
B1883

B1884

T192

Page

B1870

Malfunction location

B1869

Priority
ranking

(See T198 DTC
B1342)

SAS unit (DTC 12 detection
circuit malfunction)
Air bag system warning
light system circuit open
Air bag system warning
light system circuit short to (See T198 DTC
ground
B1869, B1870)
Air bag system warning
light system circuit short to
power supply
Occupancy sensor system
(communication error)
Occupancy sensor system
(sensor internal circuit
abnormal)
Driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt system resistance
high
Driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt system circuit
short to power supply
Driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt system circuit
short to ground
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt system
resistance high
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt system
circuit short to power supply
Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt system
short to ground
Passenger-side air bag cutoff indicator light system
circuit open or short to
ground

(See T200 DTC
B1871)

(See T202 DTC
B1877, B1878,
B1879, B1885)

(See T203 DTC
B1881, B1882,
B1883, B1886)

(See T205 DTC
B1884, B1890)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC
Air bag system warning light

WDS or
equivalent

Flashing pattern

Priority
ranking

Malfunction location

Page

B1885

Driver-side pre-tensioner
(See T202 DTC
seat belt system resistance B1877, B1878,
low
B1879, B1885)

B1886

Passenger-side pretensioner seat belt system
resistance low

B1890

Passenger-side air bag cut(See T205 DTC
off indicator light system
B1884, B1890)
circuit short to power supply

Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) system
circuit short to ground

(See T208 DTC
B1913, B1916,
B1932, B1934)

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1)
system circuit short to
ground

(See T210 DTC
B1913, B1925,
B1933, B1935)

B1916

Driver-side air bag module (See T208 DTC
(inflator No.1) system
B1913, B1916,
circuit short to power supply B1932, B1934)

B1921

Deployment prohibited
because configuration is
not set

(See T211 DTC
B1921)
(See T210 DTC
B1913, B1925,
B1933, B1935)

B1913

(See T203 DTC
B1881, B1882,
B1883, B1886)

B1925

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1)
system circuit short to
power supply

B1932

Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) system
resistance high

(See T208 DTC
B1913, B1916,
B1932, B1934)

B1933

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1)
system resistance high

(See T210 DTC
B1913, B1925,
B1933, B1935)

B1934

Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) system
resistance low

(See T208 DTC
B1913, B1916,
B1932, B1934)

B1935

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1)
system resistance low

(See T210 DTC
B1913, B1925,
B1933, B1935)

Driver-side side air bag
module system circuit short
to power supply
Driver-side side air bag
module system circuit short
(See T212 DTC
to ground
B1992, B1993,
Driver-side side air bag
B1994, B1995)
module system resistance
high
Driver-side side air bag
module system resistance
low

B1992
B1993
22
B1994
B1995

T193

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC
Air bag system warning light

WDS or
equivalent

Flashing pattern

Priority
ranking

Page

Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.2) system
circuit short to ground

(See T215 DTC
B2228, B2230,
B2232, B2234)
(See T217 DTC
B2229, B2231,
B2233, B2235)

B1996
B1997
B1998
B1999

B2228

Malfunction location

(See T213 DTC
B1996, B1997,
B1998, B1999)

B2229

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2)
system circuit short to
ground

B2230

Driver-side air bag module (See T215 DTC
(inflator No.2) system
B2228, B2230,
circuit short to power supply B2232, B2234)
(See T217 DTC
B2229, B2231,
B2233, B2235)

B2231

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2)
system circuit short to
power supply

B2232

Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.2) system
resistance high

(See T215 DTC
B2228, B2230,
B2232, B2234)

B2233

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2)
system resistance high

(See T217 DTC
B2229, B2231,
B2233, B2235)

B2234

Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.2) system
resistance low

(See T215 DTC
B2228, B2230,
B2232, B2234)

B2235

Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2)
system resistance low

(See T217 DTC
B2229, B2231,
B2233, B2235)
(See T218 DTC
B2296)
(See T220 DTC
B2444, U2017)

B2296

Crash zone sensor system
(communication error,
sensor internal circuit
abnormal)

B2444

Driver-side side air bag
sensor system (sensor
internal circuit abnormal)

B2445

Passenger-side side air
(See T222 DTC
bag sensor system (sensor
B2445, U2018)
internal circuit abnormal)

B2477

Configuration error

T194

(See T224 DTC
B2477)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC
Air bag system warning light

WDS or
equivalent

Flashing pattern

B2773
B2774

Driver-side curtain air bag
module system resistance
low
Driver-side curtain air bag
module system resistance
high
Driver-side curtain air bag
module system circuit short
to ground
Driver-side curtain air bag
module system circuit short
to power supply
Passenger-side curtain air
bag module system
resistance low
Passenger-side curtain air
bag module system
resistance high
Passenger-side curtain air
bag module system circuit
short to ground
Passenger-side curtain air
bag module system circuit
short to power supply

Page

(See T224 DTC
B2773, B2774,
B2775, B2776)

SAS unit connector poor
connection

(See T220 DTC
B2444, U2017)
(See T222 DTC
B2445, U2018)

B2775
B2776
B2777
B2778
B2779
B2780

B2867

Malfunction location

Priority
ranking

U2017

Driver-side side air bag
sensor system
(communication error)

U2018

Passenger-side side air
bag sensor system
(communication error)

(See T226 DTC
B2777, B2778,
B2779, B2780)

(See T227 DTC
B2867)

End Of Sie

PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE
PID name (definition)
CONT_RCM
(Number of continuous DTC)
D_ABAGR2
(Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.2) resistance)
D_CRSH_S
(Driver-side side air bag
sensor state)
DABAGR
(Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) resistance)
DR_CURTN
(Driver-side curtain air bag
module resistance)
DR_PTENS
(Driver-side pre-tensioner seat
belt resistance)
DS_AB
(Driver-side side air bag
module resistance)

A6E817401046W03

Unit/condition

ohm
OK/
COMM FAIL/
INT FAIL

Condition/specification
• DTC is detected: 1255
• DTC is not detected: 0
Under any condition: 1.53.7 ohm
• Sensor normal: OK
• Sensor communication error: COMM FAIL
• Sensor internal circuit abnormal: INT FAIL

SAS unit
terminal

1G, 1J
2Z, 2AA

ohm

Under any condition: 1.53.7 ohm

1S, 1V

ohm

Under any condition: 1.43.2 ohm

2V, 2Y

ohm

Under any condition: 1.53.1 ohm

2P, 2S

ohm

Under any condition: 1.43.2 ohm

2M, 2O

T195

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
PID name (definition)
DS_AB_ST
(Driver-side side air bag
module circuit state)
DS_CURT_ST
(Driver-side curtain air bag
module circuit state)
DS1_STAT
(Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) circuit state)
DS2_STAT
(Driver-side air bag module
(inflator No.2) circuit state)
DSB_P_ST
(On demand driver-side pretensioner seat belt circuit
state)
DSSBLT_PF
(Driver-side pre-tensioner seat
belt circuit state)
FRNT_CRSH_SNSR
(Crash zone sensor state)
OD_D_CRSH
(On demand driver-side side
air bag sensor state)
OD_D_CURT
(On demand driver-side
curtain air bag module circuit
state)
OD_DAB1_ST
(On demand driver-side air
bag module (inflator No.1)
circuit state)
OD_DAB2_ST
(On demand driver-side air
bag module (inflator No.2)
circuit state)
OD_DSAB_ST
(On demand driver-side side
air bag circuit state)
OD_F_CRSH
(On demand crash zone
sensor state)
OD_P_CRSH
(On demand passenger-side
side air bag sensor state)
OD_P_CURT
(On demand passenger-side
curtain air bag module circuit
state)
OD_PAB1ST
(On demand passenger-side
air bag module (inflator No.1)
circuit state)
OD_PAB2_ST
(On demand passenger-side
air bag module (inflator No.2)
circuit state)

T196

Unit/condition
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
OK/
COMM FAIL/
INT FAIL
OK/
COMM FAIL/
INT FAIL
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
OK/
COMM FAIL/
INT FAIL
OK/
COMM FAIL/
INT FAIL
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+

Condition/specification
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Sensor normal: OK
Sensor communication error: COMM FAIL
Sensor internal circuit abnormal: INT FAIL
Sensor normal: OK
Sensor communication error: COMM FAIL
Sensor internal circuit abnormal: INT FAIL
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Sensor normal: OK
Sensor communication error: COMM FAIL
Sensor internal circuit abnormal: INT FAIL
Sensor normal: OK
Sensor communication error: COMM FAIL
Sensor internal circuit abnormal: INT FAIL
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+
Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+

SAS unit
terminal
2M, 2O

2V, 2Y

1S, 1V

1G, 1J

2P, 2S

1B, 1C
2Z, 2AA

2V, 2Y

1S, 1V

1G, 1J

2M, 2O

1B, 1C
2B, 2C

2A, 2D

1M, 1P

1A,1D

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
PID name (definition)
OD_P_PSAB_ST
(On demand passenger-side
side air bag sensor circuit
state)
P_ABAGR2
(Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2)
resistance)
P_PTENSFLT
(Passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt circuit state)
PABAGR
(Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1)
resistance)
PCRSH_SNSR
(Passenger-side side air bag
sensor state)
PS_AB
(Passenger-side side air bag
module resistance)
PS_AB_ST
(Passenger-side side air bag
sensor circuit state)

Unit/condition
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
ohm
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
ohm
OK/
COMM FAIL/
INT FAIL
ohm
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+

PS_CURTN
(Passenger-side curtain air
bag module resistance)

ohm

PS_CURT_ST
(Passenger-side curtain air
bag module circuit state)

NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+

PS_PTENS
(Passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt resistance)
PS1_STAT
(Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.1) circuit
state)
PS2_STAT
(Passenger-side air bag
module (inflator No.2) circuit
state)
PSB_P_ST
(On demand passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt circuit
state)
RCM_VOLT
(System IG1 voltage value)

ohm
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
NORMAL/
OPEN/
SHRT GND/
SHRT B+
V

SAS unit
terminal

Condition/specification
•
•
•
•

Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+

Under any condition: 1.42.9 ohm
•
•
•
•

1A, 1D

Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+

Under any condition: 1.42.9 ohm

2B, 2C

Under any condition: 1.43.2 ohm

2I, 2L

Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+

Under any condition: 1.43.2 ohm
•
•
•
•

2I, 2L

2A, 2B

Related wiring harness normal: NORMAL
Related wiring harness circuit open: OPEN
Related wiring harness short to ground: SHRT GND
Related wiring harness short to power supply: SHRT B+

Under any condition: 1.53.1 ohm
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

2G, 2J

1M, 1P

• Sensor normal: OK
• Sensor communication error: COMM FAIL
• Sensor internal circuit abnormal: INT FAIL

•
•
•
•

2I, 2L

2A, 2D

2G, 2J

1M, 1P

1A, 1D

2G, 2J
1W

End Of Sie

ACTIVE COMMAND MODE TABLE
Command name
WRNLAMPCHM

A6E817401046W04

Definition
Air bag system warning light

Operation
ON/OFF

End Of Sie

T197

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1231
DTC B1231
DETECTION
CONDITION

A6E817401046W05

SAS unit activation (deployment) control freeze
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• SAS unit determined collision

Diagnostic procedure
ACTION
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie
DTC B1342

DTC B1342
DETECTION
CONDITION

A6E817401046W06

SAS unit
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Malfunction in SAS unit inner circuit

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
ACTION
• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

End Of Sie

DTC B1869, B1870
DTC

B1869
B1870

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

T198

A6E817401046W07

Air bag system warning light system circuit open or short to ground
Air bag system warning light system circuit short to power supply
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Malfunction in air bag system warning light circuit
METER IG 15 A fuse malfunction
Instrument cluster malfunction
Malfunction of connectors between instrument cluster and SAS unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and instrument cluster
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and SAS unit
SAS unit malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT METER IG 15 A FUSE
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Remove METER IG 15 A fuse.
• Is fuse okay?
2
INSPECT FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN
METER IG 15 A FUSE AND INSTRUMENT
CLUSTER
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at instrument cluster
connector terminal 2V.
• Is voltage more than 9 V?
3
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER AND SAS UNIT

Yes
No

ACTION
Reinstall METER IG 15 A fuse, then go to next step.
Replace METER IG 15 A fuse.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace instrument cluster.
(See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

Yes

[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Replace instrument cluster.
(See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

T199

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1871
End Of Sie

DTC B1871

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W08

Occupancy sensor system (communication error, sensor internal circuit abnomal)
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Malfunction in wiring harness between SAS unit and occupancy sensor
Malfunction in occupancy sensor circuit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and occupancy sensor
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between SAS unit and occupancy sensor
Open circuit in wiring harness between occupancy sensor and ground
Occupancy sensor malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is vehicle equipped with passenger-side air bag
cut-off function?

T200

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
OCCUPANCY SENSOR AND SAS UNIT

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air bag
modules, and pre-tensioner seat belts
which may seriously injure you. Read AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
before handling air bag system
components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait for
more than 1 minute.
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicle with side air
bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side curtain air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with curtain
air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trim. (Vehicle with pretensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect drive- and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Disconnect occupancy sensor connector.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Inspect following wiring harness between SAS
unit and occupancy sensor terminals for short to
ground, short to power supply, and open circuit:
1IB
• Is wiring harness okay?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN METER
IG 15 A FUSE AND OCCUPANCY SENSOR
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at occupancy connector
terminal A.
• Is voltage more than 9V?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
OCCUPANCY SENSOR OR SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait for
more than 1 minute.
• Connect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect drive- and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Connect driver and passenger-side curtain air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with curtain
air bag)
• Connect driver and passenger-side side air bag
module connectors. (Vehicle with side air bag)
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Connect clock spring connector.
• Connect occupancy sensor connector.
• Short occupancy sensor connector terminal B to
ground.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Is DTC B1871 indicated?

Yes
No

[Present malfunction diagnosis]Go to next step.
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Replace wiring harness.

Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Replace seat cushion.
(See S106 FRONT SEAT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)

End Of Sie

T201

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1877, B1878, B1879, B1885

DTC

B1877
B1878
B1879
B1885

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W09

Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt system resistance high
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt system circuit short to power supply
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt system circuit short to ground
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.1 ohm) detected in driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt circuit
Malfunction in wiring harness between driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt and SAS unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt and SAS unit
Driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER
SEAT BELT
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DR_PTENS
• Is resistant value of driver-side pre-tensioner
seat belt normal?
Resistance: 1.53.1 ohm
2
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER
SEAT BELT CONNECTOR
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove drivers side B-pillar lower trim.
• Disconnect driver-side pre-tensioner seat
belt connector.
• Is there cracking or chipping in driver-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connector?

T202

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
DRIVER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT BELT
OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DSB_P_ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt
connector.
• Are DTCs B1877, B1878, B1879 and/or
B1885 indicated?

ACTION
Replace driver-side pre-tensioner seat belt.
(See S100 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

Yes

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B1881, B1882, B1883, B1886

DTC

B1881
B1882
B1883
B1886

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W10

Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt system resistance high
Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt system circuit short to power supply
Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt system circuit short to ground
Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.1 ohm) detected in passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt
circuit
• Malfunction in wiring harness between passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt and SAS unit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt and SAS unit
• Passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

T203

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
PS_PTENS
• Is resistant value of passenger-side pretensioner seat belt normal?
Resistance: 1.53.1 ohm
2
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE PRETENSIONER SEAT BELT CONNECTOR

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace passenger-side pre-tensioner seat belt.
(See S100 FRONT SEAT BELT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove passengers side B-pillar lower trim.
• Disconnect passenger-side pre-tensioner
seat belt connector.
• Is there cracking or chipping in passengerside pre-tensioner seat belt connector?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
PASSENGER-SIDE PRE-TENSIONER SEAT
BELT OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to passenger-side pre-tensioner seat
belt connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
PSB_P_ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect passenger-side pre-tensioner seat
belt connector.
• Are DTCs B1881, B1882, B1883 and/or
B1886 indicated?

End Of Sie

T204

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1884, B1890
DTC

B1884
B1890

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W11

Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light system circuit open or short to ground
Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light system circuit short to power supply
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Malfunction in passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light circuit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between SAS unit and passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light
• Open circuit in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and passenger-side air bag cut-off
indicator light
• Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is vehicle equipped with passenger-side air bag
cut-off function?

Yes

INSPECT OPERATION OF PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Does passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light illuminate?
INSPECT OPERATION OF PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
• Without child restraint seat on passengers seat,
does passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light go off after approximately 6 seconds?

Yes
No

ACTION
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Go to next step.
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Go to Step 4.
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.
Go to Step 6.

Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

T205

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
4
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT AND SAS UNIT
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air bag
modules, and pre-tensioner seat belts
which may seriously injure you. Read AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
before handling air bag system
components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait for
more than 1 minute.
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicle with side air
bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side curtain air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with curtain
air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trim. (Vehicle with pretensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect drive- and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with pretensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at 1U of SAS unit connector
terminal.
• Is voltage more than 9V?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT AND SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Remove center panel module.
(See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
• Inspect following wiring harness between
passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light and
SAS unit terminals for short to ground:
A1U
• Is wiring harness okay?
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT BULB
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait for
more than 1 minutes.
• Remove center panel module.
(See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
• Remove passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light bulb.
• Is passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light
bulb okay?

T206

Yes

Yes
No

ACTION
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Go to next step.
Go to next step.

[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light.
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Reinstall passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light
bulb, then go to next step.
Replace passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light
bulb.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
7
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait for
more than 1 minutes.
• Remove center panel module.
(See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
• Inspect continuity wiring harness between
passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light
terminals A and B.
• Is passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light
normal?
8
INSPECT FOR CONTINUITY BETWEEN METER
IG 15 A FUSE AND PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal B of passenger-side
air bag cut-off indicator light connector.
• Is voltage more than 9V?
9
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT AND SAS UNIT
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air bag
modules, and pre-tensioner seat belts
which may seriously injure you. Read AIR
BAG SYSTEM SERVICE WARNINGS
before handling air bag system
components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light .

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness.

Yes

[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Part malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Replace wiring harness.

End Of Sie

T207

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1913, B1916, B1932, B1934

DTC

B1913
B1916
B1932
B1934

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W12

Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system circuit short to ground
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system circuit short to power supply
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system resistance high
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.7 ohm) detected in driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1)
circuit
• Malfunction in wiring harness between driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) and SAS unit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between clock spring and SAS unit
• Clock spring malfunction
• Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.1) malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
(INFLATOR NO.1)
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DABAGR
• Is resistant value of driver-side air bag
module normal?
Resistance: 1.53.7 ohm
2
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
CONNECTOR (CLOCK SPRING)
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove driver-side air bag module.
• Is there cracking or chipping in driver-side air
bag module connector?

T208

ACTION
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Part malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR
NO.1) OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to driver-side air bag module (inflator
No.1) connector terminal 3A and 3B, and
driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2)
connector terminal 4A and 4B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
OD_DAB1_ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT CLOCK SPRING
• Inspect clock spring.
(See T126 CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION)
• Is clock spring normal?
5
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLOCK SPRING AND SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicle with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicle
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trim. (Vehicle with pretensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Inspect following wiring harnesses between
SAS unit and clock spring terminals for short
to ground, short to power supply, and open
circuit:
1S1D
1V1C
• Is wiring harness okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace driver-side air bag module.
(See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace clock spring.
(See T125 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Replace wiring harnesses.

End Of Sie

T209

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1913, B1925, B1933, B1935

DTC

B1913
B1925
B1933
B1935

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W13

Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system circuit short to ground
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system circuit short to power supply
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system resistance high
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Abnormal resistance (other than 1.42.9 ohm) detected in passenger-side air bag module (inflator
No.1) circuit
• Malfunction in wiring harness between passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) and SAS unit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) and SAS
unit
• Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.1) malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE (INFLATOR NO.1)
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
PABAGR
• Is resistant value of passenger-side air bag
module normal?
Resistance: 1.42.9 ohm
2
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE (INFLATOR NO.1) CONNECTOR
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Is there cracking or chipping in passengerside air bag module connector?

T210

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
(INFLATOR NO.1) OR RELATED WIRING
HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to passenger-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) connector terminal A and B,
and passenger-side air bag module (inflator
No.2) connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DO_PAB1ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Are DTCs B1913, B1925, B1933 and/or
B1935 indicated?

ACTION
Replace passenger-side air bag module.
(See T121 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

Yes

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B1921

DTC B1921
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W14

Deployment prohibited because configuration is not set
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• SAS unit configuration has not been set
• SAS unit configuration has not been set
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
CONFIGRATION
• Configurate SAS unit, using SST (WDS or equivalent).
• Is DTC B1921 indicated?

Yes

ACTION
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T211

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B1992, B1993, B1994, B1995

DTC

B1992
B1993
B1994
B1995

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W15

Driver-side side air bag module system circuit short to power supply
Driver-side side air bag module system circuit short to ground
Driver-side side air bag module system resistance high
Driver-side side air bag module system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Abnormal resistance (other than 1.43.2 ohm) detected in driver-side side air bag module circuit
Malfunction in wiring harness between driver-side side air bag module and SAS unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between driver-side side air bag module and SAS unit
Driver-side side air bag module malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DS_AB
• Is resistant value of driver-side side air bag
module normal?
Resistance: 1.43.2 ohm
2
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE CONNECTOR
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove driver-side side air bag module.
• Is there cracking or chipping in driver-side
side air bag module connector?

T212

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE OR
RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to driver-side side air bag module
connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
OD_DSAB_ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect driver-side side air bag module
connector.
• Are DTCs B1992, B1993, B1994 and/or
B1995 indicated?

ACTION
Replace driver-side side air bag module.
(See T121 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

Yes

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B1996, B1997, B1998, B1999

DTC

B1996
B1997
B1998
B1999

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W16

Passenger-side side air bag module system circuit short to power supply
Passenger-side side air bag module system circuit short to ground
Passenger-side side air bag module system resistance high
Passenger-side side air bag module system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Abnormal resistance (other than 1.43.2 ohm) detected in passenger-side side air bag module circuit
Malfunction in wiring harness between passenger-side side air bag module and SAS unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side side air bag module and SAS unit
Passenger-side side air bag module malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

T213

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
PS_AB
• Is resistant value of passenger-side side air
bag module normal?
Resistance: 1.43.2 ohm
2
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE CONNECTOR

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace passenger-side side air bag module.
(See T121 SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove passenger-side side air bag
module.
• Is there cracking or chipping in passengerside side air bag module connector?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to passenger-side side air bag
module connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DSB_P_ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect passenger-side side air bag module
connector.
• Are DTCs B1996, B1997, B1998 and/or
B1999 indicated?

End Of Sie

T214

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B2228, B2230, B2232, B2234

DTC

B2228
B2230
B2232
B2234

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W17

Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system circuit short to ground
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system circuit short to power supply
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system resistance high
Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Abnormal resistance (other than 1.53.7 ohm) detected in driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2)
circuit
• Malfunction in wiring harness between driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) and SAS unit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between clock spring and SAS unit
• Clock spring malfunction
• Driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2) malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
(INFLATOR NO.2)
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
D_ABAGR2
• Is resistant value of driver-side air bag
module normal?
Resistance: 1.53.7 ohm
2
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
CONNECTOR (CLOCK SPRING)

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove driver-side air bag module.
• Is there cracking or chipping in driver-side air
bag module connector?

T215

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE (INFLATOR
NO.2) OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to driver-side air bag module (inflator
No.1) connector terminal 3A and 3B, and
driver-side air bag module (inflator No.2)
connector terminal 4A and 4B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
OD_DAB2_ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT CLOCK SPRING
• Inspect clock spring.
(See T126 CLOCK SPRING INSPECTION)
• Is clock spring normal?
5
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLOCK SPRING AND SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicle with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicle
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trim. (Vehicle with pretensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Inspect following wiring harnesses between
SAS unit and clock spring terminals for short
to ground, short to power supply, and open
circuit:
1G1B
1J1A
• Is wiring harness okay?

End Of Sie

T216

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace driver-side air bag module.
(See T120 DRIVER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace clock spring.
(See T125 CLOCK SPRING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Replace wiring harnesses.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B2229, B2231, B2233, B2235

DTC

B2229
B2231
B2233
B2235

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W18

Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system circuit short to ground
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system circuit short to power supply
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system resistance high
Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) system resistance low
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Abnormal resistance (other than 1.42.9 ohm) detected in passenger-side air bag module circuit
• Malfunction in wiring harness between passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) and SAS unit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) and SAS
unit
• Passenger-side air bag module (inflator No.2) malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE (INFLATOR NO.2)
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
P_ABAGR2
• Is resistant value of passenger-side air bag
module normal?
Resistance: 1.42.9 ohm
2
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG
MODULE (INFLATOR NO.2) CONNECTOR

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Is there cracking or chipping in passengerside air bag module connector?

T217

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
(INFLATOR NO.2) OR RELATED WIRING
HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to passenger-side air bag module
(inflator No.1) connector terminal A and B,
and passenger-side air bag module (inflator
No.2) connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DO_PAB2ST
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Are DTCs B2229, B2231, B2233 and/or
B2235 indicated?

ACTION
Replace passenger-side air bag module.
(See T121 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

Yes

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie
DTC B2296

DTC B2296

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

T218

A6E817401046W19

Crash zone sensor system (communication error, sensor internal circuit abnormal)
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Malfunction in wiring harness between crash zone sensor and SAS unit
Malfunction in crash zone sensor circuit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between crash zone sensor and SAS unit
SAS unit malfunction
Crash zone sensor malfunction

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT CRASH ZONE SENSOR
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
OD_F_CRSH
• Is crash zone sensor normal?
2

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CRASH ZONE SENSOR AND SAS UNIT
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

No
Yes
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.
Replace crash zone sensor, then go to next step.
(See T123 CRASH ZONE SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harnesses.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T219

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B2444, U2017
DTC

B2444
U2017

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W20

Driver-side side air bag sensor system (sensor internal circuit abnormal)
Driver-side side air bag sensor system (communication error)
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Malfunction in wiring harness between driver-side side air bag sensor and SAS unit
Malfunction in driver-side side air bag sensor circuit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between driver-side side air bag sensor and SAS unit
Driver-side side air bag sensor malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG
SENSOR
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
OD_D_CRSH
• Is driver-side side air bag sensor normal?

T220

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
DRIVER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR AND
SAS UNIT
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

Yes

ACTION
Replace driver-side side air bag sensor, then go to next
step.
(See T123 SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harnesses.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T221

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B2445, U2018
DTC

B2445
U2018

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W21

Passenger-side side air bag sensor system (sensor internal circuit abnormal)
Passenger-side side air bag sensor system (communication error)
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Malfunction in wiring harness between passenger-side side air bag sensor and SAS unit
Malfunction in passenger-side side air bag sensor circuit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side side air bag sensor and SAS unit
Passenger-side side air bag sensor malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE SIDE AIR BAG
SENSOR
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
OD_P_CRSH
• Is passenger-side side air bag sensor
normal?

T222

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR AND
SAS UNIT
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

Yes

ACTION
Replace passenger-side side air bag sensor, then go to next
step.
(See T123 SIDE AIR BAG SENSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harnesses.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T223

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B2477
DTC B2477
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W22

SAS unit configuration error
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• SAS unit configuration not set correctly
• SAS unit configuration error
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
INSPECTION
CONFIGRATION
• Configurate SAS unit, using SST (WDS or equivalent).
• Is DTC B2477 indicated?

Yes

ACTION
[Present malfunction diagnosis]
Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
[Past malfunction diagnosis]
Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B2773, B2774, B2775, B2776

DTC

B2773
B2774
B2775
B2776

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W23

Driver-side curtain air bag module system resistance low
Driver-side curtain air bag module system resistance high
Driver-side curtain air bag module system circuit short to ground
Driver-side curtain air bag module system circuit short to power supply
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•
•

Abnormal resistance (other than 1.43.2 ohm) detected in driver-side curtain air bag module circuit
Malfunction in wiring harness between driver-side curtain air bag module and SAS unit
Open or short circuit in wiring harness between driver-side curtain air bag module and SAS unit
Driver-side curtain air bag module malfunction
SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG
MODULE
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DR_CURTN
• Is resistant value of driver-side curtain air
bag module normal?
Resistance: 1.43.2 ohm

T224

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
2
INSPECT DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG
MODULE CONNECTOR

ACTION
Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes

Replace driver-side curtain air bag module.
(See T122 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Disconnect driver-side curtain air bag
module connector.
• Is there cracking or chipping in driver-side
curtain air bag module connector?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
DRIVER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE
OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to driver-side curtain air bag module
connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DO_D_CURT
• Is related wiring harness normal?
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect driver-side curtain air bag module
connector.
• Are DTCs B2773, B2774, B2775 and/or
B2776 indicated?

T
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

T225

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
DTC B2777, B2778, B2779, B2780

DTC

B2777
B2778
B2779
B2780

DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W24

Passenger-side curtain air bag module system resistance low
Passenger-side curtain air bag module system resistance high
Passenger-side curtain air bag module system circuit short to ground
Passenger-side curtain air bag module system circuit short to power supply
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
• Abnormal resistance (other than 1.43.2 ohm) detected in passenger-side curtain air bag module
circuit
• Malfunction in wiring harness between passenger-side curtain air bag module and SAS unit
• Open or short circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side curtain air bag module and SAS unit
• Passenger-side curtain air bag module malfunction
• SAS unit malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR
BAG MODULE
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
PC_CURTN
• Is resistant value of passenger-side curtain
air bag module normal?
Resistance: 1.43.2 ohm
2
INSPECT PASSENGER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR
BAG MODULE CONNECTOR
Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read AIR BAG SYSTEM SERVICE
WARNINGS before handling air bag
system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Disconnect passenger-side curtain air bag
module connector.
• Is there cracking or chipping in passengerside curtain air bag module connector?

T226

ACTION
Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness.
Go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
STEP
INSPECTION
3
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
PASSENGER-SIDE CURTAIN AIR BAG
MODULE OR RELATED WIRING HARNESS
• Connect leads of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) or apply 2 ohm
resistor to passenger-side curtain air bag
module connector terminal A and B.
• Set resistance of SST (Fuel and
thermometer checker) to 2 ohm.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Check following PID/DATA monitor, using
SST (WDS or equivalent).
(See T195 PID/DATA MONITOR TABLE)
DO_P_CURT
• Is related wiring harness normal?
4
INSPECT SAS UNIT
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect passenger-side curtain air bag
module connector.
• Are DTCs B2777, B2778, B2779 and/or
B2780 indicated?

ACTION
Replace passenger-side curtain air bag module.
(See T122 CURTAIN AIR BAG MODULE REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

Yes

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:

• Troubleshooting completed.
Troubleshooting completed.

End Of Sie

DTC B2867

DTC B2867
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E817401046W25

SAS unit connector poor connection
Warning
• Detection conditions are for understanding DTC outline before performing inspection.
Performing inspection with only detection conditions may cause injury due to operating error
or damage the system. When performing inspection, always follow inspection procedure.
•
•
•
•

There is no continuity between poor connection detector bar terminals of SAS unit.
Poor connection of any SAS unit connectors
Malfunction of any SAS unit connectors
SAS unit malfunction

T227

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC [AIR BAG SYSTEM]
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
VERIFY THAT ALL SAS UNIT CONNECTORS
ARE CONNECTED WITH SAS UNIT

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Reconnect connector properly.

Yes

Present malfunction diagnosis:

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Turn up floor covering.
• Are all SAS unit connectors securely
connected?
INSPECT ALL SAS UNIT CONNECTORS
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicles
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trims. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Are poor connection detector bars of all SAS
unit connectors okay?

End Of Sie

T228

• Replace SAS unit.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

Past malfunction diagnosis:
No

• Troubleshooting completed.
Replace wiring harnesses.

TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
CAR-NAVIGATION SYSTEM
Troubleshooting Index
• Use the chart below verify the trouble in order to diagnose the appropriate area.
No.
1
2
3

A6E818066000W01

Malfunction symptom
While vehicle is in reverse, vehicle locator mark goes forward.
In navigation mode, vehicle locator mark skips.
Even when headlight switch is turned on, daytime screen does not change to night time screen.
(Front and rear combination lights operate normally.)

End Of Sie

NO.1 WHILE VEHICLE IS IN REVERSE, VEHICLE LOCATOR MARK GOES FORWARD.

A6E818066000W02

• When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness and connectors while
doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If
there is a problem, check to make sure connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and
undamaged.
1
While vehicle is in reverse, vehicle locator mark goes forward.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• Malfunction in shift position (R range (ATX) or revese position (MTX)) signal line of car-navigation unit.
Car-navigation unit malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and transaxle range switch
Transaxle range switch malfunction

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• While the vehicle is in reverse, are back-up
lights illuminated?

• Disconnect car-navigation unit connector
(16-pin).
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Shift selector lever to R range (ATX) or
revese position (MTX).
• Measure voltage at the following terminal of
car-navigation unit connector (16-pin,
harness side):
Terminal 2L (Shift position (R range (ATX)
or revese position (MTX)) signal)
• Is voltage 9 V or more?

• Does vehicle locator mark indicate actual
position of vehicle?

Yes
No
Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair back-up light circuit, then go to next step.
Replace car-navigation unit (available at Clarion service
center) or get it repaired at Panasonic Service center, then
go to next step.

ATX

• Inspect wiring harness between car-navigation unit (16pin, terminal 2L) and transaxle range switch, then go to
next step.

MTX

Yes
No

• Inspect wiring harness between car-navigation unit (16pin, terminal 2L) and back-up light switch, then go to
next step.
Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.2 IN NAVIGATION MODE, VEHICLE LOCATOR MARK SKIPS.

A6E818066000W03

2
In navigation mode, vehicle locator mark skips.
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• Malfunction in vehicle speed signal line of car-navigation unit.
Car-navigation unit malfunction
ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM malfunction (with ABS (ABS/TCS))
DSC HU/CM malfunction (with DSC)
Malfunction in wiring harness between car-navigation unit and instrument cluster

T229

TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Disconnect car-navigation unit connector
(16-pin).
• Jack up vehicle and run engine at low speed.
• Measure voltage at the following terminal of
car-navigation unit connector (16-pin):
Terminal 2H (Vehicle speed signal)
• Is voltage approx. 2.5 V (reference)?

•
•

•

•
•

Note
• Vehicle speed signal is in electrical pulses
of approx. 0 V to 5 V.
Disconnect ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector (28-pin) or DSC HU/CM connector
(34-pin).
Is there continuity between car-navigation
unit connector (16-pin) terminal 2H and ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM connector (28-pin)
terminal V, or car-navigation unit connector
(16-pin) terminal 2H and DSC HU/CM
connector (34-pin) terminal AE?
Inspect wiring harness between carnavigation unit connector (16-pin) terminal
2H and and ABS (ABS/TCS) HU/CM
connector (28-pin) terminal V, or carnavigation unit connector (16-pin) terminal
2H and DSC HU/CM connector (34-pin)
terminal AE for short to ground.
Is there short to ground?
Does vehicle locator mark operate normally?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace car-navigation unit (available at Clarion service
center) or get it repaired at Panasonic service center, then
go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between car-navigation unit and ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM, or car-navigation unit and DSC HU/CM,
then go to Step 4.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between car-navigation unit and ABS
(ABS/TCS) HU/CM, or car-navigation unit and DSC HU/CM,
then go to next step.
Replace instrument cluster, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.3 EVEN WHEN HEADLIGHT SWITCH IS TURNED ON, DAYTIME SCREEN DOES NOT CHANGE TO
NIGHT TIME SCREEN. (FRONT AND REAR COMBINATION LIGHTS OPERATE NORMALLY.)

A6E818066000W04

Even when headlight switch is turned on, daytime screen does not change to night time screen.
3
(Front and rear combination lights operate normally.)
TROUBLESHOOTING HINTS
• Malfunction in TNS (+) signal line of LCD unit
LCD unit malfunction
Malfunction in wiring harness between LCD unit and TNS relay

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
1*

INSPECTION
• Turn headlight switch on.
• Measure voltage at the following terminal of
LCD unit connector (24-pin):
Terminal 1V (TNS (+) signal)
• Is voltage 10 V or more?
• When headlight switch is turned on, does
daytime screen change to night time screen?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Replace LCD unit (available at Panasonic service center) or
get it repaired at Panasonic service center, then go to next
step.
Repair wiring harness between LCD unit and TNS relay,
then go to next step.
Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

AIR BAG SYSTEM
Troubleshooting Index
• Use the chart below verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the appropriate area.
No.
1

Troubleshooting item
Air bag system warning light does not
illuminate.

T230

A6E818001046W01

Description
Page
Malfunction in air bag system warning (See T231 NO.1 AIR BAG SYSTEM
circuit (short to ground).
WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT
ILLUMINATE)

TROUBLESHOOTING
No.
2

Troubleshooting item
Air bag system warning light is
illuminated all the time.

Passenger-side air bag cut-off
indicator light does not illuminate.

Passenger-side air bag cut-off
indicator light is illuminated all the
time.

Description
Malfunction in air bag system warning
circuit (open circuit or short to power
supply).
Malfunction in passenger-side air bag
cut-off indicator light circuit (open
circuit or short to power supply).
Malfunction in passenger-side air bag
cut-off indicator light circuit (short to
ground).

Page
(See T232 NO.2 AIR BAG SYSTEM
WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED
ALL THE TIME)
(See T235 NO.3 PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR
LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE)
(See T237 NO.4 PASSENGER-SIDE
AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR
LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ALL THE
TIME)

End Of
Sie
NO.1
AIR
BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
1
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E818001046W02

Air bag system warning light does not illuminate.
Malfunction in air bag system warning light circuit (short to ground)
• SAS unit malfunction
• Instrument cluster (print plate) malfunction
• Short to ground circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and SAS unit

Yes
No

ACTION
Turn ignition switch to LOCK position, then go to next step.
Inspect instrument cluster power supply system and ground
system, then go to Step 5.

T
Yes
No

Replace SAS unit, then go to Step 5.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

T231

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
*3
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SAS
UNIT AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable.
• Disconnect instrument cluster connector.
• Is there continuity between terminal 1O of
instrument cluster connector and ground?
4
INSPECT INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Connect instrument cluster connector.
• Connect instrument cluster connector
terminal 1O to ground, then reconnect
connector.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Does air bag system warning light illuminate
with ignition switch ON?
5
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicles
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Connect driver and passenger-side curtain
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
curtain air bag)
• Connect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with side
air bag)
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Connect clock spring connector.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Does air bag system warning light operate
properly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace wiring harness, then go to Step 5.
Go to next step.

Replace instrument cluster, then go to next step.
(See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.2 AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ALL THE TIME
2
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E818001046W03

Air bag system warning light is illuminated all the time.
Malfunction in air bag system warning light circuit (open circuit or short to power supply).
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•
•

Weak battery
SAS unit malfunction
Instrument cluster (print plate) malfunction
No connection in SAS unit connector
Poor contact in instrument cluster connector (16-pin)
Open or short to power supply circuit in wiring harness between instrument cluster and SAS unit
Poor contact at terminals 1T, 1X and/or 1W of SAS unit connector
Poor contact in wiring harness between terminal 1X of SAS unit connector and ground
Poor contact in wiring harness between AIR BAG 15 A fuse and terminal 1W of SAS unit

T232

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Battery is weak.
Inspect charge/discharge system, then go to Step 10.
(See G4 BATTERY INSPECTION)

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
VERIFY THAT SAS unit CONNECTOR IS
CONNECTED

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Reconnect connector properly, then go to Step 10.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness, then go to Step 10.

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Turn up floor covering.
• Are all SAS unit connectors securely
connected?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SAS
UNIT AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR
CONTINUITY
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicles
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trims. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver- and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Disconnect instrument cluster connector.
• Is there continuity between SAS unit
connector terminal 1T and instrument cluster
connector terminal 1O?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN SAS
UNIT AND INSTRUMENT CLUSTER FOR
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at instrument cluster
connector terminal 1O.
• Is voltage more than approximately 9 V?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN AIR BAG SYSTEM WARNING LIGHT IN
INSTRUMENT CLUSTER
• Connect instrument cluster connector
terminal 1O to ground, then reconnect
connector.
• Does air bag system warning light illuminate
with ignition switch ON?

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness, then go to Step 10.
Go to next step.

Yes

Replace instrument cluster, then go to Step 9.
(See T72 INSTRUMENT CLUSTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

T233

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
6
INSPECT POWER SUPPLY CIRCUIT OF SAS
UNIT (TERMINAL 1W)
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicles
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Connect driver and passenger-side curtain
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
curtain air bag)
• Connect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with side
air bag)
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Connect clock spring connector.
• Inspect voltage for PID/DATA monitor RCM
VOLT item using SST (WDS or equivalent ).
• Is voltage of at least either terminal more
than 9 V?
7
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
BATTERY AND FUSE BLOCK
• Remove driver-side front side trim.
• Remove fuse block without disconnecting
connectors.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminals D (JB01) of
fuse block connector.
• Is voltage of at least either terminal more
than 9 V?
8
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
FUSE BLOCK AND SAS UNIT
• Measure voltage at terminals G (JB03) of
fuse block connector.
• Is voltage of at least either terminal more
than 9 V?
9
VERIFY THAT SAS UNIT CONNECTOR
TERMINAL 1X IS GROUND
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicles
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trim. (Vehicle with pretensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side pretensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Inspect wiring harness between SAS unit
connector terminal 1X and ground for
following:
Short to power supply
Open circuit
• Is wiring harness okay?

T234

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 9.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harnesses, then go to Step 10.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harnesses, then go to Step 10.
Inspect fuse block, then go to Step 10.

Yes

Replace SAS unit, then go to next step.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Replace wiring harnesses, then go to next step.

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
10
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicles
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Connect driver and passenger-side curtain
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
curtain air bag)
• Connect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with side
air bag)
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Connect clock spring connector.
• Connect instrument cluster connector.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Does air bag system warning light operate
properly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.3 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT DOES NOT ILLUMINATE
3
DETECTION
CONDITION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E818001046W04

Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light does not illuminate
Malfunction in passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light circuit (open circuit or short to power supply)
• SAS unit malfunction
• Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light bulb malfunction
• Open or short to power supply circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light and SAS unit
• Poor contact at terminals 1U 1X and/or 1W of SAS unit connector
• Poor contact at terminals 1I of SAS unit connector
• Poor contact in wiring harness between terminal 1X of SAS unit connector and ground
• Poor contact or short circuits in wiring harness between METER IG 15 A fuse and SAS unit, between
AIR BAG 15 A fuse and SAS unit at the time

Yes
No

ACTION
Reinstall it properly, then go to next step.
Replace bulb, then go to Step 5.

T235

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
*2
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT AND SAS UNIT FOR
CONTINUITY

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace wiring harness, then go to Step 5.

Yes
No

Replace wiring harness, then go to Step 5.
Go to next step.

Yes

Replace SAS unit, then go to next step.
(See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
Go to next step.

Warning
• Handling air bag system components
improperly can accidentally deploy air
bag modules and pre-tensioner seat
belts, which may seriously injure you.
Read SERVICE WARNINGS before
handling air bag system components.
(See T117 SERVICE WARNINGS)

• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicles
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trims. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver- and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Is there continuity between terminal 1U of
SAS unit connector and terminal A of
passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT AND SAS UNIT FOR
SHORT TO POWER SUPPLY
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal A of passengerside air bag cut-off indicator light connector.
• Is voltage more than approximately 9 V?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT OR SAS UNIT
• Connect SAS unit connector terminal 1U to
ground.
• Does passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light illuminate with ignition switch on?

T236

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
5
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect negative battery cable and wait
for more than 1 minute.
• Connect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicles
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Connect driver and passenger-side curtain
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
curtain air bag)
• Connect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with side
air bag)
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Connect clock spring connector.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Does passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light operate properly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.4 PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF INDICATOR LIGHT IS ILLUMINATED ALL THE TIME

A6E818001046W05

4
DETECTION
CONDITION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light is illuminated all the time.
Malfunction in passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light circuit (short to ground).
• SAS unit malfunction
• Short to ground circuit in wiring harness between passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator light and SAS
unit

Diagnostic Procedure
• When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness and connectors while
doing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent malfunction. If
there is a problem, check to make sure connectors, terminals and wiring harness are connected correctly and
undamaged.
STEP
INSPECTION
*1
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
PASSENGER-SIDE AIR BAG CUT-OFF
INDICATOR LIGHT AND SAS UNIT FOR
SHORT TO GROUND
• Remove center panel module.
(See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
• Remove column cover.
• Disconnect clock spring connector.
• Remove glove compartment.
• Disconnect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side side
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
side air bag)
• Disconnect driver and passenger-side
curtain air bag module connectors. (Vehicles
with curtain air bag)
• Remove B-pillar lower trims. (Vehicle with
pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Disconnect driver- and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicle
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Turn up floor covering.
• Disconnect all SAS unit connectors.
• Is there continuity between terminal 1U of
SAS unit connector and ground?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace wiring harness, then go to next step.
Replace SAS unit, then go to next step.
( See T124 SAS UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)

T237

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
2
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Connect all SAS unit connectors.
• Connect driver and passenger-side
pre-tensioner seat belt connectors. (Vehicles
with pre-tensioner seat belt)
• Connect driver and passenger-side curtain
air bag module connectors. (Vehicles with
curtain air bag)
• Connect driver and passenger-side side air
bag module connectors. (Vehicles with side
air bag)
• Connect passenger-side air bag module
connector.
• Connect clock spring connector.
• Connect negative battery cable.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Does passenger-side air bag cut-off indicator
light operate properly?

End Of Sie

T238

Yes
No

ACTION
Complete troubleshooting, then explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMS

LOCATION INDEX .................................................U-3
BASIC SYSTEM ..................................................U-3
CONTROL SYSTEM............................................U-4
SERVICE WARNINGS ...........................................U-8
HANDLING REFRIGERANT................................U-8
STORING REFRIGERANT..................................U-8
SERVICE CAUTIONS.............................................U-8
HANDLING INSUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT
LEVEL...............................................................U-8
HANDLING COMPRESSOR OIL.........................U-8
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE
PROCEDURES.......................................................U-9
GAS CHARGING SET INSTALLATION ..............U-9
RECOVERY .........................................................U-9
CHARGING..........................................................U-9
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE CHECK ...............U-12
REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
TEST...............................................................U-13
BASIC SYSTEM ...................................................U-14
BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.....U-14
BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ...U-14
AIR FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..........U-15
AIR FILTER INSPECTION.................................U-15
A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ..............U-15
A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY .............U-18
EXPANSION VALVE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-21
EVAPORATOR INSPECTION ...........................U-22
HEATER CORE INSPECTION ..........................U-23
REAR HEAT DUCT
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-23
A/C COMPRESSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-23
CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.......U-24
CONDENSER INSPECTION .............................U-24
REFRIGERANT LINES
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-25
CONTROL SYSTEM.............................................U-30
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-30
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION ...........U-30
AIR MIX ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-31
AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION..................U-32
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-33
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION ...U-34
BLOWER MOTOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-35
BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION ......................U-35
RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ...........U-35
RESISTOR INSPECTION..................................U-36
POWER MOS FET
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION............................U-36
POWER MOS FET INSPECTION .....................U-36
MAGNETIC CLUTCH
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..........................U-36
MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT ...............U-38

MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION..................U-38
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................U-39
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR INSPECTION ...U-39
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................U-39
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION ..................................................U-40
CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................U-40
CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION ..................................................U-41
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................U-41
EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION ..................................................U-41
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................U-42
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION ..................................................U-42
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION ............................U-42
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
INSPECTION ..................................................U-43
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL .............U-44
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION .....U-45
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY ..........................U-45
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT WIRE
ADJUSTMENT ................................................U-46
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION.........U-47
FAN SWITCH INSPECTION..............................U-52
DEFROSTER SWITCH INSPECTION...............U-52
ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC ...................................U-53
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE NUMBER
INSPECTION ..................................................U-53
DTC 02...............................................................U-56
DTC 06...............................................................U-56
DTC 07...............................................................U-57
DTC 10...............................................................U-57
DTC 11...............................................................U-57
DTC 12...............................................................U-58
DTC 13...............................................................U-58
DTC 14...............................................................U-59
DTC 15...............................................................U-59
DTC 18...............................................................U-59
DTC 19...............................................................U-60
DTC 21...............................................................U-60
DTC 22...............................................................U-61
DTC 58...............................................................U-61
DTC 59...............................................................U-61
DTC 02, 18, 21 (WHEN TWO OR MORE
DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE
SAME TIME) ...................................................U-62
DTC 06, 10, 12, 14, 18, 21 (WHEN TWO OR
MORE DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE
SAME TIME) ...................................................U-62

DTC 07, 11, 13, 15, 19, 22 (WHEN TWO OR
MORE DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE
SAME TIME) ...................................................U-63
DTC 19, 22 (WHEN TWO OR MORE DTCS
ARE INDICATED AT THE SAME TIME).........U-63
TROUBLESHOOTING..........................................U-64
FOREWORD......................................................U-64
TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX ...........................U-64
NO.1 INSUFFICIENT AIR (OR NO AIR)
BLOWN FROM VENTS ..................................U-65
NO.2 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM
VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE ........................U-65
NO.3 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM
VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE ........................U-67
NO.4 AIR INTAKE MODE DOES NOT
CHANGE.........................................................U-68
NO.5 NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT.............................U-70
NO.6 WINDSHIELD FOGGED...........................U-70
NO.7 AIR FROM VENTS COLD ENOUGH .......U-72
NO.8 NO COOL AIR ..........................................U-75
NO.9 NOISE WHILE OPERATING A/C
SYSTEM .........................................................U-76

LOCATION INDEX

LOCATION INDEX
BASIC SYSTEM

A6E850001040W01

A6E8500W001

A6E8500W002
.

Blower unit
(See U14 BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(SeeU14 BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
Air filter
(See U15 AIR FILTER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See U15 AIR FILTER INSPECTION)
A/C unit
(See U15 A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U18 A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)

4
5
6

7
8

Rear heat duct
(See U23 REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
A/C compressor
(See U23 A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
Condenser
(See U24 CONDENSER REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See U24 CONDENSER INSPECTION)
Heater hose
Refrigerant lines
(See U25 REFRIGERANT LINES REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)

LOCATION INDEX
CONTROL SYSTEM
End Of Sie

L.H.D.

A6E850001042W01

A6E8500W003

A6E8500W004
.

LOCATION INDEX
1

5
6

Air intake actuator
(See U30 AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See U30 AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION)
Air mix actuator
(See U31 AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See U32 AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION)
Airflow mode actuator
(See U33 AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U34 AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
Blower motor
(See U35 BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See U35 BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION)
Resistor
(See U35 RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U36 RESISTOR INSPECTION)
Power MOS FET
(See U36 POWER MOS FET REMOVAL/
INSTALLATION)
(See U36 POWER MOS FET INSPECTION)
Magnetic clutch
(See U36 MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY)
(See U38 MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT)
(See U38 MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION)
Solar radiation sensor
(See U39 SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U39 SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Ambient temperature sensor
(See U39 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U40 AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION)

15
16
17
18
19

Cabin temperature sensor
(See U40 CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U41 CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Evaporator temperature sensor
(See U41 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U41 EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR INSPECTION)
Water temperature sensor
(See U42 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U42 WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR
INSPECTION)
Refrigerant pressure switch
(See U42 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION)
(See U43 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH
INSPECTION)
Climate control unit
(See U44 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL)
(See U45 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
INSTALLATION)
(See U45 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY)
(See U46 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT WIRE
ADJUSTMENT)
(See U47 CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
INSPECTION)
A/C relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
Blower relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
PCM
(See F45 PCM INSPECTION)
Rear window defroster relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)
TNS relay
(See T24 RELAY INSPECTION)

LOCATION INDEX
R.H.D.

A6E8500W005

A6E8500W006
.

LOCATION INDEX
1

5
6

15
16
17
18
19

End Of Sie

SERVICE WARNINGS , SERVICE CAUTION

SERVICE WARNINGS
HANDLING REFRIGERANT

A6E851001039W01

• Avoid breathing air conditioning refrigerant or lubricant vapor. Exposure may irritate eyes, nose and
throat. Also, due to environmental concerns, we urge use of recovery/recycling/recharging equipment
when draining R-134a from the air conditioning system. If accidental system discharge occurs,
ventilate work area before resuming service.
• Do not perform pressure test or leak test for R-134a service equipment and/or vehicle air conditioning
system using compressed air. Some mixtures of air and R-134a have been shown to be combustible at
elevated pressures. These mixtures, if ignited, may cause injury or property damage. Additional health
and safety information may be obtained from refrigerant manufacturers.
• Do not allow the refrigerant to leak near fire or any kind of heat. A poisonous gas may be generated if
the refrigerant gas contacts fire or heat such as from cigarettes and heaters. When carrying out any
operation that can cause refrigerant leakage, extinguish or remove the above-mentioned heat sources
and maintain adequate ventilation.
• Handling liquid refrigerant is dangerous. A drop of it on the skin can result in localized frostbite. When
handling the refrigerant, wear gloves and safety goggles. If refrigerant splashes into the eyes,
immediately wash them with clean water and consult a doctor.

End Of Sie

STORING REFRIGERANT

A6E851001039W02

• The refrigerant container is highly pressurized. If it is subjected to high heat, it could explode,
scattering metal fragments and liquid refrigerant that can seriously injure you. Store the refrigerant at
temperatures below 40 °C {104 ° F}.

End Of Sie

SERVICE CAUTIONS
HANDLING INSUFFICIENT REFRIGERANT LEVEL

A6E851201039W02

• If an insufficient refrigerant level is detected at troubleshooting, do not charge (add) the refrigerant.
Because an accurate amount of refrigerant cannot be determined from the pressure indicated on the
manifold gauge, never charge the refrigerant. If there is too much or too little refrigerant from the
refilling, there may be secondary problems such as damage to the refrigerant cycle parts, or a
decrease of cooling performance. Therefore, if it is determined that the refrigerant level is insufficient,
completely remove refrigerant from the refrigerant cycle and refill with refrigerant to the specified
amount.

End Of Sie

HANDLING COMPRESSOR OIL

A6E851201039W01

• Use only ATMOS GU10 compressor oil for this vehicle. Using a PAG oil other than ATMOS GU10
compressor oil can damage the A/C compressor.
• Do not spill ATMOS GU10 compressor oil on the vehicle. A drop of compressor oil on the vehicle
surface can eat away at the paint. If oil gets on the vehicle, wipe it off immediately.
• ATMOS GU10 compressor oil (PAG oil) has a higher moisture absorption efficiency than the previously
used mineral oil. If moisture mixes with the compressor oil, the refrigerant system could be damaged.
Therefore, install caps immediately after using the compressor oil or removing refrigerant system parts
to prevent moisture absorption.

A6E8512W001

End Of Sie

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE PROCEDURES

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE PROCEDURES
GAS CHARGING SET INSTALLATION

A6E851401039W01

1. Fully close the valves of the SST (49 C061 001).
2. Connect the SSTs (49 C061 002, 49 C061 003) to the high- and low-pressure side joints of the SST (49 C061
001).
3. Connect the SSTs (49 C061 006A, 49 C061 007) to the ends of the SSTs (49 C061 002, 49 C061 003).
4. Connect the SSTs (49 C061 006A, 49 C061 007)
to the charging valves.

A6E8514W003

End Of Sie

RECOVERY

A6E851478834W01

1. Connect an R-134a recovery/recycling/recharging device to the vehicle and follow the device manufacturer's
instructions.

End Of Sie

CHARGING

A6E851478834W02

Caution
• Do not exceed the specification when charging the system with refrigerant. Doing so will decrease
the efficiency of the air conditioner or damage the refrigeration cycle parts.
Charging Recycled R-134a Refrigerant
1. Connect an R-134a recovery/recycling/recharging device to the vehicle and follow the device manufacturer's
instructions.
Charging Preparation
1. Install the SSTs (gas charging set).
2. Connect the tap pin side of the SST (49 C061 004) to the air purge valve of the SST (49C061 001).
3. Connect the SST (49 C061 005) to the center joint of the SST (49 C061 001).
4. Connect the SST (49 C061 005) to the vacuum pump.
5. Connect the SST (49 C061 004) to the refrigerant tank.
6. Place the refrigerant tank on the scale.
Regular amount of refrigerant (approximate quantity)
470 g {16.6 oz}: L.H.D.
430 g {15.2 oz}: R.H.D.

A6E8514W004

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE PROCEDURES
Evacuation
1. Open all the valves of the SST (49 C061 001).
Caution
• Close the SST (49 C061 001) valve immediately after stopping the vacuum pump. If the valve is left
open, the vacuum pump oil will flow back into the refrigeration cycle and cause a decrease in the
efficiency of the air conditioner.
2. Start the vacuum pump and let it operate for 15
minutes.

A6E8514W005

3. Verify that high- and low-pressure side readings
of the SST (49 C061 001) are at 101 kPa {760
mmHg, 29.9 inHg}. Close each valve of the
SST (49 C061 001).

A6E8514W006

Airtightness Check
1. Stop the vacuum pump and wait for 5 minutes.
2. Check the high- and low-pressure side readings of the SST (49 C061 001).
• If the reading has changed, inspect for leakage and go to Evacuation. (See U10 Evacuation.)
• If the reading has not changed, go to Charging New R-134a Refrigerant. (See U10 Charging New R-134a
Refrigerant.)
Charging New R-134a Refrigerant
1. Open the valve of the refrigerant tank.
2. Weigh the refrigerant tank to charge the suitable amount of refrigerant.
Warning
• If the refrigerant system is charged with a large amount of refrigerant when inspecting for gas
leakage, and if any leakage should occur, the refrigerant will be released into the atmosphere. In
order to prevent the accidental release of refrigerant which can destroy the ozone layer in the
stratosphere, follow the proper procedures and charge with only a small amount of refrigerant
when inspecting for gas leakage.
• If charging the system with refrigerant using service cans, running the engine with the highpressure side valve open is dangerous. Pressure within the service cans will increase and the
cans could explode, scattering metal fragments and liquid refrigerant that can seriously injure
you. Therefore, do not open the high-pressure side valve while the engine is running.
Caution
• Always being charging of refrigerant from the high-pressure side. If changing is begun from the
low-pressure side, the vanes of the A/C compressor will not be released and abnormal noise may
result.

U10

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE PROCEDURES
3. Open the high-pressure side valve of the SST (49
C061 001).

A6E8514W007

4. When the low-pressure side reading increases to
0.098 MPa {1.0 kgf/cm2, 14 psi}, close the
high-pressure side valve of the SST (49 C061
001).
5. Inspect for leakage from the cooler pipe/hose
connections using the SST (gas leak tester).
• If there is no leakage, go to Step 7.
• If leakage is found at a loose joint, tighten the
joint, then go to next step.
6. Inspect for leakage again.
• If there is no leakage after tightening the joint,
go to next step.
• If there is still a leakage at the same joint,
discharge the refrigerant and then repair the
joint. Repeat the charging procedure from evacuation.

A6E8514W008

Warning
• If charging the system with refrigerant using service cans, running the engine with the
high-pressure side valve open is dangerous. Pressure within the service cans will increase and
the cans could explode, scattering metal fragments and liquid refrigerant that can seriously injure
you. Therefore, do not open the high-pressure side valve while the engine is running.
7. Open the high-pressure side valve of the SST (49
C061 001) and charge with refrigerant until the
weight of refrigerant tank has decreased 250 g
{8.83 oz} from the amount in Step 2.

A6E8514W007

8. Close the high-pressure side valve of the SST (49
C061 001).
Warning
• If charging the system with refrigerant
using service cans, running the engine
with the high-pressure side valve open is
dangerous. Pressure within the service
cans will increase and the cans could
explode, scattering metal fragments and
liquid refrigerant that can seriously injure
you. Therefore, do not open the
high-pressure side valve while the engine
is running.

A6E8514W009

9. Start the engine and actuate the A/C compressor.

U11

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE PROCEDURES
10. Open the low-pressure side valve of the SST (49
C061 001) and charge with refrigerant until the
weight of the refrigerant tank has decreased
regular amount from the amount in Step 2.
11. Close the low-pressure side valve of the SST (49
C061 001) and the valve of the refrigerant tank.
12. Stop the engine and A/C compressor.

A6E8514W010

Leak Test
1. Inspect for leakage using the SST (gas leak tester).
• If there is no leakage, go to Step 3.
• If leakage is found at a loose joint, tighten the joint, then go to next step.
2. Inspect for leakage again.
• If there is no leakage after tightening the joint, go to next step.
• If there is still leakage at the same joint, discharge the refrigerant and then repair the joint. Repeat the
charging procedure from evacuation.
3. Disconnect the SSTs (49 C061 006A, 49 C061 007) from the charging valves.
4. Install the caps to the charging valves.

A6E8514W011

End Of Sie

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE CHECK
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

A6E851478834W03

Install the SSTs (gas charging set).
Warm up the engine and run it at a constant 1,500 rpm.
Set the fan speed to MAX HI.
Turn the A/C switch on.
Set the RECIRCULATE mode.
Set the temperature control to MAX COLD.
Set the VENT mode.
Close all the doors and all the windows.
Measure the ambient temperature and the high- and low-pressure side reading of the SST (49 C061 001).

U12

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM SERVICE PROCEDURES
10. Verify that the intersection of the pressure reading
of the SST (49 C061 001) and ambient
temperature is in the shaded zone.
• If not as specified, troubleshoot the refrigerant
system. (See U64 TROUBLESHOOTING
INDEX.)

A6E8514W001

End Of Sie

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE TEST

A6E851401039W02

1. Perform refrigerant pressure check. (See U12 REFRIGERANT PRESSURE CHECK.)
• If they are correct, go to next step.
• If not as specified, troubleshoot the refrigerant system. (See U64 TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.)
2. Place a dry-bulb thermometer in the driver-side center ventilator outlet.
3. Warm up the engine and run it at a constant 1,500 rpm.
4. Set the fan speed to MAX HI.
5. Turn the A/C switch on.
6. Set the RECIRCULATE mode.
7. Set the temperature control to MAX COLD.
8. Set the VENT mode.
9. Close all the doors and all the windows.
10. Wait until the air conditioner output temperature stabilizes.
Stabilized condition
• The A/C compressor is repeatedly turned on and off based on the A/C compressor control of center panel
(manual air conditioner) or climate control unit (full-auto air condtioner).
11. Record driver-side center ventilator outlet temperature.
12. Determine and record ambient temperature.
13. Verify that the temperature reading is in the
shaded zone.
• If the performance is not within the shaded
zone, troubleshoot the refrigerant system.
(See U64 TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX.)

A6E8514W002

End Of Sie

U13

BASIC SYSTEM

BASIC SYSTEM
BLOWER UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the dashboard. (See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the A/C unit. (See U15 A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the blower unit.
Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E851661140W01

A6E8516W001

End Of Sie

BLOWER UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.

A6E851661140W02

Caution
• Apply only the specified grease to the link. Otherwise abnormal noise or improper operation may
result.
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

Air filter cover
Air filter
Blower motor
Air intake actuator
Air intake crank
Air intake door
Polyurethane protector
Blower case (1)
Blower case (2)

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E8516W002

End Of Sie

U14

BASIC SYSTEM
AIR FILTER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Remove the glove compartment.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E851661140W03

Air filter cover
Air filter

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8516W018

End Of Sie

AIR FILTER INSPECTION
1. Remove the air filter.
2. Inspect the air filter.
• If the air filter is damaged, excessively dirty, or foul smelling, replace the air filter.

A6E851661140W04

Note
• The air filter cannot be reused by cleaning it with water or compressed air.
• Replace the air filter at the following interval, depending on operating conditions.
Destinations
Europe (L.H.D.
U.K.) specs.

GCC specs.

Type
Aldehyde, pollen,
and a dust removal
Pollen, and a dust
removal

Interval (year or
km {miles})
1 or 20,000
{12,500}
2 or 40,000
{25,000}
1 or 20,000
{12,500}

End Of Sie

A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.

A6E851661130W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See U9 RECOVERY.) (See U9 CHARGING.)
Drain the engine coolant. (See E3 ENGINE COOLANT REPLACEMENT.)
Remove the dashboard. (See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the theft-deterrent control module. (See T86 THEFT-DETERRENT CONTROL MODULE
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

U15

BASIC SYSTEM
6. Remove in the order indicated in the table. Do not
allow compressor oil to spill.

A6E8516W003

A6E8516W025

A6E8516W004

A6E8516W026

U16

BASIC SYSTEM

A6E8516W019

1
2

3
4

Heater hose
Cooler hose (Lo) (L.H.D.) or cooler pipe No.4
(R.H.D.)
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Cooler pipe No.3
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
A/C unit
(See U17 A/C Unit Installation Note)

7. Install in the reverse order of removal.
8. Perform the refrigerant system performance test. (See U13 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
TEST.)
A/C Unit Installation Note
1. When installing a new A/C unit or evaporator, add a supplemental amount of ATMOS GU10 compressor oil into
the refrigerant cycle.
Supplemental amount (approximate quantity)
25 ml {25 cc, 0.8 fl oz}

End Of Sie

U17

BASIC SYSTEM
A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E851661130W02

A6E8516W005

U18

BASIC SYSTEM

A6E8516W006
.

1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19

Duct (1)
Polyurethane protector (1)
Polyurethane protector (2) (R.H.D.)
Airflow mode actuator (full-auto air conditioner)
Airflow mode rod (manual air conditioner)
Airflow mode main link
Airflow mode sub link (1) (manual air conditioner)
Airflow mode sub link (2)
Airflow mode sub link (3)
Airflow mode crank
Airflow mode rod holder (manual air conditioner)
Air mix actuator (full-auto air conditioner)
Air mix rod
Air mix crank (1)
Air mix link (1)
Air mix crank (2)
Air mix link (2) (manual air conditioner)
Air mix rod holder
Wire clamp (manual air conditioner)

20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
28
29
30
31
32
33
34

Heater core
Resistor (manual air conditioner)
Power MOS FET (full-auto air conditioner)
Duct (2)
Outlet pipe
(SeeU21 Outlet Pipe Assembly Note)
Expansion valve
(See U20 Expansion Valve Assembly Note)
Air hose
Duct (3)
Water temperature sensor (full-auto air conditioner)
A/C case (3)
A/C case (1)
A/C case (2)
Sensor clamp
(SeeU20 Sensor Clamp Assembly Note)
Evaporator temperature sensor
(See U20 Evaporator Temperature Sensor
Assembly Note)
Evaporator

U19

BASIC SYSTEM
Evaporator Temperature Sensor Assembly Note
1. Assemble the evaporator temperature sensor as
shown in the figure.

A6E8516W020

A6E8516W021

Sensor Clamp Assembly Note
1. Attach the sensor clamp as shown in the figure.

A6E8516W007

Expansion Valve Assembly Note
1. Attach the insulator as shown in the figure.

A6E8516W027

U20

BASIC SYSTEM
Outlet Pipe Assembly Note
1. Wrap the insulator around the outlet pipe as
shown in the figure.

A6E8516W028

A6E8516W031

End Of Sie

EXPANSION VALVE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See U9 RECOVERY.) (See U9 CHARGING.)

A6E851661130W03

Caution
• If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will be lowered and
abnormal noise will occur. Always immediately plug open fittings after removing any refrigeration
cycle parts to keep moisture or foreign material out of the cycle.
3. Disconnect the cooler hose (Lo) (L.H.D) or cooler pipe No.4 (R.H.D.) and cooler pipe No.3. (See U25
REFRIGERANT LINES REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
4. Remove the dashboard. (See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
5. Remove the duct (1).
6. Remove the air mix actuator. (Full-auto air conditioner)
7. Remove the screws and cover.
8. Remove the one plate (L.H.D.) or two plates (R.H.D.).
9. Remove the bolts and shift the outlet pipe. Do not allow compressor oil to spill.

U21

BASIC SYSTEM
10. Remove the expansion valve. Do not allow
compressor oil to spill.

A6E8516W010

11. Install in the reverse order of removal.
12. Perform the refrigerant system performance test.
(See U13 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE TEST.)

A6E8516W022

End Of Sie

EVAPORATOR INSPECTION
1. Remove the A/C unit. (See U15 A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the evaporator from the A/C unit.
3. Inspect for cracks, damage, and oil leakage.
• If any problems are found, replace the evaporator.
4. Inspect for bent fins.
• If any are bent, use a flathead screwdriver to straighten them.

End Of Sie

U22

A6E851661810W01

BASIC SYSTEM
HEATER CORE INSPECTION
1. Remove the A/C unit. (See U15 A/C UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove the heater core from the A/C unit.
3. Inspect for cracks, damage, and coolant leakage.
• If any problems are found, replace the heater core.
4. Inspect for bent fins.
• If any are bent, use a flathead screwdriver to straighten them.
5. Verify that the heater core inlet and outlet pipe are not distorted or damaged.
• Repair with pliers if necessary.

A6E851661910W01

End Of Sie

REAR HEAT DUCT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E851661273W01

1. Turn over the front floor covering. (See S99 FRONT FLOOR COVERING REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
.

1
2

Rear heat duct (Right)
Rear heat duct (Left)

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8516W011
End Of Sie

A/C COMPRESSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See U9 RECOVERY.) (See U9 CHARGING.)
Remove the right side splash shield and mudguard (L.H.D. only).
Loosen the drive belt and remove it.

A6E851661450W01

1
2
3
4

Cooler hose (HI)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Cooler pipe No.4 (L.H.D.) or cooler hose (LO)
(R.H.D.)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Magnetic clutch connector
A/C compressor
(See U24 A/C Compressor Installation Note)

6. Install in the reverse order of removal.
7. Adjust the drive belt.
8. Perform the refrigerant system performance test.
(See U13 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE TEST.)

A6E8516W012

U23

BASIC SYSTEM
A/C Compressor Installation Note
1. Remove the following amount of compressor oil from the new A/C compressor when replacing the A/C
compressor.
Compressor oil to be removed (approximate quantity)
120 ml {120 cc, 4.06 fl oz} [compressor oil from old A/C compressor + 15 ml {15 cc, 0.5 fl oz}]

End Of Sie

CONDENSER REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See U9 RECOVERY.) (See U9 CHARGING.)
3. Remove the shroud panel. (See S119 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E851661480W01

Caution
• If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will be lowered and
abnormal noise will occur. Always immediately plug all open fittings after removing any
refrigeration cycle parts to keep moisture or foreign material out of the cycle.
4. Remove in the order indicated in the table. Do not
allow compressor oil to spill.
.

1
2
3

Cooler pipe No.1
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Cooler pipe No.2
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Condenser
(See U24 Condenser Installation Note)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.
6. Perform the refrigerant system performance test.
(See U13 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE TEST.)

A6E8516W013

Condenser Installation Note
1. When installing a new condenser, add a supplemental amount of ATMOS GU10 compressor oil inlet the
refrigerant cycle.
Supplemental amount (approximate quantity)
20 ml {20 cc, 0.7 fl oz}

End Of Sie

CONDENSER INSPECTION
1. Inspect for cracks, damage, and oil leakage.
• If any are found, replace the condenser.
2. Inspect for fins clogged by dust.
• If any are clogged, remove the dust from the fins.
3. Inspect for bent fins.
• If any are bent, use a flathead screwdriver to straighten them.

End Of Sie

U24

A6E851661480W02

BASIC SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT LINES REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.

A6E851661460W01

Remove the battery.
Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See U9 RECOVERY.) (See U9 CHARGING.)
Remove the washer tank. (L.H.D. only) (See T58 WASHER TANK REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the air cleaner cover, air cleaner element and air cleaner case. (See F10 INTAKE-AIR SYSTEM
REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the charcoal canister.
Remove the No.3 engine mount. (L.H.D. only)
Remove the shroud panel. (See S119 SHROUD PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the right splash shield.
Remove the right mud guard. (L.H.D. only)

Caution
• If moisture or foreign material enters the refrigeration cycle, cooling ability will be lowered and
abnormal noise will occur. Always immediately plug all open fittings after removing any
refrigeration cycle parts to keep moisture or foreign material out of the cycle.
10. Remove in the order indicated in the table. Do not allow compressor oil to spill.
11. Install in the reverse order of removal.

U25

BASIC SYSTEM
12. Perform the refrigerant system performance test. (See U13 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM PERFORMANCE
TEST.)
.

A6E8516W029

U26

BASIC SYSTEM

A6E8516W030

1
2
3

4
5
6

Cooler pipe No.4
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Cooler hose (HI)
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)
Cooler hose (LO)
(See U28 Refrigerant Lines Removal Note)
(See U29 Refrigerant Lines Installation Note)

U27

BASIC SYSTEM
Refrigerant Lines Removal Note
Nut joint type
1. Loosen the nut using two spanners, then remove the cooler pipe or hose.
Block joint type
1. Disconnect the block joint type pipes by grasping female side of the block with pliers or similar tool and holding
firmly, then remove the connection bolt or nut.

A6E8516W023

Spring-lock coupling type
1. Set the SST.

A6E8516W014

2. While looking through the inspection hole of the
SST, insert the protruding part of the SST until it
makes contact with the cage section.
3. Use the SST to disconnect the male pipe or hose
from the female by pulling the male pipe or hose.
Note
• The male pipe or hose can be disconnected
easily from the female pipe by pulling from
the male pipe or hose while maintaining the
pressure of the protruding part of the SST.
A6E8516W015

A6E8516W016

U28

BASIC SYSTEM
Refrigerant Lines Installation Note
1. When installing a new cooler pipe No.4 or cooler hose (LO), add a supplemental amount of ATMOS GU10
compressor oil into the refrigeration cycle.
Supplemental amount (approximate quantity)
5 ml {5 cc, 0.2 fl oz}: Cooler pipe No.4
10 ml {10 cc, 0.3 fl oz}: Cooler hose (LO)
2. Apply compressor oil to the O-rings and connect the joints.
3. Tighten the joints.
Nut or block joint type
1. Tighten the nut or bolt of joint by hand.
2. Tighten the joint to the specified torque. If it is a nut joint, tighten the nut with a spanner and torque wrench.
3. Connect the block joint type pipes by grasping the
female side of the block with pliers or similar tool
and holding firmly, then tighten the connection
bolt or nut with a torque wrench.

A6E8516W024

Spring-lock coupling type
1. Connect the male pipe or hose by twisting it onto female pipe until the garter spring at the male pipe or hose is
over the flared end of female pipe.
Note
• When the male pipe or hose is replaced, the indicator ring comes out after connecting to indicate that it is
locked.

A6E8516W017

End Of Sie

U29

CONTROL SYSTEM

CONTROL SYSTEM
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2

A6E854061060W01

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Remove the glove compartment.
Remove the car navigation unit. (See T98 CAR-NAVIGATION UNIT REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove in the order indicated in the table.
Air intake actuator connector
Air intake actuator

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W001

End Of Sie

AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR INSPECTION

A6E854061060W02

1. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal D or F and ground to terminal F or D of the air intake actuator.
2. Verify that the air intake actuator operates as shown below.
• If not as specified, replace the air intake actuator.
Connection
B+
GND
D
F
F
D

Movement
RECIRCULATE→FRESH
FRESH→RECIRCULATE

A6E8540W002

A6E8540W003

U30

CONTROL SYSTEM

A6E8540W043

End Of Sie

AIR MIX ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2

A6E854061415W01

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W004

End Of Sie

U31

CONTROL SYSTEM
AIR MIX ACTUATOR INSPECTION

A6E854061415W02

1. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal D or F and ground to terminal F or D of the air mix actuator.
2. Verify that the air mix actuator operates as shown below.
• If not as specified, replace the air mix actuator.
Connection
B+
GND
D
F
F
D

Movement
COLD→HOT
HOT→COLD

A6E8540W005

A6E8540W006

A6E8540W044

3. Verify that the resistance between the terminals
of the air mix actuator are as shown in the graph.
• If not as specified, replace the air mix
actuator.

A6E8540W045

End Of Sie

U32

CONTROL SYSTEM
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2

A6E854061070W01

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W007

End Of Sie

U33

CONTROL SYSTEM
AIRFLOW MODE ACTUATOR INSPECTION

A6E854061070W02

1. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal D or F and ground to terminal F or D of the airflow mode actuator.
2. Verify that the airflow mode actuator operates as shown below.
• If not as specified, replace the airflow mode actuator.
Connection
B+
GND
D
F
F
D

Movement
DEFROSTER → VENT
VENT → DEFROSTER

A6E8540W008

A6E8540W009

A6E8540W046

3. Verify that the resistance between the terminals
of the airflow mode actuator is as shown in the
graph.
• If not as specified, replace the airflow mode
actuator.

A6E8540W047

End Of Sie

U34

CONTROL SYSTEM
BLOWER MOTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E854061140W01

Blower motor connector
Blower motor

3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W060

End Of Sie

BLOWER MOTOR INSPECTION

A6E854061140W02

1. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal A and ground to terminal B of the blower motor and verify its
operation.
• If not as specified, replace the blower motor.

A6E8540W010

End Of Sie

RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2

A6E854061215W01

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W011

End Of Sie

U35

CONTROL SYSTEM
RESISTOR INSPECTION
1. Verify that the resistance between the terminals
of the resistor is as shown in the table.
• If not as specified, replace the resistor.
Terminal
AD
AB
AC

A6E854061215W02

Resistance (ohm)
0.210.23
0.600.68
2.292.62

A6E8540W012

End Of Sie

POWER MOS FET REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
(See U35 RESISTOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)

A6E854061B15W01

End Of Sie

POWER MOS FET INSPECTION
1. Verify that the resistance between the terminals
of the power MOS FET is as shown in the table.
• If not as specified, replace the power MOS
FET.
Ohmmeter lead
+
−
A
B
A
E
B
A
B
E
E
A
E
B

A6E854061B15W02

Resistance (kilohm)
∞
6.9
Continuity
Continuity
6.9
∞

A6E8540W013

End Of Sie

MAGNETIC CLUTCH DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9

A6E854061010W01

Bolt
(See U37 Bolt Removal/Installation Note)
Pressure plate
Shim
Snap ring
(See U37 Snap Ring Installation Note)
A/C compressor pulley
Screw
(See U37 Screw Installation Note)
Clamp
(See U37 Clamp Installation Note)
Screw
(See U37 Screw Installation Note)
Stator and thermal protector
(See U37 Stator and Thermal Protector Removal
Note)
(See U37 Stator and Thermal Protector Installation
Note)
A/C compressor body

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.
3. Adjust the magnetic clutch clearance. (See U38
MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT.)

U36

A6E8540W014

CONTROL SYSTEM
Bolt Removal/Installation Note
1. When removing or installing the bolt, hold the
pressure plate in place as shown in the figure.
2. When installing a new A/C compressor body,
replace the bolt.

A6E8540W048

Stator and Thermal Protector Removal Note
1. After removing the stator and thermal protector, completely remove the silicone adhering to the A/C
compressor side.
Stator and Thermal Protector Installation Note
1. Apply approximately 1 g {0.04 oz} of silicone
(Shin-Etsu Silicone KE-347W or similar) to the
contact surface of the thermal protector, then
thoroughly install it onto the A/C compressor,
leaving no gaps.

A6E8540W049

Screw Installation Note
1. When installing a new stator and thermal protector, replace the screw.
Clamp Installation Note
1. When installing a new stator and thermal protector, replace the clamp.
Snap Ring Installation Note
1. When installing a new pressure plate, A/C
compressor pulley, stator, or A/C compressor
body, replace the snap ring.

A6E8540W050

End Of Sie

U37

CONTROL SYSTEM
MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT
1. Measure the clearance around the entire
circumference between the pressure plate and A/
C compressor pulley using a thickness gauge.
2. Verify that the clearance is within the
specification.
• If not within the specification, remove the
pressure plate and adjust the clearance by
changing the shim (0.2 mm {0.008 in}, 0.5
mm {0.02 in}) or the number of shims.
Clearance
0.30.5 mm {0.0120.019 in}

A6E854061010W02

A6E8540W051

A6E8540W052

End Of Sie

MAGNETIC CLUTCH INSPECTION
1. Connect battery positive voltage to terminal A of
magnetic clutch and ground to A/C compressor
body.

A6E854061010W03

A6E8540W015

2. Verify that the magnetic clutch operates.
• If not as specified, replace the stator and
thermal protector.

A6E8540W016

End Of Sie

U38

CONTROL SYSTEM
SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the solar radiation sensor from the
dashboard using a tape-wrapped flathead
screwdriver.
3. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E854061751W01

A6E8540W017

End Of Sie

SOLAR RADIATION SENSOR INSPECTION

A6E854061751W02

1. Shine an incandescent light (60 W) on the solar radiation sensor from a distance of approximately 100 mm
{3.94 in}.
2. Connect positive (+) lead to terminal A and
negative (−) lead to terminal B of the solar
radiation sensor.
• If the output voltage is not above 0.45 V,
replace the solar radiation sensor.

A6E8540W058

End Of Sie

AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the radiator grille. (See S50 RADIATOR GRILLE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E854061764W01

Ambient tenperature sensor connector
Ambient temperature sensor

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W018

U39

CONTROL SYSTEM
AMBIENT TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION
End Of Sie

1. Measure the temperature around the ambient temperature sensor.
2. Measure the resistance between terminals of the
ambient temperature sensor.
• If the resistance is not as shown in the graph,
replace the ambient temperature sensor.

A6E8540W019

End Of Sie

CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the lower panel. (See S84 LOWER PANEL REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3

A6E854061764W02

A6E854061757W01

Air hose
Cabin temperature sensor connector
Cabin temperature sensor

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

End Of Sie

U40

A6E8540W020

CONTROL SYSTEM
CABIN TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Measure the temperature around the cabin temperature sensor.
2. Measure the resistance between terminals of the
cabin temperature sensor.
• If the resistance is not as shown in the graph,
replace the cabin temperature sensor.

A6E854061757W02

A6E8540W021

End Of Sie

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION

A6E854061022W01

1. Remove the evaporator temperature sensor from the A/C unit. (See U18 A/C UNIT DISASSEMBLY/
ASSEMBLY.)

End Of Sie

EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.
7.
8.
9.
10.

Turn the AUTO switch on.
Set the temperature control at MAX COLD (Turn the left).
Turn the A/C switch.
Set the RECIRCULATE mode.
Close all doors and windows.
Wait for 5 minutes.
Remove the glove compartment.
Disconnect the evaporator temperature sensor.
Measure the temperature at the blower inlet.
Measure the resistance between terminals of the
evaporator temperature sensor.
• If the resistance is not as shown in the graph,
replace the evaporator temperature sensor.

A6E854061022W02

A6E8540W019
End Of Sie

U41

CONTROL SYSTEM
WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1. Disconnect the negative battery cable.
2. Remove the dashboard. (See S82 DASHBOARD REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
3. Remove in the order indicated in the table.
1
2
3
4

A6E854061752W01

Air hose
Duct (3)
Plate spring
Water temperature sensor

4. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W023

End Of Sie

WATER TEMPERATURE SENSOR INSPECTION
1. Measure the temperature around the water temperature sensor.
2. Measure the resistance between terminals of the
water temperature sensor.
• If the resistance is not as shown in the graph,
replace the water temperature sensor.

End Of Sie

REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH REMOVAL/INSTALLATION
1.
2.
3.
4.
1
2

Remove the battery.
Discharge the refrigerant from the system. (See U9 RECOVERY.) (See U9 CHARGING.)
Loosen the refrigerant pressure switch using two spanners.
Remove in the order indicated in the table.

A6E854061752W02

A6E8540W024

A6E854061503W01

Refrigerant pressure switch connector
Refrigerant pressure switch
(See U42 Refrigerant Pressure Switch Installation
Note)

5. Install in the reverse order of removal.

A6E8540W025

Refrigerant Pressure Switch Installation Note
1. Apply compressor oil to O-ring and connect the joint.
End Of Sie

U42

CONTROL SYSTEM
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH INSPECTION

A6E854061503W02

1. Install the SST (gas charging set).
2. Disconnect the refrigerant pressure switch connector.
3. Verify the high-pressure side reading of the SST (manifold gauge) and continuity between the terminals of the
refrigerant pressure switch.
• If not as specified, replace the refrigerant pressure switch.
Triple-pressure Type

A6E8540W053

A6E8540W054

A6E8540W026

Dual-pressure Type

A6E8540W055

U43

CONTROL SYSTEM

A6E8540W027

End Of Sie

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT REMOVAL
1.
2.
3.
4.
5.
6.

A6E854061190W03

Disconnect the negative battery cable.
Disconnect the air mix and airflow mode wires from each wire clamp and link. (Manual air conditioner)
Remove the center panel. (See T96 CENTER PANEL MODULE REMOVAL/INSTALLATION.)
Remove the screws and climate control unit. (Full-auto air conditioner)
Release the hook and pull the climate control unit toward you. (Manual air conditioner)
Disconnect the climate control unit connectors
and remove the climate control unit. (Manual air
conditioner)

A6E8540W028

A6E8540W059

End Of Sie

U44

CONTROL SYSTEM
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSTALLATION
1. Pass each wire through the following routes then
connect to A/C unit. (Manual air conditioner)
2. Connect the climate control unit connectors.
(Manual air conditioner)
3. Install the climate control unit to the center panel.
(Full-auto air conditioner)
4. Install the center panel.
5. Adjust the climate control unit wires. (Manual air
conditioner) (See U46 CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT WIRE ADJUSTMENT.)
6. Connect the negative battery cable.

A6E854061190W04

A6E8540W029

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT DISASSEMBLY/ASSEMBLY
End Of Sie

1. Disassemble in the order indicated in the table.
1
2

A6E854061190W01

Illumination bulb
Body

A6E8540W061

1
2
3
4

Fan switch
Air mix wire
(See U46 Wire Disassembly Note)
(See U46 Wire Assembly Note)
Airflow mode wire
(See U46 Wire Disassembly Note)
(See U46 Wire Assembly Note)
Body

2. Assemble in the reverse order of disassembly.

A6E8540W030

U45

CONTROL SYSTEM
Wire Disassembly Note
1. Disassemble the wires in the shown in the figure.

A6E8540W031

Wire Assembly Note
1. Assemble the wires to the position as shown in
the figure.

A6E8540W032

A6E8540W033

End Of Sie

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT WIRE ADJUSTMENT
Air Mix Wire
1. Set the temperature control dial at max cold.
2. Set the air mix link to max cold in the direction shown
by the arrow and insert a screwdriver at the set hole.
3. Connect the air mix wire to air mix link.
4. Clamp the air mix wire to wire clamp.
5. Verify that the temperature control dial moves its full
stroke.

A6E854061190W05

A6E8540W034

Airflow Mode Wire
1. Set the airflow mode control dial at defroster.

U46

CONTROL SYSTEM
2. Set the airflow mode main link to defroster in the
direction shown by the arrow and insert a
screwdriver at the set hole.
3. Connect the airflow mode wire to airflow mode
main link.
4. Clamp the airflow mode wire to wire clamp.
5. Verify that the airflow mode control dial moves its
full stroke.

A6E8540W035

End Of Sie

CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION
Full-auto Air Conditioner
1. Connect the all center panel connectors.
2. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
3. Measure the voltage at each climate control unit terminal and refer to the terminal voltage list.
• If not as specified, inspect the parts listed under Action and the related wiring harness.
If there is any malfunction, replace the climate control unit.

A6E854061190W02

Terminal Voltage List (Reference)

A6E8540W038

Terminal
Signal
1A
Blower motor
feedback signal

Connected to
• Blower motor
• Power MOS
FET

Test condition
Fan switch is OFF
Fan switch is at manual
LO
Fan switch is at manual
HI

Voltage (V)
12
7.8

0.2

+5 V

• Air mix actuator Ignition switch at ON
• Airflow mode
position
actuator
• Solar radiation
sensor
5.0

Ignition switch at LOCK
position

Below 1.0

Action
1. Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitblower motor: 1AB)
(Climate control unitpower
MOS FET: 1AB, 1CE)
(Blower motorblower
relay: AC) (Blower relay
fuse: DBLOWER 40 A
fuse)
2. Inspect for continuity (Power
MOS FETground: A
GND) (Blower relay
ground: AGND)
3. Inspect power MOS FET
4. Inspect blower motor
5. Inspect blower relay
6. Inspect BLOWER 40 A fuse
7. Replace power MOS FET
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unit air
mix actuator, airflow mode
actuator, solar radiation
sensor: 1BB, B, A)
• Inspect air mix actuator
• Inspect airflow mode
actuator
• Inspect solar radiation
sensor
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit
connector (2H, 2L)
• Replace climate control unit

U47

CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminal
Signal
1C
Blower motor
control signal

1D
1E

Rear window
defroster SW
signal

Connected to
Power MOS FET

Rear window
defroster relay

Test condition
Fan switch is OFF
Fan switch is at manual
LO
Fan switch is at manual
HI

Rear window defroster
switch is off

Voltage (V)
Below 1.0
4.1

Action
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (1A)

7.9

•
12
•

On-board
diagnostic signal

A/C check
connector

Rear window defroster
switch is on

Below 1.0

Terminal A of A/C check
connector is shorted.

Below 1.0

Other

1J
1K

GND

Ambient
temperature
sensor input

• Cabin
Under any condition
temperature
sensor
• Evaporator
temperature
sensor
• Ambient
temperature
sensor
• Water
temperature
sensor
• Air mix actuator
• Airflow mode
actuator

Ambient
Depends on temperature
temperature sensor surrounding sensor

Cabin
temperature
sensor input

Cabin temperature
sensor

Depends on temperature
surrounding sensor

•

Below 1.0

See Figure
3

U48

•

See Figure
2

1L
1M

•
•
•

5.4
1G
1H
1I

•

Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitrear window defroster
relay: 1EE)
Inspect rear window
defroster relay
Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (1H, 1L)
Inspect audio switch panel
Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unitA/C
check connector: 1FA)
Inspect short circuit (Climate
control unitA/C check
connector: 1FA)
Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2H, 2L)

Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2L)

• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unit
ambient temperature
sensor: 1KB, 1IA)
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unit
ambient temperature
sensor: 1KB)
• Inspect ambient
temperature sensor
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2H, 2L)

• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unit cabin
temperature sensor: 1MB,
1IA)
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unit cabin
temperature sensor: 1MB)
• Inspect cabin temperature
sensor
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2H, 2L)

CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminal
Signal
1O
Water
temperature
sensor input

Connected to
Water temperature
sensor

Test condition
Depends on temperature
surrounding sensor

Voltage (V)

See Figure
4

A/C

Refrigerant
pressure switch

Fan switch at OFF

Evaporator
temperature
sensor input
signal

Fan switch at 1st
position, A/C switch ON
Depends on temperature
Evaporator
temperature sensor surrounding sensor

Below 1.0

See Figure
1

1R
1S

Solar radiation
sensor input

GND

Solar radiation
sensor

Ground

Incandescent light (60W)
shining on solar
radiation sensor from
distance of approx.
100mm {3.9 in}
Light to solar radiation
sensor block

4.0

Below 1.0

Under any condition
Below 1.0

Potentiometer
signal

Air mix actuator

Set temperature at MAX
COLD
Set temperature at MAX
HOT

0.6

4.3

Action
• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unitwater
temperature sensor: 1OA,
1IB)
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unitwater
temperature sensor: 1OA)
• Inspect water temperature
sensor
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2H, 2L)
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitrefrigerant pressure
switch: 1PA (Dualpressure type), 1PC
(Triple-pressure type))
(Refrigerant pressure
switchPCM: B1AC)
• Inspect refrigerant pressure
switch
• Inspect PCM terminal
voltage (1AC)
(See F45 PCM
INSPECTION )
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2H, 2L)
• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unit
evaporator temperature
sensor: 1QA, 1IB)
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unit
evaporator temperature
sensor: 1QA)
• Inspect evaporator
temperature sensor
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (2H, 2L)

• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitsolar radiation sensor:
1SB, 1BA)
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (1B)
• Inspect solar radiation
sensor
• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unit
ground: 1TGND)
• Inspect center panel
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitair mix actuator: 1U
C)
• Inspect air mix actuator
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (1B)

U49

CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminal
Signal
1W
Potentiometer
signal

Hazard warning
SW signal

Connected to
Airflow mode
actuator

Hazard warning
switch

Test condition
VENT mode
BI-LEVEL mode
HEAT mode
HEAT/DEF mode
DEFROSTER mode
Hazard warning switch is
off
Hazard warning switch is
on

Panel light control Panel light control
signal
switch

TNS signal

TNS relay

Headlight switch ON and
panel light control switch
at max. illumination

Headlight switch ON and
panel light control switch
at min. illumination
Headlight switch OFF

Voltage (V)
4.3
3.3
2.3
1.5
0.6

Below 1.0

0.2

10.2

Below 1.0
Headlight switch ON
12
2C

Motor drive signal Air mix actuator

Moving to COLD
Moving to HOT

12
Below 1.0

Motor drive signal Air mix actuator

Moving to HOT
Moving to COLD

12
Below 1.0

Motor drive signal Airflow mode
actuator

Moving to DEFROSTER
Moving to VENT

12
Below 1.0

Backup power
supply

ROOM 15 A fuse

Motor drive signal Airflow mode
actuator

Under any condition
B+
Moving to VENT
Moving to DEFROSTER

12
Below 1.0

U50

Action
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitairflow mode actuator:
1WC)
• Inspect airflow mode
actuator
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (1B)
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitflasher unit: 1XH)
• Inspect flasher unit
• Inspect terminal voltage of
climate control unit (1T)
• Inspect center panel
• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unit panel
light control switch: 2AC)
(Panel light control switch
ground: CGND)
• Inspect panel light control
switch
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unit panel
light control switch: 2AC)
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unitTNS
relay: 2BD)
• Inspect TNS relay
• Inspect headlight switch
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitTNS relay: 2BD)
• Inspect TNS relay
• Inspect headlight switch
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitair mix actuator: 2D
D, 2CF)
• Inspect air mix actuator
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitair mix actuator: 2C
F, 2DD)
• Inspect air mix actuator
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitairflow mode actuator:
2EF, 2GD)
• Inspect airflow mode
actuator
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitfuse: 2F ROOM 15
A fuse)
• Inspect ROOM 15 A fuse
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitairflow mode actuator:
2GD, 2EF)
• Inspect airflow mode
actuator

CONTROL SYSTEM
Terminal
Signal
2H
IG2

Connected to
A/C 15 A fuse

Test condition
Ignition switch at ON
position

Ignition switch at LOCK
position
2I

2J
2K

Motor drive signal Air intake actuator

GND

Ground

Moving to
RECIRCULATE
Moving to FRESH

Moving to FRESH
Moving to
RECIRCULATE
Under any condition

Voltage (V)
B+

Below 1.0
12
Below 1.0

12
Below 1.0

Below 1.0

Action
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitfuse: 2HA/C 15 A
fuse)
• Inspect A/C 15 A fuse
• Inspect for short circuit
(Climate control unitfuse:
2HA/C 15 A fuse)
• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitair intake actuator:
2IF, 2KD)
• Inspect air intake actuator

• Inspect for continuity or
short circuit (Climate control
unitair intake actuator:
2KD, 2IF)
• Inspect air intake actuator
• Inspect for continuity
(Climate control unit
ground: 2LGND)

End Of Sie

U51

CONTROL SYSTEM
FAN SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the climate control unit.
2. Inspect for continuity between the fan switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the fan switch.

End Of Sie

A6E8540W056

DEFROSTER SWITCH INSPECTION
1. Remove the climate control unit.
2. Inspect for continuity between the defroster switch terminals using an ohmmeter.
• If not as specified, replace the climate control
unit.

A6E854061050W01

A6E8540W036

A6E854061050W02

A6E8540W057

End Of Sie

U52

A6E8540W037

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DIAGNOSTIC TROUBLE CODE NUMBER INSPECTION
1. Remove the glove compartment.
2. Short the A/C check connector to the GND
terminal using a jumper wire.
3. Shine a 60 W incandescent light from a height of
approximately 100 mm {3.9 in} onto the solar
radiation sensor.

A6E857001038W01

Note
• When incandescent light does not shine on
the solar radiation sensor, the climate
control unit determines a malfunction and
indicates a diagnostic trouble code 02.
A6E8570W004

4. Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
5. Read DTCs from the flashing of the rear defroster
indicator light on the climate control unit. Carry out DTC inspection. (present and past failure indication modes)
• When the system is normal, the rear defroster indicator light does not flash.
• If any of the diagnostic trouble codes are indicated, carry out troubleshooting according to the code.
6. After completion of repairs, erase all diagnostic trouble code(s) from memory. (See U53 Erasing Past Failure
Memory.)
7. Remove the jumper wire.
Present Failure Indication Mode
• The on-board diagnostic function display the present failure indication mode directly after start up. In present
failure indication mode, present failures in the control system circuits (open, short circuits) are detected, and
the flashing of the rear defroster indicator light on the climate control unit indicates the DTCs.
If a diagnostic trouble code is indicated, refer to the following diagnostic trouble code table and inspect the
appropriate system.
Past Failure Indication Mode
• While in present failure indication mode, press the A/C switch to change to the past failure indication mode. In
past failure indication mode, past failures (intermittent problems) in the input sensor circuits (open, short
circuits) are shorted, and the flashing of the rear defroster indicator light on the climate control unit indicates the
DTCs.
If a diagnostic trouble code is indicated, refer to the following diagnostic trouble code table and inspect the
appropriate system. (Disconnections and short circuits are memorized in the same system even if either
occurs only once.)
If the A/C switch is pressed again while in past failure indication mode, the on-board diagnostic function will
return to present failure indication mode.
Erasing Past Failure Memory
• When DTCs are displayed in the past failure
indication mode, they remain in the memory after
the failed systems are corrected. Consequently,
the next time the past failure indication mode is
used, the same past failure DTCs will be
indicated by the flashing of the rear defroster
indicator light on the climate control unit.
Therefore, erase the past failure memory after
correcting all failed systems. To erase the past
failure memory, press the AUTO switch and REC/
FRESH switch on the climate control unit at the
same time while in past failure indication mode. If
erased, the rear defroster indicator light flashes
once.

A6E8570W001

U53

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC Table
No.

Indicator pattern

Diagnosed circuit

Solar radiation sensor (present)

Cabin temperature sensor (present)

Cabin temperature sensor (past)

Evaporator temperature sensor (present)

Evaporator temperature sensor (past)

Ambient temperature sensor (present)

Ambient temperature sensor (past)

Water temperature sensor (present)

Water temperature sensor (past)

Air mix actuator [potentiometer] (present)

Air mix actuator [potentiometer] (past)

Airflow mode actuator [potentiometer] (present)

Airflow mode actuator [potentiometer] (past)

Air mix actuator [motor lock] (past)

Airflow mode actuator [motor lock] (past)

U54

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Output Device Operation Check Mode
Inspection
1. Warm up the engine.
2. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position.
3. Start up the on-board diagnostic function (present failure indication mode).
4. Press the AUTO switch.
5. Verify that all the indicator lights of the climate
control unit and center panel (climate control part)
illuminate for 4 seconds.
6. Verify the operation of the each output device
when changing steps by pressing the REC/
FRESH switch, and referring to the output device
operation check chart.
• If not as specified, inspect the malfunctioning
system.

A6E8570W002

Note
• If the AUTO switch is pressed again, the onboard diagnostic function will return to
present failure indication mode.
7. Turn the ignition switch to LOCK position to end
the on-board diagnostic function.

A6E8570W003

Output device operation check table
Step Operating device
1

Operating conditions

Moni
tor*

Blower motor
speed

Air mix actuator
operation

21.0

20.5

U
Other device conditions
• Air mix actuator operation
50%
• Airflow mode actuator operation
VENT
• Air intake actuator operation
FRESH
• A/C compressor operation
ON

• Blower motor speed
3rd
• Airflow mode actuator operation
VENT
• Air intake actuator operation
FRESH
• A/C compressor operation
ON

20.0

U55

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Step Operating device
3

Operating conditions

Moni
tor*

Airflow mode
actuator operation

• Blower motor speed
3rd
• Air mix actuator operation
50%
• Air intake actuator operation
FRESH
• A/C compressor operation
ON

• Blower motor speed
3rd
• Air mix actuator operation
0%
• Airflow mode actuator operation
VENT

Air intake actuator
operation

A/C compressor
operation

Other device conditions

: Shown on the information display according to step.

End Of Sie

DTC 02

A6E857001038W02

DTC 02
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Solar radiation sensor system inspection
• Solar radiation sensor malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between solar radiation sensor and climate control unit

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Inspect solar radiation sensor.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and solar radiation sensor
connector.
• Is there continuity between following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal solar radiation sensor
connector?
1SB
1BA
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1S of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of solar radiation
sensor connector?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace solar radiation sensor.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Replace climate control unit.

End Of Sie
DTC 06

DTC 06
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

U56

A6E857001038W03

Cabin temperature sensor system inspection
• Cabin temperature sensor malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between cabin temperature sensor and climate control unit

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is resistance between terminals 1I and 1M of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) as
indicated below?
137 ohms220 kilohms
• Inspect cabin temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace climate control unit.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Replace cabin temperature sensor.

End Of Sie
DTC 07

A6E857001038W04

DTC 07
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Inspect cabin temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and cabin temperature sensor
connector.
• Is there open circuit between the following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and cabin temperature sensor
connector?
1IA
1MB
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1M of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and B of cabin temperature sensor
connector?
• Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal the following
terminal 1M of climate control unit connector
(24-pin).
• Is voltage approximately 5V?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace cabin temperature sensor.
Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Connect climate control unit connector, then go to next step.

Yes

This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)
Replace climate control unit.

End Of Sie
DTC 10

A6E857001038W05

DTC 10
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Evaporator temperature sensor system inspection
• Evaporator temperature sensor malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between evaporator temperature sensor and climate control unit

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is resistance between terminals 1I and 1Q of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) as
indicated below?
128 ohms179 kilohms
• Inspect evaporator temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace climate control unit.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Replace evaporator temperature sensor.

End Of Sie
DTC 11

DTC 11
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E857001038W06

U57

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Inspect evaporator temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and evaporator temperature sensor
connector.
• Is there open circuit between following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and evaporator temperature sensor
connector?
1QB
1IA
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1Q of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of evaporator
temperature sensor connector?
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal 1Q of climate
control unit connector (24-pin).
• Is voltage approximately 5 V?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace evaporator temperature sensor.
Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Connect climate control unit connector, then go to next step.

Yes

This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)
Replace climate control unit.

End Of Sie
DTC 12

A6E857001038W07

DTC 12
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Ambient temperature sensor system inspection
• Ambient temperature sensor malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between ambient temperature sensor and climate control unit

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is resistance between terminals 1I and 1K of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) as
indicated below?
122 ohms182 kilohms
• Inspect ambient temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace climate control unit.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Replace ambient temperature sensor.

End Of Sie
DTC 13

A6E857001038W08

DTC 13
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

U58

INSPECTION
• Inspect ambient temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and ambient temperature sensor
connector.
• Is there open circuit between following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and ambient temperature sensor
connector?
1KB
1IA
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1K of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of ambient
temperature sensor connector?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace ambient temperature sensor.
Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Connect climate control unit connector, then go to next step.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
4

INSPECTION
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Measure voltage at terminal 1K of climate
control unit connector (24-pin).
• Is voltage approximately 5 V?

Yes
No

ACTION
This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)
Replace climate control unit.

End Of Sie

DTC 14

A6E857001038W09

DTC 14
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Water temperature sensor system inspection
• Water temperature sensor malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between water temperature sensor and climate control unit

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Is resistance between terminals 1I and 1O of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) as
indicated below?
• 112 ohms110 kilohms
• Inspect water temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace climate control unit.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Replace water temperature sensor.

End Of Sie
DTC 15

A6E857001038W10

DTC 15
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Is water temperature sensor normal?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and water temperature sensor
connector.
• Is there open circuit between following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and water temperature sensor
connector?
1OA
1IB
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1O of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal A of water temperature
sensor connector?
• Turn the ignition switch to ON position.
• Is voltage at terminal 1O of climate control
unit connector (24-pin) above 5 V?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace water temperature sensor.
Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Connect climate control unit connector and go to next step.

Yes

This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)
Replace climate control unit.

End Of Sie
DTC 18

A6E857001038W11

DTC 18
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Air mix actuator (potentiometer) system inspection
• Air mix actuator malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open circuit between air mix actuator and climate control unit
• Short circuit between air mix actuator (terminal C) and climate control unit (terminal 1U: 24-pin)

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Inspect air mix actuator.
• Is it okay?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace air mix actuator.

U59

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
STEP
2

INSPECTION
• Disconnect airflow mode actuator connector.
• Is resistance between terminals 1U and 1I of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) more
than 387 ohms?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin).
• Is resistance between terminals 1B and 1I of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) less
than 4.8 kilohms?
• Is resistance between terminals 1B and 1U
of climate control unit connector (24-pin) less
than 4.2 kilohms?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness. (Short circuit)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness. (Open circuit)

Yes
No

Replace climate control unit.
Repair wiring harness. (Open circuit)

End Of Sie
DTC 19

A6E857001038W12

DTC 19
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Inspect air mix actuator.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and air mix actuator connector.
• Is there open circuit between following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and air mix actuator connector?
1BB
1UC
1IA
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1U of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal C of air mix actuator
connector?

ACTION
Yes
No
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace air mix actuator.
Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)

End Of Sie
DTC 21

A6E857001038W13

DTC 21
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Airflow mode actuator (potentiometer) system inspection
• Airflow mode actuator malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open circuit between airflow mode actuator and climate control unit
• Short circuit between airflow mode actuator (terminal C) and climate control unit (terminal 1W: 24-pin)

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

End Of Sie

U60

INSPECTION
• Inspect airflow mode actuator.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect air mix actuator connector.
• Is resistance between terminals 1W and 1I of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) more
than 387 ohms?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin).
• Is resistance between terminals 1B and 1I of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) less
than 4.8 kilohms?
• Is resistance between terminals 1B and 1W
of climate control unit connector (24-pin) less
than 4.2 kilohms?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace airflow mode actuator.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness. (Short circuit)

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness. (Open circuit)

Yes
No

Replace climate control unit.
Repair wiring harness. (Open circuit)

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
DTC 22

A6E857001038W14

DTC 22
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1
2

INSPECTION
• Inspect airflow mode actuator.
• Is it okay?
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and air mix actuator connector.
• Is there open circuit between following
terminals of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and airflow mode actuator
connector?
1BB
1WC
1IA
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1W of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal C of airflow mode
actuator connector?

Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace airflow mode actuator.
Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Repair wiring harness.
This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)

End Of Sie
DTC 58

A6E857001038W15

DTC 58
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

Air mix actuator (motor lock) system inspection
• Air mix actuator malfunction
• A/C unit (air mix link and/or air mix crank) malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between air mix actuator and climate control unit

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

2
3

INSPECTION
• Disconnect air mix actuator connector.
• Connect battery positive voltage to terminal
D (or terminal F) and ground to terminal F (or
terminal D) of air mix actuator connector.
• Does air mix actuator operate?
• Remove air mix actuator.
• Operate air mix link by hand.
• Does air mix link operate smoothly?
• Disconnect climate control unit connect (12pin).
• Connect battery positive voltage to terminal
2D (or terminal 2C) and ground to terminal
2C (or terminal 2D) of climate control unit
connector (24-pin).
• Does air mix actuator operate?

Yes
No

ACTION
Connect air mix actuator connector, then go to Step 3.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace air mix actuator.
Replace air mix link and/or air mix crank.

Yes
No

Replace climate control unit.
Repair wiring harness.

DTC 59
End Of Sie

DTC 59
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E857001038W16

Airflow mode actuator (motor lock) system inspection
• Airflow mode actuator malfunction
• A/C unit (airflow mode links and/or airflow mode cranks) malfunction
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open or short circuit between airflow mode actuator and climate control unit

U61

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Disconnect airflow mode actuator connector.
• Connect battery positive voltage to terminal
D (or terminal F) and ground to terminal F (or
terminal D) of airflow mode actuator
connector.
• Does airflow mode actuator operate?
• Remove airflow mode actuator.
• Operate airflow mode main link by hand.
• Does airflow mode main link operate
smoothly?
• Disconnect climate control unit connect (12pin).
• Connect battery positive voltage to terminal
2G (or terminal 2E) and ground to terminal
2E (or terminal 2G) of climate control unit
connector (24-pin).
• Does airflow mode actuator operate?

Yes
No

ACTION
Connect airflow mode actuator connector, then go to Step 3.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace airflow mode actuator.
Replace airflow mode links and/or airflow mode cranks.

Yes
No

Replace climate control unit.
Repair wiring harness.

End Of Sie

DTC 02, 18, 21 (WHEN TWO OR MORE DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE SAME TIME)
DTC 02, 18, 21

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E857001038W17

Climate control unit (+5 V power supply) inspection
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Short circuit between climate control unit and solar radiation sensor
• Short circuit between climate control unit and air mix actuator
• Short circuit between climate control unit and airflow mode actuator
• Open circuit between climate control unit and solar radiation sensor
• Open circuit between climate control unit and air mix actuator
• Open circuit between climate control unit and airflow mode actuator

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

•
•

•

INSPECTION
Disconnect climate control unit cooonnector
(24-pin) and airflow mode actuator
connector.
Is there continuity between terminal 1B of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) and
terminal B of airflow mode actuator
connector?
Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1B of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of airflow mode
actuator connector?
Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1B of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of air mix actuator
connector?
Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1B of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal A of solar radiation
sensor connector?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Replace climate control unit.

End Of Sie

DTC 06, 10, 12, 14, 18, 21 (WHEN TWO OR MORE DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE SAME TIME)
DTC 06, 10, 12,
18, 21
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

U62

A6E857001038W18

Climate control unit (+5V power supply or sensor ground system) or sensor ground system
inspection
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open circuit between climate control unit and each temperature sensor
• Open circuit between climate control unit and air mix actuator
• Open circuit between climate control unit and airflow mode actuator

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC
Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and evaporator temperature sensor
connector.
• Is there continuity between terminal 1I of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) and
terminal A of evaporator temperature sensor
connector?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace climate control unit.
Repair wiring harness.

End Of Sie

DTC 07, 11, 13, 15, 19, 22 (WHEN TWO OR MORE DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE SAME TIME)
DTC 07, 11, 13,
15, 19, 22
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E857001038W19

Climate control unit (+5V power supply or sensor ground system) or sensor ground system
inspection
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Open circuit between climate control unit each temperature sensor
• Open circuit between climate control unit and air mix actuator
• Open circuit between climate control unit and airflow mode actuator

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and evaporator temperature sensor
connector.
• Is there open circuit between terminal 1I of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) and
terminal A of evaporator temperature sensor
connector?

Yes
No

ACTION
Repair wiring harness.
This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)

End Of Sie

DTC 19, 22 (WHEN TWO OR MORE DTCS ARE INDICATED AT THE SAME TIME)
DTC 19, 22

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E857001038W20

Climate control unit (+5V power supply) inspection
• Climate control unit malfunction
• Short circuit between climate control unit and solar radiation sensor
• Short circuit between climate control unit and air mix actuator
• Short circuit between climate control unit and airflow mode actuator
• Open circuit between climate control unit and solar radiation sensor
• Open circuit between climate control unit and air mix actuator
• Open circuit between climate control unit and airflow mode actuator

Diagnostic Procedure
STEP
1

INSPECTION
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and airflow mode actuator
connector.
• Is there open circuit between terminal 1B of
climate control unit connector (24-pin) or
terminal B of airflow mode actuator
connector?
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1B of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of airflow mode
actuator connector?
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1B of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal B of air mix actuator
connector?
• Is there short circuit to ground between
terminal 1B of climate control unit connector
(24-pin) and terminal A of solar radiation
sensor connector?

ACTION
Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness.
This system is normal at present. (Erase the past failure
from memory.)

End Of Sie
U63

TROUBLESHOOTING

TROUBLESHOOTING
FOREWORD

A6E858001038W01

• The areas for inspection (steps) are given according to various circuit malfunctions. Use the following chart to
verify the symptoms of the trouble in order to diagnose the appropriate area.

End Of Sie

TROUBLESHOOTING INDEX
No.
1
2

TROUBLESHOOTING ITEM
Insufficient air (or no air) blown from vents.
Amount of air blown from vents does not change. (Fullauto air conditioner)
Amount of air blown from vents does not change. (Manual
air conditioner)
Air intake mode does not change.

No temperature control with climate control unit.

Windshield fogged.

Air from vents not cold enough.

8
9

No cool air.
Noise while operating A/C system.

End Of Sie

U64

A6E858001038W02

DESCRIPTION
• Problem with each vent and/or duct.
• Malfunction in blower system.
• Malfunction in blower system.
• Air intake mode does not change when switching
REC/FRESH mode.
• Malfunction in A/C unit and/or climate control unit
air mix system.
• A/C compressor does not operate while airflow
mode is in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
• Air intake mode does not change to FRESH while
airflow mode is in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF
modes.
• Magnetic clutch operates but A/C system
malfunctions.
• Magnetic clutch does not operate.
• Noise from magnetic clutch, A/C compressor, hose
or refrigerant line.

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.1 INSUFFICIENT AIR (OR NO AIR) BLOWN FROM VENTS
1
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W03

Insufficient air (or no air) blown from vents.
• Problem with each vent and/or duct.
• Malfunction in VENT mode system (Steps 14)
• Malfunction in HEAT mode system (Step 5)
• Malfunction in DEFROSTER mode system (Steps 68)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN VENT MODE OR OTHER MODES
• Does air blow out when in VENT mode?
2
INSPECT VENT
• Is vent clogged?
3

4
5
6

VERIFY THAT DUCT IN DASHBOARD IS
INSTALLED
• Is duct in dashboard properly installed?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN HEAT MODE OR DEFROSTER MODE
• Does air blow out when in HEAT mode?
INSPECT DEFROSTER MODE
• Does air blow out when in DEFROSTER
mode?
INSPECT VENT
• Is vent clogged?

VERIFY THAT DEFROSTER DUCT IS
INSTALLED
• Is defroster duct properly installed?

CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Does air blow out?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes

Yes
No

Remove obstruction, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.
Inspect duct for clogging, deformity and air leakage, then go
to Step 8.
Install duct securely in the proper position, then go to Step
8.
Go to next step.
Inspect vent for clogging, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Operation is okay. Recheck malfunction symptoms.
Go to next step.

Yes
No
Yes

Remove obstruction, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.
Inspect duct for clogging, deformity, and air leakage, then
go to next step.
Install duct securely in proper position, then go to next step.
Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

No
Yes
No

End Of Sie

NO.2 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE
Full-auto Air Conditioner
2
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W04

Amount of air blown from vents does not change.
• Malfunction in blower system.
• Malfunction in blower unit (Steps 3, 4, 12)
• Malfunction in blower motor (Steps 59)
• Malfunction in power MOS FET system (Steps 10, 11, 13, 14)
• Malfunction in climate control unit (Step 15)

INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN BLOWER UNIT OR ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Recirculate air inside vehicle.
• Does blower unit fan rotate smoothly?
INSPECT BLOWER UNIT INTAKE VENT
• Is intake vent of blower unit clogged?

Yes
No
Yes
No

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Replace fuse, then go to Step 15. If fuse burns out
immediately, go to next step.
Go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

Remove obstruction, then go to Step 15.
Inspect if there are any obstruction in passage between
blower unit to A/C unit, then go to Step 15.

U65

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
4*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN BLOWER RELAY SYSTEM OR POWER
MOS FET SYSTEM
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
blower motor.
Terminal B (blower motor operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
5*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN FUSE BLOCK AND
BLOWER RELAY) OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
blower relay.
Terminal A (IG2 signal)
Terminal C (B+ signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
6*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER RELAY
AND GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
blower relay.
Terminal E (GND signal)
• Is voltage approximately 0 V?
7*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER RELAY
AND BLOWER MOTOR) OR BLOWER RELAY
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
blower relay.
Terminal D (blower motor operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
8*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN BLOWER MOTOR OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
blower motor.
Terminal B (blower motor operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
9*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN BLOWER MOTOR
AND POWER MOS FET) OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
power MOS FET.
Terminal C (blower motor operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
10* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN POWER MOS FET
AND GROUND) OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
power MOS FET.
Terminal A (blower motor operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 0 V?
11
INSPECT BLOWER UNIT
• Inspect fan in blower unit.
Is fan free of interference with blower unit
case?
Is fan free of foreign material and
obstruction?
• Is fan okay?

U66

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between blower relay and BLOWER
40 A fuse, then go to Step 15.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between blower relay and ground,
then go to Step 15.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness between blower relay and blower
motor, then go to Step 15.
Replace blower relay, then go to Step 15.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Inspect blower motor, then go to Step 15.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between blower motor and power
MOS FET, then go to Step 15.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between power MOS FET and
ground, then go to Step 15.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Remove obstruction, repair or replace fan and blower unit
case, then go to Step 15.

ON-BOARD DIAGNOSTIC, TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
12* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN POWER MOS FET OR ELSEWHERE
• Disconnect power MOS FET connector.
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
power MOS FET.
Terminal B (blower motor control signal)
• Is voltage approximately 10 V?
13* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (LACK OF
CONTINUITY BETWEEN POWER MOS FET
AND CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Disconnect climate control unit connector.
• Inspect for continuity at the following
terminals between power MOS FET and
climate control unit.
Terminal B1C (24-pin, blower motor
control signal)
Terminal C1A (24-pin, blower motor
feedback signal)
• Is there continuity?
14* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT OR WIRING
HARNESS (SHORT TO GROUND BETWEEN
POWER MOS FET AND CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT)
• Inspect for continuity at the following terminal
between power MOS FET and ground.
Terminal B (blower motor control signal)
ground
• Is there continuity?
15
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Is air discharged from vent?

Yes
No

ACTION
Replace power MOS FET, then go to Step 15.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between power MOS FET and
climate control unit, then go to Step 15.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between power MOS FET and
ground, then go to next step.
Replace climate control unit, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.3 AMOUNT OF AIR BLOWN FROM VENTS DOES NOT CHANGE
Manual Air Conditioner
3
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W05

Amount of air blown from vents does not change.
• Malfunction in blower system.
• Blower relay, blower motor, resistor, fan switch malfunction (Step 1)
• Blower unit malfunction (Steps 24)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT BLOWER SYSTEM
• Inspect the following systems and electrical
parts.
Blower relay
Blower motor
Resistor
Fan switch
Related wiring harnesses
• Are they okay?
2
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN BLOWER UNIT OR ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Turn fan switch on.
• Recirculate air inside vehicle.
• Does fan in blower unit rotate smoothly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair or replace malfunctioning part, then go to Step 5.

Yes
No

Go to Step 4.
Go to next step.

U67

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT BLOWER UNIT
• Inspect fan in blower unit.
Is fan free of interference from blower unit
case?
Is fan free of foreign material and
obstructions?
• Is fan okay?
4
INSPECT BLOWER UNIT INTAKE VENT
• Is blower unit intake vent clogged?
5

VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
• Does air blow out?

Yes
No

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Remove obstruction, repair or replace fan and blower unit
case, then go to Step 5.

Remove obstruction, then go to next step.
Inspect if there are any obstructions in passage between
blower unit and A/C unit, then go to next step.
Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.4 AIR INTAKE MODE DOES NOT CHANGE
4
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W06

Air intake mode does not change.
• Air intake mode does not change when switching REC/FRESH mode.
• Malfunction in air intake actuator (Steps 16)
• Malfunction in air intake door (Step 7)

• When performing an asterisked (*) troubleshooting inspection, shake the wiring harness and connectors while
performing the inspection to discover whether poor contact points are the cause of any intermittent
malfunctions. If there is a problem, check to make sure connectors, terminals and wiring harnesses are
connected correctly and undamaged.
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR, WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR) OR ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltages at the following terminals of
climate control unit.
Terminal 2K (12-pin, FRESH motor drive
signal)
Terminal 2I (12-pin, RECIRCULATE
motor drive signal)
(See U47 Full-auto Air Conditioner)
• Are voltages okay?
2*
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR OR WIRING HARNESS
(BETWEEN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR)
• Test voltages at the following terminals of air
intake actuator.
Terminal D (FRESH motor drive signal)
Terminal F (RECIRCULATE motor drive
signal)
• Are voltages as shown below?
Terminal D: approximately 0.5 V during
RECIRCULATE and approximately 10 V
during FRESH
Terminal F: approximately 10 V during
RECIRCULATE and approximately 0.5 V
during FRESH

U68

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 3.

Yes
No

Replace air intake actuator, then go to Step 8.
Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and air
intake actuator, then go to Step 8.

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
3
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR OR
ELSEWHERE
• Disconnect air intake actuator connector.
• Test voltages at the following terminals of
climate control unit.
Terminal 2K (12-pin, FRESH motor drive
signal)
Terminal 2I (12-pin, RECIRCULATE
motor drive signal)
(See U47 Full-auto Air Conditioner)
• Are voltages okay?
4
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO B+
BETWEEN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND
AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR) OR ELSEWHERE
• Disconnect climate control unit connector.
• Test voltages at the following terminals of
climate control unit.
Terminal 2K (12-pin, FRESH motor drive
signal)
Terminal 2I (12-pin, RECIRCULATE
motor drive signal)
• Are voltages approximately 0 V?
5
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (SHORT TO
GROUND BETWEEN CLIMATE CONTROL
UNIT AND AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR) OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Inspect for continuity at the following
terminals between climate control unit and
ground.
Terminal 2K (12-pin, FRESH motor drive
signal)
Terminal 2I (12-pin, RECIRCULATE
motor drive signal)
• Is there continuity?
6
INSPECT AIR INTAKE LINK
• Inspect air intake links.
Is there grease on link?
Are links securely and properly installed?
Are links free of obstructions and
hindrances?
• Are above items okay?
7
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT OR AIR
INTAKE DOOR
• Inspect blower unit air intake door.
Is door free of obstructions, cracks, and
damage?
Are doors securely and properly installed?
• Are above items okay?
8
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Does air intake mode change smoothly?

Yes
No

ACTION
Inspect air intake actuator, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and air
intake actuator, then go to Step 8.

Yes

Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and air
intake actuator, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

U
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Apply grease to links. If any links are damaged, replace air
intake actuator, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Replace climate control unit, then go to next step.
Remove obstruction, or install doors in proper position. If
any doors are cracked or damaged, replace them, then go
to next step.

Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

U69

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.5 NO TEMPERATURE CONTROL WITH CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
5
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W07

No temperature control with climate control unit.
• Malfunction in A/C unit and/or climate control unit air mix system.
• A/C unit air mix link, air mix crank, air mix rod, air mix wire, wire clamp malfunction (Steps 2, 3)
• Climate control unit rack-and-pinion, air mix wire malfunction (Step 4)
• A/C unit air mix door malfunction (Steps 5, 6)
• Heater piping malfunction (Step 7)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT COOLANT TEMPERATURE
• Is coolant sufficiently warmed up?
2

INSPECT A/C UNIT AIR MIX SYSTEM
• Inspect A/C unit air mix links, air mix cranks,
air mix rods, air mix actuator or wire clamp.
Is there grease on links and cranks?
Are links, cranks, and rods securely
installed in their proper positions?
Is wire clamp free of deformation?
• Are above items okay?
VERIFY THAT AIR MIX WIRE FROM A/C UNIT
IS POSITIONED SECURELY AND
CORRECTLY (IF AVAILABLE)
• Is air mix wire securely installed in the
correct position in relation to A/C unit air mix
links?
INSPECT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
• Inspect climate control unit. (See U47
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT INSPECTION)
• Is climate control unit okay?
INSPECT A/C UNIT
• Is there any foreign material or obstruction in
A/C unit air mix doors?
INSPECT A/C UNIT AIR MIX DOORS
• Is A/C unit air mix door securely and properly
installed?

5
6

INSPECT HEATER LINES
• Inspect heater lines.
Is heater piping free of damage and
cracks?
Are heater piping connections free of
engine coolant leakage?
Are heater piping connections securely
tightened?
Are heater piping installation points on A/
C unit free of engine coolant leakage?
• Are above items okay?
VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
• Does unit operate in every temperature
setting?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Warm engine up, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.
Apply grease or install links, cranks, and rods securely in
their proper positions, repair or replace air mix actuator or
wire clamp, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust air mix wire or install securely in correct position, then
go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair or replace climate control unit, then go to Step 8.

Yes
No

Remove obstruction, then go to Step 8.
Go to next step.

Yes

Inspect air mix door for cracks or damage, then go to next
step.
Install air mix door securely in proper position, then go to
next step.
Operation is okay. Recheck malfunction symptoms.
If heater piping connections is loosed, tighten connections
with specified torque.
Repair or replace heater piping, then go to next step.

No
Yes
No

Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.6 WINDSHIELD FOGGED

A6E858001038W08

U70

Windshield fogged.
• A/C compressor does not operate while airflow mode is in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF modes.
• Air intake mode does not change to FRESH while airflow mode is in DEFROSTER or HEAT/DEF
modes.

TROUBLESHOOTING
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

•
•
•
•

Climate control unit (B+ signal) system malfunction (Steps 2, 4, 5)
Air intake actuator malfunction (Steps 3, 7)
Climate control unit (RECIRCULATE, FRESH signal) system malfunction (Steps 911)
Malfunction in blower unit air intake doors (Steps 12, 13)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
COOL AIR BLOW OUT INSPECTION
• When both A/C and fan switch in climate
control unit are on, does cool air blow out
from front vent?
2
INSPECT CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT POWER
SUPPLY FUSE FOR B+ SIGNAL
• Is climate control unit power supply fuse for
B+ signal okay?
3

INSPECT AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR
• Inspect air intake actuator.
Is there grease on link?
Is link securely and properly positioned?
Is link free of obstructions?
• Are above items okay?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
FUSE BLOCK AND CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT
FOR CONTINUITY
• Disconnect climate control unit connector
(12-pin).
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Test voltage at climate control unit connector
terminal F (B+ signal).
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND GROUND
FOR VOLTAGE
• Test voltage at climate control unit connector
terminal 2L (Ground).
• Is voltage approximately 0V?
VERIFY WHETHER MALFUNCTION IS IN
BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE DOOR OR
ELSEWHERE
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Connect climate control unit connector (12pin).
• Remove air intake actuator.
• Turn ignition switch to ON position.
• Set fan switch to 4th position.
• Does air intake mode (RECIRCULATE,
FRESH) change smoothly when air intake
link is operated by hand?
INSPECT AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR
• Inspect air intake actuator.
(See U30 AIR INTAKE ACTUATOR
INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
INSPECT AIR INTAKE SELECTOR SWITCH
AND DEFROSTER SWITCH IN CLIMATE
CONTROL UNIT
• Test voltage at climate control unit connector
(12-pin) terminals 2K and 2I.
• Is it okay?

Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting index No.8.
Go to next step.
Inspect for a short to ground on blown fuse circuit.
• Repair or replace as necessary. Install appropriate
amperage fuse.
Go to next step.
Apply grease or install link properly and securely, remove
obstruction, then go to Step 14.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between fuse block and climate
control unit, then go to Step 14.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and
ground, then go to Step 14.

U
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 12.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace air intake actuator, go to Step 14.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace climate control unit, then go to Step 14.

U71

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
*9
INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR FOR CONTINUITY
• Turn ignition switch to LOCK position.
• Is there continuity between following climate
control unit connector (12-pin) terminal and
air intake actuator connector terminal?
Terminal D Terminal 2K (FRESH
signal)
Terminal F Terminal 2I
(RECIRCULATE signal)
*10 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR FOR SHORT TO GROUND
• Is there continuity between following climate
control unit connector (12-pin) terminal and
ground?
Terminal 2K (FRESH signal)
Terminal 2I (RECIRCULATE signal)
*11 INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT AND AIR INTAKE
ACTUATOR FOR SHORT TO B+
• Turn ignition switch to ON position
• Test voltage at following climate control unit
connector (12-pin) terminal.
Terminal 2K (FRESH signal)
Terminal 2I (RECIRCULATE signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
12
INSPECT BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE DOOR
• Is there any foreign material or obstruction in
blower unit air intake door?
13
VERIFY THAT BLOWER UNIT AIR INTAKE
DOOR IS POSITIONED SECURELY AND
PROPERLY
• Is blower unit air intake door securely and
properly positioned?
14
VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
• Does malfunction disappear?

Yes
No

Yes

ACTION
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and air
intake actuator, then go to Step 14.

Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and air
intake actuator, then go to Step 14.
Go to next step.

Repair wiring harness between climate control unit and air
intake actuator, then go to Step 14.
Replace climate control unit, then go to Step 14.

Yes
No

Remove obstruction, then go to Step 14.
Go to next step.

Yes

Inspect air intake door for cracks or damage, then go to next
step.
Install air intake door securely in proper position, then go to
next step.

No
Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.7 AIR FROM VENTS COLD ENOUGH
7
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W09

Air from vents not cold enough.
• Magnetic clutch operates but A/C system malfunctions.
• Drive belt malfunction (Step 2)
• Malfunction in blower unit or condenser (Steps 4, 5)
• Malfunction in receiver/drier or expansion valve (valve closes too much) (Steps 8, 9)
• Malfunction in refrigerant lines (Steps 10, 11)
• A/C compressor system malfunction, insufficient compressor oil (Steps 15, 16)
• Over filling of compressor oil, malfunction in expansion valve or A/C unit air mix link system (Steps 17
19)

Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
INSPECT DRIVE BELT
• Inspect drive belt.
(See B3 DRIVE BELT INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
2
INSPECT REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE
• Perform refrigerant system performance test.
(See U13 REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
PERFORMANCE TEST)
• Is operation normal?

U72

Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Adjust or replace drive belt, then go to Step 20.

Yes
No

Operation is normal. (Recheck malfunction symptoms.)
Go to next step.

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
3
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN BLOWER UNIT INTAKE AND
CONDENSER OR ELSEWHERE
• Are refrigerant high-pressure and lowpressure values both high?
4
INSPECT BLOWER UNIT INTAKE
• Is blower unit intake clogged?

INSPECT CONDENSER
• Inspect condenser.
(See U24 CONDENSER INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN EXPANSION VALVE, RECEIVER/DRIER
AND REFRIGERANT LINES OR ELSEWHERE
• Are refrigerant high-pressure and lowpressure values low?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN EXPANSION VALVE AND RECEIVER/
DRIER OR ELSEWHERE
• Immediately after A/C compressor operates,
does refrigerant high-pressure value
momentarily rise to correct value, then fall
and stay below it? (Is there negative
pressure on low-pressure side?)
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN EXPANSION VALVE OR RECEIVER/
DRIER
• Turn A/C switch off and let air conditioner
stop for 10 minutes.
• Start engine.
• Turn both A/C switch and fan switch on.
• Does malfunction occur after A/C
compressor turns on?
VERIFY THAT EXPANSION VALVE HEATSENSING TUBE WITHIN A/C UNIT IS
POSITIONED SECURELY AND CORRECTLY
• Is expansion valve heat-sensing tube within
A/C unit securely installed in proper position?
INSPECT REFRIGERANT LINES
• Inspect refrigerant lines.
Is piping free of damage and cracks?
Are piping connections free of oil grime?
(Visual inspection)
Are piping connections free of gas
leakage?
Are piping installation points on
condenser free of gas leakage?
Are piping installation points on receiver/
drier free of gas leakage?
Are piping installation points on A/C
compressor free of gas leakage?
Are piping installation points on A/C unit
free of gas leakage?
Perform gas leak inspection using gas
leak tester.
• Are above items okay?
INSPECT EVAPORATOR PIPING
CONNECTIONS IN A/C UNIT FOR GAS
LEAKAGE
• Are piping connections for evaporator in A/C
unit free of gas leakage?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 6.

Yes

Yes
No

Remove obstruction, then go to Step 20. (If air does not
reach evaporator within A/C unit, heat exchange does not
occur and refrigerant pressure becomes high.
Therefore, removal of obstruction is necessary.)
Go to next step.
Adjust refrigerant to specified amount, then go to Step 20.
(Excessive amount of refrigerant.)
Replace condenser, or repair and clean condenser fins,
then go to Step 20.
Go to next step.
Go to Step 14.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Go to Step 10.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace condenser and vacuum refrigerant line more than
30 minutes by vacuum pump, add refrigerant to specified
level, then go to Step 20. (Since water has intermixed in
receiver/drier and it is saturated, replacement is necessary.)

No
Yes
No

U
Yes
No

Replace expansion valve, then go to Step 20. (Since valve
closes too much, replacement is necessary.)
Install heat-sensing tube securely in proper position, then go
to Step 20.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
If piping or A/C component(s) are damaged or cracked,
replace them.
Then go to Step 20.
If there is no damage, go to Step 13.

Yes

If the vane makes a noise, add 10 ml {10 cc, 0.34 fl oz} of
compressor oil to the A/C compressor. Verify that the noise
is no longer heard.
Adjust refrigerant to specified amount, then go to Step 20.
If piping is damaged or cracked, replace it.
Then go to Step 20.
If there is no damage, go to next step.

U73

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
12
INSPECT EVAPORATOR PIPING
CONNECTIONS IN A/C UNIT FOR LOOSE
• Are piping connections for evaporator in A/C
unit loose?

INSPECT PIPING CONNECTIONS FOR
LOOSE
• Are piping connections loose?

Yes
No

ACTION
Tighten connections with specified torque, adjust both
compressor oil and refrigerant to specified amount, then go
to Step 20.
If the vane makes a noise, add 10 ml {10 cc, 0.34 fl oz} of
compressor oil to the A/C compressor. Verify that the noise
is no longer heard.
Replace O-ring on piping, adjust refrigerant to specified
amount, then go to Step 20.
Tighten connections with specified torque, adjust both
compressor oil and refrigerant to specified amount, then go
to Step 20.
If the vane makes a noise, add 10 ml {10 cc, 0.34 fl oz} of
compressor oil to the A/C compressor. Verify that the noise
is no longer heard.
Replace O-ring on piping, adjust refrigerant to specified
amount, then go to Step 20.
Go to next step. (Pressure hardly increases.)
Go to Step 17.

Yes
No

Return to Step 3.
Go to next step.

Yes

Troubleshooting completed. (Explain to customer that cause
was insufficient compressor oil.)
Replace A/C compressor, then go to Step 20. (Cause is
defective A/C compressor.)

Yes
No

17
18

CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN EXPANSION VALVE, AIR MIX
ACTUATOR AND COMPRESSOR OIL OR
ELSEWHERE
• Does refrigerant high-pressure value hardly
increase?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN COMPRESSOR OIL AMOUNT AND A/C
COMPRESSOR OR ELSEWHERE
• When engine is racing, does high-pressure
value increase?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN COMPRESSOR OIL AMOUNT OR A/C
COMPRESSOR
• After compressor oil is replenished each 10
ml {10 cc, 0.34 fl oz}, does high-pressure
value increase?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN EXPANSION VALVE OR ELSEWHERE
• Is only refrigerant low-pressure value high?
VERIFY THAT AIR MIX IS INSTALLED
SECURELY AND PROPERLY
• Are A/C unit air mix links, air mix cranks, and
air mix rods securely and properly installed?

Yes
No

Go to Step 19.
Go to next step.

Yes

Set fan switch to 4th position.
Turn A/C switch on.
Set FRESH mode.
Set temperature control to MAX COLD.
Set VENT mode.
(1)Start and run the engine at 1,500 rpm for 10 minutes.
(2)Run the engine at idle for 1 minute.
(3)Within 12 seconds, idle → 4,000 rpm → idle. Perform
cycle 5 times.
(4) Run the engine at idle for 30 seconds.
(5)Drain the compressor oil completely from the A/C
compressor and verify the amount.
• If there is approximately 90 ml {90 cc, 3.0 fl oz} of
compressor oil, go to Step 20.
• If there is more than 90 ml {90 cc, 3.0 fl oz} of
compressor oil, remove surplus oil and fill A/C
compressor with 90 ml {90 cc, 3.0 fl oz} of
compressor oil. Repeat Steps (1) to (5).
(Cause is excessive amount of compressor oil.)
Repair or install links, cranks and rods securely in proper
position, then go to Step 20.
Replace expansion valve, then go to next step. (Since valve
opens too much, replacement is necessary.)
Install heat-sensing tube securely in proper position, then go
to next step.

No
19

U74

VERIFY THAT EXPANSION VALVE HEATSENSING TUBE WITHIN A/C UNIT IS
POSITIONED SECURELY AND CORRECTLY
• Is expansion valve heat-sensing tube within
A/C unit securely installed in proper position?
VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
• Does cool air blow out? (Are results of
refrigerant system performance test okay?)

Yes
No
Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

TROUBLESHOOTING
NO.8 NO COOL AIR
End Of Sie

8
DESCRIPTION

POSSIBLE
CAUSE

A6E858001038W10

No cool air
• Magnetic clutch does not operate.
• Malfunction in PCM A/C cut control system (Step 3)
• Malfunction in climate control unit (Step 4)
• Malfunction in refrigerant pressure switch (Steps 5, 79)
• Malfunction in PCM (A/C signal) (Step 6)
• Malfunction in PCM (IG1 signal) (Steps 10, 11)
• Malfunction in A/C compressor (Step 12)
• Malfunction in A/C relay (Steps 1315)
• Malfunction in evaporator temperature sensor (Step 16)

INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR OPERATION
• Start engine.
• Turn A/C switch and fan switch on.
• Does A/C compressor operate?
INSPECT FOR DTC IN PCM
• Inspect for DTCs related to the PCM onboard diagnostic system.
• Are any DTCs displayed?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT OR
ELSEWHERE
• Does cool air blow out when terminal 1P of
climate control unit connector (24-pin, A/C
signal) is grounded?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C SIGNAL CIRCUIT (BETWEEN
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AND
PCM) OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at following terminal of
refrigerant pressure switch.
Terminal B (A/C signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN WIRING
HARNESS (BETWEEN REFRIGERANT
PRESSURE SWITCH AND PCM) OR PCM
• Test voltage at A/C signal terminal of PCM.
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH,
REFRIGERANT AMOUNT, OR ELSEWHERE
• Does cool air blow out when terminals A and
B of refrigerant pressure switch connector
are shorted?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN
REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH AND
CLIMATE CONTROL UNIT) OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at following terminal of climate
control unit.
Terminal 1P (24-pin, A/C signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?

Yes
No
Yes
No

ACTION
Go to next step.
Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting indexes No.1 and 2.
Go to Step 1 of troubleshooting index No.7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to appropriate inspection procedure.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Replace climate control unit, then go to Step 17.
Release short, then go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 7.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Repair wiring harness between PCM and refrigerant
pressure switch, then go to Step 17.
Inspect PCM, then go to Step 17.

Yes
No

Go to Step 9.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 10.
Repair wiring harness between refrigerant pressure switch
and climate control unit, then go to Step 17.

U75

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
9
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN REFRIGERANT PRESSURE SWITCH OR
REFRIGERANT AMOUNT
• Inspect refrigerant pressure switch.
• Is it okay?
10
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN A/C CONTROL
SIGNAL CIRCUIT (BETWEEN A/C RELAY
AND PCM) OR ELSEWHERE
• Does cool air blow out when terminal E of A/
C relay connector (A/C control signal) is
grounded?
11* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
(LACK OF CONTINUITY) IS IN PCM OR
WIRING HARNESS (BETWEEN A/C RELAY
AND PCM)
• Test voltage at the A/C relay control signal
terminal of PCM.
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
12* INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN MAGNETIC CLUTCH OR ELSEWHERE
• Test voltage at the following terminal of
magnetic clutch thermal protector.
Terminal A (magnetic clutch operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
13
INSPECT FUSE
• Are A/C relay power supply fuses okay?
14

INSPECT WIRING HARNESS BETWEEN
FUSE BLOCK AND A/C RELAY FOR LACK
OF CONTINUITY
• Test voltages at following terminals of A/C
relay.
Terminal A (A/C relay control signal)
Terminal C (A/C control signal)
• Are voltages approximately 12 V?
INSPECT TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C RELAY OR WIRING HARNESS
(BETWEEN A/C RELAY AND MAGNETIC
CLUTCH) AND EVAPORATOR
TEMPERATURE SENSOR
• Test voltage at the following terminal of A/C
relay.
Terminal D (magnetic clutch operation
signal)
• Is voltage approximately 12 V?
INSPECT EVAPORATOR TEMPERATURE
SENSOR
• Inspect evaporator temperature sensor.
• Is it okay?
CONFIRM THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOMS
DO NOT RECUR AFTER REPAIR
• Does cool air blow out? (Are the results of
refrigerant system performance test okay?)

ACTION
If refrigerant amount is empty, replace condenser, vaccum
refrigerant line more than 30 minutes by vacuum pump,
and add refrigerant to specified level, then go to Step 17.
Replace refrigerant pressure switch, then go to Step 17.

Yes
No

Release short, then go to next step.
Go to Step 12.

Yes
No

Inspect PCM, then go to Step 17.
Repair wiring harness between A/C relay and PCM, then go
to Step 17.

Yes
No

Inspect magnetic clutch, then go to Step 17.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace fuse, then go to Step 17. If fuse burns out
immediately, go to next step.
Go to next step.
Repair wiring harness between fuse block and A/C relay,
then go to Step 17.

Yes

Yes
No

Yes

Inspect wiring harness between A/C relay and magnetic
clutch.
• If above wiring harness is OK, go to next step.
• If above wiring harness malfunctions, repair wiring
harness, then go to Step 17.
Replace A/C relay, then go to Step 17.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace evaporator temperature sensor, then go to next
step.

Yes
No

Troubleshooting completed. Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

End Of Sie

NO.9 NOISE WHILE OPERATING A/C SYSTEM
9
DESCRIPTION
POSSIBLE
CAUSE

U76

Noise while operating A/C system.
• Noise from magnetic clutch, A/C compressor, hose or refrigerant line.
• Magnetic clutch operation noise (Step 4)
• A/C compressor vane noise (Steps 513)
• A/C compressor slippage noise (Steps 1417)
• Hose or refrigerant line interference noise (Step 18)

A6E858001038W11

TROUBLESHOOTING
Diagnostic procedure
STEP
INSPECTION
1
CHECK A/C COMPRESSOR VANE NOISE
• Is there a jingling, popping, beeping, or
buzzing sound (A/C compressor vane
noise)?
2
INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR SLIPPAGE
NOISE
• Is there a squeaking or whirling sound (A/C
compressor slippage noise)?
3
INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR
INTERFERENCE NOISE
• Is there a rattling or vibrating sound
(interference noise)?
4
INSPECT MAGNETIC CLUTCH OPERATION
NOISE
• Is there a clicking sound (magnetic clutch
operation noise)?

ACTION
Yes
No

Go to Step 5.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 14.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to Step 18.
Go to next step.

Yes

Adjust clearance between pressure plate of magnetic clutch
and A/C compressor pulley, then go to Step 19.
(See U38 MAGNETIC CLUTCH ADJUSTMENT)
Condition is normal. (Recheck malfunction symptoms.)
Go to next step.
Condition is normal. (Noise occurs for 23 seconds
immediately after A/C compressor turns on.)
Go to next step.
Follow the repair instruction described in section F, then go
to Step 19.

No
Yes
No

INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR NOISE TIME
• Is noise heard continuously for more than 3
seconds after A/C compressor comes on?

INSPECT IDLE SPEED
• Inspect idle speed.
(See F8 IDLE SPEED INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
INSPECT REFRIGERANT AMOUNT
• Inspect refrigerant amount.
• Is it okay?
INSPECT REFRIGERANT LINES
• Inspect refrigerant lines.
Is piping free of damage and cracks?
Are piping connections free of oil grime?
(Visual inspection)
Are piping connections free of gas
leakage?
Are piping installation points on
condenser free of gas leakage?
Are piping installation points on receiver/
drier free of gas leakage?
Are piping installation points on A/C
compressor free of gas leakage?
Are piping installation points on A/C unit
free of gas leakage
Perform gas leak inspection using gas
leak tester.
• Are above items okay?
INSPECT EVAPORATOR PIPING
CONNECTIONS IN A/C UNIT FOR GAS
LEAKAGE
• Are piping connections for evaporator in A/C
unit free of gas leakage?

Yes
No

CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN COMPRESSOR OIL OR ELSEWHERE
• Add 20 ml {20 cc, 0.8 fl oz} of compressor
oil.
• Is noise heard when racing engine?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C COMPRESSOR OR ELSEWHERE
• Drain compressor oil.
• Is it contaminated with metal particles?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS SOMEWHERE IN A/C SYSTEM OR
ELSEWHERE
• Is compressor oil whitish and mixed with
water?

Yes
No

7
8

Yes
No

Go to Step 10.
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
If piping or A/C component(s) is damaged or cracked,
replace then go to Step 19.
If there is gas leakage, repair or replace connection and
replace condenser*, then go to Step 19.

Yes
No

Adjust refrigerant amount to specified level, then go to Step
19.
If piping is damaged or cracked, replace then go to Step 19.
If there is gas leakage, repair or replace connection and
replace condenser*, then go to Step 19.
Go to next step.
Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repair to customer.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Replace A/C compressor, then go to Step 19.

Yes

Replace entire A/C system (excluding heater), then go to
Step 19.
Go to next step.

U77

TROUBLESHOOTING
STEP
INSPECTION
13
INSPECT A/C COMPRESSOR OIL
• Is compressor oil darker than normal and
contaminated with aluminum chips?

CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C COMPRESSOR OR ELSEWHERE
• Is noise heard immediately after A/C
compressor is stopped?
INSPECT DRIVE BELT
• Inspect drive belt.
(See B3 DRIVE BELT INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
INSPECT DRIVE BELT CONDITION
• Is drive belt worn?
• Does it have foreign material imbedded in it,
or have oil on it?
INSPECT MAGNETIC CLUTCH
• Inspect magnetic clutch.
(See U38 MAGNETIC CLUTCH
INSPECTION)
• Is it okay?
CHECK TO SEE WHETHER MALFUNCTION
IS IN A/C COMPRESSOR OR REFRIGERANT
LINES
• Is noise emitted from A/C compressor?
VERIFY THAT MALFUNCTION SYMPTOM
OCCURS AFTER REPAIR
• Has A/C compressor noise stopped?

ACTION
Replace A/C compressor and condenser, then go to Step
19. (Since A/C compressor may be worn and receiver/drier
may be clogged, replacement of receiver/drier is
necessary.)
Condition is normal. Recheck malfunction symptoms.
Replace A/C compressor, then go to Step 19. (A/C
compressor discharge valve left open)
Go to next step.

Yes
No

Go to next step.
Adjust or replace drive belt, then go to Step 19.

Yes

Remove obstruction, remove oil, or replace drive belt, then
go to Step 19.
Go to next step.

Yes

No
Yes

No
Yes
No
Yes
No
Yes
No

Replace A/C compressor (excluding pressure plate, A/C
compressor pulley, and stator), then go to Step 19.
Replace magnetic clutch, then go to Step 19.
Visually inspect A/C compressor, replace appropriate parts
if necessary, then go to next step.
If noise is due to refrigerant lines, repair detached or
missing clips, tighten loose bolts, then go to next step.
Troubleshooting completed.
Explain repairs to customer.
Recheck malfunction symptoms, then repeat from Step 1 if
malfunction recurs.

: If there is gas leakage, air enters into the A/C system. The desiccant within the receiver/drier absorbs the
moisture from the air and becomes saturated. If the A/C system is used in this condition, the inside of the A/C
compressor will begin to rust due to this moisture, which may cause lock up or noise to occur. Therefore,
replacement of the receiver/drier is necessary.

End Of Sie

U78

TECHNICAL DATA

T
D

TECHNICAL DATA ............................................. TD-2
ENGINE ............................................................ TD-2
LUBRICATION SYSTEM .................................. TD-2
COOLING SYSTEM.......................................... TD-3
FUEL AND EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS . TD-3
ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ..................... TD-4
CLUTCH............................................................ TD-5
MANUAL TRANSAXLE..................................... TD-5
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE............................... TD-5
FRONT AND REAR AXLE ................................ TD-6
STEERING SYSTEM ........................................ TD-6
BRAKING SYSTEM .......................................... TD-7
SUSPENSION................................................... TD-8
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ....................... TD-10
HEATER AND
AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMS................... TD-10

TD1

TECHNICAL DATA

TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE

A6E931001001W01

Item

Engine
LF

MECHANICAL
(mm {in} IN
[Engine cold]) EX

valve clearance

0.220.28 {0.00870.0110}
0.270.33 {0.01060.0130}
1,750 {17.8, 253}
1,720 {17.5, 249}
1,430 {14.6, 208}
[300 rpm]
[300 rpm]
[290 rpm]
1,225
1,204
1,000
{12.492, 177.64}
{12.277, 174.58}
{10.197, 145.00}
[300 rpm]
[300 rpm]
[290 rpm]

Standard
(kPa {kgf/cm2, Minimum
psi})

Compression pressure

Maximum
difference
between cylinders
Standard
(mm {in})
Minimum

Cylinder head bolt length

Pushing distance of the front oil seal

196.1{2.0, 28}
149.0150.0 {5.865.90}
150.5 {5.92}
00.5 {00.02}
(from the edge of the engine front cover)

(mm {in})

End Of Sie

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

A6E931001001W02

Note
• The maintenance intervals on scheduled maintenance table (See GI33 SCHEDULED MAINTENANCE
TABLE) can only be supported by the use of following oils.
Item

Oil pressure

kPa {kgf/cm2, psi} [rpm]

Oil capacity

Oil replacement
(L {US qt, Imp qt})
Oil and oil filter replacement
(L {US qt, Imp qt})
Total (dry engine)
(L {US qt, Imp qt})

Engine
LF

234521
{2.395.31, 33.971}
[3,000]

L3
395649
{4.036.61,
57.394.1}
[3,000]

3.9 {4.0, 3.4}

3.1 {3.3, 2.7}

4.3 {4.5, 3.8}

3.5 {3.7, 3.1}

4.6 {4.8, 4.0}

4.2 {4.4, 3.6}

Recommended engine oil
Item
Grade

Engine oil

Viscosity (SAE)

Remarks

End Of Sie

TD2

Market
European countries
API SJ
ACEA A1 or A3

API SL
ILSAC GF-3

5W-30

5W-20

Mazda genuine
DEXELIA oil

Except European
countries
API SG, SH, SJ, SL
ILSAC GF-2, GF-3
40, 30, 20,
20W-20, 10W-30,
10W-40, 10W-50,
20W-40, 15W-40,
20W-50, 15W-50,
5W-20, 5W-30

TECHNICAL DATA
COOLING SYSTEM

A6E931001001W03

Item

Engine
LF
7.5 {7.9, 6.6}

Coolant capacity
(L {US qt, Imp qt})
Cap
valve
opening pressure
Radiator
cap
(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})
Type
Initial-opening
temperature
Thermostat Full-opening
temperature
Full-open lift

113142 {1.151.44, 16.420.6}
Wax, bottom-bypass

(°C
{°F})
(°C
{°F})

8084 {176183}
90{194}
8.0{0.32} min.

(mm {in})

Type

Cooling fan

Blade

Cooling fan No.1: 5,
Cooling fan No.2: 7

Number

Outer
diameter

(mm
{in})

Electrical
(Except for
(For Israel)
Israel)
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
No.1:7
No.1:5
Cooling fan
Cooling fan
No.2: 5
No.2: 7

Cooling fan No.1: 7,
Cooling fan No.2: 5

300 {11.8}

320 {12.6}

End Of Sie

FUEL AND EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
Item
Idle speed

(rpm)
(BTDC°/
rpm)

Ignition timing
E/L ON

Idle-up speed

A/C ON

refrigerant
pressure
switch
(middle)
OFF
refrigerant
pressure
switch
(middle) ON

P/S ON
CO concentration
HC concentration
Fuel pressure
(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi}
Fuel injector

A6E931001001W04

Engine
L8
650750
(700±50)

LF (ATX)
650750
(700±50)

LF (MTX)
600700
(650±50)

L3
600700
(650±50)

Approx. 10/700

Approx. 10/650

650750
(700±50)

700800
(750±50)

650750
(700±50)

700800
(750±50)

650750
(700±50)

700800
(750±50)
700800
(750±50)

650750
(700±50)

Within the regulation
Hold pressure

More than 408
{4.2, 59}

Fuel leakage
(drop/2 minutes)
Injection volume
5177 {5177,
1.82.7}
(ml {cc, fl oz}/15 sec.)
Resistance
11.412.6
(ohm) [20°C {68°F}]

More than 408
{4.2, 59}

Less than 1
6484 {6484,
2.33.0}

6484 {6484,
2.33.0}

7396 {7396,
2.63.3}

11.412.6

End Of Sie

TD3

TECHNICAL DATA
ENGINE ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

A6E931001001W05

Item

Engine
LF
1.271.29

Electrolyte gravity
Back-up current*1
Market

(mA)
European spec.

Battery

Test load
chart
(A)
Slow charge
(A)
Quick charge
(A/30 min)

Standard
voltage

(V)

Generator
Generated
current* 2
(Reference)

Ignition coil

High-tension
lead
Spark plug
Starter

Resistance
[20 °C {68 °F}]

46B24LS

46B24LS (36)
50D20L (48)
Battery type
75D26L (52)
80D26L (55)
46B24LS (36)
50D20L (48)
Battery type
(5-hour rate) 75D26L (52)
80D26L (55)
46B24LS (36)
50D20L (48)
Battery type
(5-hour rate) 75D26L (52)
80D26L (55)
B
Ignition switch
Terminal
P
ON
D
B
Idle
P
[20 °C
Terminal
{68 °F}]
D
Engine speed
(rpm)

(A)
Primary coil
Secondary coil

Max. 20
50D20L, 75D26L

GCC spec.

46B24LS,
75D26L*4
135
150
195
195
3.54.5
4.05.0
5.06.0
5.56.5
25
25
35
35
B+
Below approx. 1
Approx. 0
1315
Approx. 38

1000

*3
080

2000

090

(ohm)

(kilohm)
Insulation resistance of case
(megohm)
No.1 lead
Resistance
No.2 lead
No.3 lead
(kilohm) No.4 lead
Type
NGK
Voltage
(V)
No load test
Current
(A)

50D20L,
80D26L
46B24LS

0.490.57
9.511.1
Above 10

9.8422.96

ITR6F13
11
Below 90

*1 : Back-up current is the constant flow of current present (for the audio unit, clock, PCM, etc.) when the ignition
switch is off and with the ignition key removed.
*2 : Must not be 0 A.
*3 : Turn the following electrical loads on and verify that the voltage reading increases.
Headlights, blower motor, and rear window defroster
*4 : Intensely hot area

End Of Sie

TD4

TECHNICAL DATA
CLUTCH

A6E931001024W01

Item
Height (with carpet)

Clutch pedal

Free play

Disengagement
point

Clutch cover

Clutch disc
Flywheel

mm {in}
mm {in}

Specification
L.H.D.: 226222 {8.508.74}
R.H.D.: 229235 {9.029.25}
1.03.0 {0.040.11}
0.10.5 {0.0040.02}
(Reference value)
20 {0.79}
(Reference value)
130.7 {5.15}
(Reference value)
0.6 {0.024}
0.6 {0.024}

mm {in}

0.5 {0.020}

mm {in}
mm {in}
mm {in}

0.3 {0.012}
0.7 {0.028}
0.1 {0.004}

mm {in}

Pedal free play
Push rod free play at
clutch pedal

mm {in}

Disengagement stroke

mm {in}

Pedal stroke

mm {in}

Depth
Misalignment
Maximum clearance of flatness of the
pressure plate
Minimum thickness
Run out limit
Run out limit
Diaphragm
spring fingers

End Of Sie

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

A6E931001024W02

Item
Manual transaxle type
Grade
Transaxle oil

All-season
Above 10 °C {50 °F}

Viscosity
Capacity

(L {US qt, lmp qt})

Specification
G35M-R
API service GL-4 or GL-5
SAE 75W-90
SAE 80W-90
2.87 {3.03, 2.53}

End Of Sie

AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

A6E931001024W03

Item
Transaxle type
ATF

Idle
Stall
Idle

Specification
FN4A-EL
ATF M-V
330470 {3.44.8, 4868}
1,1601,320 {11.812.5, 168191}
490710 {5.07.2, 71102}

Stall

1,6001,820 {16.318.6, 232264}

Type
D, S, L range

Line pressure
(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})

R position

Engine stall speed

(rpm)

Time lag

(s)

Transaxle range
(TR) switch

(ohm)

Transaxle Fluid temperature
(TFT) sensor
(kilohm)

D, S, L range
R position
N→D
N→R
P position
R position
N position
D range
S range
L range
ATF temperature: 20 °C {4 °F}
ATF temperature: 0 °C {32 °F}
ATF temperature: 20 °C {68 °F}
ATF temperature: 40 °C {104 °F}
ATF temperature: 60 °C {140 °F}
ATF temperature: 80 °C {176 °F}
ATF temperature: 100 °C {212 °F}
ATF temperature: 120 °C {248 °F}
ATF temperature: 130 °C {266 °F}

2,0002,600
2,0002,600
0.40.7
0.40.7
4,0854,515
1,4251,575
713788
371410
190210
8796
236324
84.3110
33.542.0
14.717.9
7.088.17
3.614.15
1.962.24
1.131.28
0.870.98

TD5

TECHNICAL DATA
Item
Input/turbine speed sensor
ATF temperature: 40160 °C {40
(ohm)
320 °F}
Vehicle speedometer sensor (VSS)
(V)
Shift solenoid A
Shift solenoid B
ATF
Shift solenoid C
temperature:
Solenoid valve
(ohm)
40150 °C
Shift solenoid D
{40302 °F}
Shift solenoid E
Pressure control

Specification
250600
4.55.5
1.04.2
1.04.2
1.04.2
10.926.2
10.926.2
2.47.3

End Of Sie

FRONT AND REAR AXLE

A6E931001018W01

Specification

Item
FRONT AXLE
Maximum wheel bearing play
REAR AXLE
Maximum wheel bearing play
DRIVE SHAFT
Shaft length (Air in
boot at atmospheric
pressure)

(mm {in})

ATX

MTX

(mm {in})

0.05 {0.002}

(mm {in})

0.05 {0.002}

Left side

674.5684.5 {26.5626.94}

Right side

631.2641.2 {24.8625.24}

677.7687.7 {26.6727.07} (L8, LF),
676.6686.6 {26.6427.03} (L3)
628.6638.6 {24.7525.14}

End Of Sie

STEERING SYSTEM

A6E931001034W01

Item
ENGINE SPEED SENSING POWER STEERING
Play
(mm {in})
Steering wheel
Effort
(N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf})
Steering shaft
Length
(mm {in})
Rotation torque
(N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf})
Tie-rod end
[Pull scale reading]
(N {kgf, lbf})
Swinging torque (N·m {kgf·cm, in·lbf})
Tie rod
[Pull scale reading]
(N {kgf, lbf})
Steering gear
Large diameter
Runout
portion
Steering
rack
(mm {in}) Small diameter
portion
Power steering oil
pump

TD6

0.15 mm {0.006 in} max.
0.20 mm {0.008 in} max.

(MPa {kgf·cm2, psi})

10.8011.29 {110.2115.2, 15671637}

Gear housing fluid pressure

(MPa {kgf·cm2, psi})

10.8011.29 {110.2115.2, 15671637}

Fluid

Capacity*
(Approximate
quantity)

: When reservoir tank is at maximum volume

End Of Sie

030 {01.18}
7.8 {80, 58} max.
211.6 {8.3}
0.42.7 {3.527.5, 3.123.8}
3.425.5 {0.352.60, 0.85.7}
0.14.0 {140.7, 0.935.3}
0.624.5 {0.062.49 0.25.5}

Oil pump fluid pressure

ATF M-III or equivalent (e.g. Dexron®II)

Type
Power steering
system

Specification

(L {US qt, Imp qt})

0.80 {0.85, 0.70} (MTX)
0.87 {0.92, 0.77} (ATX)

TECHNICAL DATA
BRAKING SYSTEM

A6E931001020W01

Item
CONVENTIONAL BRAKE SYSTEM
Brake pedal height
Brake pedal

Power brake
unit

Specification
(mm {in})

Brake pedal play
(mm {in})
Pedal-to-floor clearance
(Brake pedal when
(mm {in})
depressed at 588 N {60 kgf,
132 lbf})
Fluid pressure when pedal
At 0 kPa {0
depressed at
mmHg, 0 inHg}
200 N {20 kgf, 44 lbf}
(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi}) At 66.7 kPa
{500 mmHg,
19.7 inHg}

(kPa {kgf/cm2,
Switching point
Dual
psi})
proportioning Rear wheel pressure when master cylinder
valve (without
pressure is 5,880 kPa {60 kgf/cm2, 853 psi}
ABS)
(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})
Minimum disc pad
(mm {in})
thickness
Front disc
Minimum disc plate
brake
(mm {in})
thickness
Disc plate runout limit
(mm {in})
Minimum disc pad
(mm {in})
thickness
Rear disc
Minimum disc plate
brake
(mm {in})
thickness
Disc plate runout limit
(mm {in})
Brake fluid

Type

PARKING BRAKE SYSTEM
Parking brake Lever stroke when pulled at
lever
98 N {10 kgf, 22 lbf}

(notches)

R.H.D.: 172 {6.77}
L.H.D.: 187 {7.36}
0 3 {00.1}
68 {2.7} min.

590 {6.02, 85.6} min.
8,780 {89.53, 1,273} min.
2,450 {25, 355} ±200 {2, 29}
3,480 {35.5, 505} ±300 {3, 44}
2.0 {0.079}
22 {0.87}
0.05 {0.002}
2.0 {0.079}
8 {0.31}
0.05 {0.002}
European (L.H.D. U.K.) specs.: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT3
OR DOT4
GCC specs.: SAE J1703, FMVSS 116 DOT3
36

End Of Sie

TD7

TECHNICAL DATA
SUSPENSION

A6E931001013W01

Suspension
Item
Maximum steering
angle
Total toe-in
Front wheel
alignment
(Unloaded)*1

Caster angle*2
(Reference value)
Camber angle*2
(Reference value)

Inner
Outer
(mm {in})
(degree)
normal
height up*3
normal

height up*3
Steering axis inclination normal
(Reference value)
height up*3
(mm {in})
Total toe-in
(degree)
Rear wheel
normal
alignment
Camber angle*2
(Unloaded)*1
height up*3
Thrust angle
Front upper arm
Ball joint rotation
(N·m {kgf·cm,
Front lower arm (front)
torque
in·lbf})
Front lower arm (rear)
Front and rear stabilizer control link rotation
(N·m {kgf·cm,
torque
in·lbf})
*1

Specification
39°±3°
31°±3°
Tire: 2±4 {0.08±0.16}, Rim inner: 1±3 {0.04±0.12}
0°11′±0°22′
3°47′±1°
3°42′±1°
−0°17′±1°
−0°10′±1°
5°28′
5°18′
Tire: 2±4 {0.08±0.16}, Rim inner: 1±3 {0.04±0.12}
0°11′±0°22′
−1°13′±1°
−1°05′±1°
0°±0°48′
1.5 (15.0, 13.2) max.
1.182.23 (12.122.7, 10.519.7)
1.002.22 (10.222.6, 8.8619.6)
0.230.47 (2.44.7, 2.14.1)

: Fuel tank full. Engine coolant and engine oil are at specified level. Spare tire, jack, and tools are in designated
position. Adjust to the median when carrying out wheel alignment.
*2 : Difference between left and right must not exceed 1° 30′.
*3 : Distance between wheel center and fender brim is following. Front: 402 mm {15.8 in} (reference value) Rear:
392 mm {15.4 in} (reference value)

TD8

TECHNICAL DATA
Wheel and Tires
Item
Standard tire and wheel
Size
Offset
Wheel
Pitch circle diameter
Material
Size

Specification

(mm {in})
(mm {in})

15 × 6JJ
50 {1.97}
Steel
195/65R15 91V

Up to 4 persons
Full load
Air pressure
(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})
Up to 4 persons
Rear
Full load
Remaining tread
(mm {in})
Wheel and tire runout
Radial direction
(mm {in}) Lateral direction

2.5 {0.10} max.

Wheel imbalance

Knock-type*2:

Front

Tire

Wheel and
tire

Temporary spare tire
Size
Offset
Wheel
Pitch circle diameter
Material
Size
Tire
Air pressure
Wheel and
tire

(g {oz})

(mm {in})
(mm {in})

(kPa {kgf/cm2, psi})
Wheel and tire runout
Radial direction
(mm {in}) Lateral direction

300 {3.1, 44}

9 {0.32} max.

16 × 7JJ

17 × 7JJ
55 {2.17}

114.3 {4.50}
Aluminum alloy
205/55R16 91V
215/45R17 87W
220 {2.2, 32}
240 {2.4, 35}
220 {2.2, 32}
270 {2.8, 39}
1.6 {0.06}
1.5 {0.06} max.
2.0 {0.08} max.
Adhesive-type*1:
13 {0.46} max.
Knock-type*2:
8 {0.28} max.

Adhesive-type*1:
11 {0.39} max.
Knock-type*2:
7 {0.25} max.

15×4T
40 {1.57}
114.3 {4.50}
Steel
T115/70 D15
420 {4.2, 60}
2.0 {0.08} max.
2.5 {0.10} max.

*1 : Total weight exceeds 160 g {5.65 oz}.
*2 : One balance weight: 60 g {2.12 oz} max. If the total weight exceeds 100 g {3.53 oz} on one side, rebalance
after moving the tire around on the rim. Do not use 3 or more balance weights.

End Of Sie

TD9

TECHNICAL DATA
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM

A6E931001047W01

Item
Low beam

Headlight

Halogen type
Discharge type

High beam

Exterior light bulb capacity

(W)

Parking light
Front fog light
Front turn light
Front side turn light
Brake light/taillight
Rear turn light
Back-up light
Rear fog light
License plate light
High-mount brake
light

4SD

In-vehicle-type
Rear spoiler
type

Specifications
55 × 2
35 × 2
55 × 2
5×2
55 × 2
21 × 2
5×2
21/5 × 2
21 × 2
18.4 × 2
21 × 1
5×2
18.4 × 1
4×1

5HB

Interior light bulb capacity

(W)

21 × 1
5×2
5×2
5×1
5×1
5×2
1.4 × 1
1.4 × 1
1.7 × 1

Front map light
Rear map light
Trunk compartment light
Cargo compartment light
Courtesy light
Ignition key illumination
Ashtray illumination
Glove compartment light

End Of Sie

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMS

A6E931001038W01

Item

Specification

REFRIGERANT SYSTEM
Refrigerant

Type
Regular amount L.H.D.
(g {oz}) R.H.D.

R134a
470 {16.6}
430 {15.2}

BASIC SYSTEM
A/C compressor

Lubricating oil

CONTROL SYSTEM
Magnetic clutch

Clearance

End Of Sie

TD10

Type
Sealed volume
(ml {cc, fl oz})
(mm {in})

ATMOS GU10
120 {120, 4.06}
0.30.5 {0.0120.019}

SPECIAL TOOLS

S
T

SPECIAL TOOLS .................................................ST-2
ENGINE .............................................................ST-2
LUBRICATION SYSTEM ...................................ST-2
COOLING SYSTEM...........................................ST-2
FUEL AND EMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS ..ST-3
CLUTCH.............................................................ST-3
MANUAL TRANSAXLE......................................ST-3
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE................................ST-4
FRONT AND REAR AXLE .................................ST-4
STEERING SYSTEM .........................................ST-6
BRAKING SYSTEM ...........................................ST-7
SUSPENSION....................................................ST-8
BODY .................................................................ST-8
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM ..........................ST-9
HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMS.ST-9

ST1

SPECIAL TOOLS

SPECIAL TOOLS
ENGINE

A6E941001001W01

Ford SST numbers are collated with Mazda SST numbers in the example below.
Ford SSTs are marked with Ford SST number.
Example
1:49 JE01 061
2:303-507
Peg

1: Mazda SST number
2: Ford SST number
49 L017 5A0

49 G017 5A0

Support hanger
set

Engine support
set

1:49 JE01 061
2:303507

1:49 UN20 5072
2:205072

Peg

Holder

1:49 D032 316
2:

1:49 JE01 054
(Europe)
49 UN30 3376
(Except Europe)
2: 303376

Protractor

1:49 G032 354
2:
Adjusting
wrench

1:49 UN20
507202
2:20507202
Adapter

1:49 H010 401
2:
Oil seal installer

Plate

End Of Sie

LUBRICATION SYSTEM

A6E941001001W02

49 0187 280A

49 E019 001

49 G032 354

Oil pressure
gauge

Adapter

Adjusting
wrench

End Of Sie

COOLING SYSTEM

A6E941001001W03

WDS

ST2

SPECIAL TOOLS
End OfAND
SieEMISSION CONTROL SYSTEMS
FUEL

A6E941001001W04

49 B019 901B

49 N013 101A

49 N013 102A

Oil Pressure
Gauge

Body

Adapter Hose

49 L018 001

49 T042 001

WDS

O2 sensor
wrench

Union wrench

End Of Sie
CLUTCH

A6E941001024W01

49 0259 770B

49 SE01 310A

49 E011 1A0

Flare Nut
Wrench

Clutch Disc
Centering Tool

Ring Gear
Brake Set

End Of Sie

MANUAL TRANSAXLE

A6E941001024W02

49 G030 795

49 E017 5A0

Oil Seal Installer

Engine Support
Set

ST
End Of Sie

ST3

SPECIAL TOOLS
AUTOMATIC TRANSAXLE

A6E941001024W03

49 H019 002

49 0378 400C

49 B019 901B

Adapter

Oil Pressure
Gauge Set

Oil Pressure
Gauge

49 G030 795
Oil Seal Installer

49 E017 5A0
WDS

Engine Support
Set

49 E011 1A0
Ring Gear
Brake Set

End Of Sie

FRONT AND REAR AXLE

A6E941001018W01

49 0259 770B

49 T028 3A0

49 G030 455

Flare Nut
Wrench

Ball joint puller
set

Diff. side gear
holder

49 G033 105

49 F026 103

49 G033 102

Attachment

Wheel hub
puller

Handle

49 G033 106

49 S033 101

49 F027 009

Attachment φ 80

Dust cover
installer

Attachment
φ 68 & 77

49 F027 004

49 F027 003

49 B025 006A

Attachment
ø 80

Handle

Sensor rotor
installer

ST4

SPECIAL TOOLS
49 G026 105

49 H027 002

49 W034 301

Sensor rotor
installer

Bearing
remover

Support block

49 S231 626

49 B014 001

49 B025 004

Support block

Oil seal installer

Dust seal
installer

49 F027 005

49 W027 003

49 T025 001

Attachment ø62

Bearing installer

Boot clamp
crimper

End Of Sie

ST5

SPECIAL TOOLS
STEERING SYSTEM

A6E941001034W01

49 1232 670B

49 H002 671

49 G032 3A4

Power steering
gauge set

Adapter

Power steering
gauge adapter
set

49 T028 3A0

49 B032 320

49 B032 317

Ball joint puller
set

Wrench

Bearing and oil
seal remover

49 F032 303

49 B032 323

49 N032 319A

Handle

Rod seal
remover body

Support plate

49 B032 326

49 T028 301

49 B032 324

Outer box
protector

Support plate

Rod seal
protector body

49 B032 325

49 B032 331

49 B001 797

Rod seal guide

Oil seal installer

Handle

49 N032 320

49 E032 305

49 E032 306

Bearing installer

Slipper seal
protector

Slipper seal
former

49 D032 316

49 0180 510B

49 G032 3A1

Protractor

Preload
measuring
attachment

Joint host set

49 F032 301

49 F032 3A2

Power steering
pump hanger

Installer set

ST6

SPECIAL TOOLS
End Of SieSYSTEM
BRAKING

A6E941001020W01

49 0259 770B

49 G066 001

49 U043 0A0A

Flare nut
wrench

Adapter
harness

Oil pressure
gauge set

49 C066 001

49 0221 600C

49 FA18 602

Adapter
harness

Disc brake
expand tool

Disc brake
piston wrench

49 G043 001

49 E043 003A

49 B043 004

Adjust gauge

Turning lock
tool

Socket wrench

49 0208 701A

WDS

Boot air out tool

End Of Sie
ST

ST7

SPECIAL TOOLS
SUSPENSION

A6E941001013W01

49 T034 1A0

49 T034 101

49 T034 105

Coil spring
compressor set

Coil spring
compressor

Attachment

49 0107 680A

49 T028 3A0

49 T034 202A

Engine stand

Ball joint puller
set

Guide

49 B034 216

49 S120 620

49 T034 203

Installer

Bearing installer

Attachment

49 G030 797

49 U034 204

49 U027 005

Handle

Dust boot
installer

Bearing installer

49 G026 103

49 E017 5A0

49 G033 102

Support block

Engine support
set

Handle

49 G033 106

49 W034 308

49 8038 785A

Attachment

Puller and
installer

Dust boot
installer

End Of Sie
BODY

A6E941001047W01

49 0305 870A

49 G050 1A0

Window tool set

Sealant
remover

End Of Sie

ST8

SPECIAL TOOLS
BODY ELECTRICAL SYSTEM
49 H066 002
Deployment tool

49 L066 002
Adapter
harness

A6E941001047W02

49 D066 002
Adapter
harness

49 G066 003
Adapter
harness

49 N088 0A0
Fuel and
Thermometer
checker

WDS

End Of Sie

HEATER AND AIR CONDITIONER SYSTEMS

A6E941001038W01

49 C061 0A0B

49 C061 012

49 C061 013

Gas Charge Set

Anti-Back Flow
Valve

Gas Leak
Tester

49 G061 001
Spring lock
coupling
disconnect tool

End Of Sie

ST9

Source Exif Data:

File Type                       : PDF
File Type Extension             : pdf
MIME Type                       : application/pdf
PDF Version                     : 1.3
Linearized                      : No
Create Date                     : 2002:05:28 09:02:17
Producer                        : Acrobat Distiller 4.05 for Windows
Author                          : 
Title                           : 
Creator                         : FrameMaker+SGML 5.5.6p145J
Modify Date                     : 2002:06:11 09:39:19+02:00
Page Count                      : 1187
Page Mode                       : UseOutlines

EXIF Metadata provided by EXIF.tools

Workshop_Manual Workshop Manual

Navigation menu

Versions of this User Manual:

Views

Navigation